JP7444466B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Regarding gaming machines, for example, Patent Document 1 describes that effects are performed using effect images.

JP2016-097096A

However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for further improvement in the performance in terms of improving interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) includes a first control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (for example, production control board 130) that controls the performance, A light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a top lamp 10b, a board lamp 74b, a movable member lamp 74c, a button lamp 17c), and the first control means acquires determination information when a starting condition is established, and It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game according to the information, and the second control means is capable of controlling a performance mode, and changes the performance symbols and then stops them according to the result of the determination. A variable effect can be executed, an information display (for example, the pending image 702) can be displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, a completed display mode), and when the start condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable effect, the above-mentioned Before displaying the information display in a predetermined display mode, a display effect (for example, a display displaying a pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode) can be executed, and when the start condition is satisfied, a specific sound is generated. The information display includes a first information display (for example, a pending image 702 in a normal display mode) and a display indicating that the special game is to be executed rather than the first information display. There is a second information display that is highly expected to be displayed (for example, a pending image 702 in an expected color display mode), and the display effect includes a first display that can be executed when the first information display is displayed. A second display effect that can be executed when the second information display is displayed (for example, a second information display in an incomplete display mode) When the first information display is displayed in response to the establishment of the starting condition in a specific performance mode in which the variable performance is not executed (for example, a customer waiting state), the first information display is It is possible to make the display effect difficult to see or limit (for example, make the pending image 702 of a specific unfinished display mode difficult to see or impossible to see), and the specific sound effect includes the starting condition. A first specific sound production that is executable when displaying the first information display in response to the establishment of the first information display (for example, outputting a winning sound accompanied by the display of the first information display); There is a second specific sound production that can be executed when displaying a second information display (for example, output of a winning sound accompanied by display of a second information display), and the start condition is met during execution of the variable production. When displaying the second information display in accordance with 2. The execution time of the specific sound production is longer .

In addition, the above-mentioned numerals in this column are added as examples when explaining the present invention, and the present invention is not limited or reduced by these numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

It is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of a gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining details of a base display. FIG. 3 is a functional block diagram of an image control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a hit determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an example of a table scenario. FIG. 7 is another diagram for explaining an example of a table scenario. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for each period. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for each period. It is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for a time-saving gaming state. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a deferral notification image and a remaining number of times image. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining display periods of a deferral notification image and a remaining number of times image. It is a figure for explaining the specific example of each screen at the time of the start of the 2nd time-saving game state. It is a figure for explaining the specific example of each screen in a time-saving game state. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a display period of a start image. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of the start time image. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the details of the update timing of the number of the remaining number of times image. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of each screen when a power outage occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining another specific example of each screen when a power outage occurs. It is a diagram for explaining a configuration for notifying an activated period. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a display period of a left-handed image. It is a diagram for explaining a configuration for notifying that it is possible to shift to a second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. It is a flowchart of main processing by main CPU. 2 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of input control processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart of the 1st starting port detection switch input process by main CPU. It is a flowchart of preliminary determination processing by the main CPU. It is a flow chart of special figure special electric control processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart of special symbol storage determination processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of special symbol stop processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of migration determination processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart of general map general electricity processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart of main processing by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart of command analysis processing 1 by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart of command analysis processing 2 by the sub CPU. It is a flow chart of production input control processing by a sub CPU. It is a flowchart of main processing by a host CPU. 3 is a flowchart of interrupt processing by a host CPU. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation production pattern decision table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of an end effect in the second embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the specific example of the execution time of the end effect in 2nd embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a hit determination table in the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol decision table in a 3rd embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time saving gaming state in a third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern decision table for time-saving game states in a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a preliminary judgment table in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart of preliminary determination processing by a main CPU in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol stop processing by the main CPU in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart of the migration determination process etc. by the main CPU in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a mock diagram of each screen in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a restriction period in the third embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a figure for explaining other specific examples of the fluctuation time of the pattern display device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the time-saving game states in the third embodiment overlap. It is a figure for explaining the specific example when the time-saving game state in 3rd Embodiment ends. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of each image displayed in the time-saving game state in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a right-handed hitting start image and a left-handed hitting start image in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a result image in a third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a counting period in a third embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the 1st information and the 2nd information in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a display period of a start image in a modified example. FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of various storage areas of main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing initial setting processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific area detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot determination processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for special time saving. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. It is a diagram showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a control data determination table. It is a diagram showing jackpot game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing small winning game processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game end processing on the main control board. It is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table. It is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game. It is a diagram showing a game state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game. It is a mode flow showing the transition of game modes. It is a figure which shows the general map general electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the various determination tables used in general electric power supply control processing. It is a figure which shows the external information data creation process in a main control board. It is a diagram for explaining various signals output as game information. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing display information on an information display in each game section. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated after a setting change. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of a 1st modification. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in the main control board of a 1st modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of a 2nd modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clearing. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of a 3rd modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of a 4th modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clearing. It is a timing chart when a normal time saving gaming state occurs. It is a timing chart when the normal time saving game state ends. It is a timing chart from before the start to after the end of the special time saving game state. It is a diagram showing main processing of the production control section. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the production control section. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing of a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a flowchart showing a winning light emission effect determination process of the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of a prize winning. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-read continuous performance determination process of a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table. It is a figure showing the fluctuating performance pattern judgment processing in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for time saving final variation. It is a flowchart showing special time-saving type performance processing of the performance control section. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a look-ahead performance is executed during a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a variable performance is performed after transitioning to rush battle mode. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a jackpot is achieved in the variable performance in the final round of the rush battle mode. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when the normal time saving game state ends. It is a figure showing example 1 of performance when a small hit is made by holding the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a diagram showing an example 2 of performance in the case of a small hit with the remaining second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a small winning game is executed in super wild dance mode. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of the small winning game in the wild dance mode. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a special time-saving type performance is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when it becomes a customer waiting state when it moves to a special time-saving game state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transition to a special time-saving gaming state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a countdown mode is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of an effect when a countdown mode is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable performance is executed after transition to a special time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a special time-saving game state ends. It is a figure showing an example of a game state setting table in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process of the main control board in 6th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a figure which shows the staged display performance by a pending image. It is a figure which shows the staged display performance by a pending image. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a figure which shows the staged display performance by a pending image. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a figure which shows the staged display performance by a pending image. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a figure which shows the staged display performance by a pending image. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a figure which shows the staged display performance by a pending image. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a figure which shows the staged display performance by a pending image. It is an explanatory diagram of each performance in variable performance example 9. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is an explanatory diagram of each performance in example 10 of variable performances. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a figure which shows the staged display performance by a pending image. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is an explanatory diagram of each performance in example 14 of variable performance. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section. It is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control section.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, the present invention will be explained in detail with reference to embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Configuration of gaming machine>
FIG. 1 is a front view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a front view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram of a gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 and an inner frame 3. The outer frame 2 is attached to the island structure of the game hall, and the inner frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. Further, a glass frame 4 is attached to the inner frame 3. Furthermore, a game board 10 having a board surface onto which game balls are launched is attached to the inner frame 3.

As shown in FIG. 1, a window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game area 10a in which a game ball can move (flow down) is formed between the board surface of the game board 10 described above and the transparent plate 4b on the front side thereof. The transparent plate 4b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4.

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 5 at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the gaming machine), and is connected to the outer frame 2 through the hinge mechanism 5 at the other end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the gaming machine). The right side when facing the gaming machine can be rotated in the direction of opening the outer frame 2. Specifically, the glass frame 4 covers the game board 10 together with the glass plate 4b, and opens the inner part of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10 by rotating like a door about the hinge mechanism part 5 as a fulcrum. can.

A locking mechanism for fixing the other end of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided at the other end of the glass frame 4 (for example, on the right side when facing the gaming machine). The locking mechanism can be unlocked using a special key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with a door open switch 136 (see FIG. 3) that detects whether the glass frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or not.

A tray unit 7 having a storage tray 6 (an upper tray 6a and a lower tray 6b) for storing game balls is provided at the lower part of the glass frame 4 (lower part of the window 4a). The tray unit 7 also includes a production button 8 that can be pressed and operated by the player, a cross key 40 that allows the player to perform various selection operations, and a button that allows the game balls stored in the lower tray 6b to be transferred to the outside of the gaming machine. An ejection button 9 for ejecting the liquid is provided.

The production button 8 is provided at the center of the dish unit 7, as shown in FIG. The production button 8 of this embodiment is configured to be able to advance and retreat between a normal operating position, a depressed position that is retracted downward from the normal operating position, and a protruding operating position that projects upward from the normal operating position. Ru. In the specific example of FIG. 1, the effect button 8 is shown in the normal operation position.

The production button 8 is configured to be pressable from any position including the normal operation position and the protruding operation position to the press position. Note that, in this specification, the detailed structure of the effect button 8 is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-116168, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As will be described in detail later, an operation validity period is provided during which the operation of the effect button 8 can be accepted (the operation of the effect button 8 becomes valid). The performance button 8 is provided with a performance button detection switch 8a (see FIG. 4), and when the performance button detection switch 8a detects an operation by the player, a predetermined performance is executed.

The cross key 40 includes an upper button, a lower button, a left button, and a right button. Further, the cross key 40 is provided with cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d). The cross key detection switches (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) include an upper button detection switch 40a that detects the operation of the upper button of the cross key 40, a lower button detection switch 40b that detects the operation of the lower button, and an operation of the left button. It includes a left button detection switch 40c that detects the operation of the right button, and a right button detection switch 40d (see FIG. 3) that detects the operation of the right button.

As shown in FIG. 1, an operating handle 11 is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4. The operating handle 11 is provided with a touch sensor 11a (see FIG. 4). When the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11, a touch signal is transmitted to the firing control board 160.

When the firing control board 160 receives a touch signal from the touch sensor 11a, it allows the firing solenoid 12a to be energized. When the rotation angle of the operating handle 11 changes, a gear directly connected to the operating handle 11 rotates, and a knob of the firing volume 11b (see FIG. 3) connected to the gear rotates.

During the period in which the touch signal is received, a voltage corresponding to the detected angle of the firing volume 11b is applied to the firing solenoid 12a (see FIG. 3) provided in the game ball firing mechanism. When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 12a, the firing solenoid 12a operates according to the applied voltage, and the game ball moves toward the gaming area 10a of the game board 10 with a force according to the rotation angle of the operating handle 11. fired.

As shown in FIG. 1, an outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the game board 10 (game area 10a). The above outer rail R1 and inner rail R2 guide the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the upper part of the game area 10a. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10a falls within the game area 10a. A plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 10a, and game balls fall unpredictably.

As shown in FIG. 1, a center member 12 is arranged approximately at the center of the game board 10. The center member 12 is provided with an image display device 31 consisting of a liquid crystal display device or the like, and an effect movable body 32. The effect movable body 32 is movable to a retreat position and an appearance position, and normally stops at the retreat position. The specific example in FIG. 1 shows a case where the effect movable body 32 stops at the retracted position. The effect movable body 32 may overlap the image displayed by the image display device 31 when viewed from the front. Moreover, the effect movable body 32 is configured to include a light emitting body. The effect movable body 32 emits light by the light-emitting body.

As shown in FIG. 1, a first starting port 13 into which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area 10a at the lower center of the center member 12. Further, a second starting port 14 is provided below the first starting port 13. When a game ball enters the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14, the game starts.

The second starting port 14 is provided with an opening/closing door 14b. The opening/closing door 14b is movably controlled to have a first mode in which it is maintained in the closed state and a second mode in which the opening/closing door 14b is in the open state. According to the above-mentioned second starting port 14, in the first aspect, it is difficult for the game ball to win (including cases where it is practically impossible), and in the second aspect, the game ball is easy to win (the first starting port (Easier to win than 13).

In addition, the second starting port 14 (opening/closing door 14b) of this embodiment is configured such that a game ball cannot enter it during the period controlled in the first mode. However, if the game ball enters the ball more easily during the period in which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the first manner than in the period in which it is controlled in the second manner, the period in which the second starting port 14 is controlled in the first manner is A configuration may be adopted in which a game ball can enter the second starting port 14.

The game ball that has won in the first starting hole 13 is detected by the first starting hole detection switch 13a (see FIG. 3). Further, the game ball that has won in the second starting port 14 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 14a (see FIG. 3). When game balls are detected by the first starting port detection switch 13a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out. Similarly, when game balls are detected by the second starting port detection switch 14a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls (prize balls) are paid out.

In addition, in this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 13 and the second starting port 14, three game balls are paid out in common, but the number of paid out balls is different for each starting port. It's okay. For example, the first starting port 13 may dispense three pieces, and the second starting port 14 may dispense one piece.

When the first starting port detection switch 13a or the second starting port detection switch 14a detects a game ball, a lottery for acquiring the right to play a jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot lottery") is executed. The jackpot game of this embodiment includes a long hit game and a short hit game. The long winning game consists of 10 rounds, and in each round, the big prize opening is opened for a time (for example, 30 seconds) during which the game ball can win. However, each round ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the grand prize opening. Moreover, the short winning game consists of two rounds, and in each round, the big prize opening is opened for a time during which the game ball can win. However, each round ends when a predetermined number of game balls enter the grand prize opening. A predetermined time interval is provided between each round. In the small winning game, the big winning opening is opened for a time period (for example, 1.8 seconds) in which the game ball can win.

As shown in FIG. 1, a gate 15 through which a game ball can pass is provided in the game area 10a on the right side of the center member 12. The gate 15 is provided with a gate detection switch 15a (see FIG. 3) that detects the passage of a game ball, and when the gate detection switch 15a detects the passage of a game ball, a lottery of normal symbols, which will be described later, is executed.

In the gaming area 10a on the right side of the center member 12 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right side area"), a first grand prize opening 16 and a second grand prize opening 17 into which game balls can enter are provided. A game ball can enter into the above-mentioned right side area when the operating handle 11 is rotated by a greater angle than a predetermined angle (so-called "right-handed hitting"). On the other hand, when the operating handle 11 is rotated by a smaller angle than the angle concerned (so-called "left-handed hitting"), the game ball does not enter the right side area. That is, a game ball can be won in the first big winning hole 16 and second big winning hole 17 provided in the right side area when playing the game with the right hand, and when playing the game with the left hand. It is configured so that it does not win prizes.

In this embodiment, when playing with left-handed players, the game ball can win in the first starting hole 13, but it is difficult (including cases where it is virtually impossible) to win the game ball in the second starting hole 14. configuration is adopted. In addition, when playing with a right-handed player, the game ball can win in the second starting port 14, but the first starting port 13 has a configuration that makes it difficult (including cases where it is virtually impossible) to win the game ball. be done.

The first big prize opening 16 is normally maintained in a closed state by the opening/closing door 16b, and it is impossible to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the opening/closing door 16b is opened, and the opening/closing door 16b functions as a tray that guides the game ball into the first grand prize opening 16, so that the game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 16. . The first big winning hole 16 is provided with a first big winning hole detection switch 16a, and when the first big winning hole detection switch 16a detects game balls, a preset number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. be done.

The second big prize opening 17 is normally maintained in a closed state by the movable piece 17b, and it is impossible to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the jackpot game, the movable piece 17b operates to open the second big prize opening 17, and the movable piece 17b functions as a guide path for guiding the game ball into the second big winning hole 17, so that the game ball The ball can be entered into the second grand prize opening 17. The second big winning hole 17 is provided with a second big winning hole detection switch 17a, and when the second big winning hole detection switch 17a detects the entry of game balls, a preset number of prizes (for example, 15) are awarded. The ball is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of general winning holes 18 are provided in the gaming area 10a. When a game ball enters each of the general winning holes 18, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out. In addition, at the bottom of the gaming area 10a, the ball did not enter any of the general winning hole 18, the first starting hole 13, the second starting hole 14, the first big winning hole 16, and the second big winning hole 17. An outlet 19 is provided for discharging game balls.

The image display device 31 is controlled by an effect control board 120 (image control board 150), which will be described later, and displays various images. For example, a demonstration moving image is displayed on the image display device 31 during a non-gaming period when no games are played. In addition, the image display device 31 variably displays three performance symbols GA (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) for informing the jackpot lottery result during the game period during which the game is executed. The production pattern GA is displayed scrolling from the top to the bottom of the image display device 31 (fluctuating display), then displayed swinging within the image display device 31 (temporarily stopped), and then stopped by the pattern confirmation command. Is displayed.

In this embodiment, by stopping and displaying a specific combination of performance symbols GA (for example, 777, etc.), it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Further, by stopping and displaying combinations other than the specific performance symbol 38 (for example, 289, etc.), it is announced that the result of the jackpot lottery was a loss.

Note that a fourth symbol is displayed on the image display device 31 in addition to the performance symbol GA. The fourth symbol is an image showing the fluctuating state of the performance symbol GA used to notify the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a display lamp indicating the fluctuation state of the production symbol GA is provided separately and the fourth symbol is not displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pair of left and right performance lamps 33 are provided at the top of the glass frame 4. Each of the performance lamps 33 includes a plurality of lights, and the light emitting direction and emitted color of the lights are changed according to each performance.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 4) consisting of a speaker (not shown). The audio output device 34 outputs various sounds including BGM (background music) and SE (sound effects). For example, the audio output device 34 outputs BGM corresponding to the image displayed on the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 1, a main display 28 is provided at the lower left side of the gaming area 10a. The main display 28 described above is controlled by a main control board 110, which will be described later. In addition, the main display 28 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display 23, a second special symbol reservation display 24, and a normal symbol. It includes a pending indicator 25 and a round number indicator 26.

The first special symbol display device 20 is for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the first starting port 13, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery are provided, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery on the first special symbol display device 20, the lottery results are displayed in the game. person will be notified. The above special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (blinking) for a predetermined period of time, and then are stopped and displayed.

The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the second starting port 14, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs (the first special symbol display device 21). Specifically, a plurality of special symbols are provided corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the results of the jackpot lottery on the second special symbol display device 21, the lottery results are displayed in the game. person will be notified. The special symbols on the second special symbol display device 21, like the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 20 described above, are displayed in a variable manner (blinking) for a predetermined period of time, and then are stopped and displayed.

The normal symbol display device 22 notifies the result of a lottery of normal symbols that is executed when a game ball passes through the gate 15. As will be described in detail later, when a player wins a normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol lottery"), the regular symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second starting port 14 is controlled in the second mode for a predetermined period of time. Ru. The above-described normal symbol display device 22 is fluctuatedly displayed (blinking) for a predetermined period of time when a game ball passes through the gate 15, and then stopped and displayed.

If a game ball enters the first starting port 13 or second starting port 14 during a special symbol fluctuation display or in a jackpot game and the jackpot drawing cannot be performed immediately, the right to draw the jackpot is reserved under certain conditions. be done. For example, the right to a jackpot lottery that is reserved when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 is reserved as the first reservation, and the right to a jackpot lottery that is reserved when a game ball enters the second starting port 14. is reserved as the second reservation.

The first special symbol reservation display 23 displays the current value of the number of first reservations. The first hold in this embodiment is held with a maximum of four items. Further, the second special symbol reservation display 24 displays the current value of the number of second reservations. The second hold in this embodiment is held with an upper limit of four, similar to the first hold. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when both the first hold and the second hold are stored, the second hold is prioritized and cleared. That is, the second special symbol display device 21 is given priority over the first special symbol display device 20 and is displayed in a variable manner.

If the normal symbol lottery cannot be performed immediately during the fluctuating display of the normal symbol or during the period in which the second starting port 14 (opening/closing door 14b) is in the second mode (open), the right to the common symbol lottery is reserved. The upper limit number of reserved symbols for the regular symbol lottery is set to four, and the number of reserved symbols for the regular symbol lottery is displayed on the regular symbol reservation display 25. It should be noted that the general drawing lottery is also executed in a jackpot game (non-time-saving game state). The round number display 26 is for notifying the number of rounds of the round game played during the jackpot (special game).

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170, and a game information output terminal board 27 are provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 170 is provided with a power plug 171 and a power switch (not shown) for supplying power to the gaming machine.

<Configuration of game control device>
FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a game control device that controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine 1 includes a lamp control board 140, an image control board 150, and a firing control board 160 in addition to the above-described main control board 110, production control board 120, payout control board 130, and power supply board 170. do.

The main control board 110 controls the basic operations of the game. As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 includes at least a one-chip microcomputer including a main CPU 111, a main ROM 112, and a main RAM 113, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.

The main CPU 111 reads a program stored in the main ROM 112 and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch (first starting port detection switch 13a, etc.). Depending on the results of the above arithmetic processing, various commands are sent to other boards from the output port. Further, the main CPU 111 controls each display including the main display 28 described above. The main RAM 113 functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 111.

As shown in FIG. 3, the input side of the main control board 110 includes a first starting opening detection switch 13a, a second starting opening detection switch 14a, a gate detection switch 15a, a first big winning opening detection switch 16a, and a second big winning opening detection switch 13a. The opening detection switch 17a, the general winning opening detection switch 18a and the out ball detection switch 19a are connected, and a game ball detection signal is input from the above detection switches.

For example, the game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 16 is detected by the first big winning hole detection switch 16a. Further, the game ball detected by the first big winning opening detection switch 16a is then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Similarly, the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 17 is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 17a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. A game ball that enters the general winning hole 18 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 18a, and then detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. In the above configuration, the game ball launched into the game area 10a is finally detected by the out ball detection switch 19a. Hereinafter, the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 19a may be referred to as the "out number".

As shown in FIG. 3, a signal from the clear switch 30a is input to the main control board 110. Specifically, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a clear button 30 (not shown). The clear switch 30a outputs an ON signal to the main control board 110 during a period in which the clear button 30 is operated (pressed). Further, the clear switch 30a outputs an OFF signal to the main control board 110 during a period when the clear button 30 is not operated.

The clear button 30 described above cannot be operated when the inner frame 3 is in a closed state. That is, the clear button 30 is provided at a position where the player cannot operate it. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 operates the clear button 30. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the clear button 30 being operated, various information in the main RAM 113 is initialized.

The main control board 110 includes a starting opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 14b of the second starting opening 14, a first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 16b of the first big winning opening 16, and a second big winning opening solenoid that opens and closes the opening/closing door 14b of the second starting opening 14. A second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the movable piece 17b of the winning opening 17 is connected.

The main control board 110 includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reserve display 23, a second special symbol reserve display 24, and a normal symbol reserve. A display 25 and a round number display 26 are connected. The main control board 110 outputs external information signals necessary for managing gaming machines in a hall computer or the like of a gaming parlor to the gaming information output terminal board 27.

As shown in FIG. 3, a right-handed lamp 28 is connected to the main control board 110. The right-handed lamp 28 is turned on during a period in which it is more advantageous to play the game with right-handed players than with left-handed players, and is turned off during a period in which it is more advantageous to play the game with left-handed players than right-handed players. For example, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up in a time-saving game state, a jackpot game, and a small win game. In the above configuration, when the right-handed player lamp 28 lights up, the player plays the game with the right-handed player. Therefore, the right-handed lamp 28 can also be said to be a means for instructing the operating mode (left-handed or right-handed) of the operating handle 11.

The main ROM 112 stores a game control program to be described later and data necessary for various games. Further, the main RAM 113 has a plurality of storage areas. For example, the main RAM 113 includes a normal symbol retention number (G) storage area, a normal symbol retention storage area, a first special symbol retention number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol retention number (U2) storage area, and a judgment storage area. , first special symbol storage area, second special symbol storage area, high probability game count (X) storage area, round game count (R) storage area, open count (K) storage area, game status storage area, game status buffer , a stop symbol data storage area, an effect transmission data storage area, etc. are provided. The game state storage area includes a time-saving game flag storage area, a high probability game flag storage area, a special figure/special electric line processing data storage area, and a regular figure/general electric line processing data storage area. Note that the storage area described above is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27 is a board for outputting external information signals generated by the main control board 110 to a hall computer of a game parlor or the like. The game information output terminal board 27 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is also provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer or the like of a game parlor. Further, a magnetic sensor for detecting illegal magnetism is connected to the main control board 110.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a base display 114. The base display 114 of this embodiment displays a base value, which will be described later. The base display 114 includes four segment displays (see FIG. 4, which will be described later), and is directly mounted on the main control board 110.

The power supply board 170 converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply plug 171 into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. Further, the power supply board 170 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. Specifically, when the power outage detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 111 becomes operational, and when the power outage detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 111 becomes inactive.

In this embodiment, the power supply board 170 is provided with a backup power supply made of a capacitor. With the backup power supply described above, the data stored in the main RAM 113 is maintained even when the operation is stopped. Note that the backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, for example. Further, a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The performance control board 120 controls each performance. As shown in FIG. 3, the production control board 120 includes a sub CPU 121, a sub ROM 122, a sub RAM 123, and an RTC (real time clock) 124. The above effect control board 120 is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate in one direction.

The sub CPU 121 reads a program stored in the sub ROM 122 and performs calculations based on a command sent from the main control board 110 or an input signal from the production button detection switch 8a input via the lamp control board 140. Execute processing. Further, the sub CPU 121 transmits corresponding data to the lamp control board 140 or the image control board 150 based on the above-mentioned arithmetic processing. The sub-RAM 123 functions as a data work area when the sub-CPU 121 performs arithmetic processing.

The sub ROM 122 stores performance control programs and data necessary for various games. For example, a variable performance pattern determination table for determining a performance pattern based on a fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110, a performance pattern pattern determination table for determining a combination of performance symbols GA to be stopped and displayed (not shown) ) etc. are stored in the sub ROM 122. Note that the sub ROM 122 stores many other tables and programs (not shown).

Sub RAM 123 has multiple storage areas. Specifically, the sub-RAM 123 includes a command reception buffer, a gaming state storage area, a performance mode storage area, a performance pattern storage area, a performance symbol storage area, a determination storage area (0th storage area), a first reservation storage area, A second reserved storage area and the like are provided.

The RTC 124 outputs the current time. The RTC 124 of this embodiment operates using the power supply during a period when the gaming machine is supplied with power from the outside. On the other hand, during a period when power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside, the gaming machine operates using a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170. The RTC 124 described above can measure the current date and time even during a period when power is not supplied to the gaming machine from the outside.

The sub CPU 121 receives a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 124, and executes various processes according to the current date and time. In addition, a battery may be provided in the production control board 120, and the RTC 124 may be configured to be operable by the battery.

The payout control board 130 executes game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control board 130 includes a payout CPU 131, a payout ROM 132, and a payout RAM 133, and is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. Further, signals from a dispensing ball counting switch 135, a door opening switch 136, a tray full detection switch 51, and a ball clogging detection switch 52 are input to the dispensing control board 130.

The paid-out ball counting switch 135 is a switch for detecting whether or not game balls have been paid out. The tray full detection switch 51 is a switch for detecting that the game ball storage tray (lower tray) is full. Further, the ball clogging detection switch 52 is a switch for detecting, for example, a clogging of game balls in a path through which the game balls to be paid out move.

The payout CPU 131 reads the program stored in the payout ROM 132 based on input signals from the various switches described above, performs arithmetic processing, and transmits data according to the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110. .

As shown in FIG. 3, the output side of the payout control board 130 is connected to a payout motor 134 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU 131 controls the payout motor 134 of the prize ball payout device based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to pay out predetermined prize balls to the player. The payout RAM 133 functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the payout CPU 131.

In this embodiment, it is monitored whether a game ball lending device (card unit) (not shown) is connected to the payout control board 130. If the game ball lending device is connected to the payout control board 130, the firing control board 160 is allowed to fire the game balls. On the other hand, if the game ball lending device is not connected to the payout control board 130, the firing control board 160 is prohibited from firing game balls.

When the launch control board 160 receives launch control data from the payout control board 130, it authorizes launch. Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11a and the input signal from the firing volume 11b are read out, and the firing solenoid 12a and the ball feeding solenoid 12b are energized and the game balls are fired.

The firing solenoid 12a is composed of a rotary solenoid. A firing member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 12a, and the firing member rotates when the firing solenoid 12a rotates. One game ball is fired each time the firing solenoid rotates once.

The rotational speed of the firing solenoid 12a is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of a crystal oscillator provided in the firing control board 160. With the above configuration, the number of game balls fired per minute is approximately 99.9 (balls/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds. The ball feeding solenoid 12b is constituted by a linear solenoid, and sends out the game balls in the upper tray 6a (see FIG. 1) one by one toward a shooting member directly connected to the shooting solenoid 12a.

The lamp control board 140 is connected to the production control board 120 so that bidirectional communication is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the production button detection switch 8a and the cross key detection switch (40a, 40b, 40c, 40d) are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 140. Detection signals from each of the detection switches described above are input to the production control board 120 via the lamp control board 140.

Further, the effect movable body 32 and the effect lamp 33 provided on the game board 10 are connected to the lamp control board 140. The lamp control board 140 controls the lighting of the performance lamp 33 and controls the drive of a motor for changing the direction of light irradiation based on the data transmitted from the performance control board 120. Further, it controls the energization of a drive source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect movable body 32. In addition, in this embodiment, since the performance button 8 is configured to protrude, the performance movable body 32 includes the performance button 8.

The image control board 150 is connected to the production control board 120 for two-way communication, and the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 are connected to the output side thereof.

<Base display>
FIGS. 4(a) to 4(c) are diagrams for explaining control of the base display 114 in this embodiment. Although described in detail later, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment shifts to each gaming state including a low probability non-time-saving gaming state. The base display 114 displays the base value B in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. The base value B for a specific section is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls paid out in the section by the above-mentioned number of outs (total number of game balls hit out).

FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining various counters (prize ball counter for base calculation, out counter for base calculation, total out counter) used for display control of the base display 114. Each of the above counters is provided in the main RAM 113, for example.

The prize ball counter for base calculation counts the prize balls in a specific section. Specifically, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 18, the value "10" is added to the base calculation prize ball counter. Further, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17, the numerical value "15" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Similarly, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14, the value "3" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. Further, the base calculation out counter counts the number of outs in a specific section. Specifically, each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, a numerical value "1" is added to the out counter for base calculation.

The main CPU 111 calculates the base value B of the specific section by multiplying the calculation result obtained by dividing the value of the prize ball counter for base calculation by the value of the out counter for base calculation by the numerical value "100". However, the out counter for base calculation and the prize ball counter for base calculation are not incremented except in the low probability non-time saving game state. In the above configuration, the base value B in the low probability non-time saving gaming state is calculated in the specific section. In addition, in this embodiment, the period in which the out counter for base calculation and the prize ball counter for base calculation are added may be described as a "counting period", and the period other than the counting period may be described as a "non-counting period". .

Each time a predetermined section ends, the main CPU 111 stores (saves) the base value B of the section. In this embodiment, the base value B is saved every time 60,000 outs are counted. Specifically, the total out counter counts the number of outs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "total number of outs") during the period from when the power is first turned on to the present. The main CPU 111 calculates and stores a base value B from the current values of the base calculation award ball counter and the base calculation out counter every time the numerical value "60000" is added to the total out counter. Furthermore, each time the numerical value "60000" is added to the total out counter, the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are initialized.

FIG. 4(b) is a diagram for explaining the base value B displayed on the base display 114. In the specific example of FIG. 4(b), 60,000 outs are counted in section 3, then 60,000 outs are counted in section 2, 60,000 outs are counted in section 1, and 60,000 outs are counted in section L. Assume that the The number of outs in section L is less than 60,000 (0 to 59,999). Furthermore, the base value B in section 3 is "B3", the base value B in section 2 is "B2", the base value B in section 1 is "B1", and the base value B in section L is "BL ”.

In the above specific example, in the section L, the base value BL of the section L (real time), the base value B1 of the section 1 (the previous section), the base value B2 of the section 2 (the section 2 times before), and the section The base value B3 of 3 (3rd previous section) is displayed on the base display 114. Specifically, the base display 114 switches and displays four base values B in the order of base value BL, base value B1, base value B2, and base value B3. The base value B of each section is switched and displayed, for example, every 5 seconds. In this embodiment, the base value B is continuously displayed on the base display 114, including the period during which games can be played.

When one section ends (when 60,000 outs are counted), the base value B of that section is saved as the base value B of the previous section, and the base value B of the oldest section is discarded. . For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4(b), when the number of outs in section L reaches 60,000, the base value BL of section L is stored as the base value B1 of section 1, and the base value B1 of section 1 is stored as the base value B1 of section 2. The base value B2 of section 2 is stored as the base value B3 of section 3, and the base value 3 of the oldest section 3 is discarded.

FIG. 4C is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the base display 114. As shown in FIG. 4C, the base display 114 includes a first display section 114x and a second display section 114y. The second display section 114y is composed of two seven segment displays and displays the base value B. The second display section 114y described above can display numbers "00" to "99". If the base value is larger than the numerical value "100", "99." is displayed on the second display section 114y (the dot display section lights up).

As described above, the base display 114 switches and displays the base value B of the sections in the order of section L, section 1, section 2, and section 3 on the second display section 114y about every 5 seconds. The first display section 114x displays identification information (bL, b1, b2, b3) that allows identification of which interval's base value B is displayed on the second display section 114y.

For example, in the specific example of FIG. 4B described above, the identification information "bL" is displayed on the first display section 114x during the period in which the base value BL of the section L is displayed. Further, during the period in which the base value B1 of section 1 is displayed, the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display section 114x, and in the period in which the base value B2 of section 2 is displayed, the identification information "b2" is displayed on the first display section 114x. Identification information "b3" is displayed on the first display section 114x during a period in which the base value B3 of section 3 is displayed on the first display section 114x.

However, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000, the base value displayed on the second display section 114y cannot be calculated during the period in which the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display section 114x. Similarly, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000, the base value for displaying the identification information "b2" and the base value for displaying the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000, during the period in which the identification information "b1" to "b3" is displayed on the first display section 114x, each identification information is displayed blinking and , a special symbol "--" is displayed on the second display section 114y.

If the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, the base value B1 is calculated, which is displayed as identification information "b1", but the base value B2 is displayed as identification information "b2", and the identification information is displayed as "b3". The base value B3 cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, if the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, during the period when the identification information "b1" is displayed on the first display section 114x, the identification information is displayed by lighting and the base value During a period in which B1 is lit and the identification information "b2" or "b3" is displayed, each piece of identification information is displayed blinking and a special symbol "--" is lit and displayed on the second display section 114y.

Similarly, if the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, the base value B1 that displays the identification information "b1" and the base value B2 that displays the identification information "b2" are calculated, but the base value B2 that displays the identification information "b3" is calculated. ” cannot be calculated. Considering the above circumstances, if the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, the identification information "b1" or "b2" is displayed on the first display section 114x. At the same time, the base values (B1, B2) are displayed by lighting, and during the period when the identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking, and a special symbol "--" is displayed on the second display section 114y. Lights up to display.

As described above, in this embodiment, the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period in which the identification information "bL" is displayed. However, in the specific example shown in FIG. 4B, for example, if the number of normal outs in section L is not large enough, it is difficult to calculate an accurate (original) base value B. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which it is reported whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently large. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can evaluate the base value BL after considering whether or not the number of normal outs is sufficient.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the number of normal outs in section L is less than 6000, the identification information "bL" is displayed blinking, and when the number of normal outs in section L is 6000 or more, the identification information "bL" is displayed blinking. '' is displayed on the screen. With the above configuration, whether or not the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently large is substantially notified, and the above-mentioned advantages can be obtained.

By the way, before a player actually plays a game, the operation of the gaming machine 1 is normally checked. The above operation check includes checking whether the detection switches (13a, 14a, 16a, 17a, 18a, 19a) normally detect game balls. Therefore, if the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation are incremented immediately after the gaming machine 1 is first powered on, then the calculation will be made immediately after the gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time. There may be an inconvenience that the base value calculated is different from the base value B calculated when actually playing the game.

In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment has a configuration in which the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation are not added until the total out counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the value "300"). Adopted. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

<Setting change switch>
As shown in FIG. 3, the main control board 110 is provided with a setting change switch 115a. The setting change switch 115a described above turns on when the setting key device 115 (not shown) is rotated to a specific position, and turns off when the setting key device 115 is rotated to a position other than the specific position. The gaming machine 1 can be set with any one of a plurality of types (for example, six types) of setting values with different ball payout rates. Specifically, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on while the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position and the clear button 30 is pressed, the setting change process described below is executed and the settings are changed. Shifts to a mode in which values can be changed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "setting change mode"). When the setting change mode is entered, the current setting values stored (set) in the main RAM 113 are displayed on the base display 114. In addition, the setting values displayed on the base display 114 are switched in the order of "...1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1..." every time the clear button 30 is pressed in the setting change mode. . When the setting change switch 115a changes to the OFF state in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the base display 114 is stored (set) in the main RAM 113, and the setting change mode ends.

In the setting change process, various information stored in the main RAM 113 is initialized. For example, the remaining number of games N indicating the remaining number of games until a second time-saving game state, which will be described later, is initialized to an initial value (in the case of this embodiment, a numerical value "800"). Note that the remaining number of times N is also initialized in the processing at the time of clear operation, which will be described later. The clear operation process is executed when the power is turned on with the clear button 30 pressed.

<Configuration of image control board>
FIG. 5 is a functional block diagram of the image control board 150. As shown in FIG. 5, the image control board 150 includes a host CPU 151, a host RAM 152, a host ROM 153, a CGROM 154, a crystal oscillator 155, a VRAM 156, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 200 to control the image display of the image display device 31. configured.

The host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to display various images on the image display device 31 based on a production pattern designation command, which will be described later, received from the production control board 120. The above instructions are executed by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands.

The VDP 200 transmits a V blank interrupt signal and a drawing end signal to the host CPU 151. When receiving each of the above signals, the host CPU 151 executes interrupt processing as appropriate. Image data of images displayed on the image display device 31 is stored in the CGROM 154.

Based on the performance pattern designation command received from the performance control board 120, the host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to cause the audio output device 34 to output a predetermined sound. The host RAM 152 is built into the host CPU 151 and functions as a work area for data generated through arithmetic processing by the host CPU 151. Further, the host RAM 152 temporarily stores data read from the host ROM 153.

The host ROM 153 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores a program for control processing of the host CPU 151. The host ROM 153 also includes symbol arrangement information that associates the symbol number of a production symbol with the type of production symbol GA, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, Memorize anime scene information.

The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and the combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, etc. are specified. In addition, the animation scene information includes information such as weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. It will be done.

The CGROM 154 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc. consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels). . A combination of color number information specifying the color number of each pixel and an α value indicating transparency is specified from the pixel information.

Furthermore, the CGROM 154 stores uncompressed palette data in which display color information and color number information used when actually displaying colors are associated with each other. Note that the CGROM 154 may be configured to compress and store only part of the image data. Further, as a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. Furthermore, various types of audio data are stored in the CGROM 154.

Crystal oscillator 155 outputs a pulse signal to VDP 200. The clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200 divides the frequency of the pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 and generates a system clock for controlling the VDP 200 and a synchronization signal for synchronizing with the image display device 31.

The VRAM 156 is a storage device in which image data can be written and read, and is composed of, for example, an SRAM. For example, palette data is stored in the VRAM 156 described above.

The VRAM 156 also includes a display list storage area 156a that temporarily stores the display list output from the host CPU 151, an expansion storage area 156b that stores image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206, and a display list storage area 156b that stores image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206. A first frame buffer 156c and a second frame buffer 156d are provided for this purpose. The two frame buffers 156c and 156d are alternately switched between a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and reads image data from a frame buffer (display frame buffer) in response to instructions from the host CPU 151. Further, the VDP 200 generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read image data, and outputs it to the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 5, the VDP 200 of this embodiment includes a control register 201, a CG bus I/F 202, a CPU I/F 203, a clock generation circuit 205, an expansion circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, and a display circuit 208. , a memory controller 209, and an audio control circuit 300.

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and by writing and reading data to and from the control register 201, drawing control and display control are executed. The host CPU 151 writes and reads data to and from the control register 201 via the CPU I/F 203.

Specifically, the control register 201 includes a system control register for making basic settings necessary for the VDP 200 to operate, a data transfer register for making settings necessary for data transfer, and a data transfer register for controlling drawing. There are drawing registers for making settings, bus interface registers for making settings necessary for bus access, decompression registers for making settings necessary for decompressing compressed images, and display registers for making settings for display control. including.

The CG bus I/F 202 is an interface circuit for communicating with the CGROM 154. Image data from the CGROM 154 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I/F 202 described above.

The CPU I/F 203 is an interface circuit for communication with the host CPU 151. For example, a display list output by the host CPU 151 is input to the VDP 200 via the CPU I/F 203. Further, various interrupt signals output from the VDP 200 are input to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203. The host CPU 151 can access the control register via the CPU I/F 203.

The data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices. Specifically, the data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between the host CPU 151 and the VRAM 156, between the CGROM 154 and the VRAM 156, and between various storage areas (including a frame buffer) of the VRAM 156.

The clock generation circuit 205 receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155 and generates a system clock for the VDP 200 . It also generates a synchronization signal generation clock and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 31 via the display circuit 208 .

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 154, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompressed storage area 153b. The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control using a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands.

The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating color data of an image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in a "display frame buffer" in the VRAM 156. The video signal (RGB signal) generated by the display circuit 208 is output to the image display device 31.

Further, the display circuit 208 outputs a synchronization signal (a vertical synchronization signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing with the image display device 31 to the image display device 31. Note that in this embodiment, an RGB signal obtained by converting a digital signal into an analog signal is output as a video signal to the image display device 31, but the video signal may be output as a digital signal.

When receiving a frame buffer switching instruction from the host CPU 151, the memory controller 209 switches between a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer."

The VDP 200 of this embodiment has an audio data reproducing function in addition to an image data reproducing function. Specifically, the audio control circuit 300 of the VDP 200 controls the audio output of the gaming machine. The audio control circuit 300 reads a predetermined program based on a command transmitted from the production control board 120, and controls the audio output in the audio output device 34.

The audio control circuit 300 outputs audio using the audio data stored in the CGROM 154. Note that instead of storing the audio data in the CGROM 154, a configuration may be adopted in which a sound source ROM in which the audio data is stored is provided separately from the CGROM 154. Further, the audio control circuit 300 may not be included in the VDP 200 and may be provided independently within the image control board 150. In the above case, the sound source ROM may be included in the audio control circuit 300.

<Explanation of gaming status>
Next, the gaming state to which the gaming machine 1 transitions will be explained. In this embodiment, the game progresses in any one of the following gaming states: "low probability gaming state", "high probability gaming state", "time saving gaming state", and "non time saving gaming state". Specifically, there is a gaming state that is a "low probability gaming state" and a "time saving gaming state", a gaming state that is a "low probability gaming state" and a "non time saving gaming state", and a "high probability gaming state". The state changes to a gaming state which is a "time-saving gaming state".

In the above-mentioned low probability game state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/299.5 in the jackpot lottery executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14. Note that winning the jackpot means acquiring the right to play the jackpot game. The jackpot game includes a "long hit game" and a "short hit game" which will be described later.

In the above-mentioned high probability gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher than in the low probability gaming state. Specifically, in the high probability game state of this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/29.95. However, the probability of winning the jackpot in each gaming state may be changed as appropriate.

In the non-time-saving gaming state, the winning probability is 1/20 in the regular lottery which is executed when a game ball passes through the gate 15. In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the length of time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols (normal symbol display device 22) to the stop display is set to about 10 seconds. Furthermore, if you win in the general drawing lottery, the total opening time of the second starting port 14 when the long opening symbol described later is determined is approximately 4.2 seconds, and the second opening time when the short opening symbol is determined. The total opening time of 14 is set to approximately 0.2 seconds.

In the time-saving game state, the probability of winning a winning lottery in the common symbol lottery executed when a game ball passes through the gate 15 is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, compared to the non-time-saving gaming state, the time length from when the fluctuating display of normal symbols starts to when they are stopped is short, and the total opening time of the second starting port 14 tends to be longer. .

Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning in the general lottery is 19/20. In addition, in the time saving game state, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed in about 1 second. Furthermore, in the time saving game state, the total opening time of the second starting port 14 when a long opening symbol is determined is set to 5 seconds, and the total opening time of the second starting port 14 when a short opening symbol is determined. is set to 3 seconds. Note that when the normal symbols are stopped, the normal symbols are maintained in a stopped state for at least about 0.5 seconds.

In the above configuration, in the time-saving game state, the second starting port 14 is more easily controlled in the second mode as long as the game ball passes through the gate 15 than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, it becomes possible for the player to proceed with the game while suppressing the consumption of game balls. In this embodiment, by playing the game by hitting right, the game ball can enter the second starting port 14 and the gate 15. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, it is more advantageous to play the game with the right hand rather than the left hand.

In this embodiment, multiple types of time-saving game states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving gaming state of this embodiment includes a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state. The first time-saving game state is transitioned to when the jackpot game (ending period) ends. A transition to the second time-saving gaming state is possible when a jackpot is not won a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery (jackpot determination process) in the low probability gaming state.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is common in each time-saving game state. Specifically, the normal symbol fluctuation time in each time-saving game state is about 1 second. Furthermore, the probability of winning the common symbol lottery is the same in each time-saving game state, and the probability that a long-open symbol is determined and the probability that a short-open symbol is determined are common in each time-saving game state.

In each time saving game state, the operation mode (total opening time, number of openings) of the opening/closing door 14b when the long opening symbol is stopped and displayed is common. Further, in each time saving game state, the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b when the short opening symbol is stopped and displayed is the same. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, "the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening (enlargement) time and the number of openings of the second starting port 14" in the time-saving gaming state will be expressed as the second starting port 14 (opening/closing door 14b) in the time-saving gaming state. Sometimes referred to as "open mode". As mentioned above, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is common in each time-saving game state. However, in each time-saving game state, the opening manner of the second starting port 14 may be different.

Each of the above-mentioned time-saving game states ends when a predetermined number of games are executed or when a transition to a jackpot game occurs. Hereinafter, the number of games at which the time-saving gaming state ends may be referred to as the "time-saving number" of the time-saving gaming state. In this embodiment, each time saving game state has a different number of time saving times. Specifically, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times or 799 times. The number of time saving times in the second time saving game state is 1000 times. However, the number of time saving times in the time saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of time savings in the second time saving gaming state may be set to 100 times (common with the first time saving gaming state).

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 112 will be explained.

<Jackpot determination table>
Figures 6(a-1) and 6(a-2) show an example of a jackpot determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the stop result of special symbol fluctuations is a jackpot (during jackpot lottery). It is a conceptual diagram.

FIG. 6(a-1) is a jackpot determination table that is referred to when determining whether the stop result of the special symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol display device 20 is a jackpot, small hit, or loss (jackpot lottery). It is A. The details will be described later using FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3), but when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a jackpot symbol (such as special symbol A), which will be described later, is displayed. Further, when winning a small hit, a small winning symbol (special symbol K) is displayed.

FIG. 6(b-2) is a jackpot determination table B that is referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol fluctuation in the second special symbol display device 21. It should be noted that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different winning probabilities for the small hit, but have the same jackpot probability. In addition, in this embodiment, the 1st special symbol display device 20 may be simply described as "1st special symbol", and the 2nd special symbol display device 21 may be simply described as "2nd special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may simply be collectively referred to as a “special symbol”.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13 or the second starting hole 14 (hereinafter may be collectively referred to as "starting hole"), a random number value for special symbol determination is acquired. The random number range of the random number value for special symbol determination in this embodiment is a numerical value "0 to 598".

In the jackpot determination table, a random number value for determining a special symbol that is a "big hit" and a random number value for determining a special symbol that is a "small hit" are defined. In the jackpot lottery, the random number for special symbol determination obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole is compared with the random number for special symbol determination prescribed in the jackpot determination table, and if the two match, the jackpot or Win a small prize.

The jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in FIGS. 6(a-1) and 6(a-2) are composed of a low probability random number determination table and a high probability random number determination table. The main CPU 111 refers to the gaming state and selects a low probability time random number determination table in a low probability gaming state, and selects a high probability time random number determination table in a high probability gaming state. Further, the main CPU 111 determines one of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" based on the selected table and the extracted random number value for special symbol determination.

For example, according to the low probability time random number determination table shown in FIG. 6(a-1), two random numbers for special symbol determination are determined to be a "jackpot". On the other hand, according to the high probability time random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be a "jackpot". In addition, in the jackpot determination table of FIG. 6(a-1), whether the low probability time random number determination table or the high probability time random number determination table is used, the four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hit". It is determined that If a random number is determined as neither a "big hit" nor a "small hit," it will be determined as a "loss."

As mentioned above, the random number range of the random number value for special symbol determination is the number "0 to 598". Therefore, in the jackpot determination table A (at the time of winning the first starting opening), the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is 1/299.5 in the low probability gaming state. Similarly, the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the high probability gaming state is 1/29.95, which is 10 times higher. On the other hand, the probability of determining a small hit is 1/149.75 in both the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state.

In the jackpot determination table B shown in FIG. 6(a-2), the random numbers for special symbol determination that are determined to be a jackpot in the low probability game state and the high probability game state are the same as in the jackpot determination table A. On the other hand, the jackpot determination table A and the jackpot determination table B have different random numbers for determining special symbols that are determined to be small hits. For example, in the jackpot determination table B, a "small hit" is determined only when the special symbol determination random number value is "50".

In the above configuration, the probability of determining a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/299 in the case where the game ball wins in the first starting port 13 and in the case where the game ball wins in the second starting port 14. 5, and the probability of determining a jackpot in the high probability gaming state is 1/29.95. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first starting port 13, the probability of being judged as a small hit is 1/149.75 in both the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state. When a game ball wins, the probability that it is determined to be a small hit is 1/599 in both the low probability game state and the high probability game state.

<Hit judgment table>
FIG. 6(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the result of stopping the normal symbol variation is a hit in the normal symbol lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 6(b) is composed of a non-time-saving game state random number determination table and a time-saving game state random number determination table. The above time-saving gaming state time random number determination table is commonly referred to in the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state.

The main CPU 111 acquires a random number for normal symbol determination when the game ball passes through the gate 15. The random number range of the random number value for determining a hit is a number from 0 to 19. The main CPU 111 refers to the gaming state, selects the non-time-saving gaming state random number determination table in the non-time-saving gaming state, and selects the time-saving gaming state random number determination table in the time-saving gaming state. Further, the main CPU 111 determines whether the game is a "win" or a "loss" based on the selected table and the acquired random number value for determining a win.

Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether the acquired random number value for hit determination matches the random number value for hit determination defined in the hit determination table. In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 6(b), the probability of being determined to be a win in the non-time-saving gaming state is about 1/20, and the probability of being determined to be a win in the time-saving gaming state is about 19/20.

<Design determination table>
FIG. 7(a-1) to FIG. 7(a-3) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining a special symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each game.

The special symbol determination table includes a jackpot symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, and a loss symbol determination table. The jackpot symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (jackpot symbol) when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery. The small winning symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (small winning symbol) when a small winning is won in a jackpot lottery. The losing symbol determination table is referred to when determining a stop symbol (losing symbol) in the event of a loss in the jackpot lottery.

As shown in FIGS. 7(a-1) to 7(a-3), each special symbol determination table is provided for each special symbol display device, and the special symbol determination table for the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol determination table are provided for each special symbol display device. It is composed of a special symbol determination table for the special symbol display device 21.

FIG. 7(a-1) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a jackpot symbol determination table. When the main CPU 111 wins a jackpot, it refers to the random number value for the jackpot symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the jackpot symbol is a number “0 to 99”. For example, if you win a jackpot by entering the first starting slot 13, if the acquired random number value for the jackpot symbol is "0" to "59", the main CPU 111 will set "01" ( Determine special symbol A1). In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1), the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20.

In addition, the main CPU 111 generates an effect symbol designation command that can specify stop symbol data (special symbol type) at the start of special symbol variation. For example, when stop symbol data "01" is determined, production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "01H" are generated as shown in FIG. 7(a-1).

As shown in FIG. 7(a-1), if a jackpot is won by entering the first starting hole 13, and the acquired random number value for the jackpot symbol is "60" to "69", the game stops. "02" (special symbol A2) is determined as symbol data, and production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20.

Similarly, if you win a jackpot by entering the first starting hole 13, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "70" to "99", the stop symbol data will be "03" (special symbol A3). is determined, and production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "03H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20.

If you win the jackpot by entering the second starting hole 14, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is between "0" and "69", "04" (special symbol B1) is determined as the stop symbol data. , effect design designation commands “E1H” and “01H” are generated. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-1), the special symbol B1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21.

Also, if you win a jackpot by entering the second starting hole 14, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "70" to "89", "05" (special symbol B2) will be used as the stop symbol data. The designation commands "E1H" and "02H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. If you win the jackpot by entering the second starting hole 14, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "90" to "94", "06" (special symbol B3) is determined as the stop symbol data. , effect design designation commands “E1H” and “03H” are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21.

Similarly, if you win a jackpot by entering the second starting hole 14, and the random number value for the jackpot symbol is "95" to "99", the stop symbol data will be "07" (special symbol B4). is determined, and production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "04H" are generated. In the above case, the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. As will be described in detail later, the number of times M in the first time saving game state after the jackpot game changes depending on the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started.

When the above-mentioned special symbols A1, A2, A3, B1 to B4 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as "jackpot symbols") are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game starts. . As mentioned above, the jackpot game includes a long hit game and a short hit game. In the jackpot game, the first big winning hole 16 and the second big winning hole 17 (hereinafter sometimes referred to collectively as "big winning hole") are opened. In the long winning game, the opening time of the big prize opening is set longer than in the short winning game.

The type of jackpot game depends on the jackpot special symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started. Specifically, when any one of the special symbols A1, A3, B1 to B4 among the special jackpot symbols is displayed in a stopped state, the jackpot game is started. On the other hand, when the special symbol A2 is stopped and displayed, a short winning game is started.

Furthermore, the game state after the jackpot game ends is determined according to the special symbol that is stopped and displayed when transitioning to the jackpot game. For example, when the special symbol A1, the special symbol A2, or the special symbol B1 is stopped and displayed, a transition is made to a high probability game state time-saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "high probability time-saving game state"). In principle, the time saving gaming state of the high probability gaming state continues until the jackpot is won. On the other hand, when any one of the special symbols A3, B2 to B4 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a low probability game state time saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "low probability time saving game state"). Specifically, the special symbols A3, B2 to B4 are stopped and displayed, and when the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the first time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the first time saving game state differs depending on the type of jackpot symbol (A3, B2 to B4). Specifically, when the special symbol A3 or special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of time savings in the first time saving game state becomes 100 times. On the other hand, when the special symbol B3 or B4 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of games in the first time-saving game state becomes 799.

As will be described in detail later, a new table scenario S is set when the jackpot game ends. By setting the table scenario S, a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern (described later) of special symbols is switched according to the number of games played. The above table scenario S is variably set according to the type of jackpot symbol.

In this embodiment, a jackpot game in which the gaming state after the end is a high-probability gaming state may be referred to as a "probability-variable jackpot," and a jackpot game in which the gaming state after the end is in a low-probability gaming state may be described as a "normal jackpot." . In addition, in this embodiment, the non-time-saving gaming state of the low-probability gaming state may be described as a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state."

FIG. 7(a-2) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a small winning symbol determination table. When the main CPU 111 wins a small hit, the main CPU 111 refers to the random number value for the small winning symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the small winning symbol is a numerical value "0 to 99". However, if you win a small hit by entering the first starting hole 13, the main CPU 111 determines "11" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data, regardless of the acquired random number value for the small winning symbol. do. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-2), the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. In addition, production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "0AH" are generated.

Similarly, when a small hit is won by entering the second starting hole 14, the main CPU 111 selects "12" (special symbol K) as the stop symbol data, regardless of the acquired random number value for the small winning symbol. decide. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 7(a-2), the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. Further, production symbol designation commands “E1H” and “0AH” are generated.

FIG. 7(a-3) is a conceptual diagram of a losing symbol determination table. In the jackpot lottery at the time of winning into the first starting hole 13, if it is determined that the winning lottery is a loss, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, effect design designation commands "E0H" and "00H" are generated. Similarly, if it is determined that the jackpot lottery at the time of winning the second starting hole 14 is a loss, "00" (special symbol H) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, the production symbol designation commands "E1H" and "00H" are generated.

FIG. 7(b-1) and FIG. 7(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of the normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The above normal symbol determination table is commonly used in each gaming state (non-time saving gaming state, first time saving gaming state, second time saving gaming state).

The normal symbol determination table of this embodiment includes a normal symbol determination table X and a regular symbol determination table Y. The normal symbol determination table X is used when a player wins in the ordinary symbol lottery (when the second starting port 14 is opened). On the other hand, the regular symbol determination table Y is used in the case of a loss in the regular symbol lottery (when the second starting port 14 is not opened).

FIG. 7(b-1) is a conceptual diagram of the normal symbol determination table X. The main CPU 111 obtains a random number value for the normal symbol when determining the normal symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the normal symbol is a number “0 to 10”. For example, if you win in the regular symbol lottery and the random number value for the regular symbol is ``0'' or ``1'', the long open symbol is determined as the regular symbol. On the other hand, if the random number value for the normal symbol is one of the numbers "2 to 10", the short open symbol is determined as the normal symbol.

When the main CPU 111 determines the long open symbol as the normal symbol, it determines the stop symbol data "01" and generates the normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "01H" at the start of the variation of the normal symbol. Further, when a short open symbol is determined, stop symbol data "02" is determined, and normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "02H" are generated at the start of variation of the normal symbol.

FIG. 7(b-2) is a conceptual diagram of the normal symbol determination table Y. As mentioned above, the normal symbol determination table Y is used in the case of a loss in the regular symbol lottery. In the case of a loss in the ordinary symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 7(b-2), the losing symbol is determined regardless of the random number value for the ordinary symbol being any value from "0" to "10". When the main CPU 111 determines a losing symbol as a normal symbol, it determines "00" as the stop symbol data, and generates normal symbol designation commands "E8H" and "00H" when the variation of the normal symbol starts.

FIG. 8(a), FIG. 8(b-1) and FIG. 8(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in each game. The fluctuation pattern determination table is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern in each game. The main CPU 111 determines a variation pattern in each game, and displays the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20, second special symbol display device 21) in a variable manner according to the variation pattern.

The variation pattern determination table referred to in each game after the jackpot game is finished is variable according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed at the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, multiple types of table scenarios S corresponding to multiple types of jackpot symbols are provided. The main CPU 111 sets a table scenario S corresponding to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed at the start of the jackpot game. Further, the main CPU 111 uses the set table scenario S to determine a fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to in each game after the jackpot game. In the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table referred to in each game becomes variable according to the set table scenario S. As will be described in detail later, when the number of games after the end of the jackpot game reaches the number of games specified in the table scenario S, the fluctuation pattern determination table is switched (see FIG. 8(b-1) described below).

FIG. 8(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the table scenario S. The table scenario S includes a table scenario Sa1, a table scenario Sa2, a table scenario Sa3, a table scenario Sb1, a table scenario Sb2, a table scenario Sb3, and a table scenario Sb4. The table scenario Sa1 is set when the special symbol A1 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. Similarly, the table scenario Sa2 is set when the special symbol A2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the table scenario Sa3 is set when the special symbol A3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, and the table scenario SB1 is It is set when the special symbol B1 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed.

The table scenario Sb2 is set when the special symbol B2 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state for 100 times after the jackpot game. That is, the table scenario Sb2 is set when transitioning to the first time-saving gaming state 100 times after the jackpot game. The table scenario Sb3 is set when the special symbol B3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the jackpot game. Further, the table scenario Sb4 is set when the special symbol B4 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed. As described above, when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state of 799 times after the jackpot game.

As understood from the above explanation, the number of times saved in the first time saving game state after the jackpot game is the same (799 times) when the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed and when the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed. However, the set table scenarios (Sb3, Sb4) are different. That is, in each of the above cases, the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the first time-saving gaming state is different. As will be described in detail later, the production mode in the first time-saving game state is different between the case where the special symbol B3 is stopped and displayed and the case where the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed. In games with different performance modes, the performances that can be executed on the image display device 31 are different.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fact that a specific variation pattern determination table T is referred to in the variation pattern determination process may be simply written as "the variation pattern determination table T is referred to." Furthermore, the fact that a particular fluctuation pattern determination table T among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern determination tables T can be referred to may be simply described as "the fluctuation pattern determination table T is set." For example, as an example of "becoming able to refer to a specific variation pattern determination table T", it is assumed that the variation pattern determination table T is read from the main ROM 112 and stored (developed) in the main RAM 113.

FIG. 8(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table set by the table scenario S. The table scenario S defines a plurality of opportunities for setting (switching) a variation pattern determination table and a variation pattern determination table to be set at the opportunities. The main CPU 111 sets (switches) a variation pattern determination table when an opportunity specified in the table scenario S is established.

FIG. 8(b-1) shows the order in which the triggers for setting the fluctuation pattern determination table are established. In addition, a variation pattern determination table that is set based on the opportunity is shown corresponding to the opportunity. In the specific example of FIG. 8(b-1), it is assumed that table scenario Sb2 among table scenarios S is set. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 8(b-1), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won during the period from when the table scenario Sb2 is set until the end of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is set with the end of the jackpot game as an opportunity. Further, in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 91st game after the end of the jackpot game starts, the variation pattern determination table Ta2 is set. Thereafter, when the 100th game after the end of the jackpot game starts, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is set. In the above configuration, in the first time saving game state (100 times), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in the 90th game (90th game after the end of the jackpot game), and in the 91st to 99th games. In the previous games, the variable pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to, and in the 100th (last) game, the variable pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), when the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set with the end of the first time-saving gaming state as an opportunity. Further, when the 791st game starts after the end of the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In the above configuration, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to for each game in the non-time saving gaming state up to the 11th game before the transition to the second time saving gaming state, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to for the game 10 times before shifting to the second time saving gaming state. The variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to from the game.

When the second time-saving game state starts, a fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is set. As shown in FIG. 8(b-1), when table scenario Sb2 is set, when the 802nd game (second game in the second time-saving game state) starts after the jackpot game ends, the fluctuation pattern is determined. A table Tax is set. Further, when the second time saving game state ends, a fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and in the second and subsequent games of the second time-saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to. Thereafter, when the second time saving game state ends, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to. As can be understood from the above explanation, during the period in which the table scenario S is set, the variation pattern determination table is changed depending on the timing of the change in the gaming state as well as the number of games from the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the table scenario S is changed upon winning a jackpot game, and is not changed on other occasions. However, when the clear operation process or setting change process described above is executed, the table scenario S becomes unset. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, an operation in which a setting change process or a clear operation process is executed may be referred to as a "clear operation." Further, a period in which the table scenario S is not set may be referred to as a "scenario unset period". The scenario non-setting period is a period from when the clear operation is executed until the end of the first jackpot game. Furthermore, the period during which any of the table scenarios S is set after the jackpot game is finished may be referred to as a "scenario setting period."

Let us assume a comparative example in which the variation pattern determination table is changed according to the number of games played during the scenario-unset period. In addition, in the comparison example, a variation pattern determination table advantageous to the player is referred to from the start of the scenario unset period until the predetermined number of games. In the above comparison example, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can shift to a state advantageous to the player at any timing by performing a clear operation. Therefore, an inconvenience may arise in which the fairness of the game is impaired. In consideration of the above circumstances, this embodiment adopts a configuration in which the variable pattern determination table is not changed in accordance with the number of games played during the scenario unset period.

FIG. 8(b-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to during the scenario unset period. In the specific example of FIG. 8(b-2), it is assumed that no jackpot game is won during the period from the start of the scenario unset period to the end of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-2), immediately after the clear operation is executed and the scenario unset period is started, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to. When the clear operation is executed, the game enters a low-probability, non-time-saving gaming state. Further, when the game is played 800 times after the clear operation is executed, the state shifts to the second time-saving game state. As described above, during the scenario setting period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table T referred to in the low probability non-time saving gaming state changes from the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 to the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 according to the number of games. Change. On the other hand, in the low probability non-time saving gaming state in the scenario unset period, the referenced variation pattern determination table T does not change from the variation pattern determination table Tn1.

As shown in FIG. 8(b-2), when the second time-saving gaming state is started in the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is set. After that, when the second time-saving game state ends and the state shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set. In the above configuration, during the scenario non-setting period, the variation pattern determination table is not changed (according only to the number of games) other than when the gaming state changes.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T referred to in each gaming state. In this embodiment, when each game is started, a variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern of the game is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the production control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The sub CPU 121 is controlled to the production mode corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. FIG. 9 shows each production mode corresponding to each variation pattern determination table.

As described above, the variation pattern determination table T is referred to and the variation pattern is determined by lottery. In addition, the time during which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner may differ depending on the variation pattern. In the above configuration, the time during which the special symbols are variably displayed in each game is variable. In this embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the average time during which the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each game when the game is played according to the normal procedure during the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is referred to is calculated as "special symbols" in the period. "Average fluctuation time" may be written. In FIG. 9, the average fluctuation time (short, long, fixed) of special symbols during the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is referred to is shown corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination table T. In addition, the above-mentioned "playing the game according to the normal procedure" means to play the game with the left during the period when the right-hand game lamp 28 is off, and to play with the right during the period when the right-hand game lamp 28 is lit, so-called ``stop game'' (single game). (including).

As shown in FIG. 9, in the first time-saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Ta1, the variable pattern determination table Ta2, the variable pattern determination table Tj1, the variable pattern determination table Tj2, and the variable pattern determination table Tax can be referred to. However, the variable pattern determination table T referred to in the first time-saving gaming state changes according to the table scenario S (that is, changes according to the jackpot symbol).

Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is the special symbol B2, the table scenario Sb2 is set and the 100th first time-saving game state is started. In the first time-saving game state (100 times) in which table scenario Sb2 is set, as explained using FIG. 8 (b-1) above, the 90th game (90th game after the jackpot game ends) ), the variable pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the 91st to 99th games refer to the variable pattern determination table Ta2, and the 100th (last) game, the variable pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to.

In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, the production mode becomes the time saving mode A. Furthermore, in a game where the variable pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to, the production mode is the time saving mode A, similar to the game where the variable pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to. That is, in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the production mode in the 1st to 99th games does not change, but when the remaining number of games reaches 10, the variation pattern determination table T changes (Ta1→ Ta2). However, the production mode may be different between the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to and the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to. In the above configuration, when the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 is set reaches 10, the production mode is switched.

In the variation pattern determination table Ta2, a variation pattern for a long time is more likely to be determined than in the variation pattern determination table Ta1. In the above configuration, in the game after the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state reaches 10, for example, a performance (for example, a countdown performance) that notifies (suggests) that the first time-saving game state ends is executed. It becomes easier to find time for In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, an end effect is executed after a judge effect is executed.

In the judge performance, for example, the shielded image GF (see FIG. 16(c) described above) is displayed first. That is, when the judge performance is started, a closed sliding door is displayed. Further, in the judge performance, it is displayed that the sliding door can be opened by repeatedly hitting the performance button 8, and that the first time-saving game state will continue if the sliding door is opened. In the judge performance when the first time-saving game state continues, a moving image of the sliding door opening is finally displayed (the shielding image GF is hidden). On the other hand, in the judge performance when the first time saving game state does not continue, the sliding door remains closed. In the end performance, it is announced that the first time saving game state ends. Note that a specific example of the end effect will be explained in the second embodiment described later (see FIG. 45).

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state immediately after the first time-saving gaming state ends (see FIG. 8(b-1) described above). In a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, the performance mode becomes the normal mode. Further, when the 791st game starts after the end of the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. In a game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to, the performance mode is the immediately preceding mode. In the last-minute mode, effects that are not executed in the normal mode may be executed. For example, in the last-minute mode, an effect indicating that the second time-saving game state will start soon is executed.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, when the second time-saving gaming state starts, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is set. The fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state. In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a rush effect is executed. The entry performance is a performance for notifying that the second time-saving game state has started. The average fluctuation time of the special symbols in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to is longer than the average fluctuation time of the special symbols in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state (games in which Tax is referred to). Specifically, in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a predetermined variation pattern is determined for each result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a variation pattern of the time required to stop and display the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss after executing the judge performance and the end performance is determined. On the other hand, if the player wins the jackpot, the player is notified that the player has won the jackpot after executing the judge performance and the end performance.

In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the second to 1000th (last) games in the second time-saving game state. In the variation pattern determination table Tax, a shorter variation pattern is more likely to be determined than in the non-time-saving gaming state (a game in which Tn1 or Tn2 is referenced). Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, a shorter fluctuation pattern is easily determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 that are referred to in the first time-saving gaming state, and the average fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened. Similarly, in the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx, a shorter fluctuation pattern is easily determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 that are referred to in the first time-saving gaming state, and the average fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened. In a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the performance mode becomes the time saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 9, when table scenario Sb3 is set, fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1, fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2, fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2, fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc, fluctuation pattern determination table Tax The variation pattern determination table T that is referred to in the order of is changed. A specific example of the dynamic pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail using FIG. 11(a), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table T that is referred to in the order of fluctuation pattern determination table Tax, fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc, and fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is changed. A specific example of the dynamic pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set will be described in detail using FIG. 11(b) described later. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, during the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table T that is referred to in the order of fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 and fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is changed. A specific example of the dynamic pattern determination table T referred to in each game during the scenario-unset period will be described in detail using FIG. 10(b) described later.

FIG. 10(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set among the table scenarios S. In addition to the fluctuation pattern determination table T at each time point, FIG. 10(a-1) shows the production mode at each time point, the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times M"), and the second time-saving game state. The remaining number of times until the start (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times N") is shown. The remaining number M and the remaining number N are stored in the main RAM 113, for example.

In each game in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times M is subtracted by a numerical value of "1", and when the remaining number of times M is subtracted to a numerical value of "0", the time-saving game state ends. Further, in each game in the low probability game state, the remaining number of times N is subtracted by a numerical value of "1", and when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to a numerical value of "0", a second time-saving game state is started. The remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800" upon winning the jackpot game and upon the above-mentioned clearing operation. That is, when 800 games (low probability gaming state) are executed from the jackpot game, and when 800 games (low probability gaming state) are executed from the clear operation, the second time saving gaming state starts. be done.

FIG. 10(a-1) shows a game start time ts and a game end time te. As understood from FIG. 10(a-1), the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is subtracted at the end of the game. Specifically, the remaining number of times M is subtracted at the end of a fixed period, which will be described later. Similarly, the remaining number N is subtracted at the end of the fixed period.

As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variable pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to until the 90th game in the first time-saving game state. That is, until the game in which the remaining number of times M in the first time-saving game state is the numerical value "11" and the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "711", the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to. Further, from the 91st to the 99th game in the first time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to. Both the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 and the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 correspond to the time saving mode A (see FIG. 9 described above). In the above configuration, the time saving mode A is used from the first time to the 99th game in the first time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 10(a-1), during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to in the last game of the first time-saving game state, and the game ends after the above-described judge performance is executed. The performance is executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-1), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time ta, and the first time-saving game state ends. In the above specific example, the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "700" at time ta. As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the variable pattern determination table Tn1 is set upon completion of the first time-saving gaming state, and the production mode becomes the normal mode.

FIG. 10(a-2) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in each game in another period in which table scenario Sb2 is set. In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state ends at time ta, similar to the specific example of FIG. 10(a-1) described above. As described above, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is set at the end of the first time-saving gaming state, and after that, when 690 games are played, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 is set. is set. That is, after the jackpot game, the variation pattern determination table Tn2 is referred to from the 791st game. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 corresponds to the immediately preceding mode (see FIG. 9 described above). In the above configuration, after the jackpot game, the immediately preceding mode starts from the 791st game.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tb and the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is set to the numerical value "1000" at time tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 10(a-2), it is assumed that the number of pending games is one or more at time tb, and the first game starts immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. As described above, in the first game of the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to and the entry effect is executed. In addition, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, and the production mode becomes time-saving mode B.

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table that is referred to in each game during the scenario-unset period. As described above, the scenario unset period starts with the clearing operation. When the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times M is initialized to the initial value "0", and a low probability non-time saving gaming state is entered. Furthermore, when the clear operation is executed, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is initialized to a numerical value "800". As shown in FIG. 10(b), in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state during the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to, and the other fluctuation pattern determination tables T are not referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 10(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tb and the second time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 10(b), similar to FIG. 10(a-1) described above, the number of pending items is one or more at the start time tb of the second time-saving gaming state, and the number of pending items is 1 or more immediately after the time tb. 2. Let us assume that the time saving gaming state has started. In the scenario unset period, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is set. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to until the second time-saving gaming state ends. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx corresponds to the time saving mode B (see FIG. 9 described above). In the above configuration, the production mode of the second time-saving game state is the time-saving mode B in either the scenario setting period or the scenario non-setting period.

As can be understood from the above explanation, the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first game in the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the scenario is not set are the fluctuations that are referred to. The pattern determination table T is different. Specifically, in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the dedicated fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, whereas in the second time-saving gaming state in the period where the scenario is not set. In the first game, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx, which is also referred to in subsequent games, is referred to.

In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a longer fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined than in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to and a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. Specifically, in the game in which the variable pattern determination table Ts is referred to, various performances (entering performance, mode selection performance, etc.) when the second time-saving game state is started are executed. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, a variation pattern of a length that allows the above performance to be executed is determined.

On the other hand, in the first game of the second time saving game state in the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to, a shorter fluctuation pattern is more likely to be selected than in a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period is, in principle, shorter than the time in which the rush effect etc. are executed in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to.

Based on the above circumstances, in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the period where the scenario is not set, all the rush effects etc. that are executed in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set are as a general rule Cannot be executed. However, as will be explained in detail later using FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b), in the first game of the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario unset period, the first game in the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set is A performance that omits some of the various performances (mode selection performance) executed in the first game in the 2-hour saving game state is executed.

In this way, there is a first time-saving gaming state that goes through a jackpot, and a second time-saving gaming state that does not go through a jackpot, and the predetermined number of fluctuation displays after the first condition is met (RAM clear) results in a loss. In this case, and if the predetermined number of variable displays after the second condition is met (end of jackpot) results in a loss, the second time-saving gaming state is controlled for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, by having a plurality of conditions for entering the second time-saving game state, it is possible to improve the gameplay, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, after the RAM is cleared, a fluctuating performance is executed using a non-dedicated fluctuation pattern, and a rush performance is executed. On the other hand, after hitting the jackpot, a fluctuating performance is executed using a special fluctuation pattern to execute a rush performance.

FIG. 11(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table T that is referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set. In the first time-saving gaming state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, as in the first time-saving gaming state (100 times) in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is In the 91st to 99th games, the variable pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to.

However, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to in the 100th game. In a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj2 is referred to, a continuation performance is executed after a judge performance is executed. In the continuation performance, it is announced that the first time saving game state will continue. As mentioned above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times) where the table scenario Sb2 is set and the first time-saving game state (799 times) where the table scenario Sb3 is set, the production mode in the game up to the 100th time is Common. Therefore, in the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which table scenario Sb3 is set, it is difficult to determine whether the first time-saving game state will continue in the 101st and subsequent games until the continuation effect is executed ( (including cases where it is virtually impossible).

In the first time-saving game state (799 times) in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the 101st to 799th (last) games. As described above, in a game where the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the production mode becomes the time saving mode B.

When 800 games are executed in the low probability gaming state (non-time saving, time saving), the game shifts to the second time saving gaming state. Therefore, when the first time-saving game state ends 799 times, the second time-saving game state is started through one game of the non-time-saving low probability game state. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, one game executed between the first time-saving game state (799 times) and the second time-saving game state may be referred to as a "gap game". As shown in FIG. 11(a), the variation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game. In a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tnc is referred to, the performance mode becomes the time saving mode B, similar to the game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to.
In addition, in this embodiment, although the example which a gap game is provided is demonstrated, the gap game does not need to be provided. That is, when 800 games are executed in the first time-saving game state, it may shift to the second time-saving game state.

In the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the second time-saving game state is started at time tb. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 11(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the numerical value "1" at time tb. As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, including the first game and the second and subsequent games, and the production mode is set to the time-saving game state. This is mode B. In addition, in the second time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, various effects (such as rush effects) when the second time-saving game state is started in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set are omitted. .

As understood from the above explanation, when the table scenario Sb3 is set, the first time-saving game state (799 times) shifts to the time-saving mode B, and then the second time-saving game state starts via the gap game. Throughout the series of games after this, the performance mode becomes time saving mode B. With the above configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state are a series of time-saving gaming states. However, during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, it may be configured to notify that the first time-saving game state has ended (the gap game has started) and that the second time-saving game state has started.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the variation pattern determination table that is referred to in each game during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. The table scenario Sb4 is set when the 799th first time-saving gaming state is started, similarly to when the table scenario Sb3 is set (see FIG. 11(a) above).

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the table scenario Sb4 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to from the first game to the last game in the first time-saving game state (799 times), and the production mode is It becomes mode B. That is, in the period in which the above-mentioned table scenario Sb3 is set, after the continuous performance is executed in the middle game (100th game) of the first time-saving game state (799 times), the table scenario Sb3 shifts to the time-saving mode B. In the period in which scenario Sb4 is set, the first game in the first time-saving game state shifts to time-saving mode B. In the above configuration, in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, immediately after the first time-saving gaming state starts, the player is substantially notified that the first time-saving gaming state will continue 799 times.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, as in the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game, and the subsequent second time-saving game state Then, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to. In addition, in the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, similarly to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the performance mode is the time saving mode over a series of games of the first time saving game state, the gap game, and the second time saving game state. Become B.

In the period in which the above table scenario Sb4 is set, similarly to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the player is made to recognize that the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state are a series of time-saving gaming states. be able to. In the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, similar to the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the entry performance is not executed at the start of the second time-saving game state.

As understood from the above explanation, in this embodiment, a specific game (for example, the first game) in the second time-saving game state (Tax or Ts is referenced in the first game) started in the scenario setting period The referenced variation pattern determination table T is variable with the specific variation display in the second time-saving gaming state (Tbx is referenced in the first game) started in the scenario unset period.

FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table.
In this embodiment, for each special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21), a random number value for special symbol determination (winning or losing the jackpot), a random number value for the jackpot symbol (winning or losing the jackpot), A variation pattern is determined based on the number of special symbols reserved, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for special symbol variation. In addition, the number in the column of "number of reservations" in FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) means the number of reservations of the special drawing corresponding to the column.

The main CPU 111 determines a variation pattern when the special symbol starts to vary. Further, the main CPU 111 generates a variation pattern designation command that can specify the determined variation pattern. The above fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 120 in the output control process.

12 and FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) show effects (reach, etc.) executed by the effect execution means (for example, the image display device 31) when each variation pattern is determined. "Reach" in this embodiment means that after some of the combinations of performance symbols GA that notify the transition to a special game (jackpot game) are displayed in a stopped state, some of the remaining performance symbols GA are displayed in a variable manner. means a continuous state. For example, assume that a combination of three performance symbols GA "777" is set as the combination of performance symbols GA that informs the transition to a jackpot game. In the above case, the state where two performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed at "7" and the remaining performance symbols GA are displayed in a variable manner is "reach".

Although detailed description will be omitted, the variation pattern designation command of this embodiment is configured to include a first message indicating MODE and a second message indicating DATA. The first telegram (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 becomes "E6H". On the other hand, the first telegram (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command indicating the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 21 becomes "E7H". The second message (DATA) of the variation pattern designation command indicates a specific variation pattern number.

As a feature shown in FIG. 13, an immediate winning variation pattern (non-reach, etc.) is easier to determine when a jackpot occurs during the second time-saving gaming state than when a jackpot occurs during the first time-saving gaming state.

<Fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving gaming state>
FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table used in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. As described above, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, one of the variable pattern determination table Tn1, the variable pattern determination table Tn2, and the variable pattern determination table Tnc is referred to. FIG. 12 is a conceptual diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 among the above fluctuation pattern determination tables. In addition, the "fluctuating time" shown in FIG. 12 and FIGS. 13(a) to (c) described below means the time from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol until the end of the fixed period.

In the variation pattern determination table Tn1, the variation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 include variation pattern a (1x to 3x), variation pattern b (1x to 6x), and variation pattern. c (1x to 6x), variation pattern dx, variation pattern ex, variation pattern fx, or variation pattern g is determined.

The main CPU 111 operates according to the type of special symbol display device, the type of special symbol (a combination of the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for symbols), the number of reserved special symbols, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation. Then, determine one of the fluctuation patterns. The random number value for reach determination has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, the random number value for special symbol variation has a random number range of "0 to 99" and is obtained before determining the variation pattern.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is always performed in a variable pattern in which a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach effect may not be executed in a variable pattern in which a small winning symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed. Therefore, when a special symbol corresponding to a jackpot or small win is stopped and displayed, the random number value for reach determination is not used when determining the fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 12 shows the effect executed by the effect execution means such as the image display device 31 when the special symbol display device is variably displayed in each variation pattern. For example, in the variation pattern a (1x to 3x), a "normal reach effect" is executed. The above-mentioned "normal reach performance" is a reach performance in which the left and right symbols of the performance symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol fluctuates, and the expectation level of winning the jackpot is relatively low.

In the variation pattern b (x1 to x6), "SP reach effect" is executed. The above "SP ready-to-reach performance" is a ready-to-reach performance in which the left and right symbols of the performance symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, similar to the normal ready-to-reach performance described above. However, in the SP reach effect, a specific moving image (reach movie) that is not displayed in the normal reach effect is displayed on the image display device 31. When the above SP reach effect is executed, there is a higher possibility that the winning of the jackpot will be announced (the same three effect symbols GA will be displayed) than the normal reach effect.

In the variation pattern c (x1 to x6), "SPSP reach effect" is executed. The above "SPSP ready-to-reach performance" is a ready-to-reach performance in which the left and right symbols of the performance symbols GA displayed on the image display device 31 are temporarily stopped, like other ready-to-reach performances. However, in the SPSP reach effect, a specific moving image that is not displayed in other reach effects is displayed on the image display device 31. When the above SPSP reach effect is executed, there is a higher possibility that a jackpot win will be announced after that than the SP reach effect.

In this embodiment, in a game in which an SP ready-to-win effect is executed, a normal ready-to-reach effect is executed before the SP ready-to-reach effect. That is, the normal reach performance develops into the SP reach performance. In addition, in a game in which an SPSP ready-to-win performance is executed, the normal ready-to-reach performance develops into the SP ready-to-reach performance, and the SP ready-to-reach performance develops into the SPSP ready-to-reach performance. However, there may be cases where the normal reach performance directly develops into the SPSP reach performance.

For example, assume that a special symbol A1 (jackpot) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 12, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 3", the variation pattern a1x is determined. In the above variation pattern a1x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a1x, a normal reach performance is executed on the image display device 31, and a performance that notifies a probability variable jackpot is executed.

When the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern b1x is determined if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "4 to 15". Further, if the random number value for special symbol variation is one of the numerical values "16 to 34", variation pattern b2x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from "35 to 65", the variation pattern c1x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from "66 to 98", the variation pattern c1x is determined. If the pattern c2x is determined and the random number value for special symbol variation is the numerical value "99", the variation pattern g is determined.

In the variation pattern b1x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 60000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern b1x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a probability variable jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 60,000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a variable probability jackpot is notified.

In the variation pattern c1x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 70000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c1x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a probability variable jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c2x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 70,000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a variable probability jackpot is notified. In the variation pattern g, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 80,000 ms, a full rotation reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a probability variable jackpot is announced.

When the special symbol A2 (short hit probability variable) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern dx is determined regardless of the random number value for special symbol variation. In the above variation pattern dx, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 20000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern dx, a short winning effect is executed on the image display device 31. The above-mentioned short hit performance is a performance to notify that a small hit or a short hit (probable and variable jackpot) has been won.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol A3 (usually jackpot) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, if the random value for special symbol variation is any of the numbers "0 to 3", the variation pattern a2x is determined. In the above variation pattern a2x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a2x, a normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and an effect that notifies a normal jackpot is executed.

When the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern b3x is determined if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "4 to 15". Also, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 16 to 34, the variation pattern b4x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 35 to 65, the variation pattern b4x is determined. Pattern c3x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "66 to 99", variation pattern c4x is determined.

In the variation pattern b3x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 60000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern b3x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 60,000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified.

In the variation pattern c3x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 70000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c3x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c4x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 70,000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a normal jackpot is notified.

When the special symbol K (small win) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, in the same way as when the special symbol A2 (probable variable short win) is stopped and displayed, regardless of the random number value for special symbol variation, A fluctuation pattern dx is determined.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the special symbol H is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern is determined according to the combination of the number of reserved first special symbols, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol variation. is determined.

For example, assume that the number of reserved first special symbols is "0 to 2". In the above case, if the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 69", the reach effect is not executed and the variation pattern ex is determined. In the above variation pattern ex, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 3000 ms. Furthermore, in the variation pattern ex, after the normal performance (normal variation) is performed, the performance that notifies you of a loss is performed.

On the other hand, when the number of first special symbols reserved is "0 to 2", if the random number value for reach determination is "70 to 99", a reach effect according to the random number value for special symbol variation is executed. Specifically, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Also, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numbers "28 to 48", the variation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number "49 to 77", the variation pattern b5x is determined. Pattern b6x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 78 to 88, the variation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 89 to 99, the variation pattern c5x is determined. Pattern c6x is determined.

In the variation pattern a3x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 35000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern a3x, a normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

In the variation pattern b5x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 55000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern b5x, the SP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern b6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 55,000 ms, the SP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

In the variation pattern c5x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 65000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern c5x, the SPSP reach 1 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern c6x, the first special symbol display device 20 is displayed in a variable manner for about 65000 ms, the SPSP reach 2 effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a loss is notified.

Further, it is assumed that the number of first special symbols held is "3" when the special symbols H are stopped and displayed. In the above case, if the random number value for reach determination is "0 to 89", the reach effect is not executed and the variation pattern fx is determined regardless of the random number value for special symbol variation. In the above variation pattern fx, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 2000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern fx, after the normal performance is performed, a performance that notifies you of a loss is performed.

On the other hand, when the number of first special symbols reserved is "3", if the random number value for reach determination is "90 to 99", the ready-to-reach effect according to the random number value for special symbol variation is executed. Specifically, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 27", the variation pattern a3x is determined. Also, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numbers "28 to 48", the variation pattern b5x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number "49 to 77", the variation pattern b5x is determined. Pattern b6x is determined. Furthermore, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 78 to 88, the variation pattern c5x is determined, and if the random number value for special symbol variation is any number from 89 to 99, the variation pattern c5x is determined. Pattern c6x is determined. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol display device 21 in the non-time saving gaming state is determined in the same manner as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 described above.

<Variation pattern determination table for time-saving gaming state>
FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c) are conceptual diagrams of an example of a variation pattern determination table used in the low probability time saving gaming state. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state), the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj1, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tj2, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Either Tax, the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts, or the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to.

FIG. 13A is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, for example, in the second time-saving game state that is started (via the jackpot game) in the scenario setting period in which the table scenario S is set.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to, one of the variable patterns J1a to J1n is determined by lottery. In the above game, the variation patterns of the second special symbol are "immediate hit effect (probable variable jackpot, normal jackpot)," "direct alignment effect (probable variable jackpot, normal jackpot)," "7 symbol reach (probable variable jackpot)," Variation patterns (J1a to J1k) in which "short variation (loss)", "straight line false performance (loss)", and "reach promotion (loss)" are executed can be determined. In addition, in the above game, the variation patterns (J1l to J1n) in which "Special 1 hit (probable variable jackpot, normal jackpot)" and "Special 1 loss (loss)" are executed as the variation pattern of the first special symbol are determined. obtain. However, in the time-saving gaming state, since the game is played by right-handed hitting and the second special symbol fluctuates, the fluctuation pattern J1k is usually determined from the fluctuation pattern J1a.

The instant hit performance is a performance in which the time from when the special symbols start changing to when the winning of the jackpot is announced is relatively short. For example, in the instant hit performance, about 0.5 seconds after the start of variation of the special symbols, the performance pattern GA (for example, "777") corresponding to the jackpot pattern is displayed (temporarily stopped). In addition, in the immediate hit performance after the performance pattern GA stops (after about 0.5 seconds), for example, the performance pattern GA corresponding to the special pattern B2 (normal pattern) corresponds to the special pattern B1 (probability variable pattern). A performance to be promoted to a performance pattern GA is executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot pattern may be referred to as "the effect pattern GA for jackpot". In the above instant hit performance, the ready-to-win performance is not executed and the variable display of the three symbol images stops almost simultaneously. Note that the length of the instant win performance can be changed as appropriate. For example, in an instant win performance, the jackpot performance symbol GA is stopped and displayed approximately 0.5 seconds after the special symbol begins to fluctuate, and then, after a confirmation period of approximately 0.5 seconds, the jackpot game starts. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

Like the instant hit performance, the direct alignment performance is a performance in which the jackpot performance symbols GA are stopped and displayed without executing the reach performance. However, the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbols until the winning of the jackpot game is announced is longer in the straight-line performance than in the immediate-win performance. For example, in the straight alignment effect, the jackpot effect pattern GA is displayed (temporarily stopped) about 15 seconds after the variable display of the special pattern starts. The straight alignment trick performance is a performance in which the same performance as the straight alignment performance is executed until the middle, and finally the performance pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

7-symbol reach is a performance in which a jackpot performance pattern GA (777 symbol combinations) corresponding to a probability-variable jackpot is displayed. Specifically, in the 7 symbol reach, two production symbols GA representing the number "7" temporarily stop, the reach production is executed, and then the jackpot production symbol GA representing the symbol combination of "777" is displayed. Ru. For example, in the case of 7-symbol reach, the reach effect is executed about 20 seconds after the special symbol starts changing (the probability-variable jackpot is actually announced), and then, about 20 seconds later, the jackpot effect symbol GA is displayed. Ru. As understood from FIG. 13(a), the 7-symbol reach is the longest (approximately 50 seconds) among the variable patterns that can be determined in the game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to. The reach promotion is a performance in which the same effect as the 7-symbol reach is executed until the middle, and finally the reach effect is not executed and the effect pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. According to the above-mentioned reach promotion, it is possible to improve the expectation that the 7-symbol reach may be executed.

Short fluctuation (loss) is a performance in which the reach performance is not executed and the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the short variation, the production symbol GA is stopped and displayed approximately 0.5 seconds after the special symbol variation starts, and then the production symbol GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. The current state is maintained. The long variation (loss) is an effect in which the reach effect is not executed and the effect pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the long variation, the production symbol GA is stopped and displayed approximately 3.5 seconds after the special symbol variation starts, and then the production symbol GA is stopped and displayed for a fixed period of 0.5 seconds. The current state is maintained.

As understood from FIG. 13(a), the instant win effect is executed with a probability of about 8/10 in a game in which a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot is won. That is, in the second time-saving game state (a game in which Tax is referred to), an immediate win performance is executed in most (approximately 80%) of the games in which the jackpot is won. However, the probability that the instant winning effect will be executed can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be configured such that when winning a probability variable jackpot, the winning is executed with a probability of about 1/10, and when winning a regular jackpot, the winning is executed with a probability of about 1/2. With the above configuration, when the direct alignment effect and the 7-symbol reach effect are executed, the expectation for a variable probability jackpot can be improved more than when the instant hit effect is executed. In other words, the longer the time until the jackpot effect pattern GA is displayed, the more the expectation for the probability variable jackpot can be improved.

The above-mentioned immediate win performance and direct alignment performance can be executed both when winning a normal jackpot and when winning a probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, the 7-symbol reach can be executed only when winning a probability-variable jackpot. In the above configuration, in the time saving mode B in which the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to (see FIG. 9 described above), a variable probability jackpot is substantially notified when the ready-to-win effect is executed with 7 symbols. Therefore, in the time-saving mode B, it is possible to improve the fun of the performances (7-symbol ready-to-win, ready-to-reach excitement) in which the presence or absence of the relevant ready-to-win performance is notified. However, in the game in the time-saving mode B where the player loses in the jackpot lottery, a configuration may be adopted in which a reach effect can be executed with seven symbols.

FIG. 13(b) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Tbx. The fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving game state that is started in the scenario unset period (without going through the jackpot game). In addition, in this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T that is referred to in the second time-saving gaming state is different depending on whether it is via the jackpot game or not, but in each of the above cases, the variation pattern determination table T may be common.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in a game where the variation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to, the variation pattern J2g can be determined from the variation pattern J2a. In the game in which the variation pattern J2a is determined, the above-mentioned immediate win effect (probable variable jackpot) is executed. In addition, in the game in which the fluctuation pattern J2b is determined, the above-mentioned instant hit effect (normal jackpot) is executed, and in the game in which the fluctuation pattern J2c is determined, the above-mentioned short fluctuation (loss) is executed, and the fluctuation pattern J2d is executed. In the determined game, the above-mentioned long fluctuation (loss) is executed, in the game in which the fluctuation pattern J2e is determined, the above-mentioned instant hit performance (probable variable jackpot) is executed, and in the game in which the fluctuation pattern J2f is determined, In a game in which the above-mentioned immediate win effect (normal jackpot) is executed and the variation pattern J2g is determined, the above-mentioned special 1 loss (loss) is executed.

As understood from the above explanation, the 7-symbol reach is executed in the game where the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to, but is not executed in the game where the variable pattern determination table Tbx is referred to. Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the second time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation pattern determining table Tax is also referred to in the first time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 9 above). The above configuration can also be said to be that the fluctuation pattern that can be determined is variable between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

FIG. 13(c) is a conceptual diagram of a specific example of the variation pattern determination table Ta1. The fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to from the 1st to the 90th game in the first time-saving game state in which the table scenario Sb2 or the table scenario Sb3 is set.

As described above, the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 (Ta2) is referred to is the time saving mode A, and the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to is the time saving mode B. Therefore, as understood from FIGS. 13(a) to 13(c), there is a game (time saving mode A) in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to, and a game (time saving mode A) in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax (Tbx) is referred to. The effects that can be performed are different depending on the time saving mode B). Specifically, the performance executed in one of the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B is not performed in the other production mode. However, an effect that is executed in common in both time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B may be provided. That is, although the effects executed in each effect mode are different in principle, a configuration may be adopted in which specific effects are executed in common in each effect mode. Furthermore, the effects executed in the time saving mode A and the time saving mode B may all be the same. Furthermore, although the effects executed in each effect mode are basically the same, a specific effect may be executed in only one effect mode.

In this embodiment, in each game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to, the average time of the period in which the performance symbols GA are displayed in a variable manner (the period in which the symbol images are scrolled and displayed) (hereinafter simply referred to as "average fluctuation of the performance symbols GA"). time'') is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA in each game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to and the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA in each game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to. That is, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA is shorter in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. Further, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA during the period in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to is shorter than the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA in each game in which other fluctuation pattern determination tables T are referred to. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA may be configured to be shorter in the first time-saving game state than in the second time-saving game state.
That is, the average fluctuation time during the second time-saving game state is likely to be shorter than the average fluctuation time during the first time-saving game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the average fluctuation time of the production symbol GA is longer than that of the game that won the jackpot in the second time-saving game state than the game that won the jackpot in the first time-saving game state during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. It will be shorter. However, depending on the table scenario S, the average fluctuation time of the performance symbols GA may be configured to be shorter in a game that wins a jackpot in the first time-saving game state than in a game that wins a jackpot in the second time-saving game state. .

As described above, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted by the numerical value "1" in each game, and when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the second time-saving game state is started. The above remaining number of times N is maintained by the backup power supply even if the power is cut off. Therefore, when the gaming hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed starts business, it is possible to leave the remaining number N of the previous day unchanged. However, if a clear operation is performed when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the remaining number of times N is initialized.

In this embodiment, a configuration is employed in which whether or not the remaining number of times N before the power is turned off remains unchanged is concealed immediately after the start of the game, and can be notified thereafter. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting whether or not the remaining number N will remain unchanged during the period immediately after the start of the game. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 14(a) is a mock diagram of a screen displayed on the image display device 31. Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is a simulated diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. In each game, the image display device 31 displays performance symbols GA (x, y, w), pending images GB (x, y), fourth symbols GC (1, 2), pending number images GD (1, 2), and Various images including the small pattern Ga are displayed.

The performance symbols GA are variably displayed during the period in which the special symbol display devices (20, 21) are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed during the period in which the special symbol display devices are stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect pattern GA stops displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The specific example of FIG. 14(a) assumes a case where a losing symbol (special symbol H) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. In the above case, for example, the effect pattern GA stops displaying the pattern combination "782".

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the performance symbol GA stops and displays a symbol combination (for example, "777") corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Similarly, the effect pattern GA stops displaying a symbol combination (for example, "757") corresponding to the small winning symbol when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. The performance pattern GA includes a performance pattern GAx (see FIG. 14(a)), a performance pattern GAy (see FIG. 17(b)), and a performance pattern GAw. The effect pattern GAx is displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. Further, the performance symbol GAy is displayed in the time saving mode A, and the performance symbol GAw is displayed in the time saving mode B.

The fourth symbol GC indicates the fluctuation state of the special symbol display device (20, 21). Specifically, during the period in which the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol GC is stopped and displayed. For example, during the period in which the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol GC is stopped and displayed in the first color (for example, white). On the other hand, during the period in which the special symbol display device is variably displayed, the fourth symbol GC is variably displayed. For example, during the period in which the special symbol display device is variably displayed, the fourth symbol GC is alternately displayed in the first color and the second color (for example, red).

The fourth symbol GC includes a fourth symbol GC1 and a fourth symbol GC2. The fourth symbol GC1 shows the variation mode of the first special symbol display device 20, and the fourth symbol GC2 shows the variation mode of the second special symbol display device 21. Specifically, the fourth symbol GC1 is variably displayed during a period in which the first special symbol display device 20 is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed in a period in which the first special symbol display device 20 is stopped and displayed. Similarly, the fourth symbol GC2 is variably displayed during the period in which the second special symbol display device 21 is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed in the period in which the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. That is, the common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. Specifically, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a different fourth symbol GC is displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the jackpot game, the fourth symbol GC may be displayed.

The pending number image GD (1, 2) displays the pending number (first pending number, second pending number). Specifically, the pending number image GD includes a pending number image GD1 and a pending number image GD2. The pending number image GD1 displays the first pending number. Further, the pending number image GD2 displays the second pending number. In the specific example of FIG. 14A, it is assumed that the first number of reservations is four and the second number of reservations is zero.

The reservation number image GD of this embodiment is common to the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state, similar to the above-mentioned fourth symbol GC. That is, a common pending number image GD is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. Specifically, a common pending number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which different pending number images GD are displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the jackpot game, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending number image GD is displayed.

The small symbol Ga is composed of three symbols (an upper symbol, a middle symbol, and a lower symbol) similarly to the performance symbol GA. Further, the small symbol Ga is displayed in a variable manner during a period in which the special symbol display device (20, 21) is displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed in a static manner during a period in which the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the effect pattern GA may be temporarily hidden depending on the effect to be performed. Even in the above case, the small pattern Ga continues to be displayed in principle.

When a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops and displays a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Further, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning symbol. Similarly, when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the losing symbol. Furthermore, in principle, when the performance pattern GA is stopped and displayed, the small pattern Ga is stopped and displayed in the same manner as the performance pattern GA. For example, when you win a jackpot and the production pattern GA stops displaying at "7, 7, 7", the small symbol Ga also stops and displays at "7, 7, 7", you win a small hit, and the production pattern When the GA is stopped and displayed at "7.5.7", the small pattern Ga is also stopped and displayed at "7.5.7".

In this embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. That is, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state and the high probability time saving game state. Specifically, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display Apart from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20, a small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided. In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may have a display mode common to the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20, or 1. The display mode may be different from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol display device 20.

In this embodiment, a different background image GH is displayed for each production mode. For example, in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode, the background image GHx (an example of the first background image) is displayed (see FIG. 14(a)). However, the background image GH may be common to all or part of each production mode. The pending image GB includes a pending image GBx (see FIG. 14(a)), a pending image GBy (see FIG. 17(b)), and a pending image GBw (see FIG. 17(a)). In the pending image GBx, the above-mentioned random value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "judgment information") is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area (first to fourth storage) in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. displayed when Specifically, a plurality of pending images GBx corresponding to each determination information stored in the first special symbol pending storage area are displayed. The pending image GBy is displayed when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol pending storage area in the time saving mode A. The pending image GBw is displayed when the determination information is stored in the second special symbol pending storage area in the time saving mode B.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the number of games image GE is displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. The game count image GE displays the game count in the low probability game state. Therefore, when the number displayed by the game count image GE ("550" in the specific example of FIG. 14(a)) is added up to "800", the low probability non-time-saving gaming state then shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. It becomes possible. The above configuration has the advantage that the player can easily grasp the number of games until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state.

However, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then the power is supplied (when the power is turned OFF/ON), the number of games image GE will be changed to a number regardless of the number of remaining times N stored in the main RAM 113. Display “0”. That is, when the power is turned off and on with the remaining number N subtracted from the initial value "800", the number of games image GE displays the number "0" although the remaining number N is not the initial value. In the above case, before the number of games image GE displays the number "800", the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time-saving game state is started. On the other hand, if a clear operation is performed when the power is turned on, the remaining number of times N is initialized. In the above case, in a game where the number of games image GE is added to the number "800", the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0", and the second time-saving game state is started.

As can be understood from the above explanation, in the period immediately after the power is turned off/on, it is not possible to determine whether the remaining number of times N remains unchanged (whether or not a clear operation has been performed). Specifically, in the period immediately after the power is turned OFF/ON, the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state cannot be specified from the number of games image GE. With the above configuration, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting whether or not the remaining number N will remain unchanged during the period immediately after the start of the game.

FIG. 14(b) is a diagram showing a specific example of the stationary notification image GI. The deferred notification image GI is displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times N is deferred before and after the power is turned off/on. Further, the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the area RI of the screen shown in FIG. 14(a) described above during a specific number of games after the power is turned on. Specifically, the stationary notification image GI indicates the 51st game since the power was turned on (a game in which the number in the number of games image GE is added to "50") or the 101st game since the power was turned on (the number of games image GE is displayed as a game in which the number is added to "100").

According to the above configuration, the deferral notification image GI notifies that the remaining number of times N is deferral. Note that the number in the game count image GE is added at the end of the game (when the confirmation command is received). Therefore, it can also be said that the upper station notification image GI starts displaying a game where the number of games image GE is "50" at the start, or a game where the number of games image GE is "100" at the start. Ru. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, "a game in which the number in the number of games image GE is 'X' at the start" (a game in which the number in the number of games image GE is added to "X+1" at the end) is simply referred to as "the number of games in the number of games image GE". It may be written as "a game where the number is 'X'".

Furthermore, the stationary notification image GI is displayed on the condition that the remaining number of times N is equal to or less than the numerical value "200" in the specific number of games. For example, in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number N is less than or equal to the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the game. On the other hand, in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is greater than the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the game. However, even if the stationary notification image GI is not displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the value "200" or less in the 101st game after the power is turned on, then the 101st game after the power is turned on is In the second game, the stationary notification image GI is displayed. Note that the stationary notification image GI is displayed in a common manner regardless of whether it is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on or the 101st game after the power is turned on.

Even in the 101st game after the power is turned on, if the remaining number N is larger than the numerical value "200", the stationary notification image GI will not be displayed even if the remaining number N is left unchanged. Furthermore, the stationary notification image GI is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then becomes hidden (see FIG. 14(d) described below). Furthermore, if the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the 51st game after the power is turned on, it will not be displayed in the 101st game after the power is turned on. Note that a configuration in which a predetermined sound is output when the stationary notification image GI is displayed is suitable.

FIG. 14(c) is a diagram showing a specific example of the remaining number of times image GN. The remaining number of times image GN displays the actual remaining number of games until the second time-saving game state is started. That is, the remaining number of times image GN displays the current value of the remaining number of times N. The remaining number of times image GN is displayed, for example, in the area RN of the screen shown in FIG. 14(a) described above. In this embodiment, both the game count image GE and the remaining game count image GN are displayed simultaneously (in parallel). However, the remaining number of times image GN is not displayed in the period immediately after the power is turned on. With the above configuration, the current value of the remaining number of times N can be hidden during the period immediately after the power is turned on.

The remaining number of times image GN is displayed starting from the game in which the above-mentioned stationary notification image GI is displayed, and is displayed in subsequent games in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. However, as described above, the stationary notification image GI may not be displayed even once. In the above case, the remaining number of times image GN starts to be displayed in the 101st game after the power is turned on. Note that the remaining number of times image GN may be temporarily hidden during a period in which a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach or SPSP reach) is executed.

FIG. 14(d) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a period in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed and a period in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in a game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed. . In FIG. 14(d), it is assumed that a game in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed starts at time ts and ends at time te.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), the stationary notification image GI starts to be displayed immediately after the game starts, and disappears at a predetermined time. Furthermore, at approximately the same time that the stationary notification image GI becomes non-display, the remaining number of times image GN starts to be displayed. The remaining number of times image GN continues to be displayed in subsequent games, and becomes hidden after the second time-saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the stationary notification image GI is displayed before the remaining number of times image GN. Therefore, after the deferral notification image GI notifies that the remaining number of times N is deferred, the remaining number of times image GN notifies the actual remaining number of times N.

Assume a comparison example in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed before the stationary notification image GI. Whether or not the game count image N is left unchanged can be determined from the actual number of games played since the power is turned on (the number displayed by the game count image GE) and the number displayed by the remaining game count image GN. For example, in the 101st game after the power is turned on, when the remaining number of times image GN displays a value other than the number "700", it is understood that the remaining number of times N is unchanged. Therefore, in the comparison example described above, it is practically announced whether or not the remaining number of times N is deferred before the deferred notification image GI is displayed, which is disadvantageous in that the deferred notification image GI is not noticed by the player. occurs. According to this embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(d), the stationary notification image GI starts to be displayed during the early period Pf of the game, and becomes hidden before the end of the early period Pf. The above early period Pf is a predetermined period of time after the game starts. Specifically, when a ready-to-win effect is executed in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed, the early period Pf is shorter than the period from the start of the game until the ready-to-win effect is executed. According to the above configuration, the display period of the stationary notification image GI ends before the reach effect starts. Therefore, the inconvenience that the image displayed in the reach effect becomes difficult to attract attention due to the stationary notification image GI is suppressed. Further, the opening period Pf is a time shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed.

Note that the display performance of the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN is executed even if a jackpot is won in the current game. Suppose that in a game in which the remaining number of games image GN is scheduled to be displayed, if a jackpot is won, the remaining number of games image GN is not displayed. With the above configuration, there is an inconvenience that it is detected that the player has won the jackpot at the time when the remaining number of times image GN does not start to be displayed during the early period Pf. Furthermore, a similar problem may occur in a configuration in which the stationary notification image GI is not displayed when a jackpot is won in a game in which the stationary notification image GI is scheduled to be displayed. The configuration of this embodiment has the advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages can be suppressed.

FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of when the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. 15(a) to FIG. 15(d), in addition to the period during which each of the above images is displayed, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state at each time point is shown.

FIG. 15(a) shows the timing at which the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in the period from immediately after the jackpot game ends until the second time-saving game state starts. As shown in FIG. 15(a), the remaining number of times image GN is displayed immediately after the jackpot game ends. Further, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden when the second time saving game state is started. However, when the second time-saving game state is started, if the number of reservations is a numerical value "0", the display of the remaining number of times image GN continues (see FIG. 19 described later).

As shown in FIG. 15(a), the stationary notification image GI shows a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" and a number "100" in the number of games image GE during the period after the end of the jackpot game. It is not displayed in any game including games that display . In the above configuration, even if the remaining number of times N is left unchanged, this fact may not be reported even once through the above images. For example, if a jackpot game is won in the 50th game after the power is turned on, the stationary notification image GI is not displayed, and the remaining number of times N when the power is turned on is not notified by the remaining number of times image GN. Therefore, it is not reported whether or not the remaining number of times N has been deferred.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after the power is turned on until the second time-saving game state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is left unchanged. Specifically, assume that the remaining number of times N when the power is turned on is a numerical value "X". In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 15(b), the remaining number N (number "X-50") in a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" (the 51st game after the power is turned on) is the number "200". ”Assume the following case.

In the above specific example of FIG. 15(b), in a game where the number of games image GE displays the numerical value "50", the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. Specifically, in the above-mentioned early period Pf, the deferred notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are displayed. Note that if the deferred notification image GI is displayed in a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50," the deferred notification image GI is not displayed in a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "100." As shown in FIG. 15(b), the stationary notification image GI is hidden before the early period Pf ends. On the other hand, the remaining number of times image GN is continuously displayed until the second time saving game state is started.

FIG. 15(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after the power is turned on until the second time-saving game state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(c), it is assumed that the remaining number N is left unchanged as in FIG. 15(b) described above. Specifically, the remaining number of times N when the power is turned on is the number "X", and the remaining number of times N (the number "X") in a game where the number of games image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game after the power is turned on) is -100") is less than or equal to the numerical value "200". Furthermore, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the remaining number N (number "X-50") of a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" is greater than the number "200". In the above specific example of FIG. 15(c), in a game where the number of games image GE displays the number "50", the stationary notification image GI and the remaining number of times image GN are not displayed, and the number of games image GE displays the number "100". In a game that displays , a stationary notification image GI and a remaining number of times image GN are displayed.

FIG. 15(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the display period of each image in the period from immediately after the power is turned on until the second time-saving game state starts. In the specific example of FIG. 15(d), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is left unchanged as in FIGS. 15(b) and 15(c) described above. Specifically, the remaining number of times N when the power is turned on is the number "X", and the remaining number of times N (the number "X") in a game where the number of games image GE displays the number "100" (the 101st game after the power is turned on) is -100'') is larger than the numerical value ``200''. In the above specific example of FIG. 15(d), in any game including a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "50" and a game in which the number of games image GE displays the number "100", the Notification image GI is not displayed. On the other hand, the remaining number of times image GN starts to be displayed in a game where the number of games image GE displays the number "100".

FIGS. 16(a) to 16(f) are diagrams for explaining each screen M (1 to 7) displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. Although details will be described later, each screen M displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state changes depending on whether or not the table scenario S is set. Further, each screen M displayed at the start of the second time-saving gaming state also changes depending on the type of table scenario S that is set. FIGS. 16(a) to 16(f) are simulated diagrams of each screen M displayed during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set among the table scenarios S.

FIG. 16(a) is a mock diagram of the screen M1 displayed immediately after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. Screen M1 is displayed for a predetermined time after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. In the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, the performance mode immediately before the second time-saving game state is started becomes the immediately preceding mode. As described above, in the immediately preceding mode, the background image GHx, the effect symbol GAx, the pending image GBx, and the number of games image GE are displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(a), in this embodiment, the above-mentioned images displayed in the immediately preceding mode are continuously displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state.

Furthermore, in the last-minute mode, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the remaining number of times image GN continues to be displayed even immediately after the start of the first game in the second time saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0" as the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state is started. The color of the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN changes when the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state is started is subtracted to a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) or less. For example, in a game where the remaining number of games until the second time-saving game state starts is more than a predetermined number of times, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in white, and the number of remaining games until the second time-saving game state starts. In a game where the number of times remaining is less than a predetermined number of times, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed game image GS1 is displayed. In addition, as will be described in detail later, when the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the next game (the first game in the second time-saving game state) will start immediately or not. 2. Transition to time saving gaming state. Specifically, it is assumed that the number of pending games is "0" at the time when the remaining number N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" and the game ends. In the above case, immediately after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In the above customer waiting state, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed.

FIG. 16(b) is a mock diagram of the screen M2 displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Screen M2 is displayed after switching from screen M1 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As shown in FIG. 16(b), the screen M2 displays a game count image GE, a background image GHx, a small symbol Ga, and a pending image GBx, similarly to the screen M1. However, when switching from screen M1 to screen M2, the remaining number of times image GN is hidden and the start notification image Gn is displayed. The start notification image Gn is an image for notifying that the second time saving game state has started. For example, a message indicating that the second time-saving game state has started is displayed on the start notification image Gn. Furthermore, when the screen M1 is switched to the screen M2, the effect image GAx is hidden, and the start notification image Gn is displayed in the area where the effect image GAx was displayed (substantially in the center of the screen).

FIG. 16(c) is a mock diagram of the screen M3 displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Screen M3 is displayed after switching from screen M2 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As shown in FIG. 16(c), each image including the small pattern Ga is displayed on the screen M3, similarly to the screen M2. Furthermore, the effect image GAx is not displayed on the screen M3 (same as the screen M2). However, the effect image GA may be displayed on the screen M2 and the screen M3.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), the start notification image Gn, right-handed game image GS1, pending image GBx, game count image GE, and background image GHx displayed on screen M2 are not displayed on screen M3. Specifically, the shielded images GF (GF1, GF2) are displayed on the screen M3. The shielding image GF is an image that shields the background image GHx to make it difficult to view (including cases where it is virtually impossible). The shielding image GF of this embodiment shields substantially the entire area of the background image GHx. However, it is sufficient that the background image GHx becomes difficult to see when the shielding image GF is displayed, and a configuration may be adopted in which the shielding image GF partially shields the background image GHx.

The shielding image GF is an image representing a sliding door, and is configured to include a left shielding image GF1 and a right shielding image GF2. The shielding image GF is displayed with priority over the start notification image Gn, the right-handed game image GS1, the pending image GBx, the number of games image GE, and the background image GHx (in front of each image). The left shielded image GF1 is displayed moving from the left side to the center of the image display device 31 while the screen M2 is displayed. Further, the right shielded image GF2 is displayed moving from the right side to the center of the image display device 31 while the screen M2 is displayed. That is, when screen M3 is displayed, the image display device 31 displays the action of closing the sliding door. In the screen M3, the position of the right side of the left shielded image GF1 and the position of the left side of the right shielded image GF2 substantially match. However, an image representing something other than a sliding door may be adopted as the shielding image GF.

As described above, in this embodiment, the right-handed hitting image GS1 is not displayed on the screen M2. On the other hand, right-handed hitting image GS2 is displayed on screen M3. The right-handed game image GS2 is an image for instructing that the game should be played right-handed, similar to the right-handed game image GS1. In the above configuration, right-handed hitting is instructed by the image display device 31 on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Note that the right-hand hitting image GS1 may be configured to be displayed on both the screen M2 and the screen M3. Specifically, the right-handed image GS1 may be displayed in front of the shielded image GF, and the right-handed image GS1 may be displayed so as to be visible even in the period after the shielded image GF is displayed.

FIG. 16(d) is a mock diagram of the screen M4 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Screen M4 is displayed after switching from screen M3 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the screen M4 is displayed by hiding the shielding image GF of the screen M3. For example, the left shielded image GF1 is moved and displayed to the right side of the image display device 31, the right shielded image GF2 is moved and displayed to the left side of the image display device 31, and the shielded image GF is hidden. That is, when the screen M4 is displayed, the image display device 31 displays the action of opening the sliding door.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), the number of games image GE displayed before the shielding image GF is displayed (before the sliding door is closed) (see FIG. 16(b) described above) is the same as that of the shielding image GF. Even if the screen is opened (even if the sliding door is opened), it will not be displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the number-of-games image GE is hidden by the shielding image GF, so that it is not displayed. If the number-of-games image GE suddenly disappears from display, this may cause an inconvenience that may feel unnatural to some players. According to the configuration of this embodiment, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages can be suppressed. Further, as shown in FIG. 16(d), the effect pattern GA and the pending image GB are not displayed on the screen M4.

As shown in FIG. 16(d), various images including the right-handed image GS2 and the small symbol Ga are displayed on the screen M4 (similar to the screen M3, etc.). Further, on the screen M4, a rush effect is executed to notify that the mode will shift to the time saving mode B. Specifically, the entry image GT is displayed on the screen M4. The entry image GT is an image for informing that the production mode is transitioning to the time-saving mode B, and the name of the time-saving mode B ("Chance Time" in the example of FIG. 16(b)) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16(d), the background image GHz is displayed in the rush effect.

FIG. 16(e) is a mock diagram of the screen M5 displayed in the first game in the second time-saving game state. Screen M5 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, the screen M5 is displayed after the entry effect is executed (instead of the screen M4), and the mode selection effect is executed on the screen M5. The time-saving mode B of this embodiment is configured to include multiple types of performance modes from the time-saving mode B1 to the time-saving mode B3. In the mode selection performance, the player can select a performance mode (B1 to B3) by appropriately operating the performance button 8 and cross key 40. However, no matter which of the time saving modes B1 to B3 is selected, the variation pattern determination table T in the time saving mode B is the same. Specifically, the performance determined by the sub CPU 121 changes depending on the performance mode selected in the mode selection performance, but the variation pattern determination table T referred to by the main CPU 111 does not change.

As shown in FIG. 16(e), a small pattern Ga is displayed in the mode selection performance. Further, in the mode selection effect, a right-handed hit image GS2 is displayed. That is, the right-handed hit image GS2 is displayed throughout the entry performance and mode selection performance. Further, in the mode selection effect, a background image GHz (an example of a second background image) is displayed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a background image GH dedicated to mode selection effect is provided. As mentioned above, the second time-saving gaming state can be started via the jackpot game (after the table scenario has been set) or not via the jackpot game (in the scenario-unset period). be. As will be described in detail later, when the second time-saving game state is started via the jackpot game, the mode selection effect is executed (see FIG. 18(a) described later), while the second When the time-saving game state is started, the mode selection performance is not executed (see FIG. 18(b) described later). As shown in FIG. 16(e), in the mode selection performance, the performance symbol GA and the pending image GB are not displayed.

FIG. 16(f) is a mock diagram of the screen M6 displayed in the first game of the second time saving game state. Screen M6 is displayed after switching from screen M5 described above, and is displayed for a predetermined period of time. On the screen M6, similarly to the above screen M5 (mode selection performance), an image including the small symbol Ga and the background image GHz is displayed, and an image including the performance symbol GA and the pending image GB is hidden. Note that the background image GH on the screen M6 can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 16(f), a right-handed image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6 in place of the above-mentioned right-handed image GS2. The right-handed game image GS3, like the right-handed game image GS1 and the right-handed game image GS2, is an image for informing that the game should be played right-handed. In this embodiment, when displaying the right-handed game image GS3 among the right-handed game images GS (GS1 to GS3 and GS4 described later), a sound saying "right-handed game" is played, and other right-handed game images GS are displayed. In this case, the audio will not be played. However, when displaying a right-handed player image GS other than the right-handed player image GS3, a configuration may be adopted in which a sound saying "right-handed player" is played.

FIG. 17(a) is a mock diagram of the time saving medium screen M7 displayed in the second time saving game state. Although the details will be described later, the time-saving medium screen M7 is displayed after switching from the above-mentioned screen M6 (see FIG. 16(f)), for example (see FIG. 18(a) described later), and is displayed at the beginning of the second time-saving game state. is displayed at the end of the game.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), on the time-saving medium screen M7 (time-saving mode B), the small symbol Ga, the effect symbol GAw, the right-handed image GS4, the background image GHw, the pending image GBw, the remaining time-saving image GJ, and the active image GM Display each image containing. The effect pattern GAw is the effect pattern GA displayed in each game of the time saving mode B. As described above, immediately after the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the performance symbol GAx (the performance symbol GA of the immediately preceding mode) is displayed. Thereafter, the performance symbol GAw is displayed at the final stage of the game. That is, the performance symbol GAw starts to be displayed in the middle of the game. Therefore, the performance symbol GAw is displayed in a variable manner immediately after the display is started. The background image GHw (an example of the second background image) is the background image GH displayed in each game in the time saving mode B. The pending symbols GBw are displayed in the time saving mode B, and the number of pending symbols GBw corresponding to the number of second pending symbols is displayed. Furthermore, in each game in the time saving mode B, a right-handed hitting image GS4 is displayed.

The time-saving remaining image GJ displays the remaining number of times M of the time-saving gaming state. However, the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted by a numerical value "1" when each game in the time-saving game state ends. On the other hand, the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted by 1 every time each game in the time-saving game state starts. For example, assume that a game is started with the remaining number of times M being a numerical value of "X". In the above case, immediately after the start of the game, the number in the time saving remaining image GJ is subtracted from the numerical value "X" to the numerical value "X-1". Thereafter, at the end of the game, the remaining number M stored in the main RAM 113 is subtracted from the numerical value "X-1". However, a configuration may be adopted in which the update timing of the remaining number of times M stored in the main RAM 113 and the update timing of the time-saving remaining image GJ substantially match.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the time saving screen M7. The specific example in FIG. 17(a) assumes a period immediately after the time saving remaining image GJ starts to be displayed in the first game in the second time saving game state. In addition, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, the timing at which the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted is immediately after the start of the game. However, the display start time of the remaining time saving image GJ in the first game of the second time saving game state is at the final stage of the game after the rush effect etc. are finished. That is, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed for the first time after the original time (immediately after the start of the game) when the number of the time-saving remaining image GJ is subtracted has elapsed. Due to the above circumstances, the remaining time saving image GJ first displays the number "999", which is obtained by subtracting the number "1" from the number of time saving times (1000 times) in the second time saving game state, in the first game in the second time saving game state. do.

The active image GM is an image for notifying that the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. As mentioned above, the performance mode of the second time-saving game state is time-saving mode B. However, even in the first time-saving game state, the game may shift to time-saving mode B (see FIG. 11(a)). Therefore, in a configuration where it is not announced in time saving mode B whether or not it is in the second time saving gaming state, it becomes difficult to grasp whether the current gaming state is in the second time saving gaming state or in the first time saving gaming state. This may cause inconvenience.

In this embodiment, the active image GM is displayed in the time saving mode B of the second time saving game state, and the active image GM is not displayed in the time saving mode B of the first time saving game state and the above-mentioned gap game. Specifically, the active image GM is displayed in the second time-saving game state regardless of whether or not it is a scenario unset period. In addition, regardless of the type of table scenario S (Sb2 to Sb4), the active image GM is displayed in the second time-saving game state. Therefore, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

FIG. 17(b) is a mock diagram of the time saving screen M8 displayed in each game in the first time saving game state. Specifically, the time saving medium screen M8 is displayed in each game in the time saving mode A. As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the time-saving mode A, each image including the small symbol Ga, the performance symbol GAy, the reserved image GBy, the background image GHy, the right-handed hit image GS4, and the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed.

In the present embodiment described above, the time saving remaining image GJ is commonly displayed in the time saving mode A (first time saving game state) and the time saving mode B (second time saving game state). Specifically, in the time-saving mode A, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the image display device 31, as shown in FIG. 17(b). As described above, in the time saving mode B, the time saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ of the image display device 31, as shown in FIG. 17(a). Therefore, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in a common area (region RJ) in time-saving mode A (first time-saving gaming state) and time-saving mode B (second time-saving gaming state).
That is, the display position of the remaining count display is the same in the advantageous state before the end of the jackpot game (second time-saving game state) and the advantageous state after the end of the jackpot game (first time-saving game state). However, the display position of the remaining count display may be different between the advantageous state before the end of the jackpot game (second time-saving game state) and the advantageous state after the end of the jackpot game (first time-saving game state).

In this embodiment, the time saving mode A may be directly transferred to the time saving mode B. Assume a configuration in which the area in which the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed changes between time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B. With the above configuration, it is assumed that some players may lose sight of the time-saving remaining image GJ immediately after the time-saving mode B is started. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the above-mentioned disadvantages can be suppressed.

However, in a configuration in which the time-saving mode A directly shifts to the time-saving mode B, there may be an inconvenience that some players do not notice that the time-saving mode B has started. In consideration of the above circumstances, the area in which the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed may be intentionally made different between the time-saving mode A and the time-saving mode B. FIG. 17(c) shows an example of the time saving screen M7 in the second time saving game state of the modified example employing the above configuration. In the above modification, the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ in the first time-saving game state, and the time-saving remaining image GJ is displayed in the area RJ' in the second time-saving game state. According to the above modification, since the area in which the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed changes, it becomes easier to recognize that the time saving mode A has ended and the time saving mode B has started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned disadvantages.

In this way, in the advantageous state before the end of the jackpot game (second time-saving game state) and the advantageous state after the end of the jackpot game (first time-saving game state), the production mode (performance mode, symbol display mode, The display mode of icons, etc.) is different.

By the way, in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is subtracted, similarly to the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, the remaining number of times image GN (see FIG. 14(c)) displaying the current value of the remaining number of times N may be displayed in the first time-saving game state. Similarly, the number of games image GE (see FIG. 14(a)), which allows the number of games up to the second time-saving game state to be grasped, may be displayed in the first time-saving game state. That is, a specific performance (such as displaying a subtraction of the remaining number of times image GN) according to the remaining number of times N may be executed in the second time-saving game state.

However, the second time saving game state is started after the first time saving game state ends. If the specific performance described above is executed in the first time-saving game state, some players may be aware that they will not win the jackpot until the second time-saving game state starts in the first time-saving game state. There are cases. In the above case, an inconvenience may occur in which the player's desire to play the game decreases. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, a specific performance corresponding to the remaining number of times N is executed in the non-time saving game state, while a specific performance is not executed in the first time saving game state. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

18(a) to 18(c) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of periods during which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed at the start of time saving mode B. In addition, in the specific examples of FIGS. 18(a) to 18(c), it is assumed that the player does not win the jackpot at the start of time saving mode B.

For the sake of explanation, the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c)), the entry image GT (see FIG. 16(d)), and the right-handed image GS3 (see FIG. 16(f)) displayed at the start of time-saving mode B are shown below. ) are collectively referred to as "starting images." The above start image is displayed during the period from the start of the second time saving game state until switching to the time saving screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a) described above). In this embodiment, the period from the start of the second time-saving game state until switching to the time-saving medium screen M7 (the period during which the start image is displayed) is described as "start notification period Pz (1 to 3)". There are cases. As will be described in detail later, the performance mode during the start notification period Pz changes depending on whether the table scenario S is set and the type of the table scenario S.

FIG. 18A is a specific example where the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, the mode shifts from the last-minute mode (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) to the time-saving mode B (second time-saving gaming state). In the immediately preceding mode, the background image GHx is displayed. FIG. 18(a) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when transitioning from the last-minute mode to time-saving mode B, the above-mentioned screen M1 (see FIG. 16(a)) and screen M2 (see FIG. 16(b)) are each displayed for a predetermined time. After that, the screen M3 is displayed and the shielded image GF is displayed. During the period in which the shielding image GF is displayed, the background image GH is shielded (hidden). Further, after the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed, and the background image GH becomes the background image Gz.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, after the entry effect is executed, the mode selection effect is displayed on the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e) above). is executed. Further, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). A right-handed hit image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. As shown in FIG. 18A, the start notification period Pz1 when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set is a period until switching to the time saving screen M7. In the above start notification period Pz1, screens M1 to M6 are displayed, and the time for displaying each of the above screens is predetermined. Therefore, the start notification period Pz1 ends at a predetermined time.

As described above, the variation pattern of the game is determined with reference to the variation pattern determination table Ts. In a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, only one type of fluctuation pattern is determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. That is, the length of the period (hereinafter referred to as "variation period Px") in which the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the variation pattern (loss) determined by the variation pattern determination table Ts remains unchanged (fixed).

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the fluctuation period Px is longer than the start notification period Pz1. That is, the variable period Px is designed to have a length that allows various performances including the entry performance and the mode selection performance to be executed. Similarly, in a game where the fluctuation pattern determination table Ts is referred to, the length of the fluctuation pattern is determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit, and the length of the fluctuation pattern is determined when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The length of is longer than the start notification period Pz1.

According to the above configuration, the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is displayed in the first game of time saving mode B (second time saving game state), and is not displayed in the second and subsequent games. Assume a configuration in which the start image displayed in the start notification period Pz1 is also displayed in the second and subsequent games in time saving mode B. With the above configuration, a problem may arise in which the image displayed in the second and subsequent games in time saving mode B becomes difficult to see (or cannot be displayed) as the starting image. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed.

However, as mentioned above, during the period when the table scenario Sb is not set, the fluctuation pattern determination table (Tbx) is the same for the first game in the second time-saving game state and each game from the second time onwards (Fig. 10(b) )reference). Therefore, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, a random fluctuation pattern is determined as in the subsequent games. That is, in the scenario unset period, the length of the period (hereinafter referred to as "variable period Py") in which the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed is variable.

In the above configuration, if the length of the start notification period Pz is the same between the table scenario Sb2 set period and the scenario unset period, the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period There is a possibility that the start notification period Pz will not end before the end of the start notification period Pz. In the above case, in the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state, there arises an inconvenience that the start image is displayed. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment has a configuration in which the start notification period Pz3 in the scenario unset period is shorter than the start notification period Pz2 in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

FIG. 18(b) is a specific example in which the time saving mode B starts during the scenario unset period. In the above case, the normal mode (low probability non-time-saving gaming state) shifts to the time-saving mode B (second time-saving gaming state). As described above, the background image GHx is displayed in the normal mode. FIG. 18(b) shows the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state and the end time te of the game.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), when transitioning to time-saving mode B in a period where no scenario is set, screen M1 and screen M2 are Each is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M3 is displayed and the shielding image GF is displayed. Further, after the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined time, a rush effect is executed in which the screen M4 is displayed.

However, when transitioning to time-saving mode B during the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, after the mode selection effect is executed (after displaying screen M5), right-handed image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed, but the scenario When shifting to the time-saving mode B during the unset period, the mode selection effect is omitted and the right-handed hit image GS4 (screen M6) is displayed. That is, the start notification period Pz2 in the scenario unset period omits the period in which the mode selection effect is executed, compared to the start notification period Pz1 in the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

In this way, the appearance of the rush effect is different after the RAM is cleared and after the jackpot.
Furthermore, the effects that are omitted during the scenario-unset period are not limited to the above example. For example, during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set, in the game after the number of fluctuations remaining before being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times), for each fluctuation performance , a countdown effect may be executed to notify (suggest) the remaining number of fluctuations until the second time-saving gaming state is controlled. This countdown effect may be omitted during the scenario-unset period. That is, after the RAM is cleared, the specific mode (countdown mode) is not controlled before the second time-saving gaming state occurs, but after the jackpot, the specific mode may be controlled before the second time-saving gaming state occurs.

In the above configuration, the start notification period Pz2 is shorter than the start notification period Pz1. Specifically, the start notification period Pz2 is designed to be shorter than the shortest variation pattern determined in the first game of the second time-saving game state. In this embodiment, when the game is played according to the normal procedure, the number of second reservations is 0 when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started. Therefore, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the "long variation (loss)" (approximately 4 seconds) is the shortest variation pattern among the various variation patterns. In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the "special 1 loss (loss)" (approximately 7 seconds) is the shortest variation pattern among the various variation patterns. Therefore, the start notification period Pz is designed to have a length shorter than the "long fluctuation (loss)" of about 4 seconds, for example.

As understood from the above description, according to the configuration of this embodiment, the start notification period Pz2 ends by the time the first game in the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends. In addition, the start notification period Pz2 may be a time shorter (for example, about 6 seconds) than the shortest variation pattern (special figure 1 loss: about 7 seconds) among each variation pattern of the first special figure in the second time-saving gaming state. good.

Further, as understood from the above description, according to the present embodiment, when displaying the background image GHz instead of the background image GHx at the start of the time saving mode B (second time saving game state), the shielding image GF can be displayed. According to the above configuration, by blocking the background image GHx all at once, the player is made aware of the end of the time-saving mode A in a short period of time, and then by displaying the background image GHx all at once, the time-saving mode B The player can be made aware of the start of the game in a short period of time. That is, there is an advantage that it becomes easier to understand that the time saving mode A has shifted to the time saving mode B in a short period of time.

FIG. 18(c) is a specific example where the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the time saving mode B is entered immediately after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the first time-saving game state (799 times) is started, and the performance mode shifts to time-saving mode B. FIG. 18(c) shows the start time ta and end time tb of the ending period.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the ending period starts, a rush effect in which the above-mentioned screen M4 (see FIG. 16(d)) is displayed is executed. As described above, in the rush effect, the rush image GT is displayed, and the background image GH becomes the background image GHz. After the entry effect is executed, the mode selection effect is executed and the screen M5 (see FIG. 16(e) described above) is displayed. Further, the mode selection effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the screen M6 is displayed (see FIG. 16(f)). A right-handed hit image GS3 is displayed on the screen M6. In the specific example of FIG. 18(c), when the ending period (start notification period Pz3) ends, time saving mode B (first time saving game state) is started and a time saving screen M7 is displayed.

The length of the ending period when table scenario Sb4 is set is determined in advance. Specifically, the start notification period Pz3 when the time saving mode B starts during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set substantially coincides with the ending period. That is, the start image displayed when time saving mode B starts can be displayed during the ending period.

As can be understood from the above description, in this embodiment, there are cases where the transition to time saving mode B is made at the start of the first time saving gaming state (see FIG. 18(c)), and when transitioning to the time saving mode B at the start of the second time saving gaming state. (FIG. 18(b)), the mode of presentation (start presentation) is different. For example, the shielding image GF is displayed when shifting to the time-saving mode B at the start of the second time-saving game state, but the shielding image GF is not displayed when shifting to the time-saving mode B at the start of the first time-saving gaming state. Further, the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 have different lengths. With the above configuration, it becomes easier to optimally set the performance when transitioning to time-saving mode B, compared to a configuration in which the performance when transitioning to time-saving mode B is uniform.

However, the start notification period Pz2 and the start notification period Pz3 may have the same length, or the shielding image GF may be displayed during the start notification period Pz3. In addition, during the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, the mode of performance when transitioning to time-saving mode A (first time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game is different from the mode of performance when transitioning to time-saving mode B. do. Specifically, an effect notifying that the time saving mode A has started is performed during the ending period. The ending period is different depending on when time saving mode A starts and when time saving mode B starts. Further, when the time saving mode A starts, the mode selection effect is not executed. Furthermore, in the entry effect when shifting to time saving mode A, the name of time saving mode A is displayed.

By the way, in a configuration in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted at the end of the game, if the number of pending games is 0 at the end of the game, the customer waiting state starts immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state. Since the above customer waiting state is the second time-saving gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game with the right hand than with the left hand. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which right-handed play is instructed in the customer waiting state before the first game of the second time-saving game state is started. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 19(a) is a mock diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state. The specific example in FIG. 19(a) assumes that table scenario Sb2 is set among the table scenarios S, similar to FIG. 16(a) described above. In the above case, the non-time-saving gaming state (immediate mode) in which the background image GHx is displayed shifts to the second time-saving gaming state (time-saving mode B). In addition, in the scenario non-setting period, if the player is in a customer waiting state at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed in the customer waiting state, similarly to the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set.

The customer waiting screen Mx shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed when the number of pending games at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is 0. Therefore, on the customer waiting screen Mx, the performance symbols GAx and the small symbols Ga are stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 19(a), the customer waiting screen Mx displays a game count image GE and a remaining game count image GN similarly to the screen M1. Furthermore, the right-hand hitting image GS1 is displayed on the customer waiting screen Mx, similar to the screen M1. According to the above configuration, in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state, a right-handed game is instructed.

FIG. 19(b) is a diagram for explaining the period during which each image (GF, GT, GH, GS) is displayed when the customer waiting state is started at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state. be. FIG. 19(b) shows the end time te of the game at which the remaining number N until the second time-saving game state is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the start time ts of the first game in the second time-saving game state. It will be done. In the above specific example, the period Pw shown in FIG. 19(b) is in the customer waiting state, and the customer waiting screen Mx (see FIG. 19(a)) is displayed during the period Pw.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), during the period Pw in which the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed, the right-handed image GS1 is displayed and the background image GHx is displayed. After that, when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the same process as in the case where the number of pending games in the second time-saving game state is one or more (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b) described above) , screen M1, screen M2, and so on are displayed in this order. Specifically, during the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, each screen is displayed in order from screen M1 to screen M7 (see FIG. 18(a)). Furthermore, during the scenario unset period, each screen (M1, M2, M3, M4, M6, M7) except screen M5 is displayed in sequence (see FIG. 18(b)).

FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b) are diagrams for explaining details of when the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are updated. As described above, the remaining number of times image GN displays the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113. However, in this embodiment, the time when the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted and the time when the remaining number of times N is subtracted are different. The above configuration will be explained in detail below. In addition, below, the time to update the number of the remaining number of times image GN may be simply described as "the update time of the remaining number of times image GN."

As described above, in this embodiment, the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 is subtracted at the end of the game (when the special symbol is stopped). Specifically, one game is provided with a variable period in which the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a fixed period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed after the variable period ends. The length of the fluctuation period in a game is variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of the game. On the other hand, the fixed period in the game is a predetermined time (about 0.5 seconds). The main control board 110 (main CPU 111) transmits a symbol confirmation command to the sub CPU 121 at the start of the confirmation period. When receiving the symbol confirmation command, the production control board 120 (sub CPU 121) causes the image control board 150 to stop display the production symbols GA and small symbols Ga until the confirmation period ends. That is, the fixed period substantially coincides with the period during which the special symbol and the production symbol GA are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 20A is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the update timing of the remaining number of times image GN. FIG. 20(a) shows the numbers of the remaining number of times image GN at each time point displayed by the production control board 120 (image control board 150), and the remaining number image GN stored at each time point by the main control board 110 (main RAM 113). The number of times N is indicated. Further, FIG. 20(a) shows a game start time ts and a game end time te. Further, FIG. 20(a) shows the time ta at which the variable period in the game ends. The above time ta can also be referred to as the time when the fixed period starts.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), at the start time ts of the game, the remaining number of times command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 120. The remaining number of times command is a command that specifies the current value of the remaining number of times N. When the power is cut off, the effect control board 120 of this embodiment restores the number of the remaining number of times image GN according to the remaining number of times command transmitted after the power is restored. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N at the start of the game is a numerical value "X" (X≧2). The remaining number of times command transmitted at the start of the current game indicates the remaining number of times N that was updated (subtracted) at the end of the previous game.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), at time ta when the confirmation period starts, a symbol confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120. When receiving the symbol confirmation command, the production control board 120 stops displaying the production symbol GA and subtracts the number of the remaining number of times image GN. In other words, the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted at approximately the same time as the time ta when the fixed period starts. In the specific example of FIG. 20(a), the number in the remaining number of times image GN is displayed after being subtracted from "X" to "X-1". However, the main control board 110 subtracts the remaining number N of the main RAM 113 at the time te when the determination period ends. Therefore, immediately after the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted to "X-1", the remaining number of times N in the main RAM 113 is the numerical value "X", as shown in FIG. 20(a).

Assume a comparison example in which the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted at the end of the fixed period. In the above comparison example, it can be said that the number of the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted after the game ends. However, for example, when the game transitions to the customer waiting state after the game ends, some players stop paying attention to the screen of the image display device 31 (including the remaining number of times image GN) at the game end point ta, and end the game. You may end up doing this. In the above case, there may be an inconvenience that the subtraction display of the numbers in the remaining number of times image GB is not visible to the player. According to this embodiment, since the subtraction display of the number in the remaining number of times image GB is executed before the end of the game, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIG. 20(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the update timing of the remaining number of times image GN. Similar to FIG. 20(a) above, FIG. 20(b) shows the number of the remaining number of times image GN at each time point, the remaining number of times N stored in the main RAM 113 at each time point, the start time ts of the game, and the number of times the game A time ta at which the fluctuation period ends and a time te at which the game ends are shown. Further, FIG. 20(b) shows the gaming state at each point in time. In the specific example of FIG. 20(b), it is assumed that the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at the end time te of the game. Therefore, the second time-saving game state is started from the game end time te.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), even in a game where the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", as in other games, the number of remaining times image GN is is subtracted. That is, at the time ta when the confirmation period starts, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". Further, when the confirmation period ends after the number "0" is displayed on the remaining number of times image GN, the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the number "0" and the second time-saving game state is started.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0" before the second time saving game state is started. However, some players may have the inconvenience of mistakenly thinking that the second time-saving gaming state has started at the time ta when the remaining number of times image GN displays the number "0". Considering the above circumstances, in a game in which the second time-saving game state starts, the number in the remaining image GN is not subtracted at the start of the fixed period, but at the time when the remaining number of times N is subtracted (when the second time-saving game state is A configuration may also be adopted in which the number in the remaining number of times image GN is subtracted at the starting point). Specifically, after the remaining number of times N has been subtracted to the numerical value "0", the timing of receiving a customer waiting command, or a command specifying that the first game in the second time-saving game state has started (for example, , fluctuation pattern designation command) may be configured to display the number "0" on the remaining number of times image GN. In addition, in each game, the number of the remaining number of times image GN may be subtracted at the end of the fixed period.

FIGS. 21(a), 21(b-1), and 21(b-2) are for explaining the display of the effect execution means (for example, the image display device 31) in the period before and after the power outage occurs. This is a diagram. As described above, the presentation mode (display mode of the image display device 31) in a specific period corresponds to the variation pattern determination table referenced in the period. In this embodiment, the image display device 31 may be controlled to a production mode that does not correspond to the fluctuation pattern determination table during a period immediately after recovery from a power outage. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 21(a) is a mock diagram of a recovery screen displayed when power is restored. As shown in FIG. 21(a), the recovery screen displays a message indicating that recovery is in progress from power outage. Furthermore, a background image GHf is displayed on the recovery screen. The background image GHf is a dedicated background image GH that is displayed when the power is restored, and is, for example, a white (single color) image. In the specific example of FIG. 21(a), it is assumed that the power supply is restored during the period in which the right-handed lamp 28 is lit. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the right-handed hit image GS is displayed on the recovery screen. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which images other than the background image GHf and the right-handed image GS are displayed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending number image GD (see FIG. 14(a) described above) is displayed on the recovery screen.

FIG. 21(b-1) is a diagram for explaining the performance mode at each point in time in the period before and after the power cutoff, and a specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table T to be referred to. FIG. 21(b-1) assumes a case where a power outage occurs in a jackpot game. FIG. 21(b-1) shows a time point ta when the power is cut off and a time tb when the power supply is restarted. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 21 (b-1), the jackpot game ends at time tc, transitions to the customer waiting state (the number of pending games at the end of the jackpot game = 0), and the first game starts at time td. Assume a case.

In this embodiment, when the power is restored from a power outage, a power outage recovery command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control board 120. For example, the main CPU 111 transmits a power failure recovery command after completing initialization processing when the power is turned on. From the power outage recovery command, whether or not the special symbol is changing, the number of reservations, and the gaming state are specified. Specifically, from the power outage recovery command, it is specified whether the game is a jackpot game, a small win game, a low probability non-time saving game state, a high probability time saving gaming state, a first time saving gaming state or a second time saving gaming state. be done. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), at the time of power outage recovery tb, a power outage recovery command is transmitted that specifies that the current gaming state is a jackpot game.

As mentioned above, in the jackpot game, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up. Therefore, when the gaming state specified from the power failure recovery command is a jackpot game, the right-handed image GS is displayed on the above-mentioned recovery screen. Note that the type of right-handed image GS displayed on the recovery screen can be changed as appropriate. For example, a common right-handed game image GS may be displayed on the recovery screen regardless of whether the gaming status specified from the power failure recovery command is a jackpot game or a time-saving gaming status. Further, the right-handed game image GS, which is originally displayed in the gaming state specified from the power failure recovery command, may be configured to be displayed on the recovery screen.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the jackpot game, various images including the current number of rounds and stop-displayed jackpot performance symbols are displayed. However, the current number of rounds and the jackpot effect pattern cannot be specified from the power failure recovery command. Therefore, if a power outage occurs in a jackpot game and then the power is restored from the power outage, the image that should originally be displayed in the jackpot game cannot be completely restored. Considering the above circumstances, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21 (b-1), when the power is cut off and restored in a jackpot game, a recovery screen is displayed thereafter until the jackpot game ends. . However, if a power outage occurs in a jackpot game and the power is subsequently restored from the power outage, the screen displayed in the jackpot game may be restored. In the above case, the screen of the jackpot game after the power is restored is displayed with images that cannot be restored (for example, images showing the number of rounds) omitted.

Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to after the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), it is assumed that the special symbol B4 is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol and the table scenario Sb4 is set. As described above, the performance mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is the time saving mode B. Therefore, the period during which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to is normally in the time saving mode B.

However, the power failure recovery command does not specify the type of fluctuation pattern determination table T (table scenario S) that is referred to after the end of the jackpot game. Further, the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game can shift to both time-saving mode A and time-saving mode B (see, for example, FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b)). Therefore, in the period immediately after recovery from power cut-off, the performance control board 120 side cannot specify whether the performance mode in the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game should be set to time-saving mode A or time-saving mode B.

When a variation pattern specification command is received, the variation pattern determination table referenced on the main control board 110 side is specified from the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. That is, the original production mode is specified from the variation pattern designation command. In this embodiment, the original performance mode may not be specified on the performance control board 120 side until the fluctuation pattern designation command is first received after recovery from power failure.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 21(b-1), the state shifts to the customer waiting state after the jackpot state ends. Further, the first time the fluctuation pattern designation command is received after the jackpot state ends is at the time td when the first game starts after the jackpot game ends. In the above specific example, in the customer waiting state from the time tc when the jackpot game ends to the time td when the game starts, the performance control board 120 side cannot specify whether the time saving mode A or the time saving mode B should be used.

Let us assume a comparative example in which each performance execution means is controlled in time-saving mode B when it is not possible on the production control board 120 side to specify whether to use time-saving mode A or time-saving mode B. As mentioned above, in the time saving mode A, there is a possibility that the first time saving game state ends after 100 times. On the other hand, in time saving mode B, the first time saving game state continues up to 799 times. Therefore, in the above-mentioned comparative example, the first time-saving game state may end after 100 times even though the game has shifted to the time-saving mode B. In the above case, some players may experience an inconvenience in which they lose their desire to play.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in this embodiment, if it is not possible on the production control board 120 side to specify whether to enter the time-saving mode A or the time-saving mode B in the first time-saving gaming state, each production execution means is set in the time-saving mode A. (image display device 31, etc.). According to the above-described configuration of this embodiment, the first time-saving game state does not end after 100 times, even though the game has shifted to the time-saving mode B. Therefore, compared to the above-mentioned comparative example, there is an advantage that the inconvenience that causes players to lose their desire to play is suppressed.

As described above, the original performance mode is specified from the variation pattern designation command. In this embodiment, the performance mode is changed to the original performance mode when the original performance mode can be specified on the performance control board 120 side. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), a variation pattern designation command is received at time td. From the above variation pattern designation command, it is specified that the original production mode is time saving mode B. Therefore, the performance mode is switched from time-saving mode A to time-saving mode B at time td. In addition, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-1), if it is assumed that the original production mode is time saving mode A (when the fluctuation pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to), before and after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command, The production mode is time saving mode A and does not change.

FIG. 21(b-2) is a diagram for explaining the production mode at each point in time in the period before and after the power cutoff, and another specific example of the fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to. FIG. 21(b-2) assumes a case where a power outage occurs during a game in time saving mode B (a game in which the variable pattern determination table Tax or the variable pattern determination table Tbx is referred to). Specifically, FIG. 21 (b-2) shows that in time-saving mode B, a game is started at time ts, a power cut occurs at time ta during the game, and power supply is resumed at subsequent time tb. Assume a case. Further, the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2) assumes that the game ends at time tc, then shifts to a customer waiting state, and a new game starts at time td.

In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2) above, the original performance mode cannot be specified on the performance control board 120 side during the period from the time tb when the power is restored from the power outage until the new time td is displayed. Specifically, from the time tb when the power outage is restored until the time tc when the game interrupted due to the power outage ends, in addition to the original performance mode, the fluctuation pattern in the game and the performance symbol GA to be stopped and displayed cannot be specified. . In consideration of the above circumstances, the above-mentioned recovery screen is displayed during the period from when the power is restored to when the power is cut off until the game that was interrupted due to the power cut ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), in the customer waiting state from time tc to time td when a new game starts, the original performance mode cannot be specified on the performance control board 120 side, so time saving mode A is used. Each production execution means is controlled. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 21(b-2), when the variation pattern designation command is received at time td, the production mode is switched from time saving mode A to time saving mode B.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the power is cut off in the time-saving gaming state, when the fluctuation pattern designation command is received thereafter, the mode is switched to the original production mode. By the way, as described above, the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state stored on the main control board 110 side is displayed by the remaining time saving image GJ. However, the command that specifies the remaining number of times M of the time-saving gaming state stored on the main control board 110 side is not transmitted during the time-saving gaming state after the power outage is restored. Therefore, when a power outage occurs in the time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of times M cannot be displayed on the time-saving remaining image GJ during the time-saving gaming state after the power outage is restored. In this embodiment, during the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) after the power outage is restored, the time-saving remaining image GJ in which the number part is omitted is displayed.

FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d) are diagrams for explaining other specific examples of the production mode at each point in time in the period before and after the power cutoff occurs. FIGS. 22(a) to 22(d) show the performance mode at each point in time as well as the gaming state at that point in time.

FIG. 22(a) is a specific example of a case where the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving game state. FIG. 22(a) assumes that the second time-saving gaming state is started during the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set. In the above case, the production mode immediately before the second time saving game state is started becomes the immediately preceding mode. In addition, FIG. 22(a) assumes that at time ta when the last game in the non-time saving game state (800th game from the jackpot game) ends, the number of pending items is 0 and the state shifts to the customer waiting state. do. The above customer waiting state is the second time-saving game state, and as explained using the above-mentioned FIG. 19(a), the right-handed game image GS1 is displayed.

FIG. 22(a) assumes that the power is cut off at time tb during the customer waiting state immediately after the second time-saving gaming state is started. Furthermore, it is assumed that the power is restored from the power outage at a subsequent time point tc. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time starting from time tc. Further, when the recovery screen is displayed, each effect execution means including the image display device 31 is then controlled to the time saving mode B. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the time saving mode B is controlled upon receiving the power interruption recovery command.

Specifically, in the customer waiting state immediately after recovery from power outage, the above-mentioned time saving screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a)) is displayed. The above time-saving medium screen M7 originally displays the start notification image Gn (see FIG. 16(b)), displays the shielding image GF (see FIG. 16(c)), and executes the rush effect (see FIG. 16(b)). d)), the mode selection effect is executed (see Fig. 16(e)), and the right-hitting image GS3 is displayed (see Fig. 16(f)) (hereinafter simply referred to as the period in which the entry effect etc. is executed). ” is displayed after completion of the process.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(a), it is assumed that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at time d. In the above case, the period during which the rush effect etc. are executed starts from time td, and then the time saving screen M7 is displayed. Note that if the power supply does not turn off, the background image GHx (background image GH in the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed (see FIG. 16(b) described above). On the other hand, in the specific example of FIG. 22(a) in which a power outage occurs, a background image GHz (background image GH in the previous mode) is displayed when the start notification image Gn is displayed.

FIG. 22(b) is another specific example when the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving game state. In FIG. 22(b), as in FIG. 22(a) above, the number of pending items is 0 at the time ta when the last game in the non-time-saving gaming state (the 800th game from the jackpot game) ends, Assume that the state shifts to a customer waiting state. Further, FIG. 22(b) assumes a case where a power outage occurs at time tb during the customer waiting state immediately after the second time-saving gaming state is started, and the power is restored from the power outage at a subsequent time tc.

While FIG. 22(a) above shows a specific example in which the second time-saving gaming state is started in the period in which the table scenario S is set, FIG. A specific example of how a gaming state is started will be shown. In the above specific example of FIG. 22(b), the production mode immediately before the second time saving game state is started is the normal mode. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22(b), the time saving screen M7 of the time saving mode B is displayed in the period after the time tc when the power is restored from the power outage (same as the specific example of FIG. 22(a)).

In the specific example of FIG. 22(b), it is assumed that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at time td. As described above, if a power failure does not occur, when the second time-saving game state is started in the scenario-unset period, a rush performance, etc. in which the mode selection performance is omitted is executed (see FIG. 18(b)). . However, if a power outage occurs during the customer waiting state from the start of the second time-saving gaming state to the start of the first game during the period when the scenario has not been set, the power will be interrupted when the second time-saving gaming state starts. All performances are omitted (cancelled).

FIG. 22(c) is another specific example when the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 22(c), it is assumed that a power outage occurs during the first game in the second time-saving game state. In the following, both the case where the table scenario Sb2 is set and the case where the scenario is not set are explained using FIG. 22(c).

The specific example in FIG. 22(c) assumes that the first game in the second time-saving game state is started at time ta, and then a power outage occurs at time tb before the game ends. As described above, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, when the table scenario Sb2 is set, a rush effect etc. are executed. In addition, in the first game in the second time-saving game state, if the scenario is not set, a part of the rush effect etc. is executed.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), a recovery screen is displayed in a period after the time tc when the power is recovered from the power outage. That is, the rush performance etc. that were being executed at the time tb when the power was cut off are canceled. FIG. 22(c) assumes a case where the first game in the second time-saving game state ends at time td after the power outage is restored. In the above case, the recovery screen is not displayed at time td, and each effect execution means (image display device 31, etc.) is controlled to time saving mode B. Specifically, the recovery screen is switched to the time saving screen M7.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs in the second time-saving game state (including the first game), the subsequent second time-saving game state is controlled from time-saving mode B1 to time-saving mode B1 of time-saving mode B3. . That is, regardless of the time-saving mode B selected on the screen M5, the time-saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. Furthermore, even if the power is cut off after the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state and before the time-saving mode B is selected in the mode selection performance, the time-saving mode B1 is set after the power is restored. However, if a power outage occurs in the customer waiting state before the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state (for example, in the case of FIG. 22(a) described above), the time-saving mode selected in the subsequent mode selection performance Move to B. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a canceled entry performance or the like can be performed during a period after time td.

FIG. 22(d) is another specific example in the case where the power is cut off at the start of the second time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that a power outage occurs in the game immediately before the gap game. That is, assume that a power outage occurs in the final game of the 799th first time-saving game state. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), the 799th game in the first time-saving game state is started at time ta, and then the power is cut off at time tb before the game ends. Assume that Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the power is restored at time tc after the power is cut off, and then the game that was being executed at the time of the power cut ends at time td. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed during the period from time tc to time td.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), at the end time td of the final game in the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends and shifts to the non-time-saving game state. As described above, if the power supply does not cut off, the production mode of the gap game becomes the time saving mode B. That is, the production mode in a series of periods of the last game in the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the first game in the second time-saving game state is time-saving mode B. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, after the end of the game, the production mode becomes the normal mode until the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the number of pending games is 0 at the end time td of the final game in the first time-saving game state where the power is cut off. In the above case, the machine enters a customer waiting state from time td. In the above customer waiting state, the presentation mode becomes the normal mode. Further, the customer waiting state is a non-time-saving gaming state, and the second special symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner in principle. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the variable display of the first special symbol starts at time te. That is, it is assumed that a gap game in which the first special figure is displayed in a variable manner is started from time te. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the gap game ends at time tf. In the above case, the second time saving game state is started from time tf.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, the production mode becomes the normal mode until the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner after the end of the game. Therefore, at the time tf when the second time-saving game state is started, the performance mode is, in principle, the normal mode. In the specific example of FIG. 22(d), it is assumed that the variable display of the second special symbol starts at time tg. In the above case, a transition is made to time point mode B from time point tg. In addition, when the first special symbol is displayed variably in the game following the gap game, the performance mode of the game is the normal mode. Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during a gap game, the right-handed game image GS will not be displayed on the recovery screen. Thereafter, when the gap game ends, even if the state shifts to a customer waiting state or if the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the time saving mode B is controlled.

FIG. 23(a) is a diagram for explaining the state of the image (game count image GE) and the lamp (presentation lamp 33) when the power is cut off. FIG. 23(a) shows the numbers displayed by the number-of-games image GE at each time point before and after the power is turned off. Further, FIG. 23(a) shows the state of the performance lamp 33 at each point in time. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, among the modes (light emitting modes) of the performance lamp 33, the mode in normal games may be referred to as the "normal mode." The normal mode is variable depending on the gaming state and the performance executed in each game.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that a power outage occurs at a time ta when the number of games image GE displays the number "X", and the power outage is restored at a subsequent time tb. In the above case, the recovery screen is displayed from time tb, and is hidden from time tc. As shown in FIG. 23(a), in this embodiment, the production lamp 33 is displayed in a recovery mode during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that the number "X" is less than 799 and the gaming state at time ta is a low probability non-time saving gaming state. Note that the time tc in FIG. 23(a) is assumed to be the time when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time tb when the time ta is in the customer waiting state, and when the time ta is in the variable period of the special ticket. , is assumed to be at the end of the relevant variable period.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(a), it is assumed that at time tc when the display period of the recovery screen ends, the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state is greater than the numerical value "0". Specifically, assume that the gaming state after time tc is a non-time-saving gaming state. If the remaining number of times N is larger than the numerical value "0" at time tc, it is assumed that the clearing operation is executed after the power is cut off and before the power is restored, and the remaining number of times N is initialized to the initial value "800". be done. Another case where the remaining number of times N is larger than the numerical value "0" at time tc is assumed to be a case where the remaining number of times N, which is larger than the numerical value "1", is left unchanged before and after the power is turned off. As described above, the game count image GE displays the number "0" when the power is restored, regardless of whether the remaining number of times N is left unchanged before or after the power is cut off.

In this embodiment, the second time-saving game state is started when the remaining number of times N is subtracted from the numerical value "1" to the numerical value "0". Further, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the remaining number of times N does not change from the numerical value "0" until a clear operation is executed or a jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, in the period after the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0", the second time saving game state is not restarted until a clear operation is executed or a jackpot game is won. Specifically, it is assumed that 1000 games are executed in the second time-saving gaming state and the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. In the non-time-saving game state after the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state is not restarted even if 800 games are executed.

Suppose that during the period in which the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "0", during the period of the low probability non-time-saving gaming state after the second time-saving gaming state has ended (hereinafter referred to as the "activated period"), the number of the number of games image GE is Let us assume a comparative example in which the value is added for each game starting from "0". In addition, in the comparison example above, if the power is turned OFF/ON during the activation period, the number of games image GE will display the number "0" after the power is restored, and after that, the number of the number of games image GE will be added for each game. shall be displayed. In the above comparison example, the game count image GE may be added up to the number "800" in the activated period even though the second time-saving game state is not started. Therefore, depending on the player, there may be an inconvenience in which the player's desire to play the game decreases. In consideration of the above circumstances, the present embodiment employs a configuration that can notify whether or not it is the activated period. The above configuration will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 23(b) is a simulated diagram of the screen Mh displayed when the power is turned OFF/ON during the activated period. On the screen Mh, each image (effect pattern GA, etc.) similar to the screen in the normal mode (see FIG. 14(a) described above) before the second time-saving game state is started (not activated) is displayed. However, during the period when the second time-saving gaming state is not activated, the number of games image GE displays a number indicating the number of games played since the power was turned on or the number of games played since the jackpot game, but the number of games image GE on the screen Mh displays the number. is not displayed. Specifically, when the power is turned OFF/ON during the activation period, the game count image GE displays a symbol "???" instead of a number, as shown in FIG. 23(b).

FIG. 23(c) is a simulated diagram of the number of games image GE in the activated period after the second time-saving gaming state ends. The number of games image GE shown in FIG. 23(c) is obtained by omitting the numbers from the number of games image GE displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state other than the activated period. According to the above configuration, the player is substantially notified whether or not it is the activated period.

FIG. 23(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the mode of the number-of-games image GE and the presentation lamp 33 when a power outage occurs. Similar to FIG. 23(a) described above, FIG. 23(d) shows the number displayed by the number-of-games image GE at each point in time and the mode of the performance lamp 33. In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state is started at time ta, and the last (1000th) game of the second time-saving gaming state is finished at the subsequent time tb. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state after time tb becomes the activated period. In the above case, the number-of-games image GE (see FIG. 23(c) described above) that does not display numbers is displayed in the activated period after time tb.

In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), it is assumed that the power is turned off at time tc after time tb in the activated period, and the power is turned on at a subsequent time td, as shown in FIG. 23(d). When the power is turned on, a recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, during the period in which the recovery screen is displayed, the performance lamp 33 is displayed in a recovery mode. In the specific example of FIG. 23(d), the recovery screen is displayed until time te, and then the above-mentioned screen Mh is displayed. As shown in FIG. 23(d), in the activated period after the time te when the screen Mh is displayed, the number of games image GE displays a symbol "???" instead of a number. Furthermore, during the period in which the symbol "???" is displayed on the number of games image GE, the performance lamp 33 is displayed in a warning mode. In the activated period in which the symbol "???" is displayed on the number of games image GE, normal games can be played. However, even during the period when various performances are performed in the game, the performance lamp 33 continues to be displayed in a warning mode instead of in a mode corresponding to the performance (normal mode).

In this embodiment, when the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "800", the display of the symbol "???" in the number of games image GE ends, and the display of the symbol "???" in the number of games image GE ends. Addition display of numbers is executed. Further, the effect lamp 33 is switched from the warning mode to the normal mode at the time when the remaining number of times N until the second time saving game state is initialized to the numerical value "800". For example, when the performance lamp 33 is in the warning mode, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can switch the performance lamp 33 to the normal mode by executing a clear operation.

As described above, this embodiment is an example of a configuration in which "when the power is turned on, if the number of determinations specified from the information reaches a specific number, the notification means can be controlled in a special manner" , the remaining number of times N reaches the numerical value "0" (the number of jackpot drawings reaches 800), and when the power is restored, the gaming state notified from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 120 by the power outage recovery command is In the case of a low-probability non-time-saving game state, a configuration is adopted in which the notification means (effect lamp 33, image display device 31) can be controlled in a special mode (warning mode, display of the symbol "???").

FIG. 24(a) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state immediately after the time-saving gaming state ends. As mentioned above, the performance mode immediately after the non-time saving gaming state is started becomes the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 24(a), in the non-time-saving game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends, each image (effect pattern GAx, etc.) displayed in the normal mode is displayed. Further, in the non-time saving game state immediately after the time saving game state (first time saving game state, second time saving game state) ends, in addition to the above images, a left-handed game image GL is displayed.

The left-handed player image GL is an image for informing that the game should be played left-handed. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state, playing the game with the right hand is more advantageous than playing the game with the left hand, and the right hand game GS (the right hand lamp 28) indicates that the game should be played with the right hand. On the other hand, in a non-time-saving gaming state, it is more advantageous to play with the left hand than with the right hand. Therefore, when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, it is preferable to have a configuration in which it is notified that the game should be played left-handed (that the player should switch from right-handed to left-handed). In consideration of the above circumstances, the left-handed game image GL is displayed immediately after the time-saving game state ends.

FIG. 24(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period in which the left-handed image GL is displayed. The left-handed game image GL is usually displayed for a predetermined period of time after transitioning to the non-time-saving gaming state. Hereinafter, the period from the transition to the non-time-saving gaming state until the time elapses will be referred to as "period Th." FIG. 24(b) shows the above period Th.

FIG. 24(b) shows the screen displayed at each time point (production mode) and whether or not the left-handed image GL is displayed. The specific example in FIG. 24(b) assumes that the second time-saving game state ends during the scenario setting period. FIG. 24(b) shows the period of the final game in the second time-saving game state. In the final game of the second time-saving game state, the same performance as in other games (performance to notify whether the jackpot has been won) is performed, and then the above-mentioned end performance (see FIG. 45(b)) is performed. There are cases. In the specific example of FIG. 24(b), the left-handed hitting image GL is displayed over the period Th.

FIG. 24(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period in which the left-handed image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24(c), it is assumed that a power outage occurs during the final game in the second time-saving game state. Specifically, assume that the final game of the second time-saving game state starts at time ts, then a power outage occurs at time ta (a time point before the end performance), and the power outage is restored at time tb. . Further, assume that the final game in the second time-saving game state is restarted from time tb and ended at time te.

In the above specific example of FIG. 24(c), the above-mentioned recovery screen (see FIG. 21(a)) is displayed from time tb to time te. Furthermore, the left-handed game image GL is displayed over a period Th starting from the time tb when the final game ends. However, as can be understood from FIG. 24(c), if a power outage occurs in the final game of the second time-saving game state, the end performance that is supposed to be executed thereafter is omitted. Furthermore, in the case where a power outage occurs in the final game of the first time-saving game state, similarly, the end performance that is supposed to be executed in the final game is omitted.

FIG. 24(d) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the period in which the left-handed image GL is displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 24(d), it is assumed that the power supply is cut off during the period Th. Specifically, a case is assumed in which a power outage occurs at a time ta in a period Th, and the power outage is restored at a subsequent time tb. In the above case, the display of the left-handed hit image GL is stopped. Specifically, even if the power outage is restored before the period Th has elapsed, the left-handed hit image GL will not be displayed on the recovery screen and the normal mode screen that will be displayed thereafter.

FIGS. 25(a-1) and 25(a-2) are diagrams for explaining other specific examples of the customer waiting screen Mx. In the above-mentioned FIG. 19(a), the customer waiting screen Mx displayed in the customer waiting state at the start of the second time-saving game state was explained. FIG. 25(a-1) and FIG. 25(a-2) are specific examples of the customer waiting screen Mx(1, 2) displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state.

FIG. 25(a-1) is a mock diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx1. On the customer waiting screen Mx1, similar to the customer waiting screen Mx described above in FIG. Further, in the customer waiting image Mx1, in addition to the above images, a loading notification image GK is displayed. The installed notification image GK is an image for notifying that the second time-saving game state is provided. For example, the loading notification image GK displays a message "Second Time Saving Loading".

FIG. 25(a-1) is a mock diagram of the customer waiting screen Mx2. On the customer waiting screen Mx2, various images displayed in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode are displayed, similar to the customer waiting screen Mx and the customer waiting screen Mx1 described above with reference to FIG. 19(a). However, on the customer waiting screen Mx2, the effect image GA is hidden and a demo movie is displayed instead of the background image GHx. The demo movie includes, for example, a movie displayed with a reach effect. Further, on the customer waiting screen Mx2, in addition to the above-mentioned images, a loading notification image GK is displayed (same as the customer waiting screen Mx1).

In this embodiment, in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are displayed alternately. Specifically, when the customer waiting screen Mx1 is displayed for a predetermined time, the customer waiting screen Mx1 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx2. Thereafter, when the customer waiting screen Mx2 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the customer waiting screen Mx2 switches to the customer waiting screen Mx1. In the above configuration, in the customer waiting state (non-gaming period), it is notified that the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the player can confirm whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state before playing the game. Note that the installation notification image GK may be displayed on one of the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2, and hidden on the other.

However, for example, in order to determine whether a clear operation is necessary or not, the administrator of gaming machine 1 may check whether or not it is possible to transition to the second time-saving gaming state when the power of gaming machine 1 is shut off. You may want to check the status. However, the customer waiting screen Mx1 and the customer waiting screen Mx2 are not displayed when the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Therefore, in a state where the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, it cannot be confirmed whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state depending on the installed notification image GK.

In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration that includes a display member that displays (describes) a message that indicates that the second time-saving gaming state is provided. According to the configuration including the above-mentioned display member, it is possible to grasp whether or not the gaming machine 1 can shift to the second time-saving gaming state even if the power is cut off. Hereinafter, a modification example in which a display member is employed will be described using FIG. 25(b-1) and FIG. 25(b-2).

FIG. 25(b-1) is a diagram for explaining a modification in which a display member is employed. FIG. 25(b-1) shows an excerpt of the area corresponding to the area Rx in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes members including an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3, a glass frame 4, etc. (hereinafter referred to as the "frame member"), a game board 10, a main control board 110, a performance control board 120, etc. that can be attached to and detached from the frame member. It consists of members including (hereinafter referred to as "board members"). In the modification shown in FIG. 25(b-1), it is assumed that a frame member is used as a display member. Specifically, a message ``Second Time Saving Equipped'' is displayed (written) near the right side effect lamp 33 of the two effect lamps 33 provided.

FIG. 25(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another modification example in which a display member is employed. FIG. 25(b-2) shows an excerpt of the area corresponding to the area Ry shown in FIG. 1 of the gaming machine 1 in the modified example. In the modification shown in FIG. 25(b-2), it is assumed that a board member is used as a display member. Specifically, a message "Second time saving installation" is displayed below the big prize opening 16 in the gaming area. According to each of the above modifications, it is possible to grasp from the display member whether or not it is possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state during a period in which the gaming machine 1 is not powered on. However, the area in which the message indicating that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state is possible can be changed as appropriate.

By the way, there is a situation in which the message indicating that the second time-saving gaming state is installed is more easily visible even from a distant location as it is located closer to the upper end of the gaming machine 1. In the modification of FIG. 25(b-1) described above, the message is displayed on the upper end side from the center of the frame member (gaming machine 1). Therefore, there is an advantage that the message is easily visible even from a distance.

Further, there is a situation in which a player who is playing a game tends to pay attention to the starting opening (13, 14) among the board members. The starting ports (13, 14) are located below the center of the board member. That is, there is a situation in which the player tends to pay attention to the lower side of the board member than the center. In the modification of FIG. 25(b-2) described above, a message indicating that the second time-saving game state is installed is displayed below the center of the board member. Therefore, compared to, for example, a configuration in which the message is displayed above the center of the board member, the modified example of FIG. 25(b-2) has the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the message.

<Pre-determination table for special symbols>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination table for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance. When a game ball wins into the first starting winning hole 13 or the second starting winning hole 14 (at the time of starting winning), winning information is generated by the preliminary determination table.

The above winning information is generated in order to pre-determine the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the winning information includes the type of special symbol display device (the type of starting hole detection switch that detects that the game ball has entered the starting hole), the type of special symbol, the gaming state, the random number value for reach determination, and Generated based on the random value for special symbol variation. Further, a start winning designation command that specifies the generated winning information is generated and transmitted to the production control board 120. By using the start winning designation command indicating the above winning information, the result of preliminary determination (loss, jackpot, small hit), the type of special symbol, and the fluctuation pattern (whether or not a reach occurs) can be determined before the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. The winning information (starting winning designation command) of this embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (pending change effect).

In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 26, winning information regarding the first special symbol display device 20 includes winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1 to 4), winning information c (1 to 4), and winning information for the first special symbol display device 20. Winning information including information d1 and winning information e1 is set. Also, as winning information regarding the second special symbol display device 21, winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5 to 8), winning information c (5 to 8), and winning information d (1, 2). , winning information e(1, 2), winning information f, and winning information g are set.

For example, when winning information a1 or winning information a3 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the effect for about 40000 ms. In the above performance, a long hit will occur after the normal reach performance is executed.

When winning information b1 or winning information b5 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect is executed for about 60000 ms by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SP reach 1 is executed, resulting in a long hit.

When the winning information b2 or the winning information b6 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect is executed for about 60000 ms by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SP reach 2 is executed, resulting in a long hit.

When winning information c1 or winning information c5 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect is executed for about 70000 ms by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SPSP reach performance 1 is executed via or directly through the SP reach performance, resulting in a long hit.

When the winning information c2 or the winning information c6 is selected at the time of starting winning, the effect is executed for about 70000 ms by the effect control board 120 in the game started by the starting winning. In the above performance, after the normal reach performance is executed, SPSP reach performance 2 is executed via or directly through the SP reach performance to correspond to the long hit performance.

When winning information d1 or winning information d2 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes a small win or short winning effect of about 20000 ms.

Among each winning information, winning information e1, winning information a2, winning information b3, winning information b4, winning information c3, winning information c4, winning information e2, winning information a4, winning information b7, winning information b8, winning information c7, The winning information c8 and the winning information f are determined when the jackpot lottery based on the starting winning that determined the winning information loses.

As shown in FIG. 26, in this embodiment, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 13 in the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state, second time-saving gaming state). Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol (a combination of the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for symbol), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 20 is used. First, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13, a starting winning designation command is not generated.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained.
<Main processing of main control board>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating main processing by the main control board 110. When power is supplied by the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 111, and the main CPU 111 performs the following main processing.

When starting the main processing, the main CPU 111 executes initialization processing (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes a startup program and initializes a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 113. For example, in the initialization process, the stack pointer is appropriately set. Note that in the initialization process, each piece of information for displaying the above-mentioned base value (such as the number of normal outs) is not initialized. Further, in the initialization process, the remaining number M of the gaming state (high certainty flag, time saving flag) and time saving gaming state is not initialized. Further, the remaining number of times N until the time-saving gaming state is reached is not initialized in the initialization process.

After executing the initialization process, the main CPU 111 determines whether the clear button 30 is operated (S20). If it is determined that the clear button 30 has not been operated (S20: No), the main CPU 111 advances the process to a game random value update process (S60). On the other hand, if it is determined that the clear button 30 has been operated (S20: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether the setting key device 115 has been rotated to a specific position (S30). That is, the main CPU 111 determines whether the setting change switch 115a is in the ON state. When determining that the setting key device 115 has been rotated (S30: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a setting change process (S40).

In the above configuration, if both the setting key device 115 and the clear button 30 are operated when the power is turned on, the setting change process is executed. That is, the above-mentioned setting change mode is started. In the setting change process, an operation for changing the setting value (operation of the clear button 30) is accepted. Furthermore, when the setting change switch 115a changes to the OFF state, the setting value displayed on the base display 114 is stored in the main RAM 113, and the setting change process ends.

In the setting change process of this embodiment, various types of information in the main RAM 113 are initialized. For example, in the setting change process, the gaming state is initialized to a low probability non-time saving gaming state. Specifically, a high probability flag and a time saving flag are stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 113. The high probability flag is set to the ON state in the high probability gaming state, and is set to the OFF state in the low probability gaming state. Further, the time-saving flag is set to the ON state in the time-saving gaming state, and is set to the OFF state in the non-time-saving gaming state. In the setting change process, the high accuracy flag and time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state.

In addition, in the setting change process, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is initialized to a numerical value "0", and the remaining number N until the second time-saving gaming state is set to an initial value "800". In the above configuration, it can also be said that the remaining number of games until the second time-saving game state is activated is initialized in the setting change process. After finishing the setting change process, the main CPU 111 advances the process to the game random value update process.

In step S30 described above, if it is determined that the setting key device 115 has not been rotated (S30: No), the main CPU 111 executes a clear operation process. In the clear operation processing, the high accuracy flag and the time saving flag are initialized to the OFF state, similar to the setting change processing described above. Furthermore, in the clear operation process, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is initialized to a numerical value of "0", and the remaining number of times N is initialized to a numerical value of "800". Note that in the setting change process and the clear operation process, each piece of information for displaying the above-mentioned base value is not initialized. Each piece of information for displaying the base value is not initialized unless an error requiring a cold start (for example, a backup error) occurs.

In the above configuration, the area of the main RAM 113 to be initialized may be the same or different between the setting change process and the clear operation process. Further, a setting confirmation mode may be provided in which the setting value cannot be changed but the current setting value is displayed on the base display 114. For example, if the setting key device 115 is rotated to a specific position after proceeding to step S60, the configuration may be such that the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

When the clear operation process is executed, the main CPU 111 executes a game random value update process (S60). In the above gaming random number update process, the special symbol variation random number and reach determination random number are updated. The above gaming random number update process is repeatedly executed until a predetermined interruption occurs.

<Timer interrupt processing of main control board>
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing by the main control board 110. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 ms), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing described below.

When the above timer interrupt processing is executed, in step S101, the main CPU 111 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. After executing step S101, the main CPU 111 executes time control processing (S102). In the above time control processing, the main CPU 111 updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, and updates the normal symbol time counter that defines the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 22. It updates various timer counters, such as updating and updating the normal power open time counter that defines the open time of the second starting port 14. Specifically, the main CPU 111 subtracts 1 from the special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, and normal power open time counter.

After executing the time control process, the main CPU 111 executes a random number update process (S103). In the random number update process, the main CPU 111 updates the random numbers for special symbol determination, jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, and hit determination random number. Specifically, a value "1" is added to each random number counter indicating each random number value.

After executing the random number update process, the main CPU 111 executes an initial random number counter update process (step S104). In this embodiment, when the random number value is added up to the maximum value, the random number value is set to the value of the initial random number counter. In the initial random value counter update process, the main CPU 111 is configured to use an initial random value counter for special symbol determination that indicates the initial random value for special symbol determination, an initial random value counter for the jackpot symbol that indicates the initial random value for the jackpot symbol, and an initial random value counter for the small win symbol. A numerical value "1" is added to each initial random value counter for small winning symbols indicating an initial random value.

After executing the initial random value counter update process, the main CPU 111 executes an input control process (S105). In the input control process, the main CPU 111 controls the first starting opening detection switch 13a, the second starting opening detection switch 14a, the gate detection switch 15a, the big winning opening detection switch (16a, 17a), the general winning opening detection switch 18a, and the out ball. It is determined whether there is an input to each switch of the detection switch 19a.

After executing the input control process, the main CPU 111 executes a special figure special electric control process (S106) for controlling the special symbol display device (20, 21) and the special electric accessory (opening/closing door 16b, movable piece 17b). Execute. Further, after executing the special figure/special electric line control process, the main CPU 111 executes the general figure/general electric line control process (S107). In the ordinary figure general electricity control process, the ordinary symbol display device 22 and the ordinary electric accessory (opening/closing door 14b) are controlled.

After executing the general figure and general electricity control process, the main CPU 111 executes the payout control process (S108). In the payout control process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a game ball has won in the big winning hole 16, the first starting hole 13, the second starting hole 14, or the general winning hole 18. Further, in the payout control process, when it is determined that a game ball has won in the winning hole, the main CPU 111 transmits a payout number designation command corresponding to the winning hole to the payout control board 130.

Specifically, the general winning hole prize ball counter, the big winning hole prize ball counter, and the starting hole prize ball counter are checked, and a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning hole is transmitted to the payout control board 130. Thereafter, predetermined data is subtracted from the prize ball counter corresponding to the transmitted payout number designation command and updated.

After executing the payout control process, the main CPU 111 executes a data creation process (S109). In the data creation process, external information data (information indicating that a jackpot is in progress, etc.) transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1, starting opening/closing solenoid data that defines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 14b (second starting opening 14), opening/closing door opening/closing solenoid data, etc. 16b and the movable piece 17b (big winning hole) opening/closing solenoid data that defines the opening/closing pattern of the special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, special symbol display device data that defines the display pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, Normal symbol display device data that defines the display pattern of the normal symbol display device 22 is created.

After executing the data creation process, the main CPU 111 executes an output control process (S110). In the output control process, the main CPU 111 outputs various data (starting port opening/closing solenoid data, etc.) created in step S109 described above via the port. Further, the main CPU 111 executes a command transmission process to transmit the command set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 113. For example, the above-mentioned starting prize designation command is stored in the above production transmission data storage area.

After executing the output control process, the main CPU 111 executes a counting process (S111). In the above counting process, the number of prize balls and the number of outs are counted in order to calculate the base value B of the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Specifically, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 18 (when a game ball is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 18a), the main CPU 111 controls the base calculation prize ball counter. The numerical value "10" (the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning hole 18) is added to (the normal number of prize balls) in the counting process.

Similarly, in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 13, the numerical value is "3", and when a game ball wins in the second starting hole 14, the numerical value is "3", and when the game ball wins in the first big winning hole 16, the numerical value is "3". When the game ball wins, the numerical value "15" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation, and when the game ball wins the second big prize opening 17, the numerical value "15" is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation. On the other hand, the prize ball counter for base calculation is not incremented except in the low probability non-time saving game state.

When a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the main CPU 111 adds the numerical value "1" to the out counter for base calculation (usually the number of outs) in the counting process in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. On the other hand, the base calculation out counter is not incremented except in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Further, when a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 19a, the numerical value "1" is added to the total out counter in the counting process regardless of the gaming state.

After executing the counting process, the main CPU 111 executes a base display process (S112). In the base display process, a base value is calculated from the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal outs counted in the above-mentioned counting process, and is displayed on the base display 114. After executing the base display process, the main CPU 111 restores the information saved in step S101 described above to the register of the main CPU 111 (S113).

<Input control processing>
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating the input control process (S105 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. When the input control process is started, the main CPU 111 executes the general winning opening detection switch input process (S121). In the general winning opening detection switch input process described above, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 18a. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 18 or not. When the main CPU 111 receives a detection signal from the general winning hole detection switch 18a, it adds predetermined data to the general winning hole prize ball counter and updates it.

After executing the general winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the large winning opening detection switch input process (S122). In the big winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch (16a, 17a) is input. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the big winning hole (16, 17). When the main CPU 111 receives a detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch, it adds predetermined data to the big winning hole prize ball counter.

After executing the big winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the first starting opening detection switch input process (S123). In the first starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 13a has been input. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 13 or not. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 13 in the first starting port detection switch input process described above, predetermined data for determining a jackpot is set.

After executing the first starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the second starting port detection switch input process. In the second starting port detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 14a has been input. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 14 or not. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 14 in the second starting port detection switch input process described above, a jackpot determination is made in the same way as when the game ball has entered the first starting port 13. Predetermined data to perform the process is set.

After executing the second starting gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 executes the gate detection switch input process. In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 15a has been input. That is, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15 or not. When it is determined in the above gate detection switch input process that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 15, predetermined data for performing the normal symbol lottery is set.

<First starting port detection switch input processing>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating the first starting port detection switch input process (S123 in FIG. 29 described above) by the main control board 110. When the first starting port detection switch input process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 13a (S131). If it is determined that the detection signal is not input from the first starting port detection switch 13a (S131: No), the main CPU 111 ends the first starting port detection switch input process.

If it is determined that the detection signal has been input from the first starting hole detection switch 13a (S131: Yes), the main CPU 111 updates the starting hole prize ball counter (S132). Specifically, the main CPU 111 adds the number of prize balls (for example, a numerical value "3") corresponding to the first starting hole 13 to the starting hole prize ball counter.

After updating the starting hole prize ball counter, the main CPU 111 determines whether the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than four (S133). If the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not less than 4 (S133: No), that is, if the number of reservations is 4 (U1 = 4), the main CPU 111 The mouth detection switch input process ends.

When the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than four (S133: Yes), the main CPU 111 acquires various random numbers. Specifically, the main CPU 111 acquires a random value for special symbol determination (S134), acquires a random value for a jackpot symbol (S135), acquires a random value for a small win symbol (S136), and obtains a random value for a game random symbol. Numerical values (random value for special symbol variation and random value for reach determination) are acquired (S137).

Each random number value obtained in steps S134 to S137 above is stored in the first special symbol storage area (first to fourth storage units). Specifically, the above first special symbol storage area includes a first storage section to a fourth storage section. The main CPU 111 searches for empty storage units in order from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and stores each obtained random number value in the corresponding empty storage unit. Further, after obtaining each random number value, the main CPU 111 adds the number "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area (S138).

After adding the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area, the main CPU 111 executes a preliminary determination process (S139). In the preliminary determination process, the main CPU 111 determines each of the random numbers obtained in steps S134 to S137 based on the preliminary determination table (see FIG. 26 described above) corresponding to the current gaming state.

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 14 in the second starting port detection switch input process described above, the same process as the first starting port detection switch input process is performed. However, in the above-mentioned first starting opening detection switch input process, the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is added, whereas in the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the second special symbol retention number (U2) is added. Storage area is added. In addition, in the second starting port detection switch input process, each acquired random number value is stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, the first starting port detection switch input process and the second starting port detection switch input process differ only in the storage area to be updated (special symbol reservation number storage area, special symbol storage area), and other processing is basically the same. . However, in the first starting opening detection switch input process, the starting winning designation command is not sent in the time-saving gaming state, and in the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the starting winning designation command is sent even in the time-saving gaming state. The two are also different.

<Pre-judgment processing>
FIG. 31 is a flowchart for explaining the preliminary determination process by the main control board 110. The preliminary determination process in FIG. 31 is executed in both the first starting port detection switch input process and the second starting port detection switch input process described above. That is, the above preliminary determination process is executed both when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 14.

In the preliminary determination process, the above winning information (see FIG. 26) is generated, and a start winning designation command specifying the winning information can be transmitted to the production control board 120. In response to the start winning designation command, a pre-read performance (for example, a pending change performance) becomes executable on the performance control board 120 side. However, as described above, winning information is not determined when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 in the time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the pre-read performance when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving gaming state.

Specifically, when the preliminary determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current preliminary determination process was executed when a game ball entered the first starting port 13. (S151). When determining that the preliminary determination process has been executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 (S151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (S152 ). If it is determined that the game is in a time-saving gaming state (S152: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the preliminary determination process without generating winning information (by omitting S161, which will be described later). As described above, the prefetch effect is executed based on winning information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment described above, the pre-read performance when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 is substantially prohibited in the time-saving gaming state.

If it is determined that the game is not in a time-saving gaming state (S152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a tentative jackpot determination process (S153). In the tentative jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the random number value for special symbol determination written in the special symbol retention storage area in response to the current starting win to perform the jackpot determination process (described later) of the game started by the current starting win. In S207 of FIG. 33), it is tentatively determined whether the player wins the jackpot, wins the small hit, or loses.

If “No” is determined in the above-mentioned step S151, that is, if the preliminary determination process is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 skips the above-mentioned step S152. Then, the process after the tentative jackpot determination process (S153) is executed. In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the second starting port 14, winning information is generated regardless of whether it is a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state (S161 described later is executed). . That is, when a game ball enters the second start opening 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state.

After executing the jackpot provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a jackpot has been provisionally determined in the jackpot provisional determination process (S154). When the main CPU 111 is tentatively determined to be a jackpot (step S154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot symbol tentative determination process (S155). In the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, a jackpot pattern (stopped pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the starting winning is provisionally judged using the random number value for the jackpot pattern acquired according to the starting winning. After executing the jackpot symbol provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S158).

On the other hand, if it is not tentatively determined that the player wins the jackpot in the tentative jackpot determination process (step S154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is tentatively determined that the player wins the small hit (S156). When it is tentatively determined that the small hit is won (S156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a small hit symbol tentative determination process (S157). In the small winning pattern temporary determination process, the small winning pattern (stopped pattern data) that is stopped in the game started by the starting winning is temporarily determined using the random value for the small winning pattern acquired in response to the current starting winning. It will be judged. After executing the small hit pattern temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern temporary determination process (S159). If it is determined "No" in the above step S156, that is, if it is tentatively determined as a loss in the jackpot provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 executes the fluctuation pattern without executing the symbol provisional determination process (S155, S157 described above). The process moves to provisional determination processing S158.

In the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S158), the main CPU 111 determines the game status, the result of the jackpot provisional determination process, the result of the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, the result of the small hit pattern provisional determination process, and the current starting winnings. A special symbol variation pattern is tentatively determined using the random number value for special symbol variation and the random number value for reach determination. Thereafter, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern provisionally determined in the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S159). Further, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S160), and the preliminary determination process is ended.

By the above preliminary determination process, winning information can be transmitted to the performance control board 120 as a starting winning designation command when the game ball enters the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the performance control board 120 that has received the starting winning designation command analyzes the starting winning designation command, and pre-determines the predetermined pattern before the change of special symbols triggered by the current starting winning is started. It is possible to perform a performance (pre-reading performance).

However, this preliminary determination process is determined according to the gaming state at the time when the game ball enters each starting port 13, 14. Therefore, if the gaming state changes before processing the first reservation or second reservation reserved due to the ball entry, the result of the jackpot determination process described later and the result of the preliminary determination process may differ. There is.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating the special figure special electric control process (S106 in FIG. 12 described above) by the main control board 110. When the special figure special electric line control process is started, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the special figure special electric line processing data (0 to 5) (S181), and refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special electric line processing data (S182).

For example, when the special symbol special electric processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes a special symbol storage determination process (step S183). As will be described in detail later, in the special symbol memory determination process, the number of reservations (U1, U2) is subtracted, the special symbols to be displayed on the special symbol display device and the variable time of the special symbol display device are set, and the special symbol display device's fluctuation time is set. Fluctuation display starts. When the variable display of the special symbol display device is started, "1" is set in the special symbol special electric processing data.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes special symbol variation processing (S184). In the special symbol variation process, when the special symbol variation time set in the immediately preceding special symbol memory determination process has elapsed, the special symbol set in the special symbol memory determination process is displayed on the special symbol display device (20, 21). Stop and display. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "2".

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes the special symbol stop processing (S185). In the special symbol stop process, the main CPU 111 stops and displays the special symbol displayed in the special symbol variation process for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Thereafter, if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "3" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and sets an opening command and opening time for the jackpot. Similarly, if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a small winning symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "4" to the special symbol special electric processing data and sets the opening command and opening time for the small winning. Furthermore, if the stopped and displayed special symbol is a losing symbol, the main CPU 111 sets "0" to the special symbol special electric processing data.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "3", that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot game processing (step S186). In the jackpot game process, after the opening of the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "opening period") ends, the jackpot 16 is opened according to the jackpot opening/closing solenoid data (opening pattern of the jackpot 16). That is, the above-mentioned round starts after the opening period. The jackpot opening/closing solenoid data used in the jackpot game is selected according to the jackpot symbol.

After all rounds are completed, ending control (wait control) is executed for a predetermined period of time. Note that in this embodiment, the period during which the ending control is executed may be referred to as an "ending period." Further, the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the ending period may be referred to as a "round period" (a period including a plurality of rounds and intervals). When the ending period ends, "5" is set in the special figure special electric processing data.

When the special symbol special electric processing data is "4", that is, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding special symbol stop processing, the main CPU 111 executes the small winning game processing (step S187). In the small winning game process, small winning opening control is executed, and then the large winning opening 16 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, "1.8 seconds") according to the small winning opening/closing solenoid data. Thereafter, ending control is executed for a predetermined period of time, and "0" is set in the special figure special electric processing data. After executing the small winning game process, the main CPU 111 advances the process to a transition determination process (S225). In the transition determination process, it is determined whether the start condition of the second time-saving game state is satisfied or not, and whether the end condition of the time-saving game state is satisfied or not.

When the special figure special electric processing data is "5", the main CPU 111 executes the special game end processing (S188). In the special game end processing, the main CPU 111 changes the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability time saving gaming state or a low probability time saving gaming state (the first 1 time-saving gaming state). Specifically, when transitioning to the first time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot, the first time-saving flag is changed to the ON state. Further, when shifting to the first time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot, the remaining number M of the first time-saving game state is set to an initial value "100" or "799" depending on the jackpot symbol. After setting the gaming state after the jackpot game, the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0". Furthermore, when the game shifts to a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state), the high probability flag changes to the ON state.

<Special symbol memory judgment process>
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol storage determination process (S183 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. When the special symbol storage determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S201). If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (special symbol time counter≠0) (S201: Yes), the special symbol memory determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner (S201: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is 1 or more (S202).

If the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is not 1 or more (S202: No), the main CPU 111 moves the process to step S204, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is "1" or more, If there is (S202: Yes), the process moves to step S203. In the above configuration, the second special symbol storage area is processed with priority over the first special symbol storage area. In step S203, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area.

In step S204, the main CPU 111 determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. If the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (S204: No), the process moves to step S215, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is "1" or more (S204: Yes), the process moves to step S205.

In step S205, the main CPU 111 subtracts "1" from the value of the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area. After that, in step S206, the main CPU 111 selects the random value (random value for special symbol determination, A combination of random values for jackpot symbols, random values for small win symbols, random values for reach determination, and random values for special symbol variation) and the start winning designation command are shifted. Specifically, the predetermined random value and the start winning designation command stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area are stored in the previous storage unit. shift to.

For example, the random number value and the starting winning designation command stored in the first storage section are shifted to the determination storage area (the 0th storage section). In addition, the predetermined random number value and the start prize designation command stored in the first storage section are written in the judgment storage area (zero storage section), and are also written in the judgment storage area (zero storage section). The data is erased from the special symbol retention storage area. That is, the random number value and start prize designation command used in the previous game are erased. In addition, MODE of the start prize designation command is processed so as to correspond to the storage area after the shift.

After subtracting the number of reservations, the main CPU 111 executes a jackpot determination process (S207). In the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 executes the data (random value for special symbol determination, random value for jackpot symbol, small hit A jackpot determination process is executed based on the symbol random number value).

When a jackpot is won in the above jackpot determination process, a jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined. Further, if a small hit is won, a special symbol for the small hit is determined, and in the case of a loss, a special symbol for the loss is determined.

After executing the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process (S208). In the variation pattern determination process, a variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state is used to determine the variation pattern. Specifically, a variation pattern is determined from a variation pattern determination table according to a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for jackpot symbol, a random number value for reach determination, and a random number value for special symbol variation.

After executing the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 111 sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area (S209). Further, the main CPU 111 confirms the gaming state at the start of the variation, and sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area (S210).

After setting the gaming state designation command, the main CPU 111 starts variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (S211). Specifically, when the first hold (U1) is subtracted in the current special symbol memory determination process, variable display is started on the first special symbol display device 20, and the second hold is subtracted in the current special symbol memory determination process. When (U2) is subtracted, variable display is started on the second special symbol display device 21. After starting the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device, the main CPU 111 sets a variation time in the special symbol time counter according to the variation pattern determined in step S208 in the special symbol time counter (S212).

After setting the variable time, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting determination flag to "00H" (S213). That is, the customer waiting determination flag is cleared. The above customer waiting determination flag becomes "00H" during variable display of special symbols and during special games. On the other hand, in other cases (non-gaming period), the customer waiting determination flag becomes "01H". When the customer waiting determination flag is "01H", the performance control board 120 is notified by the customer waiting command that it is a non-gaming period. After clearing the customer waiting determination flag, the main CPU 111 sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1" (S214), and ends the special symbol memory determination processing.

In step S204 described above, if it is determined that the first hold (U1) is "0", that is, if neither the first hold (U1) nor the second hold (U2) is stored, the main CPU 111 , it is determined whether the customer waiting determination flag is set to "01H" (S215).

When the customer waiting determination flag is set to 01H (S215: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the special symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, if "01H" is not set in the customer waiting determination flag (S215: No), the main CPU 111 moves the process to step S216. In step S216, the main CPU 111 sets the customer waiting determination flag to 01H so that the customer waiting command is not set many times in step S217, which will be described later. In step S217, the main CPU 111 sets a customer waiting command in the presentation transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

<Special symbol memory determination process>
FIG. 34(a) is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol stop processing (S185 in FIG. 32 described above) by the main control board 110. The above-described special symbol stop processing is executed immediately after the variable display of the special symbol stops.

When the special symbol stop processing is started, the main CPU 111 sets a symbol confirmation command in the presentation transmission data storage area (S220). After setting the symbol confirmation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether the confirmation period has elapsed (S221). The above confirmation period is provided to enable the player to recognize that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, approximately 0.5 seconds. The variable display of special symbols in the next game is prohibited until the above confirmation period ends. Specifically, step S221 is repeatedly executed until the fixed period ends (S221: No), and when the fixed period ends (S221: Yes), it becomes possible to proceed to the subsequent step.

When the confirmation period ends, the main CPU 111 sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the performance transmission data storage area (S222). After setting the game state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol that stopped in the current game is a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol (hereinafter may be collectively referred to as a "win symbol"). S223). If the main CPU 111 determines that it is a winning symbol (S223: Yes), it executes a winning preparation process (S224) and ends the special symbol stop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a winning symbol (S223: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a transition determination process (S225) and ends the special symbol stop process.

FIG. 34(b) is a flowchart of the winning preparation process. When the winning preparation process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol stopped in the current game is a jackpot symbol (S230). If it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol (S230: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special pattern special electric processing data to "3" (jackpot game processing) (S231). Further, the main CPU 111 executes jackpot initialization processing (S233). On the other hand, in step S230, if it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot (S230: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "4" (small winning game processing) (S232).

In the jackpot initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot initialization process, the high probability flag that is in the ON state in the high probability gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the state shifts to the low probability gaming state. In addition, the time-saving flag that is ON in the time-saving gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number of games M indicating the remaining number of games in the time-saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "0", and the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. do.

In the jackpot initialization process, the remaining number N until the second time-saving gaming state is initialized. In addition, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times N is not initialized in principle except when the above-mentioned clear operation processing by operating the clear button or when a jackpot game is started. For example, when the remaining number of times N reaches the number of operations n (numerical value "0"), the second time-saving game state is entered, but the remaining number of times N is not initialized. In the above configuration, the number of times that the second time-saving game state can be shifted to is one in the period from the current jackpot game to the next jackpot game.

After executing the jackpot initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes a winning start preparation process (S234). In the winning start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening (16, 17) in the jackpot game is determined according to the special symbol (type of jackpot). In addition, an opening pattern for the big prize openings (16, 17) in the small winning game is set. After that, the main CPU 111 sends an opening designation command according to the type of win (first probability variable length, first probability variable short, first normal long, second probability variable length, small) to the performance transmission data storage area. (S235), sets an opening time according to the type of win (S236), and ends the win preparation process.

FIG. 35(a) is a flowchart of the migration determination process. When starting the transition determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times N is a numerical value "0" (S240). If it is determined that the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "0" (S240: Yes), that is, if the second time-saving game state is in progress or the activated period is in progress, the main CPU 111 executes the time-saving end determination process (S245). The transition determination process is then terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times N is not the numerical value "0" (S240: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the game is in a low probability gaming state (S241). In addition, in the above-mentioned step S240, in the game of the high probability time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, or the low probability non-time-saving gaming state other than the activated period, it is determined "No" in the above-mentioned step S240.

If it is determined that it is not a low probability gaming state (S241: No), the main CPU 111 sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0" (S246), and ends the transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in a low probability gaming state (S241: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times N (S242). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number N subtracted in step S242 is a numerical value "0" (S243). If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is not the numerical value "0" (S243: No), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end determination process, sets the special figure special electric line processing data to "0", and performs the transition determination. Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times N after the subtraction is the numerical value "0" (S243: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the second time saving transition process (S244) and then sets the special figure special electric processing data to "0". ” and ends the migration determination process. In the process at the time of transition to the second time saving game, a numerical value "1000" is set to the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state, the second time saving flag is set to the ON state, and the second time saving game state is started. In the second time saving transition process, a variation pattern determination table T is set according to the type of table scenario Sb that is set. However, during the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tbx is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the period after the remaining number of times N has been subtracted to the numerical value "0", the above-mentioned step S240 is determined to be "Yes", and the configuration is such that step S242 for subtracting the remaining number of times N is not executed. . In the above configuration, the subtraction of the remaining number of times N stops at the numerical value "0". However, instead of the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the subtraction of the remaining number of times N continues during a period after the remaining number of times N has been subtracted to the numerical value "0". FIG. 35(c) shows a transition determination process in a modified example employing the above configuration. The transition determination process of this modification is the same as the transition determination process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 35(a)) by omitting step S240. In the above modification, even in the period after the remaining number of times N has been subtracted to the numerical value "0", step S242 can be executed, and the remaining number of times N can be subtracted to a negative number. In addition, in the modified example, when the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "1" or more, and when the remaining number of times N is the numerical value "-1" or less, it is determined as "No" in step S243, and the second time saving transition process is Not executed.

FIG. 35(b) is a flowchart for explaining the time saving end determination process. When the main CPU 111 starts the time-saving end determination process, it determines whether the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is a numerical value "0" (S250). The remaining number of times M is stored in the main RAM 113 and indicates the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state or the second time-saving gaming state. That is, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving gaming state and the remaining number of times in the second time-saving gaming state are stored as common data. The above configuration has the advantage that the amount of data is reduced compared to a configuration in which the remaining number of times in each time-saving gaming state is stored as separate data.

If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "0" (S250: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M is not the numerical value "0" (S250: No), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M (S251). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number M after the subtraction is a numerical value "0" (S252). If the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is not the numerical value "0" (S252: No), the main CPU 111 ends the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times M after the subtraction is the numerical value "0" (S252: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes the time saving end process (S253) and then ends the time saving end determination process. In the time-saving end processing, for example, the time-saving flag is changed to the OFF state, and the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state or second time-saving game state) ends. In the second time saving transition process, a variation pattern determination table T is set according to the type of table scenario Sb that is set. However, during the scenario unset period, the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is set.

FIG. 36(a) is a flowchart of the general electric power control process. When starting the general-purpose electricity control process, the main CPU 111 loads the current value of the general-purpose electricity processing data (0 to 3) (S401), and refers to the branch address from the loaded general-purpose electricity processing data (S401). S402).

For example, when the ordinary symbol general electric processing data is "0", the main CPU 111 executes ordinary symbol memory determination processing (step S403). In the normal symbol storage determination process, a regular symbol lottery (win determination process) is executed with a probability depending on whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state. Further, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the result of the common symbol lottery. Further, depending on the current gaming state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b (second starting port 14) are determined by lottery. When executing the general symbol lottery, the main CPU 111 changes the ordinary symbol general electric processing data to "1" when ending the ordinary symbol memory determination process.

When the ordinary symbol ordinary electric processing data is "1", the main CPU 111 executes ordinary symbol fluctuation processing (S404). In the normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the variation time determined in the normal symbol memory determination process. The main CPU 111 changes the general pattern general electric processing data to "2" when ending the normal symbol variation processing.

When the ordinary symbol general electric processing data is "2", the main CPU 111 executes ordinary symbol stop processing (S405). In the normal symbol stop process, the normal symbols determined in the normal symbol memory determination process are stopped and displayed for at least a predetermined wait period (for example, about 0.5 seconds). The main CPU 111 changes the general pattern general electric processing data to "3" when ending the normal symbol stop processing.

When the general electricity processing data is "3", the main CPU 111 executes the opening/closing control processing (S405). In the opening/closing control process, when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol stop process, the opening/closing door 14b is opened and closed in the operating mode determined in the normal symbol memory determination process. When the main CPU 111 ends the opening/closing control process, the main CPU 111 changes the general figure/general electric processing data to "0".

FIG. 36(b) is a flowchart of normal symbol storage determination processing. The above normal symbol storage determination process is executed in the above-mentioned general pattern and general electricity control process.

When the main CPU 111 starts the normal symbol storage determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols G (the number of reserved common symbol lottery tickets) is greater than or equal to the numerical value "1" (S410). If it is determined that the normal symbol retention number G is not greater than the numerical value "1" (G=0) (S410: No), the main CPU 111 ends the normal symbol storage determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number G of normal symbols reserved is greater than or equal to the numerical value "1" (S410: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the number G of normally reserved symbols (S411), and shifts the storage area. (S412).

Specifically, when a game ball passes through the above-mentioned normal symbol gate 15, a random number value for hit determination is acquired and stored in the normal symbol retention storage area. The normal symbol retention storage area includes storage units from a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit. When the main CPU 111 acquires the random number value for determining a hit, the main CPU 111 stores the random number value for determining a hit in priority order from the first storage section to the fourth storage section among the vacant storage sections. In step S412 described above, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first storage unit is stored (shifted) in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the normal symbol retention storage area. In addition, the random number values for winning determination stored from the second storage section to the fourth storage section are stored from the first storage section to the third storage section.

When the random number value for hit determination is stored in the determination storage area, the main CPU 111 determines the random number value for hit determination according to the gaming state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state) (S413). Specifically, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the numerical value specified in the above-mentioned hit determination table (see FIG. 6(b)) matches the random number value for hit determination. After that, the main CPU 111 determines the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed using the above-mentioned normal symbol determination table (see FIGS. 7(b-1) and 7(b-2)) according to the gaming state (S414). .

Further, the main CPU 111 determines the variable time by lottery according to the gaming state (S415), and determines the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b by lottery according to the normal symbol and the gaming state determined in step S414 (S416). In the operating state, the opening/closing door 14b operates (opens/closes) in the operating mode determined in S416. After determining the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b, the main CPU 111 changes the ordinary symbol/universal power processing data to "1" (S417), and ends the ordinary symbol memory determination process.

Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 121 of the production control board 120 will be explained. As described above, upon receiving the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 110, the performance control board 120 determines and executes the performance corresponding to the variation pattern designation command by lottery.

<Main processing of production control board>
FIG. 37(a) is a flowchart illustrating main processing by the production control board. In step S510, the sub CPU 121 performs initialization processing. In the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 reads a program for executing the main process from the sub ROM 122 and initializes the sub RAM 123.

After executing the initialization process, the sub CPU 121 executes a recovery notification process (S520). In the restoration time notification process, a process for notifying whether or not the second time-saving gaming state has already been activated is executed. After executing the recovery time notification process, the sub CPU 121 performs a random value update process for effect (S530). In the performance random number update process, the sub CPU 121 updates various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 123. The effect random value update process is repeatedly executed until the interrupt process is executed.

FIG. 37(b) is a flowchart of the restoration notification process. When the recovery time notification process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether the gaming state at the end of displaying the power recovery screen is a high probability gaming state or a jackpot game (S521). If it is determined that it is a high probability gaming state or a jackpot game (S521: Yes), the sub CPU 121 decides to control the performance lamp 33 in the normal mode (a mode according to the gaming state) (S524), and upon recovery End the notification process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a high probability game state or a jackpot game (S521: No), the sub CPU 121 determines whether the remaining number of times M at the end of displaying the power recovery screen is a numerical value "0" (S522 ). When determining that the remaining number of times M is not the numerical value "0" (S522: No), the sub CPU 121 decides to control the performance lamp 33 in the normal mode (S525), and ends the recovery time notification process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "0" (S522: Yes), the sub CPU 121 determines whether the remaining number of times N at the end of displaying the recovery screen is the numerical value "0" (S523 ).

When determining that the remaining number of games N at the end of displaying the recovery screen is not the number "0" (S523: No), the sub CPU 121 decides to display the number "0" on the number of games image GE (S524), It is decided to control the performance lamp 33 in the normal mode, and the restoration notification process is ended. On the other hand, in step S523 described above, if it is determined that the remaining number of times N at the end of displaying the recovery screen is the numerical value "0" (S523: Yes), the sub CPU 121 adds the symbol "???" to the number of games image GE. It is determined to display it (S526), it is determined to control the effect lamp 33 in a warning mode (S527), and the recovery time notification process is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing of production control board>
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing. The sub CPU 121 executes timer interrupt processing approximately every 2 milliseconds. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the sub CPU 121 saves the information stored in the register to the stack area (S601).

After saving various information to the stack area, the sub CPU 121 updates various timer counters used in the production control board 120 (S602). After updating the timer counter, the sub CPU 121 executes command analysis processing (S603). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 analyzes the command in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 123.

After executing the command analysis process, the sub CPU 121 executes the effect input control process (S604). Although described in detail later, in the production input control process, control according to the operation of the production button 8 is executed. After executing the effect input control process, the sub CPU 121 executes a data output process (S605) for transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In step S606, the sub CPU 121 restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 121.

<Command analysis processing>
39 and 40 are flowcharts illustrating the command analysis process (S603 in FIG. 38). As shown in FIG. 39, when the command analysis process is started, the sub CPU 121 determines whether a command has been received (S611). The sub CPU 121 ends the command analysis process if there is no command in the reception buffer (No in step S611), and moves the process to step S621 if there is a command in the reception buffer (Yes in step S611).

In step S621, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command (Yes in step S621), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S622, and if it is not a customer waiting command (no in step S621), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S631. move.

In step S622, the sub CPU 121 performs a customer waiting performance pattern determination process to determine a customer waiting performance pattern. Specifically, a customer waiting effect pattern is determined, the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and information on the determined customer waiting effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. Therefore, data based on the determined customer waiting presentation pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123.

In step S631, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a start prize winning designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a starting winning designation command (Yes in step S631), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S632, and if it is not a starting winning designation command (No in step S631), it moves to step S641. Processing is transferred to .

In step S632, the sub CPU 121 analyzes the received starting prize designation command and executes a pending storage process corresponding to the starting winning prize designation command. The starting winning designation command is associated with information regarding jackpots, small wins, losses, and fluctuation patterns tentatively determined by the preliminary determination process. In the reservation storage process, information (winning information) regarding the newly reserved first reservation (U1) or second reservation (U2) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 123.

In step S633, the sub CPU 121 executes a pending change effect determination process. In the pending change effect determination process, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute a pending change effect, which will be described later, in accordance with the start winning designation command (winning information). The hold change effect is a so-called look-ahead effect, in which a hold image GB (see FIG. 29(a)), which will be described later, is displayed in one of a plurality of special modes (blue, red, gold, rainbow color). Specifically, in the pending change effect, the mode of the pending image GB may change stepwise to the final special mode (for example, change from blue to red). When the sub CPU 121 decides to execute the pending change effect, it determines in advance the final special mode and the timing (scenario) at which the mode of the pending image GB changes.

In step S641, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern specification command (Yes in step S641), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S642, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command (No in step S641), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S651. Processing is transferred to .

In step S642, the sub CPU 121 performs a variable effect pattern determination process to determine one variable effect pattern from among a plurality of variable effect patterns based on the received variable pattern designation command.

In step S643, the sub CPU 121 shifts the pending display data stored in the first pending storage area and the second pending storage area and the data corresponding to the starting winning designation command, and the information of the pending display data after shifting. A pending display mode update process is performed in which the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 are sent.

In step S651, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an effect design designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a production design designation command (Yes in step S651), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S652, and if it is not a production design designation command (No in step S651), it moves to step S661. Processing is transferred to .

In step S652, the sub CPU 121 performs a performance symbol determination process to determine the performance symbol GA to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 31 based on the content of the received performance symbol designation command. Specifically, the performance symbol designation command is analyzed, the performance symbol data that constitutes the combination of performance symbols GA is determined according to the presence or absence of a jackpot, and the type of the jackpot, and a symbol command based on the determined performance symbol data is issued. Set it in the performance symbol storage area.

In step S661, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol confirmation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol confirmation command (Yes in step S661), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S662, and if it is not a symbol confirmation command (No in step S661), the process proceeds to step S671. move. In step S662, the sub CPU 121 performs an effect pattern stop process of setting a pattern stop command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped effect pattern GA.

In step S671, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a general figure fluctuation pattern designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (Yes in step S671), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S672, and if it is not a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (No in step S671). ), the process moves to step S681 in FIG. In step S672, the sub CPU 121 performs a regular pattern variation performance pattern determination process to determine one regular pattern variation performance pattern from among a plurality of regular pattern fluctuation performance patterns based on the received regular pattern fluctuation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 40, in step S681, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a long release start command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a long release start command (Yes in step S681), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S682, and if it is not a long release start command (No in step S681), it moves to step S700. Processing is transferred to . In step S682, the sub CPU 121 performs a long open effect process. Here, a notification effect is executed to notify the player that the second starting port 14 will be opened for a long time (4.2 seconds) in the non-time saving game state.

In step S691, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol confirmation command (Yes in step S691), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S692, and if it is not a normal symbol confirmation command (No in step S691), it moves to step S700. Processing is transferred to . In step S692, the sub CPU 121 stores the production pattern data corresponding to the received normal pattern confirmation command and the pattern stop command for stopping and displaying the normal pattern production pattern in the sub RAM 123 in order to stop and display the normal pattern production pattern. Performs normal symbol fluctuation stop processing that is set in the transmission buffer.

In step S700, the sub CPU 121 determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command (Yes in step S700), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S701, and if it is not a gaming state designation command (No in step S700), step S711 Processing is transferred to .

In step S701, the sub CPU 121 executes a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area in the sub RAM 123. In step S711, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening command (Yes in step S711), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S712; if it is not an opening command (No in step S711), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S721. .

In step S712, the sub CPU 121 performs a winning start performance pattern determination process to determine a winning start performance pattern. Specifically, a winning start performance pattern is determined based on the opening command, the determined winning start performance pattern is set in the performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined winning start performance pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and lamp control. In order to transmit it to the board 140, data based on the determined winning start performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123.

In step S721, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot opening designation command indicating the start of a jackpot round game. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a big winning opening designation command (Yes in step S721), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S722, and if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a big winning opening opening designation command (No in step S721). ), the process moves to step S731.

In step S722, the sub CPU 121 performs in-round performance pattern determination processing to determine a jackpot performance pattern. Specifically, an in-round performance pattern is determined for each round to start based on a grand prize opening designation command having information about which round game is to start. Then, the determined in-round effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and in order to transmit information on the effect pattern to the image control board 150 and lamp control board 140, corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123. .

In step S731, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designation command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designation command (Yes in step S731), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S732; if it is not a round end designation command (No in step S731), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S741. Processing is transferred to . In step S732, the sub CPU 121 performs an in-rest performance pattern determination process that determines the performance pattern between each round.

In step S741, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending command. If the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending command (Yes in step S741), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S742; if it is not an ending command (No in step S741), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S751. .

In step S742, the sub CPU 121 performs a winning ending effect pattern determination process for determining a winning ending effect pattern. Specifically, a winning ending effect pattern is determined based on the ending command, the determined winning ending effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and information on the determined winning ending effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and lamp control. In order to transmit it to the board 140, data based on the determined winning effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 123.

In step S751, the sub CPU 121 checks whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a big winning opening ball entry command. The above-described grand prize opening ball entry command is transmitted from the main control board 110 when a game ball enters the grand prize opening. If the command stored in the reception buffer is a big winning opening ball entering command (Yes in step S751), the sub CPU 121 moves the process to step S752, and if the command stored in the reception buffer is not a big winning opening ball entering command (step S751 is No). ), the command analysis process ends. In step S752, the sub CPU 121 executes a big winning opening ball entering command transmission process for transmitting the big winning opening ball entering command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. In the above-described big winning opening ball entering command transmission process, the big winning opening ball entering command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.

<Production input control processing>
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the production input control process by the production control board. First, in step S831, the sub CPU 121 determines whether there is a valid effect button detection signal from the effect button detection switch 8a based on the effect button detection command from the lamp control board 140. Here, if the sub CPU 121 determines that there is no production button detection signal (No in step S831), it ends the process, and if it determines that there is a production button detection signal (Yes in step S831), it ends the process in step S832. Move to processing.

In step S832, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the button operation effect execution enable flag=01 is set in the storage area of the sub RAM 123. Here, if the button operation effect executable flag = 01 is not set (No in step S832), the sub CPU 121 ends the process, and if the button operation effect execution enable flag = 01 is set (step S832: (Yes in S832), the process moves to step S833.

Note that the button operation effect executable flag is used to determine whether or not the effect corresponding to the button operation can be executed based on the fact that the button operation has been performed. ”, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation in question, and if the flag is “00”, it indicates that it is impossible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation in question, and the operation validity period of the effect button 8 is The flag "01" is set in accordance with the start of the operation, and the flag "00" is set when the effect button 8 is operated or when the effective operation period ends without operating the effect button 8.

In step S833, the sub CPU 121 sets a button operation effect execution command in the transmission buffer. This command is a command for causing the image control board 150 to execute a performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button 8. Here, the sub CPU 121 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer in step S605 (see FIG. 22) after the effect input control process to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. The image control board 150 operates the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 based on the received command, and the lamp control board 140 operates the effect movable body 32 and the effect lamp 33 based on the received command.

Next, the image control board 150 will be explained. In the image control board 150 , when receiving a production command from the production control board 120 , the host CPU 151 reads the audio output device control program from the host ROM 153 based on the received production command, and outputs the audio output device 34 . At the same time, the host CPU 151 reads out an animation control program from the host ROM 153 and controls image display on the image display device 31 .

Here, the processing executed by the host CPU 151 in the image control board 150 will be described.

<Host CPU main processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating main processing by the image control board. When power is supplied by the power supply board 170, a system reset occurs in the host CPU 151, and the host CPU 151 performs the following main processing. First, in step S901, the host CPU 151 performs initialization processing. In this process, the host CPU 151 reads the main processing program from the host ROM 153 when the power is turned on, and instructs the initial settings of various modules of the host CPU 151 and the VDP 200.

In step S902, the host CPU 151 performs a performance pattern designation command analysis process that analyzes the performance pattern designation command (command stored in the reception buffer of the host RAM 152) transmitted from the performance control board 120. In addition, when the image control board 150 receives the command transmitted from the production control board 120, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) of the image control board 150 occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer.

The performance pattern designation command analysis process checks whether the performance pattern designation command (+performance control command) is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect pattern designation command is not stored in the reception buffer, the process directly advances to step S903. If a production pattern specification command (+ production control command) is stored in the reception buffer, a new production pattern specification command is read, and one or more animation groups to be executed are determined based on the read production pattern specification command. At the same time, an anime pattern is determined from each anime group. After determining the animation pattern, the read effect pattern designation command is deleted from the transmission buffer.

In step S903, the host CPU 151 performs animation control processing. In this process, the addresses of various anime scenes are updated based on the "scene switching counter", "wait frame", and "frame counter" that are updated in step S921, which will be described later, and the anime pattern determined in step S902 above. do.

In step S904, the host CPU 151 creates a display list based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the anime scene at the updated address, according to the priority order (drawing order) of the anime group to which the anime scene belongs. will be generated. When the generation of the display list is completed, the host CPU 151 outputs the display list to the VDP 200. Note that the display list output here is stored in the display list storage area 156a of the VRAM 156 via the CPU I/F 203 in the VDP 200.

In step S905, the host CPU 151 determines whether the FB switching flag=01. Here, as will be described later in FIG. 43(b), the FB switching flag is set when the previous display list has been drawn in the V blank interrupt every 1/60 seconds (approximately 16.6 ms). The FB switching flag becomes 01. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether the previous drawing has been completed. If the FB switching flag = 01 (Yes in step S905), the host CPU 151 moves the process to step S906, and if the FB switching flag = 00 (No in step S905), it waits until the FB switching flag = 01. do.

In step S906, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag=00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and moves the process to step S906. In step S907, the host CPU 151 performs drawing execution start processing. In this process, drawing execution start data is set in the drawing register in order to instruct the VDP 200 to execute drawing on the display list that has already been output. That is, execution of drawing on the display list output in step S904 is instructed. Thereafter, the processes from step S902 to step S907 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt occurs.

<Image control board interrupt processing>
The interrupt processing of the image control board 150 will be explained using FIG. 43. The interrupt process of the image control board 150 includes at least a drawing end interrupt process performed when a drawing end interrupt signal is input, and a V blank interrupt process performed when a V blank interrupt signal is input. There is.

<Host CPU drawing end interrupt processing>
FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart illustrating drawing end interrupt processing by the image control board. When the VDP 200 finishes drawing a predetermined unit of frames (one frame), it outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203. When the host CPU 151 receives a drawing end interrupt signal from the VDP 200, it executes a drawing end interrupt process. In the drawing end interrupt process, in step S911, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag=01 (turns on the drawing end flag) and ends the current drawing end interrupt process. That is, the drawing end flag is turned on every time drawing ends.

<Host CPU V blank interrupt processing>
FIG. 43(b) is a flowchart illustrating V blank interrupt processing by the image control board. The VDP 200 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I/F 203 every 1/60 seconds (approximately 16.6 ms). When the host CPU 151 receives the V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 200, it executes the V blank interrupt process.

In step S921, the host CPU 151 performs processing to update various counters such as a "scene switching counter", "wait frame", and "frame counter". In step S922, the host CPU 151 determines whether the drawing end flag=01. That is, it is determined whether drawing of a predetermined unit of frames has been completed. If the drawing end flag = 01 (Yes in step S922), the host CPU 151 moves the process to step S923, and if the drawing end flag = 01 (No in step S922), ends the current V blank interrupt processing. do. That is, even if the V blank interrupt signal is input, if drawing has not been completed, the processing from step S923 onwards will not be performed.

In step S923, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag=00 (turns off the drawing end flag). In step S924, the host CPU 151 gives an instruction to the memory controller 209 of the VDP 200 to switch between the "display frame buffer" and the "drawing frame buffer". In step S925, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag = 01 (turns on the FB switching flag), cancels the standby state in step S905 (see FIG. 42), and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. do.

Next, the outline of the lamp control board 140 will be briefly explained. When the lamp control board 140 receives the production command from the production control board 120, it reads out the production movable body operation program based on the received production command, controls the production movable body 32, and controls the performance based on the received production command. The lighting device control program for presentation is read based on the command for presentation, and the lamp 33 for presentation and the light guide 60 are controlled. In addition, when the lamp control board 140 receives a command for the production button from the image control board 150 via the production control board 120, it reads out the production button operation program based on the received command for the production button, and then presses the production button. Control 8.

FIG. 44 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a variable performance pattern determination table. In the above-described variable effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 412 refers to the variable effect pattern determination table and determines the variable effect pattern.

In this embodiment, a variable performance pattern determination table is provided for each gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state). The specific example of FIG. 44 shows a variable performance pattern determination table that is referred to in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. That is, the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 44 is referred to by the sub CPU 121 when a variation pattern is determined by the main CPU 111 using the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 described above.

Specifically, in the variable effect pattern determination process, a variable effect pattern is determined by lottery according to the variable pattern determined by the main CPU 111 (the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command) and the random value for effect. Ru. The random number value for performance has a random number range of "0 to 99", and is acquired by the sub CPU 121 when the variable performance pattern determination process is started. For example, when the main CPU 111 determines the variable pattern a1x and any of the numerical values "0 to 50" is obtained as the random value for effect, the variable effect pattern 1 is determined.

FIG. 44 shows an overview of the performance configuration of each variable performance pattern. For example, in variable performance pattern 1, when a game is started, a normal performance is executed, and then a normal reach is executed. On the other hand, in the variable performance pattern 2, when the game is started, the normal performance is executed, then the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, and then the normal reach is executed. In the above-described pseudo-continuous performance, the image display device 31 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) the performance symbols GA that have been variably displayed, and then variably displays them again. The above pseudo-continuous performance may be executed multiple times in one game (variation). For example, in variable performance pattern 5, two pseudo-continuous performances are performed, and in variable performance pattern 14, pseudo-continuous performances are performed three times.

<Second embodiment>
Other embodiments of the invention will be described below. In addition, in each of the embodiments illustrated below, for elements whose actions and functions are equivalent to those of the first embodiment, the reference numerals referred to in the description of the first embodiment are used, and detailed descriptions of each are omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 45(a) and FIG. 45(b) are diagrams for explaining the end effect executed when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) ends. In the end performance, it is announced that the time-saving game state ends. Further, the end effect includes a first end effect (see FIG. 45(a)) and a second end effect (see FIG. 45(b)). As will be described in detail later, when the time-saving game state ends, either the first end effect or the second end effect may be executed.

FIG. 45(a) is a mock diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the first end effect. As shown in FIG. 45(a), in the first end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a pending number image GD, and an end image GP1 are displayed. Furthermore, in the first end effect, the effect pattern GA is hidden. The above first ending effect is executed in the last game of the time saving game state. In addition, as mentioned above, in the last game of the first time saving game state (100 times), a judge performance is executed. When a judge performance is executed in the last game of the time-saving game state, a first ending performance is executed after the judge performance is executed.

The ending image GP1 in the second embodiment displays the number of winnings of the jackpot game and the number of game balls acquired during a specific period. For example, after the jackpot game ends, it moves to the first time-saving game state, wins the jackpot game again in the first time-saving game state, and then, after the second jackpot game, 100 games are executed and the first time-saving game state Assume that the process has ended. In the above case, the ending image GP1 shows the number of winnings (2 times) and acquisitions of the jackpot game in the period (specific period) from when the first jackpot is won until the end of the second first time-saving gaming state. Displays the number of game balls played. Further, the end image GP1 displays the name of the time saving mode and a message indicating that the time saving mode is ending.

FIG. 45(b) is a mock diagram of a specific example of the screen displayed in the second end effect. As shown in FIG. 45(b), in the second end effect, various images including a small symbol Ga, a right-handed image GS4, a fourth symbol GC, a reserved number image GD, and an end image GP2 are displayed. Furthermore, in the second end effect, the effect pattern GA is hidden. The above-mentioned second end effect is executed in the last game of the second time-saving game state among the time-saving game states.

The ending image GP2 in the second embodiment displays the name of the time saving mode and a message indicating that the time saving mode is ending. In addition, the above-mentioned end image GP1 displays the number of winnings of the jackpot game and the number of game balls acquired in a specific period, but the end image GP2 does not display the above information. Although described in detail later, the end image GP2 is displayed when the second time-saving game state is started from the normal mode and the second time-saving game state ends without winning the jackpot game.

FIGS. 46(a) to 46(e) are diagrams for explaining specific examples of when the end effect is executed. FIG. 46(a) to FIG. 46(e) show the gaming state and fluctuation pattern determination table T at each point in time, in addition to the timing when the end effect is executed.

FIG. 46(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the first end effect is executed among the end effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46(a), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state starts 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, and the first time-saving game state ends. As mentioned above, in the first time-saving game state (100 times), the variable pattern determination table Ta1 is referred to in each early game, the variable pattern determination table Ta2 is referred to in each late game, and the variable pattern is determined in the last game. Table Tj1 is referenced. In the second embodiment, in a game in which the variation pattern determination table Tj1 is referred to, the first ending performance is performed after the judge performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the game after the first time-saving game state ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to.

FIG. 46(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of when the second end effect is executed among the end effects. In the specific example of FIG. 46(b), it is assumed that the first time-saving game state is started 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, after that, the game is executed 700 times, and the second time-saving game state is started. That is, assume that the second time-saving gaming state is started during the scenario setting period. In the above case, in the first game of the second time-saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Ts is referred to, and various performances including the entry performance and the mode selection performance are executed.

In the specific example of FIG. 46(b), it is assumed that the second time saving game state ends without winning the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 46(b), in the final game of the second time-saving game state in the scenario setting period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to. In the game in which the above fluctuation pattern determination table Te1 is referred to, the second ending effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 46(b), in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario setting period ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to.

Assume a configuration in which the first end effect is executed when the second time saving game state ends. In the above configuration, it is notified that the number of jackpot games won in the second time saving game state is zero. Further, the base value of the time saving game state is smaller than 1. Therefore, in the first end performance when the second time-saving game state ends, an excessively small number of acquired game balls is notified. Therefore, some players may find the first end effect to be inconvenient. In the second end effect of the second embodiment, the number of winnings of the jackpot game and the number of acquired game balls are not reported. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

FIG. 46(c) is a specific example where the end effect is not executed when the time saving game state ends. FIG. 46(c) is a specific example when the second time-saving game state is started during the scenario unset period. In the second embodiment, the end effect is not executed when the second time-saving game state in the scenario-unset period ends. In addition, in the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment, the structure which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tbx is referred to in the 2nd time-saving game state of a scenario unset period was adopted. In the second embodiment, the variation pattern determination table Tax that is referred to in the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario setting period is also referred to in the second time-saving gaming state in the scenario setting period.

As shown in FIG. 46(c), in the second time-saving game state during the scenario unset period, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in all games (including the final game). Moreover, a game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to ends in a relatively short time. Therefore, in a configuration in which the end performance is executed in the final game of the second time-saving game state in the scenario-unset period, the time of the end performance is too short, and there may be an inconvenience that the content of the end performance is not grasped by the player. According to the configuration of the second embodiment, the above disadvantages can be easily suppressed. As shown in FIG. 46(c), in the game after the second time-saving game state in the scenario unset period ends, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to.

Further, according to the configuration of the second embodiment, during the scenario setting period, the last game in the second time-saving game state refers to the variable pattern determination table Te1, and the next game after this game refers to the variable pattern determination table Tn1. (See FIG. 46(b)). On the other hand, in the scenario non-setting period, the last game in the second time-saving game state refers to the variable pattern determination table Tax, and the next game after this game refers to the variable pattern determination table Tn1 (see FIG. 46(c)). ). That is, the fluctuation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving game state (the last game of the second time-saving game state, the next game of the game) may be different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. be. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the variation pattern at the end of the second time-saving game state is rich in variety, and the fun of the game is improved.

FIG. 46(d) is a specific example when the second time-saving game state is started in the scenario unset period, similar to FIG. 46(c) described above. However, in the specific example of FIG. 46(c), it is assumed that the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving game state, whereas in the specific example of FIG. 46(d), the case is assumed that the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving gaming state. Assume a case. Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 46(d), it is assumed that a jackpot is won in the second time-saving gaming state, the table scenario Sb2 is set, and the transition to the first time-saving gaming state (100) is made. In the above case, the first end effect is executed when the first time saving game state ends.

As understood from the above explanation, in this embodiment, if the jackpot is not won in the second time-saving game state, the first end performance is not executed (see FIG. 46(c)), and in the second time-saving game state, If the jackpot is won, the first end effect is executed (see FIG. 46(d)). According to the above configuration, for example, the interest of the performance is improved compared to a configuration in which the first ending performance is not uniformly executed when the time saving gaming state is transferred to the second time saving gaming state and then the time saving gaming state ends. There are advantages.

In addition, if the advantageous state ends without a jackpot game being executed during the continuation of the advantageous state that started from the establishment of the second time-saving game state, the result display (display of the result image GP) is not performed and the A jackpot game is executed during the continuation of an advantageous state started from the establishment of a two-time saving game state, and when the advantageous state ends after the jackpot game ends, a result display is executed. Therefore, while reducing the player's dissatisfaction when a jackpot game is not executed during an advantageous state, it is possible to improve the player's satisfaction when a jackpot game is executed during an advantageous condition. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 46(e) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the timing when the end effect is executed. FIG. 46(e) assumes a case where table scenario Sb4 is set. In the above case, the first time-saving game state continues for 799 games, and the second time-saving game state is started via the gap game. Further, a series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the second time-saving game state become the time-saving mode B. In addition, in 1st Embodiment, the structure which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is referred to in the 1st time-saving game state and the 2nd time-saving game state, and the fluctuation pattern determination table Tnc is referred to in the gap game was adopted. In the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table Tax is commonly referred to in a series of periods of the first time-saving game state, the gap game, and the second time-saving game state. However, also in the gap game of the second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable pattern determination table T different from the variable pattern determination table Tax is referred to.

In the specific example of FIG. 46(e), the end effect is not executed at the end of the first time saving game state (799 times). According to the above configuration, the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state are treated as a series of time saving game states, compared to a configuration in which the end effect is executed in the final game or gap game of the first time saving game state, for example. This makes it easier for players to recognize it. However, in the specific example of FIG. 46(e), a configuration may be adopted in which the end effect can be executed in the final game or gap game in the first time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 46(e), in the last game of the second time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern determination table Te2 is referred to and the second end performance is executed. That is, during the period in which the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect is not executed when the second time-saving game state ends (the final game of the second time-saving game state or the next game of the game). Further, even during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 is set, the second end effect is executed when the second time saving game state ends, and the first end effect is not executed. However, during the period in which the table scenario Sb3 or the table scenario Sb4 is set, the first end effect may be executed when the second time saving game state ends. Further, in the above period, the end performance (including the second end performance) may not be executed when the second time saving game state ends.

In addition, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state (the final game of the second time-saving gaming state or the next game of the game). You can also use it as According to the above configuration, the variation pattern determination table T is different from the configuration in which the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period have no common variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state. This has the advantage that the number of types can be reduced.

FIG. 46(f) is a diagram for explaining a modification that employs a configuration in which the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common variation pattern that can be determined at the end of the second time-saving gaming state. It is. The specific example in FIG. 46(f) assumes a period in which table scenario Sb2 is set, similar to FIG. 46(b) of the second embodiment. In this modification, the variation pattern determination table that is referenced in the period in which table scenario Sb2 is set is different from the second embodiment, and the variation pattern determination table ( (type, order) are the same as in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 46(f), in this modification, the variation pattern of the final game in the second time-saving gaming state is determined by the period in which the table scenario Sb2 is set and the period in which the scenario is not set (see FIG. 46(c)). The determination table (Tax) is common, and the fluctuation pattern determination table (Tn1) of the next game of the final game in the second time-saving game state is also common. According to the above modification, there is an advantage that the number of types of variation pattern determination tables can be reduced compared to, for example, the second embodiment.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of time-saving game states are provided. Specifically, the time-saving game state of the third embodiment includes a third time-saving game state in addition to the above-mentioned first time-saving game state and second time-saving game state. The third time-saving game state is transitioned to when a predetermined special symbol (time-saving symbol to be described later) is stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state. In the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is the same in each time-saving game state. However, in each time-saving game state, the opening manner of the second starting port 14 may be different.

In the third embodiment, each time saving game state has a different number of time saving times. Specifically, the number of times of time saving in the first time saving game state is 100 times. Note that, similarly to the first embodiment, the number of times of subsequent time saving in the first time saving game state may be different depending on the special symbol (jackpot symbol) that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot game is started. Further, the number of time saving times in the first time saving game state is not limited to 100 times, but may be 101 times or more or 99 times or less. The number of time saving times in the second time saving game state is 1000 times. Further, the number of time saving times in the third game state is 100 times or 1000 times.

Further, when entering the third time-saving game state, a normal losing effect pattern or a different effect pattern from when entering the second time-saving game state may be stopped and displayed. That is, there is a first time-saving gaming state that goes through a jackpot and a third time-saving gaming state that does not go through a jackpot, and when a second losing special symbol that is different from the first losing special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display, The third time-saving game state is controlled for a predetermined period different from the first time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which the game shifts to a time-saving state without going through a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Jackpot determination table>
FIG. 47(a-1) and FIG. 47(a-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of the jackpot determination table in the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 47(a-1) shows whether the stop result of the special symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol display device 20 is a jackpot, a small win, a third time reduction, or a loss (jackpot lottery). This is the jackpot determination table A that is referred to when playing the game. FIG. 47(b-2) is a jackpot determination table B that is referred to when determining the stop result of the special symbol fluctuation in the second special symbol display device 21. Note that the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 have different probabilities of winning a small hit, but have the same probability of winning a jackpot. Moreover, the winning probability of the third time saving is different between the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. Specifically, the third time reduction is won on the first special symbol display device 20, but the third time reduction is not won on the second special symbol display device 21.

The jackpot determination table in the third embodiment includes a random value for determining a special symbol that is a "big hit," a random value for determining a special symbol that is a "small hit," and a random number for determining a special symbol that is a "third time reduction." A numerical value is specified. In the jackpot lottery, the random number for special symbol determination obtained when a game ball enters the starting hole is compared with the random number for special symbol determination prescribed in the jackpot determination table, and if the two match, the jackpot is won. Win a small hit or the third time reduction. Similar to the first embodiment, the jackpot determination tables (A, B) shown in FIGS. 47(a-1) and 47(a-2) are based on the low probability time random number determination table and the high probability time random number determination table. configured. The main CPU 111 determines one of "big hit", "small hit", "third time saving", and "loss" based on the selected table and the extracted random number value for special symbol determination.

For example, according to the low probability time random number determination table shown in FIG. 47(a-1), two special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be a "jackpot". On the other hand, according to the high probability time random number determination table, 20 special symbol determination random numbers are determined to be a "jackpot". In addition, in the jackpot determination table of FIG. 6(a-1), whether the low probability time random number determination table or the high probability time random number determination table is used, the four special symbol determination random numbers are "small hit". It is determined that one special symbol determination random number value is "3rd time saving". If the random number is not determined to be a "big hit", "small hit", or "third time saving", it will be determined as a "loss".

Jackpot determination table A and jackpot determination table B have different random numbers for special symbol determination that are determined to be the third time saving. Specifically, in jackpot determination table A, one random value for special symbol determination is determined to be the third time shortener, but jackpot determination table B does not include the random value for special symbol determination that is determined to be the third time shortener. . In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 13, the player can win the third time reduction, but when the game ball enters the second starting opening 14, he does not win the third time reduction. However, it may be configured such that when a game ball enters the second starting port 14, the player can win the third time reduction. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the probability of winning the third time saving is lower when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting hole 14 than when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting hole 13.

<Hit judgment table>
FIG. 47(b) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the result of stopping the normal symbol variation is a hit in the normal symbol lottery. The hit determination table shown in FIG. 47(b) is composed of a non-time-saving game state random number determination table and a time-saving game state random number determination table. The above time saving gaming state time random number determination table is commonly referred to in the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state and the third time saving gaming state.

<Design determination table>
FIG. 48(a-1) to FIG. 48(a-4) are conceptual diagrams of a special symbol determination table for determining a special symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each game. The special symbol determination table in the third embodiment includes a time-saving symbol determination table in addition to a jackpot symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, and a loss symbol determination table. The time-saving symbol determination table is referred to when determining the stop symbol (time-saving symbol) when the third time-saving symbol is won in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot symbol determination table, the small win symbol determination table, and the loss symbol determination table are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 48(a-4) is a conceptual diagram of an example of a time-saving symbol determination table. When the main CPU 111 wins the third time saving, the main CPU 111 refers to the random number value for the time saving symbol. The random number range of the random number value for the time-saving symbol is a number “0 to 99”. For example, if you win the third time-saving prize by entering the first starting slot 13, if the acquired random number value for the time-saving symbol is "0" to "70", the main CPU 111 selects "21" as the stop symbol data. ” (special symbol J1) is determined. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 48(a-4), the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. Further, when the stop symbol data "21" is determined, the production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "11H" are generated as shown in FIG. 48 (a-4).

As shown in FIG. 48 (a-4), if the player wins the third time-saving prize by entering the first starting slot 13, and the acquired random number value for the time-saving symbol is between "71" and "99". , "22" (special symbol J2) is determined as the stop symbol data. In the above case, the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20. Further, when the stop symbol data "22" is determined, the production symbol designation commands "E0H" and "12H" are generated as shown in FIG. 48 (a-4).

When the special symbol J1 or the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, the state then shifts to the third time-saving game state. Specifically, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the third time-saving game state for 100 times. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the third time saving game state for 1000 times.

FIG. 48(b-1) and FIG. 48(b-2) are conceptual diagrams of an example of the normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination table is used when determining the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The above normal symbol determination table is commonly used in each game state (non-time saving game state, first time saving game state, second time saving game state, third time saving game state).

<Fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving gaming state>
FIG. 49 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table used in the low probability non-time saving gaming state in the third embodiment. In the above fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the special symbols of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are fluctuation pattern a (1x to 3x), fluctuation pattern b (1x to 6x), fluctuation pattern One of pattern c (1x to 6x), variation pattern dx, variation pattern ex, variation pattern fx, variation pattern g, and variation pattern h (1x, 2x) is determined.

However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach effect is always executed in a variable pattern in which a jackpot symbol, a small win symbol, or a time-saving symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed. However, in a variable pattern in which a small winning symbol or a time saving symbol among the special symbols is stopped and displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which the reach effect may not be executed. Therefore, when the special symbol corresponding to the jackpot, small win, or third time reduction is displayed in a stopped state, the random number value for reach determination is not used when determining the fluctuation pattern.

When the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the variation pattern h1x is determined if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 49". Further, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the variation pattern h2x is determined.

In the variation pattern h1x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays the variation for about 40000 ms. Further, in the variation pattern h1x, a normal reach effect is executed on the image display device 31, and a shift to the third time reduction is notified. Similarly, in the variation pattern h2x, the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variation for about 60000 ms. In addition, in the variation pattern h2x, the normal reach effect and the SP reach 1 are executed on the image display device 31, and the shift to the third time reduction is notified.

When the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, the above-mentioned variation pattern h1x is determined if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "0 to 49". Further, if the random number value for special symbol variation is any of the numerical values "50 to 99", the above-mentioned variation pattern h2x is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined are made common to the special symbol J1 and the special symbol J2, but they may be different. Further, the variation pattern h2x may be more easily determined when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed than when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed.
In this way, the fluctuation pattern when winning the jackpot is different from the fluctuation pattern when winning the third time-saving game state.

<Variation pattern determination table for time-saving gaming state>
FIG. 50 is a conceptual diagram of an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table used in the low probability time saving game state in the third embodiment. The above fluctuation pattern determination table is used in the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 50, in the above fluctuation pattern determination table, fluctuation patterns a (1y to 3y), fluctuation patterns b ( 1y to 6y), variation pattern c (1y to 6y), variation pattern dy, variation pattern ey, variation pattern f (1y, 2y), variation pattern g, and variation pattern h (1y, 2y) are determined. .

By the way, as described above, in the third embodiment, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the state shifts to the third time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state, there is no transition to the third time-saving game state. That is, the time-saving symbols are invalid in game states other than the low probability non-time-saving gaming state.

If an invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a longer variation pattern will be more likely to be selected than the normal variation (normal reach, variation in which SP reach 1 is not executed), just as when a valid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Assume the configuration. With the above configuration, some players may find the fluctuation of the special symbols until the invalid time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed to be a nuisance.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the third embodiment adopts a configuration in which the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed. Specifically, as explained in FIG. 8 above, when the time-saving symbols (special symbol J1, special symbol J2) are stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the variable pattern h1x or the variable pattern h2x is determined. Ru. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, in the low probability time saving game state, when the time saving symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable pattern h1y or the variable pattern h2y is determined instead of the variable pattern h1x or the variable pattern h2x.

In the low probability non-time-saving gaming state where time-saving symbols are effective, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h1x is about 40,000 ms, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h2x is about 60,000 ms. On the other hand, in the low probability time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbols are invalid, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h1y is about 2000 ms, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern h2y is about 2000 ms.

In the above configuration, the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the invalid time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the valid time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed compared to a configuration in which the variable time of the special symbol display device is common regardless of whether the time saving symbol is valid or invalid.

In the third embodiment, in addition to the low-probability time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the high-probability time-saving game state is configured to be shorter than in the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Ru. In addition, when an invalid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a longer (or equivalent length) variation pattern may be determined than when a valid time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed.

<Pre-determination table for special symbols>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination table for determining in advance the result of the jackpot lottery in the third embodiment. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 13 or the second starting winning hole 14 (at the time of starting winning), winning information is generated by the preliminary determination table (similar to the first embodiment). By using the start winning designation command that shows the above winning information, the preliminary judgment results (loss, jackpot, small hit, 3rd short time), type of special symbol, and fluctuation pattern (whether reach occurs or not) are checked before the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. can be determined. The winning information (start-up winning designation command) of the third embodiment is referred to, for example, when determining a so-called look-ahead effect (a pending change effect to be described later).

In the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 51, winning information regarding the first special symbol display device 20 includes winning information a (1, 2), winning information b (1 to 4), winning information c (1 to 4), and winning information for the first special symbol display device 20. Winning information including information d1 and winning information e1 is set. Also, as winning information regarding the second special symbol display device 21, winning information a (3, 4), winning information b (5 to 8), winning information c (5 to 8), and winning information d (1, 2). , winning information e(1, 2), winning information f, winning information g, and winning information h(1, 2) is set.

When the winning information h1 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the time saving transition effect 1 of about 40000 ms. When the winning information h2 is selected at the time of starting winning, in the game started by the starting winning, the effect control board 120 executes the time saving transition effect 2 of about 60000 ms. In addition, when winning information h (1, 2) is selected at the time of starting winning, special symbol J (time saving symbol) is determined in the game started by the starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state), the first starting port 13 is Winning information is not set when a game ball wins. Specifically, in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol (a combination of the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for symbol), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 20 is used. First, winning information is not set when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 13, a starting winning designation command is not generated.

<Pre-judgment processing>
FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining preliminary determination processing by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. The preliminary determination process in FIG. 52 is executed in both the first starting port detection switch input process and the second starting port detection switch input process described above. That is, the above preliminary determination process is executed both when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 14.

When the advance determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current advance determination process is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 (S1151). When determining that the preliminary determination process has been executed when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 (S1151: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (S1152). ). If it is determined that the game is in a time-saving gaming state (S1152: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the preliminary determination process without generating winning information (omiting S1161, which will be described later).

If it is determined that the game is not in a time-saving gaming state (S1152: No), the main CPU 111 executes a tentative jackpot determination process (S1153). In the tentative jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 uses the random number value for special symbol determination written in the special symbol retention storage area in response to the current starting win, and in the jackpot determination process of the game started by the starting win, It is tentatively determined whether the player wins the jackpot, wins the small win, wins the third time reduction, or loses.

If “No” is determined in the above-mentioned step S1151, that is, if the preliminary determination process is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 14, the main CPU 111 skips the above-mentioned step S1152. Then, the process after the jackpot provisional determination process (S1153) is executed. In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the second starting port 14, winning information is generated regardless of whether it is a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state (S1161 described below is executed). . That is, when a game ball enters the second start opening 14, the look-ahead effect can be executed regardless of whether it is a time-saving game state or a non-time-saving game state.

After executing the tentative jackpot determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it has been tentatively determined to be a jackpot in the tentative jackpot determination process (S1154). When the main CPU 111 is provisionally determined to be a jackpot (step S1154: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a tentative jackpot symbol determination process (S1155). In the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, a jackpot pattern (stopped pattern data) to be stopped in the game started by the starting winning is provisionally judged using the random number value for the jackpot pattern acquired according to the starting winning. After executing the jackpot symbol provisional determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S1160).

On the other hand, if it is not tentatively determined that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot tentative determination process (step S1154: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it has been tentatively determined that the player has won the third time saving (S1156). When it is tentatively determined that the third time saving is won (S1156: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a time saving symbol provisional determination process (S1157). In the time-saving symbol provisional determination process, the time-saving symbol (stopped symbol data) that is stopped in the game started by the starting prize is provisionally determined using the random number value for the time-saving symbol acquired in response to the current starting prize. . After executing the time saving symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern temporary determination process (S1160).

In the case where it is not provisionally determined that the third time saving is won in the jackpot provisional determination process (step S1156: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is provisionally determined that the small win is won (S1158). When it is tentatively determined that the small winning is won (S1158: Yes), the main CPU 111 executes a small winning symbol provisional determining process (S1159). In the small winning pattern temporary determination process, the small winning pattern (stopped pattern data) that is stopped in the game started by the starting winning is temporarily determined using the random value for the small winning pattern acquired in response to the current starting winning. It will be judged. After executing the small hit symbol temporary determination process, the main CPU 111 moves to the fluctuation pattern temporary determination process (S1160). If it is determined “No” in step S1158 described above, that is, if it is tentatively determined as a loss in the jackpot tentative determination process, the main CPU 111 does not execute the symbol tentative determination process (S1155, S1157, and S1159 described above). The process moves to fluctuation pattern provisional determination processing S1160.

In the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S1160), the main CPU 111 determines the gaming status, the result of the jackpot provisional determination process, the result of the jackpot pattern provisional determination process, the result of the time-saving pattern provisional determination process, the result of the small hit pattern provisional determination process, and the current A special symbol variation pattern is tentatively determined using the special symbol variation random number value and the reach determination random number value obtained in response to the starting winning. Thereafter, the main CPU 111 generates winning information corresponding to the fluctuation pattern provisionally determined in the fluctuation pattern provisional determination process (S1161). Further, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information is set in the performance transmission data storage area (S1162), and the preliminary determination process is ended.

By the above preliminary determination process, winning information can be transmitted to the performance control board 120 as a starting winning designation command when the game ball enters the first starting port 13 or the second starting port 14. Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the performance control board 120 that has received the starting winning designation command analyzes the starting winning designation command, and pre-determines the predetermined pattern before the change of special symbols triggered by the current starting winning is started. It is possible to perform a performance (pre-reading performance).

<Processing when special special symbol stops>
FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating special symbol stop processing by the main control board 110 in the third embodiment. When the special symbol stop process is started, the main CPU 111 executes the second time saving transition determination process (S1231). In the second time saving transition determination process, it is determined whether a transition opportunity to the second time saving gaming state has been established. As described above, when the player does not win a jackpot a predetermined number of times in the jackpot lottery in the low probability gaming state, it becomes possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state.

In the third embodiment, for the sake of explanation, the number of times the player has not won a jackpot in the jackpot determination process from the transition to the low-probability gaming state to the present time may be described as the "cumulative number of times m." The cumulative number m is counted by a counter provided in the main RAM 113, for example. When the above cumulative number of times m reaches a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "operation number n"), a transition is made to the second time-saving game state. The number of operations n in the third embodiment is "800 times". Note that the number of operations n can be changed as appropriate.

In the third embodiment, in addition to when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination process, the cumulative number m is added even when a small hit or a third time saving is won. Further, the cumulative number m is added in both the low probability non-time saving gaming state and the low probability time saving gaming state. That is, the cumulative number m is added to all games other than the high probability game state among the games in which the jackpot is not won. In the second time-saving transition determination process, when it is determined that a transition opportunity to the second time-saving gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state.

After executing the second time saving transition determination process, the main CPU 111 executes the third time saving transition determination process (S1232). In the third time-saving transition determination process, it is determined whether a transition opportunity to the third time-saving gaming state has been established. As described above, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, it becomes possible to shift to the third time-saving gaming state. In the third time-saving transition determination process, when it is determined that a transition opportunity to the third time-saving gaming state has been established, the main CPU 111 shifts the gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state.

After executing the third time saving transition determination process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the confirmation period has elapsed (S1233). The above confirmation period is provided to enable the player to recognize that the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the current game. The determination period is, for example, approximately 0.5 seconds. The variable display of special symbols in the next game is prohibited until the above confirmation period ends. Specifically, step S1233 is repeatedly executed until the fixed period ends (S1233: No), and when the fixed period ends (S1233: Yes), it becomes possible to proceed to the subsequent step.

When the fixed period ends, the main CPU 111 executes a time saving end determination process (S1234). In the time-saving end determination process, it is determined whether an opportunity to end the time-saving gaming state has been established. Specifically, in the time-saving end determination process, it is determined whether the number of games in the time-saving game state has reached the number of time-saving games. When it is determined that the number of games in the time saving game state has reached the number of times saving time, the time saving game state ends. Upon completion of the time saving end determination process, the main CPU 111 sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the performance transmission data storage area (S1235).

After setting the gaming state designation command, the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol stopped in the current game is a jackpot symbol (S1236). If the main CPU 111 determines that it is a jackpot symbol (S1236: Yes), it sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" (jackpot game processing) (S1237). Further, the main CPU 111 executes jackpot initialization processing (S1238).

In the jackpot initialization process, various information is initialized. For example, in the jackpot initialization process, the high probability flag that is in the ON state in the high probability gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the state shifts to the low probability gaming state. In addition, the time-saving flag that is ON in the time-saving gaming state is changed to the OFF state, and the remaining number of games M indicating the remaining number of games in the time-saving gaming state is initialized to the numerical value "0", and the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state. do.

Although described in detail later, the time-saving flags include a first time-saving flag that is ON in the first time-saving game state, a second time-saving flag that is ON in the second time-saving game state, and a time-saving flag that is ON in the third time-saving game state. It includes a third time saving flag that becomes the state. In the jackpot initialization process, all time saving flags are changed to the OFF state. Further, the remaining number of times M of the time-saving game state is stored in a separate counter for each time-saving game state. Specifically, the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving gaming state, and the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving gaming state are stored separately. In the jackpot initialization process, all remaining times M are initialized to the numerical value "0".

In the jackpot initialization process, the above-mentioned cumulative number m (number of hits) is initialized. In addition, in the third embodiment, the cumulative number m is not initialized in principle except at the time of clear operation processing by operating the clear button described above or when a jackpot game is started. For example, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, the game shifts to the second time-saving game state, but the cumulative number of times m is not initialized. Further, the cumulative number m is not initialized even when winning the third time saving or winning the small hit. Although details will be described later, in the above configuration, the number of times that the second time-saving game state can be shifted is one in the period from the current jackpot game to the next jackpot game.

After executing the jackpot initialization process, the main CPU 111 executes the jackpot start preparation process (S1239). In the jackpot start preparation process, for example, the opening pattern of the jackpot openings (16, 17) in the jackpot game is determined according to the special symbol (type of jackpot). After that, the main CPU 111 sets an opening specification command corresponding to the type of jackpot in the performance transmission data storage area (S1240), sets an opening time according to the type of jackpot (S1241), and performs special symbol stop processing. finish.

In step S1236 described above, if it is determined that the special symbol that has stopped in the current game is not a jackpot symbol (S1236: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol that has stopped is a small prize symbol (S1242). ). When the small hit symbols have stopped (S1242: Yes), the main CPU 111 sets the special pattern special electric processing data to "4" (S1243), and ends the special symbol stop processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that stopped in this game is not a small hit symbol (S1242: No), that is, if a losing symbol or a time-saving symbol stops, the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "0" ( S1244), the special symbol stop processing ends.

FIG. 54(a) is a flowchart of the second time saving transition determination process (S1231 in FIG. 53 described above). As described above, the second time saving transition determination process is executed when the special symbols stop.

When the second time saving transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won in the current game (S1261). If it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the second time saving transition determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won (a loss, a small hit, or a third time saving win) (S1261: No), the main CPU 111 is in a low probability gaming state (a low probability time saving gaming state or a low probability (S1262). If it is determined that the game state is not a low probability game state (it is a high probability game state) (S1261: Yes), the main CPU 111 ends the second time saving transition determination process.

If it is determined that the game is in a low probability gaming state (S1262: Yes), the main CPU 111 adds the numerical value "1" to the cumulative number m (S1263). Specifically, the second time saving transition determination process shown in FIG. performed in both cases. Therefore, in a game where the jackpot is not won and the game is in a low probability game state, the cumulative number m is added regardless of the special symbol display device (20, 21) where the special symbol is stopped.

After adding the cumulative number m, the main CPU 111 determines whether the cumulative number m matches the numerical value "800" (S1264). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of times n (n=800) of activation of the second time-saving game state matches the total number of times m. If it is determined that the cumulative number of times m does not match the number of operations n (S1264: No), the main CPU 111 ends the second time saving transition determination process.

If it is determined that the cumulative number m matches the number of operations n (S1264: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number M2 of the second time-saving game state (S1265). After storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M2, the main CPU 111 updates the second time saving flag to the ON state (S1266), and ends the second time saving transition determination process.

In the third embodiment, in the game after the second time-saving game state is activated, the cumulative number of times m is continuously updated from the number of times of operation n. Specifically, the cumulative number of times m is not initialized in principle except when a clear operation is performed by operating the clear button described above or when a jackpot game is won. In the above configuration, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, it is determined that the cumulative number of times m matches the number of operations n only once. That is, in the period from the end of the current jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game, the number of times that the second time-saving game state can be shifted is one.

FIG. 54(b) is a flowchart of the third time saving transition determination process (S1232 in FIG. 53 described above) executed by the main CPU 111. The third time saving transition determination process is executed immediately after the second time saving determination process described above. When the third time-saving transition determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current game is in a low probability non-time-saving game state (S1281). If it is determined that the state is not a low probability non-time saving gaming state (S1281: No), the main CPU 111 ends the third time saving transition determination process.

If it is determined that it is a low probability non-time saving game state (S1281: Yes), the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol stopped in the current game is the special symbol J1 (time saving symbol) (S1282). . When it is determined that the special symbol J1 has been stopped (S1282: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "100" as the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state (1S283).

When it is determined that the special symbol J1 has not been stopped (S1282: No), the main CPU 111 determines whether the special symbol J2 (another time-saving symbol) has been stopped (S1284). If it is determined that the special symbol J2 has not been stopped (S1284: No), that is, if it has been determined that neither of the time-saving symbols (J1, J2) has been stopped, the main CPU 111 ends the third time-saving transition determination process. .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol J2 has been stopped (S1284: Yes), the main CPU 111 stores the initial value "1000" as the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state (S1285). After storing the initial value of the remaining number of times M3 of the third time-saving game state in step S1283 or step S1285 described above, the main CPU 111 changes the third time-saving flag to the ON state (S1286). After that, the main CPU 111 ends the third time saving transition determination process.

FIG. 54C is a flowchart of the time saving end determination process (S1234 in FIG. 53 described above) executed by the main CPU 111. In the time-saving end determination process, when the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends, the time-saving flag (first time-saving flag) corresponding to the time-saving game state is established. , the second time saving flag, and the third time saving flag) are changed to the OFF state. Note that, as described above, when the jackpot game is started, all the time saving flags are uniformly changed to the OFF state (see S1238 in FIG. 53 described above).

When the time saving end determination process is started, the main CPU 111 determines whether the first time saving flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the first time saving game state is in effect (S1301). If it is determined that the first time saving flag is not in the ON state (S1301: No), the main CPU 111 moves the process to step S1305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first time-saving flag is in the ON state (S1301: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving gaming state (S1302). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M1 has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (S1303).

If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M1 is a numerical value of "0" (S1303: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the first time saving flag and advances the process to step S1305 (S1304). That is, the first time saving game state is ended and the process advances to step S1305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M1 is not the numerical value "0" (S1303: No), the main CPU 111 skips step S1304 and moves the process to step S1305.

In step S305, the main CPU 111 determines whether the second time-saving flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the second time-saving game state is in effect. If it is determined that the second time saving flag is not in the ON state (S1305: No), the main CPU 111 shifts the process to step S309. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second time saving flag is in the ON state (S1305: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M2 in the second time saving gaming state (S1306). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M2 has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (S1307).

If the main CPU 111 determines that the remaining number of times M2 is the numerical value "0" (S1307: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns off the second time saving flag (S1308) and advances the process to step S1309. That is, the second time saving game state is ended and the process advances to step S1309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M2 is not the numerical value "0" (S1307: No), the main CPU 111 skips step S1308 and moves the process to step S1309.

In step S1309, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the third time-saving flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the game is in the third time-saving game state. If it is determined that the third time saving flag is not in the ON state (S1309: No), the main CPU 111 ends the time saving end determination process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the third time saving flag is in the ON state (S1309: Yes), the main CPU 111 subtracts the numerical value "1" from the remaining number of times M3 in the third time saving gaming state (S1310). After that, the main CPU 111 determines whether the remaining number of times M3 has been subtracted to the numerical value "0" (S1311).

If it is determined that the remaining number of times M3 is the numerical value "0" (S1311: Yes), the main CPU 111 turns the third time saving flag into the OFF state (S1312), and ends the time saving end determination process. That is, the third time-saving game state is ended and the time-saving end determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times M3 is not the numerical value "0" (S1311: No), the main CPU 111 skips step S1312 and ends the time saving end determination process.

In addition, the remaining number of times M (1, 2, 3) is subtracted both when the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 stops and when the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 stops. Ru. That is, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is subtracted regardless of the type of special symbol display device that is variably displayed in the current game.

FIGS. 55(a), 55(b), and 55(c) are simulated views of screens displayed on the image display device 31 in each game of the third embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 55(a) is a simulated diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Further, FIG. 55(b) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the low probability time saving game state. FIG. 55(c) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 in the high probability time saving game state. The image display device 31 of the third embodiment displays production symbols GA (1 to 3), pending images GB (1, 2), fourth symbols GC (1, 2), and pending number images GD (1, 2) in each game. 2) and various images including the small pattern Ga are displayed (same as the first embodiment).

The performance pattern GA of the third embodiment includes a performance pattern GA1 (see FIG. 55(a)), a performance pattern GA2 (see FIG. 55(b)), and a performance pattern GAw3 (see FIG. 55(c)). The performance symbol GA1 is displayed in a low probability non-time saving game state. Further, the performance symbol GA2 is displayed in a low probability time saving game state. In this embodiment, a common effect pattern GA2 is displayed in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state. The performance symbol GA3 is displayed in a high probability time saving game state. In addition, in this embodiment, although the performance symbols GA are different between the low probability time saving game state and the high probability time saving game state, the performance symbols GA may be the same in each of the above game states.

In the third embodiment, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. That is, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state, the second working time saving gaming state, the third working time saving gaming state and the high probability working time saving gaming state. Specifically, a common fourth symbol GC is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a different fourth symbol GC is displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the jackpot game, the fourth symbol GC may be displayed.

The reserved number image GD of the third embodiment is common to the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state, similar to the above-mentioned fourth symbol GC. That is, a common pending number image GD is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state, the third time saving game state and the high probability time saving game state. Specifically, a common pending number image GD is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, a configuration may be adopted in which different pending number images GD are displayed depending on the gaming state. Further, in the jackpot game, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending number image GD is displayed.

When a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops and displays a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Further, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning symbol. Similarly, when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, the small symbol Ga stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the time-saving symbol, and when a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, it is a losing symbol. Stop displaying the symbol combination corresponding to . Furthermore, in principle, when the performance pattern GA is stopped and displayed, the small pattern Ga is stopped and displayed in the same manner as the performance pattern GA. For example, when you win a jackpot and the production symbol GA stops displaying at "7, 7, 7", the small symbol Ga also stops displaying at "7, 7, 7", you win a small hit, and the production symbol GA stops displaying. When the GA stops and displays "7, 5, 7", the small symbol Ga also stops and displays "7, 5, 7", and the third short time is won, and the production symbol GA becomes "7, 9, 7". ” or “7・Time saver (an example of a special symbol described later)・7”, the small symbol Ga is also stopped and displayed at “7・9・7” or “7・Time saver 7”.

In the third embodiment, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. That is, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state, the second working time saving gaming state, the third working time saving gaming state and the high probability working time saving gaming state. Specifically, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in each game state except for the jackpot game. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga may be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the common small symbol Ga is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21, but the first special symbol display Apart from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the device 20, a small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may be provided. In that case, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 may have a display mode common to the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 20, or 1. The display mode may be different from the small symbol Ga corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol display device 20.

As described above, the production symbols GA (1, 2) are different between the low probability non-time saving game state and the low probability time saving gaming state. On the other hand, a common small symbol Ga is displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state and the low probability time saving gaming state. In the above configuration, when transitioning from a low probability non-time saving gaming state to a low probability time saving gaming state (including the second working time saving gaming state and the third working time saving gaming state), the aspect of the performance symbol GA changes, while the small symbol In other words, the aspect of Ga does not change. Similarly, when transitioning from a low probability time-saving game state to a low probability non-time-saving game state, the mode of the production symbol GA changes, while the mode of the small symbol Ga does not change.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the number of games image GE is displayed as in the first embodiment. The numbers in the game count image GE of the third embodiment are added immediately after the game is started. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the number of the game count image GE is added at the end of the game (substantially at the same time as the cumulative count m is added).

The above game count image GE is displayed after the transition to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state until the end of the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. However, the display of the number of games image GE may be started after the number of games played in the low probability game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 790 times). Moreover, although the number of games image GE of the present embodiment displays the number of games played in the low probability gaming state, it may display the number of games played until the transition to the second time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the displayed number of games is subtracted for each game. Furthermore, the number-of-games image GE may be displayed in a low-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, although the number of games image GE of this embodiment is in a form that simply shows the number of times, for example, "750 more times until the start of the second time-saving game state", it makes you expect a transition to the second time-saving game state. It may also be configured such that the text is also displayed.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low probability time saving game state, the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed. The remaining time saving image GJ displays the remaining number of times M of the time saving game state. For example, immediately after the first time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100". Immediately after the second time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "1000". Immediately after the third time saving game state is started, the remaining time saving image GJ displays the number "100" or the number "1000". The number of the remaining time saving image GJ is subtracted by "1" at the start of the game.

Incidentally, gaming machines (so-called "ST machines") in which a high-probability time-saving gaming state ends after a predetermined number of times (for example, "100") have been known. When employing the above ST machine, a configuration may be adopted in which a remaining time saving image GJ displaying the remaining number of high probability time saving game states is displayed. In addition, there is a remaining time saving image GJ (hereinafter referred to as "remaining time saving image GJx") that displays the remaining number of times in the low probability time saving gaming state, and a remaining time saving image GJ (hereinafter referred to as "remaining time saving image GJx") that displays the remaining number of times in the high probability time saving gaming state. In a configuration in which both the remaining time saving image GJx and the remaining time saving image GJy are displayed, the modes of the remaining time saving image GJx and the remaining time saving image GJy may be different. For example, the remaining time saving image GJx displays letters and numbers as shown in FIG. 29(b). Further, similarly to the remaining time saving image GJx, a configuration is assumed in which the remaining time saving image GJy displays characters and numbers. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining time saving image GJx displays black characters and white numbers, and the remaining time saving image GJy displays white characters and black numbers.

In this embodiment, the background image GHx is displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(a)). Furthermore, the background image GHy is displayed in the low probability time saving game state (see FIG. 55(b)), and the background image GHv is displayed in the high probability time saving gaming state (see FIG. 55(c)). That is, in each of the above game states, the background image GH is different. However, the background image GH may be common to all or some of the above gaming states. For example, the background image GH may be shared between the low probability non-time saving game state and the high probability time saving gaming state.

In the time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game states), when the remaining number of times M becomes less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, five times), the remaining number of times M is highlighted and displayed. For example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which, when the remaining number M is subtracted to 5, a message "5 remaining!" is displayed approximately in the center of the image display device 31.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the low probability time-saving game state, the right-hand hitting image Gsy is displayed. As described above, in the time saving game state (first to third time saving game states), the right hand lamp 28 instructs the player to play right. The right-handed player image Gsy is displayed during the period in which the right-handed player is instructed by the right-handed player lamp 28. Further, the right-handed hitting image Gsy is not displayed during a period when right-handed hitting is not instructed by the right-handed hitting lamp 28.

Specifically, the right-hand hitting image Gsy is continuously displayed from the start of the opening period of the jackpot game to the period after the start of the first time-saving game state. In addition, the right-handed image Gsy starts to be displayed from the time when the cumulative number m reaches the number of operations n (the n-th losing symbol is stopped and displayed) and the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. Similarly, the right-handed image Gsy starts to be displayed from the time when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed and the game shifts to the third time-saving game state. In addition, during the period when right-handed hitting is instructed by the right-handed hitting lamp 28, when a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach) is executed, the right-handed hitting image Gsy may be temporarily hidden. However, during the period in which the right-handed game image Gsy is temporarily hidden, a lamp controlled by the sub CPU 121 or an image different from the right-handed game image Gsy is configured to instruct that the right-handed game should be played. is suitable.

The pending image GB includes a pending image GB1 (see FIG. 55(a)) and a pending image GB2 (see FIG. 55(b) and FIG. 55(c)). The pending image GB1 is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area (from the first storage section to the fourth storage section) or the second special symbol pending storage area (from the first storage section to the fourth storage section) in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. is displayed when the above-mentioned random number value (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "judgment information") is stored. The pending image GB2 is displayed when determination information is stored in the second special symbol pending storage area in the low probability time saving game state and the high probability time saving gaming state.

The pending image GB1 is displayed in areas R11 to R14 and areas R21 to R24 of the image display device 31. For example, when the determination information is stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area (when the first reservation number is added to the numerical value "1"), reservation image GB1 is displayed in area R11. Similarly, when the determination information is stored in the second storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R12, and when the determination information is stored in the third storage area, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R13. When the pending image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the fourth storage unit, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the area R14. In addition, when the determination information is stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R21, and when the determination information is stored in the second storage section, the reservation image GB1 is displayed in the area R22. When the image GB1 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage section, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the area R23, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage section, the pending image GB1 is displayed in the area R24. be done.

In the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), the reserved image GB1 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the first special symbol display device 20 starts to fluctuate and the above-described shift process is executed, each pending image GB1 from the region R11 to the region R14 is moved to the adjacent region R on the left and displayed. Similarly, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the above-described shift process is executed, the reserved image GB1 from the region R21 to the region R24 is moved to the adjacent region R on the left and displayed.

The pending image GB2 is displayed in areas R11 to R14 of the image display device 31. For example, when determination information is stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, reservation image GB2 is displayed in area R11, and when determination information is stored in the second storage section, reservation image GB2 is displayed in area R12. When the image GB2 is displayed and the determination information is stored in the third storage section, the pending image GB2 is displayed in the area R13, and when the determination information is stored in the fourth storage section, the pending image GB2 is displayed in the area R14. be done.

In the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, when the determination information is stored in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), the pending image GB2 is displayed in the area R0. Further, when the second special symbol display device 21 starts to fluctuate and the above-described shift process is executed, the reserved image GB2 from the region R11 to the region R14 is moved to the adjacent region R on the left and displayed. In addition, in the low probability time saving game state, when the determination information is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, a configuration may be adopted in which the reservation image is displayed.

In the above configuration, the reserved image GB (1, 2) displayed in the area R moves to the area R on the left of the area R every time a game is executed, and is finally displayed in the area R0. . Furthermore, when the game in which the pending image GB is displayed in the area R0 (the game in which the judgment information acquired at the start of the display of the pending image GB is determined in the jackpot determination process) ends, the pending image GB is hidden. . Note that the timing at which the pending image GB displayed in the area R0 is hidden can be changed as appropriate.

The sub CPU 121 of the third embodiment starts displaying the pending image GB when the start prize designation command is received. Furthermore, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not to execute the pending change effect in the pending image GB by referring to the start winning designation command. Specifically, the special symbol variation pattern includes a variation pattern that executes a pending variation effect. The sub CPU 121 determines to execute the pending variation performance when the variation pattern (winning information) specified from the starting winning designation command is a variation pattern for executing the pending variation performance. If the result of the preliminary determination specified from the starting winning designation command is a jackpot, the pending change effect is more likely to be executed than if the result of the preliminary determination is a loss.

When it is decided to execute the pending change effect, the aspect (for example, color) of the pending image GB changes to a predetermined aspect. For example, FIG. 29(a) described above assumes a specific example in which the reserved image GB in the area R12 is displayed in a special manner, and the reserved image GB in the other area R is displayed in a normal manner.

Specifically, the pending image GB is displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) when the pending change effect is not executed. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the pending change effect, the pending image GB changes to a special mode (for example, blue) at some point in the display period of the pending image GB. The periods at which the held image GB changes to a special mode include the time when the held image GB is moved (shifted) and displayed, during the game before the held image GB moves to area R0, and when the held image GB changes to the special mode. This may occur during the game after moving to area R0.

In the hold change performance, the hold image GB changes to any of a plurality of special modes (in addition to blue, red, gold, and rainbow colors). Further, during the display period of the pending image GB, the mode of the pending image GB may change multiple times (stepwise). For example, when the sub CPU 121 decides to execute the pending change effect, the sub CPU 121 determines in advance the final special mode and the timing (scenario) at which the mode of the pending image GB changes. Specifically, the final special mode and the timing at which the mode of the pending image GB changes is determined according to the result of the preliminary determination and the number of pendings specified from the start winning prize designation command. However, as will be described in detail later, in the third embodiment, a limited period may be provided. During the above restriction period, pending change effects are not determined (restricted).

FIG. 56(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the restriction period. As mentioned above, during the limited period, even if a starting prize is won, the pending change effect is not determined. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" from the start of the game (at the start of special symbol fluctuation) when the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "797". The limit period is until the end of the game (when the special symbol fluctuation stops). That is, the limited period is from the start of the game four times before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state to the start of the second time-saving game state. As described above, the upper limit of the first reservation number is four. Therefore, the above-mentioned limited period can be said to be a period during which determination information that is held in the first special symbol holding storage area until the second time-saving game state can be obtained among the low-probability non-time-saving game states.

Let us assume a comparison example in which a suspension change performance can be determined when determination information to be reserved in a first special symbol retention storage area until a second time-saving game state is acquired in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In the above comparison example, at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state, the player may be able to grasp that the determination information for determining a jackpot is stored in the first special symbol retention storage area. Therefore, in the comparison example above, by maintaining the second pending number at the numerical value "1" or more in the second time-saving game state, the player can play the jackpot game while knowing that the right to play the jackpot game is retained. You can play the game without causing it to occur intentionally. In the above comparison example, a problem may arise in which the gambling nature of the player is significantly aroused.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is provided in which a pending change effect is not determined during a limited period during which determination information for suspending until the second time-saving gaming state can be acquired among the low probability non-time-saving gaming states. Adopted. In addition, even during the limit period, the main CPU 111 generates a starting prize designation command by the preliminary determination process, and the starting winning prize designating command is received by the sub CPU 121 side. Therefore, the restriction period is a period during which the sub-CPU 121 can determine the pending change performance, but it can also be said to be a period in which the determination of the pending change performance is intentionally restricted. With the above configuration, at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state, the player cannot grasp from the pending image GB that the determination information for determining a jackpot is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area. Therefore, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

FIG. 56(b-1) is a diagram for explaining the probability that a pending change effect is determined. Specifically, FIG. 56 (b-1) shows that when a starting winning is made in a period other than the limited period (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "non-limited period") in the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the pending change The probability that the performance will be decided is shown. Further, FIG. 56(b-1) shows the probability that the pending change performance will be executed for each result of the preliminary determination at the time of starting winning.

In the non-restricted period of the third embodiment, the pending change performance is more likely to be determined when the preliminary determination result is the third time reduction compared to when the preliminary determination result is a loss. Specifically, when the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the pending change performance is determined with a probability of about 20%. Furthermore, if the preliminary determination result is a loss, the pending change performance will be determined with a probability of approximately 5%. However, if the result of the preliminary determination is the third time reduction, the pending change effect is definitely determined, and if the result of the preliminary determination is a loss, the pending change effect may not be determined.

In the non-limited period of the third embodiment, the pending change performance is more likely to be determined when the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot compared to the case where the preliminary determination is the third time reduction. Specifically, if the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot, the pending change effect is determined with a probability of approximately 50%. However, if the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot, the pending change effect is definitely determined, and if the result of the preliminary determination is the third time saving, the pending change effect may not be determined. If the preliminary determination result is a small hit, the pending change performance is determined with a probability of approximately 10%.

By the way, as described above, the main control board 110 transmits a cumulative number command that can specify the cumulative number m to the production control board 120. From the above cumulative number of times command, the sub CPU 121 can specify the number of games until the second time saving gaming state is activated. For example, assume that the number of games until the second time-saving game state is activated is "X times". Further, assume that the number of reservations is X or more. In the above case, the sub CPU 121 can understand that the jackpot will not be won in the X number of games by analyzing the starting winning designation command. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 can know in advance that the second time-saving gaming state will be activated in the game after X times from the cumulative number of times command and the starting winning designation command.

Therefore, the pending image GB displayed in the area R0 in the game transitioning to the second time saving game state may be configured to be able to change to a special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. As the special aspect of the hold image GB, for example, a hold image GB that displays a message such as "Start of second time saving?" can be considered. However, with the above configuration, when the pending change performance is determined to indicate a transition to the second time-saving gaming state, some players may not be able to indicate that the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot. Suggesting this may lead to misunderstandings.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, the hold change performance that notifies the player of transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state is not executed. Specifically, the hold change effect does not include the effect in which the hold image GB changes in the above-mentioned special mode. According to the above configuration, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the reserved image GB can be changed in a special manner.

FIG. 56(b-2) is a diagram for explaining the probability that a pending change effect is determined during the limited period. As shown in FIG. 56(b-2), during the limited period, the pending change performance is not determined regardless of the result of the preliminary determination. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending change effect can be determined with a lower probability during the restricted period than during the non-restricted period. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending change performance can be determined only when the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot during the limited period. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending change effect can be determined only when the result of the preliminary determination is other than a loss during the limited period.

FIG. 56(c) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 during the restriction period. During the limited period, the various images described using FIG. 29(a) above are displayed. Furthermore, during the limited period, the emphasized image GZ is displayed as shown in FIG. 30(c). The emphasis image GZ is an image for emphasizing the remaining number of games until the transition to the second time-saving game state.

The above emphasized image GZ is displayed, for example, near the approximate center of the screen of the image display device 31. Further, the emphasized image GZ is displayed immediately after the game starts, and becomes hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, the display time of the emphasized image GZ is shorter than the variation pattern with the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be determined in the limited period. With the above configuration, the inconvenience of the highlighted image GZ displayed in the current game being displayed when the next game starts is suppressed.

Specifically, in the game three times before the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "797"), the emphasized image GZ that displays the message "3 more times" is displayed. Is displayed. Similarly, in the game that is played two times before the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number of times m is added to the numerical value "798"), the emphasized image GZ that displays the message "Two more times" is displayed. , In the game that is one game before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state (the game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "799"), an emphasized image GZ that displays the message "One more time" is displayed, and the In a game that shifts to the 2-hour saving game state (a game in which the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800"), an emphasis image GZ displaying a message "LAST" is displayed.

However, the game in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed is not limited to the above example. Specifically, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed from the game before the limited period starts. For example, it may be configured such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed from the game five times before the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state. Alternatively, the emphasized image GZ may be displayed starting from the game after the limited period has started. For example, it may be configured such that the emphasized image GZ is displayed only in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state. In addition, the emphasized image GZ of the third embodiment is configured such that a message that makes the transition to the second time-saving game state is expected is also displayed, such as "3 more times until the start of the second time-saving game state". You can also use it as

According to the above-mentioned emphasized image GZ, there is an advantage that the player can easily understand that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state. In addition, in a configuration in which the pending change performance is executed during the period in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed, it is assumed that there will be an inconvenience in which the player pays attention to the held change performance and not the emphasized image GZ. In the configuration of the third embodiment, a limited period is provided immediately before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, and the pending change effect is not executed during the period in which the emphasized image GZ is displayed. Therefore, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed, and the effect that it becomes easier for the player to understand that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state is particularly remarkable. Furthermore, simply by preventing the pending change effect from being executed during the restriction period, the effect of making it easier for players to understand that the transition to the second time-saving gaming state will be entered can be guaranteed at the minimum, so it is emphasized during the restriction period. The number-of-games image GE that has been displayed since before the limit period may be continuously displayed without displaying the image GZ.

57(a-1) to FIG. 57(a-4) and FIG. 57(b-1) to FIG. 57(b-4) show the period during which the normal symbol display device 22 changes the normal symbol, and It is a figure for explaining the relationship with the period in which the opening/closing door 14b operates (the second starting port 14 is opened). In addition, each of the above figures shows the gaming state at each point in time, in addition to the period in which the normal symbols change and the period in which the opening/closing door 14b operates. Furthermore, each of the above figures shows the number of reservations at each point in time.

As mentioned above, in the non-time saving game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is about 10 seconds. In addition, in the time saving game state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is about 1 second. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the variation time of the normal symbols in the non-time saving gaming state may be referred to as "variation time Ha". Further, the variation time of the normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state may be described as "variation time Hb". As mentioned above, the fluctuation time Hb of the normal symbols in each time-saving game state (first to third time-saving game state) is common.

In addition, in the non-time saving game state, the total opening time of the opening/closing door 14b when the open symbols (long open symbols, short open symbols) are stopped and displayed is about 4.2 seconds or about 0.2 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operating mode (total opening time, number of openings) of the opening/closing door 14b when the opening symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state may be collectively referred to as "operating mode Da." Similarly, in the time saving game state, the total opening time of the opening/closing door 14b when the opening symbols are stopped and displayed is about 5 seconds or about 3 seconds. Hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, the operation mode of the opening/closing door 14b when the open symbol is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state may be collectively referred to as "operation mode Db." As mentioned above, the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b in each time-saving game state is common.

FIG. 57(a-1) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-1) assumes a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, FIG. 57(a-1) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

In the above specific example of FIG. 57(a-1), the normal symbols are stopped and displayed from the time ta1 when the normal symbols stop until the time ta2 when a wait period (approximately 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Further, the normal symbol storage determination process (see FIG. 36(b)) for starting the next variable display of the normal symbols is executed immediately after time ta2. When the normal symbol storage determination process is executed, the number of reservations is subtracted and a new variable display of the normal symbols is started. In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-1), the gaming state at time ta2 is a low probability non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, the fluctuation time Ha is determined in the normal symbol storage determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

FIG. 57(a-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-2) assumes a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped, similar to FIG. 57(a-1) above. . In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops. Further, assume that the wait period in which the normal symbols are stopped and displayed ends at time ta2. In the above configuration, the normal symbol storage determination process for starting a new game is executed immediately after time ta2.

The specific example of FIG. 57(a-2) differs from the specific example of FIG. 57(a-1) described above in that the state shifts from the low probability non-time saving gaming state to the low probability time saving gaming state at time tx. Specifically, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, the state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, a transition is made to the third time-saving gaming state. The specific example of FIG. 57(a-2) assumes a case where the trigger for transition to the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is established at time tx.

As shown in FIG. 57(a-2), time tx is before the time (immediately after time ta2) when a new normal symbol storage determination process is executed. Specifically, the time tx is a time point in the middle of the fluctuating display of the normal symbol, which stops at the time ta.

In the third embodiment, even if the transition to the time-saving gaming state is made in the middle of the variable display of normal symbols started in the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable display is continued until the variable time Ha is reached. That is, the variable time Ha determined at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is not changed even if the state shifts to the time-saving gaming state in the middle of the variable display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2), even if the time-saving gaming state is transitioned to during the fluctuating display of normal symbols that stops at time ta1, the fluctuating display continues until the fluctuating time Ha is reached. In the above configuration, since the already determined variation time Ha is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game is suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, the normal symbols (long open symbols, short open symbols, lose symbols) determined at the start of the fluctuation are not changed even if the gaming state changes during the fluctuation display. In the above configuration, since the normal symbols that have already been determined are not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-2), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination obtained in the non-time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the regular symbol lottery (win determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Hb of the time-saving gaming state is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and the operating mode Db of the time-saving gaming state is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b.

FIG. 57(a-3) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-3) shows a fluctuating display of normal symbols started in a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, similar to FIG. 57(a-1) and FIG. 57(a-2) described above. Assume that the system is stopped. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, FIG. 57(a-3) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), it is assumed that the opening symbol is stopped and displayed at time ta1, and the opening/closing door 14b changes to the operating state. In addition, in FIG. 57(a-3), the time point ta1 when the opening symbol is stopped and the time point when the opening/closing door 14b enters the operating state are shown to be substantially coincident. However, in reality, after the opening symbol stops and the wait period ends, the opening/closing door 14b becomes operational. That is, the time point when the opening/closing door 14b becomes operational is after the time point ta1. The same applies to FIG. 57(a-4), FIG. 57(b-3), and FIG. 57(b-4), which will be described later. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the time point ta1 at which the opening symbol is stopped and the time point at which the opening/closing door 14b becomes in the operating state substantially coincide with each other.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), the operating mode Da is determined at the start of the normal symbol variation. Further, assume that the operation of the opening/closing door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above case, the normal symbol storage determination process is executed immediately after time ta2, and a new variable display of the normal symbols can be started. In the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3), the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the variation time Ha is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol.

FIG. 57(a-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state is stopped, similar to FIG. 57(a-3) described above. In the above case, the normal symbol fluctuates over the fluctuation time Ha. Further, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57(a-4), at time tx before the time when the normal symbol storage determination process is newly executed (immediately after time ta2), the low probability non-time saving game state is changed to the low probability time saving game state. This is different from the specific example of FIG. 57(a-3) described above in that the state shifts to the state. Specifically, FIG. 57(a-4) assumes a case where the opening/closing door 14b shifts from the low probability non-time saving gaming state to the low probability time saving gaming state during the period in which the opening/closing door 14b is in the operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the opening/closing door 14b starts operating in the non-time saving gaming state and shifts to the time saving gaming state, the opening/closing door 14b continues to operate in the already determined operating mode. That is, the operating mode Da of the non-time-saving gaming state determined at the start of the variation of the normal symbols is not changed even if the mode shifts to the time-saving gaming state in the middle of the operation of the opening/closing door 14b. In the above configuration, since the operation mode of the opening/closing door that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 31(a-4), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination obtained in the non-time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the regular symbol lottery (win determination process) is executed with the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, a variation time Hb is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and an operating mode Db is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b.

FIG. 57(b-1) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57 (b-1) shows a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability time saving gaming state (including the second time saving gaming state and the third time saving gaming state) stops at time ta1. Assume that As mentioned above, the normal symbols fluctuate over the fluctuating time Hb in the time saving game state. Furthermore, FIG. 57(b-1) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

In the above specific example of FIG. 57(b-1), the normal symbols are stopped and displayed from the time ta1 when the normal symbols stop until the time ta2 when a wait period (about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-1), the gaming state at time ta2 is a low probability time saving gaming state. Therefore, the fluctuation time Hb is determined in the normal symbol storage determination process executed immediately after time ta2.

FIG. 57(b-2) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a case where the fluctuating display of normal symbols started in the low probability time-saving gaming state stops at time ta1, similar to FIG. 57(b-1) above. do. Furthermore, FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

However, in the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2), at the time tx before the time when the normal symbol memory determination process is newly executed (immediately after the time ta2 when the wait period ends), the low probability time saving game state is This differs from the specific example of FIG. 57(b-1) described above in that it shifts to a low probability non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2) assumes a case where a transition is made from a low probability time-saving gaming state to a low probability non-time-saving gaming state at time tx during the fluctuating display of normal symbols. In the above case, for example, a case where the remaining number M (2, 3) of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is subtracted to the numerical value "0" at time tx can be considered.

In the third embodiment, even if the variable display of normal symbols started in the time-saving gaming state is shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state in the middle, the variable display is continued until the variable time Hb is reached. That is, the fluctuation time Hb of the time-saving gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols is not changed even if the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state in the middle of the fluctuation display. For example, in the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2), even if the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state during the fluctuating display of normal symbols that stops at time ta1, the fluctuating display continues until the fluctuating time Hb is reached. . With the above configuration, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbols that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience that the fairness of the game is impaired is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-2), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the regular symbol lottery is executed with the winning probability in the non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, a variation time Ha is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and an operating mode Da is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b.

FIG. 57(b-3) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. Specifically, in FIG. 57(b-3), similar to FIG. 57(b-1) and FIG. 57(b-2) above, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols started in the low probability time saving gaming state is shown. Assume that the process stops at time ta1. Further, FIG. 57(b-3) assumes a case where the number of pending lottery drawings is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the fluctuating display stops.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the opening symbol is displayed in a stopped state at time ta1, and the opening/closing door 14b changes to operation. As described above, in the time saving game state, the operating mode Db is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), it is assumed that the operating state of the opening/closing door 14b ends at time ta2. In the above case, the normal symbol storage determination process for starting a new variable display is executed immediately after time ta2. In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3), the gaming state at time ta2 is a time saving gaming state. Therefore, the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2 is the fluctuation time Hb.

FIG. 57(b-4) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. In FIG. 57(b-4), similar to FIG. 57(b-3) above, the number of pending lottery tickets is added to the numerical value "1" before the time ta1 when the variable display stops, and the opening/closing door 14b Assume that the operation of TA2 ends at time ta2. However, in the specific example of FIG. 57(b-4), at time tx before the time when the normal symbol memory determination process is executed (immediately after time ta2), the low probability time saving gaming state changes to the low probability non time saving gaming state. This is different from the specific example of FIG. 57(b-3) described above in the point of transition. Specifically, FIG. 57(b-4) assumes a case where the opening/closing door 14b shifts from the low probability time saving gaming state to the low probability non time saving gaming state during the period in which the opening/closing door 14b is in the operating state.

In the third embodiment, even if the opening/closing door 14b starts operating in the time-saving gaming state and shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state, the opening/closing door 14b continues to operate in the already determined operating mode. That is, the operation mode Db of the time-saving gaming state determined at the start of variation of the normal symbols is not changed even if the state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state in the middle of the operation of the opening/closing door 14b. In the above configuration, since the operation mode of the opening/closing door that has already been determined is not changed unnecessarily, the inconvenience of harming the fairness of the game is suppressed.

In the specific example of FIG. 57(b-4), in the normal symbol storage determination process immediately after time ta2, the random number value for hit determination acquired in the time-saving gaming state is determined. However, the gaming state at time ta2 is a non-time saving gaming state. Therefore, in the normal symbol storage determination process, the regular symbol lottery is executed with the winning probability in the non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the normal symbol storage determination process, a variation time Ha is determined as the variation time of the normal symbol, and an operating mode Da is determined as the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b.

FIG. 58(a) and FIG. 58(b) are other diagrams for explaining the relationship between the period in which the normal symbol display device 22 changes the normal symbol and the period in which the opening/closing door 14b operates. In addition, each of the above figures shows the gaming state at each point in time, in addition to the period in which the normal symbols change and the period in which the opening/closing door 14b operates (same as in FIG. 31 described above).

FIG. 58(a) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. In the specific example of FIG. 58(a), it is assumed that a transition is made from a low probability non-time-saving gaming state to a time-saving gaming state at time tx, and then the open symbols are stopped and displayed at time ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operating mode Db immediately after time ta. That is, even if the variable display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in the non-time-saving gaming state, if the opening symbol has shifted to the time-saving gaming state at the time when it is stopped and displayed, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled by the operating mode Db. Ru.

FIG. 58(b) is a diagram for explaining another specific example in which open symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. In the specific example of FIG. 58(b), it is assumed that the time-saving gaming state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state at time tx, and then the open symbols are stopped and displayed at time ta. In the above case, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the operating mode Da immediately after time ta. That is, even if the fluctuating display of the normal symbol display device 22 is started in the time-saving gaming state, if the opening symbol has been shifted to the non-time-saving gaming state at the time when it is stopped and displayed, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled by the operating mode Da. Ru.

FIG. 59(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the second time saving game state ends. As described above, the second time-saving game state ends when the 1000 games are played. Further, the second time-saving game state may end before the number of games reaches 1000 if a jackpot game is won. FIG. 59(a) shows a specific example in which the second time-saving game state ends when a jackpot game is won.

FIG. 59(a) shows the period in which the second time-saving game state operates and the remaining number of times M2 of the second time-saving game state at each time point. Further, FIG. 59(a) shows the period in which the first time-saving game state operates and the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state. Further, FIG. 59(a) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period).

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game starts at time tb1 in the second time saving game state. Further, the remaining number of times M2 immediately before time tb1 is a numerical value of "800". In the above case, the above-mentioned jackpot initialization process is executed at time tb1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M2 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the second time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tb2. In the above case, at time tb2, the initial value "100" is set to the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state, and the first time-saving game state is started. Further, when the jackpot game ends, the second time saving game state is not restarted.

FIG. 59(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example when the third time saving game state ends. As mentioned above, the third time-saving game state ends when the game is played 100 times or 1000 times. Further, the third time-saving game state may end upon winning a jackpot game. FIG. 59(b) shows a specific example in which the third time-saving game state ends when the jackpot game is won.

FIG. 59(b) shows the period in which the third time-saving game state operates and the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state at each time point. Further, FIG. 59(b) shows the period during which the first time-saving game state operates and the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state. Further, FIG. 59(b) shows the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period).

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game starts at time tc1 in the third time saving game state. Further, the remaining number of times M3 immediately before time tc1 is a numerical value "10". In the above case, the above-mentioned jackpot initialization process is executed at time tc1. Therefore, the remaining number of times M3 is cleared to the numerical value "0", and the third time-saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game ends at time tc2. In the above case, at time tc2, the initial value "100" is set to the remaining number of times M1 of the first time-saving game state, and the first time-saving game state is started. Further, when the jackpot game ends, the third time saving game state does not restart.

By the way, the first time-saving game state ends after 100 games. Further, when the low probability game state continues for 800 games, a second time saving game state is started. In the above configuration, since the first time-saving game state ends before the second time-saving game state starts, there is no period in which the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state overlap and operate. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a period in which the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state operate overlappingly may occur. For example, a configuration can be considered in which a value greater than "800" can be set as the initial value of the remaining number M1 of the first time-saving game state. In the above configuration, in the low probability game state after the first time-saving game state reaches 800 times, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state operate in duplicate.

In addition, in the time-saving game state including the first time-saving game state, even if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, it does not shift to the third time-saving game state. In the above configuration, there is no period in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate in duplicate. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a period in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate overlappingly may occur. For example, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the first time-saving game state, a configuration can be considered in which the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate in duplicate in the subsequent period. Although explained in detail below, in the third embodiment, the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state may operate in duplicate.

FIG. 59(c) is a diagram for explaining a specific example in which the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate in duplicate. FIG. 59(c) shows a period in which the second time-saving game state operates and a period in which the third time-saving game state operates. Further, FIG. 59(c) shows the remaining number M2 of the second time-saving gaming state, the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving gaming state, and the cumulative number m at each time point. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations "800" at time td1 in the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the second time-saving game state operates from time td1. Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that immediately after the second time-saving game state starts, the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving game state is a numerical value "X" (however, 0<X<1000). do.

As shown in FIG. 59(c), in the period after time td1, both the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate. Furthermore, during the period in which both the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state operate, the numerical value "1" is subtracted from each of the remaining number of times M2 and remaining number of times M3 in each game. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), it is assumed that the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to a numerical value "0" at time td2. In the above case, the third time saving game state ends at time td2.

In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), the remaining number of times M2 (1000-X) at time td2 is equal to or greater than the numerical value "1". In the above specific example, at time td2, the third time-saving game state ends, while the second time-saving game state continues. In the specific example of FIG. 59(c), at time td3 after time td2, the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0", and the second time-saving game state ends.

In the third embodiment described above, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, the second time-saving game state is activated even if it is the third time-saving game state. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the second time-saving gaming state does not operate depending on the gaming state in which the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operating times n, the inconvenience that the player is at an excessive disadvantage is suppressed. Further, in the third embodiment, in a period in which two time-saving game states (the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state) operate in duplicate, the remaining number of times in both time-saving game states is subtracted. Therefore, for example, during a period in which two time-saving gaming states operate overlappingly, the subtraction of the remaining number of games in one of the time-saving gaming states stops, and after the other time-saving gaming state ends, the one time-saving gaming state is activated. Compared to the restart configuration, there is an advantage that the inconvenience of the time-saving gaming state being excessively prolonged is suppressed.

In addition, as described above, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the time during which the normal symbol stops and is displayed (wait period time), and the operating mode of the opening/closing door 14b when winning in the common symbol lottery are changed. This is common to each time-saving game state. That is, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b is common in each time-saving game state.

Assume a comparative example in which the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b is different in each time-saving game state. In the above comparison example, when the time-saving game states overlap, the problem is which opening mode of the time-saving game state should be prioritized. According to the third embodiment, the above problems are suppressed.

In addition, in the above comparison example, if, after the time-saving game states overlap, one time-saving game state ends and the other time-saving game state continues, a configuration is adopted in which the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b changes. Assume that For example, in the above comparison example, assume that time-saving game state A (opening mode is opening mode KA) and time-saving gaming state B (opening mode is opening mode KB) overlap. Furthermore, in the above case, during the period in which the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, the opening/closing door 14b is controlled in the opening mode KA of the time-saving game state A. Furthermore, it is assumed that after the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, the time-saving game state A ends and the time-saving game state B continues. In the above case, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 14b changes from the opening mode KA to the opening mode KB.

In the above comparison example, the opening mode changes even though the time-saving gaming state continues, which may cause some players to feel uncomfortable. According to the third embodiment, the above disadvantages are suppressed. In addition, in the above-mentioned comparison example, after the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B overlap, if the time-saving game state A ends and the time-saving game state B continues, the opening/closing door 14b is closed in the subsequent time-saving game state B. It may also be configured to be controlled in the open mode KA. In the above configuration, since the opening mode does not change when the time-saving game state A ends, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(c) are diagrams for explaining the mode (lighting on, turning off) of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. As described above, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up in the time-saving game state, and turns off when the time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the low probability non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 outputs various external information signals to an external device (for example, a hall computer). The above various external information signals include advantageous period signals.

The advantageous period signal changes to the ON state at the start of the jackpot game (at the start of the opening period), at the start of the second time-saving game state, and at the start of the third time-saving game state, and then changes to the low probability non-time-saving game state. It is maintained in the ON state until the transition. In other words, the above-mentioned advantageous period signal is turned on in gaming states (jackpot game, low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state) in which it is more advantageous to play with the right hand than with the left hand.

60(a) to 60(c) show the state (ON, OFF) of the advantageous period signal at each point in time. Further, FIGS. 60(a) to 60(c) show the cumulative number of times m at each time point. In addition, when a small winning game is executed in a low probability non-time saving game state, the advantageous period signal may be maintained in an OFF state or may be temporarily turned ON.

FIG. 60(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the mode of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the second time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations "800" at time te1 and the state shifts to the second time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before shifting to the second time-saving gaming state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off.

In the above specific example of FIG. 60(a), the right-handed lamp 28 starts lighting at time te1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 starts to light up substantially at the same time as the start of the second time-saving game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, the cumulative number m is determined when the special symbol is stopped (special symbol stop processing), and immediately after that, the second time saving flag is changed to the ON state. The main CPU 111 keeps the right-handed lamp 28 off until the second time-saving flag is turned on (until the special symbol stops), and immediately after turning on the second time-saving flag (almost at the same time), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off. The striking lamp 28 is turned on. Further, the main CPU 111 maintains the advantageous period signal in the OFF state until the second time saving flag is turned on, and changes the advantageous period signal to the ON state immediately after turning on the second time saving flag. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment turns on the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state. .

In the specific example of FIG. 60(a), it is assumed that 1000 games have been played and the second time-saving game state ends at time te2. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state is started from time te2. The above time te2 is the time when the special symbols stop in the 1000th game in the second time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(a), the right-handed lamp 28 lights up until the special symbol stops in the 1000th game in the second time-saving game state, and then turns off. Further, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 1000th game in the second time saving game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the third time saving transition determination process is executed before the time saving end determination process (see FIG. 53 described above). In the above configuration, it is assumed that the time saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time saving game state. In the above case, at the time when the third time saving transition determination process is executed, the game is in the second time saving game state (the second time saving flag is in the ON state). In addition, in the third time-saving transition determination process, the game does not transition to the third time-saving game state except in the low probability non-time-saving state. Therefore, even if the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time-saving gaming state, there is no transition to the third time-saving gaming state (the time-saving symbols become invalid).

As can be understood from the above explanation, in the third embodiment, even if the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time-saving game state, the time-saving symbols do not shift to the third time-saving game state (low probability non-time-saving game state), the right-hand hitting lamp 28 goes out, and the advantageous period signal goes into the OFF state. However, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the third time saving transition determination process may be executed after the time saving end determination process. In the above configuration, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time-saving game state, the game then shifts to the third time-saving game state. The main CPU 111 of the third embodiment turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0 when the second time-saving game state ends. .

FIG. 60(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the mode of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the third time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the time-saving symbols stop at time tf1 and transition to the third time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 60(c), in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before shifting to the third time-saving gaming state, the advantageous period signal is in the OFF state, and the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off.

In the above specific example of FIG. 60(b), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned on at time tf1. That is, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up substantially at the same time as the start of the third time-saving game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is stopped (special symbol stop processing), it is determined whether or not the time saving symbol is stopped, and immediately after that, the third time saving flag is changed to the ON state. . The main CPU 111 keeps the right-handed lamp 28 off until the third time-saving flag is turned ON (until the special symbol stops), and immediately after turning the third time-saving flag ON (almost at the same time), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off. The striking lamp 28 is turned on. Further, the main CPU 111 maintains the advantageous period signal in the OFF state until the third time saving flag is turned on, and changes the advantageous period signal to the ON state immediately after turning on the third time saving flag. Incidentally, when the main CPU 111 shifts to the third time-saving game state, even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0, the main CPU 111 lights up the right-handed lamp 28 and turns on the advantageous period signal.

In the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the special symbol J1 among the time-saving symbols is stopped and displayed at time tf1. In the above case, the initial value of the remaining number M3 of the third time-saving game state is "100 times". Further, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b), it is assumed that the game has been played 100 times and the third time-saving game state ends at time tf2. Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b), at time tf2 when the 100th game in the third time-saving game state ends, if the cumulative number of times m is not the numerical value "1000" (the trigger for shifting to the second time-saving game state is Assuming that the case does not hold true. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state is started from time tf2. The above time point tf2 is the time point when the special symbols (excluding the jackpot symbols) have stopped in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state.

In the specific example shown in FIG. 60(b) above, the right-handed lamp 28 lights up until the special symbol stops in the 100th game in the third time-saving game state, and then turns off. Further, the advantageous period signal is maintained in the ON state until the special symbol stops in the 100th game of the third time saving game state, and then changes to the OFF state.

In the third embodiment, in the same way as when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the second time-saving game state, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the last game of the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. Without shifting to the gaming state (transferring to the low probability non-time saving gaming state), the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off and the advantageous period signal is turned off. In addition, at the time when the third time-saving game state ends, the main CPU 111 turns off the right-handed lamp 28 and turns off the advantageous period signal even if the number of reserved special symbols is 0.

FIG. 60(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the mode of the right-handed lamp 28 before and after the third time-saving game state. In the specific example of FIG. 60(c), similarly to FIG. 60(b) described above, it is assumed that the special symbol J1 (time saving symbol) stops at time tg1 and shifts to the third time saving game state. However, in the specific example of FIG. 60(b) described above, it is assumed that the transition opportunity to the second time-saving gaming state is not established at time tf2 when the third time-saving gaming state ends, but in the example of FIG. 60(c), In a specific example, it is assumed that a transition opportunity to the second time-saving gaming state is established.

Specifically, in the specific example of FIG. 60(c), the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "1000" at time tg2, which is the end of the final game in the third time-saving game state. In the above specific example, immediately before the third time saving flag changes to the OFF state in the time saving end determination process, the second time saving flag changes to the ON state in the second time saving transition determination process. Further, in the time saving end determination process immediately after the second time saving transition determination process, the third time saving flag changes to the OFF state. In the above case, there is no period in which both the second time saving flag and the third time saving flag are in the OFF state before and after time tg. Therefore, before and after time tg2, the right-handed lamp 28 is maintained in a lit state, and the external information signal is maintained in an ON state.

Note that the advantageous period signal may be configured to temporarily change to the OFF state immediately after time tg2. With the above configuration, even if the second time-saving game state starts at the end of the third time-saving game state, it can be grasped from the advantageous period signal that the third time-saving game state has ended. Further, it may be configured such that when the third time-saving game state ends and the second time-saving game state starts, a notification to the effect that the right-handed game should be continued may be provided. In the above configuration, it is substantially notified that the third time-saving game state has ended and that the second time-saving game state is starting. Further, when the third time-saving game state ends during the second time-saving game state, it may be configured to notify that the player should continue playing right-handed.

FIGS. 61(a-1) to 61(a-3) are diagrams for explaining each image displayed when the time-saving gaming state is started. 61(a-1) to FIG. 61(a-3) show the effects executed at each point in time, the period during which the effect pattern GA is displayed, and the background image displayed on the image display device 31 at each point in time. GH is shown.

In the third embodiment, when the time-saving game state is started, a rush image GT, a prevention image GQ2, and a warning image GQ2, which will be described later, are displayed. The entry image GT is an image for notifying that the time-saving gaming state is started (see FIG. 61(b-1) to FIG. 61(b-3) described later). The prevention image GQ2 is an image displayed to prevent a player from forgetting to take out a card (membership card, visitor card) inserted into a gaming device (see FIG. 61(b-1) described later). Further, the warning image GQ2 is an image for warning against game dependence (see FIG. 61(b-2) described later). 61(a-1) to FIG. 61(a-3) show periods during which the entry image GT, prevention image GQ2, and warning image GQ2 are displayed.

FIG. 61(a-1) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the first time-saving game state among the time-saving game states is started. In addition to each image displayed after transitioning to the first time-saving game state, FIG. 61(a-1) also shows each image displayed in the jackpot game before transitioning to the first time-saving game state. As described above, the jackpot game includes an "opening period," a "round period," and an "ending period." In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-1), it is assumed that the ending period of the jackpot game starts at time th1 (the round period ends), and the ending period ends at time th2.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), during the round period of the jackpot game, a jackpot performance is executed. In the jackpot performance, for example, a predetermined moving image is displayed. Furthermore, in the jackpot performance, a jackpot background image among the background images GH is displayed. The jackpot background image is, for example, an image corresponding to the above-mentioned moving image.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), the performance symbols GA are not displayed in the jackpot game. Further, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are not displayed. However, in the jackpot game, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD may be displayed while the performance symbol GA is hidden. During the round period after the jackpot game, the entry image GT, prevention image GQ2, and warning image GQ2 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), in the ending period of the jackpot game (period from time th1 to time th2), a time-saving rush effect is executed. In the time-saving entry effect, the entry image GT is displayed to inform that the game will move to the time-saving game state (in the specific example of FIG. 61(a-1), the first time-saving game state). In the above-described time-saving entry effect, the entry background image GHz is displayed among the background images GH.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned prevention image GQ2 and warning image GQ2 are displayed during the period in which the time-saving rush effect is executed. Specifically, the prevention image GQ2 is displayed immediately after the time-saving rush effect is started. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the time-saving rush effect, a warning image GQ2 is displayed in place of the prevention image GQ2. The above warning image GQ2 is hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Note that the period during which the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are displayed is not limited to the above example. For example, the warning image GQ2 may be displayed during (all or part of) the display period of the prevention image GQ2. Moreover, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately after the start of the first time-saving game state, or the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 may be displayed immediately before the end of the first time-saving game state.

When the ending period of the jackpot game ends, a first time-saving game state is started and a time-saving performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(a-1), when the first time saving game state is started, the effect symbol GA is displayed. Furthermore, when the first time-saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are displayed, and the time-saving background image GHy is displayed in place of the background image GHz at the time of entry.

FIG. 61(a-2) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the second time saving game state is started. In addition to each image displayed after transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state, FIG. 61(a-2) also shows each image displayed in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-2), it is assumed that the state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state at time ti1.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), in the low probability non-time saving game state, the normal performance is executed. Specifically, in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state, a loss variation performance in which losing symbols are stopped and displayed is executed. In addition, in the game that shifts to the second time-saving game state, it may be configured such that a loss variation performance that is different from other low probability non-time-saving game states is executed. In the low probability non-time saving game state, the above-mentioned performance symbol GAx is displayed. Furthermore, in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned normal background image GHx is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), when the second time-saving game state is started, the above-mentioned time-saving entry effect is executed. When the above-described time-saving entry performance is started, the entry background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the entry image GT is displayed. Further, in the above time-saving rush effect, the effect pattern GAy is displayed. Furthermore, in the above-described time-saving rush effect, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the pending number image GD are displayed.

In the third embodiment, the time-saving entry effect is executed regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving gaming state is executed (the presence or absence of the number of reservations at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state). As shown in FIG. 61(a-2), the time-saving effect is executed for a predetermined time, and then the time-saving medium effect is executed. The time-saving medium performance is a performance according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a time-saving background image GHy is displayed according to the variation mode of the production symbol GA. When the second time-saving game state is activated, the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed in the time-saving entry effect and the time-saving medium effect.

In addition, in the third embodiment, in the time-saving entry performance when transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the special symbols may be displayed in a variable manner, and the performance symbols GA may be displayed in a variable manner. In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration may be adopted in which the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving medium performance is displayed in the time-saving rush performance. As understood from the above description, the "background image" displayed when transitioning to the "second gaming state" of the present invention is a concept that includes both the entry background image GHz and the time-saving background image GHy.

FIG. 61(a-3) is a diagram for explaining each image displayed when the third time saving game state is started. In addition to each image displayed after transitioning to the third time-saving game state, FIG. 61 (a-3) also shows each image displayed in the low probability non-time-saving game state before transitioning to the third time-saving game state. shown. In the specific example of FIG. 61(a-3), it is assumed that the state shifts to the third time-saving game state at time tj1.

As shown in FIG. 61(a-3), in the low probability non-time saving game state, the normal performance is executed. Specifically, in the game that shifts to the third time-saving game state, a time-saving transition performance in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is executed. As shown in FIG. 61(a-3), when the third time-saving game state is started, the above-mentioned time-saving entry effect is executed. The above-described time-saving rush effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, for example. When the above-described time-saving entry performance is started, the entry background image GHz is displayed in place of the normal background image GHx, and the entry image GT is displayed.

In the time-saving entry performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the performance symbol GAy is displayed. In the above time-saving rush performance, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the pending number image GD are displayed, and the prevention image GQ2 and the warning image GQ2 are not displayed. In the third embodiment, the time-saving entry effect is executed regardless of whether or not the first game in the third time-saving gaming state is executed (the presence or absence of a pending number at the time of transition to the third time-saving gaming state).

By the way, the time-saving entry effect when the first time-saving game state is started is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is less necessary to display the production symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD. On the other hand, the period during which the time-saving rush performance is executed when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started is not the ending period of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is highly necessary to display the production symbol GA, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD.

Let us assume a configuration in which a prevention image GQ2 is displayed in addition to the above-mentioned images (effect image GA, etc.) in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started. With the above configuration, the problem that the number of images displayed on the image display device 31 becomes too large tends to occur. Further, the above-mentioned inconvenience may also occur when a configuration is adopted in which the warning image GQ2 is displayed in the time-saving entry effect when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is started.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, the prevention image GQ2 is used in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started and in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started. A configuration was adopted in which the is not displayed. Furthermore, a configuration is adopted in which the warning image GQ2 is not displayed in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started and in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

In addition, in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started, or in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the small symbol Ga is displayed, and the display of the performance symbol GA is omitted. A configuration may also be used. According to the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the above-mentioned disadvantages is particularly remarkable.

FIG. 61(b-1) and FIG. 61(b-2) are mock diagrams of the screens displayed in the time-saving entry effect when the first time-saving game state is started. Specifically, FIG. 61(b-1) is a simulated diagram of the screen on which the prevention image GQ2 is displayed. Further, FIG. 61(b-2) is a mock diagram of the screen on which the warning image GQ2 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 61(b-1) and FIG. 61(b-2), the entry image GT is displayed on each of the above screens. Furthermore, the right-handed hitting image Gsy is displayed on each of the above screens. In addition, the right-handed image Gsy is displayed on the image display device 31 in the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first time-saving game state.

FIG. 61(b-3) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed in the time-saving rush effect when the second time-saving game state starts. As shown in FIG. 61(b-3), in the time-saving entry performance when the second time-saving game state starts, the entry image GT is displayed. In addition, in the above time-saving rush effect, the right-handed image Gsy, the effect symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, and the reserved number image GD are displayed. In the specific example of FIG. 61(b-3), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0. If the number of reservations is one or more, the above-mentioned reservation image GB is displayed in the time-saving entry effect when the second time-saving game state is started.

Even in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, the rush image GT is displayed similarly to the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the above time-saving entry performance, the right-hitting image Gsy, the performance symbol GAy, the small symbol Ga, the fourth symbol GC, the pending number image GD, and the pending image GB are displayed.

In the third embodiment, various images are displayed on the image display device 31 in addition to the above-mentioned images (entering image GT, etc.) with the operation of the time-saving game state. Each of the other images displayed on the image display device 31 will be described in detail using FIGS. 62 and 63 below.

FIG. 62(a) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 after the second time-saving game state is started. As described above, in the second time-saving game state, various images including the right-handed hitting image Gsy are displayed. Further, when the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed hitting start image GR shown in FIG. 62(a) is displayed. The right-handed hit start image GR is displayed after the above-described entry image GT (see FIG. 61(b-3)) is displayed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which all or part of the display period of the right-handed hitting start image GR and the display period of the entry image GT overlap.

The right-handed game start image GR is an image for informing that the game should be played right-handed, similar to the right-handed game image Gsy. However, the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed larger than the right-handed hitting image Gsy. Further, the right-handed hitting image Gsy is displayed near the upper right end of the screen, whereas the right-handed hitting starting image GR is displayed at approximately the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), the right-handed hit start image GR is displayed with priority over the production symbol GAy (on the near side). According to the above-mentioned right-handed game start image GR, it becomes easy for the player to reliably recognize that he should start playing the right-handed game. Further, the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), and then becomes hidden. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output along with the display of the right-handed hitting start image GR. For example, a voice saying "hit the right hand" is output.

In the third embodiment, the right-hand hitting start image GR is displayed and the sound "Right-handling" is output, regardless of whether or not the game is started immediately after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. That is, even if the number of pending games is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state, the right-handed game image GR is displayed and the voice "right-handed game" is output. Moreover, even if the number of reservations is 0 at the time of transition to the second time-saving game state, the time-saving background image GHy of the time-saving game state is displayed.

In the second time saving game state, predetermined BGM is output. The output of the above BGM starts with the start of the second time-saving game state, regardless of whether or not the game starts immediately after shifting to the second time-saving game state. However, when the non-gaming period continues for a predetermined time, the volume of the gaming machine 1 is changed to "0" and the BGM becomes inaudible.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0 at the time when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second time saving game state is started, the performance symbols GA and the small symbols Ga are stopped and displayed. Note that during the period in which the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed, the effect pattern GA may be hidden (the small pattern Ga is continuously displayed).

When the third time-saving game state is started, as in the case where the second time-saving game state is started, the right-hand hitting image Gsy is displayed, and the right-hand hitting start image GR is displayed, regardless of the presence or absence of the number of reservations. A sound instructing that the game should be played with the right hand is output, BGM for the third time-saving game state starts to be output, and a time-saving background image GHy is displayed. Furthermore, during the period in which the right-handed game start image GR of the third time-saving game state is displayed, the performance symbols GA and the small symbols Ga are displayed. However, immediately after the start of the second time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA and small symbol Ga corresponding to the losing symbol are displayed, whereas immediately after the start of the third time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA corresponding to the time-saving symbol is displayed. and a small pattern Ga are displayed.

FIG. 62(b) is a mock diagram of the screen displayed on the image display device 31 immediately after the second time-saving game state ends and the transition to the low probability non-time-saving game state is made. As shown in FIG. 62(b), immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, the left-handed game image Gsx is displayed. The above-mentioned left-handed game image Gsx is an image that instructs that the game should be played with left-handed game, and is displayed in place of the above-mentioned right-handed game image Gsy. Further, the left-handed game image Gsx is displayed at the same position as the right-handed game image Gsy.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, the left-handed hitting start image GL is displayed. The left-handed game start image GL, like the left-handed game image Gsx, is an image for informing that the game should be played with the left-handed game. However, the left-handed hitting start image GL is displayed larger than the left-handed hitting image Gsx. Further, the left-handed hitting image Gsx is displayed near the upper right end of the screen, whereas the left-handed hitting starting image GL is displayed at approximately the center of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 62(b), the left-handed hit start image GL is displayed with priority over the production symbol GAy (on the near side). According to the left-handed game start image GL described above, it becomes easier for the player to reliably recognize that the game should be started using left-handed games. Further, the left-handed hitting start image GL is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the second time-saving game state ends, and is then hidden. Furthermore, a predetermined sound is output in conjunction with the display of the left-handed batting start image GL. For example, a voice saying "Please return to left-handed batting" is output.

In the third embodiment, regardless of whether the game starts immediately after the second time-saving game state ends, the left-handed hitting start image GL is displayed, and the voice saying "Please return to left-handed hitting" is displayed. Output. That is, even if the number of pending games is 0 at the end of the second time-saving game state, the left-handed game image GL is displayed and the voice "Please return to left-handed game" is output. Furthermore, even if the number of pending games is 0 when the second time-saving game state ends, the normal background image GHx of the non-time-saving game state is displayed.

In the specific example of FIG. 62(a), it is assumed that the number of reservations is 0 at the time when the second time-saving gaming state is started. In the above case, immediately after the second time saving game state is started, the production symbols GA and the small symbols Ga are stopped and displayed.

At the end of the third time-saving game state, as well as at the end of the second time-saving game state, the left-handed game start image GL is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the number of reservations, indicating that the game should be played left-handed. Sound is output and the normal background image GHx is displayed.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram for explaining the result image GP. The above result image GP is an image that, when a period advantageous to the player ends, displays information regarding profits earned during the period. For example, the number of jackpot games and the total number of prize balls paid out during the period from the first winning jackpot game to the transition to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (the above-mentioned advantageous period) are Displayed on the result image GP.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(a), it is assumed that the player wins the jackpot game three times during the advantageous period and 4515 prize balls are paid out. Note that the number of prize balls displayed by the result image GP of the third embodiment does not include the prize balls that are paid out by winning the game balls in the starting hole (13, 14) and the general winning hole 18. However, the prize balls that are paid out after the game balls enter the general winning hole 18 may be included in the number of prize balls displayed on the result image GP.

In addition, even if a jackpot game is won and a prize ball is paid out in the first time-saving game state controlled from the second time-saving game state via the jackpot game, the prize ball displayed by the result image GP is The number does not include the number of prize balls paid out in the second time-saving game state. That is, the result display does not include game information (number of prize balls, number of payouts, etc.) in an advantageous state (second time-saving game state) before the start of the jackpot game.

FIG. 63(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the period during which the result image GP is displayed. In the third embodiment, the result image GP is displayed when the first time saving game state ends.

In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the final game in the first time-saving game state starts at time tk1 and ends at time tk3. In the above case, the first time-saving gaming state ends at time tk3, and the state shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the specific example of FIG. 63(b), it is assumed that the jackpot lottery of the final game in the first time-saving game state is a loss. FIG. 63(b) shows a time tk2 at which the production symbol GAy corresponding to the losing symbol is temporarily stopped in the final game of the first time-saving gaming state.

In the above specific example of FIG. 63(b), the result image GP is displayed immediately after the above-mentioned time tk2. As understood from the above-mentioned FIG. 63(a), during the period in which the result image GP is displayed, the small symbols Ga are displayed and the production symbols GA are hidden. Further, the above result image GP is displayed until the final game in the first time saving game state is completed.

Assume a comparison example in which the result image GP is displayed when the second time-saving game state ends. As described above, the second time-saving game state operates without involving the jackpot game. In addition, in the time-saving game state, game balls do not win in principle in winning holes (first big winning hole 16, second big winning hole 17) other than the starting hole (13, 14) and the general winning hole 18. Therefore, in the comparison example described above, if the jackpot game is not won in the second time-saving game state, the number of jackpot games displayed on the result image GP is "0", and the number of paid out prize balls is "0". ”. When the above result image GP is displayed, some players may experience a problem in which their desire to play the game decreases.

In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving game state ends. FIG. 63(c) is a diagram for explaining images displayed before and after the second time-saving game state ends. In FIG. 63(c), it is assumed that the second time-saving gaming state ends at time tl and the state shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 63(c), the above-mentioned result image GP is not displayed before and after the second time-saving game state ends.

Further, the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs also in the comparative example in which the result image GP is displayed when the third time-saving game state ends. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the third embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving game state ends. FIG. 63(d) is a diagram for explaining images displayed before and after the third time-saving game state ends. In FIG. 63(c), it is assumed that the third time-saving gaming state ends at time tm and the state shifts to a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. As shown in FIG. 63(d), the above-mentioned result image GP is not displayed before and after the third time-saving game state ends. In addition, when the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state end, for example, an image displaying a message "Time saving ends" may be displayed.

FIGS. 64(a) to 64(c) are diagrams for explaining the base value counting period in the third embodiment. As described above, in the counting period, the out counter for base value calculation and the prize ball counter for base calculation are added. That is, the base value is updated during the counting period.

FIG. 64(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the second time-saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the 800th game (variable display of special symbols) in the low probability non-time saving game state is started at time tn1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the 800th game in the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Specifically, it is assumed that the losing symbol is stopped and displayed at time tn2, and the cumulative number of times m reaches the numerical value "800". In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state before time tn2 becomes the counting period. Further, the second time saving game state after time tn2 becomes a non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the second time saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(a), it is assumed that the final game in the second time-saving game state is started at time tn3, and losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that at time tn4, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M2 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". In the above case, after time tn4, the game becomes a low probability non-time saving game state. Furthermore, the counting period is restarted from time tn4.

FIG. 64(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the third time-saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that a game in which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time to1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed at time to2. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state before the time point to2 becomes the counting period. Further, the third time saving game state after the time point to2 becomes a non-counting period.

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the final game of the third time-saving game state is started at time to3, and the losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that at time to4, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0".

In the specific example of FIG. 64(b), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m is not the numerical value "800" in the final game of the third time-saving game state. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving game state starts from time to4. Furthermore, the counting period is restarted from time point to4. In the third embodiment, if the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the final game of the third time-saving game state, the measurement period is restarted in the same way as when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the final game of the third time saving game state, the measurement period is restarted after the small winning game ends.

FIG. 64(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the counting period before and after the third time-saving game state is started. In the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that a game in which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time tp1. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed at time tp2. In the above case, the low probability non-time saving gaming state before time tp2 becomes the counting period. Further, the third time-saving game state after time tp2 becomes a non-counting period (similar to the above-mentioned FIG. 64(b)).

In the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the jackpot game is not won in the third time-saving game state. Further, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the final game of the third time-saving game state is started at time tp3, and losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Specifically, it is assumed that at time tp4, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the remaining number of times M3 is subtracted to the numerical value "0". Furthermore, in the specific example of FIG. 64(c), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times m in the final game of the third time-saving game state is a numerical value "800". In the above case, the second time saving game state starts from time tp4. That is, the non-counting period continues even after time tp4. In addition, when the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game of the third time-saving game state, the non-counting period continues even if the time-saving symbols or small winning symbols are stopped and displayed in the game. Further, as described above, the first time saving game state is a non-counting period. Similarly to the case where the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game of the third time-saving game state, if the cumulative number m is added to the numerical value "800" in the final game of the first time-saving game state, then , the non-counting period continues.

The configurations of the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above can also be appropriately adopted in the third embodiment. For example, the timing for updating the number of games image GE in the third embodiment (at the start of the game) may be at the end of the game, as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, the remaining number of games image GN may be displayed together with the number of games image GE.

In the third embodiment, the timing for displaying the remaining number of times image GN can be set as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the remaining number of times image GN is displayed at the same timing as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 15(a) to 15(d)). In addition, in the third embodiment, there is a possibility of transitioning to the third time-saving game state before the second time-saving game state is started. In the third time saving game state, the remaining number of times image GN may be displayed or may not be displayed.

In the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which it is suggested that the remaining number of times N is left unchanged. Specifically, the remaining number of times image GN and the stationary notification image GI may be displayed in the third embodiment under the same conditions as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, the table scenario S may be set as in the first embodiment. Further, in the third embodiment, a normal mode and a last minute mode may be provided. In the third embodiment, when the second time-saving gaming state is started, each screen (M1 to M7) may be displayed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T of the game in which the remaining number of times N is subtracted to the numerical value "0" may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. Further, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the first game in the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T of the first game in the second time-saving game state is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, each image displayed in the game (such as the shielding image GF) is different from the scenario setting period. The configuration may be different depending on the scenario-unset period. Similarly, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the last game in the second time-saving gaming state may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In a configuration in which the variation pattern determination table T of the last game in the second time-saving gaming state is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period, each image displayed in the game is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. A different configuration may be used. In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T for the first game after the second time-saving gaming state ends may be different or common between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period.

In the third embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T may be different or common between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. In addition, in a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is different between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, it is preferable that the average fluctuation time of the special symbols is shorter in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state. be. Further, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the instant winning effect is more easily executed in the second time saving game state than in the first time saving game state.

In the third embodiment, the area in which the remaining number of times M is displayed may be different or common between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. Further, when the power is turned off/on during the activated period of the third embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which, similarly to the first embodiment, a notification that it is the activated period is provided. Further, in the third embodiment, a second time-saving game state is installed with the same configuration as the first embodiment, the modification shown in FIG. 25(b-1), and the modification shown in FIG. 25(b-2). The configuration may be such that a message indicating that the user is present is displayed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the number of fluctuations that can be performed in the first time-saving gaming state is set to be smaller than the number of fluctuations required to reach the second time-saving gaming state. That is, it has been explained that the first time-saving game state cannot be switched to the second time-saving game state, and when it is in the first time-saving game state, it is not controlled to the second time-saving game state.
However, the number of fluctuations that can be performed in the first time-saving gaming state may be set to a number greater than or equal to the number of fluctuations required to reach the second time-saving gaming state. Then, in the first time-saving gaming state, when the necessary number of changes are executed before entering the second time-saving gaming state, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the first time-saving gaming state to the second time-saving gaming state. It's okay to be hit.
In addition, in the first time-saving game state, if the necessary number of changes are executed until the second time-saving game state is reached, control is performed to the second time-saving game state (overlapping control) when the first time-saving game state is in the first time-saving game state. may be done.
Further, even if the required number of changes are executed in the first time saving game state until the second time saving game state is reached, the control may not be made to the second time saving game state.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that in the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state is not won. That is, it has been explained that when the game is in the first time-saving game state, it is not controlled to the third time-saving game state.
However, even if it is a special symbol lottery in the first time-saving game state, it may be possible to win in the third time-saving game state. That is, a time-saving symbol determination table or a fluctuation pattern determination table may be provided so that the stop symbols in the fluctuation in the first time-saving gaming state include time-saving symbols. If the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving gaming state is the winning of the third time-saving gaming state, even if the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the first time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. good.
In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving game state is the winning of the third time-saving game state, even if the control is performed in the third time-saving game state (overlapping control) when the first time-saving game state is in the first time-saving game state. good.
Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving game state is a winning of the third time-saving game state, it may not be controlled to the third time-saving game state.

Moreover, even if it is a special symbol lottery in the second time-saving game state, it may be possible to win in the third time-saving game state. That is, a time-saving symbol determination table or a variation pattern determination table may be provided so that the stop symbols in the fluctuation in the second time-saving gaming state include time-saving symbols. If the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving gaming state is the winning of the third time-saving gaming state, even if the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the second time-saving gaming state to the third time-saving gaming state. good.
In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving game state is a win in the third time-saving game state, even if the control is performed in the third time-saving game state (duplicate control) when the second time-saving game state is in the third time-saving game state. good.
Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving game state is a winning of the third time-saving game state, it may not be controlled to the third time-saving game state.

Further, the number of fluctuations that can be performed in the third time-saving gaming state may be set to a number greater than or equal to the number of fluctuations required to reach the second time-saving gaming state. Then, in the third time-saving game state, when the necessary number of changes are executed before entering the second time-saving game state, the game state of the gaming machine 1 is switched from the third time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state. It's okay to be hit.
In addition, in the third time-saving game state, if the required number of changes is executed until the second time-saving game state is reached, the control is changed to the second time-saving game state (overlapping control) when in the third time-saving game state. may be done.
Further, in the third time-saving game state, even if the necessary number of fluctuations are performed before entering the second time-saving game state, the control may not be made to the second time-saving game state.
In addition, when switching from the third time saving game state to the second time saving game state, or when being controlled to the second time saving game state while in the third time saving game state, in order to maintain the time saving state, 2. The performance of the time-saving gaming state (probability of winning in the regular symbol lottery, fluctuation time of the regular symbols, time to control the second starting port 14 in the second mode when winning in the regular symbol lottery, etc.), and the third The performance may be the same as that of the time-saving gaming state. In addition, when the third time-saving game state is switched to the second time-saving game state, or when the third time-saving game state is controlled to the second time-saving game state, the performance of the second time-saving game state and the The performance of the 3-time saving game state may be different.

Moreover, even if it is a special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state, it may be possible to win the third time-saving game state. That is, a time-saving symbol determination table or a variation pattern determination table may be provided so that the stop symbols in the variation in the third time-saving gaming state include time-saving symbols. Then, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is the winning of the third time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving gaming state is newly set in which the number of changes according to the winning time-saving symbol can be executed. It's okay.
In addition, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state is a winning of the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state can change the number of times according to the winning time-saving symbol. may not be set.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving game state is a winning of the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state can change the number of times according to the winning time-saving symbol. It may be determined whether or not to be newly set.
For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving gaming state where 100 variations are possible is a win in the third time-saving gaming state where 100 variations are possible, the number of winnings will change. may be newly set to a third time-saving game state in which it is executable. If the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the 3rd time-saving gaming state where 100 variations are possible is a winning of the 3rd time-saving gaming state where 1000 variations are possible, the number of winnings will change. It may be configured such that it is not newly set in the executable third time-saving game state, thereby preventing addition of the executable variation number in the third time-saving game state.
For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving gaming state where 1000 variations are possible is a winning of the 3rd time-saving gaming state where 1000 variations are possible, the number of times won The third time-saving game state may be newly set in which the variation of is executable. If the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the 3rd time-saving gaming state in which 1000 variations are possible is a winning in the 3rd time-saving gaming state in which 100 variations are possible, the number of winnings will change. It may be configured such that the executable third time-saving game state is not newly set, thereby preventing the number of executable fluctuations from falling in the third time-saving game state.
Also, for example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is a winning of the third time-saving gaming state in which the number of fluctuations can be greater than the remaining number of fluctuations, the number of winnings will change. It may be configured such that it is not newly set in the executable third time-saving game state, thereby preventing addition of the executable variation number in the third time-saving game state.
Also, for example, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is a winning of the third time-saving gaming state in which the number of fluctuations can be greater than the remaining number of fluctuations, the number of winnings will change. may be newly set to a third time-saving game state in which it is executable. If the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the third time-saving gaming state is a win in the third time-saving gaming state in which the number of fluctuations is smaller than the remaining number of fluctuations, the number of winnings will be changed. It may be configured to prevent the possible third time-saving game state from being newly set, thereby preventing the number of fluctuations that can be executed in the third time-saving game state from falling.

Further, when the high probability gaming state is controlled, the control may not be performed in either the second time saving gaming state or the third time saving gaming state.

(About the variation pattern of special symbols during time saving)
In the first to third embodiments, it has been explained that the fluctuation pattern determination table is used depending on the state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the game state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated), the special symbols that are stopped and displayed among the jackpot symbols, and the state after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) Depending on the game state, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table used after the jackpot game may be determined.
For example, when a jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated), the gaming state is a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) ), the first fluctuation pattern determination table may be used if the gaming state is a high probability time saving gaming state. In addition, the gaming state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated) is a low probability non-time saving gaming state, and the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) ), the second fluctuation pattern determination table may be used when the gaming state is a low probability time saving gaming state.
Also, for example, when a jackpot game is played (when the jackpot operates), the gaming state is a low probability time saving gaming state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (the jackpot operates If the gaming state (after) is a high probability time saving gaming state, the third fluctuation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, the gaming state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated) is a low probability time saving game state, and the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) When the gaming state is a low probability time saving gaming state, the fourth fluctuation pattern determination table may be used.
For example, when a jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated), the gaming state is a high probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (the jackpot is activated) If the gaming state (after completion) is a high probability time saving gaming state, the fifth fluctuation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, the gaming state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated) is a high probability non-time saving gaming state, and the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) ), the sixth variation pattern determination table may be used when the gaming state is a low probability time saving gaming state.
Also, for example, when a jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated), the gaming state is a high probability time saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (the jackpot is activated) If the gaming state (after) is a high probability time saving gaming state, the seventh variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, the gaming state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated) is a high probability time saving game state, and the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) If the gaming state is a low probability time saving gaming state, the eighth fluctuation pattern determination table may be used.
The first fluctuation pattern determination table to the eighth fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or may be any fluctuation pattern determination table that is different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

In addition, the game state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated), the special symbols that are stopped and displayed among the jackpot symbols, and the game after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) A special symbol variation pattern determination table to be used after the jackpot game may be determined based not only on the state but also on the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot operation ends).
For example, when a jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated), the gaming state is a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) ) is a high-probability time-saving gaming state, and if the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot operation) has not reached the first number, If the first fluctuation pattern determination table is used and the first number of times has been reached, the second fluctuation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, the gaming state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated) is a low probability non-time saving gaming state, and the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) ) is a low-probability time-saving gaming state, and if the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot operation) has not reached the second number, If the third fluctuation pattern determination table is used and the second number of times is reached and the third number of times which is greater than the second number of times has not been reached, the fourth fluctuation pattern determination table is used and the third number of times is reached. If so, the fifth variation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when a jackpot game is played (when the jackpot operates), the gaming state is a low probability time saving gaming state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (the jackpot operates If the gaming state (after) is a high probability time saving gaming state, the sixth variation pattern determination table is may be used. In addition, the gaming state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated) is a low probability time saving game state, and the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) When the gaming state is a low probability time saving gaming state, if the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot operation) has not reached the fourth number, If the seventh variation pattern determination table is used and the fourth number of times has been reached, the eighth variation pattern determination table may be used.
For example, when a jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated), the gaming state is a high probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (the jackpot is activated) If the gaming state (after the end) is a high probability time-saving gaming state, the ninth variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, the gaming state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated) is a high probability non-time saving gaming state, and the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) ) is a low probability time saving gaming state, the 10th variation pattern determination table is used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot operation). It's okay to be hit.
Also, for example, when a jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated), the gaming state is a high probability time saving game state, the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (the jackpot is activated) In the case where the gaming state (after) is a high probability time saving gaming state, if the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot operation) has not reached the fifth number. , the 11th variation pattern determination table is used, and if the 5th number has been reached and the 6th number, which is greater than the 5th number, has not been reached, the 12th variation pattern determination table is used, and the 12th variation pattern determination table is used. If it has been reached, the thirteenth variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, the gaming state when the jackpot game is played (when the jackpot is activated) is a high probability time saving game state, and the special symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot game ends (after the jackpot is activated) When the gaming state is a low probability time saving gaming state, if the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (after the end of the jackpot operation) has not reached the seventh number, If the 14th variation pattern determination table is used and the 7th number has been reached and the 8th number which is greater than the 7th number has not been reached, the 15th variation pattern determination table is used and the 8th number has not been reached. In this case, the 16th variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first fluctuation pattern determination table to the 16th fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or any fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

Further, a plurality of types of special symbols may be provided that are stopped and displayed as small winning symbols. Then, the game state when the small winning game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member operates), the special symbol that is stopped and displayed among the small winning symbols, and the special symbol executed after the small winning game ends. Based on the number of fluctuations, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table to be used after the small winning game may be determined.
For example, when the small winning game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member operates), the gaming state is a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and when the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning game ends. If the number of variations of the special symbol executed later has not reached the first number, the first variation pattern determination table is used, and if it has reached the first number, the second variation pattern determination table is used. may be used. In addition, when the small winning game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member operates), the gaming state is a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and when the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning game ends. If the number of variations of the special symbol executed later has not reached the second number, the third variation pattern determination table is used, and if the number of variations of the special symbol executed later has not reached the second number, and the number of variations exceeds the second number, the number of variations reaches the third number. If not, the fourth fluctuation pattern determination table may be used, and if the third number of times has been reached, the fifth fluctuation pattern determination table may be used.
For example, when the small winning game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member operates), the game state is a low probability time saving game state and the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning game The sixth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the completion of. In addition, if the game state when the small winning game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member operates) is a low probability time saving game state and the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, after the small winning game ends. If the number of variations of the executed special symbol has not reached the fourth number, the seventh variation pattern determination table is used, and if the number has reached the fourth number, the eighth variation pattern determination table is used. may be used.
For example, when the small winning game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member operates), the gaming state is a high probability non-time saving game state, and if the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning The ninth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the game. In addition, when the small winning game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member operates), the gaming state is a high probability non-time saving gaming state, and when the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning game is The tenth variation pattern determination table may be used regardless of the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end.
For example, when the small winning game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member operates), the gaming state is a high probability time saving game state and the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. If the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end has not reached the 5th number, the 11th variation pattern determination table is used, and if the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end has reached the 5th number and the 6th number is greater than the 5th number. If the number has not reached the sixth number of times, the twelfth variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the sixth number has been reached, the 13th variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the small winning game is played (when the specific area opening/closing member operates), the gaming state is a high probability time saving game state and the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, after the small winning game ends. If the number of variations of the executed special symbol has not reached the 7th number, the 14th variation pattern determination table is used, and if the number of variations of the executed special symbol has reached the 7th number and the 8th number is greater than the 7th number. If not, the 15th variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the 8th number has been reached, the 16th variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first fluctuation pattern determination table to the 16th fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or a fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

Further, even if different fluctuation pattern determination tables are used in the case of being controlled to the first time-saving gaming state, the case of being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, and the case of being controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, respectively. good.
Furthermore, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table used in the second time-saving game state may be determined based on the game state of the gaming machine 1 when controlled to the second time-saving game state. For example, if the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 when being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state is a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, even if the first fluctuation pattern determination table is used in the second time-saving gaming state. good. Further, if the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 when being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state is a low probability time-saving gaming state, the second fluctuation pattern determination table may be used in the second time-saving gaming state. .
The first fluctuation pattern determination table and the second fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or a fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

Furthermore, when controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the second time-saving gaming state is determined based on the number of variations of the special symbol executed in the second time-saving gaming state. It's okay.
For example, in the case of being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, regardless of which gaming state the gaming machine 1 was in when being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, the special If the number of variations of the symbol has not reached the first number, the first variation pattern determination table is used, and if the number of variations has reached the first number, the second variation pattern determination table is used. good.
The first fluctuation pattern determination table and the second fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or a fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

In addition, when controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, it is based on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 when being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state and the number of variations of the special symbol executed in the second time-saving gaming state. Accordingly, a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the second time-saving gaming state may be determined.
For example, when the second time-saving game state is controlled in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, if the number of variations of the special symbol executed in the second time-saving game state has not reached the first number, , the first fluctuation pattern determination table may be used, and if the first number of times has been reached, the second fluctuation pattern determination table may be used.
Also, for example, when the second time-saving game state is controlled to be a low-probability time-saving game state, and the number of variations of the special symbol executed in the second time-saving game state has not reached the second number of times, The third variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the second number of times has been reached, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first fluctuation pattern determination table to the fourth fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or may be any fluctuation pattern determination table different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

Further, when controlled to the third time-saving game state, a fluctuation pattern determination table for the special symbols used in the third time-saving game state may be determined based on a special symbol that is stopped and displayed among the time-saving symbols. .
For example, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed, regardless of which gaming state the gaming machine 1 was in when being controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, even if the first fluctuation pattern determination table is used. good. In addition, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed, regardless of which gaming state the gaming machine 1 was in when being controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, even if the second fluctuation pattern determination table is used. good.
The first fluctuation pattern determination table and the second fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or a fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

Also, based on the special symbols that are stopped and displayed among the time-saving symbols and the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the special symbols used in the third time-saving gaming state A decision table may be defined.
For example, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed in a low probability non-time saving gaming state when controlled to the third time saving gaming state, the first fluctuation pattern determination table may be used. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in a low probability non-time saving gaming state when controlled to the third time saving gaming state, the second fluctuation pattern determination table may be used.
Further, for example, when the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed in a low probability time saving game state when controlled to the third time saving game state, the third fluctuation pattern determination table may be used. Further, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in the low probability time saving game state when controlled to the third time saving game state, the fourth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first fluctuation pattern determination table to the fourth fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or may be any fluctuation pattern determination table different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

Further, a variation pattern determination table used in the third time-saving game state may be determined based on the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the third time-saving game state.
For example, regardless of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed among the time-saving symbols and the game state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the third time-saving gaming state is the first number. If the first variation pattern determination table has not been reached, the first variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the first variation pattern has been reached, the second variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first fluctuation pattern determination table and the second fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or a fluctuation pattern different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

Also, based on the special symbols that are stopped and displayed among the time-saving symbols, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbols executed in the third time-saving gaming state. Accordingly, a fluctuation pattern determination table used in the third time-saving gaming state may be determined.
For example, if the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state when controlled to the third time saving gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the third time saving gaming state is the first If the number of times has not been reached, the first fluctuation pattern determination table may be used, and if the first number of times has been reached, the second fluctuation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state when controlled to the third time saving gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the third time saving gaming state is If the second number has not been reached, the third variation pattern determination table is used, and if the second number has been reached and the third number, which is greater than the second number, has not been reached, the fourth variation pattern determination table is used. If the pattern determination table is used and the third number of times has been reached, a fifth variation pattern determination table may be used.
For example, if the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed in a low probability time-saving gaming state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the third time-saving gaming state Regardless, the sixth variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, when the special symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in the low probability time-saving gaming state when controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed in the third time-saving gaming state is the fourth number. If it has not reached the fourth number of times, the seventh variation pattern determination table may be used, and if the fourth number has been reached, the eighth variation pattern determination table may be used.
The first fluctuation pattern determination table to the eighth fluctuation pattern determination table are different fluctuation pattern determination tables, and may be any of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tables, or may be any fluctuation pattern determination table that is different from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination table. It may also be a decision table.

(About medium probability game state)
Next, the medium probability game state will be explained.
In this embodiment, it has been explained that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state. Here, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the first time-saving gaming state, when being controlled to the second time-saving gaming state, or when being controlled to the third time-saving gaming state, the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state are controlled. The game state may be controlled to have a jackpot winning probability that is different from any of the probability game states. More specifically, the game state may be controlled to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than a low probability gaming state, and a lower probability of winning a jackpot than a high probability gaming state. Hereinafter, a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in a low probability gaming state and lower in probability of winning a jackpot than in a high probability gaming state may be referred to as a medium probability gaming state. The probability of winning a jackpot in the medium probability gaming state may be any value, but is, for example, 1/100.

In the medium probability game state, the winning probability in the general lottery may be made different from both the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state. For example, in the medium probability game state, the winning probability in the regular lottery may be set to 2/20, which is higher than in the non-time-saving game state and lower than in the time-saving game state. On the other hand, in the medium probability game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is the same as in the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state. In addition, in the medium probability game state, the time for controlling the second starting port 14 in the second mode when winning in the general lottery is made the same as in the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state.

Further, the number of time saving times when a specific jackpot symbol is won may be varied depending on whether the game machine 1 is controlled to a low probability non-time saving gaming state or a medium probability gaming state. For example, as mentioned above, when the special symbol A3 of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed in the low probability non-time saving game state, the number of time savings in the first time saving game state becomes 100 times. On the other hand, when the special symbol A3 among the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed in the medium probability game state, the number of time savings in the first time savings game state may be 150 times.

Furthermore, when the time saving gaming state ends, the gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in the medium probability gaming state. In this case, a unique background image GH may be displayed in the medium probability game state. Furthermore, when the unique background image GH is displayed, a special effect that suggests or informs that a medium probability gaming state is in effect may be executed. An example of the special effect is an effect that displays the text "CHANCE STAGE."

Furthermore, when the gaming machine 1 is in the time-saving gaming state and in the medium-probability gaming state, if a player wins in the general lottery, the time for controlling the second starting port 14 in the second mode is as described above. , the same time as in the time-saving gaming state. In this case, an instruction effect may be executed that instructs to shoot the game ball to the right side in the game area 10a. Examples of the instruction effects include displaying the above-mentioned right-handed hitting image and audio notification of right-handed hitting.

Further, if a jackpot is won in the medium probability gaming state, the control may be made to be in the high probability gaming state regardless of which jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, multiple types of the number of fluctuations in the medium probability gaming state may be set. To give an example, when the low probability non-time saving gaming state is controlled to the third time saving gaming state, the case where it is controlled to the first medium probability gaming state and the case where it is controlled to the second medium probability gaming state The number of fluctuations in the first medium probability gaming state may be 20 times, while the number of fluctuations in the second medium probability gaming state may be 1000 times. In this case, the period in which the second medium probability game state is controlled to be the high probability game state when a jackpot is won is longer than the first medium probability game state.
Furthermore, when a specific variation is executed, the game may be controlled to a medium probability gaming state. For example, when a variable performance in which a SPSP reach performance is executed, which is a variable performance in which a jackpot is not won, the variable performance may be controlled to a medium probability gaming state.
Further, in the medium probability game state, an effect pattern GA having a unique display mode may be used. Further, in the medium probability gaming state, a pending image GB having a unique display mode may be used.

<Fourth embodiment>
FIGS. 65(a) and 65(b) are diagrams for explaining the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, instead of the above-mentioned starting winning designation command, first information J1 related to the execution of the jackpot game specified by the preliminary determination of the determination information, and a second game state specified by the preliminary determination of the determination information. An information command indicating the second information J2 related to the transition is transmitted from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) to the production control board 120 (sub CPU 121). The above information commands are generated and transmitted by the main CPU 111 when a starting prize is won during a period in which the number of reservations is less than the upper limit value.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the first information J1 and the second information J2. For example, when a special symbol determination random number value that is determined to be a "jackpot" is acquired at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the first information J1 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121. When the sub CPU 121 receives the above first information J1, it can grasp that a jackpot game will be executed thereafter.

Further, when the random number value for special symbol determination that is determined to be a "lose" is acquired at the time of starting winning, an information command indicating the second information J2 is transmitted to the sub CPU 121. The above-mentioned second information J2 indicates the cumulative number of times m in the game executed by the starting winning. When the sub CPU 121 receives the above second information J2, the sub CPU 121 informs that the result of the game executed due to the starting winning that triggered the generation of the second information J2 is a "loss", and that The cumulative number m can be grasped. The sub CPU 121 of the fourth embodiment determines a prefetch effect according to the information (first information J1, second information J2) indicated by the information command. The above-mentioned prefetch effects include specific effects X1 and specific effects X2, which will be described later.

FIG. 65(b) is a diagram for explaining specific effects X1 and specific effects X2. The specific effect X1 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the first information J1. When the specific effect X1 is determined, the aspect (color) of the pending image GB corresponding to the game executed by the starting winning (game winning the jackpot) that is the trigger for generating the information command indicating the first information J1 is changed to the corresponding one. Changes before the start of the game (same as the above-mentioned pending change effect). According to the above configuration, before the game in which the player wins the jackpot, the fact that the player will win the jackpot is notified in advance by the specific performance X1.

The specific effect X2 is determined by lottery when the sub CPU 121 receives an information command indicating the second information J2. Specifically, upon receiving the information command indicating the second information J2, the sub CPU 121 determines that the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (for example, a numerical value of "790"). Determine whether or not. If the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the sub CPU 121 determines the specific performance X2 by lottery. On the other hand, when the cumulative number m specified from the second information J2 is less than the threshold, the sub CPU 121 does not determine the specific effect X2.

When the specific effect X2 is determined, the aspect of the pending image GB corresponding to the game executed by the starting winning, which is the generation trigger of the information command indicating the second information J2, changes before the start of the game (as described above). (Same as pending change performance). According to the above specific performance X2, the player is informed that the number of games until the second time-saving game state is relatively small. Note that the mode of the pending image GB in which the specific effect X1 is executed and the mode of the pending image GB in which the specific effect X2 is executed may be different or may be the same.

In the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when transitioning to the second time-saving game state, a time-saving entry effect is executed to notify that fact. In the time-saving rush effect of the fourth embodiment, images common to each image displayed in the time-saving rush effect of the first embodiment are displayed. Specifically, in the time-saving entry performance, in addition to the entry image GT, a performance symbol GA, a small symbol Ga, and a fourth symbol GC are displayed. In addition, in the time-saving rush performance in the fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the performance symbols GA, small symbols Ga, and fourth symbols GC are displayed. The fourth embodiment described above also provides the same effects as the first embodiment.

<Modified example>
Each of the above forms can be modified in various ways. Specific modes of modification are illustrated below. Two or more aspects arbitrarily selected from the examples below may be combined as appropriate.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the update timing of the numbers in the number of games image GE and remaining number of games image GN can be changed as appropriate. For example, the numbers in the game count image GE and the remaining count image GN may be updated at the start of the game. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the numbers in the game count image GE are updated at the start of the game, and the numbers in the remaining count image GN are updated at the end of the game. Similarly, a configuration may be adopted in which the numbers in the game count image GE are updated at the end of the game, and the numbers in the remaining count image GN are updated at the start of the game.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, in the customer waiting state (see FIG. 19(a)) before the start of the first game in the second time-saving game state, the right It is also possible to have a configuration in which hitting is instructed. For example, the right-handed game image GS1 may be displayed on condition that the touch sensor 11a detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11. Alternatively, the right-handed game image GS1 may be displayed on the condition that the touch sensor 11a does not detect that the player has touched the operating handle 11.

(3) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the configuration for notifying that the second time-saving gaming state has been activated can be changed as appropriate. For example, instead of displaying the number of games image GE shown in FIG. 23(c) in the activated period, the actual number of games from the jackpot game may be displayed in the activated period. That is, in the activated period, the number of the number of games image GE may be added and displayed from "1800". In the above configuration, when the number of the number of games image GE is "1800" or more, it is substantially notified that the activation period is over. Note that even when the above configuration is adopted, a configuration in which the number of games image GE is hidden in the second time-saving game state is preferable.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the time to display the stationary notification image GI is not limited to the beginning of the game. Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed in the middle of the game or in the final stage of the game. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed when the reach effect is started, or a configuration in which the stationary notification image GI is displayed during the fixed period. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery determines at what point in the game the stationary notification image GI is to be displayed. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the stationary notification image GI is continuously displayed over a plurality of games (for example, 10 times).

(5) In each of the above embodiments, in games where the stationary notification image GI can be displayed (the 51st and 101st games), the stationary notification is always displayed if the predetermined display condition (N≦200) is satisfied. Image GI was displayed. In the above configuration, in a game in which the stationary notification image GI can be displayed, the stationary notification image GI is displayed on the condition that a predetermined display condition is satisfied and a winner is won in a predetermined lottery. You can also use it as

Further, during a period in which the remaining number of times N is left unchanged, the fixed notification image GI may be displayed regardless of the current value of the remaining number of times N, provided that the lottery has been won. In the above configuration, when the deferral notification image GI is displayed (when deferral is announced), the remaining number of times N may be displayed to directly notify the number of games up to the second time-saving gaming state, or the remaining It may be configured such that the number of games played up to the second time-saving game state is suggested without directly displaying the number of times N. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which it is suggested whether or not the remaining number of times N will be left unchanged.

For example, assume a configuration including a predetermined lamp (hereinafter referred to as a "specific lamp"). The above-mentioned specific lamps are usually lit in a manner according to the current performance. On the other hand, in a predetermined game (for example, the first game after the power is turned on), the first special mode is determined depending on whether the remaining number of times N is left unchanged and the current value of the remaining number of times N. Alternatively, the light may be lit in a second special mode. Specifically, when the remaining number of times N is left unchanged, the specific lamp is more likely to be lit in the first special mode or the second special mode than when the remaining number of times N is not set. Also, if the remaining number of times N is left unchanged and is less than a predetermined value (for example, the number "200"), the remaining number of times N is left unchanged and is larger than the predetermined value. 2. A specific lamp is likely to light up in a special mode. According to the above configuration, the interestingness of notification as to whether or not the remaining number of times N has been left unchanged is improved.

(6) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a plurality of types (for example, six types) of setting values with different ball output rates may be provided. Specifically, the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can change the setting values of the gaming machine 1 by performing a predetermined setting changing operation. A jackpot determination table is provided for each set value, and when the set value is changed, the probability of winning the jackpot changes.

In the above modification, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that suggests a setting value (hereinafter referred to as a "suggestive effect") can be executed. However, in a configuration in which it is possible to execute a performance in which one type of setting value is specified, there is a possibility that the gambling spirit of the player will be significantly stimulated. In consideration of the above circumstances, in the suggestion effect, it is reported that there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of a plurality of types of setting values among all the setting values.

For example, assume a configuration in which six types of setting values from setting value "1" to setting value "6" are provided. In the above configuration, there is a suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is more likely to be an odd number (1, 3, 5) than an even number (2, 4, 6), and an even number is more likely to be set than an odd number (2, 4, 6). A possible configuration is to provide a suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is likely to be the same. Further, a suggestion effect may be provided that suggests that the setting value "4-6" (high setting) is more likely than the setting value "1-3" (low setting). Further, a suggestion effect may be provided in which the set value "6" is strongly (but not definitely) determined. When the above modification is adopted, the number of games up to the second time-saving game state is definitely notified by the remaining number of times image GN, whereas the set value is not definitely notified by the suggestion effect. However, in the modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which a suggestion effect in which one set value is determined is executed.

(7) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the time-saving game state to which the game enters after the jackpot game may be changed in accordance with the jackpot symbol as well as the game state in which the jackpot is won. For example, assume a configuration in which a time-saving game state A and a time-saving game state B, which is more advantageous than the time-saving game state A (the number of games played is larger), are provided. In addition, in the above configuration, when winning a jackpot game in a non-time-saving gaming state, the probability is about 99% to shift to the time-saving gaming state A, and the probability is about 1% to shift to the time-saving gaming state B. Furthermore, when winning a jackpot game in the time-saving game state A, the probability is about 50% to shift to the time-saving game state B, and the probability is about 50% to shift to the time-saving game state B. Further, if a jackpot game is won in the time-saving game state B, the game shifts to the time-saving game state B with a probability of about 100%.

Moreover, in the above modification, the most advantageous time-saving game state may be adopted as the second time-saving game state. For example, in the above-mentioned specific example, a configuration may be considered in which the time-saving game state B is adopted as the second time-saving game state. However, with the above configuration, if a jackpot is won just before the start of the second time-saving gaming state, some players may feel dissatisfied. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the above disadvantages are suppressed. A specific example of this configuration will be described below.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a normal mode and a last-minute mode are provided as presentation modes for the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state. In the last-minute mode of the modified example, a performance that congratulates the winning of the jackpot game that shifts to time-saving gaming state B is executed, while a performance that congratulates that the jackpot game that shifts to time-saving gaming state A wins is not performed. . Furthermore, in the modified example, the effect pattern GA is different between the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode, and the background image GH is also different.

For example, in the normal mode, the remaining number of times image GN is displayed, and in the immediately preceding mode, a special remaining number of times image GNx is displayed in place of the remaining number of times image GN. The special remaining number of times image GNx displays, for example, a message such as "If you endure the remaining time X, you will enter time saving B!" (X indicates the number of games until the second time saving game state). Furthermore, in the immediate mode, an image of a friendly character and an enemy character facing each other is displayed, and in each game, an effect in which each character fights is executed. In the immediately preceding mode of the modification, in a game in which a jackpot is won that moves to the time-saving game state B, an effect in which the ally character wins is executed, and a message saying "Congratulations!" is displayed. On the other hand, in a game in which a jackpot is won that shifts to the time-saving game state A, an effect in which the ally character loses is executed, and a message "Unfortunate" is displayed.

The above-described modifications also provide the same effects as the above-described embodiments. However, in this modification as well, similarly to the above-mentioned embodiments, the variation pattern determination table is not switched in accordance with the number of games played during the scenario unset period. If the above-mentioned effects in the previous mode (effects in which characters fight, etc.) are executed without switching the variation pattern determination table from the normal mode, an inconvenience may arise in that an appropriate time for executing the effects cannot be secured. Therefore, also in the modified example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the last-minute mode is not provided during the scenario-unset period.

(8) In the first embodiment described above, the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the game in the non-time saving game state that transitions to the second time saving game state (hereinafter simply referred to as "transition game") is set during the scenario setting period (Tn2 or Tnc) and the scenario unset period (Tn1). In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state is made different between the scenario setting period (Ts or Tax) and the scenario non-setting period (Tbx). That is, in the first embodiment, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state (including the transition game and the first game of the second time-saving gaming state), the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be referred to is based on the scenario setting period and the scenario not set. We adopted different structures depending on the period.

However, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, a common variation pattern determination table may be referred to in the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, in a configuration in which the variable pattern determination table Tn1 is referred to in a transition game in a scenario-unset period, the variable pattern determination table Tn1 may also be referred to in a transition game in a scenario-set period. In addition, in the above structure, it is sufficient that the variation pattern determination table Tn1 is included in the variation pattern determination table T that can be referred to in the transition game of the scenario setting period, and a configuration may be adopted in which a variable pattern determination table other than the variation pattern determination table Tn1 can be referred to. According to the above configuration, at the start of the second time-saving gaming state, the number of variable pattern determination tables that can be referred to is different between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. It has the advantage of being easy to reduce.

It should be noted that the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a completely common variation pattern determination table that can be referred to at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. According to the above configuration, the effect of reducing the number of variation pattern determination tables is particularly remarkable.

(9) In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the predetermined number of games in the second time-saving game state is configured to be variable between the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. For example, between the scenario setting period (Ts, Tax) and the scenario non-setting period (Tbx), the fluctuation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state is variable.

However, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common configuration of a variation pattern determination table that can be referred to in the predetermined number of games in the second time-saving gaming state. For example, the variation pattern determination table Tbx that can be referred to in the first game of the second time-saving game state may have a common configuration in the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period. In addition, the scenario setting period and the scenario non-setting period may have a common variation pattern determination table that can be referenced in the 900th (remaining 100) game of the second time-saving game state, or the last of the second time-saving game state. The variation pattern determination table that can be referenced in the games may be common.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state may be emphasized. For example, in a game where the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "5" or more, the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in white, and in a game where the remaining number of times M is smaller than the numerical value "5", the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in red. is possible. Further, the remaining number of times M at which the emphasis of the remaining number of times M is started may be the same or different between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. For example, in the first time-saving game state (100 games), the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in white for games where the remaining number of times M is greater than or equal to the numerical value "5", and the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in white for games where the remaining number of times M is smaller than the numerical value "5". The numbers in the time saving image GJ are displayed in red. On the other hand, in the second time-saving game state (1000 games), the number of the remaining time-saving image GJ is displayed in white for games where the remaining number of times M is the numerical value "10" or more, and the number of the remaining time saving image GJ is displayed in white in the game where the remaining number of times M is smaller than the numerical value "10". It is good also as a structure which displays the number of time saving image GJ in red.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, in addition to the opportunity of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot game may be executed when a game ball passes through a specific area. Further, in the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball can win a prize in a specific area in a small winning game (a so-called 1 type 2 type gaming machine may be used). That is, the configuration may be such that when a small hit is won and the game ball lands in a specific area in the small win game, the jackpot game is executed. In the above modification, the remaining number of times N is not initialized when a small hit is won, but the remaining number of times N is initialized when a game ball enters a specific area. In this case, in a small winning game, the movable ball can be placed in a state where it is possible to win a game ball in a specific area, and after the small winning game is finished, it is not possible to win a game ball in a specific area. A specific area opening/closing member (not shown) may be provided.

In addition, in this modified example, a high probability game state is not provided, and the probability of winning the jackpot differs between when the game ball wins in the first starting port 13 and when the game ball wins in the second starting port 14. are common. Further, the probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the second starting opening 14 is higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, and the winning probability of a small winning when a game ball enters the first starting opening 13 does not result in winning a small winning. Furthermore, in the time-saving gaming state, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 14. With the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state.

In the gaming machine of this modification, if the number of reserved second special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "remaining reservation") is one or more at the time the time-saving gaming state ends, in the game after the time-saving gaming state ends. There is also a high probability that you will win a small prize. Specifically, in the non-time-saving gaming state immediately after the time-saving gaming state ends, a jackpot game can be executed with high probability over a maximum of four games.

In the above configuration, the above-mentioned first end effect (see FIG. 45(a)) may be executed during the period in which the game is executed with the remainder pending. In addition, the first end effect is executed during the period in which the game is executed with the remaining time pending immediately after the first time-saving gaming state ends, and in the period in which the game is executed with the remaining time pending immediately after the second time-saving gaming state ends. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the end effect is not executed. That is, "at the end of the second gaming state (at the time of ending)" of the present invention includes a period during which the game is executed with the remaining game on hold. Note that depending on the number of games played in the second time-saving game state, the probability of not winning the jackpot game in the second time-saving game state may be about 0% (the probability of winning is about 100%). In the above case, even if the design is such that the end effect is not executed in the second time-saving game state, it is rare that the final game in the second time-saving game state is executed. Therefore, it is difficult to cause a problem in which the player feels dissatisfied because the end effect is not executed in the final game of the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the 1st and 2nd type gaming machines, the transition determination process for updating the remaining number of times N (S224 in FIG. 32, S242 in FIG. 35(a)) is the small winning game process, as in the first embodiment described above. A configuration executed after (S187 in FIG. 32) is preferable. According to the above configuration, if the game ball does not enter the specific area in the small hit game process, the remaining number of times N is updated in the transition determination process, while if the game ball enters the specific area, the jackpot game is executed, the transition determination process can be omitted. Further, in the gaming machines of one type and two types, a configuration may be adopted in which the first time-saving game state is transferred to the second time-saving game state via a gap game. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the number of times the gap game is played is four times. Further, in the above-described gap game, it is preferable to have a configuration in which a performance different from the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode is executed.

(12) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state via the gap game, the above-mentioned left-handed hitting image GL may not be displayed. Specifically, when the game is played according to the normal procedure, the performance mode when moving from the first time saving game state to the second time saving game state via the gap game is the time saving mode B. In the above case, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the left-handed game image GL is not displayed when transitioning to the gap game (non-time-saving game state).

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off in the gap game. Therefore, even if the production mode before and after the gap game does not change in the time saving mode B, it is preferable that the right-handed image GS is hidden in the gap game.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, a process for determining whether or not the start condition for the second time-saving gaming state is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the "first determination process") and other conditions for the transition of the gaming state (for example, a high The process (hereinafter referred to as "second determination process") for determining whether or not the (starting condition for the probability gaming state) is satisfied may be included in a common module or may be included in separate modules.

By the way, conventionally, in a jackpot game, on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area in the jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "V winning"), after the jackpot game, a predetermined number of times (for example, A gaming machine (so-called "V-ST machine") that can shift to a high-probability (time-saving) gaming state ("120 times") is known. The present invention may be adopted in the above gaming machines. In the above gaming machine, in each game, a process of updating the remaining number of times N until the second time-saving game state, a process of determining the remaining number of times N after the update (hereinafter referred to as "first determination process"), and a high probability game state are performed. A process of updating the remaining number of times until the end and a process of determining the remaining number of times after the update (hereinafter referred to as "second determination process") are executed. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the second determination process is executed after the first determination process. Assume a configuration in which the first determination process is executed after the second determination process. In the above configuration, in the high probability gaming state, there is a problem that the remaining number of times N until the second time saving gaming state is updated.

(15) When the present invention is adopted in the above-mentioned V-ST machine, even if the V-win, which is the condition for transitioning to the high-probability gaming state, is not achieved in a jackpot game, the V-win will be made afterwards. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the game mode shifts to a time-saving game state with the same number of games as in the case. For example, in a configuration in which when you win V in a jackpot game, you move to a 120-time high-probability time-saving game state, you can also consider a configuration in which you move to a 120-time low-probability time-saving game state even if you do not win V in the jackpot game. .

In addition, in this modification, it is preferable that the performance mode after the jackpot game is the same regardless of whether or not there is a V prize in the jackpot game. In the above configuration, the performance mode after the jackpot game is the same in the case of transitioning to the high probability time saving gaming state and the case of transitioning to the low probability time saving gaming state. In addition, in the above modified example, each screen that is displayed is the same in the case where the power is cut off and restored in the high probability time saving gaming state and when the power is cut off and restored in the low probability time saving gaming state. , it is preferable to have a configuration in which the production mode after return is common. That is, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the presence or absence of a V win in the immediately preceding jackpot game cannot be detected from the screen before and after the power is turned off. In addition, also in this modification, the player may be able to select the production mode in the time-saving gaming state, similarly to the first embodiment. Furthermore, when a power outage occurs during a jackpot game, or when a power outage occurs during a time-saving game state, the time-saving game state may be controlled to a common performance mode after recovery.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, when the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period of time, the demo screen is displayed. However, when the customer waiting screen Mx is displayed, it is preferable that the demo screen is not displayed.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, at the start of the second time-saving game state, the shielding image GF, the entering image GT, and the right-hand hitting image GS3 (starting image) are displayed. The timing at which the above-mentioned starting image is displayed may be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 66(a) is a diagram for explaining the display timing of the start image in the modified example. FIG. 66(a) shows the period during which each start image is displayed. In addition, FIG. 66(a) shows a transition game that transitions to the second time-saving game state, a fixed period in the transition game, and a period during which the start image is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It will be done. In FIG. 66(a), the start time tx of the second time saving game state is shown. In the modified example, as in the first embodiment described above, the second time-saving game state is started when the transition game confirmation period ends.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), immediately after the transition game is started, the display of the shielding image GF is started. Moreover, the shielding image GF is continuously displayed until the fixed period starts, and becomes hidden at the start of the fixed period. As shown in FIG. 66(a), the entry image GT is displayed during the transition game confirmation period. Thereafter, when the confirmation period ends and the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the rush image GT is hidden and the right-handed game image GS3 (large right-handed game image GS) is displayed. The above right-handed image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then becomes hidden.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, the fixed period in each game is approximately 0.5 seconds. If the fixed period of the transition game in this modification is configured to be about 0.5 seconds, there is a problem that the time for displaying the entry image GT is too short. In consideration of the above circumstances, this modification adopts a configuration in which the fixed period is extended in the transition game from the game immediately before the transition game. Specifically, the confirmation period of the transition game is extended to about 5 seconds. According to the above configuration, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed.

However, in the first embodiment described above, in order to suppress the inconvenience that harms the fairness of the game, the time for one game (variable period + fixed period) does not change depending on the number of games during the scenario unset period. It was adopted. In consideration of the above circumstances, also in this modification, it is preferable that the fixed period is extended in the transition game in the scenario setting period, while the fixed period does not change in the transition game in the scenario unset period.

FIG. 66(b-1) and FIG. 66(b-2) are diagrams for explaining the display period of the start image in another modification. In the specific example of FIG. 66(b-1) and FIG. 66(b-2), it is assumed that the transition game ends at time tx and the transition to the second time-saving game state occurs. Specifically, FIG. 66(b-1) assumes a case where the number of pending items is one or more at time tx. On the other hand, FIG. 66(b-2) assumes that the number of reservations is 0 at time tx. Although explained in detail below, in this modification, the period during which the start image is displayed changes depending on the presence or absence of the number of reservations at the start time tx of the second time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 66(b-1), if the number of reservations is one or more at time tx, the first game in the second time-saving game state is started immediately after time tx. In the above case, the right-handed game image GS3 is displayed for a predetermined period of time immediately after the second time-saving game state is started. Thereafter, the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the entry image GT is displayed. The above entry image GT is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

As shown in FIG. 66(b-2), if the number of reservations is 0 at time tx, the customer waiting state is started immediately after the second time-saving game state is started. In the above case, when the customer waiting state starts, the right hit image GS3 is displayed. In this modification, the right-handed game image GS3 is displayed until the customer waiting state ends, and when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed game image GS3 is hidden. Thereafter, the shielding image GF is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the entry image GT is displayed. The entry image GT is displayed for a predetermined period of time. As understood from the above description, in the modified example, the timing at which the right-handed image GS3 is displayed changes depending on whether there is a pending number at time tx.

In addition, in the above modification, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special symbol changes. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the right-handed hit image GS3 is continued when the first special symbol changes.

FIG. 66(c) is a diagram for explaining the display period of the start image in another modification. In the specific example of FIG. 66(c), it is assumed that the transition game ends at time tx and transitions to the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the above specific example, it is assumed that the number of reservations at time tx is 0. As shown in FIG. 66(c), in the modification, the shielding image GF is displayed in the transition game, and then the entry image GT is displayed. Further, when the transition game ends and the customer waiting state starts, the right-handed game image GS3 is displayed.

In addition, at the start time tx of the second time-saving game state, if the number of pending games is one or more, a customer waiting state is established from the end of the transition game until the start of the first game of the second time-saving game state. do not have. In the above case, there is a problem that the right-handed image GS3 cannot be displayed. Considering the above circumstances, in this modified example, if the number of pending items is 1 or more at the start time tx of the second time-saving gaming state, the configuration is designed to invalidate the pending item (set the number of pending items to 0). May be adopted. In the above configuration, the customer waiting state is always started at the start of the second time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed. Note that the configuration in which the number of reservations is set to 0 at the start of the second time-saving gaming state is not limited to this modification, but may be adopted in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and other modifications.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), when the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed game image GS3 is hidden. In addition, in the above modification, the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed from the start of the customer waiting state until the second special symbol changes. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the right-handed hit image GS3 is continued when the first special symbol changes.

Furthermore, the timing at which the start image is displayed is not limited to the above modification. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the shielding image GF and the entry image GT are displayed in the transition game, and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Similarly, the shielding image GF is displayed in the transition game, then the right-handed image GS3 is displayed during the confirmation period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may also be a configuration. It may be configured such that the entry image GT is displayed in the transition game, and then the shielding image GF and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed during the confirmation period of the game or in the customer waiting state. The rush image GT may be displayed in the transition game, then the shielding image GF may be displayed during the confirmation period of the game or in the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 may be displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. good.

The shielding image GF, the entering image GT, and the right-hand hitting image GS3 may be displayed during the transition game confirmation period or customer waiting state. It may be configured such that the shielding image GF and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT is displayed during the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may be configured such that the shielding image GF and the entry image GT are displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 is displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may also be configured such that the shielding image GF is displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the entry image GT and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may be configured such that the rush image GT and the right-handed image GS3 are displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the shielding image GF is displayed during the first game of the second time-saving game state.

It may be configured such that the right-handed image GS3 is displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the rush image GT and the shielding image GF are displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. It may be configured such that the entry image GT is displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the right-handed image GS3 and the shielding image GF are displayed in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in each of the above modified examples, the display order of the start images displayed in the transition game, the display order of the start images displayed during the confirmation period of the transition game or the customer waiting state, and the display order of the start images displayed in the second time-saving game state, The display order of the start images to be displayed may be changed as appropriate.

In the above modification, two or more starting images may be displayed in parallel. In addition, in a configuration in which the shielding image GF is displayed while waiting for a customer, a configuration is preferable in which the shielding image GF is displayed throughout the customer waiting state, and the shielding image GF is hidden when the second special symbol starts changing. be.

(18) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the display of all the start images (GF, GT, GS3) is completed by the time the first game in the second time-saving game state ends. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the start image can be displayed until the second and subsequent games in the second time-saving game state. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a time period for displaying the start image is predetermined, and a plurality of games can be executed until the time period elapses.

(19) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (transition game, first game of the second time-saving game state), the start image (the shielding image GF, the entering image GT, and the right-handed image Part or all of GS3) was displayed, and then the production pattern GA was stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the game at the start of the second time-saving game state (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "starting game"), if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the loss is displayed after the start image is displayed. The production pattern GA corresponding to is stopped and displayed.

If a jackpot game is won in the starting game, a configuration is assumed in which the starting image (part or all) that is originally displayed in the starting game is not displayed. With the above configuration, there may be an inconvenience that the success or failure of the jackpot lottery in the starting game is detected by the presence or absence of the display of the starting image. In consideration of the above circumstances, in this modification, a configuration is adopted in which the starting image can be displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the starting game.

For example, assume that the modification is adopted in the first embodiment described above. In the first embodiment, in the start game (the first game in the second time-saving game state), the screen M1 is displayed, then the shielding image GF is displayed, and the rush effect is executed (the rush image GT is displayed). , the mode selection effect is executed, and the right-handed hit image GS3 is displayed (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)). Further, after the right-handed game image GS3 is displayed, the screen is switched to the time-saving medium screen M7 (see FIG. 17(a)) in the second time-saving game state, and the effect image GA is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

In this modification, in the first embodiment described above, the screen M1 is displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery in the game at the start, and then the shielding image GF is displayed, the rush effect is executed, and the mode selection effect is performed. This is executed, and the right-hand hitting image GS3 is displayed. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, then the effect pattern GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed (same as the first embodiment). In addition, in this modification, when a jackpot game is won in the starting game, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed after the right hit image GS3 is displayed. For example, when switching to the time saving medium screen M7 after the right-hand hitting image GS3 is displayed, the effect movable body 32 moves to the appearance position. Thereafter, when the effect movable body 32 moves to the retreat position, the effect pattern GA corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed. That is, when a jackpot is won in the starting game, the performance symbols GA corresponding to the jackpot are stopped and displayed at once without intervening the ready-to-win performance. However, in the starting game, after a series of starting images are displayed and after performing a production (reach production, etc.) that can be executed in other time-saving mode B games, the same as in other time-saving mode B games. , a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is announced.

In the above modification, since a predetermined starting image is displayed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery, it is difficult to detect the result of the jackpot lottery depending on whether or not the starting image is displayed. In addition, in the starting game, it is preferable that the ready-to-win effect is not executed regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery. If the ready-to-win performance is executed in the game at the start, the ready-to-win performance is started after the above-mentioned entry performance and mode selection performance. Therefore, the inconvenience that the game at the beginning becomes excessively long is assumed. The configuration in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed in the game at the start has the advantage that the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed. Alternatively, in the start game, the reach effect may be executed with a lower probability than other games in the time saving mode B, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery. However, in this modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the starting image is not displayed in the starting game where the player wins in the jackpot lottery (for example, when winning the premium performance).

Further, in a starting game in which a jackpot is won, a part of the starting image that is displayed in a losing starting game may be displayed, and the other part may not be displayed. For example, assume a configuration in which a shielding image GF, a rush image GT, and a right-handed image GS3 are displayed in this order in a game at the start of a loss. In the above configuration, in the starting game in which a jackpot is won, the shielding image GF is displayed in the same way as in the losing starting game, and the entering image GT and the right-hand hit image GS3 are not displayed.

In other words, it is possible to control the time saving (second time saving game state, third time saving game state) over a predetermined period without going through a jackpot, and it is also possible to execute a rush performance, and if the first time change is a loss, executes the rush performance in the fluctuation, and in the case of a short first fluctuation jackpot, does not perform the rush performance in the fluctuation.
In addition, it is possible to control the time saving (second time saving game state, third time saving game state) over a predetermined period without going through the jackpot, and it is also possible to execute a rush effect, and if the initial change in time saving is a loss. may perform a rush effect in the first mode in the fluctuation, and if the first time-saving variation is a jackpot, may execute the rush effect in the second mode, which is lower in appeal than the first mode in the fluctuation. . The second aspect includes, for example, the execution time of the rush effect is shorter than the first mode, and there are fewer effects displayed in the rush effect.
In this case, it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss of the player who feels that the game ends immediately even though the second time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) has been entered, and the interest in the game can be improved. becomes possible.

(20) In each of the above embodiments, the number of the remaining number of times image GN is displayed in subtraction in each game. In the above configuration, in a game in which a jackpot is won, the remaining number of times N is not subtracted, so that the subtraction display of the number in the remaining number of times image GN may be omitted. Similarly, in a game in which a jackpot is won, the remaining number of times M in the time-saving game state is not subtracted, so that the subtraction display of the numbers in the time-saving remaining image GJ may be omitted.

However, if the above configuration is adopted, and the number in the remaining number of times image GN is displayed as a subtraction immediately after the game starts, the result of the jackpot lottery can be detected by the presence or absence of the subtraction display immediately after the game starts. This may cause inconvenience. Specifically, in a configuration in which the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are subtracted and displayed in a game where the jackpot is won immediately after the game is started, and the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are not displayed in a subtracted manner in a losing game, the subtraction is not displayed. At that point, it becomes clear that you have won the jackpot. In consideration of the above circumstances, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the numbers in the remaining number of times image GN are displayed in a subtracted manner, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number of times N is subtracted or not). Similarly, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the numbers in the time-saving remaining image GJ are displayed in a subtracted manner, regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery (regardless of whether the remaining number of times M is subtracted or not).

(21) In each of the above embodiments, there may be one type of music corresponding to the time-saving mode A, or a plurality of types may be provided. Moreover, the number of music pieces corresponding to the time saving mode B may be one type, or a plurality of types may be provided. For example, in the first embodiment, a common song may be played in time saving mode B in the first time saving game state and time saving mode B in the second time saving game state, or different songs may be played. It's okay. Further, the time saving mode A in the first time saving game state and the time saving mode B in the second time saving game state may have a configuration in which the songs are common or different.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, in the time saving mode A of the first time saving game state, the variable pattern determination table Ta1 was referred to in the early game, and the variable pattern determination table Ta2 was referred to in the late game. In the above configuration, when the power is cut off in time saving mode A, it is preferable that the image that can be displayed at the time of recovery is the same regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table (Ta1, Ta2). In addition, even if a configuration is adopted in which the fluctuation pattern determination table T is switched between the beginning and the end of the second time-saving game state, if the power is cut off at the beginning of the second time-saving game state, and when the power is cut off at the end of the second time-saving game state, It is preferable to have a configuration in which the images that can be displayed at the time of restoration are common in both cases.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the table scenario S may be changed when a small win is won.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the administrator of the gaming machine 1 can check the remaining number N until the second time-saving gaming state at any time. For example, in the first embodiment described above, the remaining number N is kept secret during the period in which the gaming machine 1 can execute the game immediately after the power is turned on. In the above configuration, information for specifying the current value of the remaining number of times N (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times information") is displayed by operating the operation unit provided in a position where the player cannot operate. May be adopted. A possible location for providing the above-mentioned operation section is, for example, on the main control board 110. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the base display 114 or (and) the image display device 21. Moreover, as a position to provide the operation section, for example, on the production control board 120 can be considered. In the above configuration, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the remaining number of times information is displayed on the image display device 21.

Further, as the above-mentioned operation section, a new dedicated operation section may be adopted, or an existing operation section may be adopted. For example, the clear button 30 may be used as the operation section. In the above configuration, when the clear button 30 is operated outside the period when clear operations can be accepted, the remaining number of times information is displayed. Further, the remaining number of times information may be displayed in accordance with the operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8. In the above configuration, if the cross key 40 or the effect button 8 is operated in a predetermined manner during a period when the player's operation of the cross key 40 and the effect button 8 is invalid (for example, a period immediately after the power is turned on), the remaining A configuration in which the number of times information is displayed is conceivable. Note that, similarly to the remaining number of times information, the administrator of the gaming machine may be configured to be able to check at any time whether or not the activation period has expired. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the administrator of the gaming machine can check both the remaining number of times information and whether or not the activated period has expired at any time.

(25) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the opening manner of the second starting port 14 in each time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving game state may be made more disadvantageous than the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving gaming state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving gaming state, while the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving gaming state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving gaming state. It is also possible to have a configuration that is substantially the same (slightly advantageous) as the state.

As a specific example of the above modification, for example, a jackpot symbol A and a jackpot symbol B are provided, and after the end of the jackpot game that started with the jackpot symbol A stopped and displayed, it is a low probability game state, and the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed. After the jackpot that started with this, the game shifts to a high probability game state for 30 times (so-called "ST machine"). The probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/300 in a low probability game state and about 1/100 in a high probability game state.

Further, when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state or second time-saving game state), the game shifts to the time-saving game state 30 times after the jackpot game ends. The above 30 time-saving game states are low probability game states. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state, the game shifts to the 60-time time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the above 60 time-saving game states, the first 30 times are high probability game states, and the latter 30 times are low probability game states. That is, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends after the low probability non-time-saving game state is executed 30 times at maximum, regardless of the type of jackpot symbol.

However, when the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state for 1000 times after the jackpot ends. Further, even when the jackpot symbol B is stopped and displayed in a non-time-saving game state, the game shifts to the time-saving game state 1000 times after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the 1000-time time-saving game state, the game shifts to the 1000-time time-saving game state again after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the first time-saving game state is more advantageous than in the non-time-saving game state.

In addition, the initial value of the remaining number of times N in the second time-saving game state is the numerical value "30", and if 30 games (losses) are executed in the low-probability game state, then the transition to the second time-saving game state is made. . The opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the second time-saving game state is substantially the same as the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the non-time-saving gaming state. Further, the second time-saving gaming state continues until a maximum of 500 games are played, and then shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state.

In the above modification, immediately after the above-mentioned 30 low probability non-time saving gaming states (first time saving gaming states) end, 500 second time saving gaming states are started. However, if the player wins a jackpot in the above time-saving game state, he cannot move to the 1000-time time-saving game state. Therefore, the player will not win the jackpot until the second time-saving gaming state ends and the player transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (until 530 games are completed after transitioning to the low-probability gaming state). Play games for a certain purpose.

However, in this modified example, in the jackpot lottery in the non-time saving game state, there is a case where the "third time saving" is won. The probability of winning the third time saving is, for example, approximately 1/300. When winning the third time saving game, the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol and the game shifts to the third time saving game state. However, if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving game state, the third time saving is not started. Like the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state continues for a maximum of 500 games, and the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is substantially the same as the non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, when winning a jackpot in the third time-saving game state, the game shifts to the first time-saving game state of 30 or 60 times, similarly to when winning a jackpot in other time-saving game states. In the above configuration, in the non-time saving game state, the player plays the game with the aim of winning the jackpot before the third time saving.

According to the above modification, it becomes possible to provide players with new gameplay. It should be noted that a plurality of types of time-saving symbols may be provided, and the number of games in the third time-saving game state may be changed depending on the type of time-saving symbols.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, immediately after displaying the recovery screen upon power restoration, a screen that can be displayed during the gaming period (for example, the screen shown in FIG. 23(b)) is displayed. However, in the case of a customer waiting state immediately after the recovery screen is displayed, a screen (such as a demo screen) that is displayed only in the customer waiting state may be displayed.

(27) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the customer waiting screen can be displayed even in the time-saving gaming state. However, it is preferable that the above-mentioned installation notification image GK is not displayed on the customer waiting screen in the time-saving gaming state.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the average fluctuation time of the special figure is shorter in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. Specifically, in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery, the average time of the fluctuation pattern of the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn2 (immediately preceding mode) is referred to is shorter than that in the game in which the fluctuation pattern determination table Tn1 (normal mode) is referred to. The configuration is suitable. In the above configuration, when the normal mode is shifted to the immediately preceding mode, the average time of each game is shortened. That is, in the period immediately before the start of the second time-saving game state, the average time of each game is shortened.

For example, assume a comparison example in which the average fluctuation time of a special figure does not change between the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode. In the comparison example above, depending on the determined fluctuation pattern, the last mode may be prolonged. In the above case, the player who wants to start the second time-saving game state early may experience stress and inconvenience. In the above-mentioned modified example, since the average variation time of the special figure in the immediately preceding mode is shorter than that in the normal mode, there is an advantage that the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed compared to, for example, the comparative example.

(29) In each of the above embodiments, the execution frequency of each effect in the normal mode and the immediately preceding mode can be changed as appropriate. By the way, some players may wish to move to the second time-saving gaming state rather than winning the jackpot in the last-minute mode. The above-mentioned players may find it troublesome to perform a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a "high expectation performance") in the last-minute mode. That is, there arises an inconvenience in that the highly anticipated performance, which is originally long-awaited by the player, is felt to be a nuisance.

In consideration of the above circumstances, a configuration may be adopted in which, in a game in which a jackpot lottery results in a loss, a high expectation performance is more difficult to perform in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. For example, assume a configuration in which a mini-game performance in which an instruction is given to operate the performance button 8 in a predetermined manner is provided as a highly anticipated performance. In the above configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which, in a game in which a jackpot lottery results in a loss, the mini game performance is less likely to be selected in the immediately preceding mode than in the normal mode. According to the modification, the above-mentioned disadvantages are suppressed. However, a configuration may be adopted in which highly anticipated performances other than mini-game performances are less likely to be selected in the immediately preceding mode.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, a first jackpot game with a first number of rounds (for example, 10 rounds) and a second jackpot game with a second number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds) smaller than the first number of rounds. It is also possible to provide a structure in which the degree of expectation of winning the first jackpot game is suggested by the fluctuation pattern. For example, in the second time-saving game state, a configuration may be considered in which the immediate winning effect is more difficult to be executed in a game in which the first jackpot game is won than in a game in which the second jackpot game is won.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of time-saving gaming state is appropriately notified. For example, the background image GH may be different in each time saving game state. Further, in each time-saving game state, the BGM may be different, and the performance symbols GA may be different. The timing at which the type of time-saving gaming state is notified can be set as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the type of time-saving game state is notified when each time-saving game state is started.

As a specific example of the modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the small symbol Ga is displayed in the time-saving entry performance regardless of which time-saving game state is started. In the above configuration, the small symbol Ga corresponding to the jackpot symbol is displayed in the time-saving rush performance when the first time-saving game state is started. In addition, in the time-saving rush performance when the second time-saving game state is started, a small symbol Ga corresponding to the losing symbol is displayed, and in the time-saving rush performance when the third time-saving game state is started, it corresponds to the time-saving symbol. A small pattern Ga is displayed. Therefore, the player has the advantage of being able to grasp the type of time-saving game state to be started from the small symbol Ga displayed in the time-saving entry performance.

(32) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in the time-saving entry performance in the second time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA is hidden, the small symbol Ga, the pending image GB, and the fourth symbol GC are displayed, and then the entry image GT is displayed. May be displayed. The above configuration has the advantage that the visibility of the entry image GT is improved, and the time-saving entry performance in the first time-saving game state and the time-saving entry performance in the second time-saving game state are easily distinguished. It is sufficient if the time-saving effect in the first time-saving game state and the time-saving effect in the second time-saving game state can be distinguished, and the image displayed in the time-saving effect in the second time-saving game state is the effect image GA, small Any of the symbols Ga, the reserved image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be used, and it is sufficient that at least one of the symbols is displayed. Similarly, in the time-saving entry performance in the third time-saving game state, the performance symbol GA may be hidden, the small symbol Ga, the pending image GB, and the fourth symbol GC may be displayed, and then the entry image GT may be displayed.

(33) In each of the above embodiments, the result image GP may be displayed when the second time saving game state ends. The above configuration has the advantage that it is easier for the player to recognize that the second time-saving game state has ended, compared to a configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the second time-saving game state ends. Similarly, the result image GP may be displayed when the third time saving game state ends. The above configuration has the advantage that it is easier for the player to recognize that the third time-saving game state has ended, compared to a configuration in which the result image GP is not displayed when the third time-saving game state ends.

(34) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in a gaming state where the time-saving symbol is valid (low probability non-time-saving gaming state), when the time-saving symbol stops, a special effect symbol GA (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving effect symbol") is stopped and displayed. It is preferable to use the following configuration. On the other hand, in a gaming state where the time-saving symbols are invalid, it is preferable that the performance symbol GA corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed when the time-saving symbol is stopped.

However, in a game state in which the time-saving symbols are invalid, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, the time-saving effect symbols may be stopped and displayed. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time-saving effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the game state where the time-saving symbols are invalid are different from the time-saving effects symbols that are stopped and displayed in the game state where the time-saving symbols are valid.

(35) The symbol combinations corresponding to the time-saving symbols are not limited to the examples of each form described above. For example, assume a configuration in which the production pattern GA includes a "special symbol" different from the numbers "1 to 9". In the above configuration, for example, "7, special symbol, 7" may be adopted as the symbol combination corresponding to the time saving symbol.

In the above modification, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the special symbol among the three symbols is stopped and displayed last. Further, as the special symbol, a symbol displaying characters indicating a transition to a time-saving game state (for example, a character string "time-saving") is preferably adopted. Furthermore, it is preferable that the special symbols are not included in symbol combinations other than those corresponding to the time-saving symbols.

In the above modification, the special symbol may not be included in the dynamically displayed performance symbols GA during the period when the ready-to-win performance is not executed, and the special symbol may be displayed in the period after the ready-to-win performance is executed. In the above configuration, in a game where the time-saving symbols are not displayed in a stopped state, the special symbols may be displayed in a variable manner. With the above configuration, even in a game where the time-saving symbols are not displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to improve the expectation level that the time-saving symbols will be displayed in a stopped state. All or some of the above configurations may be adopted.

(36) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state (the final game of the low probability non-time-saving game state), the normal effect pattern GA corresponding to a loss was displayed. Instead of the above configuration, a special effect pattern GA may be displayed in the game that shifts to the second time saving game state. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the performance symbol GA displaying the words "Time-saving game start!" is stopped and displayed in a game that transitions to the second time-saving game state. However, the special performance symbols GA displayed in the game that transitions to the second time-saving game state are the performance symbols GA corresponding to the time-saving symbols, the performance symbols GA corresponding to the jackpot symbols, and the performance symbols GA corresponding to the small winning symbols. Distinct (different) configurations are preferred. That is, when entering the second time-saving game state, a performance pattern different from the normal loss performance pattern may be stopped and displayed.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the period during which the result image GP is displayed can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the final game in the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends, the result image GP starts to be displayed, and then the second pending number becomes 0. The result image GP may be configured to be hidden after being subtracted and the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped. That is, in the low probability non-time saving game state, the result image GP may continue to be displayed until the first variable display of the first special symbol display device 20 can be started.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which no limit period is provided before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the determination information (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first determination information") acquired when a game ball enters the first starting port 13 is held in the second time-saving gaming state (first determination information). 2) Even if it is determined that the game is in the time-saving gaming state, the pending change effect based on the first determination information is executed in the non-time-saving gaming state.

However, in a configuration in which the player is continuously notified that he/she holds the right to win the jackpot in the second time-saving gaming state, there may be an inconvenience that the player's gambling spirit is excessively stimulated. Therefore, in a configuration in which no limit period is provided before transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the pending change performance in the pending image GB is canceled when transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, the pending image GB displayed in a special manner in the non-time saving game state is displayed in a normal manner in the second time saving game state. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending image GB, which was displayed in a special mode immediately before shifting to the third time-saving game state, is displayed in a normal mode in the third time-saving game state.

(39) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which a limit period is provided before transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state. Specifically, a configuration may be considered in which the limited period is from when it is determined in advance that the third time saving game will be won until the time when the game moves to the third time saving gaming state.

(40) In the above-mentioned embodiment, when transitioning to the second time-saving game state, the right-handed game is executed regardless of whether the first game of the second time-saving game state is executed (regardless of the presence or absence of the number of reservations). The start image GR was displayed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed, a voice instructing to start the right-handed game is output, and BGM in the second time-saving game state is output.

Instead of the above configuration, on the condition that the first game in the second time-saving game state is executed, the right-handed game start image GR is displayed, and a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started is output, A configuration may be adopted in which the BGM of the second time-saving game state is output. In addition, on the condition that the first game in the third time-saving game state is executed, the right-handed game start image GR is displayed, a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started is output, and the third time-saving game state is The configuration may be such that the BGM of the following is output.

(41) In the above-described embodiment, when the second time-saving gaming state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether or not the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed (the number of pending The left-handed batting start image GL was displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the left-handed batting. Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the first game in the low probability non-time-saving game state is executed, a voice instructing that the left-handed game should be started was output.

Instead of the above configuration, on the condition that the first game in the low probability non-time-saving game state is executed, the left-handed game start image GL is displayed, and a voice instructing that the left-handed game should be started is output. A configuration may also be used. Furthermore, when transitioning from the third time-saving gaming state to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, on the condition that the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed, the left-handed game start image GL is displayed, and the left-handed game is started. A configuration may also be adopted in which a voice instructing the user to start the process is output.

(42) In each of the above-mentioned forms, in addition to the opportunity of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot game may be executed when the game ball passes through a specific area (so-called 1 type 2 type game). (Can also be used as a machine) In the above specific areas, game balls can be won in small winning games. That is, when a small hit is won and the game ball lands in a specific area in the small winning game, the jackpot game is executed. In the above modification, the cumulative number m is not initialized when a small hit is won, but the cumulative number m is initialized when a game ball enters a specific area.

In the above modification, a high probability gaming state is not provided, and the probability of winning the jackpot is Common. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 14, the probability of winning a small hit is higher than the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, in the time-saving gaming state, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 14. With the above configuration, the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state.

In this modification, a second time-saving game state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n, the game substantially shifts to a high probability state of a jackpot game. Further, in the modified example, a third time-saving game state may be provided. In the above configuration, when the time-saving symbols stop, the game essentially shifts to a high probability state of a jackpot game.

(43) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the number of time-savings N3 in the third time-saving game state may be changed depending on the game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings N3 may be longer than when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state, the number of time-savings N3 may be shorter than when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving gaming state.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols in the time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the fluctuation patterns of the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state may be different. Moreover, the fluctuation patterns of the first time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be different, and the fluctuation patterns of the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state may be different.

(45) In each of the above embodiments, when the cumulative number of times m reaches the number of operations n in the third time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is activated, it may be configured to notify that fact. If the opening mode of the second starting port 14 does not change when the second time-saving game state is activated in the third time-saving game state, there is an inconvenience that the player will not be able to grasp that the second time-saving game state has been activated. is assumed. According to the modification, the above-mentioned inconveniences are suppressed. For example, in the third time-saving game state, by displaying the cumulative number of times m, the presence or absence of transition to the second time-saving game state is substantially notified. It should be noted that the fact that the second time-saving gaming state has been activated is notified at an appropriate timing. For example, when the third time-saving game state ends, it may be configured to notify that the second time-saving game state has been activated.

(46) In each of the above embodiments, the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving game state may be different for each time-saving symbol. With the above configuration, the fun of the game is improved compared to a configuration in which the opening mode of the second starting port 14 in the third time-saving game state does not change depending on the time-saving symbol.

(47) In each of the above-described embodiments, a pending change performance is shown as an example of a specific performance, but the specific performance is not limited to a pending change performance. For example, a specific effect may be adopted in which a predetermined lamp in the gaming machine 1 emits light in a specific manner. Further, a specific effect in which a special image is displayed on the image display device 31 may be adopted. For example, as a specific effect, an effect that displays a text image that says "extremely hot zone" can be considered. In the above configuration, when a jackpot is pre-determined, the character image "Intense Heat Zone" is more likely to be displayed than when a loss is pre-determined.

(48) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the pending change effect (specific effect) that can be determined may be different depending on whether the result of the preliminary judgment is a jackpot or the case where the result of the preliminary judgment is a third time reduction. For example, the final special aspect of the pending image GB that can be determined may be different depending on whether the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot or the result of the preliminary determination is a third time saving. In the above configuration, if the preliminary determination result is a jackpot, the pending image GB may change to a rainbow color, but if the preliminary determination result is a third time shortening, the pending image GB does not change to a rainbow color. Conceivable.

(49) In each of the above embodiments, the time during which the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed can be changed as appropriate. Further, the time during which the right-handed game start image GR is displayed may be changed for each time-saving game state. For example, in the first embodiment described above, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed for a longer period of time in the second time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state. Further, it is preferable that the right-handed hitting start image GR is displayed for a longer period of time in the third time-saving game state than in the first time-saving game state. In the above configuration, the right-handed hitting start image GR may be different between the first time-saving game state and the other time-saving game states. Note that when the first time-saving game state starts, the right-handed hitting start image GR may not be displayed.

(50) The time-saving gaming state of each form described above ends when the total number of times that the first special symbol display device 20 fluctuates and displays and the second special symbol display device 21 fluctuates and displays reaches the time-saving number N. . However, the trigger for ending the time-saving gaming state is not limited to the example of the first embodiment. For example, when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 has fluctuatedly displayed and the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 has fluctuatedly displayed has reached 50, the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 has fluctuatedly displayed The time-saving gaming state may be configured to end at the first opportunity that is established out of the opportunity that reaches five times and the opportunity that one small win is won.

Furthermore, the termination trigger may be different for each time-saving game state. For example, the first time-saving game state is triggered when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 fluctuates and the second special symbol display device 21 fluctuates and displays reaches 50, and the second special symbol is displayed. The process ends at the first opportunity that occurs when the number of times the device 21 performs variable display reaches five times and when one small win is won. In addition, the second time-saving game state is activated when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 fluctuates and the second special symbol display device 21 fluctuates and displays reaches 500, and the second special symbol is displayed. The process ends when the first of the triggers when the number of variable displays by the device 21 reaches 20 and the triggers when the small win is won four times is realized. Furthermore, the third time-saving game state is activated when the total number of times the first special symbol display device 20 fluctuates and the number of times the second special symbol display device 21 fluctuates reaches 30, and the second special symbol is displayed. A configuration is conceivable in which the process ends when the first of the triggers when the number of times the device 21 performs variable display reaches six times and the triggers when the small win is won three times is realized.

(51) In each of the above embodiments, the effect mode (background image GH, BGM, effects that can be determined) in each time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the performance mode of the third time saving game state may be made different depending on the number of time saving times N3 (100 times, 1000 times). In addition, in the third time-saving game state where the number of time-savings N3 is 1000 times, the production mode for the first 100 times is the same as the performance mode of the third time-saving game state where the number of time-savings N3 is 100 times, and in the 101st and subsequent games. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the production mode changes. Furthermore, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the performance mode of the first time-saving game state and the performance mode of the third time-saving game state (the performance modes before and after the change) are different.

(52) In each of the above embodiments, the remaining number of times image GF that displays the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state may be omitted. In addition, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in some time-saving gaming states (for example, the first time-saving gaming state), and the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed in some other time-saving gaming states (for example, the second time-saving gaming state). You can also use it as Furthermore, the remaining number of times image GF may be hidden in the early stage of the time-saving gaming state, and the remaining number of times image GF may be displayed in the latter half of the time-saving gaming state.

As a specific example of the above modification, the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in the first time saving game state and the third time saving game state, the remaining number of times image GF is not displayed at the beginning of the second time saving game state, and the remaining number of times image GF is displayed in the second time saving game state. A configuration may be considered in which the remaining number of times image GF is started to be displayed after the remaining number of times M2 in the gaming state is subtracted to a predetermined value (for example, 100). In the above configuration, the remaining number of times image GF may not be displayed even after the beginning of the second time saving game state.

(53) In each of the above embodiments, the type of time-saving symbols can be changed as appropriate. For example, a configuration may be provided in which a plurality of types of one or both of the time-saving symbols that transition to the third time-saving game state 1000 times and the time-saving symbols that transition to the third time-saving gaming state 100 times are provided. For example, a configuration may be considered in which the first time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the state shifts to the third time-saving game state 100 times.

(54) In each of the above-mentioned forms, the production pattern GA corresponding to the time-saving pattern may be different depending on the time-saving pattern, or may be the same for the time-saving pattern. For example, when a time-saving symbol that moves to the third time-saving game state 1000 times is displayed in a stopped state, and when a time-saving symbol that moves to the third time-saving game state 100 times is stopped and displayed, an effect that is stopped and displayed. The symbols GA may be common or different.

(55) In each of the above embodiments, the period during which the time-saving rush effect is executed is changed as appropriate. For example, the confirmation period when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed is extended from the normal confirmation period. Specifically, the time of the confirmation period when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is extended to the same extent as the ending period of the jackpot game.

In the above configuration, the time-saving entry effect may be executed when transitioning to the third time-saving game state in the fixed period when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, it may be configured to shift to the third time-saving gaming state after the fixed period ends. Furthermore, in a configuration that executes a time-saving entry performance in a confirmed period, when adopting a configuration that shifts to a third time-saving gaming state after the confirmed period ends, the performance symbols GA and small symbols Ga are displayed during the confirmed period. may or may not be displayed.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can arbitrarily change (customize) the execution frequency of the specific performance. However, no matter which execution frequency is changed, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the specific effect is executed less frequently during the above-mentioned limited period than during periods other than the limited period.

(57) In each of the above embodiments, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 may have a configuration in which the special symbols can be displayed simultaneously (in parallel) in a variable manner. In the above configuration, the first reserved number is used up regardless of whether the second special symbol display device 21 displays a variable display, and the second reserved number is used up regardless of whether or not the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variable display. Ru.

In the above configuration, a configuration is assumed in which the cumulative number m is added when the special symbol stops, similar to the first embodiment described above. Furthermore, assume that the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variable display in the n-th game, and the second special symbol display device 21 displays a variable display in the n+1-th game. Furthermore, it is assumed that the n+1-th game ends before the n-th game (the variable display on the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variable display on the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the cumulative number m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the end of the (n+1)th game. Therefore, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the state shifts to the second time-saving gaming state at the end of the n+1-th game.

A configuration is assumed in which the cumulative number m is added at the start of the variable display of special symbols. Furthermore, assume that the first special symbol display device 20 displays a variable display in the n-th game, and the second special symbol display device 21 displays a variable display in the n+1-th game. Furthermore, it is assumed that the n+1-th game ends before the n-th game (the variable display on the second special symbol display device 21 stops before the variable display on the first special symbol display device 20). In the above case, the cumulative number m is updated to the numerical value "n" at the start of the n-th game. Therefore, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the game shifts to the second time-saving game state at the start of the n-th game.

(58) In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol in the n-th game may be different from the variation pattern in other games. For example, when the variation pattern of the special symbols in the n-th game is determined, it is preferable that the image display device 31 notifies you of the transition to the second time-saving game state. Further, the period for determining the special symbol may be extended in a game with the nth activation from a game before the nth activation. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the time-saving entry performance in the case of transitioning to the second time-saving game state is executed in the fixed period in the n-th game. Furthermore, it may be configured to shift to the second time-saving gaming state after the extended fixed period ends.

However, when the cumulative number m is initialized at the start of a jackpot game, and then the n-th game is executed, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols in the game will be changed, and the trigger other than the start of the jackpot game ( For example, when the cumulative number m is initialized by the operation of the clear button 30, and then the nth game is executed, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern in the game is not changed (it does not change from the previous game). It is. In addition, the cumulative number m is initialized at the start of a jackpot game, and if the n-th game is subsequently executed, the confirmation period for that game is extended, and the trigger other than the start of the jackpot game (for example, clear If the cumulative number m is initialized by the operation of the button 30, and then the n-th game is executed, it is preferable that the fixed period for the game is not extended. In the above configuration, since the administrator of the gaming machine cannot arbitrarily change the variation time and fixed period of the special symbols, the inconvenience of impairing the fairness of the game is suppressed.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, as a specific example of ending the time saving gaming state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a configuration has been described in which the time saving gaming state ends before the fixed period ends. However, in a configuration in which the time-saving gaming state ends when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving gaming state may end before the fixed period ends.

For example, in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing (FIG. 18), the time-saving end determination processing (S234 in the same figure) may be provided before step S233 for providing a definite period. Specifically, a time saving end determination process may be provided between step S233 and the third time saving transition determination process (S232). Further, a time saving end determination process may be provided between the third time saving transition determination process and the second time saving transition determination process (S231), or a time saving end determination process may be provided immediately before the second time saving transition determination process. good.

In addition, in the modified example, the fixed period of the game in which the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, third time-saving game state) ends is the longest period during which the opening/closing door 14b is controlled to the operating mode Db. A configuration in which the time is longer than 1 is preferable. In the above configuration, there is no case where the opening/closing door 14b is in the operating state Db at the time when the non-time saving gaming state is started after the time saving gaming state ends. Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, a situation in which a game ball enters the second starting port 14 is suppressed.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the timing at which the cumulative number of times command is transmitted may be at the start of the game or at the end of the game. Further, the cumulative number command may be transmitted in all games, or the cumulative number command may be transmitted in some games (for example, every 100 games).

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, instead of the cumulative number command indicating the cumulative number m, a command indicating the remaining number of operations "nm" up to the number of operations n may be transmitted to the production control board 120. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which neither the command indicating the remaining number of operations up to the number of operations n nor the cumulative number of times command is transmitted to the production control board 120. In the above configuration, the sub CPU 121 calculates the current value of the cumulative number m by counting the number of times a command (for example, a symbol confirmation command) that is transmitted when the special symbol is stopped (when adding the cumulative number m) is received. Alternatively, it is possible to notify the remaining number of operations up to n.

(61) In the above-mentioned form, it may be configured such that it is possible to shift to a dedicated performance mode (a mode in which a dedicated performance can be executed) immediately after the second time-saving game state ends. Further, in the above-described dedicated performance mode, a configuration in which dedicated BGM is output is preferable. Similarly, immediately after the third time-saving game state ends, it may be configured to be able to shift to a dedicated performance mode (a mode in which a dedicated performance can be executed). Further, in the above-described dedicated performance mode, a configuration in which dedicated BGM is output is preferable. In addition, after each time-saving game state ends, it may be configured to shift to a common special performance mode.

(62) In each of the above embodiments, when the second time-saving gaming state ends and transitions to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, even if the number of games in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state reaches the number of operations n, the second time-saving gaming state ends. Does not shift to time-saving gaming state. In the above configuration, it is preferable that in the low probability non-time saving gaming state after the second time saving gaming state ends, it is notified that the second time saving gaming state has already ended. Specifically, a configuration can be considered in which the cumulative number m is displayed in the low probability non-time saving gaming state after the second time saving gaming state ends. If the displayed cumulative number of times m is greater than the numerical value "800", it is understood that the second time-saving game state has already ended.

(63) In each of the above embodiments, a specific performance (such as a pending change performance) that notifies (suggests) in advance that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state is not executed in accordance with the result of the preliminary determination. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a specific performance that notifies (suggests) in advance that the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state is executed.

(64) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving symbols may be effective in the time saving game state. For example, assume that the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the second time-saving game state. In the above case, a configuration may be adopted in which both the second time saving game state and the third time saving game state operate in parallel. However, in the time-saving game state after the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the second time-saving game state, it is preferable that the open mode of the opening/closing door 14b in the second time-saving game state is maintained.

(65) In each of the above-mentioned forms, during the period after the number of times it is determined that the jackpot lottery has not been won in the jackpot lottery in the low probability gaming state reaches the number of activations n, at the time when the special symbol stops, the second time shortening Moved to gaming state. However, if it is a period after the number of times it is determined that a jackpot lottery has not been won in the low probability game state reaches the number of operations n, the timing of shifting to the second time-saving game state can be changed as appropriate.

For example, the number of times it is determined that the player has not won the jackpot (the cumulative number of times m) may be updated (added, subtracted) immediately after the jackpot lottery (immediately after the start of the game). With the above configuration, it is possible to shift to the second time saving game state immediately after the start of the game. When adopting a configuration in which the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state immediately after the start of the game, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the right-handed lamp 28 lights up immediately after the start of the game and the above-mentioned advantageous period signal (external information signal) is in the ON state. It is. In the above configuration, the above-mentioned non-counting period is started when the game shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game.

In the above modification, it is preferable that the above-mentioned time-saving entry performance is executed when the game transitions to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game. In addition, when the game shifts to the second time-saving game state immediately after the start of the game, an image notifying that the game should be played with the right hand (for example, the above-mentioned right-hand game Gsy) starts to be displayed, and the background image of the time-saving game state A configuration that switches to GH is preferable. In addition, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the transition to the second time-saving gaming state was made before the end of the special symbol confirmation period, but it may be configured to transition to the second time-saving gaming state after the confirmation period ends.

(66) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the remaining number of times M in the time-saving gaming state is subtracted at the end of the game, but a configuration may also be adopted in which the remaining number of times M is subtracted at the start of the game. In the above configuration, the time saving game state ends at the start of the game. For example, the second time-saving game state ends immediately after the 1000th game is started. In the above case, in the second time saving game state, when the 1000th game is started, the right-handed lamp 28 is turned off and the above-mentioned counting period is started.

(67) In each of the above embodiments, a high probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state) may be provided. However, in the high probability non-time saving game state, the time saving symbols are invalid. That is, the time-saving symbols are effective only in a low probability game state. Furthermore, in the high probability non-time saving gaming state, the cumulative number m is not added (maintained at the initial value "0").

(68) In each of the above embodiments, multiple types of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) are provided, and the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in a jackpot lottery (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability gaming state) is set to the setting value. A configuration that changes depending on the situation may be adopted. However, the probability of winning the third time reduction is the same for each set value. Furthermore, the probability of winning a small win is the same for each set value. The above setting values are changed by a setting change process executed in response to a setting change operation by the administrator of the gaming machine 1.

In the above modification, the number of times n of activation of the second time-saving game state is the same for each set value. Specifically, if the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability gaming state is "ML" (0<M<1), the number of operations n for all setting values is in the range "2.5/ML≦n≦ 3.0/ML" is suitable.

In the above modification, it is preferable that the number of games in the time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the number of time-savings N) be the same for all setting values. Specifically, the number of time savings N1 in the first time saving game state is common to all setting values, the number of time saving times N2 in the second time saving game state is common to all setting values, and the time saving number N1 in the third time saving game state is common to all setting values. It is preferable that the number of times N3 is the same for all set values. Furthermore, if the minimum jackpot probability among the jackpot probabilities "ML" in the low probability gaming state for each set value is "MLmim" (jackpot probability for the set value "1"), the time saving number N2 is the numerical value "3. 8/MLmim" or less, and the time saving number N3 is preferably configured to have a numerical value of "3.8/MLmim" or less.

(69) In each of the above embodiments, the cumulative number m is not initialized in the setting value change process by changing the setting value and the clear operation process by operating the clear button 30, and a dedicated operation section (hereinafter referred to as "cumulative clear The cumulative number of times m may be initialized when the button ") is operated.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, the cumulative number m may not be initialized in the clear operation processing, but may be initialized in the setting value change processing described above. Alternatively, the cumulative number m may not be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in a normal mode, but the cumulative number m may be initialized when the clear button 30 is operated in a special mode. For example, when the clear button 30 is operated once, predetermined information is initialized, but the cumulative number m is not initialized, and when the clear button 30 is operated twice consecutively, the predetermined information and the cumulative number m are initialized. A configuration in which both are initialized is conceivable.

(71) In each of the above embodiments, an effect that suggests a setting value may be performed. For example, a configuration may be considered in which, when the time-saving game state ends, a performance that suggests a set value is executed. However, if the player moves to the second time-saving game state among the time-saving game states and does not win the jackpot in the second time-saving game state, the probability of winning the jackpot is likely to be a low set value. Therefore, when the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, a performance that suggests the set value is executed, and when the second time-saving game state ends, the performance that suggests the set value is not performed. is suitable.

(72) In each of the above-described low probability non-time saving game states, a plurality of types of performance symbols GAx may be displayed in accordance with the performance mode in which the game is progressed and the background image GH. Similarly, in the low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, a plurality of types of performance symbols GAy may be displayed in accordance with the performance mode in which the game is progressed and the background image GH.

Further, different performance symbols GAy may be displayed in each of the first time saving game state, the second time saving game state, and the third time saving game state. Specifically, a performance pattern GAy that is common in the first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state is displayed, and a performance pattern GAy that is different from the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is displayed in the third time-saving game state. may also be displayed. In addition, a performance pattern GAy that is common in the second time-saving game state and a third time-saving game state is displayed, and a performance pattern GAy that is different from the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed in the first time-saving game state. It may also be a thing. Furthermore, a performance pattern GAy that is common in the first time-saving game state and a third time-saving game state is displayed, and a performance pattern GAy that is different from the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is displayed in the second time-saving game state. It may also be a thing.

(73) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration when transitioning to the second time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is assumed that the number of reservations at the time of transition to the second time-saving gaming state is a numerical value of "0". That is, assume a case where the player shifts to the customer waiting state (non-gaming state) immediately after shifting to the second time-saving gaming state. In this modification, in the above customer waiting state, the right-handed player lamp 28 is lit and the right-handed player image Gsy is displayed. Furthermore, in the modified example, in the above customer waiting state, an emphasized image GZ indicating the character string "0 more times" is displayed.

In this modified example, when a winning is started in the above-mentioned customer waiting state and the first game in the second time-saving game state is started, the right-handed lamp 28 continues to light up in the game as well, and the right-handed game image Gsy is displayed. Continuously displayed. However, in the modified example, the emphasized image GZ is hidden in the first game of the second time-saving game state. Furthermore, in this modified example, the time-saving entry performance is not executed in the customer waiting state immediately after shifting to the second time-saving game state, and thereafter, the time-saving entry performance is performed in the first game of the second time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations is greater than or equal to the numerical value "1" at the time of transitioning to the second time-saving game state, in this modification, immediately after transitioning to the second time-saving game state (in the first game of the second time-saving game state) ), the right-hand hitting lamp 28 is lit, the right-hand hitting image Gsy is displayed, the emphasized image GZ is hidden, and the time-saving entry effect is executed. In addition, in the above modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the time-saving rush effect is executed in the customer waiting state. Alternatively, the number-of-games image GE may be displayed throughout the above-mentioned customer waiting state, and the number-of-games image GE may be hidden during the first game in the second time-saving gaming state.

(74) In each of the above embodiments, the magnitude relationship of the remaining number of times M1 in the first time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of times M2 in the second time-saving gaming state, and the remaining number of times M3 in the third time-saving gaming state can be changed as appropriate. For example, the remaining number M1 may be longer than the remaining number M2, or the remaining number M1 and the remaining number M2 may be equal. Further, the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M2, or the remaining number of times M3 and the remaining number of times M2 may be equal. Similarly, the remaining number of times M1 may be longer than the remaining number of times M3, the remaining number of times M1 and the remaining number of times M3 may be equal, or the remaining number of times M3 may be longer than the remaining number of times M1.

(75) In the second embodiment described above, the "first information J1" was exemplified as the "first information related to the execution of the special game specified by advance determination" of the present invention. However, the "first information" of the present invention is not limited to the above example. For example, in the first embodiment, "winning information (starting winning designation command) generated when a random number value for determining a special symbol for a jackpot is obtained" is included in the "first information" of the present invention. Further, in the second embodiment described above, the "second information J2" is exemplified as the "second information related to transition to the second gaming state specified by advance determination" of the present invention. However, the "second information" of the present invention is not limited to the above example. For example, when the random number value for determining a special symbol of loss is acquired the cumulative number of times m, it becomes possible to shift to the second time-saving gaming state (second gaming state). Therefore, "winning information (starting winning designation command) generated when the random number value for determining a special symbol of loss is acquired" is included in the "second information" of the present invention.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, specific examples have been shown in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine, but the present invention may also be applied to a pachi-slot machine.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, for example, the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an acquisition unit (S139 in FIG. 30) that acquires determination information when an acquisition condition is met, and a determination unit (S139 in FIG. 30) that determines whether a special game is appropriate based on the determination information when the determination condition is met. S207 in FIG. 33), when the number of times it is determined that the special game has not been won reaches a predetermined specific number of times, a second game state in which it is easier to satisfy the acquisition condition than the first game state is started. means (S244 in FIG. 35); and an image display means (image display device 31) capable of displaying various images including a background image and a shielding image that blocks the background image to make it difficult to see, according to the progress of the game. , the background image includes a first background image (GHx) displayed in the first gaming state and a second background image (GHw, GHz) displayed in the second gaming state, and the image display means The first background image is made difficult to see by a shielding image when the number of times it is determined that the player has not won a special game reaches a predetermined specific number of times, and then the shielding image is hidden. The second background image is visibly displayed (see FIG. 16).

According to the above configuration, the second game state can be started after the number of times of determination, which is the number of times it has been determined that the special game has not been won, reaches a predetermined specific number of times. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the second gaming state is not started at this opportunity, the interest of the opportunity for starting the second gaming state is improved. Further, according to the shielded image of the present invention, there is an advantage that it is possible to emphasize that the first gaming state has ended (that the second time-saving gaming state has started).

(Fifth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Note that, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, each component is given a new reference numeral. That is, in the first to fourth embodiments described above, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth and seventh embodiments described later, the same reference numerals may be given to different configurations.

Further, the configuration described above may correspond to the configuration described later. More specifically, the gaming machine 1 described above corresponds to the gaming machine 1 described later. Further, the main control board 110 described above corresponds to the main control board 110 described later. Further, the main RAM 113 described above corresponds to the main RAM 110c described later. Moreover, the effect control board 120 mentioned above corresponds to the effect control board 130 described later. Further, the outer frame 2, inner frame 3, and glass frame 4 described above correspond to the outer frame 2, game board mounting frame 3, and glass frame 4, respectively, which will be described later. Further, the game board 10 described above corresponds to the game board 5 described later. Furthermore, the gaming area 10a described above corresponds to the gaming area 5a described later. Further, the above-described hold image GB corresponds to the hold icon HI, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-described pending image GB corresponds to the icon TI, which will be described later. Further, the reservation number image GD described above corresponds to a first reservation number display area 70E and a second reservation number display area 70F, which will be described later. Further, the above-mentioned regions R11, R12, R13, R14, R21, R22, R23, and R24 are the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3, which will be described later, respectively. , a fourth display section 70B4, a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4. Further, the above-mentioned area R0 corresponds to the icon display area 70C, which will be described later. Moreover, the small pattern Ga mentioned above corresponds to the special pattern TZ mentioned later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned low probability non-time saving gaming state corresponds to the normal gaming state which will be described later. Further, the first time-saving game state described above corresponds to the normal time-saving game state described later. Further, the second time-saving game state described above corresponds to a special time-saving game state described later. Further, the start notification image Gn and entry image GT described above correspond to the notification logo LG and the character image of "START", which will be described later. Further, the customer waiting screen Mx, the customer waiting screen Mx1, and the customer waiting screen Mx2 described above correspond to the customer waiting demonstration background described later. Further, the first starting port 13 described above corresponds to a first starting port 45 described later. Further, the second starting port 14 described above corresponds to a second starting port 47 described later. Furthermore, the opening/closing door 14b described above corresponds to a second starting port opening/closing member 48 described later. Further, the gate 15 described above corresponds to the general gate 44 described later. Moreover, the first big winning hole 16 mentioned above corresponds to the first big winning hole 50 described later. Moreover, the second big winning hole 17 mentioned above corresponds to the second big winning hole 56 described later. Moreover, the general winning hole 18 mentioned above corresponds to the general winning hole 43 described later. Further, the above-mentioned outlet 19 corresponds to an outlet 39 described later. Further, the above-mentioned special symbols correspond to a first special symbol and a second special symbol, which will be described later. Moreover, the effect pattern GA mentioned above corresponds to the effect pattern 70a described later. Further, the audio output device 34 described above corresponds to the audio output device 9 described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned production lamp 33 corresponds to the frame lighting device 10 described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned performance button 8 corresponds to the performance button 17 described later. Further, the cross key 40 described above corresponds to the cross key 19 described later. Furthermore, the above-described movable performance body 32 corresponds to a movable performance device 73 that will be described later. Further, the above-mentioned light emitting body corresponds to a board presentation device 74 which will be described later. Further, the background image GH described above corresponds to a background image described later. In addition, the above-mentioned right-handed hitting image GS1, right-handed hitting image GS2, right-handed hitting image GS3, right-handed hitting image GS4, right-handed hitting image Gsy, and right-handed hitting start image GR are the first right-handed hitting image MG1 and the second right-handed hitting image described later. They correspond to MG2, the third right-handed image MG3, and the fourth right-handed image MG4. Further, the background image GHf described above corresponds to a power-on notification described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned prevention image GQ1 corresponds to the forget-to-take caution image TG, which will be described later. Further, the above-mentioned warning image GQ2 corresponds to an addictive caution image NG, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned end image GP2 corresponds to the shutter image SY, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-described shielded image GF corresponds to a dark-colored image to be described later. Furthermore, the above-described end image GP1 and result image GP correspond to a result display to be described later. Further, the above-mentioned emphasized image GZ corresponds to a numeric image. Further, the image display device 31 described above corresponds to a first image display device 70 described later. Further, the clear switch 30a described above corresponds to the RWM clear switch 111a described later. Further, the clear operation described above corresponds to the RWM clear operation described later. Moreover, the variation pattern determination table mentioned above corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determination table mentioned later. Furthermore, the game count image GE described above corresponds to the game count GK, which will be described later. Moreover, the stationary notification image GI mentioned above corresponds to the stationary notification character SC and the notification logo LG, which will be described later. Further, the remaining number of times image GN described above corresponds to a character image of an activation counter display described later. Further, the remaining time saving image GJ described above corresponds to the remaining time saving number image KG described later. Further, the left-handed hitting image GL and the left-handed hitting start image GL described above correspond to the left-handed hitting image HG, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned mounting notification image GK corresponds to the guide image AN described later.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. 67 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 68 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which game balls (game media) flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, making the gaming area 5a visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a dispensing device 95 (to be described later) dispensing an audio signal based on the establishment of dispensing conditions. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls; A firing operation device 13 that can be operated to fire a ball is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations at the top of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, audio) effects. It looks like this. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality occurs in which the game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, in the central front side of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIG. 67 or 68) that function as input devices for determining and selecting various productions to be described later. ) are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the production button 17, and a production button 17 that can be set in a normal state and a normal state. an effect button drive device 17b, which includes a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 to a protruding state located above the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 to a normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner; A button lamp 17c is also provided for changing the performance button 17 between an off state and a lighted state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 71) is provided to enable a player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the game balls are rented by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in parallel with the gaming machine 1. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. Further, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 71) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full. During this period, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 71), and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 71) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting part for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 (see FIG. 71) for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, and a game board mounting frame 3 and A locking mechanism (not shown) for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 71) for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 71) for driving the firing member, and a firing member that slopes upward from the firing member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper are provided for stopping the game ball at a shooting position that is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b (see FIG. 71) is received at the shooting position, the game ball is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a where a game ball can flow down is surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a shooting ball guide path 38 is formed that guides the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 called a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and this decorative frame 40 allows the game area 5a to fire with a first firing force. The game area is divided into a left side gaming area where the game ball fired flows down, and a right side gaming area where the game ball fired with a second firing force stronger than the first firing force flows down, and the left side gaming area and the right side gaming area. communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce a game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to warp the game ball flowing down the left side game area into the inside of the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the frame 40 and causing them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, there are three general prize winning holes 43 spaced apart from each other, in which game balls can always be entered. One general winning hole 43 is provided in which a ball can always be won. When the game balls that have won (entered) the general winning hole 43 are detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 71) (the granting conditions are met), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are The balls are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (assigned with prize value).

Below the stage part 42, there is a first starting hole 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) in which a game ball can always win (entering). When a game ball played (ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 71) (the granting condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are delivered to the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69). The ball is then paid out to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball (awarded with prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

Immediately below the first starting port 45, a starting port lamp 75 is provided that emits light in a predetermined manner when a lamp light emitting effect to be described later is executed, and the gaming machine 1 A lens member 75a (object) on which a "!! (double exclamation mark)" which is an object with a model motif is formed is provided.

Note that the model motif object may be provided directly on the front side of the first starting port 45, or may be provided independently near the first starting port 45 and the starting port lamp 75. In this way, by providing an object with a model motif at a position corresponding to the first starting port 45 where the player's gaze is likely to be drawn, it is possible to make it easier to impress the player with the model of the gaming machine 1. .

Below the decorative frame 40 and diagonally to the lower right of the first starting port 45, there is a mark indicating whether or not it is impossible to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the hit determination described later). A variable starting section 46 is provided which can convert from a difficult closed state to an open state where it is possible to win a game ball or is easy.

The variable starting part 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 67) to form a flow path for the game ball, and also includes a second starting port opening/closing member 48 that is movable in the front-back direction, and a second A second starting port 47 (starting winning area with a second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the starting port opening/closing member 48, and a second starting port that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47. By moving the starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 71) and the second starting port opening/closing member 48 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second starting port 47 is changed to the closed state, and the second starting port is closed. A second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 71) is provided for converting the second starting port 47 into an open state by moving the opening/closing member 48 toward the rear (winning-permitting position).

Then, a game ball enters the second starting port 47 that is in the open state during the auxiliary game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 71) (the granting condition is met). ), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls (giving a prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information to be described later is stored).

The right side game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40 has an upstream flow path 91a into which all the game balls fired toward the right side game area flow, and almost all of the game balls that flowed out from the upstream flow path 91a. A left side flow path 91c into which game balls that bounced to the left without flowing into the center flow path 91b flow into the center flow path 91b, and a right side flow path into which game balls that bounced to the right without flowing into the center flow path 91b flow into. 91d of channels, a first downstream channel 91e into which almost all of the game balls flowing out from the center channel 91b and the game balls flowing out from the right channel 91d flow; A second downstream channel 91f is provided into which the game balls that have bounced and the game balls that have flowed out from the left channel 91c flow into the second downstream channel 91f.

At the upstream end of the central flow path 91b, there is provided a regular game ball gate 44 (general game starting area) through which game balls can pass at all times, and game balls that have passed through the regular game gate 44 are detected by a gate detection switch 44a. If so, the prize ball is not awarded, but the right to make an auxiliary game determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute a winning game is granted (general figure determination information to be described later is stored).

In the middle of the central channel 91b, there is a channel that changes from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (i.e., it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination) to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize or to be opened easily. A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted into a state is provided.

The first variable winning part 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for game balls by having an upper surface inclined downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). a first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a first grand prize opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first great winning opening opening/closing member 51; By moving the first big winning hole detection switch 50a that detects the game ball that has won (entered the ball) into the first big winning hole 50 and the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 toward the front (winning regulation position). For converting the first big winning opening 50 to the open state by converting the first big winning opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 toward the rear (winning permissible position). A first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 71) is provided.

Then, when the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first big winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during a small winning game to be described later, the first big winning opening opening/closing member 51 A game ball that was flowing down the upper surface or a game ball that reached the first big prize opening 50 enters the first big winning opening 50, and this game ball is detected by the first big winning opening detection switch 50a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, downstream of the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the upper surface slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for the game ball, and also opens and closes a specific area that can be moved in the front and rear directions. A member 52, a specific area 53 that opens upward directly below the specific area opening/closing member 52, and a specific area detection switch 53a (see FIG. 71) that detects a game ball that has entered (entered) the specific area 53. By moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 toward the front (winning restriction position), the specific area 53 is converted to a closed state, and by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 toward the rear (winning permissible position), the specific area 53 is changed to a closed state. A flow path switching solenoid 52b for converting the region 53 into an open state and an outlet 54 through which game balls that have not flowed into the specific region 53 flow are provided.

Then, when a game ball passes (enters) a specific area 53 that is in an open state during a small winning game to be described later, and this game ball is detected by the specific area detection switch 53a, no prize ball will be awarded. After the small winning game ends, a jackpot game to be described later is executed.

In addition, without providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a is set as the specific area, and the first large winning hole is opened during the small winning game described later. A jackpot game, which will be described later, may be executed after the small jackpot game ends by detecting the game ball that has flowed into the jackpot by the first jackpot detection switch 50a.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot game and a small win game that change the big prize opening into an open state are treated as special games that are advantageous to the player, but when a jackpot game is treated as a special game and a small win game is treated as a specific game. There is.

In the middle of the first downstream flow path 91e, it is possible or easy to win a prize from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (i.e., it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination). A second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) that can be converted into an open state is provided.

The second variable winning part 55 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (one part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e). a second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57 that is movable in the front-rear direction; and a second grand prize opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second major winning opening opening/closing member 57. Then, the second big winning hole detection switch 56a that detects the game ball that has won (entered) the second big winning hole 56 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 are moved toward the front (winning regulation position). By doing so, the second big winning opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and by moving the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 toward the rear (winning permissible position), the second big winning opening 56 is converted to the open state. A second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 71) is provided for this purpose.

Then, when the second big prize opening/closing member 57 moves backward during the jackpot game and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state, the upper surface of the second big winning opening/closing member 57 flows down. When a game ball that has been playing or a game ball that has reached the second big winning hole 56 enters the second big winning hole 56 and this game ball is detected by the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are played. Balls (for example, 10 game balls) are put out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 69) onto the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, the front of the right side gaming area is covered with a decorative member 91 that allows the rear to be seen through, and the back side of the decorative member 91 and the front of the central flow path 91b (first prize opening opening/closing A plurality of front protrusions 91b2 protruding rearward are provided at intervals (directly above the member 51) at intervals. Furthermore, a plurality of rear protrusions 91b1 are provided on the back wall of the central channel 91b (directly above the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51) so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91b2, and the rear protrusions 91b1 By forming a meandering flow path with the front protrusion 91b2 and the front protrusion 91b2, the flowing speed (flowing force) of the game ball in the central flow path 91b (particularly on the upper surface of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51) is attenuated. There is. Therefore, it takes one second to flow down the upper surface of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

Furthermore, a plurality of front protrusions 91c2 that protrude rearward are arranged at intervals on the back surface of the decorative member 91 and at a position in front of the first downstream channel 91e (directly above the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57). It is set up with a gap between. Furthermore, a plurality of rear protrusions 91c1 are provided on the back wall of the first downstream channel 91e (directly above the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57) so as to alternate with the front protrusions 91c2. A meandering flow path is formed by the portion 91c1 and the front protrusion 91c2, thereby attenuating the flowing speed (flowing force) of the game ball in the first downstream flow path 91e (particularly the upper surface of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57). It looks like this. Therefore, it takes one second to flow down the upper surface of the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 from the upstream end to the downstream end.

The game ball launched into the left side game area either flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40 or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down via the stage part 42 and is placed below the decorative frame 40. The winnings will be won in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, it is possible to win ( pass).

In addition, the game balls fired into the right side game area pass through the upstream flow path 91a, the center flow path 91b (general gate 44), the left side flow path 91c, the right side flow path 91d, the first downstream flow path 91e, and the first downstream flow path 91e. Flowing down the second downstream channel 91f etc., one general winning opening 43 provided in the right side gaming area, variable starting part 46 (second starting opening 47), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50), The prize will be won in any of the second variable winning parts 55 (second big winning opening 56), or it will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, no prizes are won in the general winning hole 43 or the first starting hole 45 provided in the left side gaming area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43, the first starting hole 45, the second starting hole 47, the first big winning hole 50 and the second big winning hole 56, and the game balls that have been won in the out hole 39. An out ball flow path is provided that receives out balls made of game balls that have flown in, collects them, and causes them to flow down, and an out ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 71) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. The game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there is a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, and a second special symbol reservation. A holding display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol holding display 65, a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a status confirmation display 68 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , the second special symbol display device 61 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol, which is performed based on the passing (entering ball) of the game ball to the common symbol gate 44.

Jackpot determination means that when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, special pattern determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination) This corresponds to acquiring a numerical value, a random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) and determining whether to execute a jackpot game or a small win game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

Then, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Furthermore, when a jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the determination result is notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 each include a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of each special symbol. When the special symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode, small win mode, loss mode).
An example of the display on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 will be explained. The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 display a losing special symbol in which the leftmost LED lights up as the first display mode after the power is turned on. After that, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the display mode becomes such that the second LED from the left end lights up, and the display mode becomes such that the lighting position of the LED changes sequentially to the right side every 32 ms. Further, after the rightmost LED lights up, the leftmost LED lights up again, and thereafter, the display mode in which the lighting positions of the LEDs change in order is repeated.

Note that in this embodiment, a "big hit" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination. "Jackpot game" means a round game in which the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) is changed from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of times ( For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who can easily win prize balls by playing the game over four or ten times.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big winning openings (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, Even so, one round game ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the big prize opening. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) that have different degrees of advantage to the player.

Furthermore, "small win" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a small win game (special game) in the jackpot determination. A “small winning game” is a game in which a player who plays a game in which the big winning hole (second big winning hole 56) is changed from a closed state to an open state in a manner more disadvantageous than in a big winning game is likely to win prize balls. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the maximum opening time (1.8 seconds) of the big prize opening in small winning games is a predetermined time, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, the predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening. When (for example, 10 balls) wins (balls entered), the small winning game ends. Note that, unlike the jackpot game, the game state does not change just by executing the small win game.

The auxiliary game judgment is based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal pattern judgment, random value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.). This corresponds to acquiring the information and determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired common figure determination information. Note that when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays a normal symbol in a fluctuating manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol to notify the determination result is performed.

The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a manner to notify the result of the auxiliary game determination (win mode or loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute an auxiliary game (winning game) in auxiliary game determination. The term "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) win a prize (balls entered), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) are provided which have different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol reservation display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (first reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting port 45. It is for displaying the number of first reservations (U1), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reservations. Although up to four first reservations are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.
An example of the display mode on the first special symbol reservation display 63 will be explained. In the first special symbol reservation display 63, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, When the number of reservations is "2", the left and right LEDs light up, when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs light up. LED flashes.

The second special symbol reservation display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of special symbol determination information (second reservation) that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. It is for displaying the number of second reservations (U2), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reservations. Although up to four second reservations are stored, there may be fewer or more than four, or the second reservation may not be stored.
An example of the display mode on the second special symbol reservation display 64 will be explained. In the second special symbol reservation display 64, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, When the number of reservations is "2", the left and right LEDs light up, when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs light up. LED flashes.

The normal symbol reservation display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and displays the number of ordinary symbols pending, which is the number of ordinary symbols determination information (general symbols pending) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes through) the ordinary symbol gate 44. It is used to display the number of ordinary drawings, and it lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of pending drawings. In addition, although up to 4 pieces of common picture reservations are stored, it may be fewer or more than 4, or it is also possible not to store common picture reserves.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if it is determined to be a big hit, numbers such as "3" or "7" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if it is determined to be a small win, alphabets such as "A" or "C" will be displayed. If the display is stopped and it is determined that the game has lost, a "-" symbol may be displayed as a stop display, and during a fluctuating display, the lights may be turned off and the "-" symbol may be repeated.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. The LED starts lighting up, continues to light up during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED when the jackpot game ends. For example, if it is a jackpot game with four rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with ten rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and displays a right-handed display that encourages firing the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting) during a jackpot state (special game) or time-saving game state. The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game) and time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is used to indicate that the setting is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later. starts lighting up, and turns off the LED when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. In this way, since the status confirmation display 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, It is now possible to easily check whether there are any. Note that the status confirmation display 68 may be installed at the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, and may be installed at other locations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but it is difficult to know which mode it is set to. may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinking. You can also do the opposite.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the second special symbol reservation display 64, and the number of rounds display 66, the right-handed indicator 67, etc. are off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided at the bottom of the production space 40a. In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display whose size and display area are smaller than that of the first image display device 70 is provided. , a movable performance device 73 for executing motion performance is provided, and a variable notification LED 59 for reporting the variable display state of the special symbol is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The performance display includes a customer waiting demonstration performance that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is not being executed, a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is being executed, and the execution of a jackpot game. There is a jackpot performance that takes place during the event. Further, the first image display device 70 is provided with a plurality of layers, and a plurality of images may be displayed on different layers.

Furthermore, while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable effect, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) constituted by a solenoid, a motor, etc. It becomes.

Specifically, the vertical direction is between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a presentation position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a movement effect by moving (ascending, descending). Note that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) has a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and a variable display area for executing variable effects. A mode display area indicating the production mode related to the above is formed.

In addition, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of the special symbol, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, as the effect pattern 70a, a pattern indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

The production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode, small win mode). The jackpot mode and the small win mode are combinations of the same performance symbols 70a such as "777" and "555", and the loss mode is other modes.

In addition, although the mode of fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a is vertical scrolling, it may also be scrolling horizontally, switching on the spot, rotating (rotating), etc. good.

Also, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device depending on the result of the jackpot determination. 71 is designed to increase the player's expectation that a jackpot game (special game) will be executed.

The first image display device 70 includes a first pending icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first pending icons (first pending information) corresponding to a first pending number (U1) in a normal gaming state, which will be described later. , a second pending icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number (U2) in a time-saving gaming state to be described later, and a variable performance is being executed. The icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating the above, the first pending number display area 70E for numerically displaying the first pending number (U1), and the second pending number (U2). A second reservation number display area 70F for numerically displaying is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B includes, from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), and a third display section 70B3 (third area). , a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area), and a number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) are displayed in the first display section 70B1 to fourth display section 70B4. Is displayed.

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display section 70B2 displays the second pending icon. A first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display section 70B3. A first pending icon indicating a pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon indicating a first pending memory in which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

The second pending icon display area 70D includes, from the left side, a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 ( The number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4.

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon. A second pending icon indicating a second pending memory in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the third display section 70D3, and a second pending icon in which a variable display of the second special symbol is executed thirdly is displayed. A second pending icon indicating pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70D4 displays a second pending icon indicating second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above the pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D, and is arranged so that it does not rest on or float on the pedestal image. The icon will be displayed as follows.

Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (production symbol 70a), the first pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are moved one by one toward the icon display area 70C. The first pending icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70C, and the first special symbol (production symbol 70a) is displayed in a variable manner. The icon disappears (erases) when the process ends.

In addition, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (production symbol 70a), the second pending icons displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C. ), the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 displays the effect symbols 70a in a variable manner, but either one or both of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 The effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are movable while the first image display device 70 is performing a variable display of the performance symbol 70a. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined motion, it is possible to perform motion production. Furthermore, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board illumination device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, which can emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of the motion performance. . The board lighting device 74 is provided with a board lamp 74b that causes the game board 5 to emit light, and a movable member lamp 73c that causes the movable presentation device 73 to emit light.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located near the end (above) of the first image display device 70 and near the center (downward) of the first image display device 70. It is designed to move (raise, descend) between the production position (second position) and the current performance position (second position). The second movable member 73b is configured to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

The fluctuation notification LED 59 is composed of a full-color LED, and is provided with a first fluctuation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second fluctuation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first fluctuation notification LED 59a starts changing the color (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, and changes color in response to stopping the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. By stopping the change (fluctuation display of the first special symbol), it is notified whether or not the first special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed. The second fluctuation notification LED 59b starts changing color (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, and changes color in response to stopping the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. By stopping the change (fluctuation display of the second special symbol), it is notified whether or not the second special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed.

In addition, the result of the fluctuating display (jackpot determination) of the first special symbol is notified by the combination of the statically displayed performance pattern 70a and the first special symbol, and the combination of the statically displayed performance pattern 70a and the second special pattern The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (special game range) may be notified. In addition, the result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the first special symbol is notified only by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the result of the variable display (jackpot determination) of the second special symbol is notified only by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed. The results may be notified.

In addition, instead of displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a variable manner by the first fluctuation notification LED 59a and the second fluctuation notification LED 59b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the first image display device 70 or the second special symbol. The two-image display device 71 may be used for variable display.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), and a game ball supplied from island equipment, etc. A game ball storage part 96 that stores balls and supplies them to a payout device 95, a main control device 110A with a built-in main control board 110, a payout control device 120A with a built-in payout control board 120, and a production control board 130. A production control device 130A, a power supply device 160A containing a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc. are provided.

In addition, an opening/closing door type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire production control device from the rear. In addition, the production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, an image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74). A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching an adjustment mode related to adjustment of the amount of light.

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m that has a main control unit 110m for clearing the stored contents or for determining the level of advantage of the game (jackpot determination). The RWM clear switch 111a inputs a signal to update the set value (probability of determining a jackpot), and inputs a signal to shift to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable understanding of the actual performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. The two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right constitute a setting. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating a numerical value or performance information (see FIG. 115).

(Game board configuration)
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 forming the front side of the game board 5 and a back unit 501 forming the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 includes a game board 500a made of transparent resin, on which a game area 5a is formed by the above-mentioned inner rail 35 and outer rail 36, and a window portion that makes the rear visible. .

And, inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, general prize opening 43, regular gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first starting opening 45 (first starting opening detection switch 45a), variable Starting part 46 (second starting opening 47, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning part 49 (first big winning opening 50, first big winning opening detection switch 50a, The first big prize opening/closing member 51, the first big winning opening/closing solenoid 51b, the specific area 53, the specific area detection switch 53a, the flow path switching solenoid 52b, the discharge port 54), and the second variable winning part 55 (the second A big winning opening 56, a second big winning opening detection switch 56a, a second big winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) are provided, and the above-mentioned main information display 69 is provided outside the gaming area 5a. It is provided.

Further, at the lower right part of the game board 500a, a certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp with identification information unique to the game machine 1 is affixed is provided so as to be rotatable in the left and right directions with the left side as an axis. Fixtures 503a for removably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 are provided at four corners of the board 500a, respectively.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game board 500a is normally covered by the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the certificate stamp plate is pinched with the fingertips and rotated toward the left.

The fixture 503a includes an operation section located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft section extending from the operation section to the back side of the game board 500a, and a shaft section provided at the tip of the shaft section and located on the back side of the game board 500a. The engaging piece is provided with an engaging piece located on the side, and the engaging piece changes between a first state (non-engaged position) and a second state (engaged position) by operating the operating section. There is.

The back unit 501 has a unit base 501a that is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with an open front side and a window portion that makes the rear view visible. , a movable presentation device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), etc. are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. Further, a production control device 130A is provided on the rear side of the first image display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the production control device 130A.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixing receiving parts 503b are provided, respectively, for removably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixture 503a described above.

When attaching the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the certificate plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixtures 503a are placed in the first state (non-engaged position). Then, a male connector CN provided at the tip of a harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided on the panel unit 500 is passed through a through hole HA provided on the right side of the back unit 501. Thereafter, when the back surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the back surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engagement piece of the fixture 503a enters into the interior of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the engaging pieces are put into the second state (engaging posture) by turning the operation parts of the four fixtures 503a, the engaging pieces engage with the fixed receiving parts 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 is fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN led out from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A and the certification stamp plate 502 is closed, the panel unit 500 Then, the installation work of the back unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main controller 110A is pulled out to open the certificate plate 502. Thereafter, when the engaging pieces are placed in the first state by turning the operation parts of the four fixtures 503a, the engagement between the engaging pieces and the fixed receiving part 503b is released.

In this state, when the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are separated, the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a exit from the fixed receiving portions 503b. Thereafter, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal work of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of making the game machine 1 like new. Therefore, here, we have explained how to attach and detach the board unit 500 and the back unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3, but the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3. It is also possible to replace only the panel unit 500.

Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via the locking mechanism. By preventing the panel unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, only the panel unit 500 can be replaced (like new). Therefore, when replacing only the panel unit 500, it is preferable to perform the above-described removal operation after opening the glass frame 4.

(Overall block diagram of gaming machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be explained using the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operations), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of payout control commands from the main control board 110. A board 120, a production control board 130 that controls production related to the game based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a power supply board that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the production control board 130. It is equipped with 160.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to send and receive commands in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is controlled by the production control board 110. It is configured so that commands can be transmitted only in one direction to the board 130.

The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer that includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and input/output ports. It has a length of 110m.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, and a second starting opening opening/closing switch. Solenoid 48b, first big winning hole detection switch 50a, first big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, specific area detection switch 53a, second big winning hole detection switch 56a, second big winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b , magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64 , normal symbol holding display 65, round number display 66, right hit display 67, status confirmation display 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control A board 120 and a production control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to games while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. This enables control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and control processing for sending and receiving various control commands. Control processing and control processing for transmitting gaming information to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the gaming information output terminal board 90 are performed.

In the "gaming information", the starting hole winning signal, which is output every time a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are stopped. A symbol confirmation signal that is output every time, a jackpot signal that is output during a jackpot game, an open signal that is output during a round game (opening of the jackpot), and a time-saving game state that will be described later. A security signal that is output when a situation (RWM clear, error, etc.) that poses a problem (threaten) to the security of the gaming machine 1 occurs, and the like.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b include a gaming ROM area where programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area where programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, and access is prohibited. Also, an unused area of 16 bytes or more where "0" is stored, a ROM comment area where data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table where the start address of the timer interrupt processing described later is set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access-prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The gaming ROM area includes a gaming program area where programs related to the progress of the game are stored, a first unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game are stored. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area where programs related to performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. Information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a gaming RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a gaming program and an information RWM area used as a work (working area) when executing an information program are arranged in this order. There is.

The gaming RWM area includes a gaming work area used by gaming programs as work, a first unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and a temporary area where data being processed by gaming programs is stored. A gaming stack area for saving data and a second unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The gaming work area includes a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum to be described later) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes as the game progresses. Game data areas for storing game data (number of fluctuations, various time saving state flags, various number of time saving times, etc. to be described later) are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as work, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data currently being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Stack areas for information are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a gaming area (gaming ROM area, gaming RWM area) that performs processing based on a gaming program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on an information program will be explained below. Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a gaming program, it basically refers to the gaming data area, and also refers to and updates the contents of the gaming RWM area while using the gaming RWM area as work. ing. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referenced, and the contents of the information RWM area are referenced and updated while using the information RWM area as work. ing.

However, in the processing based on the gaming program, although the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, they can be referenced. Furthermore, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the gaming RWM area cannot be updated, but they can be referenced.

When performing processing based on the information program, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area in the processing based on the gaming program, and then the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the gaming RWM area immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the gaming program is returned.

In addition, immediately after starting the information program, the stack pointer of the gaming stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all registers used in the gaming program are transferred to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program immediately before the end of the information program are restored from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, it is possible to protect the data used by the gaming program when performing processing based on the information program, and prevent inconveniences from occurring when returning from the information program to the gaming program. Things will disappear.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control section 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls put out from the payout device 95, and a putout ball detection switch 95a for paying out game balls from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage section 96 are connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows control processing to pay out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing to send a command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, etc. (not shown).
The ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input/output port of the firing control section 122.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized, and fires the ball. When a change in the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is activated so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to fire game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The production control board 130 includes a production control unit 130m that collectively controls the progress of production based on reception of production control commands from the main control board 110, and a production control unit 130m that controls image display and other operations based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing of audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m. It is equipped with

The production control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b in which a production control program is stored, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

A production button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the performance while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the production mode of the variable production, control processing for transmitting production control commands based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) control processing, and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.).

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, and causes the audio output device 9 to display a predetermined sound. and control the output of sounds.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and a voice control unit that receives voice control commands from the general control unit 141. It includes an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on the audio data, and an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio controller 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 include a frame illumination device 10, a production button drive device 17b (production button drive motor, production button vibration motor), a button lamp 17c, a starting port lamp 75, a movable production device 73, and a panel display device. A lighting device 74 is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding effects while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. Thereby, the control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the production button drive device 17b, the button lamp 17c, the starting port lamp 75, the movable production device 73, and the board lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, (equivalent to power supply means). The power supply board 160 has a power supply board that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has decreased (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the decrease in power supply voltage (the occurrence of a power outage). It includes a power failure detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of power failure (power failure).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than a predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage), and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (power outage). I can do it.

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, the payout control board 120 and the production control board 120 and the production control unit 130m are provided so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage (power outage). Backup power may be supplied to the production control section 130m. Further, backup power may be supplied only to either one of the payout control board 120 and the production control unit 130m.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to the ease of winning a game ball to the second starting port 47 include a "normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state)" and a "time-saving gaming state."

Note that the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "normal gaming state." Also, during the jackpot game, the "normal gaming state" is set, but since the jackpot game is being executed, the game state is different from the normal gaming state.

Here, the "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" means that in the auxiliary game determination that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the probability of being determined to be a hit is 1/256. This refers to a gaming state in which the average time of the fluctuating display of normal symbols is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 in the event of a winning is set to 0.180 seconds.

On the other hand, in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of being determined to be a hit is set to be as high as 255/256, the average time of fluctuating display of normal symbols is set to approximately 3 seconds, and the probability of being determined to be a hit is set to approximately 3 seconds. In this case, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 6 seconds, so that the consumption of game balls is suppressed compared to the normal game state, which is advantageous to the player. Note that the transition from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, the "time-saving game state" includes a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game (via the jackpot game), which will be described later, and a "time-saving game state" that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game (via the jackpot game), and a "time-saving game state" that is based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear is executed, the jackpot game ends). A special time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) when the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuated has reached the specified number of times (500 times in this embodiment) after clearing the number of fluctuations to 0. is set.

Note that the "time-saving gaming state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined to be a hit are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state". , the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined to be a hit may be set to be advantageous.

Although the probability of winning in the normal gaming state is 1/256, the probability of winning may be set to 0/256 so that no winning is determined. In this case, the auxiliary game is not executed in the normal game state, and the game ball does not enter the second starting port 47 (win).

(Various storage areas of main RAM)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 72(a) shows a special figure in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (enters a ball) in the first starting port 45 and/or the second starting port 47 is stored. FIG. 72(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage section of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. 72(c) is a diagram showing the determination information storage area. FIG. This is the ordinary figure determination information storage area in which the ordinary figure determination information acquired when passing is stored, and FIG. 72(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage part of the ordinary figure determination information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the special figure determination information storage area is a first special figure determination information pending storage in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored. area, a second special figure determination information holding storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47 is stored, and special figure determination information during execution of variable display is stored. The first special symbol determination information storage area and the second special symbol determination information storage area are each divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section.

In addition, the first storage part, the second storage part, the third storage part, and the fourth storage part of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display part 70B1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70B. They correspond to the section 70B2, the third display section 70B3, and the fourth display section 70B4, respectively. In addition, the first storage section, the second storage section, the third storage section, and the fourth storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area are the first display section 70D1, the second display section 70D2, and the second storage icon display area 70D. They correspond to the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4, respectively.

Then, the number of pieces of special figure determination information (reservation information) stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first reservation number (U1), and these special figure determination information A corresponding number of first pending icons will be displayed on the first display section 70B1 to fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B. In addition, the number of pieces of special figure judgment information (reservation information) stored in the first storage part to fourth storage part of the second special figure judgment information becomes the second reservation number (U2), and the number of pieces corresponding to these judgment information The hold icon is displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

Further, the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area corresponds to the icon display area 70C. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), each storage unit includes a random number storage area for jackpot determination for storing a random number value for determining a jackpot, and a random number storage area for special symbol determination for storing a random number value for special symbol determination. area, a random number storage area for reach determination for storing the random number value for reach determination, and a random number storage area for special figure fluctuation pattern determination for storing the random number value for determination of the special figure fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the first special figure determination information holding storage area that does not store the special figure determination information The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smaller number. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest numbered one in which no special figure determination information is stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit.

The 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, stores the special figure stored in the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area when the start condition for the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted and referred to in order to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special symbol is met, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is shifted. will be referenced to execute.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), the normal figure determination information storage area includes the normal figure determination information storage area where the normal figure determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44 is stored, and the normal figure determination information storage area The ordinary figure determination information storage area is divided into the ordinary figure determination information storage area in which the ordinary figure determination information that is being displayed is stored, and the ordinary figure determination information holding storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, respectively. Note that the number of pieces of ordinary figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the ordinary figure determination information reservation storage area becomes the ordinary figure reservation number.

As shown in FIG. 72(d), each storage unit includes a hit determination random number storage area for storing random number values for hit determination, and a normal symbol determination random number storage area for storing random number values for normal symbol determination. and a random number storage area for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern for storing random numbers for determining a regular pattern fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44 and the normal pattern judgment information is acquired, it is acquired in the lowest numbered storage section in which normal pattern judgment information is not stored in the normal pattern judgment information storage area. The normal figure determination information is stored.

In the 0th storage unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution storage area, when the start condition for the variable display of normal symbols is met, the normal pattern judgment information stored in the first storage part of the normal pattern determination information retention storage area is shifted. and will be referenced to execute the fluctuating display of normal symbols.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing setting values based on a setting change operation, and a process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value based on the setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the panel unit 500 (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching A drive source initial operation process for initially operating the solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is performed. Note that details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for reach determination, and in step S51, updates the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, Update the initial random value for determining normal symbols.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160, which indicates the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supply that was supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine whether a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process moves to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process moves to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred, and the process moves to step S54. If the input does not continue for the predetermined period, there is a possibility of an instantaneous power outage in which the voltage of the power supply drops momentarily. Assuming that there is a difference, the process moves to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to notify the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c is transmitted from the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process moves to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process moves to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for waiting for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process moves to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, it is assumed that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be established, and the process moves to step S58.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining number of payouts specification command is received, the remaining number of payouts specified by the remaining number of payouts specification command is saved, and if the remaining number of payouts specification command is not received, the remaining number of payouts is saved. Save “0” as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here will be referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a command to specify the number of payouts in accordance with the remaining number of payouts will be sent to the payout control board 120. become.

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and saves it in a predetermined area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine whether the data in the gaming RWM area is abnormal based on the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c is backed up (power restoration) in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but in the event of a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), When the supply of operating power is resumed, the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is performed for some reason when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process will not be executed. This prevents the machine from performing unintended operations, making it possible to ensure reliability as a gaming machine.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step S12, and performs startup wait processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power is being restored and the process moves to step S17. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process is transferred to step S17. The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power cut during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the gaming RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S19 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (gaming program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting value, which is the stage of the advantage level of the game (probability of being judged as a jackpot in jackpot judgment), is changed (updated), and the setting key switch 112a is operated. Performs processing to confirm the setting value. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S24.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S20. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S22. move.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, the checksum is determined to be abnormal, as this is due to the first power-on or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery, and the process is performed in step S22. will be moved.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S22. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (gaming program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the gaming information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process to issue an unrecoverable error notification indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a display of an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the audio output device 9 displays an unrecoverable error message indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred. This means outputting an error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be performed and the process moves to step S24, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (gaming program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the set value area).

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (gaming program) in step S25. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow Processing is performed to initially operate the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b for a predetermined period of time. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") when the power is turned on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame The lighting device 10 for the board and the lighting device 74 for the panel are fully lit up in a predetermined color (e.g. white) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the RWM area has been initialized. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71, the RWM area is cleared on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71. A display may be displayed to inform you of this.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (gaming program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying the setting values saved in the setting value (during game) area of the gaming RWM area on the information display 113 and ending confirmation of the setting values by operating the setting key switch 112a. I do.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (gaming program) in step S29. Specifically, the various drive sources described above (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second opening/closing opening solenoid 57b) are initialized for a predetermined period of time. Perform processing to make it work. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process to terminate the setting confirmation notification and the like and execute a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, or The lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 indicates that the power has been restored (from a power outage). This means outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage designation command and a normal symbol storage designation command, which will be described later) to the production control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and also performs processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S33. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S35, controls the progress of the game (main control) by allowing all interrupts. A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initial setting process is ended.

In other words, from when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is finished, the game is in a pre-start state before the game progress control starts, and after the initial setting process is finished, the game progress control is stopped. The game becomes ready for play.

In this way, while changing settings (during setting change mode) or checking settings (during setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, the status confirmation display 68, first image display device 70, second It is possible to recognize that settings are being changed by checking the image display device 71, frame lighting device 10, and panel lighting device 74, and on the back (back side), by checking the information display 113, settings can be changed. It is possible to recognize that it is inside. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent with information indicating the current gaming state, but after sending the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

Furthermore, by not determining the presence or absence of the setting change flag, it may be possible to prevent unrecoverable error processing from being performed even if the previous power-off occurred while the settings were being changed.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the gaming RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may proceed to irreversible error processing. .

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing (gaming program and information program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

In this timer interrupt processing, after the initialization processing of the main processing is completed, a clock pulse is input at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110. This is executed by controlling the progress of the game.

First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area in step S100, and performs time control processing (game program) in step S110. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric accessories.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process (gaming program) in step S120. Specifically, random values for jackpot determination, special symbol determination random values, special pattern fluctuation pattern determination random values, hit determination random values, normal symbol determination random values, and regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination random values are updated. Specifically, processing is performed to update each random value and random number counter by adding +1 to them. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial random value is set as a new initial value for each cycle, and the random value is newly updated.

The main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process (game program) in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, processing is performed to update the initial random number value for jackpot determination, the initial random number value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, and the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing (gaming program) in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 56a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a. , determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the specific area detection switch 53a, and performs a process of setting predetermined data if there is an input. Note that details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special figure special electric control processing (gaming program). Specifically, the determination of the special pattern determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the big winning hole. It performs processing such as opening/closing (the first grand prize opening 50 and the second grand prize opening 56), setting the gaming state, etc. In addition, the details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs general figure general electric power control processing (gaming program). Specifically, processing such as determination of the obtained normal pattern determination information based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44, variable display of the normal pattern, and opening/closing of the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game) is performed. Note that details of the general electric power control process will be described later.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (gaming program) in step S500. Specifically, with reference to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning holes (general winning hole 43, first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, second A process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to the big prize opening 56) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes a process for paying out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process (gaming program) in step S600. Specifically, various errors (unauthorized winning errors such as a game ball entering the second starting slot 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or a game ball entering the grand prize opening when not in the special game), and various winnings. An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls entered into the mouth does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down, a magnetic error in which abnormal magnetism is detected over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error occurs when the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects an abnormal radio wave for a predetermined period of time, a door open error occurs when the open detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an RWM clear switch 111a occurs while the game progress is being controlled. It is determined whether an error (or an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) has occurred, and processing is performed to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the production control board 130. As a result, the production control board 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing (gaming program) in step S700. Specifically, the starting opening opening/closing data output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the big winning opening opening/closing data output to the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, and the first special symbol. Display 60, special symbol display data output to the second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reservation display 63, second special symbol reservation display 64 Processing is performed to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

The main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing in step S720. Specifically, processing for creating game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. Note that details of the external information data creation process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (gaming program) in step S750. Specifically, a port output that outputs signals such as the starting opening opening/closing data and the big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S700, or outputs signals such as gaming information data created in step S720. Processing, display output processing to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and payout status confirmation to check the payout status of the payout control board 120. Send a specified command to the payout control board 120 or refer to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) to be described later, and issue a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning holes. Processing for transmitting the information to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole starting hole) during normal gaming state, and the number of outs during normal gaming state. For counting game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, regardless of the game state. Perform processing.

Note that the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming performance information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed. By counting , it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the setting value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs normal base value calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area is provided for the game, and the normal base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data. Note that details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, enable interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode) before the start of game progress control, so the payout Since the counting of the number and the number of outs, the calculation of the normal base value, and the display of the normal base value are not performed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and the system is used to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. Specifically, the detection signal is inputted from the first big winning hole detection switch 50a or the second big winning hole detection switch 56a, that is, the game ball enters the first big winning hole 50 or the second big winning hole 56. It is determined whether or not the ball has been played, and processing for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. Note that details of the first starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. In addition to performing processing for obtaining and storing special figure determination information. Note that details of the second starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. Specifically, it is a process for determining whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and acquiring and storing normal pattern determination information. I do.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing in step S260, and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and predetermined data is set. Note that details of the specific area detection switch input process will be described later.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for 3-prize balls by adding data indicating 3-prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is less than 4 in step S230-4. If the first pending number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first pending number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first pending number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the first pending number (U1) is updated. A corresponding first special symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S230-3 in the vacant storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is a normal gaming state. If the game is in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S230-9 as pre-reading of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, and the process is moved to step S230-9, and the process is not in the normal gaming state. In this case, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is ended as the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is not performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a first prefetch process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first pre-reading process, a pre-judgment table (see FIG. 89(a) or FIG. 89(b)) for pre-reading (pre-judgment) the special figure judgment information is selected, and the special figure judgment information acquired this time is used as the first pre-reading process. 1. Before the variable display of a special symbol is performed, a preliminary determination is made and a process is performed to generate a first pre-reading designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the preliminary determination (special symbol scheduled fluctuation pattern). Note that details of the preliminary determination table will be described later.

This "first pre-reading designation command" is information that can specify the special pattern scheduled fluctuation pattern, so in the production control board 130, the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot judgment, the judgment result of the special symbol, etc. It is also possible to specify the type, the type of jackpot game or small win game (number of rounds), and the various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) in the time saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command generated in step S230-9 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first pre-read winning designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and even before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first pre-read designation command starts, the jackpot can be achieved across one or more variable displays. A pre-read notice (continuous notice presentation, icon change presentation) that makes the player expect the game to be played will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reservation number (U1) is "4", but it may be greater or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second reservation number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the second reservation number. Furthermore, the first reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol determination information storage area.

(Input processing of the second starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The second starting port detection switch input process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a has been input. If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process moves to step S240-2, and if the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current 2. End the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 2-prize ball counter used for 2-prize balls by adding data indicating 2-prize balls, and in step S240-3, the special figure determination Information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending number (U2) is less than 4 in step S240-4. If the second pending number (U2) is less than 4, the process moves to step S240-5, and if the second pending number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second starting port detection switch input process end.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second pending number (U2) and updating it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, the second pending number (U2) is updated. A corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a second special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number (U2) are displayed on the image display device.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for empty storage sections in order from the first storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area, and stores the special symbol acquired in step S240-3 in the empty storage section. Store figure determination information.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is in progress. If the game is in the time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S240-9 to pre-read the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 47, and the process is moved to step S240-9. If not, the current second starting port detection switch input process is terminated, assuming that the pre-reading process of the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is not performed.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines that the remaining number of time reductions (here, the second number of time reductions (J2), not the first number of time reductions (J1) or the third number of time reductions (J3)) is a predetermined number ( For example, 5 times) or more. If the remaining number of time savings is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process moves to step S240-10, and if the remaining number of time savings is not greater than or equal to the predetermined number, acquisition is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47. The current second starting port detection switch input process is ended without pre-reading the special figure determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs a second prefetch process (pre-determination process) in step S240-10. In this second pre-reading process, a pre-judgment table (see FIG. 92(c)) for pre-reading (pre-judgment) the special figure judgment information is selected, and the special figure judgment information acquired this time is displayed as a variable display of the second special symbol. A process is performed to generate a second pre-read designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern, pre-read information) before the pre-determination is performed.

This "second pre-read specification command" is information that can specify the judgment result of the special symbol judgment information, so in the production control board 130, the type of special symbol, the judgment result of the jackpot judgment, the special It is also possible to specify the type of symbol, the type of jackpot game or small win game (number of rounds), and the various times (J1, J2, J3) in the normal time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second prefetch designation command generated in step S230-9 to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the second pre-read designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the jackpot game is started over one or more variable displays even before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second pre-read designation command starts. A look-ahead notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) that makes people expect that it will be executed will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the second reservation number (U2) is "4", but it may be greater or less than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second number of reservations may be made smaller than the upper limit value of the first number of reservations. Furthermore, the second reserved storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special symbol determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol determination information storage area.

(Specific area detection switch input processing on main control board)
The specific area detection switch input process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a has been input. If the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is input, the process moves to step S260-2, and if the detection signal from the specific area detection switch 53a is not input, the current specific area detection switch input Finish the process.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current period is a specific area valid period in which passage of the game ball to the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small winning game (conversion game) is in progress. If the small winning game is in progress, the process moves to step S260-3, and if the specific area is not within the valid period, the process moves to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and a specific area passing flag indicating the gaming state when the game ball passes the specific area 53. Game state information when passing through the area (information indicating that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, information indicating that the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state) is stored in the gaming RWM of the main RAM 110c. In step S260-4, a specific area passing designation command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the valid period of the specific area is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and this time. The specific area detection switch input process ends.

Thereby, a specific area passing designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passing notification performance is executed to notify that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (a jackpot game is executed). Therefore, the player can understand that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and Detection switch input processing ends.

Thereby, a specific area passing error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a passing error notification performance is executed to notify the occurrence of a passing error in which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing. Therefore, the employees of the game parlor can understand the occurrence of a passing error and can take appropriate measures.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, the process for starting the variable display of special symbols based on the reserved memory (special figure judgment information) and the special figure special electric line processing data are changed to "1". A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed to perform the process and the like.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 1, the special figure special electric line processing data and the process for stopping and displaying the special symbol and transmitting a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 130 as the variable time elapses are changed to "2". A special symbol variation process (step S320) for processing etc. is executed.
If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss, and the opening time of the jackpot game will be set if the special symbol is a jackpot, depending on the elapse of the stop time of the special symbol. Then, the special pattern special electricity processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small hit special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game is set, and the special pattern stop processing to change the special pattern special electricity processing data to "4" ( Step S330) is executed.

If the special figure special electric line processing data = 3, the jackpot game processing (to perform the process for executing the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round game) Step S340) is executed.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 4, the processing for executing the small winning game and the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "0" or "3" based on the completion of the ending of the small winning game are performed. A small winning game process (step S350) is executed.
If the special figure special electric line processing data = 5, the jackpot game ending process is performed to perform the process for ending the jackpot game or the process of changing the special figure special electric line processing data to "0" based on the end of the ending of the jackpot game. (Step S360) is executed.

(Special symbol memory determination process of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second pending number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second held count (U2) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second pending number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, specifies the special symbol storage designation corresponding to the second pending number (U2) after the subtraction. The command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the second special figure determination information storage area. A shift process is performed on the stored data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first pending number (U1) is 1 or more in step S310-4. If the first number of reservations (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first number of reservations (U1) is not 1 or more, the process moves to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, issues a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first reservation number (U1) and the second reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Set to . As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized and shifted over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area (the second reservation number is changed to the first reservation number). However, in the order in which the game balls entered the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information retention storage area or the second special figure determination information retention storage area was shifted (the first The number of reservations and the second reservation number may be subtracted in order of winning), or the first special symbol judgment information reservation storage area may be prioritized over the second special symbol determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the first reservation number may be subtracted). The second pending number may be subtracted with priority over the second pending number.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot and the stop special symbol data of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. Execute jackpot determination processing. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern variation pattern determination process that determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. I do. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variable performance pattern which is a performance mode of a variable performance performed during the variable display of special symbols is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. It's okay.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot check to determine whether or not it is a big hit (or not). Select the judgment table (see FIG. 83). The details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (or not). If it is a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-4, and if it is not a jackpot, the process moves to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, performs special symbol determination for the jackpot to determine the type of the jackpot special symbol. The table (see FIG. 84(a)) is selected, and the process moves to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for jackpot will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a small win. If it is a small hit, the process moves to step S311-7, and if it is not a small hit, it is assumed that there is a loss and the process moves to step S311-8.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for small winning (see FIG. 84(b)) for determining the type of special symbol for small winning, and moves the process to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for small winning will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects a loss special symbol determination table (see FIG. 84(c)) for determining a loss special symbol, and moves the process to step S311-9. The details of the special symbol determination table for losing will be described later.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which jackpot determination is to be made and the random number value for special symbol determination against the special symbol determination table. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is determined.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot determination process.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7(a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 7(b) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to when determining a special symbol to stop when a jackpot is determined. 84(c) is a special symbol determination table for small winnings that is referred to when determining the stopping symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be a loss. This is a special symbol determination table for.

As shown in FIGS. 84(a) to (c), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol that determines the stop symbol, the random number value for special symbol determination, the determination result of special symbol determination, and this determination. The stop special symbol data indicating the result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated, and the lighting mode of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column for reference.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which a jackpot game is not executed. The special symbol "01" is a special jackpot symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of three round games, and the special symbol "02" executes the second jackpot game consisting of three round games. The special symbol "03" is a special jackpot symbol that executes the first jackpot game consisting of 3 round games, and the special symbol "11" is a special jackpot symbol consisting of 10 round games. This is a jackpot symbol for executing the fourth jackpot game. In addition, the special symbol "12" is a special jackpot symbol that executes the fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games, and the special symbol "13" is a special small jack symbol that executes the first small jackpot game. The special symbol "14" is a small winning special symbol that executes the second small winning game, and the special symbol "15" is a small winning special symbol that executes the third small winning game. ing.

Although details will be described later, the advantageous degree of the various jackpot games is as follows: 3rd jackpot game < 1st jackpot game < 2nd jackpot game < 4th jackpot game = 5th jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the types of jackpot special symbols, small win special symbols, and loss special symbols are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, at least one of the jackpot special symbol and the small prize special symbol may be one type.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the selection percentage of various losing symbols, the selection percentage of various jackpot special symbols, and the selection percentage of various small winning symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. can be mentioned. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting members) of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand the type of special symbol being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol judgment table shown in FIG. One point is that the number of LEDs (light emitting members) of the special symbol display that lights up is smaller. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand the type of special symbol being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the LED (light-emitting member) of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a small winning special symbol also lights up when displaying a loss special symbol. One point is that it includes the same LED (light emitting member) as the special symbol display. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that the special symbol is a small win special symbol or a loss special symbol, rather than a jackpot special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 84 is that the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 45 is determined to be a jackpot (first result). If it is determined, it is possible to execute any of the first to third jackpot games, and the special figure judgment information (second special symbol) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 47 is a jackpot. (First result), one of the fourth to fifth jackpot games can be executed. By doing this, the type of jackpot game that can be executed changes depending on the type of special symbol, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

Further, the number of LEDs of the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying the jackpot special symbol may be greater than or less than three. In addition, the number of LEDs on the special symbol display device that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol may be greater than or equal to two, but even in this case, the number of LEDs on the special symbol display that lights up when displaying the small hit special symbol may be increased or decreased. The number may be different from the number of LEDs of the special symbol display that are lit when displaying.

In addition, the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a small winning special symbol and the LED of the special symbol display that lights up when displaying a loss special symbol are not included (if they are completely different) You may also do so.

Further, although the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol is designed not to win a small hit, it may be possible to win a small hit. In this case, it is preferable that the winning probability is lower than that in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment process of main control board)
The special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing special figure variation pattern determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-2, and if it is not the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-3, assuming that it is the time-saving gaming state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding table (matching the gaming situation) from the normal special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 86) for determining the special symbol variation pattern in the normal gaming state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding table (matching the gaming situation) from the time-saving special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 87 to 25) for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern in the time-saving gaming state. is selected, and the process moves to step S313-4. In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, the number of reservations (U1 or U2), and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. The special figure variation pattern is determined by comparing it with the special figure variation pattern determination table.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. A pattern designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a process for determining a variation production pattern which is a production mode of the variation production is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a selects the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c, specifically, the special number executed from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear, clearing the number of fluctuations to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game). Update the number of symbol fluctuation displays by +1. The number of variations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a variable display of the first special symbol, or a variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, this number of fluctuations will be referred to in the special symbol fluctuation processing described later.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is present. If it is not in the time-saving game state, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is ended, and if it is in the time-saving game state, in step S313-9, a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining time-saving number is transmitted for production. Set in the data storage area. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified. When this process is finished, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is ended.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal use)
FIG. 86 is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state.

Specifically, in FIG. 86(a), the variation display is executed when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the number of variations to the special time-saving gaming state is 51 or more. This is the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 that is referred to when playing (performance modes A to C). FIG. 86(c) is a normal special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table 2 that is referred to when performing a fluctuation display when the number of times is 50 or less (during countdown mode, which will be described later). This is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 3 that is referred to when performing a fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after transitioning to the state.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal time saving)
87 to 90 are normal time saving special symbol variation pattern determination tables that are referred to when determining the special symbol variation pattern in the normal time saving gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 87(a) shows a case where 7 times is selected as the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time saving gaming state and the remaining number of small wins is 1. This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for normal time saving that is referred to when performing a variable display before the final time saving time (during rush battle mode described later), and FIG. 87(b) is a normal time saving game state. Refer to when executing the variable display of the final time saving time when the second special symbol's time saving number of 7 times is selected and the remaining number of small hits is 1 at the time of transition to (during rush battle mode described later) This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for normal time saving.

FIG. 88(a) shows a case where 55, 95, or 496 times are selected as the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time saving gaming state and the remaining number of small wins is 1. 88(b) is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for normal time saving that is referred to when performing a variable display before the final time saving time (during wild dance mode described later), and FIG. 88(b) is a normal time saving game state. When executing the variable display of the final time saving time when 55, 95, or 496 times are selected as the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol and the remaining number of small hits is 1 at the time of transition to This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 4 for normal time saving that is referred to (during the wild dance mode to be described later).

Fig. 89(a) shows the time saving final round when 95 times is selected as the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time saving gaming state and the remaining number of small hits is 2. This is the normal time-saving special figure variation pattern determination table 5 that is referred to when executing the previous variation display (during the Super Ranbu mode described later), and FIG. 2. It is referred to when executing the variable display of the final time saving time when 95 times is selected as the time saving number (J2) of the special symbol and the remaining number of small hits is 2 (during Super Ranbu mode described later). This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 6 for normal time saving.

FIG. 90(a) shows the time saving final round when 496 times is selected as the time saving number (J2) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal time saving gaming state and the remaining number of small hits is 2. This is the normal time-saving special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table 7 that is referred to when executing the previous fluctuation display (during the infinite mode described later), and FIG. Normally referred to when executing the variable display of the final time saving time (during infinite mode described later) when 496 times is selected as the time saving number (J2) of the special symbol and the remaining number of small hits is 2. This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 8 for time saving.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for special time saving)
FIG. 91 is a normal time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the special symbol variation pattern in the special time-saving game state.

Specifically, FIG. 91(a) shows the special time saving game state when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, or when there is jackpot history information and the remaining number of small wins is 2. This is the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for special time saving that is referred to when performing the second or subsequent fluctuation display from the start of the special time saving gaming state (during infinite mode, which will be described later). Refer to (b) when executing the initial time-saving variable display (during infinite mode) when the main RAM 110c has jackpot history information and the remaining number of small wins is 2 in the special time-saving gaming state. FIG. 91(c) is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 2 for normal time saving, and FIG. This is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for special time saving that is referred to during the wild dance mode (to be described later).

As shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting hole) that performs variable display, the determination result of jackpot determination, and the determination result of special symbol (stop special symbol data ), the random number for reach determination, the first reservation number (U1) or the second reservation number (U2), the random number for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, the special symbol fluctuation pattern as a determination result, and the special symbol. It is associated with the variable time, and the content of the variable effect is described for reference.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify at least the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. Further, although details will be described later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game can be specified. Furthermore, since the number of time-saving game states (number of time-savings) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of time-savings can be specified.

As for the production contents shown in the special symbol variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 86 to 91, "normal variation", "shortened variation", and "ultra shortened variation" are three production symbols 70a that vary at high speed apart. , which means stopping without reaching.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. means the manner in which it changes. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), the same performance symbol 70a in the left and right regions is "7". This refers to a mode in which the display is temporarily stopped at , and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the performance symbols 70a move slightly or are deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (not completely stopped). (not).

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and the expectation level of jackpot is the lowest. It has become a reach. In addition, in this embodiment, although a jackpot does not occur with "normal reach", it may be configured such that a jackpot occurs with "normal reach".

In addition, "SP reach" is a super reach performance that is performed after the normal reach and has higher expectations for a jackpot than the normal reach.

Furthermore, "SPSP reach" is a special reach performance that is performed after normal reach or after super reach, and has higher expectations for a jackpot than super reach. For example, the three performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the image display device, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a special performance more than “SP reach”.

Further, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that is performed after a normal reach or a super reach, and is a reach that is guaranteed to be a jackpot. For example, from the blackout effect, the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and move at a low speed, and almost the entire display area of the image display device is used to perform a more special effect than "SPSP Reach." ing.

In addition, the "resurrection long fluctuation" is an effect that appears to be a jackpot when the game returns to the normal gaming state. For example, special effects are performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device.

In addition, the "resurrection fluctuation" is an effect in which the player makes a small win by pretending to enter the normal gaming state. For example, a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device for a shorter period of time than the long revival variation.

In addition, "Rush Battle Reach" refers to whether or not an ally character and an enemy character will battle and enter the Ranbu Mode, Super Ranbu Mode, or Infinite Mode (which will be a loss, a big hit, or a small hit). ) is a reach performance that encourages. Note that the modes are advantageous to the player in the order of wild dance mode < super wild dance mode < infinite mode.

In addition, "Final Battle Reach" refers to whether the ally character and enemy character have a final battle and enter the Ranbu Mode, Super Ranbu Mode, or Infinite Mode (described below) (either a loss, a big hit, or a small win). It is a reach production that encourages the desire to become a leader.

In addition, "promotion battle reach" refers to a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, and whether or not they will be promoted from Ranbu mode to Super Ranbu mode or Infinite mode (which will be a loss, a big hit, or a small win). ) is a reach performance that encourages.

Further, the "promotion battle promotion fluctuation" is an effect in which a battle does not take place after an ally character and an enemy character have incited whether or not to engage in a battle.

"Result fluctuation" refers to the result of gaming during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving gaming state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from the normal gaming state called the so-called first win, in the final fluctuation display of the normal time-saving gaming state. The result is displayed. Note that the results may be displayed not from the first win, but from a series of advantageous periods during which conditions advantageous to the player continue.

"Result revival fluctuation" means that in the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state, after the aforementioned result display is performed, a resurrection display that suggests a result (big hit or small win) that is advantageous to the player is This is a performance that will take place.

"Continuous Battle Reach" is a reach that incites whether or not Super Ranbu Mode or Infinite Mode (described later) will continue (either a loss, a big hit, or a small win) by a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. It is staged.

"Undefeated Battle Reach" is a reach effect that suggests that when an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle, the ally character always wins and the result is advantageous to the player (big win or small win). .

The "undefeated battle inciting variation" is a production in which a battle does not take place after the friendly character and the enemy character incite whether or not to engage in a battle.

"(Entry performance) long fluctuation" is a performance that results in a loss after the entry performance that suggests entering the special time-saving game state is performed, if it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving game state, and the special time-saving game state If it is not the first change in the game state (it is the second or subsequent change display), the rush effect is not performed and the effect is a loss.

"(Entering effect) Immediate winning variation" means that if it is the first variation of the special time-saving gaming state, the player can enter the special time-saving gaming state without going through the reach after the entry effect indicating entry into the special time-saving gaming state has been performed. The effect is to notify you of an advantageous result (big hit or small win), and if it is not the first change in the special time-saving game state (this is the second or subsequent change display), the rush effect will not be performed. The effect is such that the player is notified of an advantageous result (big win or small win) without going through reach.

"(Entering Effect) Undefeated Battle Reach" means, in the case of the first variation of the special time-saving game state, the above-mentioned Undefeated Battle Reach is performed after the entry effect suggesting entry into the special time-saving game state is performed. It is a reach production.

"Long variation of entry performance" is a performance that results in a loss after the entry performance suggesting entry into a special time-saving game state is performed.

"Run effect immediate win variation" is a notification that after a rush effect indicating entry into a special time-saving gaming state is performed, an advantageous result for the player (big hit or small win) will occur without going through reach. It is a performance that will be performed.

The first feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 86 to 91 is that during the fluctuation display that is the final round of the normal time-saving gaming state (series of advantageous periods), the fluctuation performance in which the result display is performed is There are several points that are implemented. By doing so, the player can check the results of the games during a series of advantageous periods, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the games.

The second feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 86 to 91 is that during the fluctuation display, which is the final round of the special time-saving game state, a special effect is performed without displaying the result. can be mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied with the display of the results of games during a series of advantageous periods even though no jackpot games have been executed, and to increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

A third feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 86 to 91 is that different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables are used for the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state. By doing this, even if they are in the same time-saving game state, the performance contents can be made different between the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 86 to 91 is that in the first fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table differs depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear). One example is the fact that it is now being used. By doing so, the performance content during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 86 to 91 is that in the second to final fluctuations during the special time-saving gaming state, regardless of the presence or absence of the jackpot history (RWM clear), the common One point is that a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern determination table 1 for special time saving) is used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, and also to realize efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

The sixth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91 is that when a jackpot occurs during the special time-saving gaming state, the variation is shorter than when the jackpot occurs during the normal gaming state. One of the points is that the time variation pattern (immediate win variation where reach effect is not executed) is easy to determine. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in a situation where a special time-saving game state occurs and a jackpot game is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The seventh feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91 is that the time when the jackpot occurs during the special time-saving gaming state is shorter than when the jackpot occurs during the normal time-saving gaming state. One of the points is that the variation pattern of the variation time (immediate winning variation where reach effect is not executed) is easy to determine. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in a situation where a special time-saving game state occurs and a jackpot game is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The eighth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 to 91 is that the fluctuation display is performed during the special time-saving game state more than when the fluctuation display is performed during the normal time-saving game state. The point is that the average fluctuation time is shorter in the case of the case. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction in a situation where a special time-saving game state occurs and a jackpot game is not executed for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Although different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables are used during the normal time-saving gaming state and during the special time-saving gaming state, for example, when performing a variation display other than the initial variation or final variation in the special time-saving gaming state, is the special figure variation pattern judgment table for normal time saving (for example, special figure variation pattern judgment table 3 for normal time saving, special figure variation pattern judgment table 5 for normal time saving, or special figure variation pattern judgment table for normal time saving). Pattern determination table 7 etc.) may be used. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, and also to realize efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

In addition, for the first fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables are used depending on the presence or absence of jackpot history (RWM clear), but the same special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (for example, special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table) You may make it use special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table 1 for special figure fluctuation pattern for special time saving or special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table 2 for special time saving. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data capacity, and also to realize efficient control, which in turn makes it possible to shorten the development period.

In addition, in the final variation during the special time-saving gaming state, the same special pattern variation pattern judgment table is used regardless of whether there is a jackpot history (RWM clear), but a different special pattern variation pattern judgment table is used. You may also do so. By doing so, it is possible to vary the presentation content during the final variable display in the special time-saving game state depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the normal time-saving game state and during the special time-saving game state, it is possible to determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern using different special symbol fluctuation pattern tables, and for a predetermined period after the end of the normal time-saving game state (the second special symbol The special symbol fluctuation pattern can be determined using the same special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the remaining amount) and the predetermined period after the end of the special time saving game state (remaining amount of the second special symbol). Therefore, by changing the performance depending on the type of time saving, the performance effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the variation pattern, and it is also possible to improve the efficiency of control at the time of time saving termination.

In addition, the same special symbol fluctuation pattern table is used for the fluctuation based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the end of the normal time saving gaming state and the fluctuation based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the end of the special time saving gaming state. Although it has been explained that the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined, the present invention is not limited to this. The fluctuation based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state and the fluctuation based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol after the end of the special time-saving gaming state are different special symbol fluctuation pattern tables. A variation pattern may be determined. That is, during the normal time-saving gaming state and during the special time-saving gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern can be determined using different special symbol fluctuation pattern tables, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern can be determined using different special symbol fluctuation pattern tables during the normal time-saving gaming state. The special symbol fluctuation pattern can be determined using different special symbol fluctuation pattern tables for the remaining portion) and the predetermined period after the end of the special time saving game state (the remaining portion of the second special symbol). In this case, by making changes during and after the time saving depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to improve the performance effect and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7(b-1) and FIG. 7(b-2), the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state) are the same. Normally, a symbol variation pattern table is used. That is, in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), special figure fluctuation patterns can be determined using different special figure fluctuation pattern tables, and the normal time-saving game In the state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), the common figure fluctuation pattern can be determined using the same common figure fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, by making changes during and after the time saving depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to improve the production effect and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the general figure fluctuation pattern, and it is also possible to improve the efficiency of control during time saving.

Although it has been explained that the same normal symbol variation pattern table is used in the normal time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) and the special time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), the present invention is not limited to this. Different normal symbol fluctuation pattern tables may be used in the normal time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) and the special time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state). That is, in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), special figure fluctuation patterns can be determined using different special figure fluctuation pattern tables, and the normal time-saving game In the state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), the regular figure fluctuation pattern can be determined using different regular figure fluctuation pattern tables. In this case, by making changes during and after the time saving depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to improve the performance effect and improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the average fluctuation time of regular symbols during the special time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) tends to be shorter than the average fluctuation time of special symbols during the normal time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state). Good too.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, it has been explained that the opening mode of the second starting port 14 is the same in each time-saving game state. That is, in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), special figure fluctuation patterns can be determined using different special figure fluctuation pattern tables, and the normal time-saving game In the state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), even if the same winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the electric chew (second starting port) is opened with different opening patterns (time, number of times). ) can be opened. Therefore, by making changes during and after the time saving depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to improve the production effect and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the degree of advantage for the player can be changed depending on the type of time saving, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, it has been explained that the opening manner of the second starting port 14 may be different in each time saving game state. That is, in the normal time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), special figure fluctuation patterns can be determined using different special figure fluctuation pattern tables, and the normal time-saving game In the state (first time-saving game state) and the special time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), even if the same winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the electric chew (second starting opening) is released with the same opening pattern (time, number of times). ) may be openable. In this case, by making changes during and after the time saving depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to improve the performance effect and also to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity related to the opening pattern of the electric chew, and it is also possible to improve the efficiency of control during the auxiliary game.

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 92 is a preliminary determination table that is referred to when pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball in the starting slot.

As shown in FIG. 92, the preliminary determination table includes the gaming state, the type of special symbol (starting hole), the determination result of jackpot determination (random value for jackpot determination), and the determination result of special symbol (special symbol determination). random number), a random number for reach determination, a random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and a special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern as a determination result are associated.

Therefore, the "scheduled special pattern fluctuation pattern" and "pre-read information" can be said to be things that can identify at least the type of special symbol, the judgment result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern scheduled to be executed. . Further, although details will be described later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game can be specified. Furthermore, since the number of time-saving game states (number of time-savings) is set at the end of the jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can be said that the number of time-savings can be specified.

(Special pattern variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special symbol variation pattern determination process has elapsed. If the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2, and if the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process ends.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the special symbols determined in the above-described jackpot determination process, and in step S320-3, sets a stop time corresponding to the gaming situation in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if it is a variable display of the final round of the time saving game state, 8.0 seconds is set, and if it is a variable display other than that, 0.5 seconds is set.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the time saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time saving flag is set, the remaining number of working hours is to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5; if the time saving flag is not set, the remaining number of working hours is not to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5. The process moves to S320-13.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current variable display of the special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time saving number (J1), which is the time saving number of the first special symbol saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the first special The third time saving number (J3), which is the total time saving number of the symbol and the second special symbol, is subtracted by 1, and if it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the main The second time saving number (J2), which is the time saving number of the second special symbol saved in the gaming RWM area of the RAM 110c, and the third time saving number (J3) mentioned above are subtracted by one.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether any one of the first number of time reductions (J1), the second number of time reductions (J2), and the third number of time reductions (J3) has become "0". When it becomes "0", the process moves to step S320-12 as the time saving gaming state is ended, and when it does not become "0", the process moves to step S320-9.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S320-13, and if it is a small winning special symbol, in step S320-10, the process continues until the time saving gaming state saved in the gaming RWM area is ended. Subtract 1 from the remaining number of small wins (Z).

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins has become "0". If the remaining number of small wins has become "0", the time-saving gaming state is terminated and the process moves to step S320-12, and if the remaining number of small wins has not become "0", step S320 Processing moves to -13.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a clears the time saving flag and various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the time saving gaming state.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S320-15, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, in step S320-14, the time saving flag and various time saving times saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c (J1, J2, J3) is cleared to end the time saving gaming state (starting the normal gaming state). When this process is finished, the process moves to step S320-19.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a determines that the number of fluctuations saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c is set to the specified number (496 times which is the maximum time saving number in the normal time saving gaming state + 4 remaining reservations). 500 times). If the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, the process moves to step S320-16 as a special time saving gaming state is to be started, and if the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the special time saving gaming state is started. The process moves to step S320-18 as not to be allowed.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a saves the special time saving number of times (J1=60, J2=750, J3=750) and the remaining number of small wins (Z=2) in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. , In step S320-17, a special time saving flag is set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c to shift to a special time saving gaming state.

In step S320-18, the main CPU 110a sends a time saving number designation command corresponding to the various time saving numbers (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified.

In step S320-19, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "2" and stores the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state (the gaming state identified from the presence or absence of the time-saving flag) in the main RAM 110c. Set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state. When this process is finished, this special symbol variation process ends.

In this way, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (the small winning game is executed) during the time saving game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47, the time saving number (J1, J2, Even if J3) remains, the time-saving gaming state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0". Therefore, players try to advance the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effects and the combination of the effect patterns 70a that are stopped and displayed (whether or not to aim for an advantageous jackpot by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small hit game) ), it becomes possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the gaming method during the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, when the number of small winnings reaches the specified number of times, the state shifts to the normal game state before the small winning game is executed (at the stop timing of the small winning special symbols).

In addition, even if the number of small winnings (Z) remains, the time-saving gaming state ends when the number of time-savings (J1, J2, J3) becomes "0". There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time-saving game state from continuing until the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, and giving the player an excessive advantage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the advantageous gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled after a jackpot ends (normally (transition to gaming state). Therefore, it is possible to change the number of fluctuations in which the advantageous gaming state continues according to the progress of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuating after a predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of fluctuations is cleared to zero based on the end of the jackpot game) and the number of times the special symbol is displayed reaches the specified number, a special time-saving game state is generated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the surprise of a time-saving state occurring without going through a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations (500 times) that the special time-saving game state occurs is larger than the maximum time-saving number (496 times) set in the normal time-saving game state, so that during the normal time-saving game state, Since a special time-saving game state does not occur, the inconvenience that the player loses track of the progress of the game does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs (500 times) is greater than the maximum number of time-savings (496 times) set in the normal time-saving gaming state by the upper limit number of the second pending number (4). By doing so, if the maximum number of time savings (496 times) is set in the normal time saving game state, it can be made to feel as if the normal time saving game state has directly transitioned to the special time saving game state. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when a special time saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to zero. Therefore, between jackpot games (after the special time-saving gaming state starts or ends), the special time-saving gaming state will not occur again, making it possible to ensure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor and the player. It is also possible to improve the interest of the game.
That is, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering the special time saving game state), a first predetermined image (such as a shutter image SY to be described later) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first image in which the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Perform the performance. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, a second effect is performed in which a decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. In addition, the number of operations n (number of fluctuations) is set, and an update process is performed to update the number of operations n every time the special symbol changes, and when the first performance is performed, the first performance is performed without clearing n. Even after the special figure changes, updating processing is performed every time the special figure changes, and when the second effect is performed, n is cleared. In this case, by not clearing n even when the first effect is performed, it is possible to perform the process of adding "always". Furthermore, when performing subtraction processing, there is no need to switch processing before and after the special time-saving gaming state, so the processing load and capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the maximum number of time savings in the normal time saving game state (496 times) is not set to be less than the number of fluctuations in which the special time saving game state occurs (500 times), but the maximum number of time saving times in the normal time saving game state. and the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs may be the same number of times. In this way, the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state will be seamlessly connected, making it feel as if the normal time-saving gaming state has been extended, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, when a special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a special time-saving occurrence flag indicating that the special time-saving gaming state has already occurred is set in the main RAM 110c (for gaming RWM). In this case, if there is no special time-saving occurrence flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of fluctuations is cleared to 0 and a special time-saving gaming state is generated, and if there is a special time-saving occurrence flag, It is preferable to clear the number of fluctuations to 0 to prevent the special time-saving gaming state from occurring.

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time set in the special symbol variation process described above has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process moves to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process ends.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S330-3, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol (it is a small win special symbol or a loss special symbol), the process moves to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a determines the jackpot according to the stop special symbol data (jackpot special symbol) from the jackpot control data determination table for the jackpot game (see FIG. 95(a)) for executing the jackpot game. A jackpot opening transition process is performed, such as selecting game control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of prizes, opening time, etc.), and in step S330-4, in order to transition to jackpot game process, special figure special electric processing data is changed. "3" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8. The details of the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is a small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S330-6, and if it is not a small winning special symbol (it is a loss special symbol), the process moves to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a inputs the stop special symbol data (small winning special symbol) from the big winning opening control data determination table for the small winning game (see FIG. 95(b)) to execute the small winning game. A small winning opening transition process is performed, such as selecting the corresponding small winning game control data (maximum winning number, opening time, etc.), and in step S330-7, in order to transition to a small winning game, the special figure special electric processing data is "4" is set, and the process moves to step S330-8.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time according to the selected control data in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9, the opening designation command is stored in the performance transmission data of the main RAM 110c. Set to area. As a result, an opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing the opening performance of the jackpot game or the small win game is performed. When this process is finished, the current special symbol stop process ends.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to move the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing, and ends the current special symbol stop processing.

(control data table)
FIG. 95(a) is a diagram showing a big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game for controlling the big winning opening during the jackpot game (special game), and FIG. 95(b) is a diagram showing the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game 95(c) is a diagram showing a large winning opening control data determination table for a small winning game for controlling a large winning opening during a small winning game, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific area control data determination table for.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game includes stop special symbol data for special symbols, the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game, and the big winning opening in one round game. The maximum number of prizes to be won, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the types of big prize openings to be opened in each round game, and the maximum opening of the big prize openings to be opened in each round game. The number of times, the opening time of the grand prize opening for one opening of each round game, and the interval time during which the grand prize opening is closed after the end of the round game (in order to eject the game ball from the grand prize opening) required time) and the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game.

When the stop special pattern data is "01", the first jackpot game in which three round games are played is executed, and when the stop special pattern data is "02", three round games are played. At the same time, a second jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game, and if the stop special symbol data is "03", three round games are played. , a third jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first jackpot game.

In addition, when the stop special symbol data is "11", 10 round games are played, and a fourth jackpot game is executed in which the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game. , when the stop special figure data is "12", 10 round games are played, and the state after the jackpot game is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (same advantage as the fourth jackpot game) Execute the fifth jackpot game (degree of degree).

In addition, when the stop special symbol data is "13", the 1V jackpot game in which the remaining two round games are played is executed via the 1st small win game which is the first round game, and the stop special symbol is If the diagram data is "14", the remaining 9 round games are played via the 2nd small winning game which is the 1st round game, and the 1st round game is more advantageous to the player than the 1V jackpot game. When a 2V jackpot game is executed and the stop special figure data is "15", the remaining two round games are played via the third small win game which is the first round game, and the 1st V jackpot is played. A 3rd V jackpot game is executed in which the state of the jackpot game may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game.

As a feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for the jackpot game shown in FIG. , while the jackpot game of the maximum round (10th round) is not executed, when the jackpot game (4th to 5th jackpot game) based on winning the second starting opening 47 is executed, the maximum round (10th round) of the jackpot game is executed. One of the points is that jackpot games are possible. By doing this, it is possible to make the gameplay different when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 and when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 95(b), the large winning opening control data determination table for small winning games includes stop special symbol data (type of small winning games) of special symbols, and large winning openings to be opened in small winning games. The maximum number of openings, the maximum number of prizes that can be won in the big winning hole in small winning games, the opening time until the big winning hole is changed to the open state, the type of big winning hole to be opened, and the maximum number of winnings for one opening. The opening time of all the big winning openings, the interval time when the big winning opening is closed (the time required to eject the game ball from the big winning opening), and the small winning game from the last closing of the big winning opening. The ending time until the end is associated.

When the stop special pattern data is "13", the first small winning game is executed, and when the stopping special pattern data is "14", the second small winning game is executed, and when the stopping special pattern data is "14", the second small winning game is executed. 15'', the third small winning game is executed.

As a feature of the big winning opening control data determination table for small winning games shown in FIG. The time is set for the ball to be rolling on the upper surface of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 (interval time 0.82 seconds for firing interval 0.67 seconds). By doing this, the opening time of the first big prize opening 50 can be shortened, and the opening time of the first big prize opening 50 can be shortened. It is possible to increase the number of times the winning opening is opened, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 95(c), the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game includes special symbol stop special symbol data (type of small winning game) and the specific area 53 to be opened in the small winning game. The maximum number of openings, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53 are associated with each other.

In the small winning game, regardless of the type of the small winning game, a specific area 53 is converted into an open state when a large winning opening in the small winning game is opened, and the specific area 53 is converted into a closed state when the large winning opening is closed.

As a feature of the specific area control data determination table for the small winning game shown in FIG. 95(c), there is an almost 100% (1/1) probability that the game ball enters the first big prize opening 50 during the small winning game. One point is that the opening/closing timing of the specific area 53 is set so that the specific area 53 is passed through at . By doing so, the player can play the small winning game with peace of mind, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 50 during the small winning game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of approximately 100% (1/1), it is set to 50%. The specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

Also, depending on the type of small winning game, the specific area 53 may be opened or closed so that the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of approximately 100% (1/1) (for example, the 2 small winning games), and when opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that entered the first large prize opening 50 passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of 25% (1/4) (for example, a third small winning game). A game) may also be provided.

(Main control board jackpot game processing)
The jackpot game process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing jackpot game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the set opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-3, and if the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process ends.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and a round flag indicating that a round game is in progress is added to the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Set to .

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing a round performance according to the current round game is performed.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round game is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-round flag is set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the round game is in progress, the process moves to step S340-6, and if the round game is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the elapsed time from the start of the current round game has reached the opening timing of the big winning opening specified by the control data of the jackpot game. If the condition for opening the big winning hole is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-7, and if the condition for opening the big winning hole is not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-8.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening opening process in step S340-7. Specifically, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) and the current big winning hole (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) are determined from the control data of the jackpot game. Specify the opening time of the second grand prize opening 56), and use the opening time of the grand prize opening and the drive data of the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid (the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) as the main Set it in the gaming RWM area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted into an open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for closing the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current opening of the big prize opening is the opening before the final opening in the current round game, and whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process moves to step S340-9, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process moves to step S340-10.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S340-9. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) of the current big winning hole (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the interval time (closing time) of the big winning hole is specified. time) is set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and at the same time, the drive data for the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for transition to the interval are satisfied. Specifically, the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 50 or second grand prize opening 56) in this round game has reached the maximum winning number, or It is determined whether the opening time of the final opening has elapsed. If the conditions for transition to the interval are satisfied, the process moves to step S340-11, and if the conditions for transition to the interval are not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, the current interval time (closing time of the big prize opening) is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, the interval time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the big winning prize set in the main RAM 110c is Clear the drive data of the mouth solenoid. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state. Also, instead of the in-round flag stored in the main RAM 110c, an interval in-between flag indicating that the round is in progress is set. When the interval transition process ends, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current interval is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If it is during the interval, the process moves to step S340-13, and if it is not during the interval, the process moves to step S340-19.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the interval time has elapsed. If the interval time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-14, and if the interval time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final round game in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round game has ended, the process moves to step S340-17, and if the final round game has not ended, the process moves to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs round game transition processing in step S340-15. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, a round game flag is set in place of the interval flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game process. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing a round performance according to the current round game is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the jackpot game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Also, in place of the interval flag stored in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, an ending flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the jackpot game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. As a result, an ending designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for executing an ending performance according to the current jackpot game is performed.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether an ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the ending is in progress, the process moves to step S340-20, and if the ending is not in progress, the current jackpot game process is ended.

In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game processing is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-21, the special figure special electric processing data is stored in order to move the processing to the jackpot game end processing. is set to "5", and the current jackpot game process ends.

(Small winning game processing on main control board)
The small winning game process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the small winning game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time set in the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process moves to step S350-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process moves to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the above-described special symbol stop processing has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S350-3, an opening/closing game in progress flag indicating that an opening/closing game is in progress that opens and closes the big prize opening is set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and when the opening time has elapsed. If not, the current small winning game process is ended.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is in progress with the opening/closing of the big prize opening. If the opening/closing game is in progress, the process moves to step S350-5, and if the opening/closing game is not in progress, the process moves to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the condition for opening the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening or interval of the small winning game has ended. If the condition for opening the big winning hole is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-6, and if the condition for opening the big winning hole is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-7.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening opening process in step S350-6. Specifically, the type of big winning hole to be opened (first big winning hole 50 or second big winning hole 56) and the current big winning hole ( Specify the opening time of the first grand prize opening 50 or the second grand prize opening 56), and determine the opening time of the grand prize opening and the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid (the first grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b or the second grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted into an open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the specific area 53 are satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening timing of the specific area 53 specified by the control data of the specific area shown in FIG. 76(c) (here, the opening timing of the big prize opening) has come. If the opening condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-8, and if the opening condition for the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area release processing in step S350-8. Specifically, drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted to an open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the closing timing of the specific area 53 (here, the closing timing of the big prize opening) specified by the control data of the specific area shown in FIG. 76(c) has come. If the closing condition for the specific area 53 is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-10, and if the closing condition for the specific area 53 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs specific area closing processing in step S350-10. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared. As a result, the specific area 53 is converted into a closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for closing the big prize opening is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed and whether the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening has reached the maximum number of prizes. If the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied, the process moves to step S350-12, and if the closing condition for the big winning opening is not satisfied, the process moves to step S350-13.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening closing process in step S350-12. Specifically, the interval time (closing time) is specified from the control data for the small winning game shown in FIG. Clears the drive data of the grand prize opening opening/closing solenoid set in the gaming RWM area of the RAM 110c. As a result, the big prize opening will be converted to a closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final interval time in the small winning game has elapsed. If the final interval time has elapsed, in step S350-14, the opening/closing gaming flag set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared, and if the final interval time has not elapsed, The current small winning game process ends.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned specific area passage flag is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the specific area passing flag has been saved, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the opening/closing game, and the process moves to step S350-16 assuming that a jackpot game is to be executed, and the specific area passing flag is saved. If not, the process moves to step S350-19 assuming that the ending is executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the opening/closing game.

In step S350-16, the main CPU 110a clears the specific area passing flag saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S350-17, performs jackpot game transfer processing. Specifically, control data (maximum number of round games, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) and clearing the time saving flag and various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "3" in order to shift the processing to the jackpot game processing, and ends the current small winning game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, the current ending time is specified from the control data of the small winning game, and the ending time is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that it is the ending of the small winning game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small winning game processing. As a result, an ending designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the game ball is placed in the specific area 53 in the ending production corresponding to the current small winning game (during the small winning game, more specifically, during the opening/closing game). Processing will be performed to execute a regret notification effect (such as a regret notification effect to notify that the vehicle did not pass).

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the ending time set in step S350-19 is greater than or equal to "0". If the ending is in progress, the process moves to step S350-22, and if the ending is not in progress, the current small winning game process is ended.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in step S350-19 described above has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current small hit game process is ended, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S350-23, a special figure special electric signal is sent to move the process to the special symbol memory determination process. After setting the processing data to "0", the current small winning game processing is ended.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the small winning game (conversion game) ends (10 openings of the first big prize opening or winning of 10 game balls). The jackpot game is not executed until it is done. Therefore, the player is not put at a disadvantage depending on the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game, the jackpot game is executed without performing the ending of the small winning game. Therefore, the period from the small win game to the big win game will not be extended, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the jackpot game may be executed after the small win game ends.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop special symbol data saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-2, determines whether the stop special symbol data is a jackpot special symbol. Determine whether If it is a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S360-3, and if it is not a jackpot special symbol (it is a small win special symbol), the process moves to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning that is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, the main CPU 110a acquires the gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning based on the gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning. The first gaming state setting table (see FIG. 99(a)) for setting the gaming state of is selected, and the process moves to step S360-7. The details of the first game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the gaming state information when passing through the specific area, which is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-6, determines the jackpot based on the gaming state information when passing through the specific area. The second game state setting table (see FIG. 99(b)) for setting the game state after the game is selected, and the process moves to step S360-7. The details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a collates the acquired gaming state information etc. with the selected gaming state setting table and sets the gaming state flag, the number of time reductions (J1 to J3), and the small number of times as the gaming state after the jackpot game. The remaining number of wins (Z) is determined and set in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, a gaming status designation command corresponding to the gaming status flag is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" in order to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

In this way, at the end of the jackpot game executed when the game ball passed the specific area 53 during the small win game, based on the game state when the game ball passed the specific area during the small win game, Predetermined processing (specifically, processing for determining gaming conditions after a jackpot game (gaming status, number of time savings, remaining number of small winnings), and setting the determined gaming conditions in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c ) is now possible. Therefore, it is possible to control the game (setting the game conditions) by utilizing events that occur in the actual game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, predetermined processing (specifically, the gaming conditions after the jackpot game (game status, time saving number, small It is possible to perform processing such as determining the remaining number of wins) and setting the determined gaming conditions in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, the game performance can be varied depending on whether it is a jackpot game via a small win game or a jackpot game without passing through a small win game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game, the predetermined process is not performed based on the gaming state when it is determined to be a jackpot, but based on the gaming state when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. Predetermined processing may also be performed.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 99(a) is a diagram showing a first gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a second gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the first gaming state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state to be set. A flag (a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving game state is in effect), a first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving game state, and a second special time-saving game state that ends the time-saving game state. A second time saving number (J2), which is the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a third time saving number (J3), which is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time saving gaming state. The remaining number of small winnings (Z), which is the number of small winning fluctuation displays that end the time-saving gaming state, is associated with the remaining number of small winnings (Z).

As shown in FIG. 99(b), the second game state setting table includes the stop special symbol data of the small hit special symbol and the game state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53, which indicates the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53. information, a gaming state flag to be set (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving gaming state), a first time saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, and a time saving flag. The second time-saving number (J2) is the number of variable displays of the second special symbol that ends the gaming state, and the second number of variable displays is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time-saving gaming state. 3 The number of time-saving games (J3) is associated with the remaining number of small winnings (Z), which is the number of small winning fluctuation displays that end the time-saving gaming state.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that the second time saving number (J2) is set when the game is executed in the time saving game state, rather than the second time saving number (J2) which is set when the game is performed in the normal gaming state. One point is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the second time saving number (J2) is greater. By doing this, the second time saving number (J2) set depending on the type of jackpot game can be varied, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is the second time saving number (J2) that is set when the game is executed in the normal game state, and the second time saving number (J2) that is set when the game is performed in the time saving game state. There is a jackpot game (2nd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) in which the 2nd time saving number (J2) is the same, and the 2nd time saving number (J2) of that jackpot game is the same as other jackpot games (2nd jackpot game, 4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game). One point is that the number of time reductions (J2) is greater than the second time saving number (J2) of the first jackpot game and the third jackpot game. By doing this, the value of the jackpot game can be made different based on the number of time savings rather than the difference depending on the prize ball that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest of the game. becomes.

The third feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set when the game is executed in the time-saving gaming state, rather than the remaining number of small wins (Z) that is set when the game is executed in the normal gaming state. One point is that there are jackpot games (first jackpot game, second jackpot game, third jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is larger. By doing so, it is possible to vary the remaining number of small wins (Z) set depending on the type of jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. There are jackpot games (4th jackpot game, 5th jackpot game) in which the remaining number of hits (Z) are the same, and in the normal gaming state, the remaining number of small wins (Z) of that jackpot game is the same as that of other jackpot games (the 5th jackpot game). An example of this is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) for the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, and the third jackpot game) is greater than the remaining number of small wins (Z). By doing this, the value of the jackpot game can be made different depending on the remaining number of small wins, rather than the difference depending on the prize ball that can be obtained during the jackpot game, and the game performance is improved and the interest of the game is increased. becomes possible.

The fifth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that a jackpot game executed via a small win game has a second time saving number (J2) set when executed in the normal gaming state. More importantly, there are jackpot games (1st V jackpot game, 3rd V jackpot game) in which the second time saving number (J2) set when executed in the time saving game state is greater. By doing this, it is possible to vary the second time saving number (J2) set depending on the type of jackpot game via the small win game, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest of the game. becomes.

The sixth feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 99 is that the jackpot game executed via the small winning game is smaller than the remaining number of small winnings (Z) set when executed in the normal gaming state. Another point is that the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when the game is executed in the time-saving gaming state is larger. By doing so, the value of the jackpot game via the small win game can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a specific direct jackpot (4th jackpot, 5th jackpot), the number of fluctuations to end the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is controlled after the jackpot ends does not change regardless of the gaming state, while the In the case of a jackpot via a win, the number of fluctuations to end the advantageous gaming state, which is controlled after the jackpot ends, can be changed depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectations regarding whether it is a direct jackpot or a jackpot via a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel happy and sad about the state of the game when a small win occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions set in the case of a specific direct jackpot (fourth jackpot, fifth jackpot) is greater than the number of time reductions set in the case of a small win. Further, the number of time savings set for a jackpot via a small win in a specific gaming state (time saving gaming state) is greater than the number of time savings set for a jackpot via a small win in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of time savings set in the special time saving game state is greater than the number of time savings set in the case of a direct jackpot (fourth jackpot, fifth jackpot).

Further, the number of small wins, which is a condition for ending the advantageous gaming state, is set to a smaller value than the number of fluctuations, which is a condition for ending the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state). Furthermore, the number of small wins at which the advantageous gaming state ends varies depending on the type of jackpot (special symbol).

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small win game)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a gaming state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, and FIG. 100(a) is a timing chart when a jackpot fluctuation display is executed in a normal gaming state. , FIG. 100(b) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (before the final fluctuation), and FIG. 100(c) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (final fluctuation). It is a timing chart when it is executed.

Regarding the gaming state that is referred to in order to set the gaming conditions (playing state, number of time savings, number of remaining small winnings) at the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, the timing when it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot judgment (when the jackpot is won) ).

As shown in FIG. 100(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the timing when the jackpot is won. The gaming conditions (gaming status, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the gaming status in . In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (before the final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, The gaming condition at the time when the jackpot is won is referred to and the gaming conditions (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small winnings) are set. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 100(c), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving gaming state (final variation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, at the start of the jackpot variation display at T1, that is, the jackpot The gaming conditions (gaming status, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) are set by referring to the gaming status at the time of winning. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time saving gaming state.

(Game status referenced at the end of a jackpot game via a small win game)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a gaming state that is referred to at the end of a jackpot game via a small winning game, and FIG. 101(a) is a timing chart when a small winning fluctuation display is executed in a normal gaming state. Yes, and FIG. 101(b) is a timing chart when a small win fluctuation display is executed in which the time-saving end condition is not satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 100(c) is a timing chart when the time-saving ending condition is satisfied in the time-saving gaming state. It is a timing chart when a small winning fluctuation display is executed.

Regarding the game state that is referred to in order to set the game conditions (game state, time saving number, remaining number of small winnings) at the end of the jackpot game via the small winning game, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game. The timing is when the game is played (the time of transition to the jackpot game).

As shown in FIG. 101(a), when the small winning variation display is executed in the normal gaming state, the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small winning game at T4 at the end of the jackpot game at T6. The gaming condition at the time of the game is referred to and the gaming conditions (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal gaming state has been in place since the start of the small win fluctuation display, the timing of T4 is the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), when a small winning variation display that does not satisfy the time saving end condition is executed in the time saving game state, at the end of the T6 jackpot game, the game ball is played during the T4 small winning game. The gaming condition (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the gaming condition when the character passes through the specific area 53. In this case, when the small win fluctuation display at T2 is stopped, the various time saving numbers and the remaining number of small winnings are not "0" and the time saving gaming state is maintained, so the timing of T4 is called the time saving gaming state. It turns out. Incidentally, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the jackpot game starts and shifts to the normal gaming state, but when passing the specific area 53, it is called a time-saving gaming state before shifting to the normal gaming state. It is supposed to be.

As shown in FIG. 101(c), when the small winning variation display that satisfies the time saving end condition in the time saving game state is executed, at the end of the T6 jackpot game, the game ball is played during the T4 small winning game. The gaming condition (gaming condition, number of various time saving times, remaining number of small wins) is set by referring to the gaming condition when the character passes through the specific area 53. In this case, when the small winning fluctuation display at T2 is stopped, one of the time saving times becomes "0" and the time saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, so the timing of T4 is called the normal gaming state. It turns out.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, when the jackpot game ends, there are two cases: when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed and the jackpot game is executed, and when the small win fluctuation display is executed and the jackpot game is executed. The sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the gaming state referred to in order to set the gaming conditions (gaming state, number of various time reductions, remaining number of small wins) is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Mode flow showing the transition of game modes)
FIG. 102(a) is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in a normal gaming state, and FIG. 102(b) is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in a rush battle mode or a wild dance mode (normal time-saving gaming state). FIG. 102(c) is a mode flow when a jackpot game is executed in super wild dance mode or infinite mode (normal time-saving game state).

As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the normal gaming state, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, three rounds are played. A first jackpot game consisting of a game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is set to 1.
In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, a second jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then a second jackpot game is executed. The number of times shortened by 2 hours (J2) is set to 95 times, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, a third jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then a A transition is made to the wild dance mode in which the number of 2-hour shortening (J2) is set to 7 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 1.

Also, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, a fourth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then a The number of 2-hour reductions (J2) is set to 496, and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.
In addition, when a jackpot (first result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, a fifth jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then a The number of 2-hour reductions (J2) is set to 496, and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.

Furthermore, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the 1st V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 times, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, a 2V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 times, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small hit special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, a 3rd V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then Then, the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 times, and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1 time.

As shown in FIG. 102(b), in the rush battle mode or wild dance mode (normal time-saving game state) where the remaining number of small hits is one, the jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol results in a jackpot (first result ), and the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small wins (remains 1 round), and then the first jackpot game is executed. The game shifts to a super wild dance mode in which the number of 2-hour shortening (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 1) and will be repeated 3 times. The first jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95, and the game shifts to a super wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2. do.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 1) and will be repeated 3 times. The first jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95, and the game shifts to a super wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2. do.

In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 1) and will be repeated 10 times. A fourth jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 496 and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 1) and will be repeated 10 times. A fifth jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 496 and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.

Furthermore, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 0 and the game returns to the normal gaming state. A first V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to one.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 0 and the game returns to the normal gaming state. A 2nd V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 1.
In addition, when a small win (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 0 and the game returns to the normal gaming state. A 3rd V jackpot game consisting of three round games is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 and the game shifts to a wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to one.

As shown in FIG. 102(c), in Super Ranbu mode or Infinite mode (normal time-saving gaming state) where the remaining number of small hits is 2, the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination related to the first special (first result). When it is determined that the jackpot special symbol 01 is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot game consisting of three rounds is executed without subtracting the remaining number of small wins (remains 2 rounds), and then the second jackpot game is executed. The number of time reductions (J2) is set to 95 times and the remaining number of small hits (Z) is set to 2 times, and the game shifts to a super wild dance mode.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 02 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 2) and will be repeated 3 times. A second jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95, and the game shifts to a super wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2. do.
In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 03 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 2) and will be repeated 3 times. A third jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95, and the game shifts to a super wild dance mode in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to 2. do.

In addition, if the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 11 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 2) and will be 10 times. A fourth jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 496 and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.
In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (first result) and the jackpot special symbol 12 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins will not be subtracted (remains 2) and will be 10 times. A fifth jackpot game consisting of a round game is executed, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 496 and the game shifts to an infinite mode in which the remaining number of small wins is set to 2.

Furthermore, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 13 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 1, but the normal time saving game state is A super wild dance mode in which the 1st V jackpot game consisting of 3 round games is maintained, and then the 2nd time saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2. to move to.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 14 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 1, but the normal time-saving game state is A super wild dance mode in which the second V jackpot game consisting of 10 round games is maintained, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2. to move to.
In addition, when a small hit (second result) is determined in the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol and the small win special symbol 15 is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 1, but the normal time saving game state is A super wild dance mode in which the 3rd V jackpot game consisting of 3 round games is maintained, and then the second time saving number (J2) is set to 95 and the remaining number of small wins is set to 2. to move to.

In this way, when the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) is executed as a result of jackpot determination regarding the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the second time saving number (J2) is 7 times. A first jackpot game or a second jackpot game (corresponding to a second special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game When executed, the second time saving number (J2) is controlled to a normal time saving gaming state (corresponding to the second specific gaming state) in which the second time saving number (J2) is set to 55 or 95 times, which is more than 7 times. There is. Therefore, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied depending on the type of the executed jackpot game (stopped displayed jackpot special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot (first result), a third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) can be executed, and the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is executed. If the result is a small hit (second result), it is possible to execute the 2nd V jackpot game (corresponding to the 2nd special game) which is more advantageous to the player than the 3rd jackpot game, and it is related to the 2nd special symbol. When the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (first result), it becomes possible to execute a fourth jackpot game or a fifth jackpot game (equivalent to the third special game) that is more advantageous to the player than the 2nd V jackpot game. There is. Therefore, the type of jackpot game can be varied depending on the type of special symbol and the type of determination result, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the wild dance mode or super wild dance mode (specific game State: In the normal time-saving gaming state), if a jackpot (first result) is determined as a result of the jackpot judgment regarding the second special symbol, a fourth jackpot game or a second jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the second V jackpot game 5 jackpot game (corresponding to the 3rd special game) is possible, and if it is determined that the jackpot determination regarding the 2nd special symbol is a small win (second result), the 2V jackpot game (corresponding to the 2nd special game) is executed. (equivalent to games) can be executed. Therefore, even if a jackpot determination is made regarding the same second special symbol, the type of jackpot game to be executed can be varied depending on the type of determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, a fourth jackpot game or a fifth jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) which is more advantageous to the player than the 2V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) which is more advantageous to the player than the third jackpot game (corresponding to the first special game) In the infinite mode (specific game state: normal time-saving game state) that was controlled after the third special game (equivalent to the third special game) was executed, a jackpot (first result) was determined as a result of the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol. In this case, it is possible to execute the fourth jackpot game or the fifth jackpot game (equivalent to the third special game), and when it is determined that the jackpot determination regarding the second special symbol is a small hit (second result). , the second V jackpot game (corresponding to the second special game) can be executed. Therefore, even if a jackpot determination is made regarding the same second special symbol, the type of jackpot game to be executed can be varied depending on the type of determination result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol and a jackpot game is executed in the rush battle mode or wild dance mode (normal time-saving game state), if the jackpot game is executed under the game conditions (second time-saving game state), The number of times, remaining number of small hits, production mode, etc.) will be ranked up (improved). Therefore, the value of the jackpot game in the normal time-saving game state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the rush battle mode (normal time-saving game state), a small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed as a second special symbol, and the condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small win game. When a jackpot game is executed, the game conditions (second time saving number, remaining number of small winnings, performance mode, etc.) are ranked up (improved). Therefore, the value of the small winning game in the normal time-saving game state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol and a jackpot game is executed in the super wild dance mode (normal time-saving gaming state), and when the jackpot special symbol is displayed as the second special symbol, is stopped and a jackpot game is executed that requires the game ball to pass through the specific area 53 during the winning game, the game conditions (second time saving number, remaining number of small winnings, presentation mode, etc.) It is now possible to maintain the rank without being downgraded. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconveniences in which the player is disappointed due to a big hit or a small hit in the normal time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, no matter which game mode (normal game state, normal time-saving game state), if the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol and the jackpot game is executed, the game condition (second time-saving game state) (number of times, remaining number of small wins, presentation mode, etc.) is the highest rank in the normal time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the value of the jackpot with the second special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol and a jackpot game is executed, regardless of the type of jackpot game, the gaming conditions (second time saving number, remaining number of small wins, production mode, etc.) are set to the maximum. Instead of ranking it to a higher rank, for example, if the 4th jackpot special game is executed, it will be the playing condition of Super Ranbu mode, and if the 5th jackpot special game is executed, it will be the playing condition of infinite mode. You may also do so. In this case, the rate at which the fifth jackpot special game is executed may be higher than the rate at which the fourth jackpot special game is executed, or vice versa.

(General control board control process)
Referring to FIG. 103, the general map and general electric power control processing (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing general electric power control processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general electricity processing data, and in step S402, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded general electricity processing data, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. Execute this to end the current regular electricity control process.

Specifically, if the general pattern/universal electric processing data = 0, the process for executing the fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol based on the reserved memory (common pattern judgment information) and the general pattern/universal electric processing data are set to "1". A normal symbol variation process (step S410) is executed to perform a process of changing to a normal symbol. The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later.

If the general figure general electric power processing data = 1, the processing for executing the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner, the processing for changing the general electric figure general electric power processing data to "0", etc. are performed. The auxiliary game process (step S420) is executed.

(Normal pattern variation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. If the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process moves to step S410-12, and if the normal symbols are not in the variable display mode, the process moves to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of normal symbols reserved (G) is 1 or more. If the number of normal symbols held (G) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S410-3, and if the number of normal symbols held (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the normal symbol reservation number (G) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, performs a shift process of the data stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and The ordinary figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the ordinary symbol determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the ordinary symbol determination information reservation storage region. In addition, the ordinary figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the ordinary figure judgment information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th memory part, which is the ordinary figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th memory part. The normal pattern determination information used in the previous game is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing in step S410-5. Specifically, using the hit determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 105(a)), it is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the gaming state and the random number value for hit determination stored in the normal symbol execution storage area. decide. The details of the hit determination table for normal symbol determination will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, using the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 105(b)), the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display is determined based on the gaming state, the winning determination result, and the random value for determining the regular symbol. Determine the stop pattern data of the symbol. The details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the stop symbol data.

The main CPU 110a performs normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S410-8. Specifically, using the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 105(c)), there is a process for displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner based on the gaming state, the winning determination result, and the normal pattern variation pattern random value. Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). In addition, the details of the ordinary pattern fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a general pattern fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the general pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the normal figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the common figure variation pattern.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. The symbol fluctuation display is started, and the current normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the fluctuating display of the normal symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 62 by being output in the output control process of step S800. A variable display will be performed.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the current normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is stopped in step S410-13, and in step S410-14. , a normal symbol confirmation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the production control board 130.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (winning winning). If it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is ended, and if it is a winning normal symbol, the auxiliary game is controlled from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 105(d)) in step S410-16. Obtain auxiliary game control data to play. The details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and it becomes possible to grasp that the opening of the auxiliary game has started on the production control board 130.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in 410-16 of the auxiliary game in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-19, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data obtained in 410-16. The data is set to "1" and the current normal symbol variation process is ended.

(Hit judgment table for normal symbols)
FIG. 105(a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referred to when determining a hit based on the normal symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the hit determination table for normal symbols corresponds to the gaming state when performing hit determination, the random number value for hit determination, and the determination result of hit determination (win, loss). The approximate probability of winning is listed in the far right column for reference.

A "win" is a determination result that the auxiliary game will be executed, and a "loss" is a determination result that the auxiliary game will not be executed. In addition, for the hit determination, only a loss is set, and a special loss (time saving) is not set.

The first feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. The point is that the probability (proportion) of winning is the same regardless of whether the player is in a time-saving gaming state or not.By doing this, it is hoped that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the gaming state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the hit determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 105(a) is that the hit probability remains constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the probability (proportion) of being determined to be a hit may be higher in the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving state (normal gaming state) (generating a regular game probability change), In this case, the probability (proportion) of winning in the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state may be the same, or the probability of winning in the special time-saving gaming state is higher than in the normal time-saving gaming state. The probability (ratio) of being determined may be higher, or the probability (ratio) of being determined to be a win may be higher in the normal time-saving gaming state than in the special time-saving gaming state.

(Normal pattern judgment table)
FIG. 105(b) is a normal symbol determination table that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol based on the regular symbol determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the regular symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 105(b), the normal symbol determination table includes the gaming state at the time of determination, the determination result of the hit determination (hit, loss), the random number value for the hit symbol determination, and the normal symbol determination result. The determination result, the stopped ordinary symbol data indicating the determination result, and the ordinary symbol designation command indicating the result of the ordinary symbol determination are associated with each other.

The normal symbol "0" is a loss normal symbol in which the auxiliary game is not executed.
The normal symbol "1" is a normal symbol when an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 is opened once is executed.
The normal symbol "2" is a winning normal symbol in which an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 opens twice is executed.

The first feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105(b) is that two types of normal symbols are set for executing auxiliary games in which the number of times the second starting port 47 is opened is different. It will be done. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the gameplay of the auxiliary game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105(b) is that the selection ratio of the normal symbols is constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Public figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 105(c) is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a normal symbol fluctuation pattern based on the normal pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 105(c), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the gaming state at the time of judgment, the judgment result of the winning judgment, the random value of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, and the judgment of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment. The resulting variation time is associated with a common figure variation pattern designation command that indicates the determination result.

The first feature of the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the time-saving game state, special time-saving game state), a relatively short variable time is determined, that is, it is easier to determine a short variable time in the time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. By doing so, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second start opening 47 in the various time-saving game states than in the non-time-saving state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the general pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 105(c) is that the selection ratio of each general pattern fluctuation pattern does not change depending on the set value and is the same. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 105(d) is an auxiliary game control table used to control the auxiliary game based on the type of normal winning symbol.

As shown in FIG. 105(d), the auxiliary game control table includes the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop general pattern data, the number of openings of the second starting port 47, and the opening time of the auxiliary game. , the first opening time of the second starting port 47, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the second starting port 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game are associated.

The first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 105(d) is that the auxiliary game is executed in various time-saving game states (normal time-saving game state, special The opening time of the second starting port 47 is longer when the auxiliary game is executed in the time saving game state). By doing so, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second start opening 47 in various time-saving game states than in non-time-saving game states, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 105(d) is the performance of the auxiliary game in the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state (opening time, number of times the second starting port 47 opens, second starting There is no difference in the time value for opening the mouth 47. By doing so, the player has an advantage in any time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when setting a special time-saving game state to occur during the normal time-saving game state, the performance of the previous and subsequent time-saving states is the same, eliminating the need for complex control and realizing an additional number of pure time-saving games. It becomes possible to do so.

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 105(d) is the performance of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game (opening time, number of times the second starting port 47 opens, time value for the second starting port 47 to open). ) is constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to determine the setting value from the progress of the auxiliary game, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, depending on whether it is a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game (at least one of the opening time, the number of times the second starting port 47 opens, and the time value for the second starting port 47 to open) ) may be made to be different.

Also, depending on whether it is a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, the performance of the auxiliary game (opening time, number of times the second starting port 47 opens, at least one of the time values for the second starting port 47 to open) When the special time-saving game state overlaps with the normal time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state may take over the performance of the auxiliary game of the normal time-saving game state.

(Main control board external information data creation process)
The external information data creation process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing external information data creation processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S720-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. If there is no winning, the process moves to step S720-3, and if there is a winning, in step S720-2, external information data of the starting hole winning signal indicating that the game ball has won in the starting hole is sent. Set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable display of the special symbols has stopped. If the fluctuating display has not stopped (either during fluctuating display, waiting for a customer, or playing a jackpot game), the process moves to step S720-5, and if the fluctuating display has stopped, step S720 -4, external information data of a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the variable display of the special symbol has stopped is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether a jackpot game has been started. If the jackpot game has not started, the process moves to step S720-7, and if the jackpot game has started, in step S720-6, the external part of the special game signal indicating that the jackpot game is in the state is Information data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the jackpot game has ended in step S720-7. If the jackpot game has not ended, the process moves to step S720-9, and if the jackpot game has ended, in step S720-8, the special game set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c is Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether an advantageous state (including a jackpot game and a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state has started. If the advantageous state has not started, the process moves to step S720-11, and if the advantageous state has started, in step S720-10, an advantageous state signal indicating that the advantageous state is in progress is transferred to the main RAM 110c. Set in the external information data output area.

In step S720-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the advantageous state has ended. If the advantageous state has not ended, the process moves to step S720-13, and if the advantageous state has ended, in step S720-12, the advantageous state set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c is Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 has started. If the frame opening has not started, the process moves to step S720-15, and if the frame opening has started, in step S720-14, external information of the frame opening signal indicating that the frame is being opened is transmitted. The data is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening of the frame has been completed (the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 have been closed). If the frame opening has not been completed, the process moves to step S720-17, and if the frame opening has been completed, in step S720-16, the frame opening set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c is performed. Clear the external information data of the signal.

In step S720-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether RWM clear or a security error (various abnormalities) has occurred. If RWM clear or a security error has not occurred, the process moves to step S720-19, and if RWM clear or a security error has occurred, it is determined in step S720-18 that RWM clear or a security error has occurred. The external information data of the security signal indicating the security signal is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether a condition for paying out a predetermined unit (10 in this case) of prize balls is satisfied. If the payout conditions are not met, the process moves to step S720-21, and if the payout conditions are not met, in step S720-20, it is determined that the payout conditions for a predetermined unit of prize balls are met. The external information data of the prize ball schedule signal shown is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S720-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the payout of a predetermined unit (10 in this case) of prize balls has been completed. If the payout of prize balls has not been completed, the current external information data creation process is ended, and if the payout of prize balls has been completed, the payout of a predetermined unit of prize balls is completed in step S720-22. The external information data of the prize ball payout signal indicating that the ball has been played is set in the external information data output area of the main RAM 110c, and the current external information data creation process is completed.

The various external information data set in the external information data output area are outputted to the outside of the gaming machine 1 as gaming information from the various terminals of the gaming information output terminal board through the output control process in step S750 described above. Become.

(Explanation of various signals output as game information)
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the types of various signals output as game information from the various output terminals of the game information output terminal board 90, the output timings of the various signals, and the output periods of the various signals.

A starting hole winning signal is output from the first terminal for 100 ms when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47.
A symbol confirmation signal is output from the second terminal for 500 ms when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
A special game signal is output from the third terminal from the start of the jackpot game to the duration of the jackpot game.
An advantageous state signal is output from the fourth terminal from the start of the advantageous state to the duration of the advantageous state.

A frame opening signal is outputted from the fifth terminal from the time when the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is detected until the opening continues.
A security signal is output from the sixth terminal for 200 ms from the time of occurrence of various abnormalities (RWM clear, unauthorized winning, abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, payout abnormality).
A payout schedule signal is output from the seventh terminal for 100 ms from the time when it is determined that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out.
A payout completion signal is output from the eighth terminal for 100 ms from the completion of paying out a predetermined number of game balls.

In this way, since the gaming information is output to the outside of the gaming machine 1 via the gaming information output terminal board 90, the operating status of the gaming machine 1 can be monitored and its performance can be monitored by an information collecting device such as a hall computer. It becomes possible to perform analysis, etc.

(Main control board performance display data setting process)
The performance display data setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 by displaying the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It is determined whether the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched and the process moves to step S850-2; if the display switching value is not "0", the process moves to step S850-2. , the process moves to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not to be changed. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether a lighting confirmed flag for determining whether lighting of the information display 113 has been confirmed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmation flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113 and the process moves to step S850-4; if the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved, the information display is performed. The process moves to step S850-3 to confirm that the device 113 is lit. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step S850-3, the main CPU 110a displays a lighting confirmation display for lighting all segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) forming the information display 113. Determine the data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a obtains a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is obtained, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is obtained. Get the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", get the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown) and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of outs during the normal period indicated by the number of outs during the normal period counter, and the obtained normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

In step S850-6, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 described above is referenced, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be done. Note that the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above in step S850-7, and determines in step S850-8 whether the display switching time counter is larger than an upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display on the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process moves to step S850-15; if it is larger than the upper limit, the display on the information display 113 is Assuming that the time for switching the performance information to be displayed has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-described lighting confirmation flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process moves to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S850-11. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the data selection counter described above in step S850-12, and determines in step S85-13 whether the data selection counter is larger than an upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process moves to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the game ball counting process described above, and in step S850-16, in the game ball counting process described above, the main CPU 110a restores the register for information in the main RAM 110c. The gaming stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is completed.

In this way, all segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (the lighting is confirmed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is malfunctioning or which segment is malfunctioning.

In addition, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare performance information (normal base value) in two gaming sections, and it becomes possible to check the actual performance of the gaming machine and to understand the possibility that fraudulent activity has occurred.

(Display information on the information display in each game section)
Next, the display information on the information display 113 in each game section will be explained using FIG. 109. In the display information table of FIG. 109, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL.", which indicates the normal base value of the current gaming section, and "bL.", which indicates the normal base value of the previous gaming section. ``b1.'', ``b2.'' indicating that it is the normal base value of the gaming section two times before, and ``b3.'' indicating that it is the normal base value of the gaming section three times ago.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 is "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of outs during normal play is "0". “00” indicates that the number of outs during normal play is “1” or more and the normal base value is “1” to “99”, and “01” to “99” indicate that the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that the number is "100" or more. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and will be displayed in two digits.

The numerical information displayed on the numerical segment does not change its display form (it is lit up) regardless of the game period or the number of outs during normal play, but the identification information displayed on the identification segment does not change regardless of the game period or the number of outs during normal play. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal play, etc. (the presence or absence of a calculated normal base value and the credibility of the calculated normal base value).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when displaying the identification information of the game section for which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed blinking. In addition, in the game sections after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during the normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is displayed by lighting.

Here, to give an example of the display on the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of outs during normal play is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". If the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." is displayed blinking in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical value segment. ' will be displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is ``99'' or less, performance information that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display, ``00'' to ``99'', is displayed in the numeric segment, while the normal base value If the value is ``100'' or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed as ``99.'' in the numerical segment, making it easier to understand that it is an abnormal normal base value. .

Also, if the normal base value is less than 10, "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical value segment, and it is displayed as two digits (for example, "01", etc.). It becomes possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

Also, when displaying the normal base value of the current gaming section, if the number of outs during normal play in the current gaming section is 0 to 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." displayed on the identification segment is displayed blinking, it becomes easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, "--", which is not a numerical value, will be displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value will not be calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand what is not being done.

Note that the game ball counting process, performance information calculation process, and performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, game ball counting The processing may be executed within an input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is a game program.

In addition, the out ball detection switch 39a detects the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first big winning opening 50, and the second big winning opening 56, and the out opening 39. Instead of detecting out balls made up of game balls that have flowed into the out hole, the out ball detection switch 39a may be configured to detect only game balls that have flowed into the out port. In that case, the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch It is preferable to add one to the number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) each time a game ball is detected at 56a.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting changes)
With reference to FIG. 110, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting changes will be described. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a timing chart and an example of effect when initializing various drive sources after setting changes.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, specific area 53, second big winning hole 56) (ball entering difficulty level) is changed, etc. Various drives for operating the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 69 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and a setting change operation is performed (the setting key switch 112a is turned on, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts a setting change mode. This is a pre-start state before game progress control is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 113d of the information display 113.

At timing T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are completed, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 113 is The setting values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and no longer displayed. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and an initial operation notification (initial operation screen display, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" "Please" output) is started.

At the timing T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification was started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T4, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T6, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T8, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the various drive sources stopped operating, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 is started, and all 7 segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are started. When all the lights are lit, lighting confirmation begins. Note that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 ends.

At timing T10, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking settings)
With reference to FIG. 111, a specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, specific area 53, second big winning hole 56) (ball entering difficulty level) is changed, etc. Various drives for operating the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 69 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when a setting confirmation operation is performed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on (the setting key switch 112a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts a setting confirmation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. The state is before the start. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "6") is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display 113d of the information display 113.

When the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed at the timing T2, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are finished, the initial operations of various drive sources are started, and 7 at the right end of the information display 113 is The setting value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and an initial operation notification (initial operation screen display, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" "Please" output) is started.

Note that the specific example from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 is the same as the specific example from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 in the specific example when the various drive sources are initially operated after the setting change shown in FIG. Therefore, the explanation here will be omitted.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member) that affect the result of the game 52, various drive sources for operating the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is initially operated, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5, only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (only the game board 5, only the board unit 500 is installed). (including replacement of the game machine), it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initialized (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66 , the right-hand drive display 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, so it is possible to avoid placing an unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initialized, an initial operation notification is provided to encourage the operation confirmation of the various drive sources. It is possible to inform the operator (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is the timing to check the operation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to have the operator check the operation appropriately.

In addition, even in the pre-start state before the start of game progress control, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends. Since the initial operation is performed, there is no need to perform complicated operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (confirming the settings), and it becomes possible to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is started after an operation standby time has elapsed. It is possible to provide enough time from the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) until the operation confirmation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to appropriately perform the operation confirmation.

In addition, the same initial operation notification is issued regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off, so the big prize can be won. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it becomes possible to properly check the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is performed, and in the playable state where the progress control of the game is performed, the game Since the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 is performed that does not affect the result of the operation, it is possible to confirm two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening are opened. Since the system does not output the open signal even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and also to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of performance information is regulated) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until the game progress control starts. Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing an unnecessary processing load on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control has started (display of performance information is allowed), the game progress control has started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the player is present, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed. can be appropriately notified, and it is possible to ensure convenience on the game parlor side.

In addition, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the information display 113 does not display the setting values or performance information of the gaming machine, so that employees at the game parlor cannot confirm the initial operation of the various drive sources. This makes it possible to concentrate one's consciousness and accurately judge failures in various drive sources.

Note that after the game progress control has started, all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting, but after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, In this case, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 112, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 are explained. The operations at the operation timing (initial operation, jackpot game operation, small win game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state, auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) are compared.

The number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven is the same during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state and during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

The driving time for one operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary gaming operation during the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the total driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is shorter during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

The driving time of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is longer during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the total driving time of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is shorter during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

The number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven is greater during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the total driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b is shorter during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

The total driving time of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b is shorter during the initial operation than during the jackpot game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

It should be noted that at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and the time required for one time driving. , may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, the time required for one time driving. , the value may be smaller than the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven at the time of initial operation, the time of one time of driving, and the total time of driving is replaced with the number of times of driving, the time of one time of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. , may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven at the time of initial operation, the time of one time of driving, and the total time of driving is replaced with the number of times of driving, the time of one time of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. , may be set to a value larger than the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is driven at the time of initial operation, the time of one time of driving, and the total time of driving is replaced with the number of times of driving, the time of one time of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. , the value may be smaller than the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is the number of times the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the small winning game operation. , one driving time, and the total driving time may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first big winning opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the initial operation and the total driving time is set to be greater than the number of driving times and the total driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. It can be set to a large value. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is driven during the initial operation and the total driving time is set to be smaller than the one driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. It can be a value. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the small winning game operation, the driving time per time. , may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the driving time and total driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the initial operation is set to be longer than the driving time and total driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b during the small winning game operation. It can be set to a large value. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the number of times the flow path switching solenoid 52b is driven during the small winning game operation. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the flow path switching solenoid 52b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is replaced with the driving time per time, the total driving time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). It may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the drive time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b is driven during the initial operation, the driving time per time, and the total driving time is set to be larger than the driving time once and the total driving time during the jackpot game operation. May be used as a value. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(First modification)
The first modification of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116. In the first modification, the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, the drive source initial operation process is performed during the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process, and the settings This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that RWM clear is performed during execution of the change process, so only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described using FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that correspond to the initial setting process of the main control board of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 8, and the explanation thereof is omitted, and only the surrounding parts that are different will be explained.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (gaming program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the process for changing (updating) the set value (probability of being determined to be a jackpot in jackpot determination), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, and the above-mentioned The drive source initial operation process (gaming program) is performed, and the process moves to step S26.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (gaming program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the gaming control state (initializing the gaming RWM area other than the set value area) and the above-mentioned drive source initial operation process (gaming program), and the process moves to step S26. Note that details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (gaming program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying the setting value saved in the setting value (during game) area of the gaming RWM area on the information display 113 and the above-mentioned drive source initial operation process are performed, and step S30 Processing is moved to .

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be explained using FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the production control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for notifying RWM clear preparation.

"RWM clear preparation notification" refers to displaying a clear preparation screen on the image display device to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or notifying the audio output device 9 of "Please press the RWM clear switch again". This means outputting audio over a predetermined period of time.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (gaming program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow Processing is performed to initially operate the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Note that details regarding the initial operations of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and RWM clear is performed and the process moves to step S24-4; if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24-2. Transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c other than the set value area. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the gaming RWM area before RWM clearing is not carried over.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24-5. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process to end the RWM clear preparation notification described above.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode is ended by the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear processing.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation)
A specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, specific area 53, second big winning hole 56) (ball entering difficulty level) is changed, etc. Various drives for operating the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 69 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67, status confirmation display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that RWM clear preparation is in progress is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the various drive sources start operating (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RWM clear preparation notifications (display of the clear preparation screen, notification voice "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm solenoid operation Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice "Please do so" will begin.

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

At timing T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and RWM clear preparation are performed. When the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the pre-start state. Transition to possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 is started, and all 7 segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are started. When all the lights are lit, lighting confirmation begins. Note that the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 started, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member) that affect the result of the game 52, various drive sources for operating the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is initially operated, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5, only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (only the game board 5, only the board unit 500 is installed). (including replacement of the game machine), it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initialized (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (the first Special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66 , the right-hand drive display 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, so it is possible to avoid placing an unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. becomes possible.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated, a setting change notification (setting The operation of the gaming machine 1 is checked to confirm that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources. It is possible to inform the workers (factory workers, game store clerks) and have them appropriately check the operation.

In addition, in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated, so the start time is before the game progress control starts. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the previous state, and it is possible to reduce the development cost (shorten the development period, etc.) of the gaming machine 1.

Additionally, when the pre-start state ends due to a setting value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation), the operation of various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of each drive source has elapsed. Therefore, the initial operation of the various drive sources is not carried out in a game ready state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusion with the operation of the various drive sources in accordance with the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is performed, and in the playable state where the progress control of the game is performed, the game Since the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 is performed that does not affect the result of the operation, it is possible to confirm two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off, so the big prize can be won. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it becomes possible to properly check the operation. .

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening are opened. Since the system does not output the open signal even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and also to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of performance information is regulated) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until the game progress control starts. Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing an unnecessary processing load on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control has started (display of performance information is allowed), the game progress control has started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the player is present, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed. can be appropriately notified, and it is possible to ensure convenience on the game parlor side.

In addition, when setting change notification in setting change mode, a setting change screen was displayed that displayed the text "Settings changing", but in addition to the text "Settings changing", various drive sources A setting change screen may be displayed that displays the words "Driving source initial operation in progress" or "Please check solenoid operation" to prompt visual confirmation of the initial operation.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 116, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second grand winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 are explained. The operations at the operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, small win game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state, and auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) are compared.

The driving time for one operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

The driving time of the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is longer during the initial operation than during the small winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b once during the initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time once during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. . In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. . In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b for one time during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time for one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during the initial operation whether the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Also, set the driving time of the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b once during the initial operation to the same value as the total driving time or the driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. It may be set to approximately the same (similar) value. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time for one time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the initial operation may be set to a smaller value than the driving time for one driving time of the first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b during the small winning game operation. . In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b.

Further, the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during the initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during the small winning game operation. . In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of the flow path switching solenoid 52b once during the small winning game operation. In this way, it is possible to confirm during the initial operation whether the flow path switching solenoid 52b can perform the small winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Moreover, even if the driving time for one time of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation is set to the same value or almost the same (similar) value as the driving time for one time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). good. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Moreover, the driving time of the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time at one time at the time of the jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second big prize opening/closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
The second modification of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 118. Note that the second modified example does not have a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, does not have a status confirmation display 68, and RWM clear processing continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Since this embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 in the second modification will be described using FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step S12, and performs startup wait processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game ball.

The main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed in step S16. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S23 as a transition to the RWM clear preparation mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power has been restored and the process moves to step S18, and if the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time and the process moves to step S23.

The main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S18, and determines whether the checksum is normal in step S19. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S18. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to step S20, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process moves to the RWM clear preparation mode. The process moves to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process to issue a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage designation command and a normal symbol storage designation command to be described later) to the production control board 130 in step S22. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and also performs processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S30.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the production control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the production control board 130 performs processing for notifying RWM clear preparation.

"RWM clear preparation notification" refers to displaying a clear preparation screen on the image display device to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or notifying the audio output device 9 of "Please press the RWM clear switch again". This means outputting audio over a predetermined period of time.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and RWM clear is performed, and the process moves to step S25, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process of step S24 is repeated. .

In step S25, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the gaming RWM area before RWM clearing is not carried over.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S26. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (gaming program) in step S27. Specifically, various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first grand prize opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second grand prize opening/closing solenoid 57b) are initialized. Perform the processing to make it happen. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S31, starts controlling the progress of the game by allowing all interrupts. , the current initial setting process ends.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clearing will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated after RWM clearing.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, specific area 53, second big winning hole 56) (ball entering difficulty level) is changed, etc. Various drives for operating the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 69 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed at timing T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, initial operation notification (display of initial operation screen, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt operation confirmation of various drive sources.

At the timing T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification was started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T4, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T6, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T8, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the various drive sources stopped operating, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 is started, and all 7 segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are started. When all the lights are lit, lighting confirmation begins. Note that the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At timing T10, when a confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member) that affect the result of the game 52, various drive sources for operating the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is initially operated, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5, only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (only the game board 5, only the board unit 500 is installed). (including replacement of the game machine), it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, first special symbol display 60, 2 special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67) Since it is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid imposing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and it is also possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initialized, an initial operation notification is provided to encourage the operation confirmation of the various drive sources. It is possible to inform the operator (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is the timing to check the operation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to have the operator check the operation appropriately.

In addition, even in the pre-start state before the start of game progress control, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated after the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while performing the RWM clear approval operation, and it is possible to perform the operation check appropriately.

In addition, after the RWM clear preparation mode ends, the operation of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game is started after an operation standby time has passed, so the RWM clear approval operation It is possible to provide sufficient time from when the operation is completed until the operation of the various drive sources is checked, and it becomes possible to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off, so the big prize can be won. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it becomes possible to properly check the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is performed, and in the playable state where the progress control of the game is performed, the game Since the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 is performed that does not affect the result of the operation, it is possible to confirm two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening are opened. Since the system does not output the open signal even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and also to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of performance information is regulated) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until the game progress control starts. Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing an unnecessary processing load on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control has started (display of performance information is allowed), the game progress control has started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the player is present, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the second modification example. The operation comparison at various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, small win game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state, auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 112. Therefore, the explanation here will be omitted.

(Third modification)
The third modification of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 119 to 120. Note that the third modification differs from the fifth embodiment in that it does not include a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, and that RWM clear processing continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. This is a second modification in that the drive source initial operation process is performed during the clear preparation mode.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 in the third modification will be described using FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that are the same as the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modification shown in FIG. 117, and the explanation thereof is omitted, and only the parts around the different parts will be explained.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (gaming program) in step S24. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow Processing is performed to initially operate the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Note that details regarding the initial operations of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and RWM clear is performed, and the process moves to step S26. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operations of various drive sources, and in step S27, initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the gaming RWM area before RWM clearing is not carried over.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S28. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation)
A specific example in which various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, specific area 53, second big winning hole 56) (ball entering difficulty level) is changed, etc. Various drives for operating the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 69 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and starts controlling the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, the various drive sources start to operate (drive source=ON) as an initial operation. In addition, RWM clear preparation notifications (display of the clear preparation screen, notification voice "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm solenoid operation Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice "Please do so" will begin.

At timing T2, when the operation time (here 0.512 seconds) has elapsed from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), and from then on, the timing from T3 to T10 The activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until

At timing T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed before the operating time of the various drive sources that started from timing T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and RWM clear preparation are performed. When the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the pre-start state. Transition to possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 is started, and all 7 segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are started. When all the lights are lit, lighting confirmation begins. Note that the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 started, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member) that affect the result of the game 52, various drive sources for operating the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is initially operated, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5, only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (only the game board 5, only the board unit 500 is installed). (including replacement of the game machine), it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, first special symbol display 60, 2 special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right hit display 67) Since it is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid imposing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and it is also possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated, RWM clear preparation notification is sent to inform that RWM clear preparation is in progress and to encourage operation confirmation of various drive sources. As a result, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game store clerk) who is checking the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, and to check the operation appropriately. It becomes possible to make it happen.

In addition, in the RWM clear preparation mode, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initially operated, so in the pre-start state before the game progress control starts, multiple This makes it possible to reduce the development cost of the gaming machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Furthermore, when the pre-start state ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operating time of the various drive sources has elapsed. This eliminates the possibility that the initial operation of the drive source is performed in a game ready state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusion with the operation of various drive sources in accordance with the progress of the game.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is performed, and in the playable state where the progress control of the game is performed, the game Since the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 is performed that does not affect the result of the operation, it is possible to confirm two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Moreover, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the grand prize opening LED, and to check the operation properly. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening are opened. Since the system does not output the open signal even though the game machine 1 is open, it is possible to avoid placing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and also to collect the information output from the gaming machine 1. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of performance information is regulated) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until the game progress control starts. Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing an unnecessary processing load on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control has started (display of performance information is allowed), the game progress control has started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the player is present, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, in the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, a clear preparation screen was displayed that displayed the words "Preparing to clear RWM", but in addition to the words "Preparing to clear RWM", A clear preparation screen may be displayed that displays the words "Driving source initial operation in progress" or "Please check solenoid operation" to prompt visual confirmation of the initial operation of the various driving sources.

In addition, various operation timings (initial timings) of various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first grand prize opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second grand prize opening/closing solenoid 57b) The operation comparisons in the operation, jackpot game operation, small win game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state, and auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) are the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. Explanation will be omitted.

(Fourth modification)
The fourth modification of the fifth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The fourth modification differs from the fifth embodiment in that it does not include a setting change function or setting confirmation function, and differs from the second modification in that RWM clear is performed without going through the RWM clear preparation mode. Since they are different, only the differences from the fifth embodiment and the second modification will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 in the fourth modification will be described using FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that are the same as the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modification shown in FIG. 117, and the explanation thereof is omitted, and only the parts around the different parts will be explained.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the gaming RWM area before RWM clearing is not carried over.

The main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal) in step S24. Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, which indicates that RWM clear has been performed.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (gaming program) in step S25. Specifically, various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow Processing is performed to initially operate the path switching solenoid 52b and the second big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b for a predetermined period of time. Note that details regarding the initial operations of the various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 120 and the production control. The information is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

(Specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clearing will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example effect when various drive sources are initially operated after RWM clearing.

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, whether or not the game ball enters a predetermined area (second starting hole 47, first big winning hole 50, specific area 53, second big winning hole 56) (ball entering difficulty level) is changed, etc. Various drives for operating the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big winning opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second big winning opening opening/closing member 57) that affect the result of the game. The source (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) is in a stopped state.

In addition, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (first big winning hole 50, second big winning hole 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is off, and the main information display 69 (second big winning hole 56) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol pending display 63, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display state (inactive, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation is performed (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on), the main control board 110 performs the RWM clear and starts controlling the progress of the game. The previous pre-start state is reached. At this time, initial operation notification (display of initial operation screen, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt operation confirmation of various drive sources.

At the timing T2, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the initial operation notification started, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing T3, the various drive sources When the operating time of the drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T4, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) has elapsed after the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T5, the operation of the various drive sources starts. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At the timing T6, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the various drive sources stopped operating, the third operation of the various drive sources starts, and at the timing T7, the various drive sources start operating for the third time. When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the various drive sources stop operating (drive source=OFF).

At timing T8, when the stop time (in this case, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed after the various drive sources stopped operating, the initial operation and initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, displays of normal symbols, display of the number of reserved special symbols, display of the number of reserved ordinary symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is issued. will be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the performance control board 130 is started, and all 7 segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are started. When all the lights are lit, lighting confirmation begins. Note that the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At timing T9, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d have finished lighting, and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section starts. Thereafter, each time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections will be displayed in order.

In this way, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member) that affect the result of the game 52, various drive sources for operating the second big prize opening opening/closing member 57 (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, first big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid) 57b) is initially operated, when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5, only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or replaced at the game store (only the game board 5, only the board unit 500 is installed). (including replacement of the game machine), it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

In addition, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, first special symbol display 60, 2 special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, second special symbol pending display 64, normal symbol pending display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67) Since it is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to avoid imposing unnecessary processing burden on the main control board 110, and it is also possible to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game are being initialized, an initial operation notification is provided to encourage the operation confirmation of the various drive sources. It is possible to inform the operator (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is the timing to check the operation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to have the operator check the operation appropriately.

Furthermore, according to this modification, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is started after an operation standby time has passed after the RWM clear operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide sufficient time from the end of the RWM clear operation to the operation confirmation of the various drive sources, and it becomes possible to perform the operation confirmation appropriately.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the big winning opening LED remains off, so the big prize can be won. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first big winning hole opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning hole opening/closing member 57 due to the light from the LED, and it becomes possible to properly check the operation. .

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the result of the game is performed, and in the playable state where the progress control of the game is performed, the game Since the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 is performed that does not affect the result of the operation, it is possible to confirm two types of initial operations in order, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

In addition, when the various drive sources for operating the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second big winning opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening are opened. Since the above-mentioned open signal is not output even though the game machine 1 This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of performance information is regulated) from the time the gaming machine is powered on until the game progress control starts. Therefore, it is possible to avoid imposing an unnecessary processing load on the main control board 110.

In addition, since the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed after the game progress control has started (display of performance information is allowed), the game progress control has started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the player is present, and it is also possible to notify that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, various operation timings (initial timings) of various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, first grand prize opening/closing solenoid 51b, flow path switching solenoid 52b, second grand prize opening/closing solenoid 57b) The operation comparisons in the operation, jackpot game operation, small win game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state, and auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) are the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. Explanation will be omitted.

(Timing chart when normal time saving gaming state occurs)
FIG. 123 is a timing chart when the normal time saving gaming state occurs.

First, at timing T1, a variable display of a special symbol that becomes a jackpot is started. At this time, since it is in the normal gaming state, all information such as the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play to calculate the normal base value, and the total number of outs to set the playing section are not collected. It is running.

Next, at timing T2, a fluctuating display of the winning normal symbols is started. In this fluctuating display, a fluctuating display is performed using a relatively long regular pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for a non-time saving state.

After that, at timing T3, the stop display of the special symbol starts, and at timing T4, when the stop time N (0.5 seconds for jackpot) of the special symbol has elapsed, the jackpot game (opening) starts, and the right At the same time as the hit display 67 lights up, output of a special game signal indicating that a jackpot game is in progress and an advantageous state signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is started. Additionally, the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value will stop, and the aggregation (count) of the total number of outs for setting the gaming section will continue (normal base value calculation and display of normal base value will also continue).

Then, at the timing T5, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Further, at timing T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols starts. Since this fluctuating display was started during the jackpot game (low probability non-time saving game state), the fluctuating display is performed according to a relatively long normal figure fluctuation pattern (variation time 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

Next, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the jackpot game. Therefore, the second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Thereafter, at timing T10, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of normal symbols starts. Since this fluctuating display was started during the jackpot game, it is performed in a relatively long regular pattern fluctuating pattern for a non-time saving state. Then, at timing T11, when the jackpot game (ending) ends, the normal time saving game state is started and the output of the special game signal is stopped.

In addition, at the timing of T12, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T13, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is during the jackpot game (low probability). Since it was started during the non-time-saving gaming state), the second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time-saving state.

Next, at timing T14, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short common pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

After that, at the timing of T15, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T16, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the normal time-saving game state. Since the second starting port 47 is started, the second starting port 47 is opened for a long opening time for the time saving state. Then, at timing T16, when the auxiliary game ends, a variable display of winning normal symbols is started.

Here, we have shown an example in which the normal time-saving game state occurs while the normal symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. From the fluctuating display of symbols, a fluctuating display based on a relatively short common symbol fluctuating pattern for the time-saving state is performed.

In this way, when the normal time-saving gaming state occurs, the normal time-saving gaming state will occur after a predetermined period of time has passed (after the end of the jackpot game) after the stop display of the special symbol that becomes a jackpot ends. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage during the jackpot game, and it is possible to ensure a balance of profits between the game parlor side and the player side.

In addition, when a normal time-saving gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state) occurs, a jackpot game that is in a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state after a predetermined period before the normal time-saving gaming state (loss special symbol stop time has elapsed) (when the game starts), the right-hand hitting indicator 67 is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a normal time-saving gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state) occurs, a jackpot game that is in a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state after a predetermined period before the normal time-saving gaming state (loss special symbol stop time has elapsed) (starts), the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is stopped (interrupted). Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even while the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is stopped (suspended), the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value are not possible. Since this is continued, it is possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when a normal time-saving gaming state (low-probability time-saving gaming state) occurs, an advantageous state signal is transmitted from a predetermined period before the normal time-saving gaming state occurs (at the start of a jackpot game that is a low-probability time-saving gaming state). It is designed to be output. Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state occurs during the fluctuating display of the normal symbols, regardless of whether the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively short regular symbol for the time-saving state will start from the next fluctuating display of the normal symbol. Fluctuations are displayed based on fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving gaming state, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, a variable display based on a relatively short normal symbol fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state will be performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 is opened during the long opening time for the time saving state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the variable display control of normal symbols or the control of auxiliary games midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

(Timing chart when the normal time saving gaming state ends)
FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the normal time saving gaming state ends.

First, at timing T1, a variable display of special symbols that will be the final round in the normal time-saving gaming state, that is, a variable display of special symbols that will result in a loss, is started. At this time, since the game is in the normal time-saving game state, the right-handed display 67 is lit and an advantageous state signal is output. In addition, since the normal time saving gaming state is in effect, the information aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during the normal period and the number of outs during the normal period for calculating the normal base value has been stopped (interrupted), while setting the gaming section. Information aggregation (counting) of the total number of outs is being performed.

Next, at timing T2, a fluctuating display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short common pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing T3, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing T4, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is during the normal time-saving game state. Since the second starting port 47 is started, the second starting port 47 is opened for a long opening time for the time saving state.

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the auxiliary game ends, a variable display of winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the time saving state, it is performed using a relatively short regular figure fluctuation pattern for the time saving state.

Also, at the timing of T6, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is during the normal time-saving game state. Since the second starting port 47 is started, the second starting port 47 is opened for a long opening time for the time saving state.

Next, at timing T8, when the auxiliary game ends, a variable display of winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short common pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state. Then, at the timing of T9, when the stop display of the special symbol starts, the normal time saving game state ends and the normal game state starts, the right hit indicator 67 goes out, and the output of the advantageous state signal stops. be done. Also, since the normal gaming state has been entered, the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is resumed. Further, the stop display of the normal symbols is started.

After that, at timing T10, the stop time of the normal symbols has passed and the auxiliary game is started, but since the variable display of the normal symbols was started during the normal time-saving game state, the second The starting port 47 will be opened.

Then, at timing T11, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display is started during the normal gaming state, the fluctuating display is performed using a relatively long regular pattern fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for the non-time saving state.

Thereafter, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time M (8.0 seconds at the end of time saving) has elapsed, the variable display of the next special symbol that will be a loss is started. Then, at the timing T13, the stop display of the normal symbols is disclosed, and at the timing T14, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 opens with a long opening time for the non-time saving state. Then, at timing T15, when the auxiliary game ends, the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started.

Here, we have shown an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends while the normal symbols are stopped being displayed, but even if the normal time-saving gaming state ends while the normal symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during an auxiliary game, the next normal From the fluctuating display of symbols, a fluctuating display is performed using a relatively long regular symbol fluctuating pattern (fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for a non-time saving state.

In addition, in the variable display of special symbols for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving game state, the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed and the normal time-saving game state ends, so the right-handed display 67 goes out and the advantageous state is reached. At the same time as the output of the signal is stopped, aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is restarted.

In this way, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol a specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, ends. There is. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor side and the player side, provide the player with an unprecedented gaming experience of a normal time-saving gaming state, and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state is ended and the right-handed display 67 is turned off. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the end of the normal time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state ends and the normal period for calculating the normal base value ends. The aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts and the number of outs during normal play has been resumed. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times from the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state ends during the fluctuating display of the normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively long game state for the non-time-saving state will be started from the next fluctuating display of the normal symbols. Fluctuations are displayed using diagram fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway due to the end of the normal time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if the normal time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, a variable display based on a relatively long normal symbol fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state will be performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time saving state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the variable display control of normal symbols or the control of auxiliary games midway due to the occurrence of the normal time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

(Timing chart from before the start to after the end of the special time-saving gaming state)
FIG. 125 is a timing chart from before the start to after the end of the special time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times (500 times).

First, at the timing of T1, the variable display of a special symbol that becomes a loss for the specified number of times (500 times) starts from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0). Ru. Further, at the timing of T2, a variable display of normal symbols that become a hit is started. In this fluctuating display, a fluctuating display is performed using a relatively long regular pattern fluctuating pattern (fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 80 seconds) for a non-time saving state.

After that, at timing T3, when the stop display of the special symbols starts, the special time-saving game state starts regardless of whether or not the player is waiting for a customer, the right-handed display 67 lights up, and the normal game state starts. Output of an advantageous state signal that is more advantageous to the player than the player is started. In addition, due to the special time-saving gaming state, the aggregation (counting) of the number of payouts during the normal period and the number of outs during the normal period for calculating the normal base value has been stopped (interrupted), and the total number of outs for setting the gaming section has been stopped (interrupted). Aggregation (counting) continues (calculation of normal base value and display of normal base value also continue).

Then, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time N (normally 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the variable display of the special symbol that will result in a loss is started.

Also, at the timing of T5, the stop display of the normal symbols starts, and at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game starts, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols starts during the normal game state. Therefore, the second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time saving state.

Next, at timing T7, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T8, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is in the special time-saving game state. Since the second starting port 47 is started, the second starting port 47 is opened for a long opening time for the time saving state. In addition, stop display of the losing special symbol is started.

Furthermore, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time N (0.5 seconds for a loss) has elapsed, the variable display of the next special symbol that will be a loss starts. Further, at timing T11, the auxiliary game ends and a variable display of normal symbols that become a win is disclosed. Since this fluctuating display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Thereafter, at timing T12, the final round of special symbols in the special time-saving gaming state is displayed in a variable manner, that is, the special symbols that result in a loss are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when the stop time of the normal symbols passes, the auxiliary game is disclosed, but since the variable display of the normal symbols was started during the special time-saving game state, the second starting port 47 is opened during the long opening time for the time-saving state. I will do it.

Next, at timing T13, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols starts. Since this fluctuating display was started during the special time-saving game state, it is performed with a relatively short normal pattern fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state.

Then, at the timing of T14, the stop display of the normal symbols is started, and at the timing of T15, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is in the special time-saving game state. Since the second starting port 47 is started, the second starting port 47 is opened for a long opening time for the time saving state.

Also, at the timing of T16, when the stop display of the losing special symbol (M for time saving final variation) is started, the special time saving game state ends, the normal game state starts, and the right hit indicator 67 turns off. At the same time, the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. Also, since the normal gaming state has been entered, the counting of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is resumed.

Furthermore, at timing T17, the auxiliary game ends and the variable display of the winning normal symbols starts. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state), it is performed with a relatively long regular symbol fluctuation pattern for the non-time-saving state.

In addition, at the timing of T18, when the stop time M (8.0 seconds for time saving final variation) of the losing special symbol has elapsed, the variable display of the special symbol that will be a loser will start, and at the timing of T19, the changing display of the losing special symbol will start. Stop display starts.

Then, at timing T20, variable display of special symbols that result in a loss is started. Further, when the auxiliary game ends, a variable display of normal symbols that become a win is started. Since this fluctuating display was started during the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state), it is performed with a relatively long regular symbol fluctuation pattern for the non-time-saving state.

Then, at timing T21, when the stop time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the auxiliary game is started, but since the variable display of the normal symbols was started during the normal game state, the second opening time for the non-time saving state is used. The starting port 47 will be opened.

Here, we have shown an example in which the special time-saving game state is started while the normal symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. From the fluctuating display of normal symbols to the fluctuating display of a relatively short regular symbol fluctuating pattern for the time-saving state.

In addition, although we have shown an example in which the special time-saving game state ends while the auxiliary game is being executed, even if the special time-saving game state ends while the normal symbols are being displayed fluctuating or while the normal symbols are being stopped, the next From the variable display of the normal symbol to be executed, a variable display based on a relatively long normal symbol variation pattern for the non-time saving state will be performed.

In addition, although we have shown an example in which the fluctuating display of the special symbol that is the final round in the special time-saving game state is a loss, even if it is a small hit, the non-time-saving display will start from the fluctuating display of the normal symbol that will be executed next. Fluctuation display will be performed using a relatively long general pattern fluctuation pattern for the state.

In this way, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the losing special symbol stops. When displayed, a special time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player occurs (starts) regardless of whether the player is waiting for a customer or not. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented gaming experience in which a time-saving state occurs even when the player loses, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (When the stop time starts), a special time-saving game state occurs (starts) and the right-hand game indicator 67 lights up. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (When the stop time starts), a special time-saving gaming state occurs (starts) and the aggregation of the number of payouts and the number of outs during normal time to calculate the normal base value is stopped, that is, the special time-saving gaming state The calculation of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play continues until immediately before the occurrence of the above. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, even if the aggregation of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play for calculating the normal base value is stopped, the calculation of the normal base value and the display of the normal base value will continue, so the display It becomes possible to accurately grasp the performance of the gaming machine from the normal base value.

In addition, as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed. (When the stop time starts), a special time saving game state occurs (starts) and an advantageous state signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if a special time-saving game state occurs during the fluctuating display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively short regular symbol for the time-saving state will start from the next fluctuating display of normal symbols. Fluctuations are displayed based on fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway due to the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of the auxiliary game, a variable display based on a relatively short normal symbol fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state will be performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 is opened during the long opening time for the time saving state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of normal symbols or the control of the auxiliary game midway due to the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuating display of the special symbol that is the final (750th) time in the special time-saving gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player will end. ing. Therefore, it is possible to secure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor side and the player side, provide the player with an unprecedented gaming experience of a special time-saving gaming state, and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving game state, the special time-saving game state ends and the right-handed display 67 turns off. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages due to the termination of the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the fluctuating display of the special symbol in the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state ends and the normal base value is calculated. The calculation of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play is restarted, that is, the calculation of the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play is restarted from the end of the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, an appropriate normal base value can be calculated, and the performance of the gaming machine can be accurately grasped from the displayed normal base value.

In addition, when the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol in the final round (750th time) in the special time-saving gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state ends and the output of the advantageous state signal is stopped. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to accurately output an advantageous state signal over the period in which the gaming machine is in an advantageous state, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the state of the gaming machine from the outside.

In addition, if the special time-saving game state ends during the fluctuating display of normal symbols, regardless of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed, the relatively long game state for the non-time-saving state will be started from the next fluctuating display of normal symbols. Fluctuations are displayed using diagram fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the fluctuating display of normal symbols midway due to the end of the special time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, if a special time-saving game state occurs during the execution of an auxiliary game, a variable display based on a relatively long normal symbol fluctuation pattern for the time-saving state is performed from the next normal symbol fluctuation display, and from the next auxiliary game. The second starting port 47 opens in a short opening time for the non-time saving state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the control of the variable display of normal symbols or the control of the auxiliary game midway due to the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, the loss special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) after the establishment of a predetermined condition (RWM clear is executed, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), The stop display may be made for a longer time than the normal stop time (0.5 seconds). In this way, it is possible to make the player aware that a special time-saving gaming state will occur due to the length of the stop time, and it is also possible to secure time to create an effect that a special time-saving gaming state will occur. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the loss special symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol for the specified number of times (500 times) is stopped and displayed for a longer time than the normal stop time, the special time-saving game will be played during the stop time. It may also be possible to perform an effect that suggests that a condition occurs. In this way, the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state can be immediately notified to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of main processing in the production control section 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting internal registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E3.

The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. The CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are enabled in step E6.

The sub CPU 130a performs sub random number update processing in step E7. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the production control section 130m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the production control unit 130m.

First, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E200. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters necessary for execution of the effect.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, a process is performed to analyze the command (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Note that details of the command analysis process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed in a customer waiting state where special symbols are not displayed or special games (big hit games, small win games) are being executed. Based on the fact that the waiting time has elapsed, processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to stimulate the player's desire to play.

The sub CPU 130a performs operation-based performance execution processing in step E500. Specifically, a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the variable performance is executed, and the expectation level that a jackpot game will be executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during this valid period is increased. Processing is performed to execute an operation-based jackpot preview performance that suggests (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed).

The "operation-based jackpot preview performance" includes a dialogue preview performance that suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot game to be executed depending on the type and display mode of the dialogue displayed on the image display device, and the result of the roulette game executed on the image display device. A roulette preview effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed based on the type of cut-in image displayed on an image display device and a display mode; There are four types of winning/losing performances that indicate whether or not a special game will be executed: a successful performance with a 100% expectation that a jackpot game will be executed, or a failure performance with a 0% expectation that a jackpot game will be executed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a lamp lighting effect execution process in step E600. Specifically, by changing the light emitting mode of the starting port lamp 75 in accordance with changes in the pending icon displayed on the image display device or the display mode of the icon, the lamp emits light that indicates the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed. Perform processing to execute the performance.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E700. Specifically, updating the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether the conditions (changes in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effects that result in a loss, etc.) are met, and if the update conditions are met, multiple production modes are executed. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" includes production modes A to C, countdown mode, which are set in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), rush battle mode, wild dance mode, super wild dance mode, and infinite mode, which are set in the normal time-saving game state. etc. are provided. In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing settings, clearing RWM, confirming settings, etc.), the first performance mode set is always performance mode A, and when the power is turned on, When the time-saving game state is controlled at the time of ON, the performance mode that is first set is one of rush battle mode, wild dance mode, super wild dance mode, and infinite mode.

"Production modes A to C" are used when the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. This is the production mode that is set when the number of times is 51 or more.
"Countdown mode" is used when the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. This is the production mode that is set in the following cases.

"Rush battle mode" is when the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for normal time saving shown in FIG. 87 is selected (when it is in the normal time saving game state where 7 times is selected as the second time saving number) The production mode is set to .
"Ranbu mode" is a normal time-saving game when the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 3 or 4 for normal time-saving shown in FIG. state and the remaining number of small wins is 1 (including the case where it is 1 after being subtracted), or when the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table 3 for special time saving shown in FIG. This is the production mode that is set when selected (when the special time saving game state is in which 750 times is selected as the second time saving number and the remaining number of small wins is subtracted to 1).

"Super Ranbu Mode" is a normal time-saving game state in which 95 times is selected as the second time-saving number of times and the small This is the production mode that is set when the remaining number of wins is 2.
"Infinite mode" is a normal time-saving game state in which 496 times are selected as the second time-saving number, and a small hit (when the remaining number of times is 2), or when the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 or 2 for special time saving shown in FIG. 91 is selected (when 750 is selected as the second time saving number This is the production mode that is set when the game is in a time-saving gaming state and the remaining number of small wins is 2.

The sub CPU 130a performs special time-saving effect processing in step E750. Specifically, special time-saving effects to suggest information related to the occurrence of a special time-saving game state (RWM clear negative effects that suggest that RWM clear has not been performed (delayed), special time-saving games, etc.) It performs processing such as determining whether to execute an activation counter display that suggests the number of fluctuations until the state changes, etc.). Note that details of the special time-saving effect processing will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E800. Specifically, processing is performed to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the overall control section 141 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Command analysis processing of production control section)
The command analysis process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in the production control section 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process moves to step E302, and if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process ends.

In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E303, and if it is not a setting change designation command, the process moves to step E304.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing setting change notification is performed.

In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E305, and if it is not a setting confirmation designation command, the process moves to step E306.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process in step E305. Specifically, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for starting the setting confirmation notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing setting confirmation notification is performed.

In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If the command is a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E307, and if it is not a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command, the process moves to step E308.

The sub CPU 130a performs power ON notification processing in step E307. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, a notification instruction command for executing the power-on notification described above is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the received command is a power restoration designation command. If so, a process is performed in which a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing power-on notification or power restoration notification, and movable presentation device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable Processing is performed to perform an initial operation for operating the member 73b) in a predetermined manner, initial light emission for causing the board lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined manner, and the like.

In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related designation command. If it is an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E309, and if it is not an error-related specification command, the process moves to step E310.

"Error system specification commands" include unrecoverable error specification command, fraudulent winning error specification command, abnormal winning error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, door open error start specification command, door open error end specification This includes commands, operation error specification commands, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, error notifications according to the type of error specification command received (unrecoverable error notification, unauthorized winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification) etc.), a notification instruction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed.

In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E311, and if it is not a gaming state designation command, the process moves to step E312.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E311. Specifically, processing is performed to update the gaming state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to the gaming state according to the gaming state designation command.

In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E313, and if it is not a special symbol storage designation command, the process moves to step E314.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process in step E313. Specifically, a process of setting a production instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to update the number of reserved special symbols stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the number of reserved icons displayed on the image display device. conduct. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons displayed on the image display device is performed.

In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a prefetch designation command. If it is a prefetch designation command, the received prefetch designation command (special figure schedule fluctuation pattern) is set in the prefetch storage area described later in the sub-RAM 130c, and then the process moves to step E315; if it is not a prefetch designation command, The process moves to step E318.

The "pre-read storage area" is a first pre-read storage section for sequentially storing pre-read information (special figure schedule fluctuation patterns, etc.) based on the first pre-read designation command, and sequentially stores reservation information based on the second pre-read designation command. It is divided into a second look-ahead storage unit for storing data, and a storage unit (0th storage unit) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) being executed. The two look-ahead storage units are each divided into first to fourth storage units.

The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol determination information reservation storage area described above, and when the first prefetch designation command is received, the Prefetch information is stored in a storage unit corresponding to one pending number. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetching storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, respectively, and when the second prefetching designation command is received, 2 Prefetch information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the number of reservations. The pre-read information stored in each storage section is moved (shifted) to a storage section with a lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the above-mentioned special symbol determination information execution storage area, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first pre-read storage unit The look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the second look-ahead unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead information that moves (shifts) from the first storage unit of the second look-ahead unit is stored. Ru.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing in step E315. Specifically, there is an expectation that a special game will be executed by displaying the pending icon displayed on the image display device or the icon in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon). Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect that indicates the degree (possibility) of the icon change effect, and the mode of effect of the icon change effect to be executed. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emission effect determination process. Specifically, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the top lamp 10b located at the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 is caused to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode, thereby creating a special game. Processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute a winning light emitting effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the prize winning light emitting effect will be executed, and the presentation mode of the winning light emitting effect to be executed.

In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect determination process. Specifically, by executing a predetermined effect over a variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols, expectations are made that a jackpot game will be executed (suggesting the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed). It determines whether or not to execute a prefetch continuous performance and the type of prefetch continuous performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to execute the prefetch continuous performance. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed. Note that details of the prefetch continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E319, and if it is not a special symbol designation command, the process moves to step E320.

The sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing in step E319. Specifically, processing is performed to determine the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, that is, the arrangement (combination) of effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line.

In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E321, and if it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, the process moves to step E325.

The sub CPU 130a performs a variable effect pattern determination process in step E321. Specifically, based on the content of the received special figure variation pattern designation command, a variation production pattern, which is a production mode of a variation production executed by a production device including an image display device, is determined, and a production indicating the variation production pattern is determined. Processing is performed to set the instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the variable production is performed. Note that details of the fluctuation effect pattern determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs jackpot preview effect determination processing in step E322. Specifically, based on the variable performance pattern determined in step E321, whether or not to execute a jackpot preview performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed). Also, a performance mode (pattern) of the jackpot preview performance to be executed is determined, and execution information of the jackpot preview performance is set in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon display mode update processing in step E323. Specifically, processing is performed to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E315, or to change the display mode of the already displayed pending icon or the icon.

The sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch continuous effect execution process in step E324. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for starting the prefetch continuous performance determined in the prefetch continuous performance determination process of step E317 or for changing the performance mode is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the prefetch continuous production is performed.

In step E325, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a symbol confirmation command. If it is a symbol confirmation command, the process moves to step E326, and if it is not a pattern confirmation command, the process moves to step E327.

The sub CPU 130a performs production symbol stop processing in step E326. Specifically, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped performance symbols and ending the variable performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for ending the variable production is performed.

In step E327, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game designation command. If it is a special game system designation command, the process moves to step E328, and if it is not a special game system designation command, the current command analysis process ends.

The "special game system designation commands" include jackpot opening designation commands, jackpot round designation commands, jackpot ending designation commands, small win opening designation commands, small win ending designation commands, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs special game performance determination processing in step E328. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining the opening performance of a jackpot game or a small winning game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the round In the case of a specified command, processing is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing the round performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and in the case of an ending specification command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing a round performance, and in the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed to set a performance instruction command for determining a round performance of a round game and executing the round performance. Processing is performed to set the performance instruction command for determining the ending performance of the small winning game and executing the ending performance in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is ended. As a result, the production instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening production, round production, and ending production is performed.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the icon change performance determination process in the performance control section 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E315-3, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the icon change effect based on the prefetch designation command received this time is not executed. The process moves to step E315-7.

The "executable period of icon change effect" means that the jackpot game is not in progress, that when a prefetch designation command based on winning at the first starting port 45 is received, the normal gaming state is present, and that the second starting port 45 is in a normal gaming state. For example, when a prefetch designation command based on winning a prize in 47 is received, it is a time-saving gaming state (specific gaming state).

In step E315-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is a change scenario in the pre-pending (pending memory corresponding to the previously received pre-read designation command), that is, whether a change scenario is set in the pre-read information storage area. Determine whether If there is a change scenario, it is assumed that the icon change effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command will not be executed, and the process moves to step E315-7; if there is no change scenario, the process moves to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E315-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 130) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E315-6. Specifically, the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. The final display mode of one icon is determined from among the following.

In step E315-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (one of a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon) for performing an icon change effect. If the icon is a special icon for which an icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-9, and if the display mode is not such that the icon change effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 131) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 107, the final icon display mode, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario are determined. Then, one change scenario is determined from among the plurality of change scenarios.

In step E315-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and changes the winning icon. The icon display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect (the first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and the second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E315-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

In addition, in the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (the pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but the advance hold is the reach effect. If the icon change effect is not to be performed, the icon change effect may be executed, and if the reach effect is to be performed, the icon change effect may not be executed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon will not change during the variable performance corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon will not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. A change in the display mode will now occur, and the icon change performance will no longer impede the reach performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the advance hold includes something that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the reach effect is better when the advance hold does not include a reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (performed at a higher rate) than in the case where the icon change effect is included.

In addition, when a prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol is received during the time saving game state, an icon change effect is executed, but even if a prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol is received in the time saving gaming state, The icon change effect may not be executed. In this case, the icon may be displayed but the icon change effect may not be executed, or the icon itself may not be displayed and the icon change effect may not be executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the type of prefetch specification command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected, and for reference, it corresponds to the prefetch specification command. The contents of the performance of the scheduled fluctuation pattern are described.

The final icon display mode includes a normal icon (white icon) that does not suggest the expectation of a big or small win, and a special icon (blue icon, red icon, rainbow icon) that suggests the expectation of a big or small win. It is set. Moreover, the expectation level of a big hit or a small hit related to the special icon increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon (big hit confirmed).

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 130 is that when the prefetch designation command indicates a jackpot, a rainbow icon may be determined as the icon final display mode; When the prefetch designation command indicates a small win, a rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode. By doing this, the player will not be overjoyed at the moment when a small win is reached without it being certain that the jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 130 is that when the prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol that is transmitted only during the time-saving gaming state is the one that indicates a small hit, the red icon One point to note is that the percentage of red icons being determined is higher when it indicates a jackpot than the percentage of red icons being determined. By doing this, it is possible to differentiate between a jackpot and a small win for which it is not certain that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the prefetch designation command indicates a small win, the rainbow icon is not determined as the final icon display mode, but in the small win game of this embodiment, the game ball is hit to the right. As long as the game ball is present, the game ball will pass through the specific area 53 with almost 100% probability and a jackpot game will be executed, so the rainbow icon may be determined as the final icon display mode. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's awareness of the small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the rainbow icon is determined when the prefetch designation command related to the second special symbol that is transmitted only during the time-saving gaming state indicates a small hit, the rainbow icon indicates a small hit. It is preferable that the ratio of the rainbow icon, which indicates a jackpot, is determined to be higher than the ratio of the rainbow icon being determined.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, and is used as a reference. Preliminary changes in each change scenario and how icons are updated in the changes are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 04, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

Note that the change scenario is determined regardless of whether it is a normal game state (first special symbol icon) or a specific game state (second special symbol icon). state (second special symbol icon), the rate at which the icon changes due to the change is higher than the rate at which the icon changes due to the prior change (for example, 20:80 or 0:100, etc.). It's okay. In addition, the rate at which the icon changes due to the fluctuation will be higher in the specific gaming state (second special symbol icon) than in the normal gaming state (first special symbol icon). It's okay.

(Production control unit's winning lighting effect decision process)
With reference to FIG. 132, the winning light emission effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart illustrating the winning light emission effect determination process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E316-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E316-2, determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the winning light emission effect. If it is the executable period for the winning light emitting effect, the process moves to step E316-3, and if it is not the winning time light emitting effect executable period, the winning light emitting effect is executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time. Assuming that it is not the case, the process for determining the light emitting effect at the time of winning this time is ended.

"Period during which the light emission effect can be executed at the time of winning" means that the jackpot game is not in progress, that when a prefetch designation command based on winning at the first starting port 45 is received, the normal gaming state is present, and that the second starting For example, when a prefetch designation command based on winning in the mouth 47 is received, the game is in a time-saving gaming state.

In step E316-3, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E316- 4, a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 133) for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern is selected. The details of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E316-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a winning light emission effect pattern. Specifically, with reference to the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. One winning light emission performance pattern is determined from among the winning light emission performance patterns.

In step E316-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined winning light emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing the winning light emitting effect. If the pattern is to execute the light emitting effect when winning, the process moves to step E316-7, and if the pattern is not to execute the light emitting effect when winning, the current light emitting effect determining process is terminated.

In step E316-7, the sub CPU 130a sets a winning light emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emitting effect determining process. As a result, the winning light emitting effect execution command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the winning light emitting effect is executed in the presentation mode corresponding to the winning light emitting effect execution command.

(Light emission pattern determination table when winning a prize)
FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a winning light emitting effect pattern.

The winning lighting effect pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning lighting effect pattern, and the selected winning lighting effect pattern. For reference, the performance mode for each winning light emission performance pattern is described.

The winning light emitting effect pattern includes a winning light emitting effect pattern 00 in which the winning light emitting effect is not executed, and winning light emitting effects patterns 01 and 02 in which the winning light emitting effect is executed. In the winning light emission patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light, and the audio output device 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect.

The first feature of the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133 is that the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with a high jackpot expectation level is better than the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with a low jackpot expectation level. However, one point is that the light-emitting effect when winning a prize is easier to execute. By doing so, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations for the execution of a variable performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133 is that the winning light emitting effect is easier to execute in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the winning lighting pattern determination table shown in FIG. 133 is that, unlike the icon final display mode shown in FIG. 130, there is no winning lighting performance pattern (performance mode) that guarantees a jackpot. Can be mentioned. By doing so, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained from the time the game ball enters the starting slot until the result of the variable performance is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is also possible to provide a light emission effect pattern (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and a confirmation sound is output from the audio output device 9) when a jackpot is confirmed, and in this case, a full rotation reach It is preferable that a winning light emitting effect pattern is determined that will ensure a jackpot at the lowest rate when the above is executed.

(Pre-read continuous performance determination processing by the performance control unit)
Using FIG. 134, the prefetch continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the prefetch continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current prefetch continuous performance determination process is ended.

In step E317-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E317-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for the look-ahead zone effect. If it is the executable period of the prefetch zone effect, the process moves to step E317-4, and if it is not the executable period of the prefetch zone effect, the prefetch zone effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not executed. The process moves to step E317-6.

"Pre-reading zone production" means performing zone production (display of pre-reading zone background image, display of blue zone image or red thermal zone image, output of zone BGM or thermal zone BGM) over one or more variable productions. This is a performance that continuously suggests the level of expectation for a special game to be executed using a background image, text information, and color information (expected value information), and is a type of pre-read continuous performance.

The "period in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed" includes the fact that there is nothing to execute the look-ahead zone performance in the advance hold, that the jackpot game is not in progress, that the game is in a normal game state, and so on. Therefore, in the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed, but in the time-saving game state, the look-ahead zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a prefetch zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 135) for determining a prefetch zone effect scenario. Note that details of the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch zone effect scenario in step E317-5. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 135, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each preview scenario are determined. (%), one pre-read zone performance scenario is determined from among the plurality of pre-read zone performance scenarios.

In step E317-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the prefetch zone effect as a performance scenario in which the prefetch zone effect is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch zone effect scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch zone effect scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch zone effect is performed.

In step E317-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is an executable period for the look-ahead countdown effect. If it is the executable period of the prefetch countdown effect, the process moves to step E317-9, and if it is not the executable period of the prefetch countdown effect, the prefetch countdown effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not executed. The process moves to step E317-11.

"Look-ahead countdown performance" is a countdown performance (displaying a count image, outputting a count sound) over one or more variable performances to intermittently increase the expectation level for a special game to be executed using text information and sound information. It is a suggestive performance, and is a type of forward-looking continuous performance.

The "period in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed" includes the following conditions: there is no advance pending to execute the look-ahead countdown performance, the jackpot game is not in progress, the time-saving game state, etc. Therefore, in the normal game state, the look-ahead countdown effect is not executed, but in the time-saving game state, the look-ahead countdown effect can be executed.

In step E317-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the prefetch countdown effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 136) for determining the scenario of the prefetch countdown effect. The details of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a prefetch countdown performance scenario in step E317-10. Specifically, with reference to the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate of each performance scenario are determined. (%), one pre-read countdown performance scenario is determined from among a plurality of pre-read countdown performance scenarios.

In step E317-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-execution scenario of the prefetch countdown effect as a performance scenario in which the prefetch countdown effect is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined prefetch countdown performance scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the prefetch countdown effect scenario is referred to in the prefetch continuous effect execution process of step E324 described above, and the process for executing the prefetch countdown effect is performed. When this process is finished, the current prefetch continuous performance determination process is finished.

In this way, the types of look-ahead continuous effects executed in the normal game state and the time-saving game state are made different. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state where the number of reservations is more likely to increase than in the normal gaming state and a short variable time is easily determined, the look-ahead zone effect that is continuously executed over one or more variable effects is not executed. There is. Therefore, the inconvenience that the performance effect of the look-ahead zone performance in which it is desired to secure a long performance time in one variable performance does not occur will not occur, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state where the number of reservations is more likely to increase than in the normal gaming state and a short variable time is easily determined, a look-ahead countdown effect that is intermittently executed over one or more variable effects is executed. There is. Therefore, the look-ahead countdown performance that requires a short performance time in one fluctuating performance makes it easier to increase the expectations of the players, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the look-ahead zone effect may be executed also in the time-saving gaming state, and the look-ahead countdown effect may be executed also in the normal game state.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead zone performance scenario.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table includes the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the selected look-ahead. Performance scenarios for zone performance are associated with each other, and for reference, advance fluctuations in each performance scenario and performance modes of look-ahead zone performance in the relevant fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Zone" means that normal zone effects (display of prefetched zone background image, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed, and "heat zone" means that normal zone effects are executed. A heat zone performance (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone BGM) that has a higher jackpot expectation than the performance is executed.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include non-execution scenarios (for example, scenario 00) in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed, and scenarios in which the zone performance is not executed during the preliminary fluctuation and the zone performance is performed during the fluctuation ( For example, scenario 01) and a scenario (for example, scenario 02) in which an in-zone effect is executed during the preliminary variation and during the variation are set.

The first feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 135 is that there are performance scenarios in which the performance mode of the zone performance does not progress (change) to a performance mode in which the execution expectation of the special game is high, and the production mode of the zone performance. One point is that a production scenario is set in which the mode progresses (changes) to a production mode with a high degree of expectation for execution of a special game. By doing so, it is possible to make the player look forward to whether or not the performance mode of the performance in the zone will progress (change), thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 135 is that the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance progresses (changes) more easily with this variation than with advance variation. By doing so, it becomes easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and the player's sense of expectation can reach its peak during the fluctuations, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a prefetch countdown performance scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a prefetch countdown performance scenario.

The look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table includes the pending number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead countdown performance, and the selected look-ahead. Performance scenarios for the countdown performance are associated with each other, and for reference, advance fluctuations in each performance scenario and performance modes of the look-ahead countdown performance for the fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

"Count 3" means that a count image indicating "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 2" means that a count image indicating "2" is displayed and a count sound is output. "Count 1" means displaying a count image indicating "1" and outputting a count sound, and "count 0" means displaying a count image indicating "0". and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the look-ahead countdown effect is executed not only when there is a big hit, but also when there is a small win (a planned fluctuation pattern that makes you expect a small win). Here are some things that are possible. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not a small winning game in which a jackpot game will be executed by the ball entering the specific area 53 will be executed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

A second feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the maximum value of the count is "3" regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. By doing so, the player will have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the look-ahead countdown effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 136 is that the performance mode of the look-ahead countdown effect is the same regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small win. By doing so, the player will have a sense of anticipation without being conscious of whether it is a big win or a small win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a small win, the number of rounds and time saving times of the jackpot game to be transferred when a game ball enters the specific area 53 during the small win game is specified or countdown effected in an unpredictable manner. However, when a game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small winning game, the countdown effect is executed in a manner that allows the number of rounds and time saving times of the jackpot game to be transitioned to to be specified or predicted. You can do it like this. For example, the font and size of the count image may be different depending on whether the number of rounds or time savings is relatively small and when the number of rounds or time savings is relatively large, or the type or volume of the count sound may be different. It's okay.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination processing of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, determines whether the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is the normal gaming state, the process moves to step E321-3, and if it is not the normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state), the process moves to step E321-7.

In step E321-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance is the remaining portion of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. If it is the remaining amount of the second special symbol, the process moves to step E321-4, and if it is not the remaining amount of the second special symbol (fluctuating display of the first special symbol), step E321- Processing moves to step 6.

In step E321-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the remaining portion of the second special symbol is in the normal time saving game state. If it is not in the normal time-saving game state (it is in the special time-saving game state), the process moves to step E321-6, and if it is in the normal time-saving game state, it goes to step E321-5. , the variable performance pattern determination table for remaining reservation (see FIG. 138(c)) is selected, and the process moves to step E321-14. In addition, the details of the fluctuation performance pattern determination table for remaining reservation will be described later.

In step E321-6, the sub CPU 130a selects the normal variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and moves the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current state is the normal time saving gaming state. If it is not the normal time-saving game state (it is a special time-saving game state), the process moves to step E321-13, and if it is the normal time-saving game state, in step E321-8, the current variable performance is the normal time-saving game. It is determined whether the state is a pre-final variation performance (the number of remaining time reductions is 1 or more). If it is not a pre-final variation performance (it is a final variation production), the process moves to step E321-10, and if it is a pre-final variation production, in step E321-9, the normal time-saving pre-final variation A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) is selected, and the process moves to step E321-14.

In step E321-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current mode is rush battle mode. If it is the rush battle mode, in step E321-11, the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the normal time reduction final variation (see FIG. 138(a)) is selected, and the process is moved to step E321-14, where the rush battle is started. If it is not the mode, in step E321-12, the variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the normal time saving final variation (see FIG. 138(b)) is selected, and the process moves to step E321-14. Note that the details of the variation effect pattern determination table for the normal time saving final variation will be described later.

In step E321-13, the sub CPU 130a selects a special time-saving variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and moves the process to step E321-14.

In step E321-14, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from among the plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E321-15, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Fluctuation production pattern judgment table for time-saving final fluctuation)
FIG. 138(a) is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table 1 for the final time-saving variation that is referred to when determining a variable performance pattern in the final variation production in the normal time-saving gaming state (rush battle mode). FIG. 138(b) is a diagram showing the variable performance pattern determination table 2 for the final time-saving variation that is referred to when determining the variable performance pattern in the final variable production in the normal time-saving gaming state (other than the rush battle mode). .

As shown in FIGS. 138(a) and 138(b), the variation effect pattern determination table for time-saving final variation includes the type of special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command, the current second special The pre-reading result of remaining symbols, the selection rate (%) of each variable performance pattern, and the selected variable performance pattern are associated with each other, and the performance configuration of each variable performance pattern is described for reference.

The "final battle introduction performance" is an introduction performance to the final battle performance in which the player faces off against an enemy character for a big win or a small win in a variable performance where the time-saving game state ends.
"Final battle SP reach" is a special SP reach effect that performs the final battle effect described above, in which the two effect symbols 70a forming the reach state are reduced to the upper corners of the image display device. , and a battle performance where you confront enemy characters.
"Final battle SP reach with guaranteed victory" is a special SP reach effect that performs the final battle effect described above, and the two effect symbols 70a forming the reach state are shrunk and displayed on the upper side of the image display device. The character moves to both corners and performs a battle performance in which it is certain that the character will win against the enemy character.

The "defeat performance" is a performance that suggests that the enemy character has been defeated in the final battle performance.
The "victory performance" is a performance that suggests victory over the enemy character in the final battle performance.

The "result display" is a performance that displays the results of games during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving gaming state continues, triggered by the so-called first win, a jackpot game from the normal gaming state.
The "special result display" is basically the same as the result display described above, but it suggests a big hit or a small win due to the fluctuating performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. The results are displayed as a type of look-ahead presentation.

"End suggestion effect" is a effect that suggests the end of the normal time-saving gaming state. Specifically, it is a effect that indicates that the shutter image closes and the effect image such as the background image is blocked, resulting in a loss. The effect is shown to the player as follows.
A “resurrection effect” is a effect that announces (suggests) a jackpot or small win after a loss. Specifically, by smashing the shutter image, a combination of jackpot effect symbols appears. It is staged.

The first feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 1 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(a) is that a variation effect pattern in which the final battle effect is always executed is always selected. By doing this, it is possible to efficiently improve the player's sense of expectation in the final variable performance in the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation performance pattern determination table 1 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. There are some points that may be implemented. By doing this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security from the start of the battle performance (final battle SP reach), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation performance pattern determination table 1 for time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(a) is that the variation performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state is a small hit or a jackpot. In some cases, even if the final variable performance in the time-saving game state is a loss, a battle performance that confirms victory as a type of look-ahead performance may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute a variable performance with a surprising effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variation performance pattern determination table 1 for time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(a) is that the variation performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state results in a jackpot or small win. One point is that a special result display may be performed as a kind of look-ahead effect that suggests that. By doing this, it is possible to stimulate the joy of the players by pretending that the time-saving gaming state has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The first feature of the variation performance pattern determination table 2 for time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(b) is that a variation performance pattern is always selected in which the result display from the end suggestion performance is always executed. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player of the results of the games during a series of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the interest in the games.

The second feature of the variation effect pattern determination table 2 for the time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(b) is that when the final variation effect in the time-saving gaming state is a small hit or a jackpot, a revival effect is executed. There are several points. By doing so, it is possible to surprise the player by making him think that the normal time-saving gaming state has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation performance pattern determination table 2 for time-saving final variation shown in FIG. 138(b) is that the variation performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state results in a jackpot or small win. One point is that a special result display may be performed as a kind of look-ahead effect that suggests that. By doing this, it is possible to stimulate the joy of the players by pretending that the time-saving gaming state has ended, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Fluctuating production pattern judgment table for remaining reservation)
FIG. 138(c) is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for remaining reservation that is referred to when determining a variable performance pattern in a variable performance related to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. .

As shown in FIG. 138(c), the remaining holding variation effect pattern determination table includes the type of special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each variation effect pattern. The variable effect patterns that will be displayed are associated with each other, and the effect structure of each variable effect pattern is described for reference.

"Result continuation" is a performance that continues the result display in the final variable performance of the time-saving game state.
The "resurrection performance" is a performance that suggests that the result display in the final variable performance in the time-saving gaming state will be revived and become a jackpot or a small win.
"Resurrection long performance" is a performance that is performed over a longer period of time than the above-mentioned resurrection performance, in which the result display in the final variable performance of the time-saving gaming state is revived and a performance that suggests a jackpot or small win is achieved. .

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table for remaining reservation shown in FIG. 138(b) is that the result display may be continued by taking over the result display in the final variable effect in the time-saving gaming state. . By doing this, a series of performances can be performed from the final variable performance of the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the performance effect before and after the end of the time-saving game state.

The second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table for remaining reservation shown in FIG. 138(b) is that the performance content (result display) of the final variable performance in the time-saving gaming state is inherited and the revival performance or revival long performance is executed. There are several points to be mentioned. By doing this, a series of performances can be performed from the final variable performance of the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the performance effect before and after the end of the time-saving game state.

(Special time-saving performance processing by the performance control unit)
The special time-saving performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of special time-saving performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

First, in step E750-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time saving game state is in progress. If it is not in the time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step E750-2, and if it is in the time-saving gaming state, a special time-saving effect (suggesting that RWM clearing described later is not being performed (it is deferred)) The current special time-saving performance processing is terminated as not to execute the RWM clear negative performance (indication of an activation counter suggested by counting down the number of fluctuations until shifting to the special time-saving game state).

In step E750-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the variable effect has been started. If the fluctuating effect has not started, the process moves to step E750-16, and if the fluctuating effect has started, in step E750-3, it is checked whether RWM clear was performed when the power was turned on (power-on specified command was received). If RWM clearing has been performed, the process moves to step E750-13 assuming that the RWM clear negative effect is not performed, and if RWM clearing has been performed, the process moves to step E750-4.

In step E750-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is any history of jackpot games being executed from power ON to the present. If there is a jackpot history, the RWM clear negative performance is not executed and the process moves to step E750-13, and if there is no jackpot history, the process moves to step E750-5.

In step E750-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations until shifting to the special time saving gaming state is within a predetermined number (100 times in this case). If the number is not within the predetermined number, the process moves to step E750-16 as a special time-saving effect (RWM clear negative effect, activation counter display) is not executed, and if it is within the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step E750-6. Transfer processing.

In step E750-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations since the power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the first number (here, 50 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the first number, the process moves to step E750-10, and if the number of fluctuations is the first number, in step E750-7, it is determined whether or not to execute the RWM clear negative effect, and whether to perform it. Whether or not to display the counter is determined by lottery (eg, 1/2 ratio).

In step E750-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether it has been determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect or the activation counter display. If it is determined not to execute the RWM clear negative effect or activation counter display, the process moves to step E750-16, and if it is determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect or activation counter display, step E750-9 In this step, an effect execution command corresponding to the determination result is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, a performance execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving performance (RWM clear negative performance and/or display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations since the power restoration (reception of the power restoration designation command) is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is not the second number, the process moves to step E750-16, and if the number of fluctuations is the second number, it is determined whether the RWM clear negative effect is executed and whether the activation counter is displayed. decide. Specifically, if the RWM clear negative effect has not been executed, it is determined to execute the RWM clear negative effect, and if the display of the activation counter has not been executed, it is determined to execute the display of the activation counter.

The sub CPU 130a sets an effect execution command according to the determination result in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a performance execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving performance (RWM clear negative performance and/or display of the activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the number of fluctuations since the power was turned on is the second number (here, 100 times). If the number of fluctuations is the second number, the process moves to step E750-15, and if the number of fluctuations is not the second number, in step E750-14, whether the normal time-saving gaming state has been shifted to production mode A or not. It is determined whether or not (all the variable performances according to the remaining reservation of the second special symbol have been completed). If the normal time-saving game state has shifted to production mode A, the process moves to step E750-15, and if the normal time-saving game state has not shifted to production mode A, the process moves to step E750-16.

In step E750-15, the sub CPU 130a sets the activation counter display command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a production execution command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing a special time-saving production (in this case, display of an activation counter) is performed.

In step E750-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (whether the symbol confirmation command has been received). If the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the process moves to step E750-17, and if the performance symbols are not stopped and displayed, the current special time-saving performance process is ended.

In step E750-17, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the activation counter is currently being displayed. If the activation counter is not being displayed, the current special time-saving effect processing is ended; if the activation counter is being displayed, the activation counter subtraction command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in step E750-18. do. As a result, an activation counter subtraction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and processing for subtracting the value of the activation counter is performed. When this process is finished, the current special time-saving performance process is ended.

In this way, while the variable performance is being executed a predetermined number of times since the power is turned on (the predetermined number of times before the special time-saving gaming state is activated), RWM clear (clearing the number of fluctuations) is not executed when the power is turned on. It is possible to execute an RWM clear negative effect that suggests that the current status is (deferred). Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the special time-saving gaming state occurs by referring to the number of fluctuations on the previous day, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, a plurality of execution timings for the RWM clear negative effect are set, and if it is executed at any timing, it will not be executed again at any other timing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectations regarding at what timing the RWM clear negative performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to display a suggested activation counter by counting down the number of fluctuations until the transition to the special time saving gaming state (activation countdown performance can be executed). Therefore, the player can grasp when the special time-saving gaming state will occur, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to provide motivation for continuing the game, and it is also possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, during the time saving game state, the activation counter is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player's attention is directed toward the special time-saving game state even though he is in the normal time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the activation counter is subtracted not at the start of a fluctuating performance where a jackpot preview performance or look-ahead performance is likely to be executed (started), but when a performance pattern stops where a jackpot notice performance or look-ahead performance is less likely to be executed (started) than at the start of variation. (countdown), it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that instead of subtracting (counting down) the activation counter when the performance symbols stop, the activation counter may be subtracting (countdown) at the start of the variable performance. In this case, the activation counter may be subtracted from when the performance symbol 70a starts to fluctuate until it completely shifts to high-speed fluctuation (becomes a constant speed), or when the performance symbol 70a starts to fluctuate, it may cause fluctuations such as rising. The scrolling (variation) may be performed after the pre-movement is performed, and the activation counter may be decremented by the time the pre-variation action is completed.

(Example of effect when look-ahead effect is executed during normal gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 140, an example of a performance when a prefetch performance is executed during the normal gaming state will be described. Here, it is assumed that an icon change effect and a look-ahead zone effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 140(a), a game ball enters the first start opening 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss (execution of the variable effect), and the first pending number changes from "1" to " 2", the number in the first pending number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and a look-ahead effect (here, an icon change effect, A white icon (pending icon HI) is additionally displayed as a preview target of the pre-reading zone effect). Furthermore, in the lower left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70, the number of games GK, which is the number of variable displays (variable effects) executed after the power is turned on or after the end of the jackpot game, is displayed.

Next, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 140(b), the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed at a loss ("814"), and are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is deleted.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) that results in a loss is started, as shown in FIG. 140(c), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. , the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C. The first one is displayed as the relevant icon TI. Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

At this time, an icon change effect is started, and the pending icon shifted and displayed on the first display section 70B1 changes to a blue icon (special icon). Further, the pre-reading zone effect is started and the background image changes to the pre-reading zone background, and a blue zone image ZG is displayed. Next, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 140(d), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol are stopped and displayed at a loss ("531"), and the relevant symbol displayed in the icon display area 70C is stopped. Icon TI is deleted.

After that, when the stop time elapses and the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) that results in a jackpot starts, as shown in FIG. 140(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. Then, the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C. is displayed as the relevant icon TI, and changes to a red icon (special icon). Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 140(f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state forming a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. The icon display area 70C becomes non-displayed (erased) and the prefetch zone effect is interrupted.

Then, when the final phase of the SP reach performance (timing of execution of the performance deciding whether or not to lose) is reached, a success performance is started, and a performance is performed in which the ally character C2 unleashes a final attack on the enemy character C3. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the presentation position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin" (here, it is a jackpot). (This will be announced).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the winning successful production is completed, the production pattern 70a is set to the special appearance common to the small hit and the jackpot ( "555"), the prefetch zone effect is resumed, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed. After that, when a temporary stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the production pattern 70a stops displaying a special number ("555") that is common to small hits and jackpots, and the special symbol TZ displays "555" indicating a small win. The display stops at a jackpot number ("555") that does not include "V". Furthermore, when the look-ahead zone effect ends, the icon TI is erased and the icon change effect ends.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss, when the final phase of the SP reach effect (the execution timing of the effect that decides whether or not it is a loss) is reached, the failure effect is started and the ally character C2 becomes the enemy character. A performance of losing to C3 is performed. After that, when the character screen "Defeat" is displayed and the winning result is notified and the winning failure performance ends, the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the reaching loss result (for example, "565"). become.

In this way, in the case of a jackpot in the normal gaming state, pre-read effects (icon change effects, pre-read zone effects, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectations when a jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when variable effect is executed after transitioning to rush battle mode)
With reference to FIG. 141, an example of a performance in a case where a variable performance is executed after transitioning to the rush battle mode will be described.

When the ending of the third jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 130(a), a time-saving rush effect is executed that suggests a time-saving game state, and a warning is also given to call the player's attention. An alert notification is executed. Specifically, a forget-to-take caution image TG is displayed that warns against forgetting to take out a card (storage medium) that can identify the balance of value from a lending device that performs game ball lending communication with the gaming machine 1. .

Thereafter, when the display period of the forget-to-take caution image has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(b), an absorption caution image NG is displayed to warn against getting too absorbed in the game. Then, when the ending time of the third jackpot game has passed, 7 times is set as the second time saving number (J2), the first pending number (U1) is "2", and the second pending number (U2) is " 0'', the normal time saving game state is started, and the rush battle mode background image, the first right-hand hitting image MG1 that urges to fire the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, and the second time saving number of times (J2) are displayed. The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "7 remaining times". Further, the number of games GK is displayed as "0". In other words, the first time saving number (J1), the third time saving number (J3), and the remaining number of small wins (Z) are not displayed.

Then, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 141(c), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the first pending The number in the display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the icon is instantly displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the remaining time saving number image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the second time saving number (J2) maintains the state of "7 remaining times". However, due to the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol, the rush battle reach effect is not executed.

At this time, when three game balls enter the second starting port 47 and the second reserved number increases from "0" to "3", as shown in FIG. 141(d), the second reserved number display area The number 70F increases from "0" to "3", and three white icons (pending icons HI) are additionally displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D.

Then, when the variable time has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as a losing number ("513"), as shown in FIG. do. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 141(f), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the second pending number The number in the display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one of the pending icons HI is displayed in the corresponding icon display area 70C. Displayed as icon TI. Further, the time saving remaining number of times image KG changes from "7 times remaining" to "6 times". Further, the number of games GK is added by 1 to become "1".

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(g), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state where they form a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(h), a rush battle reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 battle is started, and the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are displayed. will be hidden (erased). At this time, a character image "First Battle" indicating the number of executions of the rush battle reach performance is displayed.

At this time, two game balls enter the second starting port 47 and the second pending number increases from "2" to "4", but the second pending icon display area 70D is hidden (erased). Therefore, no additional pending icon will be displayed.

After that, at the final stage of the rush battle reach performance (timing of execution of the performance to decide whether or not to lose), a failure performance is started, and a performance in which the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3 is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 141 ( As shown in i), the message "Defeat" is displayed on the screen to inform you that you have lost.

After that, when the variable time has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as a losing number ("565"), as shown in FIG. do. Further, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, every time the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is started, the effects shown in FIGS. At the same time as the subtraction, the number of the character image indicating the number of executions of the rush battle reach effect will also be updated.

In this way, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving entry effect is executed during the ending of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the normal time-saving gaming state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the normal time-saving gaming state is generated, the right hit notification is performed before the normal time-saving gaming state occurs (during the jackpot game). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage due to a left-handed hit when the normal time-saving gaming state occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when generating a normal time-saving game state, regardless of whether or not there is a pending memory, a performance mode (here, rush battle mode) corresponding to the time-saving state is set according to the ending of the jackpot game, and the performance is The background image corresponding to the mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that the normal time-saving gaming state has occurred, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the normal time-saving game state is generated, the normal time-saving entry effect is executed in a state where the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are hidden. Therefore, it is possible to use the time-saving state in a new mood without worrying about the result of the previous variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a normal time-saving gaming state is generated, an attention-raising effect (displaying a forgetting caution image TG, displaying an engrossed caution image NG) to alert the player is performed, and then a performance corresponding to the time-saving state ( Changes in the background image, display of the remaining time saving number image KG, right hit notification, variable effects according to the time saving state, output of BGM corresponding to the rush battle mode, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively alert the players.

In addition, at the start of the normal time-saving gaming state, even if the player is waiting for a customer with no pending memory, the BGM corresponding to the production mode for the time-saving state is audibly output, but after a predetermined period of time, it is muted ( (audible output is stopped). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the performance effect is immediately drastically reduced even when the player is in a waiting state with no pending memory, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is controlled after a jackpot is when any of the multiple ending conditions (Special 1 remaining time saving number, Special 2 remaining time saving number, total remaining number of times, small winning number remaining) is satisfied. It is possible to end the game (shift to the normal gaming state), and the predetermined ending condition (number of small wins) in the advantageous gaming state is not announced, but mode effects (change of background image, display of time saving remaining number image KG) indicates a predetermined termination condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the advantageous gaming state will end or not, and it is also possible to give the player the fun of guessing the ending conditions through the mode presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is controlled after the jackpot occurs when the first end condition (remaining number of time-savers, special 2 time-saver remaining number of times) is satisfied, or when the second end condition (remaining number of small wins, special time-saver remaining number of times) is satisfied. It is possible to end the game (transition to the normal gaming state) when the following conditions (remaining number of time savings, total remaining number of times) are established, and during the advantageous gaming state, information related to the first ending condition (remaining number of time savings, special 2 The remaining number of time savings) can be notified, while information related to the second end condition (remaining number of small wins, remaining number of special 1 time savings, total remaining number of times) is not notified. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the advantageous gaming state will end, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the remaining number of time savings under Special 1 is not reported, but the remaining number of time savings under Special 2 is notified. In addition, the remaining number of small wins is not announced, but the remaining number of time-saving specials 2 is announced. In addition, there are more types of ending conditions that are not notified (remaining number of time savings in special 1, remaining number of small wins) than types of ending conditions that are notified (remaining number of time savings in special 2). Additionally, there are termination conditions that are not suggested by the mode presentation.

In addition, if the player is waiting for a customer at the start of the normal time-saving gaming state that has transitioned from the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the production mode of the normal time-saving gaming state is muted without being audibly output. Good too. In this case, when a game ball enters the starting slot from the customer waiting state and a pending memory occurs and the variable performance is started, if the BGM corresponding to the performance mode of the normal time-saving gaming state is audibly output. good.

Also, although the warning performance is performed during the ending of the jackpot game, the warning performance may be performed from the ending of the jackpot game to the normal time saving game state, or immediately after the start of the normal time saving state. (during the first fluctuation effect), or the forgetting caution image TG and the engrossed caution image NG may be displayed in order during the attention raising effect (whichever may be displayed first).

In addition, in the variation presentation of the first special symbol that is executed when there is no second pending memory and there is the first pending memory at the start of the normal time saving gaming state, the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is performed. However, only the variable display of the special symbol TZ may be executed without executing the variable display of the performance symbol 70a. In this way, it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by the fact that the second time saving number (J2) is not subtracted, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variation presentation of the first special symbol that is executed when there is no second pending memory and there is the first pending memory at the start of the normal time saving gaming state, the special symbol TZ is displayed without executing the variable display of the production symbol 70a. When performing only the fluctuation display, if it is a loss, the fluctuation display is executed with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, shortened fluctuation, super shortened fluctuation, etc.), and if it is a win, the fluctuation display is performed with a longer fluctuation time than in the case of a loss. A special performance may be performed.

In addition, the right-handed hit notification is not performed during the time-saving entry performance, but by displaying the first right-handed hit image MG1, the right-handed hit notification is always performed from the jackpot game to the normal time-saving game state. It's okay.

(Example of a performance when the fluctuating performance in the final round of rush battle mode results in a jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 142, an example of a performance when a jackpot is achieved in the fluctuating performance in the final round of the rush battle mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), the variable time in the variable display (fluctuating effect) of the second special symbol one time before the final round in the rush battle mode has elapsed, and the second special symbol stops at the losing special symbol. When displayed, as shown in FIG. 142(a), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at a loss ("676"). Further, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol, which is the final round of the rush battle mode, starts, as shown in FIG. 142(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts. , the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C. One of the icons is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, due to the final change in time saving, the time saving remaining number image KG changes from "1 remaining" to "last", and the storage prompts you to save the second reservation memory (increase the second reservation number) by hitting right. A promotion image SG is displayed. This storage promotion image SG is an image that is displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a as much as possible, and is a count image (here, "09 :99'') will be displayed, and a countdown will be displayed as time passes. Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

After that, when one game ball enters the second starting port 47, the number in the second pending number display area 70F increases from "1" to "2", as shown in FIG. A white icon (pending icon HI) is additionally displayed on the second display section 70D2 of the icon display area 70D. Since the pre-reading result of the second reserved memory (special figure judgment information) stored at this time is a jackpot, the winning light emission effect is started and the top lamp 10b lights up in yellow, and the sound output device 9 outputs the sound effect “Pikon”. ♪” is output.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 142(d), the number in the second reserved number display area 70F increases from "2" to "4", A white icon (pending icon HI) is additionally displayed on the third display section 70D3 and the fourth display section 70D4 of the icon display area 70D. In addition, the characters "Save by hitting right" in the second storage promotion image SG2 change to "MAX!!" indicating that the second reservation number (U2) has reached the upper limit ("4"). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the count image of the storage promotion image SG becomes "00:00" and the countdown ends, and then the storage promotion image SG is deleted.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 142(f), the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a state where they form a reach, and a normal reach effect is executed. Further, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a development effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 142(g), a final battle reach effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 have a final battle is started, and the second pending icon display area 70D And the icon display area 70C becomes non-displayed (erased). At this time, a text image "Final Battle" indicating the number of executions of the battle reach effect is displayed. Furthermore, the number of games GK is hidden as the development effect is executed.

Thereafter, when the final phase of the special SP reach performance (timing of execution of the performance deciding whether or not to lose) is reached, a success performance is started, and a performance is performed in which the ally character C2 unleashes a final attack on the enemy character C3. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142(h), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the production position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin", and the final attack is applied to the enemy character. You will be notified that there was a hit.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the winning success performance is completed, as shown in FIG. ) will be notified. Then, when the variable time has passed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as a jackpot ("555"), as shown in FIG. 142(j). do. Further, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, in the last variable performance in the normal time-saving game state, a storage promotion performance (display of storage promotion image SG, countdown display) that encourages storing the second reservation memory (increasing the second reservation number) by hitting the right hand. is now executed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the second reservation memory is stored before the end of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

In addition, in the storage promotion performance, by displaying a countdown, it is possible to make the player strongly aware of saving the second reservation memory (increasing the number of second reservations) by hitting the right hand, and the player can avoid losses. This makes it possible to suppress exposure to

In addition, when the second number of reservations (U2) reaches the upper limit in the storage promotion effect, the words "Save by hitting right" will be displayed in a display mode (" MAX!!”). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from firing the game ball uselessly, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in rush battle mode, which is the normal time-saving game state, when the variable display of the second and final special symbol that ends the normal time-saving game state is executed, the final battle reach effect is always executed. There is. Therefore, even if the normal time-saving gaming state ends due to a loss, the player can be sufficiently entertained and the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, during the time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to win a game ball to the second starting port 47, the pre-read result of the second reservation memory (special figure determination information) based on the winning to the second starting port 47 is a small hit. In this case, it is possible to perform a winning lighting effect (pre-reading effect) targeting the reserved memory that becomes the small win. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not a small win game that may lead to a jackpot game will be executed in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a countdown display is executed in the storage promotion effect, but the gauge image is displayed for a shorter period than the time until the reach effect starts, and the length of the gauge is shortened as time passes. It is also possible to perform display effects such as In addition, in addition to lighting a specific light emitting means for a period shorter than the time until the reach effect starts, the color of the light emitted changes as time passes (for example, lighting blue → lighting yellow → lighting red). It may also be possible to perform a light emitting effect.

(Example of performance when the normal time-saving gaming state ends)
With reference to FIG. 143, an example of a performance in the case where the time saving number (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the normal time saving game state ends will be described.

Here, at the same time as the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is the time saving final fluctuation starts, a series of effects that make it appear as if one fluctuation effect is being executed over multiple fluctuation displays is started, and as shown in FIG. 143 ( As shown in a), it is assumed that a final battle reach effect that results in a loss is being executed.

After that, at the final stage of the final battle reach performance (timing of execution of the performance to decide whether or not to lose), a failure performance is started, and a performance in which the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3 is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 143 ( As shown in b), the message "Defeat" is displayed on the screen to inform you that you have lost.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the decision failure effect ends, and as shown in FIG. be exposed. Specifically, the number of executions of the jackpot game (here, "1 win") and the total number of balls paid out (here, 450 pts) are displayed as the match results. In addition, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed when the number of reach misses ("565"), and when the stop time has elapsed, the time-saving gaming state ends with four second pending memories remaining, and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, and the first The right-handed image MG1 is deleted.

After that, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (loss variation effect) is started based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reservation memory), as shown in FIG. 143(d) As shown in , the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("749"), as shown in FIG. 135(e). Note that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period when the results are displayed, and even if a variable effect is performed, the number of games is only added internally and cannot be visually grasped. It is in a state.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed and a second variable display of the second special symbol (loss variation effect) is started based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserve memory). , as shown in FIG. 143(f), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("349"), as shown in FIG. 143(g).

Furthermore, when the stop time has passed and the third variable display of the second special symbol (fluctuating loss effect) is started based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserve memory). , the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1". Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed as a losing result.

After that, when the 4th (last) variable display of the 2nd special symbol (variable performance of loss) starts based on the remaining retention of the 2nd special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (2nd retention memory), the result display While this continues, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second reservation number display area 70F decreases from "1" to "0". Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 143(h), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed on a losing roll ("749"), and when the stop time has elapsed, the result display ends and the above-mentioned series of effects occur. ends.

After that, when the variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. The number decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Ru. At this time, a performance mode A background image corresponding to the normal game state is displayed, and a left-handed image HG that urges the player to shoot the game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. Further, the number of games GK is redisplayed in the state after the addition.

In addition, here we have shown an example in which the normal time-saving game state ends when the rush battle mode is in effect, but the normal time-saving game state ends when the performance mode is in the wild dance mode, super wild dance mode, or infinite mode. Even if there is, the process basically progresses as shown in FIGS. 143(a) to 143(i).

In this way, from the variable display of the second special symbol which is the time saving final variation to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state, one variable performance is made. A series of effects will be executed to make it appear as if ``is being executed''. Therefore, it is possible for the player to experience an innovative performance that does not make him strongly aware of the remaining number of reserved second special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol in a series of productions, only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed without the variable display of the production symbol 70a. . Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize a plurality of fluctuating performances as a series of performances, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

In addition, by displaying the result from the variable display of the second special symbol that is the time saving final variation to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. , it becomes easier to recognize a plurality of fluctuating performances as a series of performances, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

Furthermore, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG that urges the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when transitioning to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of a series of presentations. Therefore, the player is not required to shoot game balls needlessly, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the display mode of the termination suggestion screen changes depending on the number of special 2 suspensions (second suspension storage). On the other hand, even if there is special 1 suspension (first suspension memory), the display period of the termination suggestion screen does not change.

In addition, a series of performances are executed from the variable display of the second special symbol which is the time saving final variation to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. However, in the variable display of the second special symbol which is the final time saving variation, the series of performances is not started and the second special symbol is displayed based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state. A series of effects may be executed over the variable display of symbols. In this case, it is preferable to perform a special SP ready-to-win performance or result display in the first variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state.

(Example 1 of production when you get a small hit by holding the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 144, an example 1 of performance in the case where a small win is achieved with the remaining reservation of the second special symbol (second reservation storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state will be explained.

Here, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the time saving final variation, a series of effects that appear as if one variable effect is being executed over a plurality of variable displays is started, and as shown in FIG. ), it is assumed that the final battle reach effect that results in a loss is being executed. At this time, the winning light emitting effect that targets the second pending memory (small win) is continuing, and the top lamp 10b is in a state of emitting yellow light.

After that, at the final stage of the final battle reach performance (timing of execution of the performance to decide whether or not to lose), a failure performance is started, and a performance in which the ally character C2 loses to the enemy character C3 is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 144 ( As shown in b), the message "Defeat" is displayed on the screen to inform you that you have lost.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the decision failure effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 144(c), the results of the games in a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving game state continues from the first small winning game or big winning game are shown. The results will be displayed. Specifically, the number of executions of the jackpot game (here, "1 win") and the total number of balls paid out (here, 450 pts) are displayed as the match results. In addition, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed when the reach is missed ("565").

However, since the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state includes a small hit, the result display executed here is This is a special result display (a type of look-ahead effect) that suggests that a small hit is included in the remaining reserve (second reserve memory) of the second special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of star images YG are displayed at positions avoiding the character images displayed in the result display. Then, when the stop time has elapsed, the normal time-saving game state ends with four second pending memories remaining, the state shifts to the normal game state, and the first right-handed image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (loss variation effect) is started based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserve memory), as shown in FIG. 144(d) As shown in , the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the result display continues, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("749"), as shown in FIG. 144(e). Note that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period when the results are displayed, and even if a variable effect is performed, the number of games is only added internally and cannot be visually grasped. It is in a state.

Then, when the second variable display of the second special symbol (small hit variable effect) is started based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol (second reserve memory) at the time of transition to the normal game state, Fig. 144 (f ), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, and the number in the second reservation number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". At this time, a revival effect is started, and a character image saying ``We still have a long way to go!'' is displayed, and then an effect in which the ally character C2 fights back against the enemy character C3 is performed.

Then, when the ally character C2 launches the final attack, the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the production position, and the audio output device 9 makes a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin" as shown in FIG. 144(g). is output (here, it is announced that the current variable display of the second special symbol will be a small hit). At this time, the top lamp 10b goes out and the winning light emission effect ends.

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the production position to the standby position and the revival production ends, the production pattern 70a temporarily stops at a special roll ("555") common to small hits and jackpots, and temporarily stops. As time elapses, as shown in FIG. 144(h), the production pattern 70a stops displaying a special number ("555") that is common to small hits and jackpots, and the special symbol TZ displays "V" indicating a small win. It will stop and display at a small winning number ("5V5") including "." Further, the number of games GK is redisplayed in the state after the addition.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, the series of performances described above ends, the opening of the small winning game starts, and as shown in FIG. 144(i), a "BONUS" image indicating that the small winning game will be executed is displayed. At the same time, a first right-handed image MG1 is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a, which prompts the player to shoot the game ball.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 144(j), a second right-hitting image MG2 is displayed on the right side of the gaming area 5a to prompt the player to shoot the game ball instead of the "BONUS" image.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed, at the opening of the jackpot game, a "jackpot" image indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed, and a game ball is fired to the right side of the gaming area 5a. A first right-hand hitting image MG1 is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second right-hitting image MG2 is displayed on the right side of the gaming area 5a to prompt the player to shoot the game ball instead of the "jackpot" image.

In this way, if the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second pending memory stored during the specific gaming state) includes one whose pre-reading result is a small hit, It is possible to execute a special result display (pre-reading effect) that guarantees a small win. Therefore, even though the result display gives the player a sense of loss, it can give the player a sense of security, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (second reservation memory stored during the specific gaming state), it will be a jackpot. The first movable member 73a operates in the same manner as in the case. Therefore, it is possible to effectively present the execution of a small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, if a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second reservation memory stored during the specific gaming state), it will be a jackpot. The same notification sound (``kyuinkyuin'') as in the case is outputted from the audio output device 9. Therefore, it is possible to effectively present the execution of a small winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second reservation memory stored during the specific gaming state), the performance symbol 70a The same outcome (a special outcome where three of the same numbers are lined up) as in the case of a jackpot is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that a small winning game will lead to a big winning game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol may be made shorter than the stop time of the special symbol TZ stopped in the fluctuation performance that becomes the time saving final fluctuation. In other words, it is possible to display an end suggestion screen (result display, shutter image SY display) during the execution of the final fluctuating performance in an advantageous state, and to display a predetermined number of times (remaining number of second special symbols) after the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to continue displaying the end suggestion screen until the variation effect (minutes) is executed, and the variation performed while the end suggestion screen continues to be displayed is longer than the symbol stop time of the final variation effect in an advantageous state. It is possible to shorten the variation time of the performance. In this case, when a revival effect is executed in a variable effect that is executed from the end of an advantageous state to the end of displaying the end suggestion screen, it is possible to suppress the delay until the revival effect, and increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the
Further, the variation performance performed while the termination suggestion is displayed is executed with a special variation pattern (variation of only the special symbol TZ) that is not executed in the normal gaming state.

In addition, when a jackpot is achieved with a variable performance executed while the end suggestion screen (result display) is displayed, the execution rate of the ready-to-win performance is lower than when a jackpot is achieved while the end suggestion screen is not displayed. In addition, ``If a jackpot is achieved with a fluctuating effect executed while the end suggestion screen is displayed, the execution rate of the reach effect is lower than when a jackpot is achieved while the end suggestion screen is not displayed.'' In the case where a jackpot is achieved with a variable performance executed while the end suggestion screen is displayed, it also includes the case where the reach effect is not executed (0%). In addition, if a jackpot occurs due to a fluctuating effect that is executed while the termination suggestion screen is displayed, and if a jackpot occurs while the termination suggestion screen is not displayed, the notification of the jackpot will be executed while the termination suggestion screen is displayed. .

In addition, if the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second holding memory stored during the specific gaming state) includes a small hit, the special result display will be executed. However, even if there is a jackpot among the remaining second special symbols at the time of transition to the normal gaming state, a special result display will be displayed in the same display format as for a small win. may also be executed. Further, special result displays may be performed in different display modes depending on whether there is a small win or a big win.

In addition, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state (the second reservation memory stored during the specific gaming state), the performance symbol 70a The same number of results (a special number with three same numbers lined up) as in the case of a jackpot is displayed, but even if the number is the same, the color of the numbers is different, or a specific image (a specific number) is displayed. It is also possible to vary whether or not to add characters (characters or decorative images).

In addition, if the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (the second reservation memory stored during the specific game state) includes a small hit, a small win game (= Although the same special result display is performed regardless of the type of stop special figure data), the special result display may be performed in different ways depending on the type of small winning game.

(Example 2 of production when you get a small hit by holding the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 145, a second performance example will be described in which a small win is achieved with the remaining reservation of the second special symbol (second reservation storage) at the time of transition to the normal game state.

Here, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the second special symbol which is the time saving final variation, a series of effects that appear as if one variable effect is being executed over multiple variable displays is started, and as shown in FIG. ), it is assumed that the final battle reach performance that results in a loss is being executed. At this time, the winning light emitting effect that targets the second pending memory (small win) is continuing, and the top lamp 10b is in a state of emitting yellow light.

Thereafter, when the final stage of the final battle reach performance (timing of execution of the performance deciding whether or not to lose) is reached, a pre-reading success performance is started and a performance is performed in which the ally character C2 unleashes a final attack on the enemy character C3. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145(b), the first movable member 73a moves from the standby position to the production position, and the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound of "Kyuinkyuin" (here, after this It is announced that the variable display of the second special symbol executed second will result in a small hit).

Next, when the first movable member 73a returns from the performance position to the standby position and the winning success performance is completed, as shown in FIG. This will be announced. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(d), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the reach-missing number ("565") while the character image "Win" continues to be displayed. Then, when the stop time has elapsed, the time-saving game state ends with four second pending memories remaining, the game shifts to the normal game state, and the first right-handed game image MG1 is erased.

After that, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reservation memory) is started, as shown in FIG. 145(e) As shown in , while the character image "Win" continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". .

Next, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(f), the special symbol TZ stops displaying at a loss ("938") while the character image "Win" continues to be displayed. . After that, when the stop time has elapsed, a second variable display of the second special symbol (small win variable display) based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserve memory) is started, As shown in FIG. 145(g), the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started while the character image "Win" continues to be displayed, and the number in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2". ' decreases to '.

After that, when the variable time has elapsed, the production pattern 70a temporarily stops at a special roll ("555") common to small hits and jackpots, and when the temporary stop time has elapsed, the production pattern 70a stops as shown in FIG. The symbol 70a stops displaying at a special number ("555") that is common to small wins and jackpots, and the special symbol TZ stops and displays at a small winning number ("5V5") including "V" indicating a small win. . Additionally, the number of games GK is redisplayed.

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, the series of performances described above ends, the opening of the small winning game starts, and as shown in FIG. 145(i), a "BONUS" image indicating that the small winning game will be executed is displayed. At the same time, a first right-handed image MG1 is displayed on the right side of the game area 5a, which prompts the player to shoot the game ball. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(j), a second right-hitting image MG2 is displayed on the right side of the gaming area 5a to prompt the player to shoot the game ball instead of the "BONUS" image.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed, at the opening of the jackpot game, a "jackpot" image indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is displayed, and a game ball is fired to the right side of the gaming area 5a. A first right-hand hitting image MG1 is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a second right-hitting image MG2 is displayed on the right side of the gaming area 5a to prompt the player to shoot the game ball instead of the "jackpot" image.

In this way, if the variable performance related to the remaining hold of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state becomes a small hit or a jackpot, even if the final variable performance in the time-saving gaming state is a loss, the pre-reading As a type of performance, a battle performance that confirms victory (pre-reading success performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a variable performance that is unexpected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the presentation mode of the opening performance when a small winning game is executed is different from the presentation mode of the opening presentation when a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to understand from the opening performance whether it is a small winning game or a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, the contents of the variable performance are the same when a small winning game is executed and when a jackpot game is executed, but when a small winning game is executed and when a jackpot game is executed. The presentation contents of the variable presentation may be made different when the variable presentation is performed. In this case, the time during which the first movable member 73a is in the performance position may be made different depending on when a small winning game is executed and when a jackpot game is executed, or the light emitting mode of the first movable member 73a may be changed. It may be different.

(Example of production when a small winning game is executed in Super Ranbu mode)
With reference to FIG. 146, an example of production when a small winning game is executed in the super wild dance mode will be described.

Here, as a result of the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol executed in the super random dance mode, the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first small winning game is started, and the first small winning game is It is assumed that the opening has started.

When the opening of the first small winning game is finished and the opening/closing game that changes the state of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. 146(a), the specific area A third right-handed image MG3 is displayed that urges you to shoot the game ball aiming at 53, and a limit notification effect according to the remaining period of the opening/closing game (the remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. will be started. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and as time passes, the count image CG is displayed and the display size is enlarged. will be held. At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small winning game.

When the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 at a timing immediately after that, a passing notification effect that indicates that the game ball has passed (enters) the specific area 53 starts, as shown in FIG. 146(b). be done. Specifically, the passage notification image TH consisting of the letter "V" is displayed, and the passage notification sound ``Vacun♪'' is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146(c), until the end timing of the opening/closing game (state change of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52), that is, until the small winning game (conversion game) ends. The passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the jackpot game (1st V jackpot game) starts, the jackpot game (1st V jackpot game) is executed as shown in FIG. 146(d). A “V-BONUS” image is displayed. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game is started and a jackpot effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 146(e). In addition, the total number of balls paid out "660 pt" corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of balls paid out is "660pt" corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out during the small winning game. The number of pitched balls is updated.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time (eight seconds in this case) passes without the game ball passing through the specific area 53 (winning) after the start of the small winning game, the count image CG will change to "01" as shown in FIG. 146(f). :99'' and is displayed in a larger size than in FIG. 146(a). When the game ball passes (enters) the specific area 53 at a timing immediately after that, as shown in FIG. The device 9 outputs a passing notification sound "Vacuum♪".

After that, as shown in FIG. 146(c), until the end timing of the opening/closing game (state change of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52), that is, until the small winning game (conversion game) ends. The passing notification effect (here, the display of the winning notification image NH) continues. After that, when the first small winning game ends and the opening of the jackpot game (1st V jackpot game) starts, the jackpot game (1st V jackpot game) is executed as shown in FIG. 146(d). A “V-BONUS” image is displayed. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game is started and a jackpot effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 146(e). In addition, the total number of balls paid out "660 pt" corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out during the small winning game is displayed, and the total number of balls paid out is "660pt" corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out during the small winning game. The number of pitched balls is updated.

Furthermore, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 (win) and the remaining time of the opening/closing game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 146(g), the screen is displayed in a larger size than FIG. 146(f). The current count image CG becomes "00:00". In addition, at the ending of the first small winning game, a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening/closing game). A character image and a character who has fainted are displayed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a disappointing sound effect ``ch''.

After that, when the ending of the first small winning game ends, the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is subtracted to 1, as shown in FIG. Rank down from mode to wild dance mode. Then, the wild dance mode background corresponding to the wild dance mode is displayed, and the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are redisplayed. Further, the second pending icon display area 70D and the icon display area 70C are re-displayed, and the remaining time saving number image KG is also re-displayed. Additionally, the number of games GK is redisplayed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) is started, as shown in FIG. 146(i), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are started, and the second pending number The number in the display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one of the pending icons HI is displayed in the corresponding icon display area 70C. Displayed as icon TI. Further, the time saving remaining number of times image KG changes from "80 times remaining" to "79 times". Also, 1 is added to the number of games GK.

In this way, when a game ball passes through the specific area 53 in a small winning game (more specifically, an opening/closing game), a passing notification effect is executed to indicate that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53. There is. Therefore, even if the inside of the first jackpot 50 (around the specific area 53) is difficult to see, the player can be sure that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (that a jackpot game will be executed). This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the specific area 53 in a small winning game (more specifically, an opening/closing game), the small winning game (more specifically, an opening/closing game) is executed regardless of the timing at which it passes through this specific area 53. The passage notification performance continues until the end. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player cannot detect the passing notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the small winning game (conversion game), a limit notification effect is executed according to the remaining time of the opening/closing game (the remaining time in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53). Therefore, the player can be accurately urged to shoot the game ball so as to pass through the specific area 53, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of missing a chance to win a jackpot game.

In addition, depending on the remaining time of the opening/closing game (the remaining time for the game ball to pass through the specific area 53), the notification mode (count number, size of the count image) of the limit notification effect (highly appealing to players) change). Therefore, it is possible to increase the appeal to players as time passes, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of missing a chance to win a jackpot game.

In addition, in the limit notification performance, a countdown display that allows you to specify the remaining time for opening and closing games allows players to accurately grasp the time when there is a chance to win a jackpot game, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, in a small winning game (conversion game), if the execution period of the opening/closing game passes without the game ball passing through the specific area 53, the game ball is identified during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening/closing game). A regret notification effect is executed to notify that the area 53 has not been passed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the jackpot game could not be won, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player feels dissatisfied because the result of the small win game is unclear.

In addition, in the small winning game (opening/closing game) executed as a result of the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) executed in the super wild dance mode (the same applies to the infinite mode), the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53. When the opening/closing game execution period has passed and the small winning game ends, the remaining number of small winnings is reduced to 1 when the small winning special symbol stops, so the remaining number of small winnings is 1. It is now ranked down to the corresponding wild dance mode. Therefore, by setting the production mode according to the remaining number of small wins, when a jackpot game or a small win game is subsequently executed, game conditions that are consistent with the player's recognition will be set, and the game will be It becomes possible to improve interest.

In addition, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small winning game executed during the time saving game state, the remaining number of small winnings (Z) is not "0" (the number of short winnings is also "0"). (not), the time-saving gaming state continues. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be fired during a small winning game due to a malfunction in the firing device or a ball jamming, etc., the player will not suffer an extreme disadvantage and the interest in the game will decrease. It becomes possible to suppress the

In addition, although the limit notification production was made according to the remaining period of the opening/closing game, it may be a production according to the remaining time until the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 is finally in the closed state, or a small winning game. The performance may be performed according to the remaining time.

In addition, a countdown display is executed as a limit notification effect, but a gauge image is displayed for the remaining period of the opening/closing game, and a display effect that shortens the length of the gauge as time passes. It may also be executed. In addition, a specific light emitting means is lit for the remaining period of the opening/closing game, and a light emitting effect is executed in which the color of the light emitted changes over time (for example, blue lights → yellow lights → red lights). It's okay.

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in the small winning game executed during the time-saving game state, but the time-saving game state is continued, the time-saving remaining number image KG is in a state where the remaining number of times can be grasped ( Although the remaining number of times is displayed (e.g., 80 times remaining), it may be displayed in such a way that the remaining number of times cannot be grasped (unknown), such as ``??? times''.

Further, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 in a small winning game executed during the time-saving game state, but the time-saving game state is continued, a text image such as "It may become a wild dance mode" is displayed. In this case, a suggestion effect indicating that the super wild dance mode or the infinite mode will not be continued may be executed.

(Example of production when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small winning game in Ranbu mode)
With reference to FIG. 147, an example of a performance when the time-saving game state is interrupted as a result of a small winning game in the wild dance mode will be described.

Here, as a result of the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol executed in the wild dance mode, the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first small winning game is started, and the opening of the first small winning game is performed. It is assumed that the At this time, the number of games GK is hidden in response to the start of the small winning game.

When the opening of the first small winning game is finished and the opening/closing game that changes the state of the first big prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the specific area opening/closing member 52 is started, as shown in FIG. 147(a), the specific area A third right-handed image MG3 is displayed that urges you to shoot the game ball aiming at 53, and a limit notification effect according to the remaining period of the opening/closing game (the remaining time during which the game ball can pass through the specific area 53) is displayed. will be started. Specifically, a count image CG (here, "09:99") is displayed in the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and as time passes, the count image CG is displayed and the display size is enlarged. will be held.

After that, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 (win) and the remaining time of the opening/closing game becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 147(c), the screen is displayed in a larger size than in FIG. 147(a). The current count image CG becomes "00:00". In addition, at the ending of the first small winning game, a disappointing notification effect is executed to notify that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small winning game (more specifically, during the opening/closing game). A character image and a character who has fainted are displayed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a disappointing sound effect ``ch''.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 147(c), an end suggestion effect suggesting that the time-saving gaming state ends is executed. Specifically, the shutter image SY closes so as to cover the background image, the "Sorry" text image, and the fainted character, and when the ending period ends, a small win is awarded as shown in FIG. 147(d). The special symbol TZ "5V5" of the mode is re-displayed, and the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F are re-displayed.

After that, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reservation memory) is started, as shown in FIG. 147(e) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (occlusion image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ starts and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3". do. Note that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if a variable effect is performed, the number of games is only added internally and is not visually recognized. It is not possible to do so.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is executed, that is, the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and pre-reading are performed. The performance is not being performed.

In addition, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 147(f), the special symbol TZ stops displaying at a loss ("346") while the shutter image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed. . After that, the special symbol TZ changes and stops while the shutter image SY (shielding image) is displayed until the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state becomes 0. The display is repeated.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol TZ when the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0, the shutter image is displayed as shown in FIG. 147(g). While the SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("559").

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 147(h), the shutter image SY (shielding image) disappears, the production mode A background image is displayed, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and a left-handed image HG that urges the player to shoot the game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. Further, the number of games GK is redisplayed in the state after the addition.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the remaining reserve (first reserve memory) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserve number display area The number 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. be done.

In this way, in the small winning game (opening/closing game) executed as a result of the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) executed in the wild dance mode (including the case of rush battle mode), the game ball moves in the specific area 53. If the execution period of the opening/closing game has passed without passing and the small winning game ends, the remaining number of small winnings will be subtracted to 0 when the small winning special symbol stops and the time saving game state has ended. The rank is lowered to production mode A corresponding to the gaming state (the normal gaming state is notified). Therefore, the game state is set to be consistent with the player's perception, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in a small winning game, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and the execution period of the opening/closing game passes and the small winning game ends (the time saving gaming state does not continue), the normal gaming state The result display is not executed before a certain event is announced (various performance images corresponding to performance mode A are displayed). Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the game without giving the player a sense of loss of missing out on the jackpot game and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, one variable performance is executed from the variable display of the second special symbol that is the time saving final variation to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. A series of effects will be executed to make it appear as if something is happening. Therefore, it is possible for the player to experience an innovative performance that does not make him strongly aware of the remaining number of reserved second special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol in a series of productions, only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed without the variable display of the production symbol 70a. . Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize a plurality of fluctuating performances as a series of performances, and it becomes possible to improve the performance effect of the series of performances.

Moreover, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG that urges the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when transitioning to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of a series of performances. Therefore, the player is not required to shoot game balls needlessly, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is controlled after a jackpot can be terminated when the number of small wins reaches a specified number, and the If the game medium does not pass through a specific area during a winning game, a screen (result display, shutter image SY) suggesting the end of the advantageous gaming state is displayed, and when the small winning game ends, a special 2nd hold (2nd hold) is displayed. The display period of the termination suggestion screen changes depending on whether there is a memory) or when there is no special 2 suspension. Therefore, if the game medium does not pass through a specific area during a small winning game, the player can be informed that the advantageous gaming state will end, thereby avoiding inconveniences such as the progress of the game being unclear. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by changing the display period of the end suggestion screen depending on the presence or absence of special 2 hold, it is possible to execute the end suggestion effect in a manner that reflects the progress of the game, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

It is possible to end the advantageous state when the first end condition (number of time-saving games) or the second end condition (number of small wins) is met during the advantageous state, and the first end condition is satisfied when the advantageous state (time-saving gaming state) is satisfied. When the game ends due to (exhaustion of the number of short-time wins), a result display is executed, and when the advantageous state ends when the second termination condition is satisfied (exhaustion of the number of small wins), a result display is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player when the advantageous state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is executed, that is, the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and pre-reading are performed. Instead of setting the state in which no performance is performed, the execution of the jackpot preview performance may be allowed and the execution of the pre-read performance may be regulated, or vice versa. In addition, execution of specific preview performances among the jackpot preview performances (e.g., winning/losing performance, jackpot confirmation performance, etc.) is permitted, and execution of other preview performances (e.g., dialogue preview performance, roulette preview performance, cut-in preview performance, etc.) is permitted. ) may be regulated, or the execution of a specific effect among the look-ahead effects (for example, a light-up effect when winning a prize) may be permitted, and the execution of other effects (for example, a look-ahead zone effect or a look-ahead countdown effect) may be restricted. etc.) may be regulated.

(Example of production when special time-saving production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 148, an example of a performance in a case where a special time-saving performance is executed due to RWM clearing not being performed at the start of power supply will be described. In addition, special time-saving effects include negative RWM clear effects that suggest that RWM clearing has not been performed (it remains deferred), and activation counter displays that indicate the number of changes until transitioning to the special time-saving gaming state. It will be done.

Here, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol is displayed 395 times (variable effect), and the power supply is stopped (power OFF) during the normal game state, and the power supply is restarted (power OFF). It is assumed that after the control state of the game is restored when the power is turned on, variable display of special symbols (variable performance) is executed 48 times.

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(a), the first special symbol is displayed in the normal gaming state (production mode A) as the 49th special symbol fluctuation display after the power supply is restarted (the gaming control state is restored). The variable display (variable effect) has started, and "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F, and the first pending icon display area Two pending icons HI are displayed in 70B, and the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Further, 49 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the first special symbol variable display (variable effect) is started as a variable display of the special symbol that is the 50th time after the power supply is resumed and there are less than 100 times left until the special time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 148 ( As shown in c), the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the number in the first pending icon display area 70B decreases. The two displayed pending icons HI are shifted toward the icon display area 70C and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 49 to 50.

At this time, if it is decided to perform the RWM clear denial effect and the activation counter display, as shown in FIG. A notification logo LG including the text "Help Time" indicating the gaming state and a text image "66 remaining" indicating the number of remaining variations are displayed. Further, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, the first reservation number display area 70E increases from "1" to "2", and the reservation icon HI is additionally displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B.

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 148(e), the stationary notification character SC and the activation counter display are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the screen so as not to obstruct the visibility of the production pattern 70a. Ru.

Thereafter, when the first special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number ("624 ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "65 remaining."

In addition, when the first special symbol variable display (variable effect) is started as the 51st variable display of the special symbol after the power supply is resumed, as shown in FIG. 148(g), the effect pattern 70a and the special The variable display of the symbol TZ starts, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B change to the corresponding icon. One of the icons is shifted toward the display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 50 to 51.

Then, the variable display (variable effect) and stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, and the variable display of the special symbol is repeated for the 60th time after the power supply is resumed and for the 10th time since the start of the RWM clear negative effect. As a result, when the special symbol with a loss is stopped and displayed, the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed with a loss ("294") as shown in FIG. 148(h). In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "55 remaining", and the stationary notification character SC, which is executed over 10 variable displays, is It is erased and the execution of the RWM clear negative effect ends.

In addition, when the special symbol fluctuation display is performed for the 50th time after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the game control state) and there are less than 100 times left until the special time saving game state, the RWM clear negative effect cannot be executed. If it is not determined, when the 100th special symbol fluctuation display is performed after the power supply is resumed, the RWM clear negative performance is executed on the condition that the special time saving game state is not (normal game state). will be determined.

In addition, when the special symbol fluctuation display is performed for the 50th time after the power supply is restarted (restoration of the game control state) and there are less than 100 times remaining until the special time-saving game state, the execution of the activation counter display is determined. If not, when the 100th special symbol fluctuation display is performed after the power supply is resumed, the activation counter display will be executed on the condition that the special time saving gaming state is not (normal gaming state). will be done.

In this way, if RWM clear is not performed at the start of power supply, RWM clear is denied during the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuating effect) for a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after power supply restarts. A presentation (display of stationary notification character SC) is executed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to visually understand that the game is in a deferred state where RWM clearing has not been performed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the RWM clear negative performance is executed from the start of the RWM clear negative performance until the variable display (variable performance) of the special symbol is executed a plurality of times (in this case, 10 times). Therefore, even if the player misses the start of the RWM clear negative performance, the player can be reliably informed that the RWM clear negative performance is being executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, if RWM clear is not performed at the start of power supply, the activation counter display (special Display of a notification logo LG including the text "Help Time" meaning a time-saving gaming state and a text image "66 remaining" indicating the remaining number of fluctuations) is executed. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (variable performance) until the state shifts to the special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the character image indicating the remaining number of fluctuations as an activation counter display is made up of only numbers and does not include unit display such as times or number of times. As a result, players are more likely to look up what this number means, and by increasing their chances of seeing machine information, they can deepen their understanding of gaming machines and increase their interest in gaming. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, the text image indicating the remaining number of fluctuations as an activation counter display is not displayed at the start of the fluctuation performance when the jackpot preview performance or look-ahead performance is likely to be executed (started), but rather when the jackpot notice performance or look-ahead performance is executed before the fluctuation start. (Start) It is updated when a production pattern that is difficult to start is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the execution timing of the RWM clear negative effect and the execution timing of the activation counter display are set to the same time (50th or 100th time after restarting power supply). Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the time to transition to the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power is cut off and then restored during the normal gaming state after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state, it is possible to perform a specific notification regarding the presence or absence of RAM clear (RWM clear negative effect, etc.), and after the special time-saving gaming state ends. If the power is cut off during the normal gaming state and then restored, specific notification regarding whether or not the RAM has been cleared will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of useful information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to perform specific notification (RWM clear negative performance, etc.) over a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, if the number of fluctuations up to the special time-saving game state is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (jackpot probability denominator), specific notification is not performed.
In addition, a specific notification is executed at the same time as the display of the number of fluctuations up to the special time saving game state.
In addition, there are cases in which a specific notification is executed at the same time as the display of the number of changes up to the special time-saving gaming state, and cases in which only a specific notification is executed.

In addition, the execution timing of the RWM clear negative effect and the activation counter display is during the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) after the power supply is resumed (recovery of the gaming control state). However, RWM clear negative performance and activation counter display are executed during the special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuating performance) a predetermined number of times before transitioning to the special time saving gaming state (for example, 50 times or 100 times before). Alternatively, one of the RWM clear negative effect and the activation counter display may be changed to a variable display of special symbols (fluctuating effect) for a predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) after the power supply is restarted (recovery of the game control state). ), and the other may be during a variable display (variable effect) of a special symbol a predetermined number of times before (for example, 50 times or 100 times before) the transition to the special time-saving game state. In such a case, it may be executed at a predetermined rate 50 times before shifting to the special time saving game state, and if it has not been executed 50 times before, it may be executed 100 times before.

(Example of production when entering the customer waiting state when transitioning to the special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 149, an example of a performance in the case where the player is in a customer waiting state when transitioning to the special time saving gaming state will be explained.

Here, it is assumed that the 496th special symbol variable display (variable effect) has been completed since the end of the jackpot game, and the activation counter display has already been executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149(a), as the 497th special symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol variation display (variation performance) has started, and the first pending number display area 70E "3" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F, three pending icons HI are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, and three pending icons HI are displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon TI is displayed. Further, 112 times is displayed as the number of games GK, and the activation counter display shows "4 remaining."

At this time, as shown in FIG. 149(a), when the number of fluctuations remaining until the special time saving game state is reached in response to the start of the fluctuation performance reaches 3, the countdown performance is started and the remaining 3 times are indicated. A number image of "3" is displayed.

After that, when the first special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number ("814"), as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "3 remaining".

Moreover, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is started as the 498th variable display of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 149(c), the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display of is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area. The icons are shifted toward 70C and one icon is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 112 to 113, and a number image of "2" indicating 2 remaining games is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the variation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "2 remaining."

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is started as the 499th variable display of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 149(e), the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display of is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI that were displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area. The icons are shifted toward 70C and one icon is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 113 to 114, and a number image of "1" indicating one remaining game is displayed as a countdown effect.

Moreover, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol after the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "1 remaining".

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance) is started as the 500th variable display of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 149(g), the performance symbol 70a And the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and the one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B becomes The icon is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 114 to 115, and a number image of "0" indicating 0 games remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Further, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the character image displayed on the activation counter is updated to "0 remaining". Furthermore, since the special time-saving game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, a first right-hitting image MG1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen to urge the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

Furthermore, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 149(i), the pending memory is set to "0" and the customer waiting state starts, but this corresponds to the normal gaming state. Mode A background image and activation counter display are maintained, and transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demonstration performance starts as shown in FIG. A guide image AN indicating that "Help time is included" is displayed. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration performance has passed, the state shown in FIG. 149(i) is restored, and the state shown in FIG. 149(i) and the state shown in FIG. 149(j) repeatedly.

In this way, a countdown effect suggesting the transition to the special time saving gaming state is executed from the variable display of the special symbol (fluctuating effect) a predetermined number of times (in this case, 3 times) before shifting to the special time saving gaming state. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, and it is also possible to improve the player's expectations for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Become.

Also, the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the 500th variable display variation time of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, becomes a special time-saving game state, that is, the stop time of the special symbol. A right-handed hit is notified by a first right-handed hit image MG1 from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to play right-handed as soon as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the 500th variable display variation time of the special symbol, which is the specified number of times from the end of the jackpot game, has entered the special time-saving game state, the production mode is set to the special time-saving game. A transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the state is waited for. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the stopped display of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the special time-saving gaming state is entered, if the player is waiting for a customer, the activation counter display will remain displayed. It is possible to let the player know what state the player is in, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration production, a guide image AN indicating that the game is equipped with the help time, which is the name of the special time-saving game state, is displayed. Therefore, the player can understand that excessive investment can be suppressed and relief can be obtained through the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, instead of displaying the guidance image AN that says "Help Time Equipped" during the entire period during the customer waiting demo performance, for example, a demo display of model information (various performances, character introductions, etc.) is performed. The guide image AN may be displayed while the model name is being displayed without displaying the guide image AN, or vice versa. Even in this case, it is preferable not to display the guide image AN while the manufacturer name is being displayed.

In addition, instead of displaying the guide image AN that says "Help Time Equipped" on the image display device, the surface of the game board (which may be inside the game area or outside the game area) or the glass frame 4. You may write "Help Time Equipped" on a part, etc., or display a guide image AN saying "Help Time Equipped" on the image display device, and also display a part of the surface of the game board, a part of the glass frame 4, etc. It may also be written as "Equipped with help time".

(Example of performance when variable performance is executed after transition to special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 150, an example of a performance in a case where a variable performance is executed after transition from performance mode A to the special time-saving game state will be described.

Here, as a result of the 500th variable display of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game, the stop display of the losing special symbol is performed and a special time-saving gaming state occurs, and the right-handed hit notification by the first right-handed image MG1 is It is assumed that this is being done.

In this state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, the variable display starts as shown in FIG. 150(a). When the performance is started and the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games GK will be increased from 115 to 116.

After that, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a loss, as shown in FIG. Rush performance) is executed. Specifically, the notification logo LG displayed on the activation counter that was displayed at the bottom right of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and enlarged, and an image of the text "START" indicating the start of the special time-saving gaming state is displayed. A fourth right-handed image MG4 having a larger size than the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, a blackout effect in which the screen is covered by a dark image is executed, as shown in FIG. , as shown in FIG. 150(d), an infinite mode entry display is performed that suggests entry into the infinite mode corresponding to the special time saving gaming state.

After that, when the display time of the infinite mode entry display elapses and the entry effect of the special time saving game state ends, the entry effect of the special time saving game state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the second time saving number (J2) The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "749 remaining times". Additionally, the number of games GK is redisplayed.

In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol after the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number (“234 ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, as shown in FIG. The performance of the performance mode A corresponding to the state (display of the mode A background image, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ continues.

After that, when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops "3" after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the right performance symbol 70a also has a reach that stimulates whether "3" stops or not, as shown in FIG. 150(g). When the inciting performance is performed and the reach inciting performance period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 150(h), a ready-to-reach state is formed and a character image saying "Complete" is displayed, indicating that the reach-in state has been completed. After that, the middle symbol immediately stops temporarily at "3".

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot special symbol, as shown in FIG. ("333"), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a jackpot roll ("333") indicating a jackpot, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In addition, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit as the first variable display in the special time saving game state, basically the effect will be as shown in FIGS. 150(f) to 150(i). However, the number that is stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ becomes a small winning number ("3V3").

Also, when the first variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, the effect basically changes as shown in FIGS. 150(a) to 150(i). I will do it.

In this way, when the special symbol stops displaying during the predetermined number (500th) variable display of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game and shifts to the special time-saving game state, a variable display dedicated to the entry performance will be activated. Once the pattern is determined, it is possible to perform a special time-saving game state entry performance (long entry performance). Therefore, the player can be made aware that the special time-saving gaming state has entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after a blackout effect in which the screen is shielded by a dark image (shielding image) is executed as a special time saving game state entry effect, an infinite mode entry effect is executed. Therefore, the transition from the normal gaming state to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state can be performed without any discomfort, and the player can be made aware that the transition has been made to the special time-saving gaming state, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, with the start of the initial variable display of special symbols in the special time-saving gaming state, a right-hand hit notification is now performed using the fourth right-hand hit image MG4 (during blackout performance, during infinite mode entry performance). ing. Therefore, even a player who does not have knowledge about the special time-saving gaming state can understand that the player is hitting right, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect of entering the special time-saving game state is executed in a different effect form from the case of transitioning to the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that a time-saving gaming state that is different from the normal time-saving gaming state has occurred, and also to inform the player that a special time-saving gaming state has occurred in a novel manner, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, if the first variable display of special symbols after shifting to the special time-saving game state results in a jackpot, the entry performance of the special time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like a loss due to a quick hit even though the game has shifted to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first fluctuating display of special symbols after transitioning to the special time-saving gaming state results in a jackpot or small hit, the entry performance of the special time-saving gaming state is not executed, but the same is true in the case of a loss. Additionally, a special time-saving game state entry effect may be executed.

In addition, if the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the special time-saving game state is the variable display of the first special symbol, the entry effect of the special time-saving game state is executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this case, the special time-saving game state entry effect may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the entry performance of the special time-saving game state during the first fluctuating display of special symbols after transitioning to the special time-saving game state, it is performed in the normal game state for the specified number of times after the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbols in the variable display of the special symbols may be set longer than the normal stop display period, and a special time-saving game state entry effect may be executed during the stop display period. In this case, instead of changing the performance mode to the infinite mode when the rush performance ends, the performance mode may be set to the infinite mode when the variable display of the next special symbol (variable performance) starts.

(Example of production when countdown mode is executed)
With reference to FIGS. 151 and 152, an example of the effect when the countdown mode is executed due to RWM clearing being performed at the start of power supply will be described. In addition, the countdown mode is set when the number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state until the transition to the special time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number (here, 50 times), and the countdown mode is set when the number of fluctuations before transitioning to the special time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number (here, 50 times). This is a production mode that displays a countdown to create anticipation.

Here, as shown in FIG. 151(a), as the 450th variable display of the special symbol after the RWM clearing performed at the start of power supply, the first special symbol is displayed in the normal gaming state (performance mode A). (variable effect) has been started, "4" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area, and 4 is displayed in the first pending number display area 70B. One hold icon HI is displayed, and the icon TI is also displayed in the icon display area 70C. Further, 450 times is displayed as the number of games GK.

After that, when the first special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number ("814"), as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the first special symbol variable display (variable effect) is started as the 450th special symbol variable display after RWM clearing performed at the start of power supply, as shown in FIG. 151(c), The variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are The icons HI are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 450 to 451.

At this time, since the countdown mode activation condition of 50 times until the special time saving game state is satisfied, the introduction effect of the countdown mode is executed as shown in FIG. 151(d). Specifically, the door image TO (shielding image) is closed so as to cover the background image and various icons, etc., and as shown in FIG. An image of the text "entering mode" is displayed.

Then, when the countdown mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 151(f), the door image TO disappears, the countdown mode background image is displayed, and the countdown mode is suggested (notified) at the bottom right of the screen. A countdown mode icon IC is displayed, and a character image "49 remaining" indicating 49 remaining times is displayed on the upper left of the screen as a countdown display CD. Further, the presentation pattern 70a changes from a display mode including characters and numbers to a display mode including only numbers.

Thereafter, when the first special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance) is started, as shown in FIG. The number decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the applicable icon TI. Is displayed. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 451 to 452, and the countdown display CD is subtracted from "48 remaining" indicating 48 remaining games.

Then, the variable display (variable effect) and stop display of the first special symbol are repeated, and after the 496th variation time of the first special symbol has passed since RWM clearing, the first special symbol becomes a losing special symbol. When the game is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed when the result is a loss ("175"), as shown in FIG. 151(i). Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. At this time, the number of games GK is displayed as "496 times" and the countdown display CD is displayed as "4 remaining" indicating 4 times remaining.

After that, when the first special symbol variable display (variable effect) is started as the 497th special symbol variable display after RWM clearing, as shown in FIG. 152(j), the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area 70C. , and one icon is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 496 to 497, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "3 remaining", and the remaining fluctuation until the special time-saving gaming state is reached in response to the start of the fluctuation effect. When the number of times reaches 3, a countdown effect is started, and a character image of "3" indicating 3 times remaining is displayed.

Thereafter, when the first special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed as a losing number ("763 ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) is started as the 498th special symbol variable display after RWM clearing, as shown in FIG. 152(l), the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area 70C. , and one icon is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 497 to 498, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "2 remaining", and a character image of "2" indicating 2 remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

After that, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) is started as the 499th special symbol variable display after RWM clearing, as shown in FIG. 152(n), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The variable display is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI that were displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are changed to the corresponding icon display area 70C. , and one icon is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 498 to 499, the countdown display CD is subtracted to ``1 remaining'', and a character image of ``1'' indicating 1 remaining game is displayed as a countdown effect.

Then, when the variation time of the first special symbol has passed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Also, when the first special symbol variable display (variable performance) is started as the 500th special symbol variable display which is the specified number of times after RWM clearing, as shown in FIG. 152(p), the production symbol 70a and The variable display of the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and the one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B becomes the corresponding one. The icon is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the number of games GK is increased from 499 to 500, the countdown display CD is subtracted to "0 remaining", and a number image of "0" indicating 0 remaining is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. Since the special time-saving game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol, a first right-hit image MG1 is displayed in the right-hand corner of the screen to urge the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a.

Furthermore, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 152(r), the pending memory is set to "0" and the customer waiting state starts, but this corresponds to the normal gaming state. Mode A background image and countdown display are maintained, and transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the special time-saving game state is awaited.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demonstration performance starts as shown in FIG. A guide image AN indicating that "help time is installed" is displayed. After that, when the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration performance has passed, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 152(r), and the state shown in FIG. 152(r) and the state shown in FIG. 152(s) repeatedly.

In this way, when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this case) before shifting to the special time-saving gaming state, the countdown mode is switched from any of the performance modes A to C corresponding to the normal gaming state. It is designed to be migrated. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a chance to shift to the special time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the countdown mode, a countdown effect that suggests the transition to the special time-saving game state is executed from the variable display of special symbols (fluctuating effect) a predetermined number of times (in this case, three times) before transitioning to the special time-saving game state. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, and it is also possible to improve the player's expectations for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Become.

Also, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the 500th variation time of the special symbol variation display, which is the specified number of times after clearing RWM, has entered the special time saving gaming state, that is, during the stop time of the special symbol. From this point on, the first right-handed hit image MG1 is used to notify the right-handed hit. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to play right-handed as soon as possible, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, at the time when the special symbol stopped displaying after the 500th variable display variation time, which is the specified number of times after clearing RWM, entered the special time-saving game state, the performance mode was set to the special time-saving game state. The transition to the infinite mode corresponding to the current mode is now on standby. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the stopped display of the performance symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if you are in the special time-saving gaming state, if you are waiting for a customer, the countdown display will be maintained, so for example, if you leave your seat and come back, you will not be able to see how the game progresses. It is possible to let the player know whether the player is in a certain state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the countdown display is decremented at the start of the variable display (variable performance) of the special symbol, it may be subtracted when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

(Example of performance when variable performance is executed after transition to special time-saving gaming state)
With reference to FIG. 153, an example of a performance in a case where a variable performance is executed after transition from the countdown mode to the special time-saving game state will be described.

Here, as a result of the 500th variable display of the special symbol after clearing the RWM, the stop display of the losing special symbol is performed and a special time-saving gaming state occurs, and the right-handed hit notification is performed by the first right-handed image MG1. It is assumed that

In this state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, the variable display starts as shown in FIG. 153(a). When the performance is started and the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 70C. Also, the number of games GK will be increased from 500 to 501.

After that, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a loss, as shown in FIG. Rush performance) is executed. Specifically, a character image "achieved" is displayed together with an effect image (obscuring image) of a size that blocks the background image, etc., and a fourth right-handed image MG4 having a larger size than the first right-handed image MG1 is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 153(c), an infinite mode entry display is performed suggesting entry into the infinite mode corresponding to the special time saving gaming state. Furthermore, when the display time of the infinite mode entry display elapses and the entry effect of the special time saving game state ends, the entry effect of the special time saving game state ends, and the infinite mode background image and the second time saving number (J2) The time saving remaining number image KG indicating the remaining number of times is displayed as "749 remaining times". Additionally, the number of games GK is redisplayed.

In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol after the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

On the other hand, when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 153(e), the special time-saving game state entry performance is not executed and the countdown mode corresponding to the normal game state is activated. The effect (display of the countdown mode background image, etc.) continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ continues.

After that, when the left performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "3" after a predetermined time has elapsed, the right performance symbol 70a also temporarily stops at "3" and a reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 153(f). Then, as shown in FIG. 153(g), a reach effect (reach variation without rush effect) is executed.

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot special symbol, as shown in FIG. ("333"), the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a jackpot roll ("333") indicating a jackpot, and the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit as the first variable display in the special time saving game state, basically the effect is as shown in FIGS. 153(e) to 153(h). However, the number that is stopped and displayed as the special symbol TZ becomes a small winning number ("3V3").

In addition, even when the first variable display of the first special symbol is executed as the first variable display in the special time-saving gaming state, the effect basically changes as shown in FIGS. 153(a) to 153(i). I will do it.

In this way, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed during the predetermined number (500) of variable displays of the special symbol after clearing RWM, and the state shifts to the special time-saving game state, the variable performance pattern that is not dedicated to the rush performance will be changed. Once this is determined, it is possible to execute a special time-saving game state entry performance (short entry performance). Therefore, the player can be made aware that the special time-saving gaming state has entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the short entry effect is the variation time of the shortest special symbol variation pattern among the multiple special symbol variation patterns that may be determined in the specified number (500) special symbol variation display after RWM clearing. is set to a shorter time. Therefore, no matter what kind of special figure variation pattern is determined, it is possible to execute the rush performance and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first variable display of special symbols after shifting to the special time-saving game state results in a jackpot, the entry performance of the special time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like a loss due to a quick hit even though the game has shifted to the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first fluctuating display of special symbols after transitioning to the special time-saving gaming state results in a jackpot or small hit, the entry performance of the special time-saving gaming state is not executed, but the same is true in the case of a loss. Additionally, a special time-saving game state entry effect may be executed.

In addition, if the first variable display of the special symbol after transitioning to the special time-saving game state is the variable display of the first special symbol, the entry effect of the special time-saving game state is executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this case, the special time-saving game state entry effect may not be executed, or vice versa.

In addition, instead of performing the entry performance of the special time-saving game state during the first fluctuating display of special symbols after transitioning to the special time-saving game state, it is performed in the normal game state for the specified number of times after the end of the jackpot game. The stop display period of the special symbols in the variable display of the special symbols may be set longer than the normal stop display period, and a special time-saving game state entry effect may be executed during the stop display period. In this case, instead of changing the performance mode to the infinite mode when the rush performance ends, the performance mode may be set to the infinite mode when the variable display of the next special symbol (variable performance) starts.

Further, in the countdown mode, an effect such as a battle between an ally character and an enemy character may be performed. In this case, a character image such as "Enter countdown mode. If the friendly character can withstand attacks from enemy characters until the count reaches 0, enter infinite mode" may be displayed in the introduction effect of the countdown mode. When transitioning to the special time-saving game state, the friendly character performs a performance that allows the friendly character to withstand attacks from the enemy character until the last special symbol fluctuation display (fluctuating performance) in the normal game state, and then the transition to the special time-saving game state. If not (the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed and the jackpot game is executed), the ally character cannot withstand the attack of the enemy character and loses (the reach when the jackpot game is executed when it is not in countdown mode) It is also possible to perform a performance that is the opposite of the performance in which the friendly character wins over the enemy character, which is performed as a performance.

(Example of effect when the special time-saving game state ends)
With reference to FIG. 154, a presentation example will be described in which the special time saving game state ends when the number of time saving times (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0".

Here, it is assumed that a countdown performance suggesting that the special time-saving game state ends is being executed from the variable display of special symbols (variable performance) three times before the end of the special time-saving game state. Specifically, it is assumed that the number images of "3" → "2" → "1" are displayed every time the special symbol variable display (variable effect) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 154(a), in the variable display of the second special symbol one time before the end of the special time saving game state, when the variable time elapses and the second special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed when the number is a loss ("234"). Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased. In addition, the remaining time saving number image KG, which is displayed in the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time saving game state, is "1 game left", and the game number GK is the number of changes displayed since before the special time saving game state occurred. The number is 1249 times, which is the successor to ``1249 times''.

Then, when the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol that ends the special time saving game state is started, as shown in FIG. 154(b), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started. The number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D move toward the icon display area 70C. The icons are shifted and one icon is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the time saving remaining number of times image KG changes from "1 remaining" to "0 remaining", the number of games GK is increased from 1249 to 1250, and the number "0" indicating 0 remaining as a countdown effect. The image is displayed.

Thereafter, when the second special symbol's variation time has elapsed and the second special symbol stops displaying as a losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. ”) to stop displaying. In addition, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the first right-handed image MG1 is erased because the normal game state is started by the stop display of the losing special symbol.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an end suggestion effect indicating that the time-saving game state ends is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the shutter image SY is closed so as to block the background image, various icons, and the like.

Then, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining reservation of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reservation memory) is started, as shown in FIG. 154(d) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (occlusion image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ starts and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "3" to "2". do. Note that the number of games GK remains hidden during the period in which the shutter image SY is displayed, and even if a variable effect is performed, the number of games is only added internally and is not visually recognized. It is not possible to do so.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is executed, that is, the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and pre-reading are performed. The performance is not being performed.

Furthermore, when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, as shown in FIG. ) to stop and display.

Furthermore, when the first variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of loss) based on the remaining reserve of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state (second reserve memory) is started, as shown in FIG. 154(f) As shown in , while the shutter image SY (occluding image) continues to be displayed, the variable display of the special symbol TZ starts and the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "2" to "1". do.

After that, the special symbol TZ changes and stops while the shutter image SY (shielding image) is displayed until the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state becomes 0. The display is repeated.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal game state becomes 0 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 154(g), the shutter is released. While the image SY (shielding image) continues to be displayed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at a loss ("559").

After that, when the stop time of the special symbol TZ has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 154(h), the shutter image SY (shielding image) disappears, the production mode A background image is displayed, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed, and a left-handed image HG that urges the player to shoot the game ball is displayed on the left side of the game area 5a. Additionally, the number of games GK is redisplayed.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the remaining reserve (first reserve memory) of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the first reserve number display area The number 70E decreases from "1" to "0", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. be done.

In this way, when the time saving number (any of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time saving game state ends, the normal game state is notified (various performance images corresponding to performance mode A are displayed). ) so that the result display is not executed before the results are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the game without giving the player a sense of loss of missing out on the jackpot game and the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the shutter image SY is displayed from the variable display of the second special symbol that is the time saving final variation to the variable display of the second special symbol based on the remaining reservation (second reservation memory) of the second special symbol at the time of transition to the normal gaming state. In this state, only the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible for the player to experience an innovative performance that does not make him strongly aware of the remaining number of reserved second special symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of displaying the left-handed image HG that urges the player to shoot the game ball to the left side of the game area 5a when transitioning to the normal game state, the left-handed image HG is displayed at the end of a series of presentations. Therefore, the player is not required to shoot game balls needlessly, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the special time saving game state, the remaining time saving number image KG is displayed at the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time saving game state. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the game is in a time-saving gaming state and the remaining number of time-saving games, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the period when the variable display based on the remaining hold of the second special symbol (second hold memory) at the time of transition to the normal gaming state is executed, that is, the period when the shutter image SY is displayed, the jackpot preview performance and pre-reading are performed. Instead of setting the state in which no performance is performed, the execution of the jackpot preview performance may be allowed and the execution of the pre-read performance may be regulated, or vice versa. In addition, execution of specific preview performances among the jackpot preview performances (e.g., winning/losing performance, jackpot confirmation performance, etc.) is permitted, and execution of other preview performances (e.g., dialogue preview performance, roulette preview performance, cut-in preview performance, etc.) is permitted. ) may be regulated, or the execution of a specific effect among the look-ahead effects (for example, a light-up effect when winning a prize) may be permitted, and the execution of other effects (for example, a look-ahead zone effect or a look-ahead countdown effect) may be restricted. etc.) may be regulated.

In addition, in the special time saving game state, the remaining time saving number image KG is not displayed in the same position and in the same display mode as in the normal time saving gaming state, but in a different position and/or in a different display mode than in the normal time saving gaming state. KG may also be displayed. In this way, it becomes easier to recognize whether the game is in a normal time-saving game state or a special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after the number of time-saving games (any one of J1 to J3) reaches "0" and the special time-saving game state ends, the special time-saving game state will not be entered again, so the special time-saving game state ends. When the stopped power supply is restarted later and the control state of the game is restored, the number of games GK may be displayed in a display mode such as "???" in which the number of fluctuations before shifting to the special time-saving game state is unknown. In this way, the player can recognize that the special time-saving game state has ended, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power supply that was stopped after the time saving number (any one of J1 to J3) becomes "0" and the special time saving gaming state ends and the gaming control state is restored, the specific light emitting part (For example, the top lamp 10b) may be made to emit light in a specific light emission mode (for example, blinking red at a cycle of 750 ms) different from the light emission mode at the time of an error (for example, blinking red at a cycle of 250 ms). In this way, the player can recognize that the special time-saving game state has ended, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a specific light emitting unit (for example, the top lamp 10b) is made to emit light in a specific light emission mode different from the light emission mode at the time of an error, the blinking period in the specific light emission mode is higher than the blinking cycle in the light emission mode at the time of an error. The cycle may be made faster or the cycle may be made to be the same.

(Sixth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the normal time saving game state ends even if there is a remaining number of small winnings by stopping and displaying a specific small winning special symbol, and the remaining number of small winnings set for each jackpot game. Since this embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that the following points are different, only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described here.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 155(a) is a diagram showing a first gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of a jackpot game that does not go through a small winning game, and FIG. 155(b) shows a first gaming state setting table that It is a diagram showing a second game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), the first gaming state setting table includes stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, gaming state information at the time of jackpot winning indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the game state to be set. A flag (a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving game state is in effect), a first time-saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time-saving game state, and a second special time-saving game state that ends the time-saving game state. A second time saving number (J2), which is the number of times the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a third time saving number (J3), which is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time saving gaming state. The remaining number of small winnings (Z1), which is the number of small winning fluctuation displays that end the time-saving gaming state, and the third remaining number of small winnings, which is the number of specific small winning fluctuation displays that end the time-saving gaming state, are associated. It is being

As shown in FIG. 155(b), the second game state setting table includes the stop special symbol data of the small hit special symbol and the game state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53, which indicates the gaming state when the game ball passes through the specific region 53. information, a gaming state flag to be set (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving gaming state), a first time saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, and a time saving flag. The second time-saving number (J2) is the number of variable displays of the second special symbol that ends the gaming state, and the second number of variable displays is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time-saving gaming state. 3. The number of small winnings (J3), the remaining number of small winnings (Z1) which is the number of small winning fluctuation displays that end the time saving gaming state, and the third small winning number (Z1) which is the number of specific small winning fluctuation displays that end the time saving gaming state. The remaining number of hits is associated with the remaining number of hits.

The first feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. One point is that the remaining number of third small winnings (Z2) is set, which is the number of times (variable display) that will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player interested in the types of small winning fluctuations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 155 is that the remaining number of small wins (Z1) and the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) are set to the same number, and ) and the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) may be set to different numbers. By doing this, it is possible to create a case in which the time-saving gaming state ends regardless of any type of small winning variation, and a case in which the time-saving gaming state ends only due to a specific small winning variation. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

(Special pattern variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110. In addition, here, only the differences from the special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 will be explained, and the explanation of the matching parts will be omitted.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S320-13, and if it is a small winning special symbol, in step S320-10, the process continues until the time saving gaming state saved in the gaming RWM area is ended. Subtract 1 from the remaining number of small wins (Z1).

In step S320-10A, the main CPU 110a determines whether the small winning special symbol is the third small winning special symbol (special symbol 15). If it is not the third small winning special symbol, the process moves to step S320-11, and if it is the third small winning special symbol, the remaining number of second small winnings (Z2) is subtracted by 1 in step S320-10B. do.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) has become "0". If the remaining number of small winnings (Z1) or the remaining number of third small winnings (Z2) becomes "0", the process moves to step S320-12 as the time saving gaming state is ended, and the remaining number of small winnings is If it is not "0", the process moves to step S320-13.

In this way, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (the small winning game is executed) during the time saving game state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47, the time saving number (J1, J2, Even if J3) remains, the time-saving gaming state ends when the remaining number of small wins (Z1) or the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, players try to advance the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effects and the combination of the effect patterns 70a that are stopped and displayed (whether or not to aim for an advantageous jackpot by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small hit game) ), it becomes possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the gaming method during the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (the small winning game is executed) during the time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 47, the remaining number of small winnings (Z1) remains. Even if it is, the time-saving gaming state ends when the remaining number of third small wins (Z2) becomes "0". Therefore, players try to advance the game advantageously by referring to the look-ahead effects and the combination of the effect patterns 70a that are stopped and displayed (whether or not to aim for an advantageous jackpot by passing the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small hit game) ), it becomes possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage due to the gaming method during the time-saving gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, in the case of a specific small win, the advantageous gaming state (time-saving gaming state) ends even before the number of small wins reaches the specified number of times.

(Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
◆Here, in conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the Gaming machines that execute game effects are common. Some of these gaming machines have movable bodies (starting opening opening/closing member, big prize opening opening/closing member, specific area opening/closing member, etc.) that are operated by a drive source (solenoid, etc.) controlled by the main control board, Some games operate a movable body by operating a drive source in accordance with the progress of a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-118109). However, in such a game machine, it is not possible to replace the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) at the time of shipment from the factory or at a game store (only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500 can be replaced). There has been a problem in that it is difficult to check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means at times such as (including).

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there is a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, A first big prize opening/closing member 51, a specific area opening/closing member 52, and a second big winning opening opening/closing member 57), and the main control means starts controlling the progress of the game after power supply is started. In the pre-start state (during the initial setting process), it is possible to initialize the drive source (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing games, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means are provided. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, Prizes are awarded based on the first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57) and the establishment of the granting conditions (the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, starting opening, and grand prize opening). Value adding means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of giving value (prize ball, prize ball data), and the main control means controls the game after power supply is started. In a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) before starting the progress control of The granting of said prize value by means shall be invalidated. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing games, there is provided a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, A first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, a specific area opening/closing member 52, a second big winning opening opening/closing member 57), and the main control means is configured to satisfy a starting condition (a game ball enters a starting opening or a regular gate). An advantageous game (special game, auxiliary game) in which a display means (special symbol display, normal symbol display) displays symbols in a variable manner based on the ball entering the ball, and operates the drive source according to the result of the variable display. ), and in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply until the start of control of the progress of the game, the drive source is initialized (ON) in a predetermined manner. ⇔OFF), and in the pre-start state, execution of the variable display and execution of the advantageous game are restricted. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a drive source (second starting port opening/closing solenoid 48b) controlled by the main control means. , the first big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the flow path switching solenoid 52b, the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) an opening/closing member 52, a second big prize opening opening/closing member 57), and the main control means includes an initial operation means capable of initially operating (ON⇔OFF) the drive source in a predetermined manner; Information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on actual results (number of payouts during normal play, number of outs during normal play) and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor); In the pre-start state (initial setting processing) from when power supply is started until the progress control of the game is started, the initial operation is executed by the initial operation means, and the initial operation is performed by the initial operation means. During execution, display of the specific information by the information display means is restricted. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing games, there is provided a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, Prizes are awarded based on the first grand prize opening opening/closing member 51, specific area opening/closing member 52, second grand prize opening opening/closing member 57) and the establishment of the granting conditions (the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, starting opening, and grand prize opening). A value imparting means (main control board 110, payout control board 120) capable of imparting value (prize balls, prize ball data), and control of the progress of the game is started after power supply is started. In a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) until the start, the awarding of the prize value by the value assigning means is invalidated, and the main control means initializes the drive source (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined manner. The system calculates specific information (normal base value) based on the initial operating means that can be used and the gaming performance (number of payouts during normal play, number of outs during normal play), and displays the specific information on the information display means (performance display monitor). information display means capable of displaying the information, wherein in the pre-start state, the initial operation is performed by the initial operation means, and during the execution of the initial operation, the specific information is displayed by the information display means. Display is regulated. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there is provided a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110 that is controlled by the main control means. A movable body (second starting opening opening/closing member 48, A first big prize opening opening/closing member 51, a specific area opening/closing member 52, a second big winning opening opening/closing member 57), and the main control means is configured to satisfy a starting condition (a game ball enters a starting opening or a regular gate). a variable display means capable of performing a variable display of symbols on a display means (special symbol display device, normal symbol display device) based on the ball entering the ball; and a variable display device that operates the driving source according to the result of the variable display. An advantageous game means that can execute an advantageous game (a small winning game, a big winning game), an initial operation means that can initialize the drive source (ON⇔OFF) in a predetermined manner, and a game performance ( information display means capable of calculating specific information (normal base value) based on the number of payouts during normal play and the number of outs during normal play, and displaying the specific information on an information display means (performance display monitor); and the initial operation by the initial operation means is executed in a pre-start state (during initial setting processing) from the start of power supply until the start of control of the progress of the game, and during the execution of the initial operation. , execution of the variable display by the variable display means, execution of the advantageous game by the advantageous game means, and display of the specific information by the information display means are regulated. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2)
Here, some conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game or a specific game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a starting condition. Some of these gaming machines execute a special game based on the fact that the gaming medium passes through a specific area provided inside the winning device during the execution of a specific game (for example, (Refer to Publication No. 2018-057968). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem is to play a special game (jackpot game) or a specific game (small win game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the starting hole). ); a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a normal game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal game state; A winning device (big winning opening) that changes the game medium from a state in which it is difficult to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win during the execution of a specific game; special game execution means for executing the special game based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specified area (specific area 53), wherein the game medium has passed through the specific area during execution of the specific game. Based on the gaming state at the time, it is possible to perform predetermined processing (such as processing for setting gaming conditions after a jackpot game). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The second configuration for solving the above problem is to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the starting hole). comprising a determining means for making a determination, and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the determining means a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a first starting condition (winning a prize in the first starting opening); and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a second starting condition (winning a prize in the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, a second special game). If the first determining means determines to execute the special game, either the first special game or the second special game can be executed; The states include a specific game state (normal time-saving game state) that is controlled via the special game, and a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without going through the special game. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The third configuration for solving the above problem is to execute a special game (big win game, small win game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether or not the above is the case; a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state; and execution of the special game. Therein, a winning device (grand prize opening) that changes from a state in which it is difficult for game media to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize, and a specific area provided inside the prize winning device during execution of the special game. A game state determining means capable of determining a game state to be controlled thereafter based on the passage of the game medium through the (specific area 53). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the starting hole). and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The means includes a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting opening), and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning in the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, a first jackpot game). , a second jackpot game), and the judgment results of the judgment means include a first result (big win) and a second result (small win) different from the first result, and the first judgment means When it is determined that the first result (jackpot) is achieved by A first specific game state (normal time-saving game state where the second time-saving number is set to 7: rush battle mode) that is controlled after the end of the second special game, and a second specific game state that is controlled after the second special game ends. (Normal time-saving game state: Ranbu mode in which the second time-saving number is set to 55 times; normal time-saving game state: Ranbu mode in which the second time-saving number is set to 95 times). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The means includes a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting opening), and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the second starting opening). and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, a second V jackpot game). and a third special game that is more advantageous than the second special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game), and the judgment result of the judgment means includes a first result (jackpot) and a third special game that is more advantageous than the second special game. , there is a second result (small win) different from the first result, and when the first result is determined to be the first result (big win) by the first determination means, the first special game and the second result are Any one of the special games can be executed, and if the second result (small win) is determined by the second determination means, the second special game can be executed, and the second determination means determines that the second result is a small win. When the first result (big hit) is determined, the third special game can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The means includes a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting opening), and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning in the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, the third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, the second V jackpot game). There are a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment result of the judgment means includes the first result (jackpot ), and a second result (small win) different from the first result, and in the specific game state (Ranbu mode, Super Ranbu mode) that is controlled after the second special game is executed, If the second determination means determines the first result (big win), the third special game can be executed, and if the second determination means determines the second result (small win) Then, the second special game can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). and a gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, ST state) more advantageous than the normal gaming state, The means includes a first determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting opening), and a second determining means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the second starting condition (winning in the second starting opening). The special game includes a first special game (for example, the third jackpot game) and a second special game that is more advantageous than the first special game (for example, the second V jackpot game). There are a third special game (for example, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game) that is more advantageous than the second special game, and the judgment result of the judgment means includes the first result (jackpot ) and a second result (small win) different from the first result, and in the specific gaming state (infinite mode) controlled after the third special game is executed, the second determining means If the first result (big win) is determined by the second determination means, the third special game can be executed, and if the second result (small win) is determined by the second determination means, the third special game can be executed. 2 special games can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, a special game (big win game, small win game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned determining means is present, a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of symbols based on the determination by the determining means, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (time saving game) more advantageous than the normal gaming state. a first performance mode (performance modes A to C), and a second performance mode (countdown mode) different from the first performance mode. controllable performance control means, and the determination means includes a first determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of the first starting condition (winning in the first starting condition); and a second determination means for making a determination based on winnings in the second starting opening), and the special game includes a first special game (for example, a third jackpot game) and a second special game that is higher than the first special game. There is a second special game that is advantageous (for example, a first jackpot game, a third jackpot game, a fourth jackpot game, a fifth jackpot game), and the game state control means is configured to play a predetermined number of special games after the end of the special game. It is possible to control the specific gaming state until the variable display is executed, and the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled via the special game; There is a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled without going through the special game, and the performance control means is configured to control the game state a predetermined number of times (50 times) before being controlled to the second specific game state. When the variable display is executed, control is performed from the first performance mode (any of performance modes A to C) to the second performance mode (countdown mode). By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), or the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed simultaneously (in parallel). The variable display of the special symbols may be performed in the order in which game balls enter the first starting hole 45 and the second starting hole 47.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed not to generate a variable probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, but depending on the type of special jackpot symbol, the variable probability gaming state may be generated. In this case, in a specific round game (for example, the second round game or the final round game) during the jackpot game, the specific area 53 provided inside the first jackpot opening 50 is A process may be performed to generate a variable probability gaming state on the condition that the game ball has passed, or a variable display that causes a variable probability gaming state may be performed based on the gaming state when the gaming ball passes through the specific area 53. A process for determining the number of times may be performed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed on an active line (meeting the awarding conditions) during a game using medals (gaming media), a predetermined amount of The present invention can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) that can award prize medals (prize medal data) to players. Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

(Seventh embodiment)
Hereinafter, a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Note that, below, points that are different from each of the above-described embodiments will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as any of the above-mentioned embodiments may be omitted.

Furthermore, the configurations described above in the first to sixth embodiments may correspond to configurations described later. More specifically, the above-mentioned pending image GB and pending icon HI correspond to a pending image 702, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned pending image GB and the icon TI correspond to a variable image 701 that will be described later. Further, the above-mentioned pending number image GD, first pending number display area 70E, and second pending number display area 70F correspond to a pending number display 703, which will be described later. In addition, the above-mentioned region R11, region R12, region R13, region R14, region R21, region R22, region R23, region R24, first display section 70B1, second display section 70B2, third display section 70B3, fourth display section 70B4, the first display section 70D1, the second display section 70D2, the third display section 70D3, and the fourth display section 70D4 correspond to the reservation pedestal 702P described later. Further, the above-mentioned region R0 and the icon display region 70C correspond to a variable pedestal 701P described later. Moreover, the small pattern Ga and special pattern TZ mentioned above correspond to the small pattern 704 described later. Further, the start notification image Gn, entry image GT, notification logo LG, and character image "START" described above correspond to a special time saving start image 733 and a mode start image 736, which will be described later. Further, the customer waiting screen Mx, the customer waiting screen Mx1, the customer waiting screen Mx2, and the customer waiting demonstration background described above correspond to the customer waiting image 710 described later. Further, the background image GH and the background image described above correspond to a stage image 706 described later. In addition, the above-mentioned right-handed hitting image GS1, right-handed hitting image GS2, right-handed hitting image GS3, right-handed hitting image GS4, right-handed hitting image Gsy, right-handed hitting start image GR, first right-handed hitting image MG1, second right-handed hitting image MG2, and second right-handed hitting image MG2, The third right-handed image MG3 and the fourth right-handed image MG4 correspond to a first right-handed image 720, a second right-handed image 725, and a third right-handed image 737, which will be described later. Further, the background image GHf and the power-on notification described above correspond to the returning image 742, which will be described later. Further, the above-mentioned prevention image GQ1 and forget-to-remove caution image TG correspond to a card caution image 739, which will be described later. Further, the above-mentioned warning image GQ2 and addictive caution image NG correspond to a game caution image 740, which will be described later. Further, the above-mentioned end image GP2 and shutter image SY correspond to a first transition image 728, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned shielding image GF and dark color image correspond to a first transition image 728, which will be described later. Furthermore, the above-mentioned end image GP1, result image GP, and result display correspond to a result image 729, which will be described later. Further, the emphasized image GZ and the number image described above correspond to the countdown image 732 described later. Furthermore, the game count image GE and the game count GK described above correspond to the execution count image 705, which will be described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned stationary notification image GI, stationary notification character SC, and notification logo LG correspond to a clear negative image 744, which will be described later. Further, the remaining number of times image GN and the character image displayed on the activation counter described above correspond to the remaining number of times of reaching image 708, which will be described later. Further, the remaining time saving image GJ and remaining time saving number image KG described above correspond to a special time saving remaining number of times image 738, which will be described later. Moreover, the left-handed player image GL, the left-handed player start image GL, and the left-handed player image HG described above correspond to the left-handed player image 730, which will be described later.
Then, the corresponding configurations of one embodiment and another embodiment may be replaced, or the configuration included in one embodiment may be added to the configuration of another embodiment that corresponds to this configuration. Also good.

[Produced image]
FIG. 157 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70 and the like.
Next, the effect image displayed on the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 157, the effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70 under the control of the effect control section 130m. In this embodiment, the effect images displayed on the first image display device 70 include a decorative pattern 700, a variable image 701, a variable pedestal 701P, a pending image 702, a pending pedestal 702P, a pending number display 703, a small pattern 704, and an execution A number image 705 and a stage image 706 are included. In addition, the first image display device 70 includes a first front image 707, a remaining reach image 708, a second front image 709, a clear negative image 744, a customer waiting image 710, a first emphasized image 711, an SP reach image 712, SPSP reach image 713, button operation image 714, first eye-catching image 715, adjustment image 716, menu image 717, second emphasized image 718, opening image 719, first right-handed image 720, promotion image 721, in-round image 722 , round number image 723, normal time saving selection image 745, normal time saving start image 724, card caution image 739, game caution image 740, second right-handed game image 725, normal time saving remaining number of times image 726, switching image 727, first transition image 728, result image 729, left-handed image 730, second eye-catching image 731, countdown image 732, special time-saving start image 733, second transition image 734, special time-saving selection image 735, mode start image 736, third right-handed image 737, special time saving remaining number image 738, magnetic error notification image 741, returning image 742, and zone notification image 743 may be displayed.

(Decorative pattern 700)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), three decorative patterns 700 are displayed on the first image display device 70. In addition, when explaining each of the three patterns that make up the decorative pattern 700, the pattern placed on the left side will be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 700", the pattern placed in the center will be referred to as the "middle decorative pattern 700", and the pattern placed on the right side will be referred to as the "left decorative pattern 700". The pattern placed on the right side may be referred to as the "right decorative pattern 700." Furthermore, when the left decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative patterns 700." Moreover, when describing the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 all together, they may be referred to as "three decorative patterns 700." Furthermore, the three decorative patterns 700 having the same numbers may be referred to as "zero-numbered decorative patterns 700."

In this embodiment, the display mode of the decorative pattern 700 is a highly decorative display mode in which character images are displayed in addition to numbers and other characters (see FIG. 157 (1)), and a highly decorative display mode in which characters such as numbers are displayed (see FIG. 157 (1)). There are display modes with low decorativeness (see FIG. 167 (10), FIG. 172 (23), etc.) that are displayed as main characters. Images such as characters provided in the highly decorative decorative pattern 700 are different for each character of the decorative pattern 700, and it is possible to identify which pattern it is based on the image of the character.
Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols 700 is switched according to a change in the game state or the progress of the performance. Details will be described later, but for example, decorative symbols 700 with low decorativeness are displayed in SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state, etc., and highly decorative decorative symbols 700 are displayed in other situations. Displayed in cases such as. Further, the display mode, display size, etc. of the decorative pattern 700 may be different between the normal time saving game state and the special time saving game state.
Note that the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may also display images such as pictures and characters in addition to letters such as numbers. That is, the "low decorative pattern 700" shown in FIG. 167 (10), FIG. 172 (23), etc. has a larger area of the character part in the decorative pattern 700 than the "high decorative pattern 700". The higher the proportion, the better. Moreover, the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness may be a pattern consisting only of characters. The decorative pattern 700 is an example of a performance pattern.

In the variable presentation of the decorative pattern 700, the presentation control unit 130m first changes the display of the three decorative patterns 700 by, for example, vertical scrolling (downward scrolling), and then displays the left decorative pattern 700 (for example, the number "0"). ") is temporarily stopped, then the right decorative pattern 700 (for example, the number "9") is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative pattern (for example, the number "2") is temporarily stopped. In this way, all the decorative patterns 700 go through a state where they are temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative patterns 700 are finally stopped in response to the stop display of the special pattern. Note that the combination "029" of the decorative symbols 700 that are stopped and displayed, shown in FIG. 157(1), is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

(Variation image 701)
As shown in FIG. 157(4), the first image display device 70 displays a variation indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative symbol 700 is being displayed in a variable manner) by the main CPU 110a of the main control unit 110m. An image 701 is displayed. That is, the variable image 701 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. The variable image 701 is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and disappears when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the variable image 701 is displayed in a display mode depending on the stage, gaming state, etc., which will be described later. In the illustrated example, the fluctuation image 701 is formed in a circular shape and has a cross-shaped mark.

Further, the variable image 701 changes its display mode, such as display color, for example, to notify or suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. Further, it is set so that when the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, colors of types with higher expectations are displayed than when it is a loss. For example, when the colors of the variable image 701 are set to white, blue, green, red, and rainbow, the colors may be set so that the later the order, the higher the expectation level. Furthermore, the expectation level of the rainbow-colored variation image 701 may be 100%.

(Variable pedestal 701P)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), the variable pedestal 701P is an area where the variable image 701 is displayed. The movable pedestal 701P in the illustrated example is displayed at the lower center of the display area of the first image display device 70. However, the movable pedestal 701P may be displayed at any position in the display area of the first image display device 70.
Note that in the illustrated example, the variable pedestal 701P is displayed regardless of whether the variable image 701 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable pedestal 701P may be displayed when the variable image 701 is displayed, and the variable pedestal 701P may not be displayed when the variable image 701 is not displayed. Furthermore, even when the variable image 701 is displayed, the variable pedestal 701P does not need to be displayed. That is, the variable pedestal 701P may not be used.

(Pending image 702)
As shown in FIG. 157(3), a pending image 702 is displayed on the first image display device 70 based on the current pending information in the main RAM 110c (sub RAM 130c). In other words, the pending image 702 is an image indicating that the right to determine a jackpot is pending. Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 702 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
The pending image 702 has a smaller display size than the variable image 701. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the pending image 702 is displayed in a display mode according to the stage, gaming state, etc., which will be described later. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is formed in a circular shape and has a cross-shaped mark. In addition, the pending image 702 changes its display mode, such as display color, to notify or suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, it is set so that when the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, colors of types with higher expectations are displayed than when it is a loss. For example, when white, blue, green, red, and rainbow are set as the colors of the pending image 702, the later the order, the higher the expectation level may be. Further, the expectation level of the rainbow-colored pending image 702 may be 100%. In addition, below, the display mode of the fluctuation image 701 which is white, and the display mode of the pending image 702 which is white may be referred to as a normal display mode. Furthermore, in the following, we will refer to the display mode of the variable image 701, which is a color different from white, that is, a color with higher expectations than white, and the display mode of the suspended image 702, which is a color with higher expectations than white. is sometimes referred to as an expected color display mode.

Here, as described above, a maximum of four reservations occur due to winnings in the first starting port 45. Therefore, by winning a prize in the first start opening 45, a maximum of four pending images 702 are displayed on the first image display device 70. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the plurality of pending images 702 generated by winning in the first starting port 45 are arranged in an area to the left of the variable image 701 in order from a position close to the variable image 701 to a position farther away from the variable image 701. That is, they are displayed side by side from right to left.

Incidentally, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, a maximum of four reservations will occur when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. Therefore, by winning a prize in the second start opening 47, a maximum of four pending images 702 are displayed on the first image display device 70. In the present embodiment, the plurality of pending images 702 generated by winning a prize in the second starting port 47 are sequentially arranged in an area on the right side of the variable image 701 from a position close to the variable image 701 to a position away from the variable image 701, that is, on the left side. They are displayed side by side from side to right.
Further, in this embodiment, the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 are basically configured with the same or similar display modes (display size, form, transparency, etc.). However, the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 may be configured in different display modes. Furthermore, the variable image 701 and pending image 702 that are displayed when winning a prize at the first starting port 45 and the variable image 701 and pending image 702 that are displayed when winning a prize at the second starting port 47 have the same display mode. Alternatively, different display modes may be used.

In addition, in the following explanation, regarding the maximum of four pending images 702 that are displayed, "first pending image 702," "second pending image 702," and "third "Pending image 702" and "fourth pending image 702."

(Holding pedestal 702P)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), the reservation pedestal 702P indicates an area where the reservation image 702 is displayed. The pending pedestal 702P is displayed in a different manner from the variable pedestal 701P. However, the reservation pedestal 702P may be displayed in the same manner as the variable pedestal 701P. In addition, a pending pedestal 702P corresponding to a pending image 702 based on a prize entered into the first starting port 45 is displayed on the lower side of the display area of the first image display device 70 and on the left side with respect to the variable pedestal 701P. (See Figure 157(1)). Further, the pending pedestal 702P corresponding to the pending image 702 based on the prize winning in the second starting port 47 is displayed on the lower side of the display area of the first image display device 70 and on the right side with respect to the variable pedestal 701P. (See Figure 172 (23)).
Note that in the illustrated example, the reservation pedestal 702P is displayed regardless of whether or not the reservation image 702 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pending image 702 is displayed, the pending pedestal 702P is displayed, and when the pending image 702 is not displayed, the pending pedestal 702P may not be displayed. Further, even when the pending image 702 is displayed, the pending pedestal 702P does not need to be displayed. That is, the reservation pedestal 702P may not be used.
In addition, in the following explanation, regarding the holding pedestal 702P, in order of proximity to the variable pedestal 701P, "first holding pedestal 702P", "second holding pedestal 702P", "third holding pedestal 702P", and "4 This may be referred to as the "th reservation pedestal 702P".

(Pending number display 703)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), a pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 based on the pending information in the main RAM 110c (sub RAM 130c). This pending number display 703 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of the above-mentioned pending images 702 displayed on the first image display device 70 changes depending on the number of pending prizes for each of the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47. In the pending number display 703, the number of pending prizes for winnings to the first starting port 45 is displayed on the left side, and the pending number of winnings to the second starting port 47 is displayed on the right side.

(Small pattern 704)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), on the first image display device 70, the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (the decorative symbols 700 are being displayed in a variable manner based on winnings in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). ) is displayed. A small pattern 704 is displayed. This small symbol 704 is controlled by the production control unit 130m, and is displayed variably as the special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed as the special symbol stops being displayed.

In the illustrated example, the small patterns 704 are three images each corresponding to the decorative pattern 700, and are displayed on the right side of the image display area of the first image display device 70. This small pattern 704 is displayed as an image smaller in size than the decorative pattern 700. Further, as described above, the decorative pattern 700 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a less decorative display mode, but the small pattern 704 is a decorative pattern mainly consisting of letters. Displayed only in a low-quality display mode. However, the small pattern 704 may be displayed in a display mode in which an image such as a picture or a character is displayed in addition to text. Moreover, the small pattern 704 may be a pattern consisting only of characters. This small pattern 704 can also be regarded as a performance pattern.

The small symbols 704 are displayed in a variable manner (for example, vertically scrolled) in a manner that indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner as the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47 is won. In the small pattern 704, during scrolling, the number images are displayed in increments of 1 from "1" to "9", and then are repeatedly displayed in increments of 1 from "1". Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol 704 is stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, the number shown by the small pattern 704 that is stopped and displayed matches the number shown by the decorative pattern 700. To explain further, in the example of FIG. 157(1), a number corresponding to "029" of the decorative pattern 700 is displayed as the small pattern 704.

(Execution count image 705)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), an execution count image 705 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This execution number image 705 is an image showing the number of new variable displays (the number of variable effects of the decorative pattern 700) that has been performed since the number of variable displays of the special symbol was reset. The displayed content of the execution number image 705 is updated every time a variable effect is performed. In the illustrated example, the execution number image 705 shows the text "99 GAME" including the number of times the variable effect has been performed. Note that the number of variable effects shown in the number of executions image 705 may be the number of times that the variable effect has been executed, or may be the number of variable effects that have been executed as well as the number of variable effects that are currently being executed. There may be. Further, the timing at which the display content of the execution number image 705 is updated may be during the execution of the variable effect, or may be after the variable effect has ended. The execution count image 705 is displayed on a layer behind the decorative pattern 700. However, the execution count image 705 may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Stage image 706)
As shown in FIG. 157(1), a stage image 706 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The stage image 706 is an image that suggests or informs the stage where the player is staying in the current performance. Further, the stage is a stage in the performance of the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of stages are provided, and a stage image 706 having a display mode depending on the stage where the user is staying is displayed. The stage image 706 is higher than the decorative pattern 700, the fluctuation image 701, the pending image 702, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution count image 705, etc. among the plurality of layers provided in the first image display device 70. Displayed on the back (lower) layer. That is, the stage image 706 is displayed as a background image on the first image display device 70. Further, the stage image 706 may be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a space-themed moving image is displayed as the stage image 706.
The stage image 706 is switched, for example, when the variable performance on one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, when a specific variable performance is performed, the stage image 706 may be switched in the next variable performance after this specific variable performance. Examples of the specific variable effects include a variable effect in which an SP ready-to-win effect is executed, a variable effect in which an SPSP ready-to-reach effect is executed, and the like. Further, the stage image 706 changes depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. More specifically, the stage image 706 is displayed in different display modes in the normal game state, the normal time-saving game state, and the special time-saving game state. The background of the stage image 706 can also be regarded as the performance mode of the gaming machine 1.

(First front image 707)
As shown in FIG. 157(6), a first front image 707 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The first front image 707 is displayed in a layer that is in front (higher) than the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among the plurality of layers provided in the first image display device 70. The first front image 707 may be displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In this case, the first foreground image 707 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 7006, the remaining number of arrivals image 708 (described later), etc. It is displayed on a layer behind (lower) the display 703, small pattern 704, etc. However, the first front image 707 may be displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the pending image 702. The first foreground image 707 is displayed during execution of the variable effect.

(Remaining number of arrivals image 708)
As shown in FIG. 157(5), a remaining number of arrivals image 708 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This remaining number of attainment image 708 is an image showing the number of variable effects required until the special time saving game state is reached. The display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 708 is updated every time a variable effect is performed. In the illustrated example, the text "400 remaining" is shown as the remaining number of attainment image 708, which includes the number of fluctuating effects required to enter the special time-saving game state. Note that the number of variable effects shown in the remaining number of arrivals image 708 may include the variable effect that is being executed, or may be the number of times that excludes the variable effect that is currently being executed. Furthermore, the timing at which the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 708 is updated may be during execution of the variable effect or after the end of the variable effect. The remaining number of arrivals image 708 is displayed in a layer behind the decorative pattern 700. However, the remaining number of arrivals image 708 may be displayed on a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Second front image 709)
As shown in FIG. 162(4), a second front image 709 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The second front image 709 is displayed in a layer that is in front (higher) than the layer in which the decorative pattern 700 is displayed, among the plurality of layers provided in the first image display device 70. Further, the second front image 709 is displayed in a different display manner from the first front image 707. Further, the second front image 709 may be displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In this case, the second front image 709 is a layer that is in front of the decorative pattern 700, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of arrivals image 708, etc. , the small pattern 704, etc. are displayed on a layer that is on the back side (lower). However, the second front image 709 may be displayed in a layer in front of the variable image 701 and the pending image 702. Further, the second foreground image 709 is executed in a variation effect of a variation effect pattern in which the first foreground image 707 is not executed.

(Clear negative image 744)
As shown in FIG. 162(4), a clear negative image 744 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The clear denial image 744 is displayed when the RWM clear denial effect is executed. By displaying the clear negative image 744, it is suggested to the player that RWM clear has not been executed. In the illustrated example, a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is displayed as the clear negative image 744.

(Customer waiting image 710)
As shown in FIG. 166(1), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The customer waiting image 710 is an image for advertising the gaming machine 1 when it is in a customer waiting state. The customer waiting image 710 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. However, the customer waiting image 710 may be displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70 and not be displayed in the other part. In the illustrated example, a moving image related to the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 is displayed as the customer waiting image 710. The customer waiting image 710 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the fluctuation image 701, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of arrivals image 708, etc. etc. are displayed on a layer that is later (lower) than the above. However, the customer waiting image 710 may be displayed on a layer behind the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, etc.

(First emphasized image 711)
As shown in FIG. 167(9), a first emphasized image 711 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The first emphasized image 711 is an image that emphasizes the effect produced by the first movable member 73a. Further, the first emphasized image 711 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the first emphasized image 711 is a radial image. More specifically, the first emphasized image 711 is a radial image of a specific color centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. Further, the specific color may be any color, for example, red. Further, the first emphasized image 711 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of arrivals image 708, etc. It is displayed on a layer behind the number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(SP reach image 712)
As shown in FIG. 167(10), the SP reach image 712 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This SP reach image 712 is an image showing that the SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 712 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 plays a mini-game. Further, in the SP reach image 712, a background different from that of the stage image 706 is displayed. Further, the SP reach image 712 is a layer in front of the fluctuation image 701, the fluctuation pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of reaches image 708, etc., and has a decorative pattern. 700, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc., it is displayed in a layer on the back side.

(SPSP reach image 713)
As shown in FIG. 167 (11), the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This SPSP reach image 713 is an image showing that the SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP reach image 713 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1 fight. Further, in the SPSP reach image 713, a background different from that of the stage image 706 and the SP reach image 712 is displayed. In addition, the SPSP reach image 713 is a layer in front of the fluctuation image 701, the fluctuation pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of reaches image 708, etc., and has a decorative pattern. 700, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc., it is displayed in a layer on the back side.

(Button operation image 714)
As shown in FIG. 167(12), a button operation image 714 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The button operation image 714 is an image displayed when a promotion effect is being executed. By displaying this button operation image 714, the player can recognize that it is the timing to operate the production button 17. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the production button 17 is displayed as the button operation image 714. In this embodiment, the button operation image 714 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and if the effect button 17 is operated before the predetermined period elapses after the button operation image 714 is displayed, a predetermined effect is executed. That is, in the promotion performance, the valid period of operation of the performance button 17 is determined as the display period of the button operation image 714.

(First eye-catching image 715)
As shown in FIG. 168 (14), a first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The first eye-catching image 715 is an image showing a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed when the SPSP reach effect ends in a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the normal game state or in a variable effect in which a revival variation is performed. Furthermore, if the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed but the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is not executed, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed when the SP ready-to-reach effect ends. The first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In addition, the first eye-catching image 715 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of arrivals image 708, etc. It is displayed on a layer behind the pending number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(Adjusted image 716)
As shown in FIG. 169(1), an adjusted image 716 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The adjustment image 716 is an image for adjusting the volume of sound output from the audio output device 9 and the amount of light of various lamps. When the player operates the cross key 19 while the adjustment image 716 is displayed, the volume and the light amount of the various lamps are adjusted. In the illustrated example, the adjustment image 716 includes an image simulating a speaker, an image simulating a lamp, and an image simulating the cross key 19. Further, the adjusted image 716 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Menu image 717)
As shown in FIG. 169(1), a menu image 717 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The menu image 717 is an image for causing the first image display device 70 to display a menu screen (not shown) for making settings related to the gaming machine 1. In other words, the menu image 717 is an image that notifies the player that the menu screen can be displayed. When the player operates the effect button 17 while the menu image 717 is displayed, the menu screen is displayed on the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, as the menu image 717, an image imitating the effect button 17 and text "Display menu with button" are shown. Furthermore, the menu image 717 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700.

(Second emphasized image 718)
As shown in FIG. 171 (15), a second emphasized image 718 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The second emphasized image 718 is an image that emphasizes the effect produced by the first movable member 73a. Further, the second emphasized image 718 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the second emphasized image 718 is a radial image centered on the position of the first movable member 73a. Further, the second emphasized image 718 is displayed in a different color from the first emphasized image 711. The color of the second emphasized image 718 may be any color, for example, a rainbow color. Further, the second emphasized image 718 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of arrivals image 708, etc. It is displayed on a layer behind the number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(Opening image 719)
As shown in FIG. 171 (18), an opening image 719 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This opening image 719 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game or the start of the small win game. In the illustrated example, as the opening image 719, the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" indicating the start of a jackpot game is displayed. This opening image 719 has content that suggests the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends.

(First right-handed image 720)
As shown in FIG. 172 (19), the first right-hitting image 720 is displayed on the first image display device 70 as an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the gaming area 5a. be. The first right-hitting image 720 is displayed when a jackpot game is being executed. In the illustrated example, an arrow mark pointing to the right is displayed as the first right-handed image 720.

(Promotional image 721)
As shown in FIG. 172 (19), a promotion image 721 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The promotion image 721 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 5a. In the illustrated example, the text "Aim to the right!!", an image simulating the game area 5a, and an arrow mark pointing from the left to the right in the image simulating the game area 5a are shown as the promotion image 721. ing.

(Round image 722)
As shown in FIG. 172 (20), an in-round image 722 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This in-round image 722 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1. The in-round image 722 is displayed during a round in the jackpot game.

(Round number image 723)
As shown in FIG. 172 (20), a round number image 723 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This round number image 723 is an image for informing the player of the number of rounds currently being executed in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed as the round number image 723.

(Normal time saving selection image 745)
As shown in FIG. 172 (21), a normal time saving selection image 745 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The normal time saving selection image 745 is an image for allowing the player to select the mode of performance in the normal time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, two modes "A" and "B" are selectable in the normal time saving selection image 745. The player can select one of the modes by operating the performance button 17 while the normal time saving selection image 745 is displayed. Furthermore, in the illustrated example, mode "A" is selected.

(Normal time saving start image 724)
As shown in FIG. 172 (22), a normal time saving start image 724 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This normal time saving start image 724 is an image that notifies the start of the normal time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "Enter A mode!!" is displayed as the normal time saving start image 724. “A mode” displayed in the normal time saving start image 724 is the mode selected in the normal time saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 172 (21)).

(Card attention image 739)
As shown in FIG. 172 (22), a card caution image 739 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The card caution image 739 is an image for cautioning against forgetting to take out a card whose value balance can be specified from a lending device (not shown) that performs gaming ball lending communication with the gaming machine 1. In the illustrated example, the card caution image 739 shows the text "Please be careful not to forget to remove your card."

(Game caution image 740)
As shown in FIG. 172 (22), a game caution image 740 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The game caution image 740 is an image for cautioning the player against becoming absorbed in the game. In the illustrated example, the game caution image 740 displays the text "Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted to it."

(Second right-handed image 725)
As shown in FIG. 172 (23), a second right-handed image 725 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This second right-hitting image 725 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 5a. The second right-hitting image 725 is continuously displayed in the normal time-saving game state and in the special time-saving game state. In the illustrated example, the second right-handed image 725 displays an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed."

(Normal time saving remaining number of times image 726)
As shown in FIG. 172 (23), the first image display device 70 displays a normal time saving remaining number image 726. This normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is an image showing the remaining number of times of special symbol lottery in the normal time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "100 times" indicating that the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the normal time saving game state is 100 times is displayed as the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726.

(Switching image 727)
As shown in FIG. 177(9), a switching image 727 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The switching image 727 is an image for switching the background displayed on the first image display device 70. The switching image 727 is displayed when the SPSP reach effect ends in a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss in the normal time saving game state or in a variable effect in which a revival variation is performed. Further, in the case where the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed and the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is not executed, the switching image 727 may be displayed when the SP ready-to-reach effect ends. In the illustrated example, an image simulating darkness is shown as the switching image 727. In addition, the switching image 727 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, the normal time saving remaining count image 726, etc. It is displayed on a layer behind the pending number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(First transition image 728)
As shown in FIG. 177(12), the first transition image 728 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The first transition image 728 is an image displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal time-saving gaming state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state via the first transition image 728. Further, the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state via the first transition image 728. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a door is displayed as the first transition image 728. The first transition image 728 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. However, the first transition image 728 may be displayed on a part of the first image display device 70 and not be displayed on another part. In addition, a first transition image 728 that is displayed when switching from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal time-saving gaming state to the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state, and a first transition image 728 that is displayed when switching from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal game from the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state The first transition image 728 that is displayed when switching to the stage image 706 according to the state may have the same display mode or may have a different display mode. The first transition image 728 is based on the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of times reached image 708, the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726, etc. is also a front layer, and is displayed on a layer behind the pending number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(Result image 729)
As shown in FIG. 178 (13), a result image 729 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The result image 729 is an image showing the result of the jackpot game. The result image 729 is displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed when a jackpot game is played. Furthermore, if a plurality of jackpot games have been executed before the first transition image 728 is displayed, the result image 729 shows the cumulative result of the plurality of jackpot games. In the illustrated example, the result image 729 includes the text "A mode" indicating that the normal time saving gaming state was in effect, the text "TOTAL 3 times" indicating that the jackpot game was executed three times, and the text "TOTAL 3 times" indicating that the jackpot game was executed three times. The text "3024 Pt acquired" corresponding to the prize ball in is displayed.

(Left-handed image 730)
As shown in FIG. 179 (20), a left-handed hit image 730 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The left-handed image 730 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left side in the game area 5a. In the illustrated example, a left-handed player image 730 displays an arrow mark pointing to the left and the text "left-handed player." The left hitting image 730 is displayed when switching from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state or when switching from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

(Second eye-catching image 731)
As shown in FIG. 180 (29), a second eye-catching image 731 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The second eye-catching image 731 is an image showing a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the gaming machine 1, and is different from the first eye-catching image 715. However, the second eye-catching image 731 may be the same image as the first eye-catching image 715. The second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when changing the stage, that is, when changing the display mode of the stage image 706. More specifically, the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed when the variable effect is started when the display mode of the stage image 706 is changed. Further, the second eye-catching image 731 is a layer that is in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of arrivals image 708, etc. It is displayed on a layer behind the pending number display 703, small pattern 704, etc.

(Countdown image 732)
As shown in FIG. 187(2), a countdown image 732 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The countdown image 732 shows the remaining number of times from the establishment of a predetermined condition (RAM clearing, resetting the number of fluctuations) until the number of times the special symbol is displayed fluctuating (the number of fluctuating effects) reaches the special time-saving game state. , is an image to be announced as a countdown. The countdown image 732 is started when the number of variable displays until the special time saving game state is reached reaches a specific number. The specific number of times may be any number of times, but is, for example, three times. Further, the display content of the countdown image 732 is updated for each variable effect. In the illustrated example, an image of "1" is displayed as the countdown image 732, indicating that the number of variable effects necessary to enter the special time-saving gaming state is one.

(Special time saving start image 733)
As shown in FIG. 188(7), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The special time saving start image 733 is an image that notifies the start of the special time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the special time-saving start image 733 includes the text "Time-saving game START!" and an arrow mark pointing to the right.

(Second transition image 734)
As shown in FIG. 188(9), a second transition image 734 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The second transition image 734 is an image displayed when the stage image 706 is switched. In this embodiment, the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage image 706 corresponding to the special time saving gaming state via the second transition image 734. In the illustrated example, an image imitating a shutter is displayed as the second transition image 734. The second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. However, the second transition image 734 may be displayed on a part of the first image display device 70 and not be displayed on another part. The second transition image 734 is a layer in front of the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of arrivals image 708, etc. , the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, etc., are displayed in a layer on the back side.

(Special time saving selection image 735)
As shown in FIG. 188(10), a special time saving selection image 735 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The special time saving selection image 735 is an image for allowing the player to select the mode of performance in the special time saving game state. In the illustrated example, in the special time saving selection image 735, it is possible to select one of two modes, “a” and “b”. The player can select one of the modes by operating the effect button 17 while the special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. Furthermore, in the illustrated example, mode "a" is selected.

(Mode start image 736)
As shown in FIG. 188 (11), a mode start image 736 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The mode start image 736 is an image that notifies that the mode effect in the special time saving game state is started. In the illustrated example, the mode start image 736 shows the text "Entering chance mode!!".

(Third right-handed image 737)
As shown in FIG. 188 (12), a third right-handed image 737 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This third right-hitting image 737 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 5a. The third right hit image 737 is displayed in the first variable performance in the special time saving game state. In the illustrated example, as the third right-handed player image 737, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed player" are displayed.

(Special time saving remaining number of times image 738)
As shown in FIG. 188 (12), a special time saving remaining number image 738 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The special time saving remaining number of times image 738 is an image that suggests the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "749" indicating that the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state is 749 is displayed as the special time saving remaining number image 738.

(Magnetic error notification image 741)
As shown in FIG. 206(2), a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The magnetic error notification image 741 is an image that reports a magnetic error. When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, a magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "A magnet has been detected" is shown as the magnetic error notification image 741.

(Returning image 742)
As shown in FIG. 216(4), a returning image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70. The returning image 742 is an image showing that the gaming machine 1 is returning from a power-off state. In this embodiment, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the returning image 742 is displayed before the decorative pattern 700, pending image 702, pending number display 703, small pattern 704, stage image 706, etc. be done. Further, the returning image 742 is displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In addition, the returning image 742 is larger than the decorative pattern 700, the variable pedestal 701P, the pending image 702, the pending pedestal 702P, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the remaining number of reached images 708, etc. Displayed in the front layer. In the illustrated example, the text “Returning” is shown as the returning image 742.

(Zone notification image 743)
As shown in FIG. 226(2), a zone notification image 743 is displayed on the first image display device 70. This zone notification image 743 is an image that notifies that a zone effect is being executed. Furthermore, information for identifying which of the plurality of zone effects is being executed is displayed on the zone notification image 743. In the illustrated example, the text "Chance Zone" is shown as the zone notification image 743 to identify the zone effect being executed.

(Variable effect example 1)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159, the variation production (variation production example 1) of the decorative pattern 700 performed by the production control unit 130m using the first image display device 70 etc. will be specifically explained. Variation performance example 1 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state. In addition, the variation performance example 1 is a variation performance example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the ready-to-win performance is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 157(1), as the previous special symbol is stopped and displayed by the production control unit 130m, the highly decorative decorative symbol 700 is fixedly stopped on the first image display device 70. It is assumed that there is At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a decorative pattern 700, a variable pedestal 701P, a pending pedestal 702P, a pending number display 703, a small pattern 704, an execution number image 705, and a stage image 706. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 shows "0", which is the pending number of winnings to the first starting port 45, and the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 shows , "0" is shown, which is the pending number of prizes for the second starting slot. Further, the execution number image 705 shows the text “99 GAME”. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. The first stage is a stage corresponding to the normal gaming state.
Further, the top lamp 10b in the frame lighting device 10, the board lamp 74b in the board lighting device 74, the movable member lamp 74c in the board lighting device 74, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. The first aspect is, for example, a white light emission aspect. Furthermore, although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 157(2), the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. In this embodiment, the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 are displayed in a variable manner by sequentially displaying the numbers "1" to "9". That is, in this embodiment, the numbers of the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 can be changed individually. Note that the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, and the small pattern 704 may display characters different from numbers, such as English letters, for example. Further, with the start of the variation, the decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a downwardly variable manner at a low speed, while the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at a high speed.
In addition, when it is shown in the drawing that the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is being displayed in a particularly high-speed variable display (scrolling), each target pattern is indicated by an arrow (↓) in order to make it easier to understand. The decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 that are variably displayed at high speed have higher transparency than when they are not variably displayed. Furthermore, the target symbols that are displayed in a high-speed variable manner may be invisible or difficult to see for the player, or may be visible for the player. In addition, the operation of the decorative pattern 700 when the variation is started, such as the display of the decorative pattern 700 fluctuating at a low speed, may be hereinafter referred to as the movement at the start of variation.

Further, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 157(2). Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. The staged display performance is a performance in which the pending image 702 is displayed while changing the display mode of the pending image 702 in stages. The staged display effect is executed when the display of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the first pending image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position upwardly away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Note that the staged display effect will be described in detail later.

In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. be done. Moreover, at this time, the light emission mode of the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c is switched to a light emission mode according to the variable performance. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change from the first mode to the second mode. The second mode is a mode of light emission that lights up in blue, and is different from the first mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(3), the decorative pattern 700 moves further downward by the movement at the start of variation. Also, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first reserved pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 157(2). Further, the display mode of this pending image 702 is a display mode according to the first stage. Further, the winning sound for notifying the winning at the first starting port 45 is continuously outputted until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Further, although not shown in the example shown in FIG. 157(3), when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. The motion effect is a motion display of the variable image 701 or the pending image 702. The motion performance is executed according to the progress of the performance. More specifically, the motion performance is performed while the variation performance is being executed. Moreover, the movement effect may not be executed when the variable effect is not being executed, or the movement effect may be executed even when the variable effect is not being executed. By executing the motion effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable image 701 or the pending image 702. Note that the motion effects will be explained in detail later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(4), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Further, although not shown in the drawings, while the variable effect is being executed, BGM corresponding to the variable effect that is being executed is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 157(1) to (4), the decorative pattern 700 is such that the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and when the decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a variable manner. Although it moves (scrolls) in the vertical direction, it is not limited to this mode. For example, in the decorative pattern 700, the left decorative pattern 700, the middle decorative pattern 700, and the right decorative pattern 700 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and each may be moved (scrolled) in the horizontal direction.
Furthermore, the state in which the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are displayed by arrows (↓) in the drawings is not limited to the state in which the target pattern is displayed. For example, a state in which a target symbol is displayed by an arrow (↓) in a drawing may be a state in which the target symbol is hidden and cannot be seen by the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 157(1) to (4), in a state where there is no reservation regarding the winning of the first starting hole 45 and the special symbol is not changing, the first starting hole 45 is When a game ball wins, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and a pending image 702 is displayed. Thereafter, the pending image 702 moves to the display position of the variable image 701, and "0" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45.
However, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in a state where there is no hold on winning the first starting hole 45 and the special symbol is not changing, the first starting hole 45 will be held on hold. The number display 703 may remain "0". In this case, after the pending image 702 is displayed, the variable image 701 may be displayed by moving the pending image 702, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without the pending image 702 being displayed. .

Further, although not shown, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in a state where there is no hold on the winning of the second starting port 47 and the special symbol is not changing, the second starting port 47 “1” may be displayed in the pending number display 703 of the mouth 47, and the pending image 702 may also be displayed. Thereafter, the pending image 702 may move to the display position of the variable image 701, and "0" may be displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47.
However, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 in a state where there is no hold on the winning of the second starting hole 47 and the special symbol is not changing, the second starting hole 47 is held on hold. The number display 703 may remain "0". In this case, after the pending image 702 is displayed, the variable image 701 may be displayed by moving the pending image 702, or the variable image 701 may be displayed without the pending image 702 being displayed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(5), display of the first front image 707 is started. When the display of the first foreground image 707 is started, the transparency of the first foreground image 707 is high, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on a layer behind the first foreground image 707 is visible to the player. It is now possible. Also, at this time, a remaining number of arrivals image 708 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the remaining number of arrivals image 708 shows the text “400 remaining”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(6), the transparency of the first foreground image 707 becomes low, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the first foreground image 707 becomes invisible to the player. or become difficult to see.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 158 (7). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position upwardly away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(8), the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first pending pedestal 702P, which is larger than the example shown in FIG. 158(7). Displayed by size. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 158(9), the first foreground image 707 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 that is being displayed variably at high speed becomes visible to the player again.
Note that the display period of the first front image 707 is, for example, 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (10), the left decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed and stopped until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped.
In addition, when it is shown in the drawing that the decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped, in order to make it easier to understand, a display similar to a double quotation mark is used around the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 700.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (11), as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "2" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position upwardly away from the second reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 to notify the winning to the first starting port 45 is started. This winning sound is different from the winning sound that is output when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode (see FIG. 158 (8)) is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (12), the staged display performance is completed, and the pending image 702 is displayed in a large display size and in the expected color display mode on the second pending pedestal 702P. In the illustrated example, the second pending image 702 is displayed in blue. More specifically, the second reserved image 702 is displayed in a mode including a circular part made of blue and formed in a circular shape, and an aura part located above the circular part and imitating an aura. There is. Further, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the second pending image 702 is started. Moreover, the winning sound for notifying the winning at the first starting port 45 is continuously outputted until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the staged display performance is completed. This predetermined time is, for example, 1 second. That is, the output time of the winning sound when the blue pending image 702 is displayed is longer than the output time of the winning sound when the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (13), the right decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixedly stopped until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (14), the medium decorative pattern 700 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixedly stopped until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2" which is the medium decorative pattern 700 is temporarily stopped. Then, after the three decorative patterns 700 temporarily stop, as the special pattern stops changing, the three decorative patterns 700 finally stop as shown in FIG. 159 (15). The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 700 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 704 also come to a fixed stop. In other words, all the small symbols 704 are permanently stopped without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination "421" of the small patterns 704 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 700. Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "100 GAME". Note that the execution time of this variation effect is, for example, 8 seconds.

(Stage display effect using circular pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a staged display effect using the circular pending image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a circular pending image 702 in a normal display mode.
The circular pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of staged display performance. When a game ball enters the first starting port 45, first, as shown in FIG. 160(1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, a highly transparent pending image 702 is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a semicircular shape. Further, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position upwardly away from the pending pedestal 702P. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 157(2) and FIG. 158(7).

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(2), as the second stage of the staged display effect, a suspended image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the first stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 is circular and has a cross mark. Furthermore, this pending image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 160(3), as the third stage of the stage display effect, a suspended image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(4), as the fourth stage of the stage display effect, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed with a larger display size than the third stage. Furthermore, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than in the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 157(3) and FIG. 158(8). That is, although not shown, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 157(2) and 158(7) is displayed, the suspended image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 157(3) and FIG. 158(9) is displayed.

Note that the display mode of the pending image 702 at the final stage may be referred to as a completed display mode below. In particular, the display size of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed display size. Further, the form of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completed form. Further, the transparency of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be referred to as the completion transparency. Further, the display position of the pending image 702 in the complete display mode may be referred to as the complete display position.
Furthermore, the display mode of the pending image 702 that is not in the first to third stages, that is, the final stage, may be hereinafter referred to as an unfinished display mode. In particular, the display size of the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode may be referred to as the unfinished display size. Furthermore, the form of the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode may be referred to as an unfinished form. Further, the transparency of the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode may be referred to as the unfinished transparency. Further, the operation mode of the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode may be referred to as the unfinished operation mode. Furthermore, the display position of the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode may be referred to as an unfinished display position.
In this embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect until the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect using the circular pending image 702 in the normal display mode is 0. .2 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 160(5), the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. The circular pending image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates in the clockwise direction as an action effect. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

As described above, the pending image 702 is displayed while the display size changes in stages in the staged display effect. More specifically, the pending image 702 is displayed so that the display size increases in stages. Further, the pending image 702 is displayed while the display position changes step by step in a stepwise display effect. More specifically, the pending image 702 is displayed so as to move stepwise toward the pending pedestal 702P (completed display position). Furthermore, the pending image 702 is displayed with its transparency changing in stages in a staged display effect. More specifically, the pending image 702 is displayed so that the transparency becomes lower in stages. Furthermore, the pending image 702 is displayed while changing its form in stages. More specifically, the pending image 702 is displayed so that its form approaches the completed form in stages.
When the pending image 702 is displayed, if the pending image 702 switches from a hidden state to a completed display mode without performing a staged display effect, the player may feel uncomfortable with the display of the pending image 702. There is. Therefore, in this embodiment, by displaying the reserved image 702 in stages using a staged display effect, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. Further, the staged display effect allows the player to enjoy the change in the display mode of the pending image 702.

(Stage display effect using blue pending image 702)
Next, a staged display effect using the blue pending image 702 will be explained. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a blue pending image 702.
The blue pending image 702 performs four stages of staged display performance. When a game ball enters the first starting port 45, first, as shown in FIG. 161(1), as the first stage of the staged display performance, a highly transparent pending image 702 is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a semicircular shape. Further, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position upwardly away from the pending pedestal 702P. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 158 (11). In addition, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) in the first stage of the blue pending image 702 is the display mode in the first stage in the staged display effect using the circular pending image 702 in the normal display mode. This is the same display mode as .

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(2), as a second stage of the staged display effect, a reserved image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the first stage is displayed in blue. This reserved image 702 is displayed in a manner including a circular portion 702a made of blue and formed in a circular shape, and an aura portion 702b located above the circular portion 702a and imitating an aura. Furthermore, this pending image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 161(3), as the third stage of the stage display effect, a suspended image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(4), as the fourth stage of the stage display effect, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 having lower transparency than the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed with a larger display size than the third stage. Further, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P compared to the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 158 (12). That is, although not shown, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 158 (11) is displayed, the suspended image 702 in the second stage of the stage display effect is displayed, and then the stage display A pending image 702 in the third stage of presentation is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 158 (12) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect until the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect using the blue pending image 702 is 0.3 seconds. . In other words, the execution time of the staged display effect using the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the staged display effect using the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 161(5), the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the blue circular pending image 702, the circular part 702a periodically rotates clockwise and the aura part 702b periodically swings left and right as motion effects. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds. Further, the period of swinging in this motion performance is, for example, 1.5 seconds.

As described above, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage in the staged display performance. In this case, when the first-stage pending image 702 in the staged display effect is displayed, the player cannot distinguish whether the displayed pending image 702 is in the normal display mode or in the expected color display mode. do not have. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to which display mode the pending image 702 will be displayed.
Although it has been described that the pending image 702 in the normal display mode and the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode have the same display mode in the first stage in the staged display effect, the present invention is not limited to this. The reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode are defined by one or more of the display modes of the first stage display color, form, display size, transparency, and display position. While they are the same, other display modes may be different. Even in this case, when the first-stage pending image 702 is displayed, the player cannot distinguish whether the displayed pending image 702 is in the normal display mode or in the expected color display mode. Hateful. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation as to which display mode the pending image 702 will be displayed.

Furthermore, in the reserved image 702 (fluctuation image 701) in the expected color display mode, display modes other than the display color (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) may be the same regardless of the display color. However, it may be different for each display color. In addition, in the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) of the expected color display mode, for certain multiple colors (for example, blue and red), the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) other than the display color is Although the special color (for example, rainbow color) is the same, the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) other than the display color may also be different from the specific plural colors.
In addition, in the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) of the expected color display mode, when the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) other than the display color differs depending on the display color, each stage in the stage display effect is The display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) may also be different. In addition, in the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) of the expected color display mode, if the display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) other than the display color is the same regardless of the display color, the staged display The display mode (display size, transparency, form, display position, etc.) of each stage in the presentation may also be the same.

Furthermore, the operation mode in the motion performance using the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) in the expected color display mode may be the same regardless of the display color, or may be different for each display color. In addition, in the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) of the expected color display mode, the motion mode in the motion performance is the same for specific plural colors (for example, blue and red), and for special colors (for example, rainbow color), The motion mode in the motion performance may be different from the specific plural colors.

(Variable effect example 2)
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, another specific example (variable effect example 2) of the variable effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variation performance example 2 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state. Further, the variation performance example 2 is a variation performance example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from the above-mentioned variable effect example 1 will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the variable effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 162(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 130m determines and stops the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 on the first image display device 70. has been done. Also, at this time, four pending images 702, an execution count image 705, and a stage image 706 are displayed. Further, at this time, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Further, the execution number image 705 shows the text “49 GAME”. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second embodiment. Furthermore, although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Further, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "3". Also, at this time, the second pending image 702, the third pending image 702, and the fourth pending image 702 are placed on the first pending pedestal 702P, the second pending pedestal 702P, and the third pending pedestal 702P, respectively. move towards. Furthermore, the first pending image 702 moves toward the variable pedestal 701P and is enlarged, so that the variable image 701 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(3), display of the second front image 709 is started. When the display of the second foreground image 709 is started, the transparency of the second foreground image 709 is high, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on a layer behind the second foreground image 709 is visible to the player. It is now possible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (4), the transparency of the second foreground image 709 becomes low, and the decorative pattern 700 displayed on the layer behind the second foreground image 709 is difficult for the player to see. or become invisible. Also, at this time, a clear negative image 744 and a remaining number of arrivals image 708 are displayed. The remaining number of arrivals image 708 shows the text “200 remaining”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 162(5), the second foreground image 709 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 that is being displayed variably at high speed becomes visible to the player again.
Note that the display period of the second front image 709 is, for example, 2 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "853" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 162(6). Also, at this time, the display content of the execution count image 705 is updated to "50 GAME".
Note that the execution time of this variation effect is, for example, 4 seconds.

(Variable effect example 3)
FIG. 163 and FIG. 164 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variation performance example 3 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state. Moreover, the variation performance example 3 is a variation performance example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser and a reach-to-win performance is executed. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variable performance example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 163(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 130m determines and stops the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 on the first image display device 70. has been done. Also, at this time, "0" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Further, the execution number image 705 shows the text “200 GAME”. Further, the remaining number of arrivals image 708 shows the text “300 remaining”. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the second stage is displayed as a stage image 706. The second stage is a stage corresponding to the normal gaming state, and is a different stage from the first stage.
Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first mode. Further, although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 163(2), the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, a staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(3), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display performance is completed, and the star-shaped pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 163(2). Further, the display mode of this pending image 702 is a display mode according to the second stage. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(4), the movement at the start of variation is completed, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Further, although not shown in the drawings, while the variable effect is being executed, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is continuously outputted from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(5), the left decorative pattern 700 "4" is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 163(6), the right decorative symbol 700 "4" is temporarily stopped and the ready-to-win effect is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (7), "3", which is the middle decorative pattern 700, is temporarily stopped.
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 164(8). The combination "434" of this decorative pattern 700 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbol stops changing, the small symbol 704 "434" also stops fixed. Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "201 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 708 is updated to "299 remaining".

(Stage display effect using star-shaped pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a staged display effect using the star-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode will be explained. FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example of a staged display effect using a star-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
The star-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of staged display performance. When a game ball enters the first starting port 45, first, as shown in FIG. 165(1), a highly transparent pending image 702 is displayed in white as the first stage of the staged display effect. This retained image 702 has a star shape with the top portion missing. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 163(2).

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(2), as the second stage of the staged display effect, a suspended image 702 having lower transparency than the first stage is displayed. This retained image 702 has a star shape. Furthermore, this pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 165(3), as the third stage of the stage display effect, a suspended image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the second stage. Further, in the third stage, an operation display using a pending image 702 is performed. More specifically, in the third stage, an operation display is performed in which the pending image 702 emits light. In the illustrated example, an image imitating light is displayed moving from the center of the held image 702 toward the periphery of the held image 702.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(4), as the fourth stage of the stage display effect, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than the third stage. Note that the action display using the pending image 702 performed in the third stage of the stage display effect is not performed in the final stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 163(3). That is, although not shown, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 163(2) is displayed, the suspended image 702 in the second stage of the stage display effect is displayed, and then the stage display A pending image 702 in the third stage of presentation is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 163(3) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from the start of this staged display effect until the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect using the star-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode, is as follows: It is 0.2 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the staged display effect using the star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is the same as the execution time of the staged display effect using the circular reserved image 702 in the normal display mode.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 165(5), the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. The star-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically rotates counterclockwise as an action effect. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Fluctuation effect example 4)
FIGS. 166 to 168 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 166 to 168, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variation performance example 4 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state. Further, the variation performance example 4 is a variation performance example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and the reach performance, the SP reach performance, and the SPSP reach performance are executed. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variable performance example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 166(1), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Further, “0” is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Moreover, at this time, the variation of the special symbol has stopped, and the variation effect is not being executed. Moreover, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the third mode. The third mode is a mode where the lights are off. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 166(2), the customer waiting image 710 is hidden as the special symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to fluctuate. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Further, the number of executions image 705 shows the text "250 GAME", and the remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text "250 to go". Furthermore, a background corresponding to the second stage is displayed as a stage image 706. Also, at this time, a staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the third mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(3), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(4), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Further, although not shown in the drawings, while the variable effect is being executed, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is continuously outputted from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 166(5). Also, at this time, a staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(6), the staged display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(7), the left decorative pattern 700 "6" is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 167(8), the right decorative symbol 700 "6" is temporarily stopped and the ready-to-win effect is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(9), the development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies that the reach performance will develop into the SP reach performance. In the advanced performance, the movable performance is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. The movable performance is a performance that moves the first movable member 73a. In the illustrated example, the first movable member 73a moves to a position overlapping the first image display device 70 as a movable effect. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state in which they are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small symbols 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. Further, when the development effect is executed, the modes of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are switched. More specifically, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the fourth mode. The fourth aspect is a green light emission aspect, which is different from any of the first to third aspects.
Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the development performance is being executed, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "2". On the other hand, the pending image 702 continues to be invisible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the winning sound accompanying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.

Next, after the development effect and the movable effect are completed and the first movable member 73a is retracted to a position where it does not overlap the first image display device 70, the SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 167 (10). Ru. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the fluctuation image 701, the pending image 702, the number of executions image 705, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small symbols 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background image according to the SP reach effect. Further, when the SP ready-to-reach effect is being executed, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 700 becomes smaller and they are displayed in a less decorative manner. Further, the left and right decorative patterns 700 are displayed on the upper side of the first image display device 70. In the illustrated example, the left decorative pattern 700 is displayed at the upper left corner of the first image display device 70, and the right decorative pattern 700 is displayed at the upper right corner of the first image display device 70. Note that the display positions of the left and right decorative symbols 700 when the SP ready-to-reach effect is performed are not limited to the illustrated example. When the SP ready-to-reach effect is being performed, the left and right decorative symbols 700 are displayed at any position on the first image display device 70 if the display position is different from the display position before the execution of the SP ready-to-reach effect (see FIG. 167 (8)). It may be displayed in the position.
Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the SP ready-to-win performance is being executed, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 is switched to "3". In addition, a winning sound accompanying a winning to the first starting port 45 is outputted from the audio output device 9. On the other hand, the pending image 702 continues to be invisible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (11), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed. Further, at this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background image according to the SPSP reach effect.
Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the SPSP ready-to-win performance is being executed, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "4". On the other hand, the pending image 702 continues to be invisible to the player. Moreover, the winning sound accompanying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.
Note that the decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness that is displayed when the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is being executed is displayed on a different layer from the decorative pattern 700 with high decorativeness (see FIG. 167 (8)). may be done. For example, a highly decorative decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a layer behind the variable image 701 and the pending image 702, whereas a decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness is displayed in a layer that is in the front layer compared to the variable image 701 and the pending image 702. It may be displayed in layers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (12), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5" which is the medium decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 168 (13). At this time, the medium decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a display mode with low decorativeness and in a larger display size than the left and right decorative patterns 700.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (14), a first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small symbols 704 continue to be easily visible to the player.
Note that the time from when the variable effect is started until the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed is, for example, 60 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (15), the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 on the first image display device 70 becomes smaller. More specifically, by moving the first eye-catching image 715 so as to slide to the right, the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 becomes smaller. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the first eye-catching image 715 is not displayed, the third pending image 702, the fourth pending image 702, the number of executions image 705, and the remaining number of reached The image 708 is now easily visible to the player. Further, at this time, the temporary stop display of the highly decorative left decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible to the player. Further, a portion of the second pending image 702 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 is visible or easily visible to the player. Furthermore, the portion of the stage image 706 that does not overlap with the first eye-catching image 715 is easily visible to the player. On the other hand, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, and the first pending image 702 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Furthermore, the portion of the stage image 706 that overlaps with the first eye-catching image 715 continues to be difficult or invisible to the player. Further, the portion of the second pending image 702 that overlaps with the first eye-catching image 715 continues to be difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the motion effects of the fourth pending image 702, the third pending image 702, and the second pending image 702 are being executed, and the fourth pending image 702, the third pending image 702, and The motion display of the second pending image 702 becomes visible or easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (16), the first eye-catching image 715 is hidden. At this time, the temporarily stopped display of the three highly decorative decorative patterns 700 becomes easily visible to the player. Furthermore, the variable image 701 and the first pending image 702 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. Further, the entire stage image 706 and the entire second pending image 702 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, four pending images 702 are displayed in the normal display mode and in the complete display mode. That is, regarding the second pending image 702, the third pending image 702, and the fourth pending image 702, the completed display mode is suspended without the staged display effect becoming visible to the player. An image 702 is displayed.
Note that the display time of the first eye-catching image 715 is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 168 (17). The combination "656" of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. In addition, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "251 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of times to reach image 708 is updated to "249 remaining". Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden. Note that the execution time of this variation effect is, for example, 70 seconds.
Further, in this variable performance, the time from when the left decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops until when the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops is, for example, 5 seconds. Further, the time from when the right decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops until the middle decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops is, for example, 20 seconds.
Note that the update timing of the display content when the execution count image 705 is redisplayed and the update timing of the display content when the remaining attainment count image 708 is redisplayed may be the same. In this case, the number of executions image 705 and the remaining number of times of reaching image 708 may both be re-displayed with the updated display content, or may be re-displayed with the display content before the update.

As described above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 during execution of the development performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, etc., the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is visible to the player. The pending image 702 in the completed display mode becomes visible without becoming visible.
In this way, since the change in the display mode of the pending image 702 from the unfinished display mode is not visible to the player, the pending image 702 is prevented from attracting too much attention to the player, and this is unique to the effect being executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the image.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 during execution of the notification effect, the winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by winning a prize in the first start opening 45 and not paying attention to the notification effect.
Note that while the notification effect is being executed, the sound effect of the notification effect may be output.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the SP reach effect is being executed, a winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is output, while the SP SP reach effect is being executed. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the winning sound is not output.
As a result, the priority order of making the player aware of the winning in the first start opening 45 and making the player pay attention to the performance that is being executed at the time of winning is switched according to the progress of the performance. It is possible to realize a sharp performance.

In addition, when a game ball wins at the first starting port 45 during execution of the notification performance and SP reach performance, a winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is output in both cases. When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the winning sound may not be output.
In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the execution of the notification effect, a winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is output, and during the execution of the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. If a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 during the execution of the game, the winning sound may not be output.

Further, as the display area of the first eye-catching image 715 gradually becomes smaller as time passes, some of the plurality of pending images 702 become visible or easily visible to the player. , the other part becomes difficult or invisible to the player. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70 and the first eye-catching image 715 is not displayed, the stage image 706 and the like are displayed again. It is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the hidden pending image 702 has not disappeared while suppressing the sense of discomfort caused by the hidden image 702.

Further, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70, a part of the one held image 702 is visible to the player, and this one Another part of the suspended image 702 is difficult or invisible to the player (see FIG. 168 (15)). In this state, an action effect using this one pending image 702 is being executed.
In this case, even if only a part of the pending image 702 is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the existence of the pending image 702. Therefore, the player can be made to quickly recognize that the hidden pending image 702 has not disappeared.

In addition, in the case of reach variation, after the medium decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops and the reach is lost, the first predetermined image (first eye-catching image 715) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Perform the first effect that appears. In addition, in the case of a loss variation, the second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709) appears while the decorative pattern 700 is scrolling, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. A second performance will be performed to notify you of the loss. The variation time is longer when the first performance is performed than when the second performance is performed.
In this case, in the first effect, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden by the display of the first predetermined image after the decorative pattern 700 stops in a losing state, giving the player an expectation that the temporary loss may develop into some kind of presentation. You can hold it. Furthermore, in the second performance, the decorative pattern 700 is suddenly hidden during the variable display to create a sense of surprise and make the player's heart flutter. Although a common event of hiding the decorative pattern 700 occurs, predetermined images appear from different states. This makes it possible to diversify the variations of production and improve the level of interest.

Moreover, the small pattern 704 is continuously displayed both during display of the first predetermined image and during display of the second predetermined image.
In this case, by displaying the small pattern 704 even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the changing state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Further, the display time of the first predetermined image and the display time of the second predetermined image are different. In particular, the display time of the second predetermined image is longer than the display time of the first predetermined image (second front image 709).
In this case, by shortening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to smoothly transition from a missed reach to the next performance. Further, by increasing the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to create expectations among the players.

In addition, a pending image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and while the first predetermined image is displayed, the pending image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden, and when the decorative pattern 700 appears, the pending image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden. 701) is also redisplayed, and the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is displayed (not hidden) while the second predetermined image is being displayed.
In this case, while the first predetermined image is displayed, neither the decorative pattern 700 nor the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is displayed, so that more attention can be drawn to the first predetermined image. While the second predetermined image is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden while the pending image 702 (fluctuating image 701) is displayed. It is possible to make people aware of this.

Moreover, a highly anticipated specific effect (SP reach effect, etc.) is executed before the first predetermined image is displayed, and the specific effect is not executed before the second predetermined image is displayed.
In this case, the player's expectations can be raised by the specific performance, and even if a design indicating a failure from the specific performance is displayed, the player's expectations can be maintained by the appearance of the first predetermined image. On the other hand, since the second predetermined image is displayed without going through the specific effect, expectations can be immediately raised.

In addition, when the first performance is performed, the background image is switched before and after the first predetermined image is displayed (in the order of the background in the SP reach performance, the first predetermined image, the first stage, or the second stage). . When the second effect is performed, there is no change in the background image before and after the second predetermined image is displayed (first stage or second stage, second predetermined image, first stage or second stage order).
In this case, when the first effect is performed, the first predetermined image is displayed when switching from the specific background to the normal background, so that the background can be smoothly transitioned. On the other hand, in the case of the second effect, the normal background is suddenly switched to the second predetermined image, thereby increasing the player's expectations.

Furthermore, it is possible to stop the plurality of decorative patterns 700 in a predetermined order according to the determination result, and when the second effect (display of the second front image 709) is executed, the plurality of decorative patterns 700 can be stopped in a predetermined order. If the first effect is executed without stopping the above in the predetermined order, the plurality of decorative patterns 700 are stopped in the predetermined order, and the first effect is executed after the first pattern (left decorative pattern 700) is stopped. The time until the second symbol (right decorative symbol 700) stops is different from the time from when the second symbol (right decorative symbol 700) stops until the third symbol (middle decorative symbol 700) stops.
In this case, when the first performance is executed, the decorative symbols 700 stop in order and there is time until the third decorative symbol 700 stops, so that the player can be excited. In addition, since the first predetermined image is displayed even when the third decorative pattern 700 stops, the player's disappointment can be alleviated, and the possibility of further development can be left open. Furthermore, when the second performance is performed, the decorative patterns 700 do not stop sequentially, so the performance can be unexpected and the interest can be improved.

Moreover, the aspect of the decorative pattern 700 is different before and after the first predetermined image appears, and the aspect of the decorative pattern 700 is the same before and after the second predetermined image appears.
In this case, since the aspect of the decorative pattern 700 changes via the first predetermined image when the first effect is performed, the aspect of the decorative pattern 700 can be smoothly changed. Furthermore, when the second effect is performed, although there is no change in the appearance of the decorative pattern 700 before and after the second predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined image suddenly appears, so the effect can be unexpected. , can improve interest.

In addition, in the example 4 of variation effect, it was explained that the variation image 701 is displayed after the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are finished (see FIG. 168 (16)), but the present invention is not limited to this. The fluctuation image 701 does not need to be displayed after the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect ends.

(Variable effect example 5)
FIGS. 169 to 172 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 169 to 172, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variation presentation example 5 is an example of variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 based on a game ball winning in the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state. Further, the variable performance example 5 is a variable performance example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variable performance example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 169(1), an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Further, “0” is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Moreover, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variable performance is not executed. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth mode. The fifth aspect is a yellow light emission aspect, which is different from any of the first to fifth aspects. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 169(2), the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Also, at this time, a winning light emission effect is executed. In the winning light emission effect, the notification sound of the winning light emission effect is different from the winning sound that is output when the pending image 702 in the normal display mode or the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed. , is output from the audio output device 9. It should be noted that the notification sound of the light emitting effect at the time of winning can also be regarded as a winning sound that notifies the winning at the first starting port 45. Furthermore, in the winning light emission effect, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all in the sixth mode. The sixth mode is a mode in which the light flashes periodically in red. Further, the period of this blinking is, for example, 0.5 seconds. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, a staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the first pending pedestal 702P.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(3), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Further, at this time, the staged display performance is completed, and the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed on the first pending pedestal 702P in the completed display mode. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed in blue. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the first pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the notification sound of the winning light emitting effect is no longer output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the completion of the staged display effect. This predetermined time is, for example, 2 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(4), the movement at the start of the variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Further, although not shown in the drawings, while the variable effect is being executed, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is continuously outputted from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 169(5). Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 when the staged display performance using the first pending image 702 is completed, as shown in FIG. "2" is displayed. Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the second pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the second pending pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound. More specifically, before the output of the winning sound corresponding to the first pending image 702 ends, the output of the winning sound corresponding to the second pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the first pending image 702 is started.

In addition, if the output of the current winning sound starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, even if you set the previous winning sound to stop being output when the output of the current winning sound starts. good. Further, even if the output of the current winning sound is started before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the previous winning sound may be output until the end. That is, the previous winning sound and the current winning sound may be output at the same time. Also, if the output of the winning sound to notify the current winning starts before the output of the previous winning sound ends, the current winning sound will not be output until the output of the previous winning sound ends. Good too.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 when the staged display effect using the second pending image 702 is completed, as shown in FIG. “3” is displayed. Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the third pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the third pending pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound. Further, on the second reservation pedestal 702P, a reservation image 702 in a normal game state is displayed in a completed display mode. Furthermore, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the second pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (8), the staged display effect using the third pending image 702 is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third pending pedestal 702P. . Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the third pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(9), the left decorative pattern 700 "4" is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (10), the right decorative symbol 700 "4" is temporarily stopped and the ready-to-win effect is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (11), the development effect is executed. In the advanced performance, the movable performance is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the sixth mode to the fourth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170 (12), the SP reach effect is executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (13), the SPSP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SPSP reach effect, an SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (14), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, a jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 171 (15). The jackpot notification performance is a performance to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In the jackpot effect, a movable effect is executed and a second emphasized image 718 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the first movable member 73a moves to a position overlapping the first image display device 70 as a movable effect. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state in which they are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small symbols 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. Furthermore, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. The seventh mode is a light emission mode in which the lights are lit in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet over time. In other words, the seventh mode is a light emitting mode in which the lighting color switches to seven colors over time, thereby lighting up in rainbow colors. Further, the seventh aspect can also be considered as a mode that suggests or informs that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b is lit in red, the board lamp 74b is lit in orange, the movable member lamp 74c is lit in yellow, and the button lamp 17c is lit in green. Moreover, when the jackpot notification effect is being executed, the sound effect of the jackpot notification effect is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the jackpot notification effect is finished and the second emphasized image 718 is hidden, the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 171 (16). In the illustrated example, the decorative patterns 700 are displayed in a combination of "444". Moreover, at this time, the display size of the decorative pattern 700 is larger than the display mode during execution of the SPSP ready-to-reach effect (see FIG. 171 (13)). On the other hand, the small pattern 704 continues to be displayed in a fluctuating manner. Also, at this time, the execution count image 705 and the remaining reach count image 708 are redisplayed. On the other hand, the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up in orange, the panel lamp 74b lights up in yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in green, and the button lamp 17c lights up in blue. Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is displayed on the first image display device 70 again.
Note that the background of the first image display device 70 when the squared decorative pattern 700 is displayed may be the background corresponding to the stage during the stay, that is, the background corresponding to the first stage.

Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero is temporarily stopped, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. On the other hand, the suspended image 702 continues to be difficult or invisible to the player. Also, the winning sound is not output.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 171 (17). Moreover, "444" is fixed and stopped as the small pattern 704. That is, the display of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 will be in a matching state in the combination of "444". Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 705 is updated to "351 GAME". Also, at this time, the display content of the remaining number of arrivals image 708 is updated to "149 remaining". Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b is lit in yellow, the panel lamp 74b is lit in green, the movable member lamp 74c is lit in blue, and the button lamp 17c is lit in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (18), an opening image 719 is displayed. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change from the seventh mode to the second mode. Although not shown in the drawings, during the execution of the jackpot game, BGM corresponding to the progress of the jackpot game is output from the audio output device 9.
Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (19), a first right-handed image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed. Further, the display time of the promotion image 721 is, for example, 5 seconds.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the promotion image 721 was displayed, an in-round image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 172 (20). In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed in the round number image 723.
Next, when the final round ends, a normal time saving selection image 745 is displayed as shown in FIG. 172 (21). In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on mode “A” in the normal time saving selection image 745.
Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the normal time saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal working time saving start image 724 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 172 (22). Also, at this time, a card caution image 739 and a game caution image 740 are displayed.

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. will be stopped. It should be noted that the decorative pattern 700 displayed at this time corresponds to the sequence of numbers that are finalized and stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Similarly to the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444". Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is shown as a stage image 706. The third stage is a stage corresponding to the normal time saving gaming state. Also, at this time, a second right-handed hit image 725 and a normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "100 times" indicating the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the normal time saving game state is displayed as the normal time saving remaining number image 726. Moreover, “4” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “0” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Note that neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Note that the time from when the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero is displayed (see FIG. 171 (16)) until the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state is, for example, 150 seconds.

As described above, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero is temporarily stopped, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode does not become visible to the player. In this case, by making the change in display mode from the unfinished display mode of the pending image 702 difficult or impossible for the player to see, the pending image 702 can be displayed while the decorative pattern 700 on the number zero is temporarily stopped. 702 is prevented from attracting too much attention to the player, and the player can focus on the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 while the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero is temporarily stopped, the winning sound is not output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 45 and not paying attention to the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
However, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero is temporarily stopped, the stage display performance is executed, and the pending image 702 of each stage is displayed to the player. It may be in a state where it is visible or easily visible. Moreover, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 while the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero is temporarily stopped, the winning sound may be output.

In addition, in this embodiment, a suggestive effect (displaying the number of executions image 705, displaying the remaining number of times reached image 708, displaying a countdown image 732 to be described later) that suggests the time when the special time-saving gaming state may occur is executed. It is possible, and during a predetermined loss fluctuation performance (no reach loss), there is an execution period in which the suggestion performance is executed, but there is no non-execution period in which the suggestion performance is not executed, and during the jackpot fluctuation performance, the suggestion performance is executed. There is an execution period (before the SP ready-to-win performance) in which the suggestive performance is not executed, and a non-execution period (during the SP ready-to-win performance, during the SPSP ready-to-win performance). Therefore, while making the player expect that the special time-saving gaming state will occur due to the suggestion performance, during the jackpot fluctuation performance, there is a non-execution period in which the suggestion performance is not executed, so that the player's consciousness can be focused on the fluctuation performance, It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect (display of the number of executions image 705, display of the remaining number of times reached image 708, display of a countdown image 732 to be described later) that suggests the time when the special time-saving gaming state may occur. During the first reach variation performance (reach performance), there is an execution period in which the suggestion performance is executed, but there is no non-execution period in which the suggestion performance is not executed, and the second reach variation performance has a higher expectation than the first reach variation performance. During (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), there is an execution period (before SP reach performance) in which the suggestion performance is executed, and a non-execution period (during SP performance, during SPSP reach performance) in which the suggestion performance is not executed. Therefore, while creating expectations that a special time-saving gaming state will occur due to the suggestion effect, during the second reach variation effect, which has a higher level of expectation than the first reach variation effect, there is a non-execution period in which the suggestion effect is not executed. It is possible to concentrate the player's consciousness on the performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, during the jackpot fluctuation performance in which the suggestion performance is executed, a period in which the suggestion performance is not executed can occur multiple times (during the development performance, SPSP reach performance, etc.). Further, during the jackpot fluctuation performance in which the suggestion performance is executed, the period in which the suggestion performance is executed can occur multiple times (before the SP reach performance, after the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 700 of the zero, etc.).

Further, during the specific reach-and-loss fluctuation performance in which the suggestion performance is executed, a period in which the suggestion performance is not executed can occur multiple times (during the development performance, SPSP reach, etc.). In addition, during the specific reach-and-loss variation performance in which the suggestion performance is performed, the period in which the suggestion performance is performed can occur multiple times (before the reach performance, after the temporary stop of the three decorative symbols 700, etc.).

Note that even while the development performance, SP reach performance, and SPSP reach performance are being executed, the display of the number of executions image 705 and the remaining number of arrivals image 708 may be continued. Even in this case, the pending image 702 is not displayed while the development effect, SP reach effect, and SPSP reach effect are being executed. That is, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect (displaying the number of executions image 705, displaying the remaining number of times reached image 708, displaying a countdown image 732 to be described later, etc.) that suggests the time when the special time-saving gaming state may occur. During a specific performance (development performance, SP/SPSP reach, etc.) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game, the pending icon is not displayed, but the time-saving suggestion performance b can continue to be executed. In this case, it is possible to make people expect that a special time-saving game state will occur due to the suggestive performance, and to make them aware of the occurrence of a special time-saving game state even during the specific performance, so that even if the specific performance is executed and it fails, Even if such a game occurs, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of dissatisfaction and improve the interest of the game.
Further, the suggestion performance is executed a predetermined period before the special time-saving game state occurs (before a predetermined variation). Furthermore, there are multiple types of suggestive effects.

Furthermore, when the normal time saving game state is to be entered, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (display of the normal time saving start image 724) that confirms that the normal time saving game state will be in advance.

(Variable effect example 6)
FIG. 173 and FIG. 174 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variation performance example 6 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on the game ball winning in the second starting port 47 in the normal time saving game state. In addition, variation performance example 6 is a variation performance example in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the reach performance is not executed. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variable performance example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 173(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the first image display device 70 displays a decorative symbol 700 with low decorativeness and a small symbol 704 due to the production symbol 130m. has been permanently suspended. Also, at this time, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, the second right-handed image 725, and the remaining number of normal time saving images 726 are displayed. Further, “0” is shown in the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “0” is shown in the hold number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as a stage image 706. Further, the number of executions image 705 shows the text "10 GAME", and the remaining number of normal time saving images 726 shows the text "90 times".
Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first embodiment. Furthermore, although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, when a game ball enters the second start opening 47, as shown in FIG. 173(2), the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "89 times". Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the audio output device 9 starts outputting a winning sound that notifies the winning of the second starting port 47. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, in the normal time saving game state, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 may not be performed. That is, in the normal time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 700 may be displayed in a high-speed variable manner as soon as the variable starts.
Further, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 may be the same sound as the winning sound for notifying the winning to the first starting port 45, or may be a different sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(3), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display performance is completed, and the triangular pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 173(2). Moreover, the display mode of this pending image 702 is a display mode according to the third stage. Moreover, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is continuously outputted until the staged display performance is completed, and when the staged display performance is completed, it is no longer output. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(4), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0".

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 173(5). Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Further, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(6), the staged display effect is completed, and the triangular pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 173(5). Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (7), the three decorative patterns 700 and the small pattern 704 "412" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "11 GAME".

As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a suggestion effect (display of the number of executions image 705, display of the remaining number of times reached image 708, display of the countdown image 732 to be described later, etc.) that suggests the time when the special time-saving gaming state may occur. ) can be executed, and during the variable performance that is executed in the normal gaming state, there is an execution period in which the suggestion performance is executed (before the SP reach performance) and a non-execution period in which the suggestion performance is not performed (during the SP performance, before the SP SP reach performance). During the variable performance executed in a specific game state (time-saving game state), there is no execution period in which the suggestion performance is executed, but there is a non-execution period in which the suggestion performance is not executed. Therefore, while making the player expect that the special time-saving game state will occur due to the suggestion performance, by not executing the suggestion performance in the specific game state, it is possible to concentrate the player's consciousness on the performance in the specific game state, and increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

(Stage display effect using triangular pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a staged display effect using the triangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a triangular pending image 702 in a normal display mode.
The triangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of staged display performance. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47, first, as shown in FIG. 175(1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, a highly transparent pending image 702 is displayed in white. This retained image 702 has a triangular shape with the upper part missing. Moreover, the upper part of this pending image 702 is displayed on the pending pedestal 702P, and the lower part is displayed below the pending pedestal 702P. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 173(2) and FIG. 173(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(2), as the second stage of the staged display effect, a suspended image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the first stage is displayed. This retained image 702 has a triangular shape. Further, this pending image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed higher than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 175(3), as the third stage of the stage display effect, a suspended image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage, and is displayed higher than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(4), as the fourth stage of the stage display effect, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 is displayed with a larger display size than the third stage. Further, the entire pending image 702 is displayed on a pending pedestal 702P. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 173(3) and FIG. 173(6). That is, although not shown, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 173(2) and 173(5) is displayed, the suspended image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIGS. 173(3) and 173(6) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect until the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect using the held image 702 in the triangular normal display mode is 0. .2 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 175(5), the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. The triangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode periodically moves up and down as an action effect. The period of vertical movement in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds. That is, the cycle of the motion performance by the pending image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal time saving gaming state is the same cycle as the cycle of the motion production by the pending image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal gaming state.

(Variable effect example 7)
FIGS. 176 to 181 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 to 181, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 7) will be described. Variable performance example 7 includes a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 47 in the normal time-saving gaming state, a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 47 in the normal gaming state, and a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 47 in the normal gaming state. A variable performance based on winning in the starting opening 45 is included. Further, in variation performance example 7, variation performance is performed six times. The first variable presentation among these six variable presentations is a variable presentation based on winning in the second start opening 47 in the normal time saving gaming state. Further, the second to fourth variable presentations among the six variable presentations are variable presentations based on winnings in the second start opening 47 in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the fifth and sixth variable presentations among the six variable presentations are variable presentations based on winnings in the first starting opening 45 in the normal gaming state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 176(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 130m determines and stops the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 on the first image display device 70. has been done. Also, at this time, four pending images 702, an execution number image 705, a stage image 706, a second right hit image 725, and a normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 are displayed. Further, “4” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the fourth stage is shown as a stage image 706. The fourth stage is a stage corresponding to the normal time saving gaming state, and is a different stage from the third stage. The fourth stage is a stage that is set when mode "B" is selected in the normal time saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 172 (21)). Furthermore, the display mode of the four pending images 702 is a display mode according to the fourth stage, and is the same display mode as the pending image 702 in the normal display mode displayed in the third stage. Moreover, the text "99 GAME" is shown in the number of executions image 705, and the text "1 time" is shown in the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Furthermore, although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "3".
Next, as shown in FIG. 176(3), the left decorative pattern 700 "4" is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 176(4), the right decorative symbol 700 "4" is temporarily stopped and the ready-to-win effect is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(5), the SP reach effect is executed. That is, in the normal time saving game state, the SP ready-to-win performance is executed without the development performance being executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background that corresponds to the SP ready-to-win performance and is different from that during the execution of the SP ready-to-win performance in the normal gaming state.
Incidentally, even in the normal time saving game state, the SP reach effect may be executed after the development effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(6), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays a background that corresponds to the SPSP ready-to-win effect and is different from that during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect in the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(7), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, the number "5" which is the medium decorative pattern 700 temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 177(8).

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(9), a switching image 727 is displayed. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the execution number image 705, the stage image 706, and the normal time saving remaining number image 726 are in a state where they are difficult or invisible to the player. . On the other hand, the pending number display 703, the small symbol 704, and the second right-hitting image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (10), when the switching image 727 is hidden, the temporary stop display of "454", which is the three decorative patterns 700, becomes easily visible to the player. . Further, the fluctuation image 701, the pending image 702, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of normal time saving images 726 are easily visible to the player.
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "454" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 177 (11). Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden. Furthermore, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "100 GAME". Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(12), a first transition image 728 is displayed. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the number of executions image 705, and the stage image 706 are in a state where they are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small symbols 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. In addition, the second right-hand hitting image 725 and the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 are hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (13), a result image 729 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (14), the small symbol 704 starts to fluctuate as the next special symbol begins to fluctuate. This variation is a variation based on winning in the second starting port 47 in the normal gaming state. Further, in this variation, the decorative pattern 700 is not displayed. That is, in this variation, a variation effect is performed using the small pattern 704 without using the decorative pattern 700. Further, in this variation, the variation image 701 and the pending image 702 are not displayed. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "2".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 704 "721" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 178 (15).

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (16), the small symbol 704 starts to fluctuate as the next special symbol begins to fluctuate. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "1".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 704 are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 178 (17). The combination "658" of this small symbol 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (18), the small symbol 704 starts to fluctuate as the next special symbol begins to fluctuate. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 704 "421" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 179 (19).

Then, when the variable performance based on the winning at the second starting opening 47 ends in a state where there is no reservation based on the winning at the second starting opening 47, the first image display device 70 is displayed as shown in FIG. 179 (20). , "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 700, is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of decorative patterns 700 and the combination of small patterns 704 match. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is shown as a stage image 706. The fifth stage is a stage corresponding to the normal gaming state, and is a stage different from any of the first stage to the fourth stage. Also, at this time, an execution count image 705 and a left-handed hit image 730 are displayed. The number of executions image 705 shows the text "100 GAME" including the number of new variable performances performed after the number of variable displays of the special symbol was reset. At this time, the number shown in the execution number image 705 is the number of variable performances performed after the gaming machine 1 was controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the first mode. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice saying "Please return to left-handed hitting."

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed with no winnings entered into the first start opening 45, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 179 (21). Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first mode to the fifth mode.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 179 (22), the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to fluctuate as the special symbols begin to be displayed. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, a staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position upwardly away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (23), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Further, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the square-shaped pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 179 (22). Further, this pending image 702 has a display mode according to the fifth stage. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (24), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Further, although not shown in the drawings, while the variable effect is being executed, BGM corresponding to the variable effect being executed is continuously outputted from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 180 (25). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position upwardly away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (26), the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 is normally displayed on the first pending pedestal 702P in a display size larger than the example shown in FIG. 180 (25). Displayed depending on the mode. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, after the three decorative patterns 700 temporarily stop, the three decorative patterns 700 finally stop as shown in FIG. 180 (27) as the special pattern stops changing. The combination "712" of the decorative symbols 700 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 704 "712" also come to a fixed stop. Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "101 GAME". Also, at this time, a remaining number of arrivals image 708 is displayed. The remaining number of times reached image 708 shows the text “399 remaining”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (28), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the number of reservations display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0".
Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (29), a second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small symbols 704 continue to be easily visible to the player. Further, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. On the other hand, the suspended image 702 continues to be difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the audio output device 9 outputs a winning sound that notifies the player of winning the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect indicating that the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. That is, the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound and the sound effect at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (30), the second eye-catching image 731 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700, the fluctuation image 701, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of arrivals image 708 are displayed. It becomes a state where it is easily visible to the person. As the stage image 706, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown. Also, at this time, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. That is, the pending image 702 of each stage in the stage display effect is not visible to the player, and the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is easily visible to the player.

Next, after the three decorative symbols 700 temporarily stop, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "412" come to a fixed stop as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 181 (31). . Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "102 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of runs image 708 is updated to "398 remaining".

As described above, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode will not become visible to the player. , the pending image 702 in the completed display mode becomes easily visible to the player. In this way, by not allowing the player to visually recognize the change in the display mode from the unfinished display mode of the pending image 702, the pending image 702 may draw too much attention to the player while the second eye-catching image 731 is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the stage is changed.
Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 while the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed, a winning sound notifying the winning in the first starting port 45 is output. Therefore, even if the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player, the player can be made aware that the game ball has entered the first start opening 45.

Although it has been explained that in the normal time saving game state, when the pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the pending image 702 is the same regardless of the stage, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal time saving game state, when the pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode, the display mode of the pending image 702 may be different for each stage.

(Stage display effect using square-shaped pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a staged display effect using the square-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a square-shaped pending image 702 in a normal display mode.
The square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode performs three stages of staged display performance. When a game ball enters the first starting port 45, first, as shown in FIG. 182(1), as the first stage of the staged display performance, a highly transparent pending image 702 is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a rectangular shape extending left and right. Further, this pending image 702 is displayed at a position upwardly away from the pending pedestal 702P. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 179 (22) and FIG. 180 (25).

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(2), as the second stage of the staged display effect, a square-shaped reserved image 702 with lower transparency than the first stage is displayed in a square shape. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 182(3), in the third stage of the stage display effect, that is, as the final stage, a pending image 702 whose transparency is lower than that in the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than the second stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 179 (23) and FIG. 180 (26). That is, although not shown, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 179 (22) and 180 (25) is displayed, the suspended image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 179 (23) and FIG. 180 (26) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect until the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect using the square-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode is 0. .2 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 182(4), the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. The square-shaped reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically performs an action of making a half turn clockwise and then making a half turn counterclockwise as an action effect. The rotation period in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Variable effect example 8)
183 to 185 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 8) will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185. Variation performance example 8 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on a game ball winning in the second starting port 47 in the normal time saving game state. Further, the example 8 of variable effects includes four variable effects. Of these four variable performances, the first to third variable performances are variable performances in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loser. Moreover, the fourth variable presentation among the four variable presentations is a variable presentation in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, in the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variable performance examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each of the variable performance examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 183(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 130m determines and stops the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 on the first image display device 70. has been done. Also, at this time, three pending images 702 are displayed in the normal display mode. Further, at this time, "3" is shown in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Moreover, the text "50 GAME" is shown in the number of executions image 705, and the text "50 times" is shown in the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the fourth stage is shown as a stage image 706. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Furthermore, although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "2". Further, at this time, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "49 times".

Next, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, "3" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 183(3). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed on the third pending pedestal 702P. This third reserved image 702 shows a triangular portion and a lightning bolt mark. Moreover, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 to notify the winning to the second starting port 47 is started. This winning sound is different from any of the winning sounds described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(4), the staged display effect is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed on the third reserved pedestal 702P. This third reserved image 702 consists of a triangular portion displayed in rainbow colors and a circular portion surrounding the triangular shape. Note that this third pending image 702 is a pending image 702 that is displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the third pending image 702 is started. Further, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is no longer output when a predetermined time has elapsed after the completion of the staged display effect. This predetermined time is, for example, 2.5 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "412" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 183(5). Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "51 GAME". Although not shown in the drawings, while the fluctuating performance is being executed, BGM corresponding to the fluctuating performance being executed is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(6), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "2". Further, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "48 times".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "721" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 184 (7). Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 705 is updated to "52 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(8), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "1". Further, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "47 times".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "563" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 184(9). Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 705 is updated to "53 GAME".

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (10), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0". Further, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "46 times". Furthermore, the first pending image 702 moves toward the variable pedestal 701P and is enlarged, so that a rainbow-colored variable image 701 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (11), a reach promotion effect is executed. The reach promotion performance is a performance that stimulates whether or not the reach performance will be executed. In the illustrated example, after the left decorative pattern 700 "7" temporarily stops, the right decorative pattern 700 "7" is swung up and down, thereby inciting whether or not the reach effect will be executed. is being carried out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (12), the right decorative symbol 700 "7" is temporarily stopped and the ready-to-win effect is started. Also, at this time, a sound effect indicating that "7", which is the left and right decorative patterns 700, are aligned is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (13), the SP reach effect is executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 712 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (15), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, a jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 185 (16). During execution of this jackpot notification, a movable effect is executed and a second emphasized image 718 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the pending image 702, the execution count image 705, the stage image 706, and the normal time saving remaining count image 726 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. do. Further, the pending number display 703, the small symbol 704, and the second right-handed image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player. Furthermore, when the jackpot notification performance is executed, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up in red, the board lamp 74b lights up in orange, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in yellow, and the button lamp 17c lights up in green. Moreover, when the jackpot notification effect is being executed, the sound effect of the jackpot notification effect is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the jackpot notification effect is finished and the second emphasized image 718 is hidden, the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero "777" temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 185 (17). Also, at this time, the execution count image 705 and the normal time saving remaining count image 726 are redisplayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b lights up in orange, the board lamp 74b lights up in yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in green, and the button lamp 17c lights up in blue.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 185 (18). Moreover, "777" is fixed and stopped as the small pattern 704. In other words, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are displayed in a matching combination of "777". Also, at this time, the display content of the execution number image 705 is updated to "54 GAME". Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b lights up in yellow, the board lamp 74b lights up in green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up in deep blue.

Further, although not shown in the drawings, a jackpot game is subsequently executed in the same way as in variable performance example 6. That is, after the opening image 719 (see FIG. 171 (18)) is displayed, the first right-hand hit image 720 and the promotion image 721 (see FIG. 172 (19)) are displayed. Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an in-round image 722 and a round number image 723 (see FIG. 172 (20)) are displayed, and when the final round ends, a normal time saving selection image 745 (see FIG. 172 (21)) is displayed, and then the normal time saving start image 724 (see FIG. 172 (22)) is displayed. In addition, the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the normal time saving game state becomes 100 (see FIG. 172 (23)).

(Stage display effect using rainbow-colored pending image 702)
Next, a staged display effect using the rainbow-colored pending image 702 will be explained. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a staged display effect using a rainbow-colored pending image 702.
The rainbow-colored pending image 702 performs four stages of staged display performance. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47, first, as shown in FIG. 186(1), as the first step of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 with low transparency is displayed in white on the pending pedestal 702P. . This reserved image 702 has a triangular shape. Furthermore, in the first stage of the staged display effect, an action display using the pending image 702 is performed. More specifically, a lightning bolt mark is displayed in a triangular shape in the pending image 702 so that it appears to fall. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the third pending image 702 shown in FIG. 183(3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(2), as the second stage of the staged display effect, a circular image with high transparency is newly displayed on the reserved image 702. This circular image is shown surrounding a triangular portion of the retained image 702.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186(3), as the third stage of the staged display effect, the circular image in the reserved image 702 is displayed with lower transparency than the second stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 186(4), in the fourth stage of the staged display effect, that is, the final stage, the circular image in the reserved image 702 is displayed with lower transparency than in the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the third pending image 702 shown in FIG. 183(4). That is, although not shown, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIG. 183(3) is displayed, the suspended image 702 in the second stage of the stage display effect is displayed, and then the stage display A pending image 702 in the third stage of presentation is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 183(4) is displayed.
In this way, as the stages in the staged display effect progress, only the transparency of a part of the pending image 702 may change. Such a change in only the transparency of a part of the held image 702 can also be regarded as a change in the form of the held image 702. In addition, in this embodiment, the time from the start of this staged display performance until the completed display mode is reached, that is, the execution time of the staged display performance using the rainbow-colored pending image 702 is 0.5 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 186(5), the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. The rainbow-colored pending image 702 periodically rotates in the clockwise direction as an action effect. The period of rotation in this motion performance is, for example, 3.0 seconds. In other words, the period of motion presentation using the rainbow-colored pending image 702 is longer than the period of motion presentation using the pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
In addition, in the motion effect using the rainbow-colored pending image 702, the triangular portion may rotate periodically in the clockwise direction, and the circular portion may rotate periodically in the counterclockwise direction. In this case, the cycles of each operation may be the same cycle or different cycles.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution time of the staged display effect using the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is longer than the execution time of the staged display effect using the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. In this case, by allowing the player to enjoy the feeling of anticipation of displaying the pending image 702, which has a higher level of expectation than in the normal display mode, for a longer time, the player can experience a feeling of elation when the pending image 702, which has a higher level of expectation, is displayed. can be given to the player.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode differs depending on the stage. Here, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode may differ depending on the stage, similarly to the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode. On the other hand, the rainbow-colored pending image 702 may be displayed in the same manner regardless of the stage. In this case, the staged display effect using the rainbow-colored pending image 702 may be performed in either the staged display effect using the held image 702 in the normal display mode at each stage, or the staged display effect using the blue held image 702 at each stage. There may be operation displays that are not displayed (see FIG. 186(1)). In this case, the staged display effect allows the rainbow-colored pending image 702 to make the player feel more strongly that it is rare.
Furthermore, the rainbow-colored pending image 702 has a higher display mode in the staged display effect than the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode and the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode consisting of specific colors (blue, green, red, etc.). There may be many stages of change.

(Example 9 of variable effects)
FIGS. 187 to 192 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 9) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 187 to 192. Variable performance example 9 includes seven variable performances. The first variable presentation among these seven variable presentations is a variable presentation based on winning in the first start opening 45 in the normal gaming state. Further, the second variable performance is a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 45 in the special time saving game state. Further, the third and fourth variable presentations are variable presentations based on winnings in the second start opening 47 in the special time saving game state. Further, the fifth to seventh variable presentations are variable presentations based on winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 in the normal gaming state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 187(1), the decoration pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m as the variation of the previous special pattern is completed. ing. Also, at this time, four pending images 702 are displayed. Also, at this time, "4" is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Furthermore, the number-of-executions image 705 shows the text “499 GAME”, and the remaining number-of-achievement image 708 shows the text “1 more to go”. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Furthermore, although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Further, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "3". Also, at this time, "1", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "421" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 187(3). Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "500 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of runs image 708 is updated to "0 to go". That is, the number of executed variable performances reaches the number of variable performances required before entering the special time saving game state. As a result, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, which has been in the normal gaming state, is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(4), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Further, the number of reservations display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "2". Also, at this time, a second right-handed image 725 is displayed. Also, at this time, "0", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "3" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 187(5). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the third pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187(6), the staged display performance is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third pending pedestal 702P. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(7), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(8), display of the second transition image 734 is started. More specifically, the second transition image 734 is displayed so as to slide from the right side to the left side on the first image display device 70, so that the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70. 2 transition image 734 is now displayed. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 700 that is changing at high speed, the third pending image 702, the execution number image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 continues to be visible or easily visible to the player. Further, in the second pending image 702 and the stage image 706, the portion that does not overlap with the second transition image 734 is visible or easily visible to the player, and the portion that overlaps with the second transition image 734 is visible to the player. become difficult or invisible to others. Further, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the first pending image 702, and the variable image 701 are in a state where they are difficult or invisible to the player. Furthermore, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is displayed, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, and the second right-handed image 725 are easily visible to the player. continue in a state. Also, at this time, the motion effect by the second pending image 702 and the third pending image 702 is being executed, and the motion display of the second pending image 702 and the third pending image 702 is displayed to the player. Visible or easily visible. Note that the time from when the variable effect is started until the second transition image 734 is displayed is, for example, 5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(9), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70. At this time, the left decorative pattern 700, the third pending image 702, the second pending image 702, the number of executions image 705, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are also in a state where they are difficult or invisible to the player. . Further, at this time, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "4" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. On the other hand, the fourth pending image 702 is in a state where it is difficult or invisible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(10), a special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the first image display device 70 displays "125", which is a decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness. is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as a stage image 706. The sixth stage is a stage corresponding to the special time saving game state. Also, at this time, a third right-hand hitting image 737 and a special time saving remaining number of times image 738 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the special time saving remaining number image 738 shows the text "749" indicating the remaining number of special symbol lottery in the special time saving game state. In addition, “4” is shown in the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “0” is shown in the hold number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Note that neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, a voice urging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side in the game area 5a, such as "Please hit to the right," may be outputted from the voice output device 9.
Further, the display period of the second transition image 734 is, for example, 10 seconds.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 189 (13). The combination "125" of the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 189 (14), the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. At this time, the movement at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Also, at this time, the display content of the special time saving remaining number of times image 738 is updated to "748". Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Also, at this time, the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position upwardly away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the audio output device 9 starts outputting a winning sound that notifies the second starting port 47 of winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (15), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display performance is completed, and the trapezoidal pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 189 (14). Further, this pending image 702 has a display mode according to the sixth stage. Moreover, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is continuously outputted until the staged display performance is completed, and when the staged display performance is completed, it is no longer output. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (16), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0".

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 189 (17). Also, at this time, a staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size at a position upwardly away from the first reserved pedestal 702P. In addition, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (18), the staged display effect is completed, and the trapezoidal pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 189 (17). Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 190 (19), the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "463" are fixedly displayed and stopped.
In this way, each time a variable performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the special time-saving gaming state decreases, and the value shown in the special time-saving remaining number image 738 is subtracted by 1. Ru.

Then, when the 750th variable performance is started in the special time saving game state, the decorative symbols 700 and small symbols are displayed in a variable manner at high speed, as shown in FIG. 190 (20). Further, at this time, the text “0” is shown in the special time saving remaining number image 738. Further, the number of reservations display 703 of the first starting port 45 shows "4", and the number of reservations display 703 of the second starting port 47 shows "3". Also, at this time, a variable image 701 and three pending images 702 are displayed. Furthermore, the stage image 706 shows a background corresponding to the sixth stage.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "254" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 190 (21). Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden. Further, when the special symbols stop changing, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 which has been in the special time saving gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (22), a first transition image 728 is displayed. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, and the stage image 706 are in a state in which they are difficult or invisible to the player. In addition, the second right-hand hitting image 725 and the special time saving remaining number of times image 738 are hidden. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the small symbols 704 continue to be easily visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190 (23), the small symbol 704 starts to fluctuate as the next special symbol begins to fluctuate. This variation is a variation based on winning in the second starting port 47 in the normal gaming state. Further, in this variation, the decorative pattern 700 is not displayed. That is, in this variation, a variation effect is performed using the small pattern 704 without using the decorative pattern 700. Further, in this variation, the variation image 701 and the pending image 702 are not displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "2". Note that at this time, the result image 729 (see FIG. 178 (13)) is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 704 are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 191 (24). The combination "755" of this small symbol 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (25), the small symbol 704 starts to fluctuate as the next special symbol begins to fluctuate. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "1".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 704 are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 191 (26). The combination "127" of this small symbol 704 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (27), the small symbol 704 starts to fluctuate as the next special symbol begins to fluctuate. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 704 "421" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 191 (28).

Then, when the variable performance based on the winning at the second starting opening 47 ends without reservation based on the winning at the second starting opening 47, the first image display device 70 is displayed as shown in FIG. 191 (29). , "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 700, is fixed and stopped. That is, the combination of decorative patterns 700 and the combination of small patterns 704 match. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is shown as a stage image 706. Also, at this time, an execution count image 705 and a left-handed hit image 730 are displayed. The number of executions image 705 shows the number of new variable presentations performed after the number of variable displays of the special symbol was reset, that is, the number of variable presentations based on winnings in the first starting hole 45 in the normal gaming state. 500 times, 1 time which is the number of variable presentations based on winnings to the first starting port 45 in the special time saving gaming state, and one time which is the number of variable presentations based on winnings to the second starting port 47 in the special time saving gaming state. The text "1253 GAME" is shown, which includes the total value of 749 times and 3 times, which is the number of variable performances based on winnings in the second start opening 47 in the normal gaming state. Also, at this time, four pending images 702 are displayed. These four pending images 702 include three pending images 702 (see FIG. 187(3)) that were displayed immediately before the gaming machine 1 was controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, all of the four pending images 702 are performing motion effects. On the other hand, the fluctuation image 701 is not displayed. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice saying "Please return to left-handed hitting."

Next, with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary, as shown in FIG. 192 (30). Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "3". Also, at this time, the second pending image 702, the third pending image 702, and the fourth pending image 702 are placed on the first pending pedestal 702P, the second pending pedestal 702P, and the third pending pedestal 702P, respectively. move towards. Further, the first pending image 702 moves toward the variable pedestal 701P and is enlarged, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Although illustration is omitted, thereafter, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable image 701 becomes hidden.
In this way, when the gaming machine 1 that was in the normal gaming state is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state and then controlled to the normal gaming state again, the suspended image that was displayed when it was controlled to the special time-saving gaming state 702 (see FIG. 187(4)) is redisplayed when the normal gaming state is controlled again.

In addition, in the variable performance example 9, it has been explained that the second transition image 734 is displayed during the high-speed fluctuation (scrolling) of the decorative symbol 700 in the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second transition image 734 may be displayed when the first variable performance in the special time saving game state is started. Further, the second transition image 734 may be displayed immediately before the special time-saving game state, that is, when the final fluctuating performance in the normal game state stops. In this case, the time from when the second transition image 734 is displayed until the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is, for example, 10 seconds.

In addition, although it has been explained in the variation effect example 9 that the result image 729 (see FIG. 178 (13)) is not displayed when the first transition image 728 is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this.
Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time saving gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state without becoming a jackpot, the result image 729 may be displayed while the first transition image 728 is being displayed. .

(Stage display effect using trapezoidal pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a staged display effect using the trapezoidal pending image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a trapezoidal pending image 702 in a normal display mode.
The trapezoidal pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of staged display performance. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47, first, as shown in FIG. 193(1), as the first step of the staged display effect, a highly transparent pending image is placed upwardly away from the pending pedestal 702P. 702 is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a square shape. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 189 (14) and FIG. 189 (17).

Next, as shown in FIG. 193(2), as the second stage of the staged display effect, a pending image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the second stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 has a trapezoidal shape. Furthermore, this pending image 702 has a larger display size than the first stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 193(3), as the third stage of the stage display effect, a pending image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the second stage is displayed. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the second stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 193(4), as the fourth stage of the stage display effect, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 having lower transparency than the third stage is displayed. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the third stage, and is displayed at a position closer to the pending pedestal 702P than the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 189 (15) and FIG. 189 (18). That is, although not shown, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 189 (14) and 189 (17) is displayed, the suspended image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIG. 189 (15) and FIG. 189 (18) is displayed.
In this embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect to the display of the pending image 702 in the completed display mode, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect using the suspended image 702 in the trapezoidal normal display mode is 0. .2 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 193(5), the motion effect of the holding pedestal 702 is started. The trapezoidal reserved image 702 in the normal display mode periodically moves left and right as an action effect. The period of movement to the left and right in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds. In other words, the cycle of the motion performance by the pending image 702 in the normal display mode in the special time saving gaming state is the same as the cycle of the motion production by the pending image 702 in the normal display mode in the normal time saving gaming state, and the pending image in the normal display mode in the normal gaming state. This is the same cycle as the motion production cycle in 702.

FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 9.
As shown in FIG. 194, at time T1 in variable performance example 9, the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state is started. At this time, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 have started to change, and the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 are easily visible to the player. Further, at this time, the variable image 701 and the two pending images 702 are performing an action effect, and the variable image 701 and the two pending images 702 are in a state that is easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the variable performance that is being executed is being output from the audio output device 9. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 187(4).

Thereafter, at time T2, a game ball enters the first starting port 45.
Thereafter, at time T3, the third pending image 702 is displayed in the display mode in the first stage of the staged display effect, and the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is visible or easily visible to the player. become. Moreover, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 to notify the winning to the first starting port 45 is started. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 187(5).
Thereafter, the staged display effect using the third pending image 702 progresses, and at time T4, the staged display effect ends and the third held image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode. Also, at this time, the motion effect using the third pending image 702 is started. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 187(6).
Thereafter, at time T5, the winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, and at time T6, the display of the second transition image 734 is started.
Thereafter, when the display area of the second transition image 734 on the first display device 70 becomes larger, at time T7, the left decorative pattern 700 is visible or easily visible to the player, while the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are visible or easily visible to the player. The decorative pattern 700 becomes difficult or invisible to the player. Furthermore, at this time, the variable image 701 is in a state where it is difficult or impossible to see for the player. Further, at this time, the third pending image 702 is visible or easily visible to the player. Further, at this time, while a part of the second pending image 702 is visible or easily visible to the player, another part of the second pending image 702 is visible to the player. Become difficult or invisible. Further, the first pending image 702 is in a state where it is difficult or invisible to the player. Further, at this time, a part of the stage image 706 is visible or easily visible to the player, while another part of the stage image 706 is difficult to see or invisible to the player. Become. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 188(8).

Thereafter, when the second transition image 734 is displayed entirely on the first display device 70, at time T8, the three decorative patterns 700 become difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden. Further, at this time, all three pending images 702 are in a state where they are difficult or invisible to the player. Further, at this time, the entire stage image 706 becomes difficult or invisible to the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in FIG. 188(9).

Thereafter, at time T9, when the second transition image 734 is hidden, the three decorative symbols 700 are temporarily stopped, and the three decorative symbols 700 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. Become. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as a stage image 706. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 188 (12).
Thereafter, at time T10, the first variable performance in the special time saving game state ends. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped. The state at time T10 is the state shown in FIG. 189 (13).

Thereafter, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state, the first transition image 728 becomes hidden and the four pending images 702 become easily visible at time T11. These four held images 702 include all held images 702 that were difficult to view or invisible at time T8. Further, at this time, the pending image 702 executes an action effect. The state at time T11 is the state shown in FIG. 191 (29).
Thereafter, at time T12, the next variable performance is started. The state at time T12 is the state shown in FIG. 192 (30).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the main control board 110 can be controlled into the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode. The first mode includes, for example, a normal gaming state. Further, as the second mode, for example, a special time saving game state can be mentioned. In this embodiment, when the first variable effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is displayed, the effect control board 130 controls the operation display of the pending image 702 in the first variable effect. The operation display of the decorative pattern 700 is made difficult or impossible to see and then made visible without being made easy to see. The action display of the pending image 702 includes, for example, an action display in an action effect. In addition, examples of the motion display of the decorative pattern 700 include a fluctuating motion and a temporary stop motion display.
In this case, after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state, the performance of the pending image 702 that has been executed before the start of the first variable performance is prevented from still being noticed by the player, and the special time-saving performance is prevented from drawing attention to the player. It is possible to easily draw the player's attention to the movement display of the decorative pattern 700 that is unique to the game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the first variable effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is being displayed, the effect control board 130 makes it difficult to see the pending image 702 after the start of the first variable effect. Alternatively, it is possible to make it invisible and start the next variable effect after the first variable effect before making the pending image 702 easily visible.
In this case, at the start of the next variable performance after the first variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state, the player still focuses on the performance of the pending image 702 that had been executed before the start of the first variable performance. This makes it possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the variable performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control board 130 controls, when the first variable effect in the second mode is started while the held image 702 is displayed, the held image 702 is difficult to see or difficult to see in the first variable effect. Instead of making the decorative pattern 700 invisible and then making it easy to see, the decorative pattern 700 is made difficult to see or made invisible and then made easy to see.
In this case, after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state, the effect of the pending image 702 that has been executed before the start of the first variable performance is prevented from still being noticed by the player, and the special time-saving It is possible to easily draw the attention of the player to the performance using the decorative pattern 700 that is unique to the game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the performance control board 130 controls whether the small symbol 704 is difficult to see or Instead of making it invisible, the pending image 702 is made difficult or invisible.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state is started, it is possible to prevent the player from still focusing on the performance of the pending image 702 that has been executed until the start of the first variable performance. On the other hand, since the small pattern 704 continues to be visible or easily visible, the player can be aware that the fluctuating effect continues even when the pending image 702 becomes difficult to see or invisible. This makes it easier for the player to notice the variable performance unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the first variable effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 is displayed, the effect control board 130 controls whether the pending image 702 is difficult to see or not in the first variable effect. When a special performance is executed while a pending image 702 is displayed without making it invisible and then making it easy to see, the pending image 702 is made difficult to see or invisible and then made easy to see. Examples of the special performance include SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, and the like.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state is started, it is possible to prevent the player from still focusing on the performance of the pending image 702 that has been executed until the start of the first variable performance. On the other hand, when a special performance is executed, it is possible to perform a performance unique to the special performance using a wide display area including the display area of the pending image 702 on the first image display device 70. By making 702 easily visible again, the player can be made aware that the right to determine a jackpot has not been lost. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first variable effect in the second mode is started while the pending image 702 and the variable image 701 are displayed, the effect control board 130 controls the pending image 702 in the first variable effect. If the variable image 701 is made difficult or non-visible and then neither is made visible, and a special effect is executed while the pending image 702 and the variable image 701 are being displayed, the pending image 702 and the variable image 701 are Both the pending image 702 and the variable image 701 are made easily visible after being made difficult or impossible to see.
In this case, even if the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state is started, it is possible to prevent the player from still focusing on the performance of the pending image 702 that has been executed until the start of the first variable performance. On the other hand, when a special effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect unique to the special effect using a wide display area including the display area of the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 on the first image display device 70. At the same time, by making the pending image 702 easily visible again, the player can be made aware that the right to determine a jackpot has not been lost, and the fluctuating image 701 is again made easily visible. By doing so, when the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 are in a state where it is difficult to see or cannot be seen, the player can be made aware that the next variable effect has not started. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, once the display of the second transition image 734 is started, the display area of the second transition image 734 gradually becomes larger as time passes, so that some of the plurality of pending images 702 are visible to the player. On the other hand, it is easily visible, and the other part is invisible to the player. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the second transition image 734 is switched from not being displayed to a state in which the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70, the stage image 706 becomes hidden. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the pending image 702 exists while suppressing the sense of discomfort.

Further, when the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70, a part of the one pending image 702 is visible to the player, and this one Another part of the held image 702 is in a state where it is not visible to the player (see FIG. 188 (8)), and in this state, the action effect by this one held image 702 is executed. There is.
In this case, even if only a part of the pending image 702 is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the existence of the pending image 702.

Further, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the second transition image 734 is displayed, the pending image 702 is in a state that is difficult or invisible to the player, and the first starting port The winning sound notifying the winning number of 45 is not output. Therefore, in the special time-saving gaming state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 47, the player is prevented from being overly conscious of the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45, and in the special time-saving gaming state. It is possible to draw the attention of players to the unique performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (displaying the number of executions image 705, displaying the remaining number of times reached image 708, displaying the countdown image 732, etc.) that suggests the time when the special time-saving gaming state may occur. In the case of a jackpot, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect that confirms a jackpot in advance (a look-ahead effect such as displaying a rainbow-colored pending image 702 or a jackpot preview effect), and a special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the suggesting performance (pre-reading performance) that confirms that the special time-saving game state will be in advance (at least 2 fluctuations ago) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the special time-saving gaming state does not occur even though the suggesting performance that confirms the special time-saving gaming state has been executed, while increasing the interest of the game by the performance that confirms the jackpot. It becomes possible to improve the

In addition, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect (display of countdown image 732) that suggests the time when the special time-saving gaming state may occur, and the first period of the normal gaming state (before the start of displaying countdown image 732). , the execution probability of a suggestion effect that is certain to be a jackpot (display of a rainbow-colored pending image 702, etc.) is higher than the execution probability of a specific suggestion effect, and the second period of the normal gaming state (display of a countdown image 732) is higher than the execution probability of a specific suggestion effect. ), the probability of executing a specific suggestion effect is higher than the probability of executing a suggestion effect that is certain to be a jackpot. Here, "the execution probability of a suggestion performance that is certain to be a jackpot is higher than the execution probability of a specific suggestion performance" includes that the specific suggestion performance is not executed (0%). Furthermore, "the execution probability of a specific suggestion effect is higher than the execution probability of a suggestion effect that is certain to be a jackpot" includes that the specific suggestion effect is always executed (100%).

In addition, in variable performance example 9, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the gaming machine 1 is placed in the fifth stage, which is the same as when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. Although it has been explained that the settings are set, the invention is not limited to this. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, it may be controlled to the first stage. That is, it is possible to set a plurality of performance modes, and the performance mode set based on the end of the normal time-saving game state and the performance mode set based on the end of the special time-saving game state can be made different. In this case, by increasing the variety of presentations at the end of the time saving depending on the type of time saving, the presentation effect can be improved and the interest of the game can be increased.

Furthermore, as described above, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, the game shifts to the dedicated mode (fifth stage) after the end, and then shifts to the normal mode (first stage).
When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, even if it is controlled to the first stage, the left-handed game image 730 is displayed at the same display position as when it is controlled to the fifth stage. may be displayed. That is, left-handed notification when transitioning from either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state to the dedicated mode (fifth stage) after the end, and the normal time-saving game state from the other of the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state. The left-handed hit notification in the case of transition to the mode (first stage) is executed in the same notification mode.
When the normal time-saving game state ends, the result display (display of result image 729) is executed and then the mode shifts to the exclusive mode (fifth stage) after the end, and when the special time-saving game state ends, the result display is executed. Shift to normal mode (first stage) without
In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the normal time-saving gaming state ends (transfers to the normal gaming state) when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number, or when the number of small wins reaches the specified number (including 1). ). Here, even in the special time saving game state, when the number of small wins reaches a specified number of times (including one time), the game may be ended (shifted to the normal game state). Furthermore, if the number of fluctuations in the special time-saving gaming state reaches the specified number of times and the control is returned to the normal gaming state, the fifth stage is entered, and the number of small wins in the special time-saving gaming state reaches the specified number of times. If the game is controlled to the normal gaming state based on the above, the game may shift to the first stage. That is, it is possible to shift to different production modes depending on whether the special time-saving game state ends when the number of time-savings is reached and when the special time-saving game state ends when the number of small wins occurs.

In addition, in both cases where the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, and when it is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, winnings to the second starting port 47 are suspended. Although it has been described that the left-handed image 730 is displayed after the variable performance based on (remaining reservation) ends, the present invention is not limited to this. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, even before the end of the variable performance based on the reservation (remaining reservation) of winnings to the second starting port 47, the left-handed image 730 may be displayed. That is, when the first time saving (for example, special time saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-handed hitting notification (display of the left-handed hitting image 730, left-handed hitting sound) is issued after a predetermined period has elapsed (remaining reservations have been exhausted) from the end of the time saving. If the second time saving (normal time saving gaming state) ends, a predetermined left-handed notification (left-handed hitting image 730 (display, left-handed audio notification). In this case, by changing the timing of the left-handed notification depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to change the gameplay and improve the interest of the game.
In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, even before the end of the variable performance based on the reservation (remaining reservation) of winnings to the second starting port 47, the left A typing image 730 may be displayed.

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, after being controlled to the normal gaming state, the variable performance based on the reservation (remaining reservation) of winnings to the second starting opening 47 ends. When the left-handed image 730 is displayed until the left-handed image 730 is displayed, the display period of the left-handed image 730 differs depending on the number of executions of the variable effect based on the reservation (remaining reservation) of winnings to the second starting opening 47. That is, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, the length of the predetermined period for notifying the left-hand hit changes (changes according to the remaining number of reservations).
Further, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, left-handed notification may be performed even if the customer waits after the end. In addition, when either the normal time-saving gaming state or the special time-saving gaming state ends, execution of left-handed notification will be put on standby when the customer waiting state occurs after the end, and left-handed notification will be performed when the variable display starts. It's okay.
Moreover, the left-handed notification after the end of the normal time-saving game state and the left-handed notification after the end of the special time-saving game state may be performed in the same notification mode (notification image, notification period).

Further, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-handed hit image 730 is displayed after the variable performance based on the reservation (remaining reservation) of winnings to the second start opening 47 is completed. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the left-handed hitting image 730 is displayed at the time when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state (at the time when the fluctuation of the last round in the normal time-saving gaming state stops). Consider the case where a configuration is adopted where is displayed. In this case, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, the display timing of the left-handed image 730 differs depending on the number of remaining reservations, whereas the gaming machine 1 changes from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. When controlled to the normal gaming state, the display timing of the left-handed game image 730 does not change. That is, when the first time saving (for example, special time saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-handed notification (display of the left-handed game image 730, left If the second time saving (for example, the normal time saving game state) ends, a predetermined left hitting notification (display of the left hitting image 730, (Voice notification for left-handed players) is possible. Therefore, by changing the timing of the left-handed notification depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to change the gameplay and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when either the normal time saving gaming state or the special time saving gaming state ends, the execution timing of the left hit notification does not change depending on the remaining number of winnings to the first starting port 45 at the end of the time saving, It changes depending on the number of remaining reservations for winnings in the second starting port 47 at the end of the time saving.
In addition, the left-handed notification when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends is executed in the same notification manner regardless of the timing of execution.
Moreover, the left-handed notification after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state and the left-handed notification after the end of the special time-saving gaming state are executed in the same notification mode.

In addition, when the time saving (for example, special time saving game state) ends, a predetermined left-handed hitting notification (display of the left-handed hitting image 730, left-handed hitting audio notification) is given after a predetermined period of time has passed (the remaining reservation is exhausted) from the end of the time saving. can be executed, and the execution of predetermined notice performance (pre-read notice performance, jackpot notice performance) corresponding to the normal game state is restricted from the end of the time saving until the predetermined left hit notification is executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the afterglow of the end of the advantageous period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to set multiple performance modes (stage, mode that allows for look-ahead performance), and when the time saving (for example, special time saving game state) ends, a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the time saving (remaining reservation has been exhausted). Later, a predetermined left-handed hitting notification (display of left-handed hitting image 730, left-handed hitting audio notification) can be executed, and a predetermined effect mode (the first It is restricted to set specific stages such as stages, modes that allow pre-reading effects. Therefore, the player can enjoy the afterglow of the end of the advantageous period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the time-saving gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state) to the normal gaming state, changes based on the reservation (remaining reservation) of winnings to the second starting opening 47 Consider a case where a configuration is adopted in which the left-handed image 730 is displayed after the performance ends. In this case, the number of times the variable effect is executed until the left-handed image 730 is displayed differs depending on the number of remaining reservations. That is, when either the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state ends, the number of variable displays until the left-handed hit notification is performed changes.

Furthermore, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering the special time saving game state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first image in which the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Perform the performance. In addition, in a normal state other than the specified number of times, in the case of a loss fluctuation, a second predetermined image (first front image 707, second front image 709, etc.) appears during the fluctuation of the symbol, and the decorative symbol 700 is hidden (visually recognized). (difficult or invisible), and performs a second performance in which the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Then, when the first performance is performed, a transition is made to a special time saving game state.
In this case, when the prescribed number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the symbols are hidden, making the player expect to move to a special mode (special time-saving gaming state), thereby improving interest. . In addition, by displaying another second predetermined image and hiding the symbol even when the number of times other than the specified number is exceeded, it is possible to make the player expect a special performance (big win). By suddenly hiding the symbols, it is possible to create surprises and make the players excited. Although the common phenomenon of hiding the pattern occurs, it develops into different effects and states. This makes it possible to diversify the variations of production and improve the level of interest.

Moreover, the small pattern 704 (including the fluctuation notification LED 59) is continuously displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed and the second predetermined image is being displayed.
In this case, by displaying the small pattern 704 even when the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, the changing state of the special pattern can be confirmed.

Further, the display time of the first predetermined image and the display time of the second predetermined image are different. More specifically, the display time of the first predetermined image is longer than the display time of the second predetermined image.
In this case, by lengthening the display time of the first predetermined image, it is possible to give an impression of a special performance when entering the special time-saving gaming state and increase the player's expectations. Further, by shortening the display time of the second predetermined image, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

Further, the first predetermined image appears at the timing when the decorative pattern 700 starts or stops changing, and the second predetermined image appears during the scrolling display of the design.
In this case, by making the first predetermined image appear at the timing when the decorative pattern 700 starts or stops changing, it is possible to secure enough time to display the first predetermined image even if the variation time is short. Moreover, by making the second predetermined image appear during the scrolling display of the decorative pattern 700, it is possible to improve the interest during scrolling.

In addition, when the first performance is performed, the performance mode switches from the first performance mode (for example, the first stage, normal game state) to the second performance mode (sixth stage, special time-saving game state), but the second performance is Even if it is performed, it does not switch to the second production mode.
In this case, since the performance mode is switched by executing the first performance, special value can be given to the first performance, and the interest can be improved. By executing the first performance, the performance mode can be smoothly switched.

Further, when the first performance is performed, a right-handed hit notification is performed, but even when a second performance is performed, a right-handed hit notification is not performed.
In this case, since a right-handed hit notification is performed by executing the first performance, it is possible to prepare for a right-handed hit by the first performance.

Further, the first predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 may be displayed simultaneously, and the second predetermined image and the decorative pattern 700 may be displayed simultaneously.
In this case, since the decorative pattern 700 gradually disappears and gradually reappears, the screen can be switched smoothly without any discomfort.

Further, the second performance is not executed in the time saving game state. That is, the execution rate of the second performance is higher in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) than in the second gaming state (time-saving gaming state). In this case, since the second effect is executed with a relatively high probability in the normal gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Furthermore, since the execution probability of the second performance is low in the time-saving game state, it is possible to repeat fluctuations one after another up to highly anticipated fluctuations without performing any unnecessary performance.
Note that, if the execution rate of the second performance is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state, the second performance may be performed in the time-saving game state.

In addition, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the first effect (displaying the number of executions image 705, displaying the remaining number of arrivals image 708, displaying the countdown image 732), and the execution probability of the suggestion effect suggests the second effect. higher than the execution probability of the performance. Note that "the execution probability of the suggestive performance is higher than the execution probability of the performance that suggests the second performance" includes that the performance that suggests the second performance is not executed (0%).
In this case, since the suggestive effect is executed when the first effect is executed, expectations for the first effect can be increased. In addition, when the second performance is executed, since it is difficult to perform a performance that suggests the second performance, it is possible to prevent excessive performance and avoid raising excessive expectations.

Moreover, the aspect of the decorative pattern 700 differs before and after the first predetermined image appears (before and after entering the special time-saving game state).
Further, in variable performance example 9, the first predetermined image was displayed in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery was a loss and the ready-to-win performance was not executed. Here, in a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a reach-to-win performance is executed, the first predetermined image may not be displayed. Further, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a variable performance in which a jackpot or a reach performance is executed, the first predetermined image may be displayed.

Furthermore, in the fourth variation effect example, it has been explained that the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed. Here, the first eye-catching image 715 does not have to be displayed in the time-saving game state. That is, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering the special time saving game state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first image in which the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Perform the performance. In addition, in the normal game state other than the specified number of times, after the SP reach effect is executed, the second predetermined image (first eye-catch image 715) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first eye-catch image 715 appears again. Perform the second performance. The execution rate of the second performance is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state.
In this case, when the predetermined number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, thereby making the player expect to move to a special mode (special time-saving game state), thereby improving interest. I can do it. In addition, by displaying the second predetermined image and hiding the decorative pattern 700 when the player misses reaching the number of times other than the specified number of times, it is possible to reduce disappointment when the player misses reaching the target.
Note that, if the execution rate of the second performance is higher in the normal game state than in the time-saving game state, the second performance may be performed in the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, even if the predetermined condition (reaching the specified number of times) is met, the first eye-catching image 715 may be displayed if the reach variation pattern is selected. That is, when the reach variation pattern is selected in the predetermined number of fluctuations, the reach effect is performed according to the reach variation pattern, and the reach is lost and the second predetermined image is displayed.
In this case, even if the predetermined condition is satisfied (the predetermined number of changes), if the reach variation pattern is selected, the second predetermined image can be displayed to reduce disappointment when the reach is missed. .

In addition, it is possible to execute a specific effect (reach effect), and if it is determined to be a loss, the specific effect is executed and then a second predetermined image is displayed to stop the losing symbol, and if it is determined to be a jackpot. , the jackpot symbol is stopped without displaying the second predetermined image after executing the specific performance.
In this case, in the case of a jackpot, the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero can be immediately displayed to satisfy the player, and in the case of a loss, the second predetermined image can be displayed to reduce the disappointment of the player, It can create expectations that it may develop into other productions.

In addition, when the second transition image 734 is displayed, when the first eye-catching image 715 is displayed, and in the special time-saving game state, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button Although it has been explained that the lamps 17c are all in the second mode, the present invention is not limited thereto. The top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and The light emission mode of the button lamp 17c may be different. That is, during the display period of the first predetermined image, the lamp emits light in the first specific mode, and during the display period of the second predetermined image, the lamp emits light in the second specific mode, and the second gaming state (special time saving gaming state) Inside, the lamp emits light in a third specific manner.
In this case, it can be determined whether or not to enter the time saving mode based on the light emission mode of the lamp.

Further, the first predetermined image appears at a first time from the start of the fluctuation, and the second predetermined image appears at a second time longer than the first time from the start of the fluctuation.
In this case, since the first predetermined image appears in a short time after the start of symbol variation, the first predetermined image can be displayed even if the variation time of the predetermined number of variations is short. Further, since the second predetermined image appears after a relatively long time has passed after the start of the fluctuation, the player's expectations can be increased.

(Variable effect example 10)
FIGS. 195 to 198 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70. FIG.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 10) will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198. Variable performance example 10 includes three variable performances. The first variable presentation among these three variable presentations is a variable presentation based on winning in the first start opening 45 in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the second variable presentation among the three variable presentations is a variable presentation based on winning in the first start opening 45 in the special time saving game state. Further, the third variable performance out of the three variable performances is a variable performance based on winning in the second starting opening 47 in the special time saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 195(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m as the variation of the previous special pattern is completed. ing. Also, at this time, one pending image 702 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, "1" is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Furthermore, the number-of-executions image 705 shows the text “499 GAME”, and the remaining number-of-achievement image 708 shows the text “1 more to go”. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second embodiment. Further, although not shown, the audio output device 9 continues to output BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 195(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Further, the number of reservations display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Also, at this time, "1", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "421" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 195(3). Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "500 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of runs image 708 is updated to "0 to go". Also, at this time, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to a special time-saving gaming state, a second right-handed game image 725 is displayed. On the other hand, the stage image 706 still shows the background corresponding to the first stage. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the first mode.

Then, when a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the first starting port 45 after the special symbols stop changing, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed as shown in FIG. 195(4). . This predetermined time is, for example, 20 seconds. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first mode to the fifth mode. Also, although not shown, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM corresponding to the previous fluctuating performance at a lower volume than during execution of the fluctuating performance.

Furthermore, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without a game ball hitting the first starting port 45 after the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 were displayed, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed as shown in FIG. 195(5). Ru. This predetermined time is, for example, 60 seconds. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 and the second right hit image 725 continue to be easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the eighth mode. The eighth aspect is an aspect of light emission that lights up in purple, and is different from any of the first aspect to the seventh aspect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound to notify that the special time saving game state is in effect. For example, the voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice saying "Special time saving game state has entered" as a notification sound.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the mode of sound output by the audio output device 9 changes as shown in FIG. 195(6). For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to a special time-saving gaming state. This sound effect is different from the above-mentioned notification sound that notifies the user of the special time-saving game state. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(7), the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the second mode. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Further, at this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(8), a non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is executed. The non-display effect is a effect that increases the transparency of the image as time passes and eventually hides the image. In the illustrated example, the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 has increased since the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 has started. By increasing the transparency of the customer waiting image 710, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reached images 708 are not easily visible to the player. , becomes visible to the player. On the other hand, at this time, neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(9), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 further increases. Moreover, at this time, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, display of the pending image 702 is started. Here, the staged display effect is not executed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first image display device 70 in the completed display mode. In addition, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reached images 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. state. Further, at this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196(10), the hiding effect of the customer waiting image 710 is finished, and the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the fluctuation start operation is in progress. Further, at this time, the sound output device 9 continues to output a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 196 (11), the movement at the start of the variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 196 (12). Further, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (13), the staged display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (14), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed. The display time of this special time saving start image 733 is, for example, 3 seconds.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (15), display of the second transition image 734 is started. More specifically, the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70. At this time, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is not displayed, the left decorative symbol 700, the number of executions image 705, and the remaining number of arrivals image 708, which are changing at high speed, are displayed in the area where the second transition image 734 is not displayed. continues to be visible to the public. In addition, in the stage image 706, a portion that does not overlap with the second transition image 734 is visible to the player, and a portion that overlaps with the second transition image 734 is difficult or invisible to the player. be in a certain state. Further, the middle decorative pattern 700, the right decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, and the pending image 702 are in a state in which they are difficult or invisible to the player. Furthermore, in the area of the first image display device 70 where the second transition image 734 is displayed, the pending number display 703, the small symbol 704, and the second right-handed image 725 are visible to the player. or continue to be easily visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (16), a second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. At this time, the left decorative pattern 700, the number of executions image 705, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 are also difficult or invisible to the player.
Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (17), as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "2" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. On the other hand, the suspended image 702 is difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, no winning sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 197 (18), a special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (19), a mode start image 736 is displayed. Further, at this time, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. On the other hand, the suspended image 702 is difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, a winning sound notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is outputted from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (20), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the first image display device 70 displays "125", which is a decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness. is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as a stage image 706. Also, at this time, a third right-hand hitting image 737 and a special time saving remaining number of times image 738 are displayed. In addition, “2” is shown in the hold count display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “1” is shown in the hold count display 703 of the second start port 47. Further, one pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode. On the other hand, the fluctuation image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "125" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 198 (21).

Next, as shown in FIG. 198 (22), with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0". Furthermore, the first pending image 702 moves to the variable pedestal 701P and is enlarged, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Although illustration is omitted, thereafter, with the stop display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable image 701 is hidden.

FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in variable effect example 10.
As shown in FIG. 199, a customer waiting image 710 is displayed at time T1 in variable performance example 10. At this time, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 are difficult or invisible to the player. Further, at this time, the pending image 702 is not displayed. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the eighth mode. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the special time saving game state is in effect. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 195(5).

Thereafter, at time T2, a game ball enters the first starting port 45.
Thereafter, at time T3, the audio output device 9 starts outputting a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state. That is, the sound output from the audio output device 9 switches from the notification sound to the sound effect. The state at time T3 is the state shown in FIG. 195(6).
Thereafter, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the eighth mode to the second mode. The state at time T4 is the state shown in FIG. 196(7).

Thereafter, at time T5, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 become visible to the player. On the other hand, the pending image 702 is not displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG. 196(8).
Thereafter, at time T6, a variable effect is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 changes slowly, and the small pattern 704 changes quickly. Also, at this time, the display of the pending image 702 is started, and the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player. Further, at this time, the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode. Also, at this time, the action rendering of the pending image 702 is started. The state at time T6 is the state shown in FIG. 196(9).

Thereafter, at time T7, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, and the small pattern 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 196(10).
Thereafter, at time T8, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.
Thereafter, at time T9, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Also, at this time, the pending image 702 moves to the variable pedestal 701P. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 196 (11).

In this way, the pending image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and while the first predetermined image (second transition image 734) is being displayed, the pending image 702 (variable image 701) based on winning in the first starting port 45 is displayed. ) is hidden, and along with the appearance of the decorative pattern 700, a pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) based on winning in the second starting port 47 is also displayed, and the second predetermined images (first front image 707, second front image 709), the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is displayed.
In this case, while the first predetermined image is displayed, neither the decorative pattern 700 nor the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is displayed, so that more attention can be drawn to the first predetermined image. Furthermore, since the transition of the gaming state is involved, by hiding the pending image 702 (variable image 701), it is possible to smoothly switch to another pending image 702 (variable image 701) as the transition to a different gaming state occurs. I can do it. In addition, while the second predetermined image is being displayed, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden while the pending image 702 (fluctuating image 701) is displayed, so the current state (whether it is changing, how many pending images, etc.) The player can be made aware of this.

In addition, the pending image 702 (variable image 701) can be displayed, and while the first predetermined image (second transition image 734) is displayed, the pending image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears. At the same time, another pending image 702 (variable image 701) is also displayed, and while the second predetermined image (first eye-catch image 715) is being displayed, the pending image 702 (variable image 701) is hidden, and with the appearance of the decorative pattern 700. The pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) is also redisplayed.
In this case, since both the decorative pattern 700 and the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) are displayed while the first predetermined image is being displayed, more attention can be drawn to the first predetermined image. Furthermore, since it involves a transition between gaming states, by hiding the pending image 702 (variable image 701), it is possible to smoothly switch to another pending image 702 (variable image 701) in a different gaming state. Also, by hiding the pending image 702 (fluctuation image 701) while the second predetermined image is being displayed, it is possible to smoothly switch from a missed reach to the next screen.

(Variable effect example 11)
200 to 202 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, referring to FIGS. 200 to 202, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 11) will be described. Variation performance example 11 is a variation performance example of the decorative pattern 700 based on winning in the first starting port 45 in the special time saving game state.
In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 200(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m as the variation of the previous special pattern is finished. ing. Furthermore, the number-of-executions image 705 shows the text “500 GAME”, and the remaining number-of-achievement image 708 shows the text “0 to go”. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706. Furthermore, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is a special time-saving gaming state, and a second right-handed game image 725 is displayed. Also, at this time, an adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the fifth embodiment. Furthermore, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs the BGM corresponding to the previous fluctuating performance at a volume lower than that during execution of the fluctuating performance. The state shown in FIG. 200(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 195(4).

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. will be started. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 200(3), the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(4), a non-display effect of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 is started. In the illustrated example, the transparency of the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 has increased due to the start of the non-display effect. As the transparency of the adjusted image 716 becomes higher, the portions of the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 that overlap with the adjusted image 716 are not easily visible to the player, but are visible to the player. It becomes visible to the user. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(5), the hiding effect of the adjusted image 716 and the menu image 717 is completed, and the adjusted image 716 and the menu image 717 are hidden. As a result, the middle decorative pattern 700 and the right decorative pattern 700 are all in a state where they are easily visible to the player. Moreover, at this time, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, display of the pending image 702 is started. On the other hand, the staged display effect is not executed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first image display device 70 in the completed display mode. This pending image 702 is in a state that is easily visible to the player. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 200(6), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 201 (7). Further, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201(8), the staged display performance is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201(9), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201(10), display of the second transition image 734 is started. More specifically, the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70.
Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (11), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 201 (12), as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "2" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. On the other hand, the suspended image 702 is difficult or invisible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 202 (13), a special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time saving selection image 735.

Next, as shown in FIG. 202 (14), a mode start image 736 is displayed. Further, at this time, as the game ball enters the second starting port 47, “1” is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. On the other hand, the suspended image 702 is difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, a winning sound notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is outputted from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 202 (15), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the first image display device 70 displays "125", which is a decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness. is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. Also, at this time, a third right-hand hitting image 737 and a special time saving remaining number of times image 738 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the special time saving remaining number image 738 shows the text “749”. In addition, “2” is shown in the hold count display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “1” is shown in the hold count display 703 of the second start port 47. Also, one pending image 702 is displayed. On the other hand, the fluctuation image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "125" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 202 (16).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special performance in the second mode, and when the specific image is displayed in the second mode, the performance control board 130 can win a prize. In this case, the reserved image in a specific manner is made difficult or invisible. Examples of the special effects include displaying the special time saving start image 733, displaying the second transition image 734, and displaying the mode start image 736. Furthermore, examples of the specific images include a customer waiting image 710, an adjustment image 716, a menu image 717, and the like. Furthermore, examples of the specific mode include an unfinished display mode and the like.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special performance. In addition, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, by not allowing the player to see the pending image 702 in a specific manner, the pending image 702 may be excessively displayed to the player in the special time-saving gaming state. It is possible to prevent the player from drawing attention to the special time-saving game state, and to draw the player's attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode. , make the reserved image of the specific operation mode difficult or invisible. Examples of the specific operation mode include an unfinished operation mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special performance. In addition, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, by not allowing the player to see the pending image 702 of the specific operation mode, the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player in the special time-saving gaming state. It is possible to prevent players from drawing too much attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first mode and then display it in the second mode. Before the start, a specific image can be displayed, and if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 of the first form is made difficult or invisible. Examples of the first form include an unfinished form. Furthermore, the second form includes, for example, a completed form.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the format of the pending image 702. Further, even before the start of the special performance, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, by not allowing the player to visually recognize the change in the form of the pending image 702, the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player in the special time-saving gaming state. This prevents excessive attention from being drawn to the player, and allows the player to focus on the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode. , the reserved image 702 with a specific transparency is made difficult or invisible. Examples of the specific transparency include unfinished transparency.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special performance. In addition, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, by not allowing the player to see the pending image 702 with a specific transparency, the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player in the special time-saving gaming state. This prevents excessive attention from being drawn to the player, and allows the player to pay attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 at the first position on the first image display device 70 and then display it at the second position, and in the second mode, the special effect is Before the start, a specific image can be displayed, and if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode, the reserved image 702 at the first position is made difficult or invisible. Examples of the first position include an unfinished display position. The second position may be, for example, the completed display position.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the display position of the pending image 702. Further, even before the start of the special performance, the player's interest can be attracted by the specific image. Furthermore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, by not allowing the player to visually recognize the change in the display position of the pending image 702, the pending image 702 is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state. It is possible to prevent the players from drawing too much attention to the special time-saving game state, and to draw the players' attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the production control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special production in the second mode, and output the sound while executing the variable production. It is possible to output the sound in the first mode, and when a specific image is displayed in the second mode, it is possible to output the sound in the second mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special performance. Further, by outputting a sound in a manner corresponding to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In the present embodiment, the production control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special production in the second mode, and when the variable production is being executed, the production control board 130 can switch the top lamp 10b to the second mode. When a specific image is displayed in the second mode, the top lamp 10b can be set to the eighth mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special performance. Further, by changing the top lamp 10b in a mode corresponding to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and when the variable effect is being executed, the effect control board 130 can display the board lamp 74b in the second mode. When a specific image is displayed in the second mode, the panel lamp 74b can be set to an eighth mode, etc.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special performance. Further, by changing the mode of the board lamp 74b in accordance with the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player can be made aware that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and when the variable effect is being executed, the effect control board 130 can display the movable member lamp 74c or the button The lamp 17c can be set to the second mode, and when a specific image is displayed in the second mode, the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c can be set to the eighth mode.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special performance. In addition, by changing the mode of the movable member lamp 74c and the mode of the button lamp 17c according to the display of the specific image in the special time-saving game state, the player can recognize that the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display a specific image before the start of the special effect in the second mode, and if a prize is won while the specific image is being displayed in the second mode. , it is possible to start displaying the decorative pattern 700 before the display of the pending image 702 starts.
In this case, the specific image can attract the player's interest even before the start of the special performance. In addition, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state, the effect pattern 700 is displayed earlier than the display of the pending image 702, thereby creating a variable effect unique to the special time-saving game state. This can draw the player's attention. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the performance control board 130 controls when a prize is won before the start of the special performance in the second mode, when the special symbol is stopped, and when no pending information is stored in the main RAM 110c. , makes the reserved image 702 of a specific aspect difficult to view or invisible.
As a result, if a prize is won before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped and there is no hold, the hold image 702 in a specific manner is not made visible to the player, and in the special time-saving game state. It is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the pending image 702, and to draw the player's attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control board 130 specifies that if a prize is won before the start of the special production in the second mode and when the special symbol is stopped and no pending information is stored in the main RAM 110c, The pending image 702 of the operation mode is made difficult or invisible.
As a result, if a prize is won before the start of the special performance and while the special symbols are stopped and there is no hold, the player is not allowed to see the hold image 702 of the specific movement mode, thereby entering the special time-saving game state. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the pending image 702, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effects unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control board 130 specifies that if a prize is won before the start of the special production in the second mode and when the special symbol is stopped and no pending information is stored in the main RAM 110c, The retained image 702 of the form is made difficult or invisible. Examples of the specific form include an unfinished form.
As a result, if a prize is won before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped and there is no hold, the special time saving game state is not made by not allowing the player to see the hold image 702 in a specific form. It is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the pending image 702, and to draw the player's attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 at the first transparency level and then display it at the second transparency level, and performs the special performance in the second mode. If a prize is won before the special symbol is stopped and no pending information is stored in the main RAM 110c, the pending image 702 of the first transparency is made difficult or invisible. Examples of the first transmittance include unfinished transmittance. Furthermore, examples of the second transmittance include the completed transmittance.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the transparency of the reserved image 702. In addition, if a prize is won before the start of the special performance and while the special symbols are stopped and there is no reservation, the change in the transparency of the reservation image 702 is not made visible to the player, thereby creating a special time-saving game state. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the pending image 702, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effects unique to the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the performance control board 130 specifies that if a prize is won before the start of the special performance in the second mode and when the special symbol is stopped and no pending information is stored in the main RAM 110c, The held image 702 at the position is made difficult or invisible. Examples of the specific position include an unfinished display position and the like.
As a result, if a prize is won before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped and there is no hold, the hold image 702 at a specific position is not visible to the player, and in the special time-saving game state. It is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the pending image 702, and to draw the player's attention to the performance unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first mode and then display it in the second mode, and can display the special image in the first mode and the second mode. It can be displayed in a display mode according to the controlled mode of the two modes, and when the special symbol is stopped after the start of specific notification and the special image according to the first mode is displayed. When winning a prize, the reserved image 702 of the first mode is made difficult or invisible, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed. Examples of the first mode include an unfinished display mode. Furthermore, examples of the second mode include a completion display mode. Furthermore, examples of the special image include a decorative pattern 700, a stage image 706, and the like. In addition, examples of the specific notification include displaying the second right-hand hitting image 725 and a sound urging the player to shoot the game ball to the right side in the game area 5a.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the aspect of the pending image 702. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so the player is aware that it is possible to win by firing the game ball into the second gaming area. can be done. Furthermore, if a prize is won while the special symbols are stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the change in the aspect of the pending image 702 is not made visible to the player. This prevents the player from drawing too much attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state, and allows the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the performance control board 130 can display the reserved image 702 on the first image display device 70 in the first operation mode and then display it in the second operation mode, and after the start of the specific notification, If a prize is won while the symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, the reserved image 702 of the first operation mode is made difficult or invisible, and the special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed. Display. Examples of the first operation mode include an unfinished operation mode. Furthermore, examples of the second operation mode include an operation mode in motion performance.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the operation mode of the pending image 702. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so the player is aware that it is possible to win by firing the game ball into the second gaming area. can be done. Furthermore, if a prize is won while the special symbols are stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the player can visually see the change in the operation mode of the pending image 702. This prevents the player from drawing too much attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state, and allows the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if a prize is won while the special symbol is stopped and the special image according to the first mode is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the performance control board 130 is configured to suspend the specific form. The image 702 is made difficult or invisible, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed.
In this case, even when a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so the player is notified that he or she can win by firing the game ball into the second gaming area. It can be recognized. Furthermore, if a prize is won while the special symbols are stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the reserved image 702 of the specific form is not made visible to the player. This prevents the player from drawing too much attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state, and allows the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the special symbol is stopped after the start of the specific notification and the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed, the performance control board 130 controls the performance control board 130 to adjust the first transparency The reserved image 702 is made difficult or invisible, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the transparency of the reserved image 702. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so the player is aware that it is possible to win by firing the game ball into the second gaming area. can be done. Furthermore, if a prize is won while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the player can visually see the change in the transparency of the pending image 702. This prevents the player from drawing too much attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state, and allows the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first mode is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the performance control board 130 is configured to The reserved image 702 is made difficult or invisible, and a special image corresponding to the second mode is displayed.
In this case, the player can be entertained by changing the display position of the pending image 702. In addition, even when a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, the specific notification is started, so the player is aware that it is possible to win by firing the game ball into the second gaming area. can be done. Furthermore, if a prize is won while the special symbols are stopped and a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the player will be able to visually see the change in the display position of the pending image 702. This prevents the player from drawing too much attention to the reserved image 702 in the special time-saving game state, and allows the player to focus on the special image unique to the special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the production control board 130 changes the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the display of the pending image 702 is completed. Is possible.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving gaming state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched earlier than when the pending image 702 is displayed, so that the player takes his eyes off the gaming machine 1. Even if the player is in a special time-saving gaming state, it becomes easier for the player to quickly recognize that the player is in a special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the second mode before the start of the special effect, the effect control board 130 starts outputting the sound before completing the hiding of the specific image. It is possible to change from the first aspect to the second aspect.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving gaming state before the start of the special performance, the display content of the first image display device 70 is changed by switching the sound output mode earlier than by hiding the specific image. Regardless of the situation, it becomes easier for players to quickly recognize that they are in a special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the production control board 130 changes the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. Is possible.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the mode of outputting the sound is quickly switched compared to putting the decorative pattern 700 in a state where it is easily visible to the player. Even when the player takes his eyes off the game machine 1, it is easy for the player to quickly recognize that he is in a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the production control board 130 changes the sound output from the first mode to the second mode before the small symbol 704 becomes easily visible. Is possible.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, by switching the sound output mode earlier than by changing the small symbol 704 to a state where it is easily visible to the player, Even when the player takes his eyes off the game machine 1, it is easy for the player to quickly recognize that he is in a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 changes the sound output to the first mode before changing the top lamp 10b from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. It is possible to change the aspect to the second aspect.
In this case, when winning a prize in the special time-saving gaming state before the start of the special performance, the player can look away from the gaming machine 1 by switching the sound output mode earlier than by switching the light emission mode of the top lamp 10b. Even when the player is away from the player, it becomes easier for the player to quickly recognize that the player is in a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 changes the sound output to the first mode before changing the panel lamp 74b from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. It is possible to change the aspect to the second aspect.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving gaming state before the start of the special performance, the player can look away from the gaming machine 1 by switching the sound output mode earlier than by switching the light emission mode of the board lamp 74b. Even when the player is away from the player, it becomes easier for the player to quickly recognize that the player is in a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the second mode before the start of the special performance, the performance control board 130 makes a sound before changing the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c from the first light emission mode to the second light emission mode. It is possible to change the output from the first mode to the second mode.
In this case, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, by switching the sound output mode earlier than switching the light emission mode of the movable member lamp 74c or the light emission mode of the button lamp 17c, Even when the player takes his eyes off the game machine 1, it is easy for the player to quickly recognize that he is in a special time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the sound output mode is changed before the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player. It's switching. Therefore, regardless of the content displayed on the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won a prize.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the sound output mode is switched before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. There is. Therefore, even if the game situation is not recognized by the player from the content displayed on the first image display device 70 by the customer waiting image 710, it is possible to make the player recognize as soon as possible that he or she has won a prize.

In addition, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c are switched. Therefore, regardless of the content displayed on the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won a prize.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, The modes of the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c are switched. Therefore, even if the game situation is not recognized by the player from the content displayed on the first image display device 70 due to the customer waiting image 710, it is possible to make the player recognize as soon as possible that he or she has won a prize.

In addition, if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the decorative pattern 700 becomes visible to the player before the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player. to be in a state. Therefore, even if the pending image 702 is not visible, it is possible to quickly suggest to the player that a variable effect will be performed.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the decorative pattern 700 can be seen by the player before the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. to be in a state. Therefore, even if the information displayed on the first image display device 70 regarding the game is blocked by the customer waiting image 710, it is possible to quickly suggest to the player that a variable performance will be performed.

Furthermore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the staged display effect will not be executed, but the second transition image 734 will be displayed after the variable effect based on this winning is started. If a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 by then, a staged display effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy not only the effects unique to the special time-saving game state but also the changes in the display mode of the pending image 702, and the display based on the winning when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving game state. The reserved image 702 can give the player a special feeling.

Further, if a prize is won while the second transition image 734 is being displayed, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is not visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the pending image 702, and to draw the player's attention to the switching from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving gaming state. .

In particular, in this embodiment, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 while the second transition image 734 is displayed, the winning sound notifying the winning in the first starting port 45 is not output. Therefore, in the special time-saving gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 47, the player is prevented from being overly conscious of the fact that a gaming ball has entered the first starting port 45, and the normal gaming state is maintained. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the switching from the corresponding stage image 706 to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, if a game ball wins in the second starting port 47, a winning notification is provided to notify that the game ball has won in the second starting port 47. Sound is output. Therefore, the player can be made aware of the special time-saving gaming state in which it is easy to win a game ball in the second starting opening 47.

Note that even when the second transition image 734 is displayed, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45, a winning sound notifying the winning in the first starting port 45 is output. Good too. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the winnings entered into the first start opening 45 are not valid.
Further, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 while the second transition image 734 is displayed, the winning sound notifying the winning in the second starting port 47 may not be output. In this case, the player is prevented from becoming excessively conscious that the game ball has won a prize, and the player focuses on the switching from the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state to the stage image 706 unique to the special time-saving gaming state. can be done.

(Modified example of variation production example 10)
FIGS. 203 to 205 are diagrams showing modifications of the variation effect example 10.
In variable performance example 10, as the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, a variable performance based on winning in the first start opening 45 was explained, but the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state is limited to the above example. Not done.
Hereinafter, a modification of the variation effect example 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 203 to 205. This modification is an example in which a variable effect is performed based on a game ball winning in the second start opening 47 as the first variable effect in the special time-saving game state. In the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, in the same way as variable performance example 10, in the normal gaming state, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving gaming state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 enters the special time-saving gaming state. controlled. In addition, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball hitting either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the final round of variable production ends, as shown in FIG. 203 (1), A customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all have an eighth aspect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a notification sound to notify that the special time saving game state is in effect. The state shown in FIG. 203(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 195(5) in the variation effect example 10.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 203(2), a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is output from the audio output device 9. will be started. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(3), the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the second mode. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203 (4), a non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of arrivals image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are in a state where they are visible to the player. Become. On the other hand, neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(5), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 further increases. Moreover, at this time, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 continues to show "0". Further, at this time, neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but continue to be visible to the player. do. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 203(6), the hiding effect of the customer waiting image 710 is completed, and the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the movement at the start of variation is completed, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Also, at this time, "0", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed. On the other hand, neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.
Further, at this time, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, “1” is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. In addition, a winning sound for notifying a winning to the second starting port 47 is outputted from the audio output device 9. On the other hand, the pending image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 204(7), a special time saving start image 733 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204(8), display of the second transition image 734 is started, and the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204(9), the second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire first image display device 70.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (10), a special time saving selection image 735 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on the "a" mode in the special time saving selection image 735.
Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (11), a mode start image 736 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 204 (12), the second transition image 734 and the mode start image 736 are hidden, and the first image display device 70 displays "125", which is a decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness. is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706. Also, at this time, a third right-hand hitting image 737 and a special time saving remaining number of times image 738 are displayed. In addition, “0” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “1” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Also, one pending image 702 is displayed. On the other hand, the fluctuation image 701 is not displayed.
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "125" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 205 (13).

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, after the pending image 702 is displayed (FIG. 196 (10) ), and a variation image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 196 (11)). On the other hand, if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 while the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, neither the pending image 702 nor the variable image 701 is displayed (see FIG. 203 (6)) .
In this case, although the stage image 706 consisting of a background corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, the game player may experience a sense of discomfort due to the fact that the pending image 702 and the variable image 701 based on winnings in the first starting port 45 are not displayed. You can prevent the person from giving it to others. In addition, although a stage image 706 consisting of a background corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, a pending image 702 and a variable image 701 based on winnings in the second start opening 47, which are difficult to win in the normal gaming state, are displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being displayed.

Particularly, in this embodiment, if there is a hold on winning the first start opening 45 in the first variable production in the special time-saving gaming state, a stage image 706 consisting of a background corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed. At times, the suspended image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 187 (6)), and when the stage image 706 consisting of a background corresponding to the special time saving game state is displayed, the suspended image 702 is not displayed (see FIG. 188 (12)).
In this case, although the stage image 706 consisting of a background corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, the reserved image 702 based on winning the first starting opening 45 is not displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can be prevented. In addition, although the stage image 706 consisting of a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed, the pending image 702 based on winning in the first start opening 45, where it is difficult to win a prize in the special time-saving game state, is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the display.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there is a hold on winning the second start opening 47 in the first variable production in the special time-saving gaming state, a stage image 706 consisting of a background corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed. Sometimes the pending image 702 is not displayed (see FIG. 203 (6)), and when the stage image 706 consisting of a background corresponding to the special time saving game state is displayed, the pending image 702 is displayed (see FIG. 204 (12)). ).
In this case, although a stage image 706 with a background corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, a pending image 702 based on winning at the second start opening 47, which is difficult to win in the normal gaming state, is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to this. Furthermore, although the stage image 706 consisting of a background corresponding to the special time-saving game state is displayed, the pending image 702 based on winning in the second start opening 47, which is easy to win in the special time-saving game state, is not displayed. It is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable due to this.

(Other production examples in variation production example 10)
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing another example of variation performance example 10.
In variable performance example 10, an example was explained in which the first variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state is started when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, but it is performed when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. The presentation is not limited to the above example.
Below, with reference to FIG. 206, another example of variation performance example 10 will be explained. In addition, in the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and modification may be omitted.

First, in the same way as variable performance example 10, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state. In addition, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball hitting either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the final round of variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 206 (1), A customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all have an eighth aspect. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the special time saving game state is in effect. The state shown in FIG. 206(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 195(5) in the variation effect example 10.

If abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 57a while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, a magnetic error occurs and the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed as shown in FIG. 206(2). Is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the ninth mode. The ninth aspect is a mode of light emission that periodically flashes in orange, and is different from any of the first to eighth aspects. Furthermore, the ninth aspect can be considered as an aspect that suggests or notifies the occurrence of an error. Further, the blinking period in the ninth aspect is, for example, 1.5 seconds. That is, the blinking cycle in the ninth mode is longer than the blinking cycle in the winning light emission effect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a warning sound along with a voice saying "A magnet has been detected."

As described above, in this embodiment, when an error occurs while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state, the mode of sound output is switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the error. Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the gaming machine 1 while the specific image is being displayed, the player can be made aware that an error has occurred.

In the example shown in FIG. 206(2), if a magnetic error occurs while the customer waiting image 710 and the second right-handed image 725 are displayed, the customer waiting image 710 and the second right-handed image 725 are displayed. Although it has been described that the magnetic error notification image 741 is displayed without any display, the present invention is not limited to this. If a magnetic error occurs while the customer waiting image 710 or the second right-handed image 725 is displayed, the customer waiting image 710 or the right-handed image 725 continues to be displayed, and the layer in front of the customer waiting image 710 is The magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if an error occurs while a specific image is being displayed, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are switched to the ninth mode, and The mode of sound output may be switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of an error, and furthermore, the magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed.
Furthermore, if an error occurs not only when a specific image is displayed, but also in any case, the top lamp 10b, panel lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and The button lamp 17c may be switched to the ninth mode, the sound output mode may be switched to a mode corresponding to the occurrence of an error, and the magnetic error notification image 741 may be displayed.

(Modified example of variation production example 11)
FIGS. 207 to 209 are diagrams showing modifications of the variation effect example 11.
In variable performance example 11, as the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winning in the first starting hole 45 is a loss has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
Hereinafter, a modification of variation effect example 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 209. This modification is an example in which, as the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state, a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on winnings in the second start opening 47 is a jackpot. In addition, in the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and modification may be omitted.

First, in the same way as variable performance example 11, in the normal gaming state, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times required to enter the special time-saving gaming state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 enters the special time-saving gaming state. controlled. In addition, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball hitting either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the final round of variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 207(1), An adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all have a fifth aspect. Further, although not shown, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM corresponding to the previous fluctuating performance at a volume lower than that during execution of the fluctuating performance. The state shown in FIG. 207(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 200(1) in variation effect example 11.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. Ru. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the fifth mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 207(3), the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the fifth mode to the second mode. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(4), a non-display effect of the adjusted image 716 and the menu image 717 is started, and the transparency of the adjusted image 716 and the menu image 717 is increased. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.
Next, as shown in FIG. 207(5), the hiding effect of the adjusted image 716 and the menu image 717 is completed, and the adjusted image 716 and the menu image 717 are hidden. Moreover, at this time, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Moreover, at this time, "0" is still shown in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47, and neither the fluctuation image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(6), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. Also, at this time, "0", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed. Further, at this time, neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.
Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 208 (7). In addition, a winning sound for notifying a winning to the second starting port 47 is outputted from the audio output device 9. On the other hand, the pending image 702 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208(8), display of the second transition image 734 is started, and the second transition image 734 is displayed in a part of the display area of the first image display device 70.
Next, as shown in FIG. 208(9), a second transition image 734 is displayed on the entire surface of the first image display device 70. That is, the second transition image 734 is displayed without the special time saving start image 733 (see FIG. 201 (9)) being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208 (10), the second transition image 734 is hidden, and "444", which is the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero, is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the stage image 706 is displayed again. In the illustrated example, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as the stage image 706. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up in orange, the panel lamp 74b lights up in yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in green, and the button lamp 17c lights up in blue. Note that at this time, the number of executions image 705 and the remaining number of attainments image 708 are not displayed.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "444" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 208 (11). Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b is lit in yellow, the panel lamp 74b is lit in green, the movable member lamp 74c is lit in blue, and the button lamp 17c is lit in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 208 (12), an opening image 719 is displayed. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the seventh mode to the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 209 (13), a first right-handed image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the promotion image 721 was displayed, an in-round image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 209 (14). In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed in the round number image 723.
Next, when the final round ends, a normal time saving selection image 745 is displayed as shown in FIG. 209 (15). In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on mode “A” in the normal time saving selection image 745.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal time saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal working time saving start image 724 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 209 (16). Also, at this time, a card caution image 739 and a game caution image 740 are displayed.

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, "444", which is a decorative pattern 700 with low decorativeness, is fixed on the first image display device 70, as shown in FIG. will be stopped. Similarly to the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444". Also, at this time, the background corresponding to the third stage is displayed as the stage image 706. Also, at this time, a second right-handed hit image 725 and a normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 are displayed. In addition, “0” is shown in the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “1” is shown in the hold number display 703 of the second start port 47. Also, one pending image 702 is displayed.

In addition, in this modification, the variable presentation based on winning when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed before the start of the first variable presentation in the special time saving game state has been explained. Here, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed before the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving game state (see FIG. 195 (5)), when winning at the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, Based on this, the variation effect described in this modification may be executed.

In this way, when the predetermined number of times is reached (when entering the special time-saving game state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears, the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the decorative pattern 700 appears again. Perform the first performance. Further, in the case of a jackpot, a second effect is performed in which a decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. Further, the time-saving game state is entered both when the first performance is performed and when the second performance is performed. The performance mode of the second performance at the time of a jackpot is different depending on when the specified number of times is reached and when it is not the specified number of times.
In this case, when the predetermined number of times is reached, the first predetermined image is displayed and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, thereby making the player expect to move to a special mode (special time-saving game state), thereby improving interest. I can do it. In addition, if a jackpot is achieved even if the number of times other than the specified number is exceeded, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state. In addition, by making the appearance of a jackpot different when the specified number of hits is reached and when the number of hits is other than the specified number, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the interest.

Furthermore, when the specified number of times is reached (when entering the special time saving game state), the first predetermined image (second transition image 734, etc.) appears and the decorative pattern 700 is hidden, and the first image in which the decorative pattern 700 appears again. perform the performance. Further, in the case of a jackpot, a second effect is performed in which a decorative pattern 700 indicating a jackpot is displayed. Further, the time-saving game state is entered both when the first performance is performed and when the second performance is performed. When the predetermined number of times is reached, the performance mode of the first performance differs depending on whether it is a jackpot or a loss.
In this case, by making the performance mode of the first performance different between the case of a jackpot and the case of a loss when the specified number of times is reached, the performance can be diversified and the interest level can be improved.

In addition, there is a right-handed hitting notification performance when the first performance is performed (display of the special time saving start image 733), and a right-handed hitting notification performance when the second performance is performed (display of the first right-handed hitting image 720 and the promotion image 721). ) The presentation style is different from that of
In this case, it is possible to diversify the performance by making the performance mode of the right-handed hitting notification performance different between when the first performance is performed and when the second performance is performed.

In addition, when the first effect is performed, the card caution image 739 (gaming caution image 740) is not displayed and the transition is made to a specific mode indicating the second game state (time-saving game state), and when the second effect is performed. After displaying a card caution image 739 (game caution image 740), the game shifts to a specific mode indicating a second gaming state (time-saving gaming state).
In this case, in the case of a jackpot, by displaying the card caution image 739 (gaming caution image 740), the player can be alerted, and by not displaying these images when entering the special time-saving gaming state, It is possible to immediately shift to a performance mode indicating a special time-saving game state.

In addition, during the first period of time from when the first predetermined image is displayed until the transition to the second gaming state (time-saving gaming state), after the second predetermined image is displayed, the transition to the second gaming state (time-saving gaming state) It is shorter than the second time until.
In this case, when the first predetermined image is displayed, it is possible to shift to the second gaming state in a short time, and it is possible to improve interest.

(Variable effect example 12)
FIG. 210 and FIG. 211 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 12) will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211. Variable performance example 12 includes two variable performances. The first variable presentation of these two variable presentations is a variable presentation based on the game ball winning in the first start opening 45 in the special time saving game state. Further, the second variable performance is a variable performance based on the game ball winning in the second starting port 47 in the special time saving game state.
In addition, in the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 210(1), the decoration pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped in the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m as the variation of the previous special pattern is finished. ing. Further, at this time, the text "700" is shown in the special time saving remaining number image 738. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as a stage image 706. In addition, “0” is shown in both the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 and the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first embodiment. Furthermore, although not shown, BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. 210(2), the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to fluctuate as the special symbols begin to be displayed. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 continues to show "0". Further, neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Further, the display content of the special time saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "699". Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first mode to the second mode.
Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 210(3). Further, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the voice output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(4), the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. On the other hand, even if the staged display performance is completed, the pending image 702 does not move to the variable pedestal 701P and continues to be displayed on the first pending pedestal 702P. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.
Further, at this time, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, “2” is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Further, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the second pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(5), the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the second pending pedestal 702P. Furthermore, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the second pending image 702 is started. Moreover, the winning sound for notifying the winning to the second starting port 47 is continuously outputted until the staged display performance is completed, and when the staged display performance is completed, it is no longer output.
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "364" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 210(6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 211(7), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "1". Also, at this time, the second pending image 702 moves toward the first pending pedestal 702P. Furthermore, the first pending image 702 moves toward the variable pedestal 701P and is enlarged, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Further, the display content of the special time saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "698".
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "712" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 211(8). Furthermore, the variable image 701 is hidden.

(Variable effect example 13)
FIG. 212 to FIG. 214 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 13) will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. Variable performance example 13 is a variable performance based on a game ball winning in the second starting hole 47 in the special time saving game state, and is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 212(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70 by the effect control unit 130m as the variation of the previous special pattern is completed. ing. Further, at this time, the text “600” is shown in the special time saving remaining number image 738. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the seventh stage is shown as a stage image 706. The seventh stage is a stage that is set when mode "b" is selected in the special time saving selection image 735 (see FIG. 188 (10)). In addition, “0” is shown in both the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 and the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the first embodiment. Although not shown, BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the second start opening 47, as shown in FIG. 212(2), the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary as the special symbols begin to be displayed. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, the display content of the special time saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "599". Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the first mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212(3), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Also, at this time, the staged display effect is completed, and the rectangular pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 has a larger display size than the example shown in FIG. 212(2). Further, the display mode of this rectangular pending image 702 is a display mode according to the seventh stage. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Further, the winning sound is continuously outputted until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212(4), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0".
Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 212(5). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the reserved image 702 is displayed in a small size on the first reserved pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 212(6), the staged display effect is completed, and the rectangular pending image 702 is displayed in the normal display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(7), after the left decorative symbol 700 "4" temporarily stops, the right decorative symbol 700 "4" temporarily stops, and the ready-to-win effect is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(8), the medium decorative pattern 700 "4" is temporarily stopped, and the zero-th decorative pattern 700 "444" is temporarily stopped. That is, neither the SP ready-to-reach effect nor the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is performed, and the decorative pattern 700 of the number zero is temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c switch from the second mode to the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up in orange, the panel lamp 74b lights up in yellow, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in green, and the button lamp 17c lights up in blue.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "444" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 213(9). Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c continue to be in the seventh mode. In the illustrated example, the top lamp 10b lights up in yellow, the panel lamp 74b lights up in green, the movable member lamp 74c lights up in blue, and the button lamp 17c lights up in deep blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(10), an opening image 719 is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the seventh mode to the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(11), a first right-handed image 720 and a promotion image 721 are displayed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the promotion image 721 was displayed, an in-round image 722 and a round number image 723 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 213 (12). In the illustrated example, the text “Round 1” is displayed in the round number image 723.
Next, when the final round ends, a normal time saving selection image 745 is displayed as shown in FIG. 214 (13). In the illustrated example, the cursor is placed on mode “A” in the normal time saving selection image 745.
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal time saving selection image 745 was displayed, the normal working time saving start image 724 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 214 (14). Also, at this time, a card caution image 739 and a game caution image 740 are displayed.

Next, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. will be stopped. Similarly to the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704 is also fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "444". Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is shown as a stage image 706. Also, at this time, a second right-handed hit image 725 and a normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 are displayed. In addition, “0” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “1” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Also, one pending image 702 is displayed.

(Stage display effect using rectangular pending image 702 in normal display mode)
Next, a staged display effect using the rectangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode will be described. FIG. 215 is a diagram showing an example of a staged display effect using a rectangular pending image 702 in a normal display mode.
The rectangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode performs four stages of staged display performance. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47, first, as shown in FIG. 215(1), as the first stage of the staged display effect, a highly transparent pending image 702 is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 has a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the first stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 212(2) and FIG. 212(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 215(2), as a second stage of the staged display effect, a reserved image 702 whose transparency is lower than that of the first stage is displayed in white. This reserved image 702 is formed by a plurality of rectangular images each extending in the vertical direction and arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. In the illustrated example, in the reserved image 702, four rectangular images are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. This pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the first stage.
Next, as shown in FIG. 213(3), as the third stage of the staged display effect, the reserved image 702, which has lower transparency than the second stage, is displayed in white. In the illustrated example, in the reserved image 702, six rectangular images extending in the vertical direction are displayed side by side at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. This pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than in the second stage.

Next, as shown in FIG. 213(4), as the fourth stage of the stage display effect, that is, the final stage, a pending image 702 having lower transparency than the third stage is displayed. This reserved image 702 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction. Further, this pending image 702 is displayed in a larger display size than that in the third stage. The display mode of the pending image 702 in the final stage of the staged display effect is the display mode of the pending image 702 shown in FIG. 212(3) and FIG. 212(6). That is, although not shown, after the suspended image 702 in the first stage shown in FIGS. 212(2) and 212(5) is displayed, the suspended image 702 in the second stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the third stage of the staged display effect is displayed. After that, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode shown in FIGS. 212(3) and 212(6) is displayed.

In this way, the change from the stage in which streaks are formed in the retained image 702 (see FIG. 215 (3)) to the stage in which streaks are not formed in the retained image 702 (see FIG. 215 (4)) also This can be interpreted as a change in the form of the pending image 702. In addition, in this embodiment, the time from the start of the staged display effect until the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed, that is, the execution time of the staged display effect using the rectangular-shaped pending image 702 in the normal display mode is , 0.2 seconds.

Further, when the staged display effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 215(5), the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. The rectangular pending image 702 in the normal display mode periodically swings up and down as an action effect. The period of oscillation in this motion performance is, for example, 2.0 seconds.

(Variable effect example 14)
FIG. 216 and FIG. 217 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, another specific example (variation effect example 14) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variable presentation example 14 is an example of variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state, and is an example of variable presentation when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restarted during execution of the variable presentation. It is. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 216(1), on the first special symbol display 60, the variable display of the previous special symbol has stopped. Moreover, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winnings to the first start opening 45 is displayed as "3". Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. Moreover, "3" is displayed on the hold count display 703 of the first starting port 45, and three hold images 702 are displayed. Furthermore, the number of executions image 705 shows the text "150 GAME", and the remaining number of times to reach image 708 shows the text "350 to go". Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Furthermore, although not shown, BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(2), variable display of the next special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, it is displayed in such a manner that the number of reservations for winning into the first start opening 45 is "2". Furthermore, with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary. Further, the number of reservations display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "2".

Next, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, as shown in FIG. 216(3), the LEDs in the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol reservation display 63 are turned off. Also, at this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, panel lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all turned off. Further, the audio output device 9 no longer outputs sound.

Next, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in FIG. 216(4), the fluctuation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 is restarted. Further, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, it is displayed in such a manner that the number of reservations for winning into the first start opening 45 is "2".
After that, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change to the tenth mode. The tenth aspect is an aspect of light emission that lights up in yellow-green color, and is a different aspect from any of the first aspect to the ninth aspect.
Thereafter, a returning image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70.
On the other hand, since the power to the gaming machine 1 was restored, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 216(5), the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 continue to fluctuate. Furthermore, the first image display device 70 continues to display the returning image 742. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol reservation display 63 displays a mode in which the number of reservations for winning into the first starting hole 45 is "3". . On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(6), the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 stops.
After that, the non-display effect of the returning image 742 is started, and the transparency of the returning image 742 becomes high. Then, by increasing the transparency of the returning image 742, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are displayed. Although it is not easily visible to players, it is visible to players. Further, at this time, all three pending images 702 are displayed in the completed display mode. That is, the third pending image 702 is displayed without the incomplete display mode becoming visible to the player. Further, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217(7), the non-display effect of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 becomes hidden. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are all easily visible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 "135" are fixed and stopped. In addition, “3” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Furthermore, the number-of-executions image 705 shows the text “151 GAME”, and the remaining number-of-games-to-reach image 708 shows the text “349 to go”. On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.
Also, at this time, the motion effects of the three pending images 702 are being executed, and all three pending images 702 are rotating clockwise from their initial positions before the motion effects are started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217(8), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to foretell that the next variable performance will start. To give an example, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice saying "The variable performance will start soon."
Further, at this time, the motion effects of the three pending images 702 are being continued, and the three pending images 702 are further rotating in the clockwise direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 217(9), variable display of the next special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, it is displayed in such a manner that the number of reservations for winning into the first start opening 45 is "2".
Thereafter, with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary. Further, the number of reservations display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "2". Further, the first pending image 702 is moved to the variable pedestal 701P, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Further, BGM corresponding to the variable performance being executed is outputted from the audio output device 9. Although illustration is omitted, after this, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable image 701 becomes hidden.

FIG. 218 is an explanatory diagram of each effect in the variation effect example 14.
As shown in FIG. 218, at time T1 of example 14 of variable effects, a variable effect in the normal gaming state is started. At this time, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 start to fluctuate, and the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 are easily visible to the player. Furthermore, at this time, the motion effects of the variable image 701 and the two pending images 702 are being executed, and the variable image 701 and the two pending images 702 are easily visible to the player. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the variable performance being executed is being output from the audio output device 9. The state at time T1 is the state shown in FIG. 216(2).

Thereafter, at time T2, the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the variable image 701, the reserved image 702, and the small pattern 704 are all no longer displayed. Moreover, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all turned off. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 no longer outputs sound. The state at time T2 is the state shown in FIG. 216(3).

Thereafter, at time T3, the power to the gaming machine 1 is restored.
Thereafter, at time T4, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change to the tenth mode.
Thereafter, at time T5, the returning image 742 is displayed. The state at time T5 is the state shown in FIG. 216(4).
Thereafter, at time T6, a game ball enters the first starting port 45.

Thereafter, at time T7, the variable performance that had been started before the power to the gaming machine 1 was cut off ends. Also, at this time, the non-display effect of the returning image 742 is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 become visible to the player. Also, at this time, display of the third pending image 702 is started. This third pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode. Also, at this time, the motion effects of the three pending images 702 are being executed. Further, at this time, all three pending images 702 become visible to the player. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. The state at time T7 is the state shown in FIG. 216(6).

Thereafter, at time T8, the non-display effect of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 is no longer displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the three reserved images 702, and the small pattern 704 are all easily visible to the player. The state at time T8 is the state shown in FIG. 217(7).
Thereafter, at time T9, a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to foretell that the next variable performance will start. The state at time T9 is the state shown in FIG. 217(8).

Thereafter, at time T10, the next variable performance is started. At this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to fluctuate. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the variable performance being executed is output from the audio output device 9.
Thereafter, at time T11, the first pending image 702 moves to the variable pedestal 701P, and the display of the variable image 701 is started. The state at time T11 is shown in FIG. 217 (9).
This is the state shown in .

As described above, in this embodiment, a prize is won after the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and while the special symbol that was being executed at the time of the power cut is changing, that is, while the returning image 742 is being displayed. In this case, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed without the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible to the player.
In this case, to the extent that the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode is not visible to the player, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode will be displayed to the player as soon as possible after the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored. Visible. Therefore, the player can be made aware as soon as possible that a hold will occur due to winning in the first start opening 45 while the returning image 742 is being displayed, that is, when the decorative pattern 700 and the stage image 706 are not being displayed. , can give players a sense of security.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored while there is a pending state, the pending The operation is displayed on the image 702 (see FIG. 217 (7)).
In this case, the held image 702 becomes more noticeable than when the held image 702 is not displayed in action. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to quickly recognize that the reservation held when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off is not lost due to the power cut.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored while there is a hold, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are stopped and displayed when they are redisplayed, but the hold image 702 is displayed in operation.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused, which may occur when the decorative pattern 700 or the small pattern 704 is displayed again when the movement is displayed, such as not being able to recognize which variation the movement is displayed in. . Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the reservation held when the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off is not lost due to the power cut.

Further, in this embodiment, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the hidden pending image 702 is gradually redisplayed (see FIG. 168 (15) and FIG. 168 (16)). On the other hand, when the game machine 1 is powered off and then restored while there is a hold, the hidden hold images 702 are displayed at once (see FIG. 217 (7)).
In this case, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the player can check that the hidden pending image 702 has not disappeared while suppressing the discomfort of the stage image 706 etc. being displayed again. can be recognized. In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is restored after being powered off, the player can be made aware as soon as possible that the hold held at the time of the power shutoff has not been lost due to the power shutoff, giving the player peace of mind. It can give a feeling. That is, by changing the manner in which the pending image 702 is redisplayed depending on whether or not the pending image 702 has been hidden by the effect, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, in this embodiment, when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, both the hidden variable image 701 and the suspended image 702 are redisplayed (see FIG. 168 (16)). On the other hand, if the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored while there is a hold, the hidden variable image 701 is not redisplayed, but the hold image 702 is redisplayed (see FIG. 217 (9). )reference).
In this case, when the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, it is difficult to make the player recognize that this SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is executed in the variable effect based on the variable image 701. can. In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored while there is a hold, the fluctuation image 701 may be redisplayed, and the variation that was being executed when the gaming machine 1 was powered off may be restarted. It is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the game will take place.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored while there is a hold, the hold image 702 is displayed before the effect sound is output (Fig. 217 (7), Fig. 217 (See (8)).
In this case, the player can be made aware of the pending number after the power of the gaming machine 1 is restored and before the variable performance is started.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the mode of outputting the sound is switched before the display of the pending image 702 is completed. On the other hand, when the game machine 1 is powered off and then restored while there is a hold, the display of the hold image 702 is completed before the effect sound is output. In other words, the output timing of the sound is determined depending on whether the pending image 702 is not displayed because there is no pending event or the pending image 702 is not displayed even though there is a pending event. , the chronological relationship with the display timing of the pending image 702 is reversed.
In this case, depending on the state of the gaming machine 1, by making the player recognize as soon as possible that the performance related to the special time-saving gaming state will start, or making the player recognize the number of reservations as soon as possible, No matter what state the gaming machine 1 is in, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game machine 1 is restored after being powered off, the effect sound is output after the restoration image 742 is hidden.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving the outputted performance sound as a sound related to power restoration, and to make the player recognize that the performance will resume.

In particular, in this embodiment, when winning a prize while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the mode of sound output is switched before the specific image is hidden. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 returns after being powered off, the effect sound is output after the returning image 742 is hidden. That is, the chronological relationship between the sound output timing and the image non-display timing is reversed depending on whether or not an image is displayed based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1.
In this case, depending on whether or not an image is displayed based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the player is made to recognize the effect while suppressing the player's misperception, or the effect is made to be recognized by the player as soon as possible. By making the values different, regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's interest to decrease.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the decorative pattern 700 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the output sound is a sound related to power restoration, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to a fluctuation effect. .

In particular, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the mode of outputting the sound is switched before the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the decorative pattern 700 becomes easily visible. That is, depending on whether or not the decorative pattern 700 becomes invisible based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the effect may be made to be recognized by the player while suppressing the player's misperception, or the effect may be changed at once. By varying whether or not the player is made to recognize the game quickly, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the small symbol 704 is displayed.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the output sound is a sound related to power restoration, and to make the player recognize that the output sound is a sound related to a fluctuation effect. .

In particular, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the mode of outputting the sound is switched before the small symbols 704 become easily visible. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restarted, the effect sound is output after the small pattern 704 becomes easily visible. That is, depending on whether or not the small pattern 704 becomes invisible based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, the effect may be made to be recognized by the player while suppressing the player's misperception, or the effect may be changed at once. By varying whether or not the player is made to recognize the game quickly, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the top lamp 10b emits light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the outputted sound is a sound related to power restoration, and to make the player recognize that the outputted sound is a sound related to the performance.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is changed before changing the top lamp 10b mode. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the top lamp 10b switches from the off mode to the light emission mode. That is, depending on whether or not the top lamp 10b has changed to a specific state based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, either the player is made to recognize the effect while suppressing the player's misperception, or the effect is changed to the game as soon as possible. By differentiating whether the player is made to recognize the game, regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored, the performance sound is output after the board lamp 74b emits light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the outputted sound is a sound related to power restoration, and to make the player recognize that the outputted sound is a sound related to the performance.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is changed before changing the mode of the board lamp 74b. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored, the performance sound is output after the panel lamp 74b switches from the off mode to the light emitting mode. That is, depending on whether or not the board lamp 74b has changed to a specific state based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, either the player can be made aware of the effect while suppressing the player's misperception, or the effect can be changed to the game as soon as possible. By making the player recognize the game differently, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose interest regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c emit light.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the outputted sound is a sound related to power restoration, and to make the player recognize that the outputted sound is a sound related to the performance.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance, the sound output mode is switched before switching the modes of the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored, the effect sound is output after the movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c are switched from the off mode to the light emission mode. That is, depending on whether the movable member lamp 74c or the button lamp 17c has changed to a specific state based on a change in the state of the gaming machine 1, whether or not the player is made to recognize the performance while suppressing the player's misperception; By varying whether the player is made to recognize the performance as soon as possible, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing regardless of the state of the gaming machine 1.

(Variable effect example 15)
FIG. 219 and FIG. 220 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220, another specific example (variation presentation example 15) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variable performance example 15 is an example of a variable performance based on winning in the second starting port 47 in the special time-saving gaming state, and is a variable performance in the case where the power of the gaming machine 1 is restored after being cut off during execution of the variable performance. This is an example. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 219(1), on the second special symbol display 61, the variable display of the previous special symbol has stopped. In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed in such a manner that the number of reservations for winnings to the first start opening 45 is "0", that is, the light is turned off. Further, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for winnings to the second start opening 47 is displayed as "3". Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. In addition, “0” is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “3” is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Additionally, three pending images 702 are displayed. Further, the text “700” is shown in the special time saving remaining number image 738. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is shown as a stage image 706. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second embodiment. Furthermore, although not shown, BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219(2), variable display of the next special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 61. Further, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for winnings to the second start opening 47 is displayed in a manner that is "2". Furthermore, with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary. Further, the number of reservations display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "2". Further, the display content of the special time saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "699".

Next, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, as shown in FIG. 219(3), the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol reservation display 63, and the second special symbol reservation display 64 The LED at turns off. Also, at this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, panel lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all turned off. Further, the audio output device 9 no longer outputs sound.

Next, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in FIG. 219(4), the fluctuation of the special symbols on the second special symbol display 61 is restarted. Further, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for winnings to the second start opening 47 is displayed in a manner that is "2".
After that, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change to the tenth mode.
Thereafter, the returning image 742 and the second right-handed hit image 725 are displayed on the first image display device 70 .
On the other hand, since the power to the gaming machine 1 was restored, no sound has been output from the audio output device 9.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 219(5), the special symbols on the second special symbol display 61 continue to fluctuate. Furthermore, the first image display device 70 continues to display the returning image 742. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol reservation display 63 displays a display in which the number of reservations for winning into the first starting hole 45 is "1". . On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . Further, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed according to an aspect. On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70 . Further, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed according to an aspect. On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(8), the variable display of the special symbols on the second special symbol display 61 stops.
After that, the non-display effect of the returning image 742 is started, and when the transparency of the returning image 742 becomes high, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, and the special time saving remaining Although the number of times image 738 is not easily visible to the player, it becomes visible to the player. Further, at this time, the third pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effect. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(9), the non-display effect of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 becomes hidden. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the special time saving remaining number of times image 738 are easily visible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 "135" are fixed and stopped. Further, the number of reservations display 703 of the first starting port 45 shows "2", and the number of reservations display 703 of the second starting port 47 shows "3". Further, the text “699” is shown in the special time saving remaining number image 738. Furthermore, at this time, the action presentation of the pending images 702 is being executed, and all three pending images 702 have moved to the right from their initial positions before the action presentation was started. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (10), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to foretell that the next variable performance will start. Further, at this time, the action presentation of the pending images 702 is being continued, and all three pending images 702 have moved to the left from the initial position before the action presentation was started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (11), variable display of the next special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 61. Further, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for winnings to the second start opening 47 is displayed in a manner that is "2".
Thereafter, with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "2". Furthermore, the first pending image 702 is moved to the variable pedestal 701P, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Further, BGM corresponding to the variable performance being executed is outputted from the audio output device 9. Although illustration is omitted, after this, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable image 701 becomes hidden.

(Variable effect example 16)
FIGS. 221 to 223 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, another specific example (variation effect example 16) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variable performance example 16 is an example of the first variable performance based on winning in the first starting port 45 in the special time-saving gaming state, and is a case where the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and then restored during execution of the variable performance. This is an example of a variation effect. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times necessary to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state. In addition, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball winning in either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the final round of variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 221(1), A customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all have an eighth aspect. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the special time saving game state is in effect. The state shown in FIG. 221(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 195(5) in the variation effect example 10.
Further, in the second special symbol reservation display 64, the number of reservations for winnings to the second start opening 47 is displayed as "0". In other words, the LED in the second special symbol reservation display 64 is off.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. will be started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221(3), the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (4), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 is increased, so that the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the execution number image 705 , the stage image 706, and the remaining number-of-arrivals image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are in a state where they are visible to the player. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(5), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 further increases. Moreover, at this time, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, display of the pending image 702 is started. On the other hand, the staged display effect is not executed, and the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221(6), the hiding effect of the customer waiting image 710 is completed, and the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are easily visible to the player. Also, at this time, the fluctuation start operation is in progress. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 222(7), the movement at the start of the variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown, BGM corresponding to the variable performance being executed is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, as shown in FIG. 222(8), the first image display device 70, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are turned off. All lights go out. Further, the audio output device 9 no longer outputs sound.

Next, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is restored, the variable display of the special symbols is restarted. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 222(9), the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all change to the tenth mode.
Thereafter, a returning image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70. On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.
In addition, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 47 while the returning image 742 is displayed, the number of pending prizes for winning in the second starting port 47 will be displayed on the second special symbol holding display 64 as “ 1”. On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, when the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 222 (10), the non-display effect of the returning image 742 is started, and the transparency of the returning image 742 becomes high. Then, by increasing the transparency of the returning image 742, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, and the special time saving remaining number image 738 are displayed to the player. Although it is not easy to see, it is visible to the player. Further, at this time, the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effect. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as a stage image 706. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. Further, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (11), the non-display effect of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 becomes hidden. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the special time saving remaining number of times image 738 are easily visible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 "135" are fixed and stopped. Further, the hold number display 703 of the first starting port 45 shows “0”, and the hold number display 703 of the second starting port 47 shows “1”. Further, the text “749” is shown in the special time saving remaining number image 738. Furthermore, at this time, the action rendering of the pending image 702 is being executed, and the pending image 702 has moved to the left from the initial position before the action rendering was started. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 222 (12), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to foretell that the next variable performance will start. Further, at this time, the action presentation of the pending image 702 is being continued, and the pending image 702 has moved to the right from the initial position before the action presentation was started.

Next, when the special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary, as shown in FIG. 223 (13). Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0". Furthermore, the first pending image 702 is moved to the variable pedestal 701P, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. Further, the display content of the special time saving remaining number image 738 is updated to "748". Further, BGM corresponding to the variable performance being executed is outputted from the audio output device 9. Although illustration is omitted, after this, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped, and the variable image 701 becomes hidden.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while the special time saving gaming state is changing and a special image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, the special time saving A special image is displayed depending on the gaming state.
In this case, even if the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the player can quickly recognize that the gaming machine 1 is in the special time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off and then restored while the variation in the special time-saving gaming state is stopped and the decorative pattern 700 or stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, Decorative symbols 700 and stage images 706 corresponding to the normal game state are displayed again. In this case, the special image corresponding to the special time saving game state is not displayed unless a prize is won in the first starting port 45 or a winning in the second starting port 47 occurs.

(Variable effect example 17)
FIG. 224 and FIG. 225 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225, another specific example (variation presentation example 17) of the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variable presentation example 17 is an example of variable presentation based on winning at the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state, and is an example of variable presentation when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restarted during execution of the variable presentation. It is. In addition, in the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, after the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, by completing the final variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state, the gaming machine 1 is not controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, but returns to the normal time-saving gaming state. Controlled by gaming state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 224(1), "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 700, is fixed and stopped on the first image display device 70. Further, at this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is shown as a stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state. Also, at this time, four pending images 702, an execution count image 705, and a left-handed image 730 are displayed. Further, the execution number image 705 shows the text “1253 GAME”. Further, in the first special symbol display 60, the variable display of the previous special symbol has stopped. Further, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations for winnings to the first start opening 45 is displayed as "4". The state shown in FIG. 224(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 191(29) in variation effect example 9.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 224(2), the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the next special symbol in a variable manner. Further, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, it is displayed in such a manner that the number of reservations for winning into the first start opening 45 is "3". Further, with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary. Further, BGM corresponding to the variable performance being executed is outputted from the audio output device 9.

Next, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the LEDs in the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol reservation display 63 are turned off, as shown in FIG. 224(3). Also, at this time, the first image display device 70, top lamp 10b, panel lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all turned off. Further, the audio output device 9 no longer outputs sound.

Next, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is restored, as shown in FIG. 224(4), the fluctuation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 is restarted. Further, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, it is displayed in such a manner that the number of reservations for winning into the first start opening 45 is "3".
After that, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all have ten modes.
Thereafter, a returning image 742 is displayed on the first image display device 70.
On the other hand, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224(5), the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 continue to fluctuate. Furthermore, the first image display device 70 continues to display the returning image 742. Also, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol reservation display 63 displays a mode in which the number of reservations for winning into the first starting hole 45 is "4". . On the other hand, neither the pending image 702 nor the pending number display 703 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224(6), the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 60 stops.
After that, the non-display effect of the returning image 742 is started, and the transparency of the returning image 742 becomes high, so that the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the pending number display 703, the small pattern 704, the execution number image 705, and Although the stage image 706 is not easily visible to the player, it becomes visible to the player. Further, at this time, the fourth pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effect. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the tenth mode to the second mode. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(7), the non-display effect of the returning image 742 ends, and the returning image 742 becomes hidden. Thereby, the decorative pattern 700, the reserved image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, and the stage image 706 are in a state where they are easily visible to the player. Further, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 "135" are fixed and stopped. Moreover, "4" is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706. Further, at this time, the action presentation of the pending image 702 is being executed, and all four pending images 702 are rotating clockwise from the initial position before the action presentation is started. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.
Here, the execution number image 705 displays content different from the content displayed immediately before the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (see FIG. 224(2)). In the illustrated example, the execution count image 705 shows the text “???”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(8), a warning sound is output from the audio output device 9 to foretell that the next variable performance will start. Further, at this time, the action rendering of the held images 702 is continued, and the four held images 702 are further rotated in the clockwise direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225(9), variable display of the next special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol reservation display 63, it is displayed in such a manner that the number of reservations for winning into the first start opening 45 is "3".
After that, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to fluctuate. Further, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "3". Further, BGM corresponding to the variable performance being executed is outputted from the audio output device 9. Also, at this time, a through effect is executed. The through performance is a performance to notify that the game machine 1 has been controlled to the normal game state again without executing the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot in the special time-saving game state. In the through effect, the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become the eleventh mode. The eleventh aspect is a mode of light emission that flashes periodically in purple, and is a mode different from any of the first aspect to the tenth aspect. Further, the blinking period in the eleventh aspect is, for example, 2.0 seconds. That is, the blinking cycle in the eleventh aspect is longer than the blinking cycle in the winning light emission effect and the blinking cycle suggesting or notifying the occurrence of an error.

In this way, the special time-saving gaming state can be executed only once during a jackpot, and if the power is cut off and then restored during the normal gaming state after the special time-saving gaming state ends, the special time-saving gaming state has already been executed. It is possible to execute a specific notification (display of "???" in the execution number image 705, light emission of a lamp in a specific manner) that suggests this. Therefore, it is possible to give kindly notification to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the special time-saving gaming state can be executed only once during a jackpot, and if the power is restored after a power outage during the normal gaming state after the end of the special time-saving gaming state, the first notification will be sent to notify that the power has been restored. (display of the returning image 742) and a second notification indicating that the special time-saving game state has been executed (the number of executions image 705 "???" displayed, the lamp emitting light in a specific manner) can be executed. It is. Therefore, it is possible to give kindly notification to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the power is cut off during the normal gaming state after the end of the special time-saving gaming state and then restored, the error lamp is blinked with a specific notification, but it is blinked in a different manner from when there is an error (magnetic error, etc.).
In addition, specific notification is performed by setting the information displayed during the normal gaming state (execution number image 705) to a specific display mode ("???").
In addition, when the control is performed from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state without going through the jackpot game, "???" is displayed in the execution count image 705 regardless of whether the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off or not. may be displayed. That is, during the normal gaming state after the end of the special time-saving gaming state and before returning after the power is cut off, the first specific notification (execution number image 705 "???") is issued, and the power is cut off before returning. After that, the first specific notification and the second specific notification (the lamp emits light in a specific manner) may be performed.

Furthermore, when the gaming machine 1 returns after the power is cut off while being controlled from the normal time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state, it is set to the first stage, but even in this case, the clear negative image 744 is displayed. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state without going through the jackpot game and returns after the power is cut off, the clear negative image 744 is not displayed. In other words, if the power is turned off in the second performance mode (fifth stage) after the end of the normal time-saving gaming state, and the power is turned off and then returned, even if the control returns to the first performance mode (first stage) after returning, the RAM will not be cleared or not. It is possible to execute such specific notification (display of clear negative image 744, etc.), and if the power is restored after the power is cut off in the second performance mode (fifth stage) after the end of the special time-saving game state, the first performance mode will be activated after recovery. (first stage), specific notification (display of clear denial image 744, etc.) regarding whether or not the RAM has been cleared is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of useful information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off while the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state again without being controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state. Although it has been explained that the text "???" is displayed in the execution count image 705 when the program returns after being interrupted, the present invention is not limited to this.
After being controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, if the normal gaming state is controlled again without being controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state will be maintained regardless of whether the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off or not. When the stage image 706 corresponding to the stage image 706 is displayed (see FIG. 224(1)), the text "???" may be shown in the execution count image 705.

(Variable effect example 18)
FIG. 226 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, with reference to FIG. 226, another specific example (variable effect example 18) of the variable effect of the decorative pattern 700 will be described. Variable performance example 18 is an example of a variable performance when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47 while a pre-reading performance based on a winning in the first starting port 45 is being executed. In addition, in the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 226(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped by the performance control section 130m. Also, at this time, two pending images 702 are displayed. Further, the second pending image 702 is displayed in green. The display of this green pending image 702 is an example of a look-ahead effect. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is displayed as a stage image 706. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Furthermore, although not shown, BGM corresponding to the previous variable performance is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226(2), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Also, at this time, the zone effect is started and the zone notification image 743 is displayed. Further, while the zone performance is being executed, the display content of the stage image 706 changes. In the illustrated example, the background corresponding to the eighth stage is shown as the stage image 706.

Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 226(3).
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "412" temporarily stop and then permanently stop, as shown in FIG. 226(4). Also, at this time, the display mode of the first pending image 702 is switched from the green display mode to the normal display mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 226(5), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0". That is, the variable performance being executed at this time is a variable performance based on winning in the second start opening 47. Also, at this time, the zone notification image 743 is not displayed. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the first stage is shown as a stage image 706.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "721" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 226(6). After this, the first pending image 702 moves to the variable pedestal 701P, and a variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 45 is executed. In this variation effect, the variation image 701 is displayed in a normal display mode, and when the variation effect ends, the variation image 701 is hidden.

In this way, when the fluctuation based on winning in the second starting opening 47 is prioritized over the fluctuation based on winning in the first starting opening 45, and the change is based on winning in the first starting opening 45 during the normal gaming state. During the execution of the pre-read performance based on winning a prize, when a winning in the second starting port 47 occurs, the pre-reading presentation based on the winning in the first starting port 45 is terminated. Therefore, the inconvenience that the look-ahead performance based on winning in the first starting hole 45 is disturbed by winning in the second starting hole 47 does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the special 1 pre-reading performance (display of the green pending image 702) is ended at the finalization timing (end timing) of the fluctuation based on the winning in the first start opening 45.
In addition, when a pre-reading effect in which the background changes is being performed, the pre-reading effect is ended at the fluctuation start timing based on winning in the second start opening 47.
Further, for example, in a case where a pre-reading effect is being executed based on a prize winning in the first starting hole 45, while a variable effect based on a winning in the first starting hole 45 is stopped, a game ball is placed in the second starting hole 47. may win a prize. In this case, the pre-read performance is ended at the timing of winning the second start opening 47.

(Variable effect example 19)
FIG. 227 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 130m using the first image display device 70.
Next, with reference to FIG. 227, another specific example of the variable effect (variable effect example 19) will be described. Variable performance example 19 is a variable performance example based on winning in the second starting port 47 in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples will be mainly explained, and the description of the points that are the same as each variation presentation example may be omitted.

First, after the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, by completing the final variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state, the gaming machine 1 is not controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, but returns to the normal time-saving gaming state. Controlled by gaming state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 227(1), the first transition image 728 is displayed on the first image display device 70. In addition, “0” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “1” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Moreover, at this time, "254" which is a small pattern 704 is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227(2), the small symbol 704 starts to fluctuate as the next special symbol begins to fluctuate. Further, the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47 switches to "0". Further, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting port, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. On the other hand, the pending image 702 is not displayed, and the winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.
However, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 while the first transition image 728 is displayed, a winning sound may be output.

Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the three small symbols 704 "421" are displayed together and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 227(3). Further, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting port, "2" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. On the other hand, the pending image 702 is not displayed, and the winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.

Then, when the variable performance based on the winning at the second starting port 47 ends without reservation based on the winning at the second starting port 47, the first image display device 70 is displayed as shown in FIG. 227(4). , "421", which is a highly decorative decorative pattern 700, is fixed and stopped. Further, at this time, a background corresponding to the fifth stage is shown as a stage image 706 corresponding to the normal game state. Also, at this time, two pending images 702 are displayed. These two pending images 702 are displayed in a completed display mode without performing a staged display effect. Further, although not shown, both of the two pending images 702 are performing motion effects. Further, the fluctuation image 701 is not displayed.

Next, as the special symbols stop varying, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary, as shown in FIG. 227(5). Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, the second pending image 702 moves toward the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, as the first pending image 702 moves toward the variable pedestal 701P, the variable image 701 is displayed. Although illustration is omitted, after this, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 are fixed and stopped as the special pattern stops changing.

(Variable effect example 20)
FIGS. 228 to 234 are diagrams showing example 20 of variation effects.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 228 to 234, another specific example of the variation effect example (variation effect example 20) will be described. The variable performance example 20 is a variable performance example when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, as the previous special symbol stops changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 are fixed and stopped. Next, when a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball winning in either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 with no pending winnings in the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. ), a customer waiting image 710 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 are in a state where they are difficult or invisible to the player. On the other hand, the pending number display 703 continues to be easily visible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become in the eighth mode. Further, at this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 228(2), the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of reaches image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all continue to be in the eighth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228(3), the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the second mode. Further, at this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 continue to be difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the winning sound continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228 (4), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is executed, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 becomes high, so that the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705 , the stage image 706, and the remaining number-of-arrivals image 708 are not easily visible to the player, but are in a state where they are visible to the player. On the other hand, neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Moreover, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228(5), the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 progresses, and the transparency of the customer waiting image 710 further increases. Moreover, at this time, with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, display of the pending image 702 is started. More specifically, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effect. Although this pending image 702 is not easily visible to the player, it is visible to the player. Moreover, at this time, the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 228(6), the hiding effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends, and the customer waiting image 710 becomes hidden. As a result, the decorative pattern 700, the pending image 702, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are easily visible to the player. Also, the operation is in progress at the start of the fluctuation. Also, at this time, the winning sound continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 229(7), the movement at the start of variation is completed, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Moreover, at this time, the winning sound is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 229(8). Further, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229(9), the staged display performance is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (10), the left decorative pattern 700 "4" is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (11), the right decorative symbol 700 "4" is temporarily stopped and the ready-to-win effect is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (12), the development effect is executed. In the advanced performance, the movable performance is executed and the first emphasized image 711 is displayed. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the fourth mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (13), the SP reach effect is executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 712 is displayed. Further, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all become in the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 713 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (15), a promotion effect is executed and a button operation image 714 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 17 while the button operation image 714 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 230 (16), "3", which is the medium decorative pattern 700, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 230 (17), a first eye-catching image 715 is displayed.
Next, when the first eye-catching image 715 is hidden, as shown in FIG. 230 (18), the three decorative patterns 700 "434" are temporarily stopped in a state where they are easily visible to the player. has been done.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 700 and the small symbol 704 "434" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 231 (19). In addition, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "201 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of times to reach image 708 is updated to "299 remaining". Also, at this time, the variable image 701 is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (20), the small symbol 704 starts to fluctuate as the next special symbol begins to fluctuate. On the other hand, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 has not started. Furthermore, the pending image 702 is not moving toward the variable pedestal 701P, but is displayed on the pending pedestal 702P.

Next, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, a staged display effect of the reserved image 702 is started as shown in FIG. 231 (21). In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the first pending pedestal 702P. This pending image 702 is displayed in the first stage display mode (see FIG. 160(1)) in the staged display effect. In addition, as the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the winning sound.

Next, as the stage display effect of the pending image 702 progresses, as shown in FIG. 231 (22), the third stage of the stage display effect (see FIG. 160 (3)) is displayed on the first hold pedestal 702P. A pending image 702 consisting of display modes is displayed. Further, at this time, two pending images 702 are displayed on the first pending pedestal 702P so as to overlap each other. More specifically, a pending image 702 in the third stage display mode in the stage display effect and a pending image 702 in the completed display mode are displayed so as to overlap. Moreover, at this time, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the variation start operation is started. Moreover, at this time, the output of the winning sound continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (23), when the staged display effect of the pending image 702 is completed, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, the pending image 702 that was displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P in the example shown in FIG. 231 (22) moves to the variable pedestal 701P, so that the variable image 701 is displayed. . Also, at this time, the fluctuation start operation is in progress. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 231 (24), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 232 (25), a winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is outputted from the audio output device 9. Also, at this time, "2" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Further, regarding the second pending image 702, the completed display mode is moved to the second pending pedestal 702P without performing a staged display effect, that is, without making the unfinished display mode visible to the player. Is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (26), the left decorative pattern 700 "7" is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (27), the right decorative pattern 700 "1" is temporarily stopped.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 232 (28), the audio output device 9 starts outputting a winning sound that notifies the winning to the first starting port 45. . Further, at this time, "3" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Further, at this time, a staged display effect of the third pending image 702 is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode at a position upwardly away from the third pending pedestal 702P.
Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (29), the staged display performance is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the third pending pedestal 702P. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "721" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 232 (30). Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "202 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of times to reach image 708 is updated to "298 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (31), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary. Further, the number of reservations display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "2".
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "483" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 233 (32). Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "203 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of runs image 708 is updated to "297 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (33), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "1".
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "532" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 233 (34). Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "204 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of times to reach image 708 is updated to "296 remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (35), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary. Further, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0".
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "327" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 233 (36). Also, at this time, the display content of the number of executions image 705 is updated to "205 GAME", and the display content of the remaining number of times to reach image 708 is updated to "295 remaining".

Then, when a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball hitting either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the special symbols stop changing, the adjusted image is displayed as shown in FIG. 234 (37). 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Further, at this time, the audio output device 9 no longer outputs sound.
Furthermore, if a predetermined period of time passes after the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed without a game ball winning in either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 234 (38), A customer waiting image 710 is displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the number of executions image 705, the stage image 706, and the remaining number of times reached image 708 are difficult or invisible to the player. Also, at this time, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the second mode to the eighth mode. Further, the state in which no sound is output from the audio output device 9 continues. The state shown in FIG. 234 (38) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 228 (1).

As described above, in variable performance example 20, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal gaming state, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made difficult or invisible, and then the completed image is displayed. It has been explained that the pending image 702 of the mode is made visible or easily visible. Here, in the normal gaming state, even if a prize is won while the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are displayed, the example shown in variable performance example 20 The same effect may be performed. That is, in the normal gaming state, if a prize is won while the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the first stage are displayed, the pending image in the incomplete display mode will not be executed because the stage display effect is not executed. The pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be easily visible while the pending image 702 remains invisible.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 of the incomplete display size is made difficult or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, if the player is made to view the pending image 702 in the unfinished display size and then the pending image 702 in the completed display size, the specific image After starting the non-display effect, it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 of the unfinished display size. In this case, if you win a prize when the specific image is displayed than if you win a prize when the specific image is not displayed, the pending image 702 of the completed display size will The display timing will be delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 of the unfinished display size is made difficult or invisible, and the pending image 702 of the completed display size is displayed without delay. It is possible to prevent the display timing of the pending image 702 from being shifted depending on whether or not a specific image is displayed at the time depending on the completed display size.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the unfinished pending image 702 is made difficult or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is displayed, if the player is made to view the pending image 702 in an unfinished form and then the held image 702 in a completed form, the non-specific image may be displayed. After starting the display effect, it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 in an unfinished form. In this case, if you win a prize when the specific image is displayed than if you win a prize when the specific image is not displayed, the amount of the retained image 702 in the completed form will be reduced by the amount of execution of the non-display effect. The display timing will be delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 in the unfinished form is made difficult or invisible, and the pending image 702 in the completed form is displayed without delay. It is possible to prevent the display timing of the pending image 702 in the completed form from shifting depending on whether the image is being displayed or not.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 with incomplete transparency is made difficult or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, if the player is made to view the pending image 702 with incomplete transparency and then the pending image 702 with completed transparency, the specific image After starting the non-display effect, it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 with incomplete transparency. In this case, if you win a prize when the specific image is displayed than if you win a prize when the specific image is not displayed, the amount of the completed transparency pending image 702 will increase by the amount of execution of the hidden effect. The display timing will be delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 with incomplete transparency is made difficult or invisible, and the pending image 702 with completed transparency is displayed without delay. It is possible to prevent the display timing of the pending image 702 from being shifted due to the degree of completion transparency depending on whether or not a specific image is being displayed at the time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 of the incomplete motion mode is made difficult or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, if the player is made to see the pending image 702 in an unfinished motion mode and then the action effect of the pending image 702 is made to be visible, the specific image's After starting the non-display effect, it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 of the unfinished operation mode. In this case, if you win a prize when the specific image is displayed than if you win a prize when the specific image is not displayed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 will be affected by the amount of execution of the non-display effect. The execution timing will be delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 in the unfinished motion mode is made difficult or invisible, and the action of the pending image 702 is performed without delay, making it possible to identify the prize at the time of winning. It is possible to prevent the execution timing of the motion performance by the pending image 702 from being shifted depending on whether the image is being displayed or not.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 at the unfinished display position is made difficult or invisible.
Even if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, if the player is made to see the pending image 702 in the incomplete display position and then the pending image 702 in the completed display position, the specific image After starting the non-display effect, it is necessary to start displaying the pending image 702 at the unfinished display position. In this case, if you win a prize when the specific image is displayed than if you win a prize when the specific image is not displayed, the amount of the pending image 700 at the completed display position will increase by the amount of execution of the hidden effect. The display timing will be delayed. Therefore, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the pending image 702 at the unfinished display position is made difficult or invisible, and the pending image 702 at the completed display position is displayed without delay. It is possible to prevent the display timing of the pending image 702 at the completed display position from shifting depending on whether or not a specific image is being displayed at the time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the pending image 702 becomes visible to the player. Therefore, regardless of the content displayed on the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won a prize.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored while there is a hold, the hold image 702 becomes visible to the player before the effect sound is output. Become. In other words, the output timing of the sound is determined depending on whether the pending image 702 is not displayed because there is no pending event, or whether the pending image 702 is not displayed even though there is a pending event. , the chronological relationship with the display timing of the pending image 702 is reversed.
In this case, depending on the state of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the production as soon as possible or to make the player recognize the number of reservations as soon as possible, so that the gaming machine 1 Even in such a situation, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the mode of sound output is switched before the specific image is completely hidden. Therefore, even when the player takes his eyes off the gaming machine 1, it becomes easy for the player to quickly recognize that he has won a prize.

In particular, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the sound output mode is switched before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. Therefore, even if the game situation is not recognized by the player from the content displayed on the first image display device 70 by the customer waiting image 710, it is possible to make the player recognize as soon as possible that he or she has won a prize.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while a specific image is being displayed, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c and the button lamp 17c are switched. Therefore, regardless of the content displayed on the first image display device 70, the player can quickly recognize that he or she has won a prize.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the SP reach effect or the next variable effect after the SPSP reach effect has been executed, if a prize is won within a predetermined period, the unfinished display mode of the pending image 702 is visually recognized. The pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed without any interruption (see FIG. 232 (25)). In this way, in the next variable performance after the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance has been executed, by not allowing the player to see the specific performance, it is possible to make it clear that the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance has been executed. This allows players to experience a sense of accomplishment for a long time.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in the normal gaming state and is in the first stage, the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode) , unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made difficult or invisible (see FIG. 228 (6)). On the other hand, if a prize is won when a specific image is displayed in the normal gaming state and is in the second stage, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is made visible or easily visible (Fig. 166(2) )reference).

In addition, in this embodiment, the sound output in the case where the background as the stage image 706 is the first stage and the case where the background is the second stage, and when a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, is Although the chronological relationship between the timing of switching the mode, the timing of switching the mode of each lamp, and the timing of displaying or non-displaying the image is different, the present invention is not limited to this.
Even if a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed and the second stage is displayed, the image will be displayed at the timing of switching the sound output mode and the timing of switching the various lamp modes. The chronological relationship with the timing of display or non-display may be the same as when winning a prize while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed and in the first stage. That is, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed and the second stage is on, first the mode is switched from the state in which no sound is output to the mode in which the winning sound is output (see FIG. 228 (2). ), then the top lamp 10b, panel lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c may all be switched from the eighth mode to the second mode (see FIG. 228(3)). Thereafter, after starting the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710, the decorative pattern 700, the small pattern 704, the stage image 706, etc. may be made visible to the player (see FIG. 228 (4)). ). Furthermore, after that, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 may be completed after the pending image 702 is made visible to the player (see FIGS. 228(5) and 228(6)).

(Fluctuation effect example 21)
235 and 236 are diagrams showing example 21 of variation effects.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, another specific example of the variation production example (variation production example 21) will be described. In variation performance example 21, the variation performance is executed twice. The first variable presentation of these two variable presentations is a variable presentation when a game ball enters the first start opening 45 in the normal time-saving gaming state. Moreover, the second variable presentation of the two variable presentations is a variable presentation when a game ball enters the second start opening 47 in the normal time-saving gaming state. In the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 235(1), the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 "444" are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, a background corresponding to the third stage is shown as a stage image 706. Further, the text “100 times” is displayed in the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726. In addition, “1” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, and “0” is shown in the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47. Note that neither the variable image 701 nor the pending image 702 is displayed. Further, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all in the second mode. Further, although not shown, BGM corresponding to the normal time saving gaming state is continuously output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(2), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the decorative symbols 700 and the small symbols 704 begin to vary. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0".
Next, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the second starting port 47, as shown in FIG. 235(3). Also, at this time, a staged display effect of the pending image 702 is started. In the illustrated example, the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 to notify the winning to the second starting port 47 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(4), the staged display effect is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first pending pedestal 702P in the completed display mode. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Furthermore, the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.
Next, as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "853" are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 235(5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 235(6), with the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 begin to vary. Further, at this time, the display content of the normal time saving remaining number of times image 726 is updated to "99 times". Further, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P, the variable image 701 is displayed. Further, at this time, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. On the other hand, the pending image 702 is not displayed and the staged display effect is not executed. Further, the winning sound notifying the winning to the first starting port 45 is not output.
Next, as shown in FIG. 236(7), as the special symbols stop changing, the decorative symbol 700 and the small symbol 704 "421" are fixed and stopped. Furthermore, the variable image 701 is hidden.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 while the variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 45 is executed, the pending image in the incomplete display mode is displayed. 702 becomes visible or easily visible to the player. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while a variable effect based on winning in the second starting port 47 is being executed, a pending image 702 in an unfinished display mode is displayed to the player. visible.

(Fluctuation effect example 22)
FIG. 237 is a diagram showing example 22 of variation effects.
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, another specific example of the variation production example (variation production example 22) will be described. Variable presentation example 22 is an example in which a variable presentation based on winning in the first starting opening 45 is performed as the first variable presentation in the special time saving game state. In addition, in the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times necessary to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state. In addition, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball hitting either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the final round of variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 237(1), A customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all have an eighth aspect. Also, at this time, a notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 to notify that the special time saving game state is in effect. The state shown in FIG. 237(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 195(5) in the variation effect example 10.
Although not shown, the background corresponding to the second stage is shown as the stage image 706 until the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Since the customer waiting image 710 has been displayed, the stage image 706 is in a state where it is difficult or impossible for the player to see it.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. will be started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 237(3), the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all switch from the eighth mode to the second mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 237(4), the customer waiting image 710 is hidden. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to fluctuate. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 237(5), the fluctuation start operation proceeds. Further, at this time, the staged display performance is completed, and the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 237(6), the movement at the start of variation ends, and the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9. Although not shown, after this, the second transition image 734 (see FIG. 197 (16)) is displayed, and the stage image 706 is switched to the background corresponding to the sixth stage (see FIG. 198 (20)). , the variable performance ends.

As described above, in the variable performance example 22, if a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time saving gaming state and the second stage is the second stage, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is displayed. It has been explained that the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is made visible or easy to see after making it visible or easy to see. Here, in the special time-saving game state, if a prize is won before the start of the first variable performance and when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the second stage are displayed. However, the same effect as the example shown in variable effect example 22 may be executed. That is, in the special time-saving game state, if a prize is won before the start of the first variable performance and when the stage image 706, adjustment image 716, and menu image 717 corresponding to the second stage are displayed, the incomplete display is displayed. After the pending image 702 of the mode is made visible or easily visible, the pending image 702 of the completed display mode may be made visible or easy to see.

As mentioned above, even if a prize is won in the first starting slot 45 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, etc.) The pending image 702 (unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) may be made visible or easily visible to the player.
In particular, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and is in the first stage, a specific unfinished display mode ( The reserved image 702 (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made difficult or invisible to the player (see FIG. 196 (10)). On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and is in the second stage, the reserved image 702 in a predetermined incomplete display mode is displayed. To make it visible or easily visible to players. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and is in the first stage or the second stage, which display mode is the pending image 702? However, you may choose not to display it. However, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and is in the first stage or second stage, the pending image 702 May be displayed.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 in the special time saving game state before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped in the first stage and there is no hold. To do this, make the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, and then change it to the completed display mode. The pending image 702 (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped in the second stage and there is no hold, the game ball enters the first start opening 45. In this case, the pending image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then the completed image is displayed. The pending image 702 of the aspects (completed size, completed form, completed operation manner, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In addition, in the special time saving game state, before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped in the first stage or the second stage and there is no hold, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 47. If the player wins a prize, the pending image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, in the special time-saving game state, before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped in the first stage or the second stage and there is no hold, the game ball enters the second starting port 47. Even if the player wins a prize, the pending image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the specific unfinished After making the pending image 702 of the display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, The pending image 702 (completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the second stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, a predetermined amount of money will be awarded. After making the pending image 702 of the completed display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easy to see, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form) is displayed. , completed operation mode, completed transparency, and completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In addition, if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 while the special symbols are stopped and a special image corresponding to the first stage or the second stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, The pending image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, if the game ball enters the second starting port 47 while the special symbols are stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage or the second stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, Also, a pending image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while a specific image is displayed in the first stage, a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form) , unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made difficult or invisible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display) is made difficult or invisible. The held image 702 of the location) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while a specific image is displayed in the second stage, a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished After making the pending image 702 visible or easy to see (form, unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position), display the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed). The reserved image 702 at the display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 while a specific image is being displayed in the first stage or the second stage, the pending image 702 will be displayed in either display mode. You may choose not to do so. However, regardless of the gaming state, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 when a specific image is displayed in the first stage or the second stage, even if the pending image 702 is displayed. good.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 when the special symbols are stopped and there is no hold in the first stage, a specific unfinished display mode ( After making the pending image 702 of unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position difficult to see or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode) is , completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 when the special symbols are stopped and there is no hold in the second stage, a predetermined incomplete display mode is displayed. After making the pending image 702 of (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished movement mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easy to see, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed movement The pending image 702 (aspect, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the second start opening 47 when the special symbols are stopped in the first stage or the second stage and there is no hold, the hold image 702 may not be displayed in any display mode. However, regardless of the gaming state, even if a game ball enters the second start opening 47 when the special symbols are stopped in the first stage or the second stage and there is no hold, the hold will not be held. Image 702 may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of the stage, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) while a specific image is displayed, a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished size, unfinished size, unfinished After making the pending image 702 of the completed form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position difficult or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, The pending image 702 at the completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.
In addition, regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a normal time-saving game state, or a special time-saving game state, when the special symbol is stopped and there is no hold, the first start port 45 (the second start When a game ball wins in the opening 47), it is difficult to see the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished movement mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position). Alternatively, after making it invisible, the reserved image 702 in the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.
In addition, regardless of which image is displayed on the first display device 70, when the special symbol is stopped and there is no hold, the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) is displayed. When a ball wins, the reserved image 702 of a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished movement mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made difficult or invisible. From this, the pending image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

Further, for example, regarding the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode may be made visible. That is, in the case where the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning in the first starting port 45 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the specific unfinished display mode (unfinished After making the pending image 702 of the size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position difficult to see or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed) is made difficult or invisible. The pending image 702 (transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning in the first starting port 45 while the specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the predetermined unfinished display mode ( After making the pending image 702 of the unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position visible or easy to see, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode) is made visible or easy to see. , completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting opening 45 before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped and there is no pending. In this case, after making the pending image 702 of a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, The pending image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is based on winning in the first start opening 45 before the start of the special performance in the special time-saving game state and when the special symbols are stopped and there is no pending. is displayed, the pending image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible. From this, the pending image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, if the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on a winning while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, After making the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, The pending image 702 (completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on a winning while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, , make the pending image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easy to see, and then display the completed display mode (completed The pending image 702 (size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on a winning at the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when a specific image is displayed, After making the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, change it to the completed display mode (completed size). , completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, and completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, if the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the specific image is displayed, a predetermined unfinished After making the pending image 702 of the display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easy to see, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, The pending image 702 (completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning to the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no pending. When displayed, the pending image 702 of a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made difficult or invisible. , the pending image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. On the other hand, when the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no pending. To do this, the pending image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then the completed display mode is displayed. The pending image 702 (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible.

(Variable effect example 23)
FIG. 238 and FIG. 239 are diagrams showing example 23 of variation effects.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 and 239, another specific example of the variation production example (variation production example 23) will be described. Variable presentation example 23 is an example in which a variable presentation based on winning in the first starting opening 45 is performed as the first variable presentation in the special time saving gaming state. In the following description, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned variation presentation examples and modifications will be mainly explained, and descriptions of points that are the same as each variation presentation example and each modification may be omitted.

First, in the normal game state, the final variable performance of the predetermined number of times necessary to enter the special time-saving game state is completed, and the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving game state. In addition, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball hitting either the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 after the final round of variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 238 (1), An adjustment image 716 and a menu image 717 are displayed. Furthermore, a background corresponding to the second stage is shown as a stage image 706. Furthermore, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all have a fifth aspect. Also, at this time, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM corresponding to the previous fluctuating performance at a volume lower than that during execution of the fluctuating performance.

Next, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. Then, the mode switches to the second mode.
Next, as shown in FIG. 238(3), the audio output device 9 starts outputting a sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 238(4), the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are hidden. Also, at this time, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 start to fluctuate. At this time, the movement at the start of variation of the decorative pattern 700 is started, and the small pattern 704 is displayed in a variable manner at high speed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45. Further, at this time, the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode without performing the staged display effect. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 has been controlled to the special time-saving gaming state continues to be output from the audio output device 9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 238(5), the variation of the decorative pattern 700 becomes faster. In addition, by moving the pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P and enlarging it, the variable image 701 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 switches to "0". Also, at this time, "0", which is a countdown image 732, is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound effect indicating that the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state is no longer output from the audio output device 9.

Next, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, "1" is displayed on the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45, as shown in FIG. 238(6). Also, at this time, a staged display effect is started, and the pending image 702 is displayed in an unfinished display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Also, at this time, output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 to notify the winning to the first starting port 45 is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 239(7), the staged display performance is completed, and the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed in the completed display mode on the first pending pedestal 702P. Further, although not shown, when the staged display effect is completed, the motion effect of the pending image 702 is started. Further, the winning sound for notifying the winning at the first starting port 45 is continuously outputted until the staged display performance is completed, and is no longer output when the staged display performance is completed.

Next, after displaying the second transition image 734 (see FIG. 197(16)), the background corresponding to the sixth stage is displayed as the stage image 706, as shown in FIG. 239(8). Further, the decorative pattern 700 and the small pattern 704 "125" are fixed and stopped.
After this, each time a variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state, the remaining number of special symbol drawings in the special time-saving game state decreases, and the value shown in the special time-saving remaining number of times image 738 is subtracted by 1. .

Then, when the final variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state is finished, the gaming machine 1 is controlled again to the normal gaming state, and after displaying the first transition image 728 (see FIG. 190 (22)), the stage image 706 is displayed. A background corresponding to the first stage is displayed. Also, at this time, a pending image 702 is displayed. This pending image 702 is the pending image 702 that was displayed when the background corresponding to the second stage was shown as the stage image 706 (see FIG. 239 (7)).

Note that the variable effects described in each of the variable effect examples and modifications are not limited to the variable effects based on the number of reservations shown.
The variable effects explained in each variable effect example and modification example may be variable effects based on the number of reservations being 0, or may be variable effects based on the number of reservations being 1. , it may be a fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations being 2, a fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations being 3, or a fluctuating performance based on the number of reservations being 4. It's okay.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as a variable effect based on winning when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time saving gaming state, a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
As a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the special time-saving game state, a modification of the variable effect example 11 (see FIGS. 207 to 209) ), a variable performance in which the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot may be executed.

In addition, in the variation performance example 20, a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the SPSP reach performance is executed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As shown in variable presentation example 20, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal gaming state, the variable presentation based on winning at the first start opening 45 is the “reach” shown in variable presentation example 1 and variable presentation example 2. A "variable performance in which no performance is performed" may be performed, or a "variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot" shown in variable performance example 5 may be performed. Also, any of the variable effects described in the first to sixth embodiments may be executed as a variable effect based on winning at the first starting port 45 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal gaming state. It's okay.

In addition, in the variable performance example 20, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal gaming state, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode is displayed to the player. It has been explained that the pending image 702 in the completed display mode becomes easily visible to the player.
Here, if the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes difficult or invisible to the player, the game ball is placed in the first starting port 45 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed in the normal gaming state. It is not limited to the case where the person wins a prize. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 169(1) and 169(2)), However, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be difficult or invisible to the player, and the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be easily visible to the player. In this case, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed in the normal gaming state, the "reach effect" shown in variable effect example 1 and variable effect example 2 may be used as a variable effect based on winning in the first start opening 45. "Fluctuating performance in which the reach effect is executed" may be executed, or "variable effect in which the reach effect is executed" shown in variable effect example 3 and variable effect example 4 may be executed, or as shown in variable effect example 5. A "variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot" may be executed. In addition, any of the variable effects described in the first to sixth embodiments can be used as a variable effect based on winning in the first starting port 45 when the adjustment image 716 menu image 717 is displayed in the normal gaming state. May be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that when a game ball wins in the second starting port 47, a winning sound notifying the winning is outputted, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When a game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the winning sound is output, but when a game ball wins in the second starting port 47, the winning sound may not be output.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been described that a specific image becomes difficult to view or cannot be viewed. Specific images include a decorative pattern 700, a fluctuation image 701, a pending image 702, a pending number display 703, a small pattern 704, an execution number image 705, a stage image 706, a remaining number of times reached image 708, and the like. Here, a state in which a specific image is difficult to see or is not visible means that although the specific image is displayed, the specific image is not visible due to other images displayed on a layer in front of the specific image. There may be a situation in which a particular image is difficult to view or cannot be viewed because the image is obstructed. Other images include, for example, customer waiting image 710, first emphasized image 711, SP reach image 712, SPSP reach image 713, first eye-catching image 715, second emphasized image 718, first transition image 728, second Examples include an eye-catching image 731, a second transition image 734, and a returning image 742. Further, the state in which a specific image is not visible may be a state in which the specific image is not visible because the specific image is not displayed in the first place.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the pending image 702 in an unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) may be difficult to view or cannot be viewed. explained. Here, if the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes difficult to view or invisible, the staged display effect is not executed, and the pending image 702 is displayed in the completed display mode from the start of displaying the pending image 702. In some cases, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes difficult or impossible to view due to the unfinished display mode. In addition, when the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes difficult to see or becomes invisible, a staged display effect is executed and the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode is displayed, while the pending image 702 is in front of the There is a case where the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes difficult or impossible to view because the pending image 702 is obstructed by other images displayed in the layer. Furthermore, when the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode is difficult or invisible because another image is displayed in a layer in front of the pending image 702, even if the staged display effect is executed. Alternatively, the staged display effect may not be executed. In this way, in order to make the pending image 702 of an unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult to view or invisible, This includes both that the pending image 702 in the display mode is not displayed, and that the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode is displayed but is difficult or impossible to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode becomes difficult to view or invisible, the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished action) at any stage of the staged display effect Although it has been described that the pending image 702 of the aspect, unfinished transparency, and unfinished display position also becomes difficult or invisible, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, if the pending image 702 of the unfinished display mode is difficult to view or invisible, the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency) in the first stage of the staged display effect is After making the pending image 702 difficult to see or invisible (unfinished display position), the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency) in the second stage of the staged display effect is The pending image 702 at the unfinished display position) may be made visible or easily visible. That is, if the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode is to be made difficult or invisible, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode in at least one stage of the staged display effect may be made difficult or invisible.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and is in the first stage, a specific unfinished display mode ( It has been explained that the pending image 702 (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) may be made difficult or invisible to the player. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state and is in the second stage, a predetermined incomplete display mode is selected. It has been explained that the pending image 702 may be made visible or easily visible to the player. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 in the special time saving game state before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped in the first stage and there is no hold. To do this, make the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, and then change it to the completed display mode. It has been explained that the pending image 702 (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 in the special time-saving game state before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped in the second stage and there is no hold. To do this, the pending image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then the completed display mode is displayed. It has been explained that the pending image 702 (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, the specific unfinished After making the pending image 702 of the display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, It has been explained that the pending image 702 (completion operation mode, completion transparency, completion display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while the special symbol is stopped and a special image corresponding to the second stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, a predetermined unfinished After making the pending image 702 of the display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easy to see, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, It has been explained that the pending image 702 (completion operation mode, completion transparency, completion display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while a specific image is displayed in the first stage, a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form) , unfinished motion mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made difficult or invisible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed motion mode, completed transparency, completed display) is made difficult or invisible. It has been explained that the held image 702 at the location) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 while a specific image is being displayed in the second stage, a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form) , unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible, and then the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display) is made visible or easily visible. It has been explained that the held image 702 at the location) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 when the special symbols are stopped and there is no hold in the first stage, a specific unfinished display mode ( After making the pending image 702 of unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position difficult to see or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode) is , completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, regardless of the gaming state, if a game ball enters the first start opening 45 when the special symbols are stopped and there is no hold in the second stage, a predetermined incomplete display mode ( After making the pending image 702 of the unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position visible or easy to see, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode) is displayed. , completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, when the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning in the first starting port 45 when a specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the specific unfinished display mode (unfinished After making the pending image 702 of the size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position difficult to see or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed) is made difficult or invisible. It has been explained that the pending image 702 (transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, if the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning in the first starting port 45 while a specific image is being displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished display mode) is displayed. After making the pending image 702 of completed size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position visible or easy to see, the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, It has been explained that the pending image 702 (completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning in the first start opening 45 before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped and there is no pending. In this case, after making the pending image 702 of a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, It has been explained that the pending image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, in the special time-saving game state, the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning to the first start opening 45 before the start of the special performance and when the special symbols are stopped and there is no pending. When displayed, the pending image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made visible or easily visible. , it has been explained that the pending image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, if the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on a winning while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, After making the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, the completed display mode (completed size, It has been explained that the pending image 702 (completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, when the reserved image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on a winning while the special symbol is stopped and the special image corresponding to the first stage is displayed after the start of the specific notification, After making the pending image 702 in a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easy to see, the completed display mode (completed size) is made visible or easily visible. , completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, and completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when a specific image is displayed, After making the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult or invisible, change it to the completed display mode (completed size). , completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, and completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, when the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning at the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the specific image is displayed, a predetermined incomplete display is displayed. After making the pending image 702 of the aspect (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation aspect, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easy to see, the completed display aspect (completed size, completed form, completed It has been explained that the pending image 702 (operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, regardless of the gaming state, the pending image 702 in the normal display mode is displayed based on the winning in the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no pending. When displayed, the pending image 702 of a specific unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made difficult or invisible. , it has been explained that the pending image 702 of the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in a specific unfinished display mode that is difficult or invisible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.
In addition, when the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed based on winning in the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no pending. makes the pending image 702 of a predetermined unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) visible or easy to see, and then changes it to the completed display mode ( It has been explained that the pending image 702 (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position) may be made visible or easily visible. In this case, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode that is visible or easily visible to the player may be the pending image 702 in any stage display mode in the stage performance.

In addition, in the case where the pending image 702 of the unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) is made difficult or invisible, multiple stages in the staged display effect can be made. The pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode at one of the stages may be made difficult or invisible, while the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode at another stage may be made visible or easily visible. For example, when making the pending image 702 in an unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position) difficult to view or invisible, the staged display While the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode in the first stage of presentation is made difficult or invisible, the pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode in the second and third stages is made visible or easy to see. It's okay.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that in the staged display effect, there are multiple stages of the pending image 702 which is an unfinished display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The display mode of the pending image 702 in the staged display effect is at least the stage of the pending image 702 which is an unfinished display mode (unfinished size, unfinished form, unfinished operation mode, unfinished transparency, unfinished display position). , the stage of the pending image 702 which is the completed display mode (completed size, completed form, completed operation mode, completed transparency, completed display position).

Further, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the winning sound is continuously output until the staged display performance is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The winning sound may be stopped from being output before the staged display effect is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is a jackpot, when the decorative symbol 700 of the number zero temporarily stops or the decorative symbol 700 of the number zero comes to a fixed stop. At this time, the variable image 701 and the pending image 702 are displayed (see FIGS. 213(8) and 213(9)), but the present invention is not limited thereto.
When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is a jackpot, when the decorative symbol 700 of the number zero temporarily stops or when the decorative symbol 700 of the number zero is fixedly stopped, the variable image 701 The pending image 702 may be displayed without being displayed. In addition, when a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is a jackpot, when the decorative symbol 700 of the number zero temporarily stops or when the decorative symbol 700 of the number zero stops permanently, the situation is suspended. The fluctuation image 701 may be displayed without the image 702 being displayed. In addition, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the special time-saving gaming state is a jackpot, when the decorative symbol 700 of the number zero temporarily stops or when the decorative symbol 700 of the number zero stops permanently, the variation Neither image 701 nor pending image 702 may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the variable image 701 is displayed by moving the first pending image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P, but the variable image 701 may not be used. More specifically, if the variable effect ends while the first pending image 702 is being displayed, the first pending image 702 may become hidden when the next variable effect is started. In this case, the first pending image 702 may be hidden while moving, or may be hidden at the position displayed on the first pending pedestal 702P without moving. In addition, when winning a prize in a state where there is no reservation, the reservation image 702 in the completed display mode may be displayed on the first reservation pedestal 702P, and then the reservation image 702 may be hidden.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the stage corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage corresponding to the special time saving gaming state in a state where there is a reservation, the pending image 702 is displayed instead of the variable image 701 (Fig. 198(20)). In other words, although it has been described that the pending image 702 moves to the movable pedestal 701P after the stage is switched, the present invention is not limited to this.
The variable image 701 may be displayed when the stage corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage corresponding to the special time saving gaming state in a state where there is a hold. In other words, the movement of the pending image 702 to the movable pedestal 701P may be completed before the stage switching is completed. In addition, when the stage corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage corresponding to the special time saving gaming state in a state where there is a hold, it is after the movement of the held image 702 to the variable pedestal 701P is started and before the movement is completed. It's okay. In addition, in the case where the variable image 701 is not used, when the stage corresponding to the normal gaming state is switched to the stage corresponding to the special time-saving gaming state in a state where there is a pending state, the first pending image 702 is already non-existent. It may be displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends. Although it has been described that the pending image 702 is moved from , the present invention is not limited to this.
If a game ball enters the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the pending image 702 moves while the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is being executed. Good too. In this case, the movement of the pending image 702 may start after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 starts, and the movement of the pending image 702 may be completed after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 ends. Furthermore, movement of the pending image 702 may be started before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 starts. Furthermore, after that, the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 may be executed, and the movement of the pending image 702 may be completed after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is completed.

Furthermore, the chronological relationship between the timing at which the pending image 702 moves, the timing at which the pending image 702 changes to the display mode of the variable image 701, and the timing at which the decorative pattern 700 starts to change is not limited to the example described above. .
After the movement of all the displayed pending images 702 starts and until they reach the next pending pedestal 702P (variable pedestal 701P) (movement is completed), the first pending image 702 is moved. A change from the display mode to the display mode of the variable image 701 may be started and completed. Further, after all the displayed pending images 702 start moving, and after the display mode of the first pending image 702 starts to change to the display mode of the variable image 701, the variation of the decorative pattern 700 starts. May be started. Then, after the decorative pattern 700 starts to change, the movement of all the displayed pending images 702 and the change from the display mode of the first pending image 702 to the display mode of the variable image 701 may be completed. .

In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and a variation performance in which an SP reach effect or a SPSP reach effect is performed, the next variation effect is a variation in which the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed. It may be a presentation (see FIGS. 180 (28) to 180 (30) and FIG. 181 (31)). If a game ball enters the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) while the second eye-catching image 731 is displayed, the pending image 702 is visually recognized as the second eye-catching image 731. The pending image 702 in the unfinished display mode may become difficult to view or invisible due to the obstruction. Furthermore, after the second eye-catching image 731 is hidden, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may become easily visible.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that even if a player wins while the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the winning sound is not output (see FIG. 167 (11)). Here, in the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, when the stage image 706 is displayed again after this SPSP reach performance (see FIG. 168 (16)), the first starting port 45 (the second starting port 47 ), when a game ball wins a prize, a staged display effect may be executed and a winning sound may be output.

In addition, if a game ball wins at the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) when the stored number of reservations is the upper limit number (four), the winning occurs at any of the above points. Even if the winning sound is not output, the staged display effect is not executed, and the pending image 702 is not newly displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the customer waiting image 710 is displayed even in the special time saving gaming state. Here, in the special time saving game state, before the start of the first variable performance, the customer waiting image 710 is displayed when the special symbols are stopped and there is no hold and no winning occurs for a predetermined time. After the first variable performance starts, the customer waiting image 710 may not be displayed even if there is no hold and no winning occurs for a predetermined period of time. That is, in the special time saving game state, whether or not the customer waiting image 710 is displayed may be switched between before the start of the first variable performance and after the start of the first variable performance. . However, even after the start of the first variable performance in the special time-saving gaming state, the game ball enters the second starting port 47 (first starting port 45) when the special symbol is stopped and there is no hold. In this case, the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode may be made difficult or invisible, and the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be made easily visible. In addition, in the special time-saving game state, even after the first variable performance has started, if the special symbol is stopped and there is no hold and no winning occurs for a predetermined time, the adjustment image 716 and the menu Image 717 may be displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the modes of the top lamp 10b, panel lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, button lamp 17c, and sound output mode are switched. Although described above, the invention is not limited thereto.
When the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are changed, but the mode of sound output does not need to be changed. Then, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the mode of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c, and the mode of sound output may be switched.
Further, when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the mode of sound output is changed, but the mode of the top lamp 10b, panel lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c does not need to be changed. . Then, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may be switched. Further, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the sound output mode may or may not be switched.
Further, when the adjustment image 716 or the menu image 717 is displayed, the modes of the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, the button lamp 17c, and the mode of sound output do not need to be changed. Then, when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the modes of the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, and the mode of sound output may be switched.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then restored while there is a hold, the next variable performance of the variable performance that was being executed when the power was cut off is started. Although it has been described that the next variable performance is started after the preview sound is output, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the power to the gaming machine 1 is shut off and then restored while the power is on hold, no sound is output until the next fluctuating performance of the fluctuating performance that was being executed when the power was cut off is started. You can do it like this. Then, when a variable effect next to the variable effect that was being executed when the power was cut off is started, output of BGM corresponding to the variable effect may be started.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the movement at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 700 has been described as the downward movement of the decorative pattern 700 at a low speed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The movement at the start of the movement may be, for example, a movement of the decorative pattern 700 upward at a low speed. In this case, when the movement at the start of the movement ends, the decorative pattern 700 may be caused to move downward at high speed.
Furthermore, the movement at the start of variation may be a specific movement by a character shown in the decorative pattern 700, for example. Specific motions include, for example, a motion in which the character raises a hand, a motion in which the character's facial expression changes, a motion in which the character's hair or clothing worn by the character moves, and the like. Further, when a specific action is performed, the decorative pattern 700 may move upward or downward at low speed, or may remain at a fixed and stopped position.

In addition, in this embodiment, in both cases where a prize is won while the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, and when a prize is won when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the top lamp 10b, Although the sound output mode is switched before switching the mode of the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c, the present invention is not limited thereto.
For example, if you win a prize while the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output will be The mode may be switched. In addition, if you win while the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output will be The mode may be switched. That is, if you win a prize while the adjustment image 716 and menu image 717 are displayed, the sound output will be You may switch the mode. Then, after the modes of the top lamp 10b, panel lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, button lamp 17c, and sound output mode are all switched, the operation at the start of fluctuation and the display of the pending image 702 are started. It's okay.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there is no hold when the special symbol stops changing, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c are all changed from the second aspect to the first aspect. (see FIG. 195(3)), but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if there is no hold when the special symbol stops changing, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c may continue to be in the second mode.

Further, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed during execution of the fluctuation effect, but when the second transition image 734 is displayed, the decorative pattern 700 that is changing at high speed is difficult to see or cannot be seen. become a state. That is, the decorative pattern 700, which is the display size when changing at high speed, becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen. In other words, the decorative pattern 700 becomes difficult or impossible to see when the transparency changes at high speed. In other words, the decorative pattern 700 in the form at the time of high-speed fluctuation is difficult to see or cannot be seen. In other words, the decorative pattern 700 at the position during the high-speed fluctuation is difficult or impossible to see.

Further, in this embodiment, it has been explained that as the staged display effect progresses, the display mode of the pending image 702 approaches the completed display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.
In the staged display performance, a stage may be provided in which the pending image 702 is displayed in a display mode (display size, transparency, display position, form, etc.) that is further away from the completed display mode. For example, a step may be provided in which the pending image 702, which has a smaller display size than the completed display mode, is displayed in an even smaller display size. Further, a step may be provided in which the pending image 702, which has higher transparency than the completed display mode, is displayed with even higher transparency. Further, a step may be provided in which the pending image 702 displayed at a position away from the display position in the completed display mode is displayed at a position further away from the display position in the complete display mode.

Further, the number of stages provided in the staged display effect may vary depending on the display mode of the pending image 702, such as the pending image 702 displayed for each stage or the pending image 702 for each display color. In this case, in the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode, the blue reserved image 702, the red reserved image 702, and the rainbow colored reserved image 702, the later the order, the more stages may be provided in the staged display effect. That is, the higher the expectation level of the pending image 702, the more stages may be provided in the staged display effect.

Further, when the pending image 702 in the expected color display mode is displayed, the pending image 702 may be displayed in the same color as the completed display mode in the first stage of the staged display effect, or the pending image 702 may be displayed in the completed display mode. It may be displayed in a color different from the mode. For example, when the blue pending image 702 is displayed, the pending image 702 is displayed in a color different from blue in the first stage of the staged display effect, whereas the specific When the pending image 702 of a color (red, rainbow color, etc.) is displayed, the pending image 702 may be displayed in a specific color in the first stage of the staged display effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that one pending image 702 periodically displays two different motions in the motion performance (see FIG. 161 (5)). Here, the cycles of the two different operation displays may be the same cycle or different cycles. Furthermore, the cycles of the two different motion displays may be the same as the cycle of the motion display in the motion presentation using the pending image 702 in the normal display mode. Further, one of the two different motion displays has the same cycle as the motion display in the motion production using the pending image 702 in the normal display mode, and the other cycle has the same cycle as the motion display in the motion presentation using the pending image 702 in the normal display mode. It may be different from the cycle of motion display in the performance. Further, the cycles of the two different motion displays may be different from the cycle of the motion display in the motion performance using the pending image 702 in the normal display mode.
Further, the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode may periodically display two different actions.

Furthermore, the cycle of motion display in the motion performance may vary depending on the level of expectation. For example, the blue pending image 702 is displayed in a first cycle in a first operation mode, and is displayed in a second cycle in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. Then, a reserved image of a specific color (red, rainbow color, etc.) with higher expectations than blue is displayed in a third period in a third operation mode, and a fourth operation mode is displayed in a fourth operation mode different from the third operation mode. Display the operation in cycles. In this case, the third period may be shorter or longer than the first period. Further, the fourth period may be shorter or longer than the second period. Further, the first period and the third period may be the same period, and the second period and the fourth period may be the same period. Furthermore, the third period and the fourth period may be the same period or may be different periods. Note that the first to fourth operation modes are any of the above-mentioned operations (clockwise rotation, counterclockwise rotation, vertical movement, left/right movement, rocking, etc.) The operation may be different from the operation described above.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been described in which the sound output device 9 may not output sound when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. . Here, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, even if a sound is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume that cannot be heard by the player. good. That is, when the adjustment image 716 and the menu image 717 are displayed, or when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, it is sufficient that no sound is audibly output from the audio output device 9.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the top lamp 10b, the board lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all flash in the winning light emission effect. Here, in the winning light emission effect, the flashing cycle of the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c may become longer as time passes. For example, in the winning light emission effect, the top lamp 10b, board lamp 74b, movable member lamp 74c, and button lamp 17c blink in a first cycle, and then blink in a second cycle that is longer than the first cycle. It's okay. In this case, the color of the light emitted during blinking in the first cycle and the color of the light emitted in blinking in the second cycle may be the same color or may be different colors. In addition, both the first period and the second period are shorter than the period of blinking that suggests or notifies the occurrence of an error (blinking in the ninth aspect) and the period of blinking in the through effect (blinking in the eleventh aspect). Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first aspect, the second aspect, the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect, and the eighth aspect to the eleventh aspect are realized by the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c. Although it has been described that the light emission is of a single color, the present invention is not limited thereto. In these modes of light emission, the color of the light emitted may change as the performance progresses.
Further, in the first aspect, the second aspect, the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect, and the eighth aspect to the eleventh aspect, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c are all the same color. Although it has been explained that light is emitted by the following, the present invention is not limited to this. In the first aspect, the second aspect, the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect, and the eighth aspect to the eleventh aspect, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c all emit light in different colors. You may.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the seventh mode of light emission, it has been explained that the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c emit light in different colors. but not limited to. In the light emission of the seventh aspect, at least two or more light-emitting bodies (for example, the top lamp 10b and the panel lamp 74b, etc.) among the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c emit light in the same color. However, other light emitters may emit light in different colors. Moreover, in the light emission of the seventh aspect, the top lamp 10b, the panel lamp 74b, the movable member lamp 74c, and the button lamp 17c may all emit light in the same color.

Further, in this embodiment, it has been explained that the pending number display 703 is hidden during the execution of the jackpot game (see FIG. 172 (20)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
The pending number display 703 may be displayed even while the jackpot game is being executed. In this case, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) during the execution of the jackpot game, the pending number display 703 of the first starting port 45 (second starting port 47) An increase may be displayed. Then, the pending image 702 corresponding to this winning is not displayed in the incomplete display mode, but is displayed in the completed display mode when the stage image 706 corresponding to the normal gaming state (time-saving gaming state) is displayed. It's okay.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, depending on the stage, the displayed image, whether or not there is a hold, the state of the gaming machine 1, etc., when the hold image 702 is displayed, the hold image 702 in an unfinished display mode may become visible. Although it has been described that the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is easily visible without any change, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the normal time-saving gaming state, regardless of the stage, the displayed image, whether or not there is a hold, the state of the gaming machine 1, etc., if a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the unfinished display mode is displayed. After the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is made easy to see, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be made easy to see.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that a specific sound effect is output when the left and right decorative patterns 700 "7" are aligned (see FIG. 184 (12)).
Here, a sound effect may be output when numbers different from "7" are aligned as the left and right decorative patterns 700. Furthermore, this sound effect may be a different sound from a specific sound effect that is output when "7", which is the left and right decorative patterns 700, are aligned.
Further, the sound effect when a reach is achieved may be different depending on the normal gaming state, the normal time saving gaming state, and the special time saving gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first transition image 728 is displayed, the gaming machine 1 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state, but the invention is not limited to this.
When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, the normal time-saving gaming state may continue when the first transition image 728 is displayed (see FIG. 177 (12)). Then, when the special symbols stop fluctuating in a state where there is no hold on the second starting port 47, the normal gaming state may be controlled. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state when the first transition image 728 is displayed (before the hold on the second starting port 47 disappears). may be done. However, even when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special time-saving gaming state, when the first transition image 728 is displayed (second When there is a reservation regarding the starting port 47), the special time saving game state may continue.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the customer waiting image 710 is hidden after the transparency becomes higher in stages, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The customer waiting image 710 may be switched from a displayed state to a non-displayed state without changing the transparency stepwise. In this case, when the customer waiting image 710 is hidden, the pending image 702 is not displayed, and the display of the pending image 702 may be started after the customer waiting image 710 is hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the action effect starts when the staged display effect is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The motion performance may be started even before the step display performance is completed. In this case, the motion effect may be started during the staged display effect, that is, while the pending image 702 is being displayed in an unfinished display mode.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 in conjunction with winning. Here, in the first stage, the second stage, and the fifth stage, the winning sound to notify that the game ball has won in the first starting port 45 may be different sounds, or may be the same sound. It may be.
Further, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won in the second starting port 47 may be different sounds or may be the same sound in the third stage and the fourth stage.
Moreover, the winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won in the second starting port 47 may be different sounds or may be the same sound in the sixth stage and the seventh stage.
Furthermore, the winning sound that informs that the game ball has won in the second starting port 47 may be different sounds or may be the same sound in the normal time saving gaming state and the special time saving gaming state. .
Further, the winning sound for notifying that a game ball has won in the second starting port 47 in the first stage, the sixth stage, and the seventh stage may be different sounds, or may be the same sound. Good too.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that when a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning sound is output and the display of the pending image 702 is started. but not limited to.
For example, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the display of the pending image 702 may be started after the output of the winning sound from the audio output device 9 is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the specific image is displayed in the special time-saving gaming state, the sound outputted based on the winning of the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 is the special time-saving gaming state. Although it has been explained that the sound effect is the sound effect of being controlled to a gaming state, the present invention is not limited to this. The sound outputted based on winning to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 when the specific image is displayed in the special time saving game state may be a winning sound for notifying the winning. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, the sound output based on winning at the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 when the specific image is displayed is BGM according to the variable performance, The sound may be output without reducing the volume.

Further, in this embodiment, it has been explained that when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the small pattern 704 is difficult or invisible to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this.
By displaying the small pattern 704 on a layer in front of the customer waiting image 710, even when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the small pattern 704 is easily visible to the player. good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the display of the pending image 702 is started after the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started (see FIG. 196). 9), FIG. 221(5), and FIG. 228(5)), but the present invention is not limited thereto.
If a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is being displayed, the display of the pending image 702 may be started before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started. In addition, in the case where a prize is won while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, the pending image 702 in the completed display mode is displayed without performing the staged display effect. By displaying , the pending image 702 in the completed display mode may become visible or easily visible without the pending image 702 in the incomplete display mode becoming visible. In addition, when winning a prize while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed, the staged display effect is started and completed before the non-display effect of the customer waiting image 710 is started, so that the unfinished display mode is The pending image 702 in the completed display mode may be visible or easily visible without the pending image 702 becoming visible.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it has been explained that when the player operates the effect button 17 while the menu image 717 is displayed, a menu screen (not shown) is displayed on the first image display device 70. In addition, the menu screen is an image displayed on the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example of the production has been described in which a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. Here, each of the above production examples when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47 when the customer waiting image 710 is displayed is as follows. It may be an effect that is performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. That is, even if the player wins a prize while the menu screen is displayed instead of the customer waiting image 710, the same effect may be performed as if the player wins a prize while the customer waiting image 710 is displayed. In this case, the menu screen is also regarded as a specific image.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first fluctuating performance in the special time saving game state is executed, after the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, the special time saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736 etc., but is not limited to this.
When the first fluctuation performance in the special time saving game state is executed, before the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, that is, during the execution of the fluctuation start operation, the special time saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, and the mode start are displayed. An image 736 or the like may be displayed. Further, before the start of the fluctuation start operation, a special time saving start image 733, a second transition image 734, a mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed. Further, before the pending image 702 is displayed, a special time saving start image 733, a second transition image 734, a mode start image 736, etc. may be displayed. That is, in the first variable production in the special time saving game state, which is the first timing to start displaying the pending image 702, the special time saving start image 733, the second transition image 734, the mode start image 736, etc. It may be.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first fluctuating effect in the special time-saving game state is executed, the decorative pattern 700 changes at high speed, and then the decorative pattern 700 and the stage are displayed in a display mode according to the special time-saving game state. Although an image 706 and the like are displayed, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the first fluctuating effect in the special time-saving game state is executed, before the decorative pattern 700 fluctuates at high speed, that is, during the execution of the fluctuation start operation, the decorative pattern 700 is displayed in a display mode according to the special time-saving game state. , a stage image 706, etc. may be displayed. Further, before the start of the fluctuation start operation, decorative symbols 700, stage images 706, etc., having a display mode according to the special time saving game state may be displayed. Further, before the pending image 702 is displayed, a decorative pattern 700, a stage image 706, etc., which are configured in a display mode according to the special time-saving game state, may be displayed. That is, in the first variable production in the special time-saving game state, the display start timing of the reserved image 702 and the display start timing of the decorative symbols 700, stage images 706, etc., which are in the display mode according to the special time-saving game state, are both different. may come first.

Further, the combination of the stage and the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode is not limited to the above example.
The above-described stage and the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode may be any combination. For example, the display mode of the reserved image 702 in the normal display mode in the first stage may be a star-shaped display mode (see FIG. 165).

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, various variable performances in the special time saving game state have been explained. Here, the various fluctuating performances described in the seventh embodiment may be fluctuating performances in the third time-saving game state.

In addition, although multiple embodiments have been described above, the configuration included in one embodiment may be replaced with the configuration included in another embodiment, or the configuration included in one embodiment may be replaced with another embodiment. You may also add it.

1... Game machine, 9... Audio output device, 10b... Top lamp, 17c... Button lamp, 70... First image display device, 74b... Board lamp, 74c... Movable member lamp, 700... Decorative pattern, 701... Fluctuation image, 702...Pending image, 706...Stage image, 710...Customer waiting image, 716...Adjustment image, 717...Menu image, 733...Special time saving start image

Claims (1)

a first control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a second control means for controlling the production;
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
The first control means includes:
Obtains judgment information when the starting conditions are met,
It is possible to determine whether or not to play a special game according to the determination information,
The second control means
It is possible to control the production mode,
It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance in which the performance symbols are varied and then stopped according to the result of the determination,
The information display can be displayed in a predetermined display mode,
If the start condition is satisfied during execution of the variable effect, the display effect can be executed before displaying the information display in the predetermined display mode,
When the starting condition is satisfied, a specific sound production can be performed,
The information display includes a first information display and a second information display that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than the first information display,
The display effects include a first display effect that is executable when the first information display is displayed, and a second display effect that is executable when the second information display is displayed,
When displaying the first information display in response to the establishment of the starting condition in a specific performance mode in which the variable performance is not executed, it is possible to make the first display performance difficult to see or limit it,
The specific sound production includes a first specific sound production that is executable when displaying the first information display in response to the establishment of the starting condition, and a first specific sound production that is executable when displaying the first information display in response to the establishment of the starting condition. There is a second specific sound production that can be executed when displaying,
When displaying the second information display in response to establishment of the starting condition during execution of the variable production, the second specific sound production can be started before the start of the second display production ,
A gaming machine in which the execution time of the second specific sound production is longer than the execution time of the first specific sound production .

Images